Pipe Line

Chambal – Bhilwara Water Supply Project Phase II Balance work of RWSS of 213 Villages of Jahazpur & Kotri Tehsils
Tehsils & Jahazpur Town
Project Brief Tender Document Volume- II
GOVERNMENT OF RAJASTHAN
PUBLIC HEALTH ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT (RAJASTHAN)
TENDER DOCUMENT
FOR
“Balance Work of Cluster Scheme of 213 Villages of Jahazpur and Kotri Tehsils
along with Augmentation of UWSS of Jahazpur Town from Khajoori Headworks
under CHAMBAL-BHILWARA WATER SUPPLY PROJECT PHASE – II with
operation and maintenance for 10 years on Single Point Responsibility Turnkey
basis.”
(NIT-3/2016-17)
Volume- II
(SCOPE OF WORK AND SPECIFICATIONS)
Additional Chief Engineer (Project)

Public Health Engineering Department,
Ajmer (Rajasthan)
Tel : 0145-2640265 (O),
Email : [email protected]
Page No. 1 (Signature of Tenderer with Seal)

Chambal – Bhilwara Water Supply Project Phase II Balance work of RWSS of 213 Villages of Jahazpur & Kotri Tehsils & Jahazpur Town
Balance Work of Cluster Scheme of 213 Villages of Jahazpur and Kotri

Tehsils along with Augmentation of UWSS of Jahazpur Town from
KhajooriHeadworks under CHAMBAL-BHILWARA WATER SUPPLY
PROJECT PHASE – II with operation and maintenance for 10 years on
Single Point Responsibility Turnkey basis.
INDEX
Volume – II
(Scope of Work & Technical Specifications)
S.No. Chapter Particulars Page No
1. 1 Project brief 3 – 21
2. 2 Scope of Work 22-91
3. 3 Specificationsfor Pipeline Work 92-175
4. 4 Specifications for Valves 176- 188
5. 5 Specifications for Civil Works 189-280
6. 6 Specifications for ESRs and CWRs 281-295
7. 7 Specifications for Pumping Stations (Mechanical & Civil 296-314
Works)
8. 8 Specificationsfor Electrical Works 315-343
9. 9 Specifications for Instrumentation 344-380
10. 10 Specifications for Ancillary Civil Works & Campus 381-388
Development
11. 11 Pre-dispatch inspections 389-394
12. 12 Testing, commissioning & Trial run 395-409
13. 13 Specificationsfor O&M 410-417

1.0 PROJECT BRIEF

1.1 BACKGROUND
Bhilwara district has been facing acute shortage of drinking water since last 10
years. Poor rainfall and over-extraction of groundwater have rendered all the 11
ground water blocks over-exploited. Various ground water sources developed in
last few years have not proved sustainable. Poor ground water quality made the
drinking water situation worse in the district. There is no dependable surface water
source in Bhilwara. The only surface source for drinking water supply of Bhilwara
town, Meja Dam, has not received sufficient water since last many years. Thus
with no dependable local surface source and nearly exhausted ground water
sources coupled with poor quality, the district is very much in need of a major
drinking water supply project fed from a reliable source, on the highest priority.
The drinking water supply situation in urban & rural areas of Bhilwara District is
very grim with per capita availability of drinking water from 37 to 70 LPCD and
water supply interval from 2 to 5 days in urban areas and 600 villages out of 1688
villages having water quality problem. Water is regularly being transported to
Bhilwara City and large number of villages to supply drinking water for meeting
bare minimum needs. This has resulted in the vulnerable economy and constrained
growth of the district. The factors causing drinking water problem in Bhilwara
District are three-fold:- Non availability of dependable surface water source or a
perennial river, over-exploitation of ground water sources rendering all the 11
ground water blocks in over exploited category and historical underinvestment in
drinking water infrastructure. The district’s economy is severely affected by the
high variability of the climate with frequent droughts which impacts the
availability of water and drinking water supply services. Work of Cluster Scheme of
213 Villages of Jahazpur and Kotri Tehsils along with Augmentation of UWSS of Jahazpur
Town From Khajoori Headworks under CHAMBAL-BHILWARA WATER SUPPLY
PROJECT PHASE – II with operation and maintenance for 10 years on Single Point
Responsibility Turnkey basis, was originally awarded to M/s Pratibha Industries
Ltd, Mumbai vide letter no. F ( )/Ar. Bhl (Phase-II)/2013-14/1605-1613 dated
23.09.2013 of Additional Chief Engineer, PHED, Project Region, Ajmer. The
stipulated date of commencement & completion of work was 03.10.2013 &
02.10.2016. The contractor started the work after getting necessary approvals from
the department but failed to maintain prorate progress as per contract agreement.
The existing contract has been rescinded and it is now proposed to get the balance
work of original agreement completed through the proposed new contract. Brief
detail of awarded work order to M/s Pratibha Industries Ltd, Mumbai and the
work completed is enclosed as Annexure-B, of volume I.
1.2 PROJECT OBJECTIVE
The primary objective of the project is to provide safe & potable drinking water to
all 9 towns and 1688 villages of Bhilwara district. The Chambal – Bhilwara Water
Supply Project is contemplated and planned in two phases. The Phase I of Chambal

– Bhilwara Water Supply Project is framed to create infrastructure of the project

for the water demand up to year 2030 for nine towns of Bhilwara district namely
Bhilwara, Gulabpura, Gangapur, Mandal, Mandalgarh, Asind, Jahazpur, Shahpura
and Beejoliya along with 1688 villages of Bhilwara district and 23 en-route
villages of Bundi district.
In the Phase II of the project, the works of branches from transmission
system for improvement and coverage of 8 other towns along with augmentation of
their water supply system, distribution system for clusters for coverage of 1688
villages of Bhilwara district along with intra-village distribution and construction
of village level reservoirs shall be taken.
The objectives of the project are as follows:
• Creation of sustainable infrastructure for drinking water supply in project
area.
• Improvement in health and reduction in instances of water borne diseases.
• Improvement of quality of life and the standard of living among the
residents especially for women & underprivileged section of society.
• Improved sanitation facilities in the project area.
• Setting up of appropriate institutional mechanism for sustainable operation
and maintenance of the facilities for ensuring desired level of service
delivery, in line with state water policy and state wide, sector wide reform
agenda.
1.3 BRIEF PARTICULARS OF THIS PACKAGE
This Package is for the Cluster Scheme of 188 Villages of Jahazpur Tehsil and 25
Villages of Kotri Tehsil along with Augmentation of UWSS of Jahazpur Town under
Phase II of Chambal – Bhilwara Water Supply Project. The scope of this package
includes all works required for delivering Chambal water, through PSPs and CWTs
to 188 villages of Jahazpur Tehsil and 25 Villages of Kotri Tehsil (as per 2001
census) along with augmentation of UWSS of Jahazpur Town of Bhilwara District,
from Khajoori headworks. The work under this package broadly includes works of
Transfer Mains, Cluster Pumping Mains, Transfer and Cluster pumping stations,
Electromechanical, Instrumentation and SCADA activities at each Pumping
Station, Cluster distribution system, CWRs, ESRs, Village Distribution System,
PSPs, CWTs, IEC activities and Operation and Maintenance for 10 years after
defect liability period of one year to deliver designed quantity of water of Chambal
river to 188 villages of Jahazpur Tehsil and 25 Villages of Kotri Tehsil (as per
2001 census) along with augmentation of UWSS of Jahazpur Town of Bhilwara
District. Clusters of villages have been formed looking to topography of area and
feasibility to provide water from elevated service reservoirs. One ESR has been
proposed for one cluster. All the villages of Jahazpur Tehsil and Kotri Tehsils have
been proposed to be divided in 39 clusters benefitting total 213 villages.
Earlier The work of “Work of Cluster Scheme of 213 villages of Jahazpur and
Kotri Tehsils along with Augmentation of UWSS of Jahazpur Town from
Khajoori Headworks under Chambal Bhilwara Water Supply Project Phase-
II with O&M for 10 years on SPR turnkey basis” was originally awarded to M/s
Pratibha Industries Ltd, Mumbai vide letter no. F ( )/Ar. Bhl (Phase-II)/2013-
14/1605-1613 dated 23.09.2013 of Additional Chief Engineer, PHED, Project
Region, Ajmer. The stipulated date of commencement & completion of work was
03.10.2013 & 02.10.2016. The contractor started the work after getting necessary
approvals from the department but failed to maintain prorate progress as per
contract agreement. Brief detail of awarded work order to M/s Pratibha
Industries Ltd, Mumbai and the work completed is enclosed as Annexure-B of
volume I.
M/s Pratibha Industries Ltd, Mumbai, has since, left the work incomplete after
execution of approximately 13.37% of work only. The existing contract has been
rescinded and it is now proposed to get the balance work of original agreement
completed through the proposed new contract. The scope of work, specifications
& conditions of contract for the proposed new contract shall remain the same as
that was with M/s Pratibha Industries Ltd, Mumbai. The new contractor, under
this contract, shall own the responsibility for the entire work already done, materials
supplied by M/s Pratibha Industries Ltd, Mumbai.
The bidder is required to study the work already done by M/s Pratibha Industries
Ltd, Mumbai, designs & drawings already approved & account for the remedial
measures for any defects errors or omissions, if observed. The new contractor shall
be responsible for any defects, if noticed at any time, in the previous work & shall
account for the same while submitting the bids. No extra payment shall be made
for any rectification (including cost of material/equipments required for
rectification) required in the work already done. All the works done by previous
Contractor are to be dovetailed with the new work. The bidder may use the
already approved designs, drawings & other approvals given to M/s Pratibha
Industries Ltd, Mumbai in consultation with EiC, or may submit new drawings &
designs for approval incorporating the executed works as is where is basis. The
bidder shall own the responsibility for its correctness & sufficiency as if it were
submitted by the bidder.
The whole of the balance work including mobilization, reconnaissance, design,
manufacturing, transportation, construction, installation, testing, commissioning &
trial run & demobilization, has to be completed within a period of 31 months,
calculated from the commencement date, which is 10 days after the written order
to commence the work.
Annexure-B Vol-I narrating works already done will be part of the Tender
Document.
1.3.1 Population And Water Demand

1.3.1.1. Jahazpur Tehsil
Name of Village Population Population Population Population Population Water Water
2001 2011 2015 2030 2045 Demand Demand 2045
SN Code No 2030(KLD) (KLD)
1 02915300 Abhaipur 269 322 346 453 593 24.92 32.62


2001 2011 2015 2030 2045 Demand Demand 2045
2 02925900 Adimalji Ka Khera 477 571 614 804 1053 44.22 57.92
3 02904200 Akhepura 196 235 252 330 432 18.15 23.76
4 02910900 Akhepura 649 777 835 1093 1431 60.12 78.71
5 02924600 Akheramji Ka Khera 175 209 225 295 386 16.23 21.23
6 02915700 Amalda 1606 1922 2066 2705 3542 148.78 194.81
7 02922000 Amargarh 2103 2517 2705 3543 4640 194.87 255.20
8 02906600 Amarwasi 2426 2904 3120 4087 5352 224.79 294.36
9 02905600 Ambedkar Colony 509 609 655 857 1122 47.14 61.71
10 02906700 Asan 182 218 234 307 402 16.89 22.11
11 02909400 Badanpura 953 1141 1226 1605 2102 88.28 115.61
12 02923600 Bag Ki Jhoonpariya 440 527 566 741 970 40.76 53.35
13 02912300 Bagoodar 1721 2060 2214 2899 3797 159.45 208.84
14 02916000 Bagwasa 504 603 648 849 1112 46.70 61.16
15 02915500 Bahadarpura 626 749 805 1055 1382 58.03 76.01
16 02919100 Balapura 247 296 318 416 545 22.88 29.98
17 02923500 Bankra 1000 1197 1286 1685 2207 92.68 121.39
18 02910400 Baori 1574 1884 2025 2651 3472 145.81 190.96
19 02906500 Baradpura 699 837 899 1177 1541 64.74 84.76
20 02905200 Barla Poliya 1040 1245 1338 1752 2294 96.36 126.17
21 02917800 Baroda 884 1058 1137 1489 1950 81.90 107.25
22 02913300 Beeramata 526 630 677 886 1160 48.73 63.80
23 02922300 Bekli 567 679 729 955 1251 52.53 68.81
24 02910800 Beri 1098 1314 1412 1850 2423 101.75 133.27
25 02921600 Bhagunagar 1114 1333 1433 1877 2458 103.24 135.19
26 02911400 Bhagwanpura 329 394 423 554 726 30.47 39.93
27 02915200 Bhainroon Khera 650 778 836 1095 1434 60.23 78.87
28 02907800 Bhan Ka Gurha 887 1062 1141 1494 1957 82.17 107.64
29 02912400 Bharni Kalan 1916 2293 2464 3228 4227 177.54 232.49
30 02915000 Bharni Khurd 221 265 284 372 487 20.46 26.79
31 02913000 Bhawanipura 941 1126 1210 1585 2076 87.18 114.18
32 02910100 Bheelri 748 895 962 1260 1650 69.30 90.75
33 02903400 Bheempura 323 387 415 544 712 29.92 39.16
34 02923200 Bheempura 121 145 156 204 267 11.22 14.69
35 02922600 Bhojgarh 2 2 3 3 4 0.17 0.22
36 02908100 Bhunwar 451 540 580 760 995 41.80 54.73
Bhuwana Teja Ka
37 02912800 Bara 390 467 502 657 860 36.14 47.30
38 02903700 Bihara 1685 2017 2167 2838 3717 156.09 204.44
39 02908000 Bijetha 928 1111 1194 1563 2047 85.97 112.59
40 02913400 Biletha 1497 1792 1926 2522 3303 138.71 181.67
41 02907500 Chandadand 522 625 671 879 1151 48.35 63.31
42 02912900 Chhabariya 704 843 906 1186 1553 65.23 85.42
43 02922800 Chhachhiya Badola 457 547 588 770 1008 42.35 55.44
Chhaga Ka
44 02908300 Jhoonpara 292 350 376 492 644 27.06 35.42
45 02916200 Chhatiya 261 312 336 440 576 24.20 31.68
46 02921500 Chhitarpura 269 322 346 453 593 24.92 32.62
47 02908500 Chhjelon Ka Khera 572 685 736 964 1262 53.02 69.41
48 02924900 Dalpura 469 561 603 790 1035 43.45 56.93
49 02919800 Danpura 306 366 394 515 674 28.33 37.07


2001 2011 2015 2030 2045 Demand Demand 2045
50 02914500 Deopura 462 553 594 778 1019 42.79 56.05
51 02912200 Deora 733 877 943 1235 1617 67.93 88.94
52 02910000 Dhagariya 496 594 638 836 1095 45.98 60.23
53 02908600 Dhandhola 1445 1730 1859 2434 3188 133.87 175.34
54 02905000 Dhunwala 1326 1587 1706 2234 2926 122.87 160.93
55 02925600 Ekalmeri 20 24 26 34 45 1.87 2.48
56 02916100 Fatehpur 965 1155 1241 1626 2129 89.43 117.10
57 02920600 Fatta Ka Khera 560 670 720 943 1235 51.87 67.93
58 02906900 Gadoli 2082 2492 2678 3507 4593 192.89 252.62
59 02925200 Galiya 409 490 526 689 902 37.90 49.61
60 02903500 Gandher 1372 1642 1765 2311 3027 127.11 166.49
61 02908800 Ganeshpura 206 247 265 347 454 19.09 24.97
Ganeshpura Ji Ka
62 02913100 Khera @ Viyasji 246 294 316 414 542 22.77 29.81
63 02904400 Gangithala 2121 2539 2728 3573 4679 196.52 257.35
64 02920300 Garh Bodiya 698 836 898 1176 1540 64.68 84.70
65 02916600 Godam Dag Ka Bara 480 575 617 809 1059 44.50 58.25
66 02924300 Godpuriya 134 160 172 226 296 12.43 16.28
67 02909900 Gokulpura 359 430 462 605 792 33.28 43.56
68 02916800 Gopipura 75 90 96 126 165 6.93 9.08
69 02907100 Goram Garh 651 779 837 1097 1437 60.34 79.04
70 02910200 Gulabpura 183 219 235 308 403 16.94 22.17
71 02916300 Gurha 408 488 525 687 900 37.79 49.50
72 02906300 Hampura 146 175 188 246 322 13.53 17.71
73 02921200 Hansera 597 715 768 1006 1317 55.33 72.44
74 02905700 Hanumannagar 1507 1804 1938 2539 3325 139.65 182.88
75 02906200 Haripura 337 403 433 568 744 31.24 40.92
76 02921000 Harsalon Ka Khera 816 977 1050 1375 1801 75.63 99.06
Harsalon Ki
77 02923300 Jhonpariya 217 260 279 366 479 20.13 26.35
78 02904100 Hatoriya 835 999 1074 1407 1843 77.39 101.37
79 02911200 Indokiya 860 1029 1106 1449 1898 79.70 104.39
80 02907600 Intunda 3110 3723 4000 5239 6861 288.15 377.36
81 02911900 Jagannath Pura 300 359 386 505 661 27.78 36.36
82 02921900 Jagmohanpura 297 356 382 500 655 27.50 36.03
83 02903600 Jagolai 515 616 662 868 1137 47.74 62.54
84 02909100 Jalampura 1382 1654 1778 2328 3049 128.04 167.70
85 02912600 Jamoli 2489 2979 3202 4193 5491 230.62 302.01
86 02909800 Jaswantpura 479 573 616 807 1057 44.39 58.14
87 02921800 Jawanpura 343 411 441 578 757 31.79 41.64
88 02903900 Jeera 619 741 796 1043 1366 57.37 75.13
89 02910500 Jhalra 586 701 754 987 1293 54.29 71.12
90 02914100 Jheekali 569 681 732 958 1255 52.69 69.03
91 02925700 Jora Ji Ka Khera 123 147 158 207 271 11.39 14.91
92 02922200 Joraji Ka Khera 218 261 280 367 481 20.19 26.46
93 02923900 Kabri 903 1081 1162 1521 1992 83.66 109.56
94 02904700 Kala Bhata 467 559 601 787 1031 43.29 56.71
95 02920500 Kanawaton Ka Khera 184 220 237 310 406 17.05 22.33
96 02911700 Kanjar Colony 1232 1475 1585 2075 2717 114.13 149.44
97 02922500 Kankariya Khera 222 266 286 374 490 20.57 26.95


2001 2011 2015 2030 2045 Demand Demand 2045
98 02923400 Kansya 612 733 787 1031 1350 56.71 74.25
99 02905900 Kesarpura 603 722 776 1016 1331 55.88 73.21
100 02915100 Kesharpura 462 553 594 778 1019 42.79 56.05
101 02904900 Kesho Bilas 189 226 243 318 416 17.49 22.88
102 02922700 Khajoori 2428 2906 3123 4090 5356 224.95 294.58
103 02907000 Khana Ka Khohala 201 241 259 339 444 18.65 24.42
104 02914000 Khaneriya 156 187 201 263 344 14.47 18.92
105 02918600 Khema Ka Khera 360 431 463 606 794 33.33 43.67
106 02925300 Kheroona 1111 1330 1429 1871 2450 102.91 134.75
107 02903800 Khjooriya Khera 286 342 368 482 631 26.51 34.71
108 02913500 Khohra Kalan 752 900 967 1267 1659 69.69 91.25
109 02907900 Khohran Khurd 365 437 469 615 805 33.83 44.28
110 02922900 Kishangarh 423 506 544 713 934 39.22 51.37
111 02905800 Kuchalwara Kalan 2078 2487 2673 3500 4584 192.50 252.12
112 02906100 Kuchalwara Khurd 925 1107 1190 1558 2040 85.69 112.20
113 02907200 Kuradiya 2224 2662 2861 3746 4906 206.03 269.83
114 02920800 Lariji Ka Khera 749 897 963 1262 1653 69.41 90.92
115 02908200 Luhari Kalan 3320 3974 4270 5593 7325 307.62 402.88
116 02907300 Luhari Khurd 1146 1372 1474 1930 2528 106.15 139.04
117 02908400 Lunda Ka Jhoonpara 412 493 530 694 909 38.17 50.00
118 02915400 Madhopur 147 176 189 248 325 13.64 17.88
119 02903300 Maganpura 790 946 1016 1331 1743 73.21 95.87
120 02912100 Mandachar 511 612 657 861 1128 47.36 62.04
121 02914900 Mandapiya 635 760 817 1070 1401 58.85 77.06
122 02907400 Manohargarh 790 946 1016 1331 1743 73.21 95.87
123 02920900 Manoharpura 616 737 792 1038 1359 57.09 74.75
124 02920700 Manpura 514 615 661 866 1134 47.63 62.37
125 02911500 Mataji Ka Khera 791 947 1017 1332 1744 73.26 95.92
126 02906400 Mayla Polya 1037 1241 1334 1747 2288 96.09 125.84
127 02913600 Mediyan 702 840 903 1183 1549 65.07 85.20
128 02922100 Meghpura 489 585 629 824 1079 45.32 59.35
129 02920000 Melwa 306 366 394 515 674 28.33 37.07
130 02926000 Mewasa 384 460 494 647 847 35.59 46.59
131 02924700 Mohanpura 227 272 292 382 500 21.01 27.50
132 02905300 Morlan 462 553 594 778 1019 42.79 56.05
133 02904600 Motipura 1408 1685 1811 2372 3106 130.46 170.83
134 02923700 Motipura 287 344 369 483 633 26.57 34.82
135 02905100 Munshipura 458 548 589 772 1011 42.46 55.61
136 02910600 Narana 597 715 768 1006 1317 55.33 72.44
137 02915600 Naya Nagar 312 373 401 526 689 28.93 37.90
138 02923800 Nrisinghgarh 127 152 163 214 280 11.77 15.40
139 02912500 Odiya Khera 535 640 688 901 1180 49.56 64.90
140 02914600 Pachanpura 685 820 881 1154 1511 63.47 83.11
141 02921100 Padampura 920 1101 1183 1550 2030 85.25 111.65
142 02909700 Pander 4688 5612 6030 7897 10342 434.34 568.81
143 02914400 Peeploond 3425 4100 4405 5769 7555 317.30 415.53
144 02911600 Phalasiya 700 838 900 1179 1544 64.85 84.92
145 02915900 Rajwas 582 697 749 980 1283 53.90 70.57
146 02904500 Ram Mohanpura 318 381 409 536 702 29.48 38.61


2001 2011 2015 2030 2045 Demand Demand 2045
147 02914700 Ramgarh 885 1059 1138 1491 1953 82.01 107.42
148 02906800 Ramnagar 520 622 669 876 1147 48.18 63.09
149 02916400 Rampur 350 419 450 590 773 32.45 42.52
150 02909600 Rampura 466 558 599 785 1028 43.18 56.54
151 02924500 Rampura 162 194 208 273 358 15.02 19.69
152 02920200 Ranawaton Ka Khera 109 130 140 184 241 10.12 13.26
153 02924800 Ratangarh 163 195 210 275 360 15.13 19.80
154 02921300 Ratanpura 974 1166 1253 1641 2149 90.26 118.20
155 02912700 Rawat Khera 1345 1610 1730 2266 2968 124.63 163.24
156 02916500 Rojri 802 960 1032 1351 1769 74.31 97.30
157 02911100 Rooppura 362 433 466 610 799 33.55 43.95
158 02924200 Rooppura 289 346 372 487 638 26.79 35.09
159 02911000 Ropan 5114 6121 6578 8615 11282 473.83 620.51
160 02909500 Rughnathpura 196 235 252 330 432 18.15 23.76
161 02909200 Rughnathpura Khurd 65 78 84 109 143 6.00 7.87
162 02916900 Sabalpura 587 703 755 989 1295 54.40 71.23
163 02921700 Sadapur 286 342 368 482 631 26.51 34.71
164 02913200 Sarsiya 4127 4940 5308 6952 9104 382.36 500.72
165 02912000 Sarsiya Charanan 1044 1250 1343 1759 2304 96.75 126.72
166 02920100 Sawaipura 333 399 428 561 735 30.86 40.43
167 02909300 Shakarpura 348 417 448 586 767 32.23 42.19
168 02910700 Sheopura 267 320 343 450 589 24.75 32.40
169 02925100 Sherpura 637 762 819 1073 1405 59.02 77.28
170 02913700 Shivgarh 262 314 337 441 578 24.26 31.79
171 02925500 Shobhaji Ka Khera 280 335 360 472 618 25.96 33.99
172 02916700 Shrinagar Chanwari 563 674 724 948 1242 52.14 68.31
173 02911300 Sihana 674 807 867 1135 1486 62.43 81.73
174 02914300 Subhas Nagar 478 572 615 805 1054 44.28 57.97
175 02924000 Sujanpura 577 691 742 972 1273 53.46 70.02
176 02919700 Sundargarh 442 529 569 745 976 40.98 53.68
177 02914800 Tarniya Khera 590 706 759 994 1302 54.67 71.61
178 02910300 Taswariya 1234 1477 1587 2079 2723 114.35 149.77
179 02906000 Teekar 3011 3604 3873 5072 6642 278.96 365.31
180 02925400 Teethoda (Jageer) 1119 1339 1439 1885 2469 103.68 135.80
181 02903200 Teetora Mafi 1276 1527 1641 2149 2814 118.20 154.77
182 02903100 Teetori 1537 1840 1977 2589 3391 142.40 186.51
183 02913800 Tola 789 944 1015 1329 1740 73.10 95.70
184 02907700 Uda Ka Khera 72 86 93 121 158 6.66 8.69
185 02904800 Udapuriya 66 79 85 111 145 6.11 7.98
186 02919900 Ulela 1712 2049 2202 2884 3777 158.62 207.74
187 02905500 Uncha 2922 3498 3758 4922 6446 270.71 354.53
188 02925000 Urna 748 895 962 1260 1650 69.30 90.75
TOTAL 151338 181151 194658 254939 333865 14021.645 18362.58
1.3.1.2. Kotri Tehsil
SN Code No Name of Village Population Population Population Population Water DemandWater Demand
2001 2011 2030 2045 2030(KLD) 2045 (KLD)

1 02896200 Jor 672 864 1132 1482 47.52 62.26

2 02896400 Bagal Ki Jhunpariya 377 485 635 832 26.68 34.93
Sangrampura @ Bor
3 02897600 Ka Khera 580 746 977 1279 41.03 53.74
4 02897700 Jawal 806 1037 1358 1778 57.04 74.69
5 02897800 Gogas 540 695 910 1192 38.23 50.05
6 02897900 Kishangarh 1638 2107 2759 3613 115.89 151.75
7 02898000 Dantra (Chhota) 517 665 871 1141 36.58 47.91
8 02898100 Gaphesara 342 440 576 754 24.20 31.68
9 02898600 Sabal Pura 157 202 264 346 11.11 14.52
10 02898700 Kanpura 336 432 566 741 23.76 31.13
11 02896100 Govindpura 1102 1417 1856 2431 77.94 102.08
12 02896300 Marda Ki Jhunpariya 546 702 920 1205 38.61 50.60
13 02896500 Nandrai 4950 6367 8338 10920 350.19 458.59
14 02887800 Bhagwanpura 396 509 667 874 28.00 36.69
15 02895600 Kakroliya Ghati 2212 2845 3726 4880 156.48 204.93
16 02895700 Hastina Pur 207 266 349 457 14.63 19.20
17 02895800 Hastra 506 651 852 1116 35.81 46.86
18 02895900 Panderi 287 369 483 633 20.30 26.57
Chodhariyas @
19 02896000 Gega Ka Khera 417 536 702 919 29.48 38.61
20 02896600 Goojar Khera 341 439 574 752 24.15 31.57
21 02896700 Gandheri 1248 1605 2102 2753 88.28 115.61
22 02896800 Bara Khera 229 295 386 506 16.23 21.23
23 02896900 Bhairoon Khera 573 737 965 1264 40.54 53.08
Berada Ki
24 02897000 Jhonpariya 309 397 521 682 21.84 28.66
25 02898300 Bor Khera 759 976 1279 1675 53.68 70.35
TOTAL 20047 25784 33768 44225 1857.29 2432.43
1.3.2 Design Criteria

• The transfer mains and rising mains have been designed with software
based on modified Hazen William formula. Metallic pipes have been
selected for use in all sizes of transfer mains and rising mains from one
pumping station to next pumping station as well as to cluster ESRs upto
designed demand of year 2045.
• The pumping machinery has been proposed for 15 years i.e 2030 demand.
• The construction of clear water reservoir has been proposed for capacity of
2 hours demand.
• The capacity of the ESRs has been adopted as half day demand.
• The cluster rising mains have been designed for 16 hrs. for rural areas and
for 20 hrs. for urban areas.
• Minimum pressure at each village transfer chamber has been kept as 12.00
meter at peak load to connect the other habitations later on through nearby
distribution lines.
• The main system will be laid upto the village entry point called the Village
transfer point. Provision has been taken to construct a double chamber
consisting of sluice valve in one part under control of the PHED and water

meter in the second part under joint control of PHED and village water
committee.
• The distribution has been designed by using EPANET. The pipe size
calculated for the distribution system where working pressure in the
network permits its use.
• The minimum pipe dia of 90mm has been adopted for internal village
distribution network.
• The material of various types of pipelines have been adopted as per
guidelines issued by the PPC meeting 182 dated 20.02.2010. Metallic pipes
for transfer mains & cluster rising mains to ESRs has been adopted as per
the guideline mentioned in the pipe policy decided in PPC meeting, i.e long
rising main from CWR to cluster ESRs etc in all type of soil. The
uPVC/HDPE pipe line has been adopted in distribution system for rural
area.
• The period for operation and maintenance has been taken 10 years as per
departmental policy.
1.4 PROJECT COMPONENTS FOR RURAL SECTOR

1.4.1 Details of Formation of Cluster
All the 188 villages of Jahazpur Tehsil and 25 Villages of Kotri Tehsil
proposed to be covered in this proposal have been divided into 39 rural area
clusters. The formations of clusters of habitations have been done on following
considerations:
1) As far as possible the ESR has been kept in the area of Gram Panchayat
as per technical suitability.
2) General topography of the area i.e. rising/falling terrain.
3) Social aspect i.e. size of village for location of ESR.
4) Economizing of capitalized energy charges.
5) Concept of totality of user command.

1.4.2 Transfer pumping/ Gravity Mains

Transfer pumping mains shall be laid between two pumping stations to pump water
from PS to CWRs. Transfer Gravity mains shall be laid between Taping Point to
pumping stations to convey water from TP to CWRs. Details of proposed transfer
mains are as given below:
Balance
Length Length
Length to
Original executed
S. Transfer Main Size be
Type Work by M/s PIL
No. section (mm) executed
S/L/J/T/C S/L/J/T/C
S/L/J/T/C
(KM) (KM)
(KM)
1 Triveni Chauraha- S-13.01 S-11.99
Khajoori CWR - L&J-11.21 L&J-13.79
T-5.02 T-19.98
Jahazpur CWR 800 MS (10 mm) 25 C-0.0 C-25
S-7.45 S-0.01
L&J-3.19 L&J-4.27
T- 0.0 T-7.46
700 MS (8 mm) 7.46 C- 0.0 C-7.46
BWSC-12
700 kgf/cm2 29.54 0.0 29.54
BWSC-12
400 kgf/cm3 2 0.0 2
2 Jahazpur PS – Pander BWSC-16
CWR 350 kgf/cm2 9.575 0.0 9.575
3 Jahazpur PS – BWSC-16
Amarwasi CWR 300 kgf/cm2 15.275 0.0 15.275
4 Tapping Point- BWSC-16
Jahazpur Town CWR 250 kgf/cm2 1 0.0 1
5 Tapping Point- S-14.54 S-3.46
Kishangarh CWR L&J-12.38 L&J-5.62
T- 6.18 T-11.82
200 DI K-9 18 C- 0.0 C-18.0
Total - - 107.85
1.4.3 CWR & Pumping Station
Five pumping stations at Jahazpur, Pander, Khajoori, Amarwasi and Kishangarh are
proposed to pump water into ESRs of 39 clusters. Clear water reservoirs are
proposed at the following pumping stations. Capacity of CWR has been taken
equal to 2 hours demand for the design year 2030.
No. of Transfer
No. of Cluster Pumps Pumps CWR
S. capacity
No. PS Location Working Standby Working standby (KL)
1 Jahazpur 3 3 2 2 1200
2 Pander 6 6 510
3 Khajoori 9 9 530

4 Amarwasi 6 6 400
5 Kishangarh 3 3 240
Work of CWRs already completed by M/s Pratibha Industried, Ltd
S.N. Description of work Unit No. or Qty of Executed

Work
1 Construction of RCC Clear Water Reservoir

including overflow, inlet chamber,outlet chamber
with Motorised Sluice valves on inlet and outlet
chamber at:
2 Amarwasi 400 KL
Earth work and PCC work No 1.00
RCC works up to floor slab No 1.00
RCC works up to top ring beam No 1.00
3 Pander 510 KL
Incomplete RCC works up to top ring beam No 0.00
4 Kishangarh 240 KL
5 Jahazpur 1200 KL
Incomplete Earth work only No 0.00
1.4.4 Cluster Pumping Mains

Pumping mains from cluster pumping stations to ESRs has been designed and
accordingly size of pipes has been adopted. Details of cluster pumping mains
are as follows:
Pipe Dia., Approx. length in KM Total
S. No. Type
mm DI K-7 DI K-9 Length, Km
1 100 DI 42.325 - 42.325
2 150 DI 169.125 - 169.125
3 200 DI 30.225 18.000 48.225
Total 241.675 18.000 259.675
Work executed by M/s Pratibha Industries Ltd.
Pipe Approx. length in Total

S. No. Dia., Type KM Length, Km

mm DI K-7 DI K-9
1 100 DI
S-0.0 S-0.0
L&J-0.0 L&J-0.0
T- 0.0 T- 0.0
C- 0.0 - C- 0.0
2 150 DI -
S-5.0 S-5.0
L&J-4.252 L&J-4.252
T- 1.048 T- 1.048
C- 0.0 C- 0.0
3 200 DI
S-13.288 S-7.920 S-21.208
L&J-9.444 L&J-5.880 L&J-15.323
T- 4.225 T- 0.0 T- 4.225
C- 0.0 C- 0.0 C- 0.0
S-18.228 S-7.920 S-26.208
L&J-13.695 L&J-5.880 L&J-19.575
T- 5.273 T- 0.0 T- 5.273
Total C- 0.0 C- 0.0 C- 0.0
Balance work to be executed:
Pipe Approx. length in

Dia., KM Total
S. No. mm Type DI K-7 DI K-9 Length, Km
1 100 DI
S-42.325 S-42.325
L&J-42.325 L&J-42.325
T- 42.325 T- 42.325
C- 42.325 - C- 42.325
2 150 DI -
S-164.126 S-164.126
L&J-164.874 L&J-164.874
T- 168.078 T- 168.078
C- 169.125 C- 169.125
3 200 DI
S-16.937 S-10.080 S-27.017
L&J-20.782 L&J-12.121 L&J-32.902
T- 26.000 T- 18.000 T- 44.000
C- 30.225 C- 18.000 C- 48.225
S-223.388 S-10.080 S-233.468
L&J-227.980 L&J-12.121 L&J-240.101
T- 236.403 T- 18.000 T- 254.403
Total C- 241.675 C- 18.000 C- 259.675

1.4.5 Cluster Distribution System

There are 39 clusters for 213 villages under this package. Cluster
distribution pipe lines from ESR to Village transfer chamber have been
designed using EPANET software. Provision for one ESR for every cluster
and one VTC for every village is taken. The details of cluster distribution
mains from ESRs to Village Transfer Chambers of each village are given
below.
1.4.5.1. HDPE Pipe lines:
As per
Pipe Work executed
original scope Balance Length
S. No. Size Type by PIL Length
of work (KM)
(mm) (KM)
Length (KM)
1 110 HDPE Class-6 186.479 0.00 186.479
2 125 HDPE Class-6 73.59 0.00 73.59
3 160 HDPE Class-6 90.531 0.00 90.531
4 200 HDPE Class-6 71.394 0.00 71.394
5 250 HDPE Class-6 15.046 0.00 15.046
6 310 HDPE Class-6 0.00
1.774 1.774
Total 438.814 0.00 438.814
1.4.5.2. DI Pipe lines:

As per
original Work
Balance
Pipe Size scope of executed by
S. No. Type Length
(mm) work PIL Length
(KM)
Length (KM)
(KM)
1 100 DI K-7 S-0.000 S-20.820
L&J-0.000 L&J-20.820
T- 0.000 T-20.820
C- 0.000 C- 20.820
20.82
2 150 DI K-7 S-0.000 S-18.319
L&J-0.000 L&J-18.319
T- 0.000 T- 18.319
C- 0.000 C- 18.319
18.319
3 200 DI K-7 S-0.000 S-8.001
L&J-0.000 L&J-8.001
T- 0.000 T- 8.001
C- 0.000 C- 8.001
8.001
4 250 DI K-7 S-1.6940 S-0.0010
L&J-0.000 L&J-1.6950
T- 0.000 T- 1.6950
C- 0.000 C- 1.6950
1.695
5 300 DI K-7 S-0.2145 S-0.0005
L&J-0.000 L&J-0.2150
T- 0.000 T- 0.2150
C- 0.000 C- 0.2150
0.215

As per
original Work
Balance
S. No. Type Length
(KM)
Length (KM)
(KM)
6 350 DI K-7 S-1.0230 S-0.0030
L&J-0.000 L&J-1.0260
T- 0.000 T- 1.0260
C- 0.000 C- 1.0260
1.026
Total 50.076 S-2.9315 S-47.1445
L&J-0.000 L&J-50.0760
T- 0.000 T- 50.0760
C- 0.000 C- 50.0760
1.4.5.3. Elevated Service Reservoirs:
Amarwasi PS
S. Capacity
Location of ESR Head
No. (KL)
1 ESR Uncha 480 20
2 ESR Amrawasi 250 22
3 ESR Kurdia 180 21
4 ESR Kuchalwara Khurd 280 20
5 ESR Gadoli 180 26
6 ESR Itunda 250 20
7 ESR Luhari Khera 100 20
KHAJOORI PS
S. Capacity
Location of ESR
No. (KL)
1 ESR Manoharpura 100 20
2 ESR Amalda 350 24
3 ESR Khajoori 100 20
4 ESR Jorji Ka khera 150 20
5 ESR Kishangarh 100 24
6 ESR Sherpur 250 20
7 ESR Ratangarh 310 24
8 ESR Amargarh 200 24
9 ESR Sabalpur 100 20
10 ESR Uleta 140 20
11 ESR Gurha 240 24
12 ESR Pachanpura 270 20
13 ESR Peeplond 110 20
14 ESR Subhash Nagar 100 20
15 ESR Teethori 270 24
PANDER PS
S. Location of ESR Capacity
No. (KL)
1 ESR Taswariya 390 20
2 ESR Titotra 240 20
3 ESR Gandheri 140 20
4 ESR Harotiya 240 20
5 ESR Ropan 460 24
6 ESR Pander 230 22
7 ESR Jamoli 240 22
8 ESR Agariya 250 22

JAHAZPUR PS
S. Capacity
Location of ESR
No. (KL)
1 ESR Chhabariya 270 24
2 ESR Biletha 315 22
3 ESR pp Beera Mata 390 20
4 ESR Chhejalon Ka Khera 160 20
5 ESR Gangithala 360 22
Kishangarh PS
S. Capacity
Location of ESR
No. (KL)
1 ESR Kishangarh 260 24
2 ESR Nandrai 295 24
3 ESR Kankroliya Ghati 140 20
4 ESR Ganderi 300 24
Work of ESRs already completed by M/s Pratibha Industried, Ltd

Work
1 Design & Construction of Elevated Service

Reservoirs as per specifications including
fixing inlet; outlet; washout & overflow
pipes, installation of valves on inlet; outlet;
washout & overflow pipes, puddle collars,
duck foot bends, pipe interconnecting the
incoming & out going mains with all
specials; float valve with auxiliary valve,
water level indicator, plinth protection
works, finishing, testing and
commissioning complete as per the
specifications and scope of work at
2 Kankroliya Ghati 140/20
Earth work only. No 0.00
3 Kishangarh 260/24
1.4.6 Village distribution System

Provision for internal village distribution pipe lines has also been taken from
VTC to Public Stand Posts (PSPs) and Cattle Water Troughs (CWTs) for all the
villages to be covered under this project. Number of PSPs and CWTs has been
worked out on the basis of designed population for the year 2030. Taking one
PSP per 100 persons and one CWT per 500 persons, provision of 2981 PSPs
and 682 CWTs has been taken for all 213 villages. Details of pipe lines to be

provided and laid under this project for internal village distribution are given
below:
Work done by
Pipe Size Original scope Balance
S. No. Type PIL Length
(mm) Length (KM) Length (KM)
(KM)
1 90 uPVC class-3 108.27 0.00 108.27
2 110 uPVC class-3 32.48 0.00 32.48
3 125 uPVC class-3 32.48 0.00 32.48
4 140 uPVC class-3 21.66 0.00 21.66
5 160 uPVC class-3 21.66 0.00 21.66
Total 216.55 0.00 216.55
1.4.7 I.E.C. Activities

The main objective of I.E.C. activities is the support of the operation and
maintenance of the water supply project and to maximize its benefits for the the
target population. The activities under this component shall primarily be
focused for building environment for project acceptance. A village level
committee viz “Village Water Health and Sanitation Committee (VWHSC)”
shall be formed and will take up all the tasks related to the project.
1.5 PROJECT COMPONENTS FOR URBAN SECTOR
The work includes delivering of water to Jahazpur Town as per designed
demand. Provision for one no. pumping station along with construction of Two
ESR of 215 KL & 105 KL capacity and electromechanical, instrumentation and
SCADA activities have been taken for augmentation of urban water supply
scheme of Jahazpur Town. The details of pipelines proposed to cover the
Jahazpur Town are as follows:
Length of Pipeline, Mtrs. Total

S.
Pipe Dia. Material Rising Distribution Distribution Length,
No.
Main Main Pipeline Mtrs.
1 100 mm DI K7 0 1695 11505 13200
2 150 mm DI K7 865 1220 2085
3 200 mm DI K7 455 145 600
Total 1320 3060 11505 15885

Specifications of Pipeline Tender Document Volume- II

The details of Pump proposed to fill the Jahazpur Town ESR are as follows:
Section of Rising Main No. of
S. Discharge Head in Pumps to be
No. From To in LPS m provided
1. Jahazpur Town PS
1 Jahazpur Town PS
Headworks Zone 1 23.70 75 2
2 Jahazpur Town PS 2
Headworks Zone 2 18.70 57
Construction of one JEN & AEN office is also proposed at Jahazpur.
1.6 OPERATION & MAINTENANCE

After completion of the physical works, there would be a defect liability period of 1
year during which the scheme would be operated and maintained by the contractor
free of cost. Thereafter, the scheme shall be operated & maintained by the contractor
for a period of ten years. During the O&M period, the contractor shall be fully
responsible for:
(a) Operation & maintenance of pumping stations, clear water reservoirs, elevated
service reservoirs, PSPs and CWTs.
(b) Operation & Maintenance of transfer mains/rising mains/distribution
mains/distribution pipelines with all pipeline appurtenances.
(c) Metering and Submission of Daily Production and Distribution Report.

2.0 SCOPE OF WORK

2.1 EXTENT OF SCOPE OF WORK
The objective of the works proposed is to deliver the designed quantity of water with
required terminal head at each Village Transfer Chamber (VTC) and in each Village
and each zone of town in safe, effective and reliable manner & to install
Instrumentation systems for control the flow so that the designed demand to respective
village and zone of town is delivered.
The scope of work under this Single Responsibility Contract includes all works required for
delivering Chambal water, through PSPs and CWTs to 188 villages of Jahazpur Tehsil
and 25 Villages of Kotri Tehsil (as per 2001 census) along with augmentation of UWSS
of Jahazpur Town of Bhilwara District, from Khajoori headworks. The work under this
package broadly includes works of Transfer Mains, Cluster Pumping Mains, Cluster
distribution system, Transfer and Cluster pumping stations, CWRs, Electromechanical,
Instrumentation and SCADA activities at each headworks, ESRs, Internal Village
Distribution System, Construction of PSPs and CWTs in the villages, IEC activities and
Operation and Maintenance for 10 years after defect liability period of one year to deliver
designed quantity of water of Chambal river to 188 villages of Jahazpur Tehsil and 25
Villages of Kotri Tehsil (as per 2001 census) along with augmentation of UWSS of
Jahazpur Town of Bhilwara District. Clusters of villages have been formed looking to
topography of area and feasibility to provide water from elevated service reservoirs. One
ESR has been proposed for one cluster. All the villages 188 villages of Jahazpur Tehsil
and 25 Villages of Kotri Tehsil have been proposed to be divided in 39 clusters.
The locations and capacities of proposed CWRs & ESRs are given in the foregoing paras of this
chapter. The land for construction of all the CWRs/Pump houses/ESRs etc. shall be provided by
the department.
The details of components listed hereinafter are the main components identified by the
department, but the contractor shall be responsible for installations of all other
equipment(s)/construction of other facilities, required to achieve the above objective of
the work, within the time schedule given to complete the work.
The limit of the works under this tender shall start from the Taping Point Triveni Chouraha.
Information of Status of work executed by earlier firm M/S Pratibha Industries
Ltd:
Earlier The work of “Work of Cluster Scheme of 213 villages of Jahazpur and Kotri
Tehsils along with Augmentation of UWSS of Jahazpur Town from Khajoori
Headworks under Chambal Bhilwara Water Supply Project Phase-II with O&M for
10 years on SPR turnkey basis” was originally awarded to M/s Pratibha Industries
Ltd, Mumbai vide letter no. F ( )/Ar. Bhl (Phase-II)/2013-14/1605-1613 dated
23.09.2013 of Additional Chief Engineer, PHED, Project Region, Ajmer. The stipulated
date of commencement & completion of work was 03.10.2013 & 02.10.2016. The
contractor started the work after getting necessary approvals from the department but
failed to maintain prorate progress as per contract agreement. Brief detail of awarded
work order to M/s Pratibha Industries Ltd, Mumbai and the work completed is
enclosed as Annexure-B of volume I.
M/s Pratibha Industries Ltd, Mumbai, has since, left the work incomplete after
execution of approximately 13.37% of work only. The existing contract has been
rescinded and it is now proposed to get the balance work of original agreement
completed through the proposed new contract. The scope of work, specifications &
conditions of contract for the proposed new contract shall remain the same as that was
with M/s Pratibha Industries Ltd, Mumbai. The new contractor, under this contract,
shall own the responsibility for the entire work already done, materials supplied by M/s
Pratibha Industries Ltd, Mumbai.
The bidder is required to study the work already done by M/s Pratibha Industries Ltd,
Mumbai, designs & drawings already approved & account for the remedial measures
for any defects errors or omissions, if observed. The new contractor shall be responsible
for any defects, if noticed at any time, in the previous work & shall account for the same
while submitting the bids. No extra payment shall be made for any rectification
(including cost of material/equipments required for rectification) required in the work
already done. All the works done by previous Contractor are to be dovetailed with the
new work. The bidder may use the already approved designs, drawings & other
approvals given to M/s Pratibha Industries Ltd, Mumbai in consultation with EiC, or
may submit new drawings & designs for approval incorporating the executed works as is
where is basis. The bidder shall own the responsibility for its correctness & sufficiency as if it
were submitted by the bidder.
The whole of the balance work including mobilization, reconnaissance, design,
manufacturing, transportation, construction, installation, testing, commissioning & trial run
& demobilization, has to be completed within a period of 31 months, calculated from the
commencement date, which is 10 days after the written order to commence the work.
Annexure-B Vol-I narrating works already done will be part of the Tender Document.
2.2 GENERAL PRINCIPLES
The contractor shall carryout all works wholly in accordance with the terms and conditions of the
contract to fulfill the requirement of the project. All the material used, and the equipment
installed shall be as per the specifications defined in the contract.
Generally the following activities shall be carried out for each component of this contract but
shall not be limited to:
(i) Submission of all documents required according to the Contract (security
money/guarantee, etc.)
(ii) Submission of Action Plan/Execution Schedule in accordance with the provisions
of Special Conditions of Contract Part A of Vol. I for approval of the Engineer-in-
Charge.
(iii) Detailed survey and investigations for design of the entire system. Conducting
survey for work of transfer mains, cluster rising mains, cluster distribution mains,
internal village distribution lines and index map of all 188 villages of Jahazpur
Tehsil and 25 Villages of Kotri Tehsil (as per 2001 census) along with
augmentation of UWSS of Jahazpur Town of Bhilwara District.

(iv) Topographic survey of the entire city area of Jahazpur town for hydraulic designing
the zones of the city. Reference bench marks for RL shall be adopted as fixed by
Survey of India Department.
(v) Conducting required soil/strata investigations for the foundation of CWRs/Pump
house/ESRs and other civil works in all type of soil conditions.
(vi) Conducting survey for head works to be constructed at Jahazpur, Pander,
Khajoori, Amarwasi and Kishangarh and Jahazpur Town and to prepare and
submit the contour and layout plans of all the head works.
(vii) Conducting required investigations to confirm that the provisions of system
proposed are sufficient to fulfill the required objectives of the work so that the
water, to fulfill the designed service level, can be delivered. For this, the contractor
shall carry out the required survey and investigations to verify the design
provisions given by the department. If, the provisions envisaged by the department
are considered to be inadequate, the Contractor shall provide additional
facilities/systems, and may change the hydraulic design i.e., staging and levels of
reservoirs, pump heads etc. (no reduction in capacity of elevated service reservoirs,
CWRs, & pump discharge under normal circumstances) so that the objective of
delivery of designed service level is achieved. No additional payment on account
of providing such additional facilities/systems shall be made except for change in
lengths of pipelines.
(viii) Preparation of L-section and plan based on survey along the proposed pipeline
alignment and submission of L-section and plan of the proposed pipeline to be laid
for approval of Engineer-in-charge.
(ix) Submission of hydraulic designs with calculations for the design of transfer mains,
cluster rising mains, cluster distribution mains, village distribution pipelines for all
188 villages of Jahazpur Tehsil and 25 Villages of Kotri Tehsil and entire
distribution network of Jahazpur town.
(x) Analysis, design, supply and installation of Surge Control System for the transfer
mains and rising mains. Design shall be got done from IISc Bangalore, Any IIT or
Linga Reddy Institute, Hyderabad.
(xi) Submission of designs for all components of the project (hydraulic, civil,
mechanical, electrical and instrumentation) according to relevant Indian standards
and engineering requirements.
(xii) As the responsibility to supply the designed quantity of water at required terminal
head of in the respective villages (terminal head shall be minimum 12 mtrs. at each
VTC) and zone of town is solely of the Contractor, the Contractor is required to
review the design of the distribution pipeline network, the pumps, the surge
analysis etc. and the instrumentation system at his own and if required shall work
out the staging of ESRs, use the appropriate duty conditions of the pumps, use
additional materials/equipment(s) so as to achieve the objectives of the work as
defined in clause 2.1 above. In case it is felt necessary to provide surge protection
system, cost of the same should be included in the lump sum offer.
(xiii) Getting approval of all design and drawings, material to be used, equipment
specifications and the samples, prior to dispatching/installing /commissioning of
work on site. If for any specific provision, references have been made at more
than one specifications at different places in the tender document (T.D.), the
provision which is more stringent, shall be applicable..
(xiv) Submission of the design/specifications, catalogs and the technical data sheets of
all the equipment, electrical/ instrumentation/ automation system, design of the
electrical components, taking into account the interfaces to the other project
components/packages and the future extensions of the project.

(xv) Preparation and submission of structural designs and reinforcement drawings for
all civil structures of the work. The structural designs and drawings of ESRs,
CWRs and Pump Houses should be got checked from MNIT, Jaipur or BITS,
Pilani or IIT, Delhi or any other recognized (by AICTE) institute (affiliated with
Technical University of Rajasthan) approved by EIC, prior to their submission. All
expenses on account of this shall be borne by the contractor.
(xvi) Supply, laying, jointing, testing and commissioning of all transfer mains, cluster
rising mains, cluster distribution mains, village distribution pipelines for cluster
scheme of 213 villages and all rising mains, distribution mains and distribution
pipelines for Jahazpur town along with associated civil and mechanical works
complete as per scope.
(xvii) Designing and construction of 39 nos. RCC ESRs for clusters and 02 no. ESR for
Jahazpur town along with providing & fixing of all required CI pipes, Valves,
specials, floats, electric conductor, plinth protection work, hydro testing of
structure and supply and installation of flow-meter at the inlet of each ESR with
valve complete as per the scope.
(xviii) Designing and construction of 6 numbers of RCC framed structure pump houses
with switchgear room, duty room, office room, toilets, maintenance bay, cable
trenches and walkway with stairs etc. and installation of pumping machinery and
instrumentation/automation (PLC linked SCADA) as per the scope.
(xix) Designing, providing, erecting, constructing, testing commissioning of 11/0.415
KV Switchyard at Jahazpur, Pander, Khajoori, Amarwasi and Kishangarh
headworks for rural area and up-gradation of existing 11/0.415 KV switchyard at
Jahazpur town headworks. The 11 KV electric feeders shall be made available
near Switchyard area.
(xx) Construction of Chlorination room of minimum 40 sqm within the campus at
Jahazpur, Pander, Khajoori, Amarwasi and Kishangarh headworks for rural areas
and at Jahazpur town headworks for urban town and construction of chlorine
tonners storage yard near CWR in each of these pump house, with associated
approach road from the nearest road of campus to transport equipment and tonners.
(xxi) To supply and install online full bore electromagnetic flow meters of suitable size
with all instrumentation and allied civil works to measure the flow at outlet of each
delivery header at every pumping station and also at the inlet of each CWR.
(xxii) Construction of Village Transfer Chamber (VTC) as per approved drawing at the
boundary of each village with supply & installation of Valves, pressure gauges,
Ultrasonic Type Water Meters, with remote reading device capable of transmitting
data through GSM network (via SMS) including solar panel, assembly, battery,
specials, pipes etc. and to distribute the water received at the VTC to the villages
through village distribution pipelines to Public Stand Posts (PSPs) and Cattle
Water Troughs (CWTs).
(xxiii) For NH/SH/railway crossings, the department shall apply to respective department
for permission to carry out the crossing work. It shall be the contractor’s
responsibility to obtain approval from respective deptt. for such crossing work. In
case the respective deptt. does not allow the contractor to do the work and carries
the work themselves as a deposit work, cost of such work shall be borne by the
Contractor. All fees, levies etc. charged by NHAI/State PWD/Railways shall be
borne by the deptt.
(xxiv) Preparation and submission of all detailed working drawings on the basis of
conceptual designs and plans approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.
(xxv) To co-ordinate with the O&M staff and concerned officers of PHED, PWD, Forest,
Mining, Telephone Agencies, electric supply company and personnel of local water

supply system (for carrying out the installation of new equipment), with the district
administrative offices and other offices for necessary approvals and certificates.
(xxvi) Manufacturing, shop testing, pre-dispatch inspection, transportation to site,
providing transit insurance, storage, handling at site, installation, sectional testing,
pre-commissioning testing, commissioning and trial runs for all components of the
system and the system as a whole, including the hydraulic, mechanical, electrical,
Electro-Mechanical and instrumentation equipment.
(xxvii) Construction of all buildings and water retaining structures, chambers, thrust
blocks, anchor blocks, saddle supports and other structures.
(xxviii) Ancillary Civil works and campus development as defined herein after.
(xxix) For laying pipeline, the cost of shifting of electrical poles, transformers, telephone
lines, trees, road cutting etc. shall be borne by the department. The contractor
shall be responsible for any damage occurred to the telephone lines, OFC cables,
cutting of trees, cables, distribution/rising water mains, consumers service
connection pipelines and gas pipes, drains while laying clear water pipeline, and
shall be liable to pay the amount levied by respective department(s) for the repair
and/ or damages so occurred.
(xxx) Construction, testing & commissioning of all civil works as per scope of work,
approved drawings & detailed specifications.
(xxxi) Execution of civil, mechanical, electrical and instrumentation system as per
relevant IS codes and specifications.
(xxxii) Pre-commissioning checks and inspections as per requirement.
(xxxiii) Testing of hydraulic, mechanical, electrical and instrumentation system as per
relevant IS codes and specifications and guidelines.
(xxxiv) Commissioning of the system and optimization as per design parameter,
commissioning of all the components i.e. pumping station , transmission main,
rising mains, ESRs and distribution network in all respect.
(xxxv) Providing spares, tools and tackles at the end of the execution of physical works as
per list enclosed.
(xxxvi) Marking of assets on GIS Platform - The contractor shall submit geo-referenced
AUTOCAD drawings for the complete pipeline network laid under the contract.
Location of all valves and Tees, bends, junctions and points of change in alignment
of pipeline shall be determined using differential GPS of 0.6 m accuracy or better.
Attributes of pipeline, like diameter, material, class etc shall be linked with GIS.
(xxxvii)The submission of the as-built drawings of the works in AUTOCAD is the
precondition for the final payment of execution part. The final drawings shall be
submitted in 5 copies on linen bound in an album of an approved size. The
contractor shall submit soft copies all the drawings in AUTOCAD and approved
design calculations in EXCEL on CD ROM/DVD in two copies with proper
directory structure. No soft copy of as-built drawings and designs in PDF shall be
accepted.
(xxxviii) Operation, routine & preventive maintenance, maintenance and repairs of the
system for 10 years after defect liability of 1 year after completion of work, starting
from the date as defined in Special Conditions of Contract, Part ‘A’ of Volume I of
tender document. It includes operation and maintenance of all pumping stations,
transfer mains, cluster rising mains, cluster distribution mains, village distribution
pipelines, valves, meters etc. of cluster scheme of 213 villages and operation and
maintenance of pumping stations, rising mains, distribution mains and internal town

distribution pipelines (existing as well as proposed) and maintenance of all existing

distribution lines of Jahazpur town.
In addition to the above, the following shall also form a part of the scope of work:
• Arrangement of adequate security, watch and ward of the system during the execution
period to safeguard the equipment and completed section of the work from any type of
mishandling, theft, fire and other hazards, etc. shall be made in addition to the above
requirements.
• Maintaining the site office(s) at all head works with all reasonable office facilities for use
of project staff of the department.
• The contractor shall also provide at least three closed-body vehicles (four-wheeler), not
more than one year old, including POL and driver, to the departmental staff, free of cost,
during the entire execution period for official use and supervision of the work. The
vehicles shall be provided immediately after award of work and two vehicles during
O&M period.
• Providing mobile telephones at all pumping stations at the date of commencement of
work. The contractor shall also make payment of all the bills of above connections till the
end of O&M period.
• Restoration of PHED’s premises/ road etc. after completion of the work shall also be a
part of the work.
• Furniture and desktop computers for headworks and offices as given herein after.
• Chemical equipment for laboratory at Bhilwara.
2.3 MAJOR COMPONENTS OF WORK
The works under this contract are broadly divided in to the following components:
2.3.1 SURVEY, INVESTIGATION, DESIGN & SUBMISSION
(A) SURVEY AND INVESTIGATIONS :-

Survey, topographical and Geo-technical investigation required for proper design and execution
of the various component of the project. Design, confirmation of Topographical & Plot Survey &
Geotechnical investigations. The L-section shall be taken along the pipeline alignment with levels
at 50 m interval or in between 50 m if the drop in level in between two consecutive points is more
than 1.0 meters. All drawings of survey along with the marked L-section of proposed pipe line,
location of all types of valves etc shall be submitted on scale approved by Engineer-in-Charge in
soft as well as hard copies. The L-section should indicate ground levels, invert levels, depth of
cutting, working pressure, co-ordinates of HGL, along with a route key-plan showing the detail
alignment of pipe, situation of any permanent structures, already laid pipe lines, or any other
important feature within the 15 Mtr on either side of the alignment. L-section should be submitted
in parts (transfer and rising mains first) so as to take-up the work or laying and jointing of pipes at
an early date. The plan is not required to be submitted for cluster distribution and internal village
distribution system at the commencement of the project. However, the contractor shall have to
submit the plan also along with L-sections while submitting the as built drawings.

(B) DESIGNS & SUBMISSIONS FOR REVIEW AND APPROVAL :-
• The designs shall be done by contractor. The Contractor will be solely responsible for
preparing and submitting required designs/drawings after carrying out appropriate field
surveys, data collection, designs etc. for approval of Engineer-in-Charge.
• Design of complete system for providing drinking water supply to 213 villages and Jahazpur
Town.
• Design of cluster for all 213 villages and verifications of the hydraulic data of the complete
system.
• Design of pumping stations and pumps required for all the five pumping stations of clusters
and one pumping station of Jahazpur town.
• Design of transfer/rising mains between the pumping station to CWR and pumping station to
ESRs for all the 39 clusters ESRs.
• Design of cluster ESRs and ESRs of Jahazpur town and cluster distribution system keeping
the minimum terminal head of 12 mtrs. at VTC.
• Design of internal village distribution system from VTC points to CWT & PSPs.
• Design of rising mains, distribution mains and distribution network of Jahazpur town.
• Design of Clear water reservoirs.
• Design of RCC structures & 11/0.415 KV switchyards.
2.3.2 PIPELINE WORK
Providing, Laying, jointing, testing & commissioning of transfer mains, rising mains, cluster
distribution mains, village distribution pipelines for cluster scheme of villages so as to complete
the connectivity of all proposed ESRs, VTCs with PSPs and CWTs and rising mains, distribution
mains and distribution network so as to complete the connectivity of all existing and proposed
ESRs and distribution zones of Jahazpur town as detailed herein after with additional
equipment(s) to achieve the objectives set in clause 2.1 above. Making road/rail crossings by box
pushing/pipe pushing/micro tunneling or by open excavation as per site requirement and
according to the specifications, rules and regulations of railway/road authorities. The contractor
shall restore the road to its original shape after laying and testing of pipeline work is completed.
The restoration should be done by the same material as those of the existing road before doing
excavation. Marking of laid pipelines on GIS Platform. The contractor shall submit geo-referenced
AUTOCAD drawings for the complete pipeline network laid under the contract. Location of all
valves and Tees, bends, junctions and points of change in alignment of pipeline shall be
determined using differential GPS of 0.6 m accuracy or better. Attributes of pipeline, like
diameter, material, class etc shall be linked with GIS.
Details of executed pipe line work of distribution and Transmission at Annexure "B"of
Volume-I
2.3.3 PUMP HOUSES
Designing and construction of 6 numbers of RCC framed structure pump houses (05 nos. for
cluster schemes of villages and 01 no. for UWSS of Jahazpur town) with switchgear room, duty
room, office room, toilets, maintenance bay, cable trenches and walkway with stairs etc. and
supply and installation of pumping machinery and instrumentation/automation (PLC linked
SCADA) as per the scope. Construction of Chlorination room of minimum 40 sqm within the
campus at Jahazpur headworks, Pander headworks, Khajoori headworks, Amarwasi headworks
and Kishangarh headworks for rural areas and at Jahazpur town headworks for urban town and
chlorine tonners storage yard near CWR in pump house, with associated approach road from the
nearest road of campus to transport equipment and tonners and supply of all
equipment/instruments including tonners for Chlorination.
2.3.4 SWITCHYARDS
Construction of 11/0.415 KV Switchyards at Jahazpur headworks, Pander headworks,

Khajoori headworks, Amarwasi headworks and Kishangarh headworks for rural areas and
up-gradation of existing 11/0.415 KV switchyard at Jahazpur town headworks with GI
structures, shielding tower, LA, CT, PT, Isolators, VCB, PI, DOF with required capacity
transformers with 100% standby arrangement.
2.3.5 INSTRUMENTATION & AUTOMATION
To supply and install online full bore electromagnetic flow meters of suitable size with all
instrumentation and allied civil works to measure the flow at outlet of each delivery header at
every pumping station and also at the inlet of each CWR.
Design and execution of suitable automation (PLC linked with SCADA system) for existing and
proposed system with interlinking of SCADA with SCADA of transmission system.
2.3.6 CLEAR WATER RESERVOIRS
Construction of 6 no. Clear Water Reservoirs with total storage capacity of 2880 KL (Jahazpur–
1200 KL, Pander – 510 KL, Khajoori –530 KL, Amarwasi - 400 KL, and Kishangarh – 240 KL).
Detail of executed work of CWR at Annexure "B"of Volume-I.
2.3.7 ELEVATED SERVICE RESERVOIRS
Construction of 39 Numbers of Elevated Service Reservoirs in rural clusters and 2 no. ESR in
urban area in Jahazpur town with total storage capacity (9510 KL) of 9190 KL & 320 KL for rural
& urban respectively. The staging of ESRs for clusters shall be so kept as to get a minimum
terminal head of 12 mtrs. at VTC.
Detail of executed work of ESR's at Annexure "B"of Volume-I.
2.3.8 VILLAGE TRANSFER CHAMBER
Construction of Village Transfer chambers at 213 locations with supply & installation of Valves,
pressure gauges, Ultrasonic Type Water Meters, with remote reading device capable of
transmitting data through GSM network (via SMS) including solar panel, assembly, battery,
specials, pipes etc.
2.3.9 PUBLIC STAND POSTS (PSPS) & CATTLE WATER TROUGHS (CWTS)
Construction of Public Stand Posts (PSPs) and Cattle Water Troughs (CWTs) in each village as
per bill of quantities at locations decided by the villagers with the help of Village Water Health and
Sanitation Committee (VWHSC) and to distribute the water received at the VTC to the villages
through village distribution pipelines to PSPs and CWTs. Laying of pipeline from Transfer
chamber to each PSP will be done after approval of design of pipeline network of the villages by
the EIC.

2.3.10 PHASED COMMISSIONING
Commissioning of villages in a phased manner during Execution period. The commissioning

should commence 24 months after the award of work.
2.3.11 IEC ACTIVITIES
The contractor shall be engaged/deployed the NGO for carryout the IEC activities in the 213
villages and shall deploy agency having good knowledge in particular field of IEC activities in
water supply project. The main objective of the IEC activities for this project is creating awareness
regarding the national programme of NRDWP of drinking water. The public education and
motivation regarding the necessity of cost for O&M and willingness to maintain the water supply
services at Village Panchayat & Block level. The need to understand and implement the policies
of the Central and State Governments regarding drinking water supply management in rural
areas and to understand the need for sharing the O&M cost of drinking water supply schemes.
To motivate people for active participation in rain water harvesting program and sustainable water
supply management. To involve people in preparation of water security plan of the village. IEC
activity shall continue even after handing over village distribution to VWHC for the entire
O&M period.
2.3.12 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
Operation and Maintenance of the entire system of the executed work has to be carried out by
the contractor for period of 10 year after defect liability period of one year after completion of
work.
The detailed scope of work of these components is as under:
2.4 WORK OF PIPELINE:
The work of transfer mains/cluster rising mains/cluster distribution mains/internal village

distribution line for villages and rising mains/distribution mains/ distribution pipelines for
Jahazpur town includes preparatory works, survey and preparation of village/town index plan,
investigations, hydraulic design of pipeline, manufacturing, testing at factory, supply, delivery
and storage at site, lowering, laying and jointing, sectional testing, re-filling and commissioning
of pipelines of various diameters, along with supply of specials, pipe appurtenances and
associated civil works so as to achieve the objective of the project.
In the following locations, only DI Pipes shall be provided:
(i) In railway crossings
(ii) In river or Nallah or canal or drain crossings
(iii) In road crossings and under traffic loads and where pipeline is to be laid below
road carpet area.
(iv) Where pipeline is to be laid above ground.
(v) In thickly populated areas or habitations, as per directions of Engineer-in-Charge
(vi) In the cement concrete roads where cutting is difficult.
All pipes and specials shall be provided by the Contractor. The work includes inspection
& testing at manufacturers works, packing, transportation, supply of pipes, as per specifications,
along with all types of specials, valves and other material to be used, Stacking and/or storage of
material, re-handling, excavation of trenches, laying and jointing of the pipes as per approved L-
section, construction of thrust blocks and pedestals/anchor blocks for pipe support to lay pipes
above/below ground or by excavation, as per specifications, and carry out sectional testing, pre-
commissioning checks, full commissioning tests and trial runs. For calculation of pipe lengths
for payment purposes, the laying length of butterfly/sluice valve & dismantling joints and
any other length of pipe in scope of work of items other than pipe line shall be deducted
from the overall length of pipe line as the same are being paid separately..
All specials like bends, tees, reducers, dismantling joints, rubber rings, flanges, gaskets, nuts &
bolts, rubber sheets, etc to be used in the laying and jointing of all types of pipes shall be supplied
by the contractor as per given specifications.
The details of diameter of pipe along with the approximate lengths of proposed pipelines of
various types is as detailed below. However, during execution, the lengths as mentioned below
may vary, for which the adjustment shall be made as detailed in Volume IV of the tender
document.
2.4.1 TRANSFER PUMPING/ GRAVITY MAINS AND RISING

MAINS
Transfer mains shall be laid between two pumping stations to pump water from PS to CWRs.
Transfer Gravity mains shall be laid between Taping Point to pumping stations to convey water
from TP to CWRs. Rising mains for rural areas shall be laid from cluster pumping stations to
cluster ESRs. Five pumping stations at Jahazpur, Pander, Khajoori, Amarwasi and
Kishangarh are proposed to pump water into ESRs of 39 clusters. Rising mains for urban town
of Jahazpur shall be laid from Jahazpur PS for existing as well as new ESRs. Details of transfer
mains & rising mains under this contract are as under (The lengths mentioned below are as per
departmental survey and are tentative). The head mentioned is for the demand of year 2030 for
considering the life of pumping machinery as 15 years but the pipe lines have been proposed for
the demand for the year 2045.
Details of Pumping Mains
S. FROM TO Approx. Length, Dia. in Pump Type of
No. Mtrs. mm Head, Mtr Pipe
Khajoori PS
1 Amalda Jn. ESR Manoharpura 3225 100 DI K-7
2 Amalda Jn. ESR Amalda 1000 150 DI K-7

56
3 Khajoori PS Amalda Jn. 7875 150 DI K-7
4 Khajoori PS ESR Khajoori 200 150 27 DI K-7
5 Khajoori PS ESR Jorji Ka khera 6900 100 63 DI K-7
6 Kishangarh Jn. ESR Kishangarh 1000 100 DI K-7
7 Kishangarh Jn. ESR Sherpur 7200 150 DI K-7

30
8 Khajoori PS Kishangarh Jn. 6700 150 DI K-7


9 Amargarh Jn. ESR Ratangarh 6450 150 DI K-7
10 Amargarh Jn. ESR Amargarh 1000 150 DI K-7

79
11 Khajoori PS Amargarh Jn. 8000 200 DI K-9
12 Uleta Jn. ESR Sabalpur 4725 150 DI K-7
13 Uleta Jn. ESR Uleta 1000 100 DI K-7

46
14 Khajoori PS Uleta Jn. 2575 150 DI K-7
15 Jn.-1 ESR Gurha 1075 100 DI K-7
16 Jn.-1 ESR Pachanpura 7250 150 DI K-7

43
17 Khajoori PS Jn.-1 5300 150 DI K-7
18 Peeplond Jn. ESR Peeplond 1000 100 DI K-7
19 Peeplond Jn. ESR Subhash Nagar 2000 100 DI K-7

39
20 Khajoori PS Peeplond Jn. 8675 150 DI K-7
21 Khajoori PS ESR Teethori 12000 150 56 DI K-7
Pander PS
22 Jn.-1 ESR Taswariya 7000 150 DI K-7
23 Jn.-1 ESR Titotra 4500 150 DI K-7

78
24 Pander PS Jn.-1 4200 200 DI K-7
25 Pander PS ESR Gandher 8350 100 55 DI K-7
26 Pander PS ESR Harotiya 9950 150 32 DI K-7
27 Pander PS ESR Ropan 13725 200 86 DI K-7
28 Pander PS ESR Pander 500 150 30 DI K-7
29 Jn.-2 ESR Jamoli 5200 150 DI K-7
30 Jn.-2 ESR Agariya 3400 150 DI K-7

51
31 Pander PS Jn.-2 4200 200 DI K-7
Jahazpur PS
32 Jahazpur PS ESR Chabbariya 5550 150 33 DI K-7
33 pp Beera Mata Jn. ESR Biletha 6600 150 DI K-7


34 pp Beera Mata Jn. ESR pp Beera Mata 1000 150 DI K-7

65
35 Jahazpur PS pp Beera Mata Jn. 8100 200 DI K-7
36 Barani Ka barada ESR Chhejlon ka 5450 100 DI K-7

Jn. khera
37 Barani Ka barada ESR Gangithala 7200 150 50 DI K-7

Jn.
38 Jahazpur PS Barani Ka Barada 4775 150 DI K-7

Jn.
Amrawasi PS
39 Amrawasi PS ESR Uncha 3625 150 41 DI K-7
40 Amrawasi PS ESR Amrawasi 500 150 31 DI K-7
41 Amrawasi PS ESR Kurdia 5300 100 62 DI K-7
Amrawasi PS ESR Kuchalwara 10425 150 51 DI K-7

42 Khurd
43 Amrawasi PS ESR Gadoli 5900 150 67 DI K-7
44 Luhari Khera Jn. ESR Itunda 4050 150 DI K-7
45 Luhari Khera Jn. ESR Luhari Khera 1000 100 DI K-7

71
46 Amrawasi PS Luhari Khera Jn. 10000 200 DI K-9
PS Kishangarh
47 PS Kishangarh ESR Kishangarh 200 150 32 DI K-7
48 PS Kishangarh ESR Nandrai 6400 150 32 DI K-7
Jn. Ganderi ESR Kankroliya 6025 100 DI K-7

49 Ghati
50 Jn. Ganderi ESR Ganderi 1000 150 DI K-7
51 PS Kishangarh Jn. Ganderi 10400 150 47 DI K-7
Transfer Mains
S. FROM TO Approx. Dia. in Pump Type of Pipe
No. Length, Mtrs. mm Head,
Mtr
Transfer Mains
S. FROM TO Approx. Dia. in Pump Type of Pipe
No. Length, Mtrs. mm Head,
Mtr
BWSC-16
Jahazpur PS CWR at Pander 9575 350 13
1 kgf/cm2
BWSC-16
Jahazpur PS CWR at Amrawasi 15275 300 29
2 kgf/cm2
3 Triveni TP Jn.-2 25000 800 MS (10 mm)
4 Jn.-2 Peak Point 7460 700 MS (8 mm)
BWSC-12
Peak Point Jn.-Khajoori 10965 700
5 kgf/cm2
BWSC-12
Jn.-Khajoori CWR Khajoori 2000 400
6 kgf/cm3
BWSC-12
Jn.-Khajoori CWR at Jahazpur 18575 700
7 kgf/cm2
Town CWR at BWSC-12
CWR at Jahazpur 1000 250
8 Jahazpur kgf/cm2
9 Triveni TP CWR at Kishangarh 18000 200 DI K-9
Abstract of Transfer mains is as follows:
S. Size Length
Transfer Main section Type
No. (mm) (KM)
1 Triveni Chauraha- Khajoori CWR - 800 MS (10 mm) 25
Jahazpur CWR 700 MS (8 mm) 7.46
700 BWSC-12 kgf/cm2 29.54
400 BWSC-12 kgf/cm3 2
2 Jahazpur PS – Pander CWR 350 BWSC-16 kgf/cm2 9.575
3 Jahazpur PS – Amarwasi CWR 300 BWSC-16 kgf/cm2 15.275
4 Tapping Point-Jahazpur Town
CWR 250 BWSC-16 kgf/cm2 1
5 Tapping Point-Kishangarh CWR 200 DI K-9 18
Total - - 107.85

Balance
Length Length
Length to
Original executed
S. Transfer Main Size be
Type Work by M/s PIL
No. section (mm) executed
S/L/J/T/C S/L/J/T/C
S/L/J/T/C
(KM) (KM)
(KM)
1 Triveni Chauraha- S-13.01 S-11.99
Khajoori CWR - L&J-11.21 L&J-13.79
T-5.02 T-19.98
Jahazpur CWR 800 MS (10 mm) 25 C-0.0 C-25
S-7.45 S-0.01
L&J-3.19 L&J-4.27
T- 0.0 T-7.46
700 MS (8 mm) 7.46 C- 0.0 C-7.46
BWSC-12
700 kgf/cm2 29.54 0.0 29.54
BWSC-12
400 kgf/cm3 2 0.0 2
2 Jahazpur PS – Pander BWSC-16
CWR 350 kgf/cm2 9.575 0.0 9.575
3 Jahazpur PS – BWSC-16
Amarwasi CWR 300 kgf/cm2 15.275 0.0 15.275
4 Tapping Point- BWSC-16
Jahazpur Town CWR 250 kgf/cm2 1 0.0 1
5 Tapping Point- S-14.54 S-3.46
Kishangarh CWR L&J-12.38 L&J-5.62
T- 6.18 T-11.82
200 DI K-9 18 C- 0.0 C-18.0
Total - - 107.85
Abstract of cluster rising mains is as follows:

S. No. Type
mm DI K-7 DI K-9 Length, Km
1 100 DI 42.325 - 42.325
2 150 DI 169.125 - 169.125
3 200 DI 30.225 18.000 48.225
Total 241.675 18.000 259.675
Pipe Approx. length in Total

S. No. Dia., Type KM Length, Km

mm DI K-7 DI K-9
1 100 DI
S-0.0 S-0.0
L&J-0.0 L&J-0.0
T- 0.0 T- 0.0
C- 0.0 - C- 0.0
2 150 DI -
S-5.0 S-5.0
L&J-4.252 L&J-4.252
T- 1.048 T- 1.048
C- 0.0 C- 0.0
3 200 DI
S-13.288 S-7.920 S-21.208
L&J-9.444 L&J-5.880 L&J-15.323
T- 4.225 T- 0.0 T- 4.225
C- 0.0 C- 0.0 C- 0.0
S-18.228 S-7.920 S-26.208
L&J-13.695 L&J-5.880 L&J-19.575
T- 5.273 T- 0.0 T- 5.273
Total C- 0.0 C- 0.0 C- 0.0
Balance work to be executed:
Pipe Approx. length in

Dia., KM Total
S. No. mm Type DI K-7 DI K-9 Length, Km
1 100 DI
S-42.325 S-42.325
L&J-42.325 L&J-42.325
T- 42.325 T- 42.325
C- 42.325 - C- 42.325
2 150 DI -
S-164.126 S-164.126
L&J-164.874 L&J-164.874
T- 168.078 T- 168.078
C- 169.125 C- 169.125
3 200 DI
S-16.937 S-10.080 S-27.017
L&J-20.782 L&J-12.121 L&J-32.902
T- 26.000 T- 18.000 T- 44.000
C- 30.225 C- 18.000 C- 48.225
S-223.388 S-10.080 S-233.468
L&J-227.980 L&J-12.121 L&J-240.101
T- 236.403 T- 18.000 T- 254.403
Total C- 241.675 C- 18.000 C- 259.675
Zone-wise abstract of rising mains for Jahazpur town is as follows:

Zone No. Type
mm DI K-7 DI K-9 Length, Mtr.
Headworks to
200 DI 451 - 451
Zone-1
Headworks to
150 DI 861 - 861
Zone-2
Total 1312 - 1312
Pipes shall be laid along the roads as far as possible on the outer edge of the road boundary. The
alignment adopted in this contract has been taken along the roads, wherever possible. However,
during execution of the works, if a shorter alternate and feasible route is found, the department
may opt to lay pipeline along that shorter route. Expenses on account of damages to field
boundaries or any other damages in field or of private property during laying of pipes shall be
borne by the contractor. The grade (i.e. L-section) in which the pipe shall be laid shall be got
approved by the department. The L-section shall be based on the following principles:
• The change in slopes per km. length shall not be more than 10 in number.
• The slopes required shall be such that in normal conditions, the cover over the laid
pipe is not less than 0.6 meters. In general the cover should be 0.9 meters. However
in general the limitation for cover shall be as given in chapter ‘Specification of
pipeline’.
The scope under the item shall consist of the following requirements;
(i) Manufacturing and Testing at works, transportation, packing, supply of all sizes of DI K-
7/K-9 pipes, specials, jointing material etc to be used. Stacking and/or storage of
material, re-handling and to lay pipes below ground by excavation and refilling the trench
to ensure average cover of 0.9 meters generally and construction of pedestals/portals for
pipe support to lay pipe above ground, if required and then to carry out sectional testing,
pre-commissioning checks, full completion tests and trial runs. The water required for
sectional testing after laying of pipe shall be arranged by the contractor at his own cost.
(ii) Submission of L-section and plan for approval of Engineer-in-Charge prior to commence
the work and after approval take up the work and submit As-built drawings after laying
and testing of pipeline.
(iii) Setting out of works, Laying and jointing of pipeline including lowering, placing at proper
alignment, cutting pipes, chamfering complete in all respects. The work of laying and
jointing of pipes and pipe appurtenances should be done at required levels. The pipeline
alignment in general shall be kept on the outer edge of the existing/ proposed road
boundaries. Wherever this is not possible, on approval of Engineer-In-Charge, the pipe
can be laid near the road or within the carriageway. No extra payment shall be made on
account of additional excavation required for placing pipes further away from the road
centres. No additional payment shall be made for excavation of road surface or any other
strata for the approved pipe alignment. The alignment approved by the Engineer-In-
Charge shall be final and binding on the contractor.
(iv) Cutting of the vegetation for the purpose of excavation. However, it will be contractor’s
responsibility to obtain all kind of clearances, if required to cut the vegetation for laying of
pipe line and other civil works, if the forest department will raise the amount against the
cutting the said vegetation, the amount will be deposited by the department, but the
contractor shall have to hand over the wood of damaged vegetation to forest authorities
as per directions at his cost.
(v) Excavation of trenches in ordinary soil/ hard dense soil/ hard dense soil mixed with
boulders/decomposed rocks/hard rock/saturated soil for laying pipeline below ground as
per the L-section approved by the department. An average clear cover of 0.9 m shall
generally be maintained.
(vi) Preparation of trench bed, providing sand bedding where pipe is laid below ground in
stretches having boulders/rocky strata.
(vii) Refilling & compaction of trenches.
(viii) Providing support structures such as saddle supports or portal frames for pipe laying
above ground, wherever required.
(ix) Construction of thrust blocks at each deflection in horizontal and vertical alignment of
pipeline exceeding 5 degree for vertical bends and 10 degrees for horizontal bends.
(x) The pipeline above ground shall be suitably clamped, to prevent floating of pipes in
submerged conditions.
(xi) Interconnection of pipelines to CWRs and ESRs including providing all specials, civil &
mechanical works.
(xii) To repair damage to pipelines, electrical poles, telephone poles, optical fiber cables etc.
and providing suitable structures for crossing the existing other rising mains during laying
clear water mains.
(xiii) Providing, testing and installing all materials such as bends, tees, reducers with long
radius, dismantling joints, insulating joints, rubber rings, flanges, nuts & bolts, rubber
sheets etc. of required specifications for the installations.
(xiv) Providing anchor blocks wherever necessary.
(xv) Providing protection for foundations of pedestals/portals against soil erosion.
(xvi) Sectional testing of pipeline.
(xvii) Removal of defects in laying and jointing works of all pipelines, valves and specials.
(xviii) Any damages of road during the laying & jointing of pipe line and other activities, the
contractor has to restore the same to the satisfaction of the concerned authority.
(xix) Compliance of all safety rules at work sites.
(xx) Making connection of new pipes to existing pipes in transmission and distribution as per
directions of EIC.
(xxi) Cleaning, Disinfections, testing and commissioning of all pipelines laid.
(xxii) Other ancillary works.
Road,Rail,River/Nallah Crossing :
(xxiii) The department shall apply for the required road/rail/canal crossing permissions but it
shall be sole responsibility of the contractor to obtain permission for Road/Rail crossing
from concern authority by furnishing all details/drawing/design and undertaking etc.
required for the same time to time. However department PHED may assist the contractor.
Any fees, levies etc. paid for the permission shall be borne by the department. Any
lapse/delay occur to the project due to late approval and thereof execution shall be the
contractor’s responsibility. The contractor shall be responsible for any damage occurred
to the telephone lines, distribution/rising main water and gas pipe lines, sewerage pipe
line, roads, drains while laying pipeline and shall be liable to pay the amount levied by
respective department for the repair and / or damages so occurred.
(xxiv) Encasing with MS pipe of carrier main, as DI/MS pipe line or as per specifications of
concerned department, shall be provided at all Railway/canal/NH or SH Road/drain
crossing and drawing and specifications of concern department shall be adopted by
contractor.
(xxv) The contractor should identify the number of crossings on National/State highways and
district roads etc. The scope under this item includes all road crossings where pipelines
are expected to cross any road as finalized by EIC. As per preliminary survey the
following NH and Railway Track crossings have been identified and are as defined below
:-
Crossings
S.
Pipeline Stretch
No. National Highway Railway Track
1 All stretches 1 0

(xxvi) Providing a suitable designed and approved scour-proof bed for crossing of pipeline
below the scour depth of nallah, drain, canal or river. For pipe crossings of drains above
ground, the invert level of pipe shall be kept 1 m above H.F.L / road level, using suitable
support structures. The structures must be protected by suitably planned river training
works. The crossing below the scour depth or above HFL has to be decided in co-
ordination of the EIC. Detailed drawing of crossing arrangements proposed to be used
shall be presented to Engineer-In-charge for approval.
(xxvii) The laying of pipe shall not obstruct the flow of water in the natural drains. The drains
may be crossed underground at scour depth with MS pipe in river crossing. The pipe
shall be encased through pushing method and or as per specifications of concern
department. The structures must be protected by suitably planned river training works.
(xxviii) The contractor shall carry out surge analysis for all the pumping mains using IISC,
Bangalore, Any IIT or Linga Reddy Institute, Hyderabad and get the same approval by
EIC. Based on the approval given by EIC, all the mechanical & civil work related to
supply & installation of surge control accessories shall be carried out by the contractor.
The Zero velocity Valves shall be installed in suitable RCC Chambers provided with
manhole cover & locking, drainage, access arrangement. The work also include
providing & fixing of pipe lengths, bends, tees, dismantling joint, nuts & bolts etc.
(xxix) The contractor is required to establish a field laboratory at each site office for ensuring
the timely inspection of the material and works.
(xxx) The contractor shall carry out all works civil and/or mechanical work which includes
supply of specials, valves, tees, bends etc for interconnecting the proposed pumping
mains under this contract. The pumping mains shall be connected to the outlet pipe from
outlet chamber of pumping stations at their upstream and shall be connected to inlet pipe
of existing/proposed ESRs & CWRs.
(xxxi) Marking of laid pipelines on GIS Platform. The contractor shall submit geo-referenced
AUTOCAD drawings for the complete pipeline network laid under the contract. Location
of all valves and Tees, bends, junctions and points of change in alignment of pipeline
shall be determined using differential GPS of 0.6 m accuracy or better. Attributes of
pipeline, like diameter, material, class etc shall be linked with GIS.
(xxxii) The work shall include all other items & accessories not specified above but required to
complete the work on turn-key basis to achieve the intended objectives in safe, secure,
reliable manner adopting best engineering practices.
2.4.2 CLUSTER DISTRIBUTION MAINS & INTERNAL VILLAGE

PIPELINES:
The work of cluster distribution mains and internal village distribution under this contract shall include
pipelines as detailed below and shall be a combination of HDPE (PE100) PN 0.6 and DI K-7 for cluster
distribution mains and uPVC Class-3/HDPE (PE100) PN0.6 for internal village distribution pipes. The
contractor shall have choice to use uPVC Class-3 pipes or HDPE Class-6 pipes for internal village
distribution.
Cluster-wise approx. lengths of HDPE (PE100) PN0.6 pipes to be used as cluster distribution mains under
this contract is as follows:
Abstract of HDPE Pipes-JAHAZPUR

S.N Cluster 200 310 Total
Cluster Name 110 MM 125 MM 160 MM 250 MM Length,
o. No. MM MM
Mtrs
1 CL 1001 Gandher 5310 0 900 0 0 0 6210

Abstract of HDPE Pipes-JAHAZPUR

S.N Cluster 200 310 Total
Cluster Name 110 MM 125 MM 160 MM 250 MM Length,
o. No. MM MM
Mtrs
2 CL 1002 Hatoriya 3870 0 4230 0 2700 0 10800
3 CL 1003 Gangithala 2030 0 2050 3470 2550 0 10100
4 CL 1004A Kurdiya 1800 0 6530 50 0 0 8380
5 CL 1004B Amarawasi 0 4140 3060 4950 0 0 12150
5 CL 1005 Uncha 3690 0 0 3490 3600 50 10830
6 CL 1006 Kuchalwara Khurd 3180 0 0 3130 0 0 6310
7 CL 1007 Gadoli 4460 3900 4770 0 0 0 13130
8 CL 1008 Chhejlon Ka khera 6260 0 1560 50 0 0 7870
9 CL 1009 Chhabariya 900 0 6800 1110 1400 0 10210
10 CL 1010 Jamoli near ridge 5610 0 2610 5310 700 0 14230
11 CL 1011 Pander 3760 0 1330 1240 0 50 6380
12 CL 1012 Taswariya 6100 0 5430 7880 50 0 19460
13 CL 2013 Agariya 3780 0 5670 0 50 0 9500
14 CL 1014 Ropan 3040 8190 7950 2700 0 0 21880
15 CL 1015 Pachanpura 450 4750 3490 0 0 0 8690
16 CL 1016 Gurha 3110 2880 0 2070 0 0 8060
17 CL 1017A Peeploond 0 0 2700 50 0 0 2750
18 CL 1017B Subhash Nagar 950 0 0 0 0 0 950
19 CL 1018 Beera Mata 6750 0 4390 590 0 1580 13310
20 CL 1019 Luhari Kalan 6170 0 770 50 0 0 6990
21 CL 1020 Intunda 4260 0 2050 5810 0 0 12120
22 CL 1021 Biletha 2770 0 2660 6620 0 50 12100
23 CL 1026 Sherpur 4120 0 3060 2750 0 0 9930
24 CL 1027 Kishangarh 9270 2340 0 0 0 0 11610
25 CL 1028 Ulela 3380 0 900 0 0 0 4280
26 CL 1029 Khhajoori 6550 1440 0 900 0 0 8890
27 CL 1030 Amalda 13820 7520 2140 0 0 0 23480
28 CL 1031 Ratanpura 5970 3490 2340 4440 0 0 16240
29 CL 1032 Amargarh 18930 6120 0 0 900 0 25950
30 CL 1033 Teethoda 15820 4770 2880 2520 0 0 25990
31 CL 1034 Joraji Ka Khera 2070 4050 0 0 0 0 6120
32 CL 1035 Manoharpura 0 900 0 0 0 0 900
33 CL 1036 Sabalpur 2460 3600 900 0 0 0 6960
34 CL 1037 Teetori 0 3540 0 3780 0 0 7320
LS 4119 1580 2081 1614 306 44 9746
Total 164759 63210 83251 64574 12256 1774 389826
Abstract of HDPE Pipes-Kotri

S.N Cluster No. Cluster Name 110 MM 125 MM 160 MM 200 MM 250 MM 310 MM Total
o. Length,
Mtrs
1 915 KISHANGARH 13350 9180 0 3600 0 0 26130
2 916 GANDHERI 8370 320 3000 0 1890 0 13580
3 925 NANDRI 0 880 4280 2320 900 0 8380
4 933 KANKROLIGHATI 0 0 0 900 0 0 900
21720 10380 7280 6820 2790 0 48990
Cluster-wise approx. lengths of DI K-7 pipes to be used as cluster distribution mains under this contract is
as follows:
Abstract of DI Pipes- JAHAZPUR
S.N Cluster 100 150 200 250 300 350 Total
Cluster Name Length
o. No. mm mm mm mm mm mm , Mtrs
1 CL 1001 Gandher 590 100 0 0 0 0 690
2 CL 1002 Hatoriya 430 470 0 300 0 0 1200
3 CL 1003 Gangithala 230 230 390 290 0 0 1140
4 CL 1004A Kurdiya 200 730 10 0 0 0 940
5 CL 1004B Amarawasi 0 800 550 0 0 0 1350
5 CL 1005 Uncha 410 0 390 400 10 0 1210
6 CL 1006 Kuchalwara Khurd 360 0 350 0 0 0 710
7 CL 1007 Gadoli 500 970 0 0 0 0 1470
8 CL 1008 Chhejlon Ka khera 700 180 10 0 0 0 890
9 CL 1009 Chhabariya 100 760 130 160 0 0 1150
10 CL 1010 Jamoli near ridge 630 290 590 80 0 0 1590
11 CL 1011 Pander 420 150 140 0 10 0 720
12 CL 1012 Taswariya 680 610 880 10 0 0 2180
13 CL 2013 Agariya 420 630 0 10 0 0 1060
14 CL 1014 Ropan 340 1800 300 0 0 1000 3440
15 CL 1015 Pachanpura 50 920 0 0 0 0 970
16 CL 1016 Gurha 350 320 230 0 0 0 900
17 CL 1017A Peeploond 0 300 10 0 0 0 310
18 CL 1017B Subhash Nagar 110 0 0 0 0 0 110
19 CL 1018 Beera Mata 750 490 70 0 180 0 1490
20 CL 1019 Luhari Kalan 690 90 10 0 0 0 790
21 CL 1020 Intunda 480 230 650 0 0 0 1360
22 CL 1021 Biletha 310 300 740 0 10 0 1360
23 CL 1026 Sherpur 460 340 310 0 0 0 1110
24 CL 1027 Kishangarh 1030 260 0 0 0 0 1290
25 CL 1028 Ulela 380 100 0 0 0 0 480
Abstract of DI Pipes- JAHAZPUR

S.N Cluster 100 150 200 250 300 350 Total
Cluster Name Length
o. No. mm mm mm mm mm mm , Mtrs
26 CL 1029 Khhajoori 730 160 100 0 0 0 990
27 CL 1030 Amalda 1540 1080 0 0 0 0 2620
28 CL 1031 Ratanpura 670 650 500 0 0 0 1820
29 CL 1032 Amargarh 2110 680 0 100 0 0 2890
30 CL 1033 Teethoda 1760 850 280 0 0 0 2890
31 CL 1034 Joraji Ka Khera 230 450 0 0 0 0 680
32 CL 1035 Manoharpura 0 100 0 0 0 0 100
33 CL 1036 Sabalpur 280 500 0 0 0 0 780
34 CL 1037 Teetori 0 400 420 0 0 0 820
LS 460 409 181 35 5 26 1115
Total 18400 16349 7241 1385 215 1026 44615
Abstract of DI Pipes-Kotri
S.N Cluster Cluster Name 100 150 mm 200 mm 250 mm 300 mm 350
Total
o. No. mm mm Length,
Mtrs
1 915 KISHANGARH 1490 1020 400 0 0 0

2910
2 916 GANDHERI 930 370 0 210 0 0
1510
3 925 NANDRI 0 580 260 100 0 0
940
4 933 KANKROLIGHATI 0 0 100 0 0 0
100
2420 1970 760 310 0 0
5460

As per
original Work
Balance
S. No. Type Length
(KM)
Length (KM)
(KM)
1 100 DI K-7 S-0.000 S-20.820
L&J-0.000 L&J-20.820
T- 0.000 T-20.820
C- 0.000 C- 20.820
20.82
2 150 DI K-7 S-0.000 S-18.319
L&J-0.000 L&J-18.319
T- 0.000 T- 18.319
C- 0.000 C- 18.319
18.319
3 200 DI K-7 S-0.000 S-8.001
L&J-0.000 L&J-8.001
T- 0.000 T- 8.001
C- 0.000 C- 8.001
8.001
4 250 DI K-7 S-1.6940 S-0.0010
L&J-0.000 L&J-1.6950
T- 0.000 T- 1.6950
C- 0.000 C- 1.6950
1.695
5 300 DI K-7 S-0.2145 S-0.0005
L&J-0.000 L&J-0.2150
T- 0.000 T- 0.2150
C- 0.000 C- 0.2150
0.215
6 350 DI K-7 S-1.0230 S-0.0030
L&J-0.000 L&J-1.0260
T- 0.000 T- 1.0260
C- 0.000 C- 1.0260
1.026
Total 50.076 S-2.9315 S-47.1445
L&J-0.000 L&J-50.0760
T- 0.000 T- 50.0760
C- 0.000 C- 50.0760
The details of internal village distribution pipe lines is given below which shall be laid in the village each
village after Village Transfer Chamber (VTC) which shall be constructed in each of the 213 villages. Water
shall be supplied in the villages through PSPs and CWTs. Provision for construction of 2981 PSPs (one
PSP @100 persons) and 682 CWTs (one CWT @ 500 persons) has been taken for all villages. Details of
internal village distribution pipelines which are to be laid in each village @0.75 m per person are given
below:
S. No. Pipe Size (mm) Type Length (KM)

1 90 uPVC class-3/HDPE PN 0.6 108.27
Total 216.55

2.4.3 DISTRIBUTION MAINS & INTERNAL DISTRIBUTION PIPELINES OF

JAHAZPUR TOWN:
The details of distribution mains and internal distribution pipelines to be provided and laid for Jahazpur
town are as under:
a) Distribution Mains For Jahazpur Town:
S. No. Pipe Diameter (mm) and Class Qty. in meters

1 100 mm, DI K-7 1695
2 150 mm, DI K-7 1220
3 200 mm, DI K-7 145
Total 3060
b) Internal Distribution Network of Jahazpur Town:
S. No. Pipe Diameter (mm) and Class Qty. in meters

1 100 mm DI K-7 11505
Total 11505
The scope includes the following requirements.

(i) Manufacturing and testing at works, transportation, packing, supply of uPVC Class-
3/HDPE (PE100) PN0.6 and DI K-7, specials, jointing material etc to be used. Stacking
and/or storage of material, re-handling and to lay pipes below ground by excavation and
refilling the trench ensure by average cover of 0.9 meters generally and construction of
pedestals/portals for pipe support to lay pipe above ground, if required and then to carry
out sectional testing, pre-commissioning checks, full completion tests and trial runs. The
water required for sectional testing after laying of pipe shall be arranged by the contractor
at his own cost only.
(ii) Submission of L-section for approval of Engineer-in-Charge prior to commence the work
and after approval take up the work and submit As-built drawings after laying and testing
of pipeline.
(iii) Setting out of works, Laying and jointing of pipeline including lowering, placing at proper
alignment, cutting pipes, chamfering complete in all respects. The work of laying and
jointing of pipes and pipe appurtenances should be done at required levels. The pipeline
alignment in general shall be kept on the outer edge of the existing/proposed road
boundaries. Wherever this is not possible, on approval of Engineer-In-Charge, the pipe
can be laid near the road or within the carriageway. No extra payment shall be made on
account of additional excavation required for placing pipes further away from the road
centres. No additional payment shall be made for excavation of road surface or any other
strata for the approved pipe alignment. The alignment approved by the Engineer-In-
Charge shall be final and binding on the contractor.
(iv) Cutting of the vegetation for the purpose of excavation. However, it will be contractor’s
responsibility to obtain all kind of clearances, if required, from Forest Department for
cutting of trees wherever necessitated for keeping the alignment straight and to get the
access for laying of pipe line.
(v) Laying and jointing of pipeline including lowering, placing at proper alignment, cutting
pipes, chamfering complete in all respects.
(vi) Excavation for trenches in ordinary soil/ hard dense soil/ hard dense soil mixed with
boulders/decomposed rocks/hard rock/saturated soil.

(vii) Wherever the pipeline is laid with an embankment to provide minimum specified cover,
the embankment shall be so constructed so that it doesn’t create pounding of water.
(viii) Preparation of trench bed, providing sand bedding where pipe is laid below ground in
boulder / rocky strata.
(ix) Refilling & compaction of trenches in confirmation to the requirement of this tender
document.
(x) Construction of thrust blocks at each deflection in horizontal and vertical alignment of
pipeline exceeding 5 degree for vertical bends and 10 degrees for horizontal bends.
(xi) To repair damage to pipelines, sewer, drainage pipelines electrical poles, telephone
poles, optical fiber cables etc. and providing suitable structures for crossing the existing
other rising mains during laying raw/clear water mains.
(xii) Interconnection of newly laid pipe lines with existing pipelines (wherever required for
villages having piped schemes and for town) & to connect these pipe lines to proposed
PSPs and CWTs including providing all specials, civil & mechanical works;
(xiii) Providing, testing and installing all materials such as bends, tees, reducers with long
radius, dismantling joints, insulating joints, rubber rings, flanges, nuts & bolts, rubber
sheets etc. of required specifications for the installations.
(xiv) Providing anchor blocks wherever necessary.
(xv) Providing protection for foundations of pedestals/portals against soil erosion.
(xvi) Removal of defects in laying and jointing works of all pipelines, valves and specials.
(xvii) Any damages of road during the laying & jointing of pipe line and other activities, the
contractor has to be liable to deposit the amount demanding by concern authority for
restoration of the same.
(xviii) Compliance of all safety rules at work sites.
(xix) Making connection of new pipes to existing pipes in transmission and distribution as per
directions of EIC.
(xx) Cleaning, Disinfections, testing and commissioning of all pipelines laid.
(xxi) Other ancillary works.
Road,Rail,River/Nallah Crossing
(xxii) The department shall apply for the required road/rail/canal crossing permissions but it
shall be sole responsibility of the contractor to obtain permission for Road/Rail crossing
from concern authority by furnishing all details/drawing/design and undertaking etc.
required for the same time to time. However department PHED may assist the contractor.
Any fees, levies etc. paid for the permission shall be borne by the department. Any
lapse/delay occur to the project due to late approval and thereof execution shall be the
contractor’s responsibility. The contractor shall be responsible for any damage occurred
to the telephone lines, distribution/rising main water and gas pipe lines, sewerage pipe
line, roads, drains while laying pipeline and shall be liable to pay the amount levied by
respective department for the repair and / or damages so occurred.
(xxiii) Encasing with MS pipe of carrier main, as DI/MS pipe line or as per specifications of
concerned department, shall be provided at all Railway/canal/NH or SH Road/drain
crossing and drawing and specifications of concern department shall be adopted by
contractor.
(xxiv) The contractor should identify the number of crossings on Railway, National/State
highways and district roads etc. The scope under this item includes all railway & road
crossings where pipelines are expected to cross any road as finalized by EIC.
(xxv) Providing a suitable designed and approved scour-proof bed for crossing of pipeline
below the scour depth of nallah, drain, canal or river. For pipe crossings of drains above
ground, the invert level of pipe shall be kept 0.9 m above H.F.L / road level, using
suitable support structures. The structures must be protected by suitably planned river

turning works. The crossing below the scour depth or above HFL has to be decided in
co-ordination of the EIC. Detailed drawing of crossing arrangements proposed to be
used shall be presented to Engineer-In-charge for approval.
(xxvi) The laying of pipe shall not obstruct the flow of water in the natural drains. The drains
may be crossed underground at scour depth with MS pipe in river crossing. The
structures must be protected by suitably planned river training works.
(xxvii) The contractor shall carry out all works civil and/or mechanical work which includes
supply of specials, valves, tees, bends etc for interconnecting the proposed water
distribution mains under this contract. The distribution lines shall be connected ESRs
(Existing/Proposed) before Duck-foot bend at their upstream and shall also be
connected to pipes of distribution mains;
(xxviii) Marking of laid pipelines on GIS Platform. The contractor shall submit geo-referenced
AUTOCAD drawings for the complete pipeline network laid under the contract. Location
of all valves and Tees, bends, junctions and points of change in alignment of pipeline
shall be determined using differential GPS of 0.6 m accuracy or better. Attributes of
pipeline, like diameter, material, class etc shall be linked with GIS.
(xxix) The work shall include all other items & accessories not specified above but required to
complete the work to achieve the intended objectives in safe, secure, reliable manner
adopting best engineering practices.
2.4.4 SECTIONALIZING VALVES
Providing, installation and testing of on-line butterfly/sluice valves, of the same diameter as that
of pipeline, at all junction points, on the main incoming pipe as well on all branch pipes. All
valves to be installed at a particular junction may be housed in one chamber of appropriate size,
the drawing of which shall be got approved from the EIC.
The pressure rating of valves shall be as per the design pressure at the point of installation but not less than
PN 1.0. The locations of sectionalizing valves shall be proposed as per site conditions and shall be got
approved from Engineer-In-Charge. No sectionalizing valve shall be required for a section of pipeline
(node to node) of length less than 5 km. The sectionalizing valves shall be installed in chambers with a
dismantling joint and other specials. Minimum clear dimensions of the chamber shall be as per
specifications given in Chapter 3 of this Volume of tender documents. The wall, roof and other structural
members of the chambers shall be constructed as per design, which shall be got approved from the
Engineer-In-Charge.
The details of sectionalizing Butterfly/Sluice Valves to be provided, installed and tested including
supply, testing, installation of Dismantling Joints, Jointing Material such as rubber gasket, nuts,
bolts etc, are as under.
S. No. Diameter & Pressure Rating Qty.
Butterfly Valves:
1. 200 mm PN1.6 3
2. 250 mm PN1.6 1
3. 300 mm PN1.6 4
4. 350 mm PN1.6 2
5. 400 mm PN1.6 1
6. 700 mm PN1.6 8
7. 800 mm PN1.6 5
Sluice Valves:

1. 100 mm PN1.6 108
2. 150 mm PN1.6 110
3. 200 mm PN1.6 44
4. 250 mm PN1.6 6
5. 300 mm PN1.6 2
2.4.5 DOUBLE BALL KINETIC AIR VALVES

The scope of work under this item includes providing Double Ball (Steel Balls) Kinetic Air valves
with isolating sluice valves along with required connecting pipe, specials, clamps, jointing material
etc and its installation, testing etc on pumping mains/distribution mains. The work will also include
providing, testing & installation of respective size of kinetic air valves with isolating sluice valves.
The air valves shall be placed as per the approved on the L-sections. The kinetic air valves with
isolation sluice valves shall be provided at an interval 500 meter and contractor shall show the
location of the air valves on the L- section as per survey.
Number of Kinetic Air Valves as required under this contract shall be as under:-

1 80 mm PN 1.6 89
2 40 mm PN 1.6 1326
Typical arrangement for installation of air valve has been provided in drawings in Volume III of tender
document.
2.4.6 SECTIONALIZING VALVE CHAMBER
The work includes Construction of RCC Sectionalizing Valve Chambers at each location of sectionalizing
valve along with providing manhole cover with locking arrangement, at least one MS ladder for access to
floor of chamber and suitable pedestals for supporting valves and pipes.
Number of sectionalizing valves chambers as required under this contract shall be as under but
shall not be limited to;
S. No. Chamber suitable to House Numbers

Butterfly/Sluice Valves of
Diameter
1. 100 mm 108
2. 150 mm 110
3. 200 mm 47
4. 250 mm 7
5. 300 mm 6
6. 350 mm 2
7. 400 mm 1
8. 700 mm 8

9. 800 mm 5
Typical arrangement required is provided in drawings provided in Volume III of this tender document.
2.4.7 SCOUR VALVE
Providing, installation and testing 65 nos., 80 mm dia. scour valves in all transfer mains and
rising mains of diameters 250 mm and above at an average spacing of 5 km. No scour valve shall
be required for distribution pipelines. The locations of scour valves in transfer mains and rising
mains shall be proposed as per site conditions and shall be got approved from Engineer-In-
Charge. The scour valves shall be installed in chambers with a dismantling pipe and other
specials. Minimum clear dimensions of the chamber shall be as shown in drawings of tender
documents. The wall, roof and other structural members of the chambers shall be constructed as
per design, which shall be got approved from the Engineer-In-Charge.
Scour valves shall be provided at locations included in the L-section as approved by the deptt.
The scope or work under this item includes providing & fixing of Scour Valve, valve rod,
Dismantling Pipe, Jointing Material, Tees, Bends etc. The numbers of scour valves shall be as
follows;
S. No. Diameter & Pressure Rating Numbers

1 80 mm PN 1.6 65
Typical arrangement & specials required is provided in drawings provided in Volume III of this tender
document.
2.4.8 SCOUR VALVE CHAMBER

Construction of RCC Scour Valve Chamber at each location of scour valve with manhole cover,
cover slab & its locking arrangement and a MS ladder/M.S. lugs for access to chamber floor and
suitable pedestals for supporting valves and pipes. In case where the chamber can be drained in
a nearby drain, stone pitching shall be done at the outlet to prevent erosion and settling.
S. No. Chamber Suitable to house Scour Numbers

Valve of Diameter
1. 80 mm 65
Typical arrangement is provided in drawings provided in Volume III of this tender document.
2.4.9 SURGE PROTECTION SYSTEM

The contractor shall get the Surge analysis of all Pumping Mains (transfer mains and rising
mains) done from the Indian Institute of Science, Bangalore, Any IIT or Linga Reddy Institute,
Hyderabad on the basis of actual survey and field data collected by him and based on it. He shall
submit the surge protection system designs for approval of Engineer-In-Charge. He shall be
responsible for manufacturing, construction, commissioning, testing of surge protection system
and shall take up all the necessary construction work and installations of equipment for surge
protection as per the approval given by the Engineer-In-Charge.

2.5 VILLAGE TRANSFER CHAMBER
The work includes construction of RCC Village Transfer Chamber to House the Ultrasonic Type
Water Meters at 213 locations. The work also includes providing manhole cover with locking
arrangement, at least one MS ladder for access to floor of chamber and suitable pedestals for
supporting meters, valves and pipes etc in all respect. The work shall also include making suitable
holes in floor/Walls for passage of pipes and making them good.
2.6 WATER METERS IN VTC
Ultrasonic Type Water Meters, with remote reading device capable of transmitting data through
GSM network (via SMS), shall be provided in all village-transfer-chambers.
The location & type of meters shall be got approved by Engineer-in-charge. Along with meters, a
pressure sensor shall be installed at each location. The remote reading device which has been
installed for transmitting flow data of meters through GSM, should also be able to log in the
readings of the pressure sensors and transmit the same through GSM to MCC centre. All
required fittings shall be provided by the Contractor.
The above system should be able to fulfill the following objectives:
(i) Consumption above the contractual maximum flow rate value is recorded.
(ii) Inform O&M staff on their mobile phone, in case of pressure drop
(iii) Offer 24/7 monitoring of key accounts by sending alarms, via SMS, in case of
meter blockage, tampering or abnormal consumption behavior
(iv) Provide a picture of supply pattern as well as consumption profiles of each village
(v) Generate water bill of each village
(vi) In addition to the installation of the above referred equipment(s), it shall be the
responsibility of the contractor to provide suitable equipment(s)/meters for testing
the accuracy of installed meters from time to time, to record; read and provide
reading of the meters installed at remote sites and for control of flow in different
branches so as to achieve the objectives of providing water equal to the designed
demand to each of the individual village. Pressure gauges shall be installed at
suitable locations on the pumping/gravity main to monitor the system.
2.6.1 HANDHELD COMPUTER WITH SOFTWARE FOR FLOW DATA

ACQUISITION
The contractor shall supply a hand held computer with all accessories to down load data remotely from the
ultrasonic bulk water meters proposed to be installed at Village Transfer Chambers.
The handheld computer shall have following characteristics;
Microprocessor : 16 bits
Clocking Speed : 27,684 MHz
Display : LCD Screen
Power Supply : Rechargeable Alkaline AA Batteries
Memory : Internal RAM Memory, ROM Memory
Communication Port : RS 232 connectors etc
Operating temperature range : -50C to +500C
Storage temperature range : -50C to +550C
The radio Receiver with hand held computer shall have following characteristics:
Frequency : 868,95 MHz

Operating temperature range : -50C to +500C
Storage temperature range : -50C to +750C
Protection : IP 43
Power Supply : Rechargeable Batteries with a life of two
days
Interfaces : Serial Port for handheld computer
Serial Port for IrDA optical head
The handheld computer shall be accompanied with software integrated into its flash card and suitable to all
types of reading. It should have facility to communicate with PC, radio device programming, manual &
radio reading, reading modes of detailed, semiautomatic & automatic etc. The contractor shall also supply
and install necessary licensed software’s to transfer data from hand held computer to PC having interface
with radio reading system with existing database. It shall have modules for setup, communication with
handheld terminal and reading analysis.
2.7 CLEAR WATER PUMPING STATIONS
The work includes design and construction of the clear water pumping stations with providing
and installing all mechanical, electrical and instrumentation plant and equipment, laying, jointing
and testing of the pipe systems within the limits of contract and commissioning of the pumping
station. Pumping stations at Jahazpur, Pander, Khajoori, Amarwasi and Kishangarh are to be
constructed for rural areas and at Jahazpur town for urban area. Sizes of these pumping Stations
shall be sufficient to accommodate the pumping machinery and instrumentation work required at
particular pumping station.
2.7.1 Civil Works:
The Civil Works includes:

(ii) Detailed contour survey of headworks of all the pumping stations (entire allotted land),
preparation and submission of the layout plan, elevation, structural design and drawings,
foundations and associated civil and pipeline works. The Contractor has to provide large
scale coherent drawings for all units to scales as appropriate subject to the prior approval of
the Engineer-in-Charge. The drawings shall be in standard sizes only. The elevation of the
pump houses should be architecturally attractive with use of decorative stones on the front
facia.
(iii) Detailed soil survey at site location, the soil characteristics (bearing capacity, chemical
analysis, soil receptivity for earthing) in order to decide the dimensions of the foundations
of the buildings and other structures. Additionally, Contractor has to assess the type of soil,
the strata, the level of ground water and other indicators, if any, and establish soil profiles
and submit these to the EIC for approval.
(iv) Structural design and reinforcement drawings for all structures of the Work shall be based
on Geo-Tech investigation. SBC tests shall be got done by approved agency. The
Contractor shall be fully responsible for the structural safety of the buildings. The proof
checking of the structural design should be got done from any Government Engineering
College of Rajasthan.
(v) Preparation and submission of all detailed working drawings of pumping stations on the
basis of designs and drawings approved by the EIC.
(vi) Construction of the RCC framed structure pump houses at each of the 8 headworks suitable
to accommodate all pumps, motors, drives and its accessories, switch gears, panels,
capacitors and capacitor control panels, suction & delivery pipes with valves and
accessories and circulation area, etc. Pump house building at Jahazpur and Amarwasi
headworks shall be of minimum 350 sqm each, at Pander headworks of minimum 400 sqm,
at Khajoori headworks of minimum 450 sqm and at Kishangarh headworks of minimum
250 sqm. The pump house building at Jahazpur town headworks shall be of minimum 150
sqm.
(vii) The minimum spacing between the bays for the pumps shall be kept as 1.5 meters. A
maintenance bay of minimum 2 meters width of 10 sq. meters shall be provided. The
Electrical control panel room and instrumentation control panel shall be installed with
minimum 15 Sq. meters. Office cum administrative block of minimum 20 Sq. meters and a
lavatory of minimum 4 sq. meters shall be provided in each pumping station.
(viii) Construction of Chlorination room of minimum 40 sqm within the campus at Jahazpur
headworks, Pander headworks, Khajoori headworks, Amarwasi headworks and Kishangarh
headworks for rural areas and at Jahazpur town headworks for urban town and chlorine
tonners storage yard near CWR in pump house, with associated approach road from the
nearest road of campus to transport equipment and tonners.
(ix) Providing cable trenches, cable trays etc. within the pump house building for installation of
motors and other electrical and instrumentation equipment. The trenches shall be covered
with pre-cast cement concrete slabs/MS chequered plates for designed loads.
(x) Providing galvanised M.S. staircase for access to all the cluster pumps floor area for better
approach and a galvanised MS stair for access to roof.
(xi) Providing Aluminum framed glazed door entrance and windows for the control room.
(xii) Providing and installation of all safety equipment (fire extinguisher and electrical shock
resistant gloves) to ensure safety of the working staff.
(xiii) Providing lighting fixtures along with cabling, distribution boards, switches and other
accessories for indoor and outdoor areas of:
• All around the building outer area and the approaches from pump house and other areas
as mentioned in relevant specifications
• At respective pump/motor floor areas, switchgear rooms, control room, battery room,
office areas, lobbies, staircases and other areas.
(xiv) Providing pipe supports and thrust blocks/anchors for delivery pipes, valves and manifold
pipes. Construction of chamber for all valves and meters installed outside the pump house
but within the head works.
(xv) Providing at least 50 Sq. meters of parking space outside the pump house building at all 8
headworks.
(xvi) Providing fire hydrants at suitable location at all headworks to be constructed in this
contract.
(xvii) Civil works for exhaust fans and ventilation system for motor floor area, switch control
rooms and pipe galleries within all pump house buildings to be constructed under this
contract.
(xviii) Civil works for installation of EOT/HOT crane with gantry girders at all pumping
stations to be constructed in this contract.
(xix) Providing one First Aid Kit at all pumping station.
(xx) Providing false ceiling in the control room at each pumping station.
2.7.2 Mechanical Works:
The works included are as defined below but shall not be limited to:
(i) Providing and installation of pumps includes design, manufacture and testing at
manufacturer’s works, packing for shipment, delivery to the site, supply, unloading,
storing, complete erection, pre-commissioning tests, trial runs and commissioning at all
the 8 pumping stations. 100% standby pumps shall be provided for each section of rising
main. The pumping station-wise details of pumps to be provided and installed for each
section of transfer main/rising main is given below.
Section of Rising Main

S. FROM TO Discharge Head in m No. of Pumps to
No. in LPS be provided
Khajoori PS
1 Amalda Jn. ESR Manoharpura
2 Amalda Jn. ESR Amalda 56
3 Khajoori PS Amalda Jn. 10.15 2
4 Khajoori PS ESR Khajoori 7.40 27 2
5 Khajoori PS ESR Jorji Ka khera 3.76 63 2
6 Kishangarh Jn. ESR Kishangarh
7 Kishangarh Jn. ESR Sherpur 30
8 Khajoori PS Kishangarh Jn. 9.11 2
9 Amargarh Jn. ESR Ratangarh
10 Amargarh Jn. ESR Amargarh 79
11 Khajoori PS Amargarh Jn. 16.69 2
12 Uleta Jn. ESR Sabalpur
13 Uleta Jn. ESR Uleta 46
14 Khajoori PS Uleta Jn. 5.61 2
15 Jn.-1 ESR Gurha
16 Jn.-1 ESR Pachanpura 43
17 Khajoori PS Jn.-1 13.23 2
18 Peeplond Jn. ESR Peeplond
19 Peeplond Jn. ESR Subhash Nagar 39
20 Khajoori PS Peeplond Jn. 6.28 2
21 Khajoori PS ESR Teethori 7.01 56 2
Pander PS
22 Jn.-1 ESR Taswariya
23 Jn.-1 ESR Titotra 78 2
24 Pander PS Jn.-1 16.60
25 Pander PS ESR Gandher 3.61 55 2
26 Pander PS ESR Harotiya 6.30 32 2
27 Pander PS ESR Ropan 19.23 86 2
28 Pander PS ESR Pander 10.05 30 2
29 Jn.-2 ESR Jamoli
51
30 Jn.-2 ESR Agariya

Section of Rising Main

S. FROM TO Discharge Head in m No. of Pumps to
No. in LPS be provided
31 Pander PS Jn.-2 14.91 2
Jahazpur PS
32 Jahazpur PS ESR Chabbariya 6.99 36 2
33 pp Beera Mata Jn. ESR Biletha
34 pp Beera Mata Jn. ESR pp Beera Mata 65
35 Jahazpur PS pp Beera Mata Jn. 20.06 2
36 Barani Ka barada Jn. ESR Chhejlon ka khera
37 Barani Ka barada Jn. ESR Gangithala 50
38 Jahazpur PS Barani Ka Barada Jn. 13.67 2
39 Jahazpur PS CWR at Pander 70.71 13 2
40 Jahazpur PS CWR at Amrawasi 54.63 29 2
Amrawasi PS
41 Amrawasi PS ESR Uncha 12.47 41 2
42 Amrawasi PS ESR Amrawasi 12.14 31 2
43 Amrawasi PS ESR Kurdia 4.82 62 2
44 Amrawasi PS ESR Kuchalwara Khurd 7.30 51 2
45 Amrawasi PS ESR Gadoli 7.17 67 2
46 Luhari Khera Jn. ESR Itunda
47 Luhari Khera Jn. ESR Luhari Khera 71
48 Amrawasi PS Luhari Khera Jn. 15.54 2
PS Kishangarh
49 PS Kishangarh ESR Kishangarh 9.59 32 2
50 PS Kishangarh ESR Nandrai 11.25 32 2
51 Jn. Ganderi ESR Kankroliya Ghati
52 Jn. Ganderi ESR Ganderi 47
53 PS Kishangarh Jn. Ganderi 11.40 2
Section of Rising Main No. of

S. Discharge Head in Pumps to be
No. From To in LPS m provided
1. Jahazpur Town PS
1 Jahazpur Town PS
Headworks Zone 1 23.70 75 2
2 Jahazpur Town PS 2
Headworks Zone 2 18.70 57
(ii) Providing & installation of minimum 3 Ton capacity EOT at Jahazpur, Pander, Khajoori,
Amarwasi for Rural area pumping stations and 3 Ton manually operated overhead
travelling crane with gantry girders at Kishangarh for Rural area and Jahazpur Town
pumping stations to be constructed under this contract.
(iii) Providing and installation of puddle collars for suction and delivery pipes.

(iv) Pump suction piping work i.e. providing one electrically operated Sluice valve and
dismantling joint, with suction pipe and reducer etc. for each pump.
(v) Pump delivery piping work i.e. providing and installation of enlarger, dual plate check
valve, one electrically operated butterfly valve, one electrically operated sluice valve, two
dismantling joint, necessary supports and delivery pipe, connecting the respective main
outside the pump house.
(vi) Providing and installing MS suction header and delivery header pipes from the
connecting point of the two suction/delivery main for each pumping section. Providing
one electrically operated sluice valve on each delivery manifold from the pump houses,
outside the pump house building.
(vii) Providing facilities for potable water supply with water cooler of 80-liter capacity at all
head Works.
(viii) Providing one dewatering pump for drainage in each pump houses with necessary piping
arrangement for discharge at suitable area.
(ix) Providing & installation of 3 Nos. Fire Extinguishers at each pump house.
2.7.3 Electrical Works:
The works included are as defined below but shall not be limited to:
2.7.3.1 Contractors’ Responsibilities:
(i) Obtaining permission from appropriate authorities for power lines and sub-station.
(ii) Obtain license from appropriate authorities if required by law.
(iii) Construction, Operating and maintaining 11/0.415 KV sub-stations.
2.7.3.2 Major Works

The scope of work would cover conceptualization, design, pre-dispatch inspections, supply,
installation, pre-commissioning test, commissioning tests, commissioning, trial run, operation and
maintenance of the entire electrical system for 10 years.
(i) Construction of 11/0.415 KV sub-station at Jahazpur headworks, Pander headworks,
Khajoori headworks, Amarwasi headworks, and Kishangarh Roopaheli headworks for
rural area and up-gradation of existing 11/0.415 KV switchyard at Jahazpur town
headworks comprising of providing and installation of transformers with off-load tap
changer of adequate capacity with 100 % standby transformer, and providing and
installation of all necessary equipment and structures such as double break isolators
with earth switch after incoming gantry with lattice structures, metering CT at incomer
with meters in indoor switchgear, lightening arrestors with lattice structures, Potential
Transformers with lattice structures, bus lattice structures, double break isolators
without earth switch on individual feeders of the transformers with lattice structures, 11
kV current transformers for metering and protection on individual feeders of the
transformers with lattice structures, outdoor vacuum circuit breakers and ASCR
conductor, XLPE cables after transformers, insulators, control cables, and other
accessories to complete the work in all respect.
(ii) Providing, installation, testing and commissioning of suitable motors for all the pumps
installed at all pumping stations with allied equipment(s) of adequate rating. All motors
for pumps shall be suitable for 0.415 kV, 3 phase, 50 Hz power supply. All motors shall
be of suitable kW ratings and energy efficient. The motors selected should be as per
latest circulars and directions of the department with regard to energy saving.

(iii) Providing & installation of emergency DG set of minimum 25 KVA at Jahazpur, Pander,
Khajoori and Amarwasi and Jahazpur town headworks with auto start change over
switch, cables and emergency lighting distribution board.
(iv) Providing and installation of Earthing and lighting of switchyard area of all sub-stations
to be constructed and up-graded under this contract. The LA shall be earthed with
separate earth pit and transformer shall be earthed separately by two earth pits and
also connected with switchyard earth grid & GI structure will be earthed by minimum
required earth Electrodes & MCC, motors along with other equipment as per design
requirement.
(v) Providing indoor switchyard control panels at all pumping stations.
(vi) Providing and installation of LV motor switchgear with control panels for individual
motors.
(vii) Providing and installation of motor control centre at each of the pumping stations to
receive supply from two transformers and will have incoming air circuit breakers with
bus coupler providing air circuit breaker, MCCBs, metering equipments, outgoing
meters, starters DOL up to 22 KW and soft starter above 22 KW with motor protection
relay and capacitor bank as per requirements. The contractor shall prepare the single
line diagram with design load and submit the size of all MCCBs and other equipments
of panels for approval.
(viii) Providing and installation of auxiliary panels in all pumping stations. Auxiliary Panels
will have incomer MCCB, metering & out going reversing starter for valves control
supply MCB for sensors, starter for dewatering pump, feeders for outdoor lighting,
feeder for Chlorinator spare feeders.
(ix) Providing and installation of distribution main board with ammeters, voltmeters, MCBs,
ELCB, and main switch.
(x) Providing and installation of capacitor banks including APFC relay(s) with capacitor
panels for all motors at each pumping station.
(xi) Providing and installation of Panel for operation of electrically operated valves with all
other LV panels and distribution boards.
(xii) Providing Exhaust fans for proper ventilation for motor floor area, switch control rooms
and pipe galleries within all pump house buildings to be constructed under this
contract.
(xiii) Providing 110V DC system with batteries, battery charger and DCDB at Jahazpur,
Pander, Khajoori, Amarwasi for rural areas and at Jahazpur town for urban area
pumping stations.
(xiv) Providing meters with load manager and protection systems with necessary
equipments/accessories.
(xv) Providing and installation of local push button stations near all motors and valve
actuators.
(xvi) Providing and installation of LT cables from transformer to PMCC panel and from
PMCC to other panels & equipments.
(xvii) Providing and installation of Air Conditioner of 1.5 ton capacity, 6 Nos. one each at
control room of all pumping stations.
(xviii) Earthing and lightning protection system at all relevant points.
(xix) Providing and installation of emergency lighting system.
2.7.4 Instrumentation And Automation Work:
2.7.4.1 General
It is proposed to have fully automatic and fail safe operation of the pumping station to meet the
varied demand of clear water in most efficient manner. The scope of work would cover
conceptualization, design, pre-dispatch inspections, supply, installation, pre-commissioning test,

commissioning tests, commissioning, trial run and maintenance of the entire Automation,
Instrumentation and Control (PLC) system for 10 years.
Design of the complete system along with the detailed specifications of the equipment proposed
to be installed shall be submitted for necessary approval of the Department. The design of the
system shall adhere to the principles detailed in the respective Chapter of “Specifications for
Automation Instrumentation and Control.
Irrespective of the detailed specifications of the respective items detailed in the chapters of
pumping stations and filter plant, the contractor shall be required to provide all equipment,
accessories, cabling, earthing, providing necessary transducers/sensors, system
hardware/software, programming logic etc. to achieve the objectives listed below.
2.7.4.2 The Instrumentation System
The entire PLC system is required to receive & store the information From Electrical, Mechanical
& Instrumentation Equipments
Electrical System:
(i) as input voltage and amperage of 11 KV and input voltage and amperes of 0.415
kV to individual motors & auxiliary transformers
(ii) Power consumption (kWH) and power factor on 11 KV system, auxiliary
transformers and all LT motors
(iii) Status of all breakers
(iv) Status of all relays used in electrical installations controlling LT motors
(v) Status of all LT motors (on/off)/ & all parameters of Frequency Drives (if provided).
Mechanical Equipments
(i) Status of all LT pumps
(ii) Status (on/off/percentage open) of all Butterfly/sluice Valves, on individual pumps
delivery.
(iii) Vibration levels of LT pump and motors coupling shafts
Instrumentation Equipments
(i) Flow data (instantaneous flow rates and total flow) from the pump house (through
flow meter & transducers installed on delivery manifold.
(ii) Level of water in the clear water reservoirs and elevated service reservoirs.
(iii) Pressures at delivery of each pump & manifold.
Process the above information to Control

(i) Shut down of pumps in case of any non transient abnormal conditions such as
low/high voltage, high current drawl, thermal over load, excessive shaft vibrations,
earth faults etc.
(ii) Shut down of pumps in case of low levels of water in sumps.
(iii) Operation of all butterfly/sluice valves to achieve described objective (i) to (v)
above.
(iv) Generation of reports.
Alarm Situations
The alarm schedule is indicative of what is required. The Contractor shall provide for the
annunciation of all alarms necessary in order to achieve control and monitoring requirements.
(i) 11 KV power failure
(ii) Tripping of outdoor VCB in 11 KV switchyard.
(iii) Tripping of any indoor ACB on transformer out-comers.

(iv) Power Frequency in 11 kV abnormal Low/High
(v) Abnormal pressures in manifold.
(vi) Motor tripped on over-load.
(vii) Pumps failed to start/stop.
(viii) Valves unable to open/close.
(ix) Emergency stop operated
(x) UPS failure.
Hardware & Software Requirements in PLC system

Each PLC system shall be supplied with:
Central Processing Unit (CPU).
Memory Unit
Input/Output Modules
PLC Hardware and Software
Programming Unit consisting of one desktop computer with requisite software
Instrument Control Panel (I.C.P.) / Control Desk
The man machine interface (MMI) consisting of
One Personal Computer with 19” colour monitor with other accessories.
12 PPM, A4 sized Laser Printer.
Panel Power Supply via an uninterruptible power supply (UPS) of one hour
capacity
Requirement of Instrumentation
To achieve the objectives listed above in scope of work, the contractor shall provide the required numbers
of equipment/sensors. Main equipment required is as listed below. The list is not comprehensive and the
scope of contract shall not be limited by the list but shall include all probes, level sensors, input-output
modules, interfaces, other sensing elements, cabling, ducting, earthing, providing lightening protection,
providing facilities of local display of readings from instruments, etc.
The main equipments required are as listed below but not limited to:
(i) Providing & installation of Electro-Magnetic full bore meter with transmitter (to
transmit data to IC panel located on a suitable point on pumping main from
including any boosters required for signal transfer) and Digital flow Indicator &
flow Integrator. The full bore electromagnetic flow meter shall be provided and
installed with a valve of meter size and shall be installed online including providing
and fixing of specials such as bends, tees, pipe segments as per given scope of
work and specifications, complete in all respect on each delivery manifold of all
pumping sections going out of the pump house.
(ii) Level sensors, transmitter and digital level indicators – 2 Nos. at each CWR and 1
No. at each ESR {existing(13 Nos for rural and 2 Nos. for urban) as well as
proposed).
(iii) Providing pressure gauges and other instruments at each suction and delivery
manifold of each pumping section.
(iv) Pressure sensors, transmitters and indicators at each manifold and delivery pipes of
each pump.
(v) One Noise Meter and one Vibration Meter at each pumping station.
(vi) Providing Vacuum type floor mounted Chlorinators rating 5 kg/hr at Jahazpur
town headworks and of rating 2 kg/hr at Jahazpur, Pander, Khajoori, Amarwasi
and Kishangarh for rural areas headworks with 100% standby units with booster
pumps, safety equipment, neutralization tank, piping, chlorine gas sensor with
hooter complete in all respect.
(vii) Providing full Chlorine tonners with rolling supports – 4 nos. each at Jahazpur,
Pander, Khajoori and Amarwasi pumping stations to be constructed for rural
areas headworks and at Jahazpur town pumping stations for urban area and 2
nos. at Kishangarh pumping stations with construction of sufficient store area with
AC/GI sheet shade with 1.5 meter height brick masonry boundary wall.
(viii) For loading and unloading of tonners, one HOT of 2 ton capacity shall be provided
and installed by the Contractor at each pumping station.
(ix) The Contractor shall provide following safety equipment at each chlorination room,
as a minimum :
a. canister type respirators with full face coverage masks suitable for chlorine
gaseous atmosphere - min. 2 no.
b. spare canisters for the respirators - min. 2 no.
c. self contained compressed air breathing apparatus complete with working
whistle and two spare air cylinders - min. 2 no.
d. a facility to recharge the compressed air cylinder or from a self contained
machine.
e. protective clothing such as PVC overall and gloves and rubber boots shall be
provided - min 2 sets.
2.7.4.3 Instrumentation, Automation, Communication
Control Panel (IACC)
Contractor shall provide Design, Catalogue of manufacturing, installation & commissioning of
Instrumentation, Automation & communication control panel for Pump Houses at each of the
head works, i.e at Jahazpur, Pander, Khajoori, Amarwasi and Kishangarh Headworks to be
constructed for rural areas and at Jahazpur town for urban area headworks.
The IACC Panel at each headworks shall include following
a) Digital display meter for flow, pressure, water level, status of pumps/valves, power
supply parameters.
b) Automation components such as PLC, Digital IP, OP
c) Wireless Communication components such as Routers, gateways, GSM / GPRS /
Radio medium for voice & data communication.
The control panel shall display all the sensors & recordable parameters on the control panel. The
following parameters shall be monitored:
a) Water Level in CWR.
b) Motors : Start/Stop/Trip feedback and start /stop control from remote
c) Motorized Valves: Open/Close feedback and open close from remote
d) Flow Meters: Process Values and Set point settings for remote operation
e) Pressure reading: Process Values and Set point setting for remote operation
f) Each Motor has kWh meter with Modbus port available in MCC panel. This
parameter needs to be communicated to the SCADA system located at MCC
Telekheda.
g) Every Pump House Incomer will have a multifunction meter with Modbus port. All
Electrical parameters from this meter may be used for logging in the SCADA.
h) The contractor shall use lease line from TeleKheda Heaworks to MCC block in same
headworks for transfering data.
The work shall include panel, all indicators, PLC, internal wiring, cabling, conduits, input, and
output facilities complete in all respect. The work will include providing cable from field sensor
up to the IACC and connecting them with field sensors and all conduits, fixing arrangement. The
work shall also include providing, fixing etc of instrumentation & control cabling from & to all
sensor/control elements.
2.8 SCADA SYSTEM
The scope of work under SCADA system envisages a Master Control Centre (to be
constructed in other contract at Telekheda headworks) to be established in a purpose
constructed building and Semi Master Control Center (SMCC) at Jahazpur headworks
along with Subsidiary Monitoring Centres (SMC) shall be established in the control
rooms of 05 other pumping stations to be constructed under this contract and one PHED
office at Bhilwara. The SMC to be established under this contract shall be integrated
with SMCC at Jahazpur headworks which in turn shall be integrated with MCC at
Telekheda headworks.
The Subsidiary Monitoring Centres (SMC) will be located at:

• Jahazpur Pumping Station
• Pander Pumping Station
• Khajoori Pumping Station
• Amarwasi Pumping Station
• Kishangarh Pumping Station
• Jahazpur Town Pumping Station
• SE Office, PHED, Pur Road, Bhilwara
2.8.1 PROPOSED WORK AT SEMI-MASTER CONTROL CENTER (SMCC) AT JAHAZPUR

HEADWORKS
It is proposed to provide the following at Semi - Master Control Room (SMCR) at Jahazpur
headworks:
i. The SMCC facility shall be housed in the new pump house under construction in a
separate package. A SCADA operator is to be provided as part of this package who shall
sit at Jahazpur headworks during the O&M period.
ii. Suitable furniture shall be provided at SMCC.
iii. A communication network from suitable service provider (to be approved by EIC) along
with necessary equipment shall be procured and installed at SMCC.
iv. The protocols and platforms of the communication system should match and be in sync
with various PLCs to be housed at PS of Jahazpur, Pander, Khajoori, Amarwasi and
Kishangarh for rural areas and of Jahazpur town for urban area.
v. The recurring expenditure during O&M, of this communication system, shall be borne
entirely by the contractor and shall be included in his O&M offer.
vi. Latest configuration standard PC considering ease of maintains with 24” TFT monitor
with comprising of Monitoring Software. The PC should work as Operator Working

Station.
vii. Non Redundant Front end processor (PLC) for Monitoring and Data Poling from other
pumping stations (As per below mentioned specification)
viii. Monitoring SCADA software with run time unlimited tags shall have capability to handle
the data with 20% expansion capacity for future and shall provide alarms, efficiency
calculation report on regular bases.
ix. A4-size Laserjet printer
x. Ethernet Switch, GSM Modem, etc. as required
xi. UPS (Min. 3KVA rating) with LASMF Batteries for power backup of 120 minutes
backup in case of power failure
xii. Required cabling along with WP type cable glands, cable trays, conduit pipes,
accessories, erection hardware, etc.
xiii. Required earthing system.
2.8.2 PROPOSED WORK AT SUBSIDIARY MONITORING CENTERS (SMC)
i) The scope of work under Subsidiary Monitoring Centres is given below but shall
not be limited by list but shall include all necessary hardware, software, cabling,
earthing etc., which shall be required for proper monitoring and control of the
water supply system.
ii) PC based Subsidiary Monitoring Centre SCADA system with all necessary
hardware and. Facilities shall be provided to monitor, only, the operations of the
relevant local portion of the water supply system, using data provided from the
SMCC SCADA System. The SCADA system shall contain facilities for alarms,
data logging, data archiving, trending and report generation.
iii) For this purpose, the Subsidiary Monitoring Centre SCADA system shall be
interfaced only with the SMCC SCADA system.
iv) VSAT and ISDN communication equipment, including modems and all
accessories as required. At the SMC’s located at the PHED office communication
shall be provided by GPRS modem complete with all accessories.
v) UPS for the SCADA System shall be provided for reliable power supply. For
pumping stations the UPS shall provide 8 hours backup, for PHED offices the
UPS shall provide 4 hours backup.
vi) Instrumentation, data and control cables.
2.8.3 PROPOSED WORK AT EACH PUMPING STATION
It is proposed to provide the following at Jahazpur, Pander, Khajoori, Amarwasi and

Kishangarh for Rural area and Jahazpur Town for Urban area Pumping Stations:
2.8.3.1 CONTROLLER (MICRO PLC)
(i) Micro PLC (referred to as controller) shall be provided at each Pumping Station with
required number of I/Os to meet the SCADA RTU application. It shall be selected
considering the envisaged upgrade and it’s capability to integrate proposed process
instruments for Pumping Station. Controller shall be along with built in or separate
GSM/GPRS Modem along with antenna to transfer the data to SMCC (Semi-Master
Control Center).
(ii) Latest configuration standard PC considering ease of maintains with 24” TFT monitor
with comprising of Monitoring Software. The PC should work as Operator Working
Station.
(iii) Non Redundant Front end processor (PLC) for Monitoring and Data Poling from other
ESR and VTC.
(iv) Monitoring SCADA software with run time unlimited tags shall have capability to handle
(v) As per over view the controller should have inbuilt minimum 20 Digital Inputs, 12
Digital Outputs, 4 Analog Inputs & 2 Analog Outputs as a minimum and other than
inbuilt IOs it can support more than 50 IOs for actual requirement or for future use.
Further to this controller should have facility to cater IO’s to monitor Pump status, Total
Flow, Pressure, Chlorination of water etc.
(vi) The controller shall have two nos. of serial ports with DF1/DH485/Modbus
RTU/DNP3/ASCII protocol support for communication. The controller should have
Embedded 10/100 Mbps Ethernet port with EtherNet/IP, Modbus TCP/IP and DNP3 over
IP support.
(vii) The Controller shall have Ethernet/IP port for peer to-peer messaging – offers users
high speed connectivity between controllers, with the ability to access, monitor and
program from any location where an Ethernet connection is available.
(viii) The Controller having embedded LCD screen shall be preferred which allows user to
monitor data within the controller. It shall display status of embedded digital I/O and
controller functions as a minimum. The controller shall have capability to take data
from soft starter directly.
2.8.3.2 CONTROL PANEL:
i. Control panels are also to be provided at each of the PS. The above shall be housed in a
weather proof and lockable (to prevent tampering) type housing (referred to as control
panel).
ii. The housing shall receive 415V AC supply from electricity Board with Suitable micro
UPS to be built in to communicate power fail condition.
iii. The housing shall also include the required DC power supply (SMPS), control relays,
micro controller based PLC, GSM/GPRS Modem, etc & all required internal wiring &
accessories, etc.
iv. The control panel shall be pre-fabricated, suitable for Wall Mounting type, weather proof
enclosure with IP-42 protection class, lockable type constructed from CRCA Sheet
1.6/2.0mm thick. The enclosure shall be provided with tamper sensing system with
capability of taking action on tamper detection to send the information to the Data Center
or send the SMS to specific mobile number or all. These actions can be configurable from
the Data center without any physical visit to the site.
v. The control panel shall be pre-fabricated; Free standing type and should be
environmentally protected to IP 42 as a minimum. The sizing of the panel should take
care of the harsh environment, peak summer temperature and hit dissipation within the
panel from the power components. The panel shall be designed for bottom cable entry.
vi. Each control panel shall be provided with necessary arrangement for receiving,
distributing, isolating and protecting of DC and AC supplies for various control &
signaling, circuits. Potential circuits for relaying and metering also shall be protected by
MCBs.
vii. The control panel shall have a backup power through an UPS of suitable rating (Min.
600VA) to keep the controller and telemetry system ON in the event of power failure and
also send an alarm to SMCR and SMS to concerned officers as programmed. The UPS
rating shall be suitable to provide minimum 20 minutes power back up in case of grid
power failure.
2.8.4 PROPOSED WORK AT EACH GSS
For monitoring and operations of the 11 KV substations, a SCADA system will be installed in the
control rooms of all the PS. It is proposed to link the GSS to Central SCADA system for data
monitoring by providing a RTU. The status of voltages, line frequencies, power factor, current
drawn, alarms etc. pertaining to 11 KV substations will be monitored in the SCADA system.
2.8.5 PROPOSED WORK AT EACH ESR
i. Micro PLC (referred to as controller) shall be provided at each ESR. Controller shall be
along with built in or separate GSM/GPRS Modem along with antenna to transfer the
data to respective Pumping Station. Further to this controller should have facility to cater
IO’s to Level of water.
ii. The controller shall have two nos. of serial ports with DF1/DH485/Modbus
RTU/DNP3/ASCII protocol support for communication. The controller should have
Embedded 10/100 Mbps Ethernet port with EtherNet/IP, Modbus TCP/IP and DNP3 over
IP support.
iii. The Controller shall have Ethernet/IP port for peer to-peer messaging – offers users high
speed connectivity between controllers, with the ability to access, monitor and program
from any location where an Ethernet connection is available.
iv. Since power connection is not available at ESR, solar panels, with battery, shall be
provided at each ESR. The back-up of the battery, with solar panel shall be at least 5
days. Alternatively, battery with life of 10 years may be provided.
v. The Controller having embedded LCD screen shall be preferred which allows user to
monitor data within the controller. It shall display status of embedded digital I/O and
controller functions as a minimum.
Telecommunications
Under this Contract, the Contractor is required to negotiate and obtain and operate all
necessary VSAT, ISDN and GPRS channels required to provide the system wide
communications.
Contractor shall Design, develop, install, commission and integrate a PLC at all pump house to
communicate with all the pump houses remotely to visualize parameters or from the pump houses
and control the pumps for optimum performance and efficiency to the SMCC at Jahazpur
Headworks.

The Scope shall include installation cost of Communication equipments like GSM/GPRS sim
cards, leased line, Static IP etc.
The system shall be a PC-based visualization system Installation which includes links to various
programmable controllers (PLCs). The PC-based visualization must be able to implement the
following functions:
Visualization via a Windows-compliant operator interface
Alarms and messages
Archiving of messages and process values
Documentation of process data, events and recipes
Flexible expansion of system functions through Visual Basic Script
Link to a wide range of controllers
Open communication between HMI systems and with higher-level systems
Remote operation, diagnostics and administration over intranet and Internet
To carry data from the individual flow meter installed at the inlet of the ESR.
Each flowmeter data in the rising main of the ESR.
Status of the pump
Interface of the SMC with SMCC for transferring data.
Water Level in the CWR
Water Level in the ESR
Flow and Pressure in the VTC
2.9 CONSTRUCTION OF RCC CLEAR WATER RESERVOIRS (CWR)/RCC ELEVATED

SERVICE RESERVOIRS (ESR)
The work consists of construction of RCC clear water reservoirs and elevated service reservoirs.
The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the soundness of the construction, structural safety
& water tightness of the structure based on the specifications, sound engineering practices, and
latest I.S. provisions.
The reservoirs are to be constructed of following minimum live storage capacities:
List of Clear Water Reservoirs (CWR) to be constructed:
S. No. Name of P.S. Capacity of Dia. of Inlet & Dia. of Outlet

CWR Overflow Pipes, mm Pipe, mm
1. Jahazpur 1200 KL 500 mm 600 mm
2. Pander 510 KL 300 mm 400 mm
3. Khajoori 530 KL 300 mm 400 mm
4. Amarwasi 400 KL 300 mm 400 mm
5. Kishangarh 240 KL 250 mm 300 mm

These foundation of CWRs shall be constructed as per provision of SBC in IS Codes and site conditions
from ground level. The capacity of Clear water reservoir(s) mentioned above is effective capacity. The
clear water reservoirs shall have total live storage above the water level required for pumping with vortex
free suction of respective capacity. The live storage depth shall not exceed 5.00 meters height. The CWR
shall be of circular shape with top partially flat slab & Partially dome or fully flat roof for higher capacities
and fully dome for smaller capacities, with suitable hydraulic level and ventilation, so that pump can work

with positive suction. The CWR shall be constructed with internal sump of suitable depth and width to
utilize full capacity of CWR.
Work of CWRs already completed by M/s Pratibha Industried, Ltd

Work
1 Construction of RCC Clear Water Reservoir

including overflow, inlet chamber,outlet chamber
with Motorised Sluice valves on inlet and outlet
chamber at:
2 Amarwasi 400 KL
RCC works up to top ring beam No 1.00
3 Pander 510 KL
4 Kishangarh 240 KL
5 Jahazpur 1200 KL
Incomplete Earth work only No 0.00
List of Elevated Service Reservoirs (ESR) to be constructed:
Dia. of Inlet & Dia. of

S. Capacity in Staging
Location Overflow pipe Outlet pipe
No. KL in m
in mm in mm
1 Amrawasi
1 ESR Uncha 480 20 150 200
2 ESR Amrawasi 250 22 150 200
3 ESR Kurdia 180 21 100 150
4 ESR Kuchalwara Khurd 280 20 150 200
5 ESR Gadoli 180 26 150 200
6 ESR Itunda 250 20 150 200
7 ESR Luhari Khera 100 20 100 150
Khajoori
8 ESR Manoharpura 100 20 100 150
9 ESR Amalda 350 24 150 200
10 ESR Khajoori 100 20 150 200
11 ESR Jorji Ka khera 150 20 100 150
12 ESR Kishangarh 100 24 100 150
13 ESR Sherpur 250 20 150 200

Dia. of Inlet & Dia. of

S. Capacity in Staging
Location Overflow pipe Outlet pipe
No. KL in m
in mm in mm
14 ESR Ratangarh 310 24 150 200
15 ESR Amargarh 200 24 150 200
16 ESR Sabalpur 100 20 150 200
17 ESR Uleta 140 20 100 150
18 ESR Gurha 240 24 100 150
19 ESR Pachanpura 270 20 150 200
20 ESR Peeplond 110 20 100 150
21 ESR Subhash Nagar 100 20 100 150
22 ESR Teethori 270 24 150 200
Pander
23 ESR Taswariya 390 20 150 200
24 ESR Titotra 240 20 150 200
25 ESR Gandheri 140 20 100 150
26 ESR Harotiya 240 20 150 200
27 ESR Ropan 460 24 200 250
28 ESR Pander 230 22 150 200
29 ESR Jamoli 240 22 150 200
30 ESR Agariya 250 22 150 200
Jahazpur
31 ESR Chhabariya 270 24 150 200
32 ESR Biletha 315 22 150 200
33 ESR pp Beera Mata 390 20 150 200
34 ESR Chhejalon Ka Khera 160 20 100 150
35 ESR Gangithala 360 22 150 200
Kishangarh
36 ESR Kishangarh 260 24 150 200
37 ESR Nandrai 295 24 150 200
38 ESR Kankroliya Ghati 140 20 100 150
39 ESR Ganderi 300 24 150 200
The capacities of ESR(s) mentioned above are effective capacity. The ESR shall be of circular
shape with top partially flat slab & Partially dome or fully flat roof for higher capacities
and fully dome for smaller capacities.
The scope of work includes:

(i) Construction of reservoirs as per the provisions given in the “Specifications for civil
works”.
(ii) Supply and installation of puddle collars and duck foot bends for installation of inlet, outlet,
washout and overflow pipes.
(iii) Supply and installation of double flanged CI/DI pipes for inlet, outlet, and washout (scour)
and overflow with specials with minimum sizes as listed above.
(iv) Interconnection of the inlet pipes to the feeder mains with pipe of equal size using CI/DI
double flanged pipes and required specials.
(v) Interconnection of outlet pipes from the ESR to the feeders for zones connected with ESR
for Jahazpur town.
(vi) Providing; Laying & jointing of all interconnecting pipeline of inlet & out let pipes. The
pipe sizes shall be corresponding to the incoming or outgoing pipes as the case may be.
The inlet to CWR of Jahazpur town shall be taken from pipeline of 700 mm dia. connecting
to CWR Jahazpur (for rural demand).
(vii) Providing & installation of one ultrasonic type bulk water meter each on inlet pipe of each
proposed ESR. The flow-meters shall be provided with battery backup, data loggers to have
daily reading and remote reading device which should be able to transfer data through
GSM. For electric supply to the meter where power is not available, solar panel with
battery shall be provided by contractor.
(viii) Providing and installation of a non-return valve with bye-pass arrangement on each rising
main near each ESR, of the same size as the rising main. The location of NRV shall be
approved by the EIC.
(ix) Providing & installation of at least two sluice valves on each outlet, one sluice valve each
on inlet & washout pipe for each reservoirs. The sizes of the valves shall be equal to that of
the main on which they are to be installed.
(x) Replacement of existing sluice valves on inlet, outlet and washout pipes of existing ESRs
with new sluice valves of same size.
(xi) Interconnection of the overflow pipe to the distribution or the outgoing feeders as per the
approval of Engineer-in-Charge using one sluice valve of size equal to the size of overflow
pipes as listed above, CI/DI double flanged pipes and required specials.
(xii) Providing scour/washout pipes up to suitable length to drain the water away from the
structure in an environmental friendly manner, using a sluice valve equal to the size of
washout pipe as listed above, CI/DI double flanged pipes and required specials.
(xiii) To provide valve chambers for all valves installed on the inlet, outlet, scour & overflow
pipes.
(xiv) Providing float valve with auxiliary float in each CWR and ESR. The size of float valve
shall be same as of Inlet pipe. The pressure rating of valve should be in accordance to the
maximum designed pressure.
(xv) The washout pipe will be of 150 mm dia. for all the CWRs and of 100 mm dia. for all
ESRs.
(xvi) Providing water level indicator as per specifications given in the chapter of “Specifications
for Civil Works” for all reservoirs.
(xvii) Providing Ultrasonic type level sensors and transmitters in each CWR and ESR (existing as
well as proposed) to transmit levels to SMCC and SMC.
(xviii) An alarm should be provided so as to give a hooting sound when CWR is about to
become empty.
(xix) Providing a portable de-watering pump having discharge 10 Cum/hr and head of 10 meter
at each CWR to drain out the water from washout chamber.
(xx) Excavation for all structures including working spaces, trench excavation for pipes & other
ancillary works in all sorts of soils, refilling & disposal of surplus earth at suitable site &
dressing as per direction of Engineer-in-charge.

(xxi) Providing plinth protection works as per specifications and approved drawings for all
reservoirs.
(xxii) Providing lightning arrestor on the top of ESR.
(xxiii) Providing access to the top and inside the reservoir as per the specifications given in the
chapter of “Specifications for Civil Works”.
(xxiv)Providing ventilation for the reservoir as per the specifications given in the chapter of
“Specifications for Civil Works”.
(xxv) Providing manhole/headroom for access inside the reservoir.
(xxvi)Providing 25mm diameter GI pipe in two rows in 50x50x6mm angle iron railing along the
top of reservoir, on the sides of the staircase and balcony, and at other suitable points for
the requirement of safety of maintenance and execution staff.
(xxvii) For each ESR, Providing a bypass arrangement to connect the incoming rising main to
the outgoing distribution line so as to enable supply through direct pumping in case of shut
down of ESR.
(xxviii) All MS work shall be epoxy painted. The inside surface of CWR/ESR shall be finished
with plaster in CM 1:4 and using water proofing compound as per manufacturer’s
recommendation. The outer wall and surface of tanks above ground shall be painted with
cement paint of approved shade.
(xxix)Testing of tank for water tightness and structural stability by filling it with water and in
accordance to the procedure laid down in tender document.
(xxx) Painting the metallic surface with primer and enamel paint. Putting slogan on tank as per
direction of EIC.
(xxxi)Final clearance of site before handing over the work, including leveling of earth and
disposal of surplus earth as per directions of the Engineer-in-Charge.
(xxxii) The submission of as built drawings.
The responsibility of the contractor will also include preparation & submission of drawings and
designs, execution & testing of all works specifications stipulated in the tender document. The
design & drawings of CWRs/ESRs shall be got approved from MNIT, Jaipur or any other
Engineering College as per directions of EIC before submitting the same to the department for
approval.
The following submissions are required for approval:-

• Submission of lay-out plans with site contour plan and site grading levels and plinth
protection works for approval of EIC.
• Submission of structural designs and working drawings for approval of Engineer-in-charge.
The structural design and reinforcement drawings shall be prepared assuming SBC of soil or
the base rock as 10 T/Sqm, if the SBC on testing is found to be 10 T/Sqm or more at
foundation depth. If the SBC testing is found to be less than 10 T/Sqm at foundation depth
the structure shall be designed on the basis of actual SBC found on testing for which no extra
payment will be made to contractor. SBC tests shall be got done through an approved agency
wherever the strata on which foundation is to be laid is not rocky. The foundation shall only
be laid on firm rock or hard soil bed after removing decomposed rock and all loose material.
• Submission of data sheet and samples of materials proposed for use in the structure.
• Submission of Quality Assurance Plan and time schedule for approval of Engineer-in-charge.
• Submission of samples of material equipment(s) for approval.

• Submission of data sheet for equipments for approval.
No separate payments will be made for the reconnaissance, preliminary investigations, surveys,
inspections, plinth protection, site clearance etc. They shall be included in the lump-sum rate.
The Contractor shall be fully responsible for Technical suitability of design, soundness of the
construction, structural safety and water tightness of the structure based on the specifications,
sound engineering practices and latest IS provisions.
Ancillary works
The works required are as listed below but not limited to:
• Work of stone masonry boundary wall of minimum 120 cm in height with wire fencing
above wall and one MS gate for each of the campus areas of ESR sites as per approved
site plan. Total approximate length of boundary wall to be constructed around all ESRs
campus is 3120 Mtrs.
• A store room shall be constructed below each ESR having floor level 15 cm above F.G.L
& ceiling height not less than 2.75 mt. as per direction of Engineer-in-charge.
• Site grading and plantation of CWRs/ESRs campus areas.
• Work of ESRs already completed by M/s Pratibha Industried, Ltd

Work
1 Design & Construction of Elevated Service

Reservoirs as per specifications including
fixing inlet; outlet; washout & overflow
pipes, installation of valves on inlet; outlet;
washout & overflow pipes, puddle collars,
duck foot bends, pipe interconnecting the
incoming & out going mains with all
specials; float valve with auxiliary valve,
water level indicator, plinth protection
works, finishing, testing and
commissioning complete as per the
specifications and scope of work at
2 Kankroliya Ghati 140/20
3 Kishangarh 260/24
Work of Boundary Wall already completed by M/s Pratibha Industries Ltd :

S.N. Description of Unit No. or Qty of Executed Work
work
Construction of HW HW HW HW HW Total
Boundary wall Khajoori Jahazpur Amarwasi Pander Kishangarh
with gates - 2
S.N. Description of Unit No. or Qty of Executed Work

work
nos., on Head
work at
1 Earth work & Meter 396.15 354.20 398.30 398.00 397.00 1943.65
PCC
2 Completion up Meter 396.15 354.20 398.30 380.90 397.00 1926.55
to plinth level
3 Completion of Meter 372.75 319.30 377.40 370.90 377.60 1817.95
Superstructure
4 Completion of Meter 0.00 0.00 377.40 365.55 375.50 1118.45
Plaster work
5 supply & fixing Meter 0.00 0.00 362.10 357.55 272.90 992.55
of railing and
coping
6 Supply and Meter 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
fixing of gate
and painting
work.
Construction of Boundary wall at ESR sites
S. Description of Unit Description of work

no. work
Earth Completion Completion of Completion supply & Supply
work & up to plinth Superstructure of Plaster fixing of and fixing
PCC Qty. level Qty. Qty. work Qty. railing of gate
and and
coping painting
Qty. work.
Qty.
1 Ulela Meter 87.50 87.50 87.00 87.00 0.00 0.00
2 Teethori Meter 97.80 97.80 90.00 87.80 87.80 0.00
3 Agariya Meter 87.20 87.20 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
4 Gangithala Meter 98.60 98.60 92.50 92.50 0.00 0.00
5 Itunda Meter 97.55 97.55 93.75 93.75 93.75 0.00
6 Jamoli Meter 96.54 96.54 91.54 91.54 0.00 0.00
7 Subhash Nagar Meter 98.25 98.25 94.50 94.50 94.50 0.00
8 Jorji Ka Khera Meter 101.40 101.40 97.70 97.70 92.40 0.00
9 Gurha Meter 100.70 100.70 97.00 97.00 97.00 0.00
10 Beera Mata Meter 95.50 90.40 89.40 89.40 0.00 0.00
11 Jahazpur Town Meter 101.25 101.25 97.60 97.60 97.60 0.00
(Santosh Nagar)
12 Gandher Meter 100.00 100.00 96.30 96.30 96.30 0.00

Total Meter 1162.29 1157.19 1027.29 1025.09 659.35 0.00
The details of work already executed by earlier contractor are also appendixed in
annexure B of volume I of tender documents.
2.10 CONSTRUCTION OF PSPS AND CWTS
Water shall be supplied in the villages through PSPs and CWTs. Provision for construction of
2981 PSPs (one PSP @100 persons) and 682 CWTs (one CWT @ 500 persons) has been taken
for all villages. The PSPs and CWTs shall be constructed as per approved drawings and
specifications of the department. The location of PSPs and CWTs shall be decided by Village
Water Health & Sanitation Committee (VWHSC) for all villages.
2.11 ANCILLARY CIVIL WORKS AND CAMPUS DEVELOPMENT
Ancillary civil works and Campus development works detailed herein shall be taken up for the
campus areas of all 06 headworks i.e. at Jahazpur, Pander, Khajoori, Amarwasi and Kishangarh
are to be constructed for rural areas and at Jahazpur town for urban area headworks to be
constructed under this contract.
The following works shall be taken up for all the head works:
a) Survey of the Head Works campus with existing details.

b) Submission & Approval of developmental plans and landscaping and drawings.
c) Drainage plans & designs.
d) Other designs/plans required for selected campus area development.
e) Construction of Boundary wall with two MS gates (One Main Gate with one wicket gate) at
all headworks. The headworks-wise minimum length of boundary wall shall be as follows:
at Jahazpur– 1200 Mtrs, Pander– 800 Mtrs, Khajoori– 800 Mtrs, Amarwasi– 800 Mtrs and
Kishangarh– 800 Mtrs are to be constructed for rural areas and at Jahazpur town– 25 Mtrs
for urban area.
f) Construction of campus roads and horticulture work at all 6 headworks. The headworks-
wise minimum length of campus road shall be as follows: at Jahazpur– 100 Mtrs, Pander–
100 Mtrs, Khajoori– 250 Mtrs, Amarwasi– 200 Mtrs and Kishangarh– 100 Mtrs are to be
constructed for rural areas and at Jahazpur town– 100 Mtrs for urban area.
g) Road light arrangement including all cabling, electric fixtures & related civil works. Road
light arrangement in the campus should be in such a manner that no area in the vicinity of
pump house should remain in darkness. The campus lighting should be so designed to keep
the area inside and outside of pump house very well illuminated.
h) Grading & leveling of headworks land as per approved plan.
i) Provide drinking water supply arrangement for head works including all plumbing fixtures,
pipelines etc including related civil works.
j) Providing drainage system of selected area of headworks where PH is proposed to be
constructed.

k) Providing sanitary arrangements including septic tank soak pit and sewer with
appurtenances for all the units within headwork.
l) Landscaping in all campus. Landscaping shall be done according to the topography of the
area and should be planned so as to make the campus a focal point. All the open areas must
be covered by horticulture activity. Shadow trees must be planted at a maximum distance of
30 m c/c along the periphery of the campus area.
m) Designing, constructing and maintaining Rain Harvesting structures at all 8 headworks for
collection of rain water through roofs of permanent structures into an underground tank of
capacity sufficient to store the quantity of water collected over the particular roof as per the
average rain fall intensity in that area.
The following works forms the part of ancillary civil works:

Construction of the following residential and office building at headworks:
Residential Building– J2 Type Qtr
(Min. 65 Sqm) - 02 Nos. at Jahazpur
and Khajoori and 1 No. each at
other 03 cluster headworks
Office Building - Construction of
JEN and AEN Office (total area 540
sqm) at Jahazpur Town
The office and residential buildings mentioned above shall be designed as RCC framed
structure with all electrical, sanitary and drainage works with proper ventilation and water
cooler for each chamber. Contractor shall also provide intercom system along with cabling
for intercom system in all chambers. The contractor shall also supply and lay of electric cable
and also provide pipe line for drinking water facilities.
Work of J2 Type Qtrs already completed by M/s Pratibha Industried, Ltd

Work
Construction of J-2 Type Qtr. Having area

of 65 Sqm
Kishangarh HW
1 Earth work & P.C.C Work. No 1 No.
2 Work upto plinth level. No 1 No.
Amarwasi HW
1 Earth work & P.C.C Work. No 1.00
2.11.1 Furniture For Headworks & Office:
The works included are as defined below:
The contractor shall provide following furniture and desktop computers at each 08 No. headworks

Furniture For Headworks:
S. No. Item Nos. Required at

each headworks
1 Tables 2
2 Revolving Chairs with arms 1
3 Office Chairs 5
4 Cane Chairs 5
5 Steel Almirah 1990mm x 915mm x 485mm 1
6 Filing cabinet 1
7 Steel Almirah 1270mm x 765mm x 440mm with glass paneled 1
doors
8 Desert Coolers 2
9 Ceiling Fans (As per requirement) 1 Lot
A SCADA table with five-computer chair shall be provided by Contractor for SCADA in control
room at all Head works.
The contractor shall provide following furniture at JEN office:
S. Item Nos. Required at

No. each office
1
Executive Table with racks 2
2
Table with Racks 5
3
Computer table 2
4
Printer table 2
5
Revolving Chairs with arms 1
6
Office Chairs 10
7
Steel Almirah 1980mm x 915mm x 485mm 3
8
Filling cabinet 5
9
Drawing Cabinet A0 size with racks 1
10
Steel Almirah 1270mm x 765mm x 440mm with 3
glass paneled doors
11 Air/desert Coolers with 600mm sweep exhaust fans 3
12 Meeting/conference table 1
13 Visitor chair 10
The contractor shall provide following furniture at AEN office:

No. each office
1 Executive Table with racks 2
2 Table with Racks 7
3 Computer table 2
4 Printer table 2
5 Revolving Chairs with arms 1
6 Office Chairs 15
7 Steel Almirah 1980mm x 915mm x 485mm 3
8 Filling cabinet 5
9 Drawing Cabinet A0 size with racks 1
10 Steel Almirah 1270mm x 765mm x 440mm with 3
glass paneled doors

No. each office
11 Air/desert Coolers with 600mm sweep exhaust fans 3
12 Meeting/conference table 1
13 Visitor chair 10
The contractor shall supply following computers and printers for effective
monitoring and surveillance of the system during execution of work:
1. Desk Top Computers – 2 Nos. with following specifications:-
Windows 8 Home Premium [64-bit] ,Intel(R) Core(TM) i5-2400S quad-core processor
[2.5GHz, 6MB Shared Cache, DMI 5GT/s], FREE UPGRADE to 6GB DDR3-1333MHz
SODIMM [2 DIMMs] from 4GB, 1TB 7200 rpm SATA hard drive, Wireless-N LAN
card (1x1)
2. Laser Jet Black & White - 2 Nos. A-4 size
2.12 IEC ACTIVITIES
ROLE OF I.E.C ACTIVITIES IN THE PROJECT

I.E.C activities shall play crucial role in the successful implementation of the proposed project.
Community participation in implementation of the project is proposed to ensure involve the
villagers right from the planning stage through competent & experienced NGOs. The IEC
activities would be implemented on the model of highly successful German funded “Aapni
Yojana” of Churu & Hanumangarh districts of Rajasthan. Conventionally, water supply from
public stand posts maintained by PHED in urban & rural area is free of cost. However, in Aapni
yojana, which has been declared as “Special Project” for water tariff purposes, cost recovery is
being done for water being supplied through public stand posts. The main objective of I.E.C
activities is the support of the operation and maintenance of the water supply project ensuring the
sustainability of the project, collect revenue from the villages and to maximize its benefits for the
target population.
PANEL OF NGOS
NGO shall be selected from the following list :
1. IIHMR, Jaipur
2. IIMR, Jaipur
3. Bhoruka Cheritable Trust, Rajgarh
4. Urmul Setu, Bikaner
5. Gandhi Vidya Mandir, Sardarshahar
6. GVNML, Lapodia (Dudu)
7. CECOE-DECON, Jaipur
8. LUPIN, Bharatpur
9. Satguru Foundation

Scope of Work for NGO

The broader objective of community participation is to assure sustainability of the project by
involving the community in village level planning, implementation and management of water
supply. The communities will be trained, empowered and motivated to take up these tasks. In the
process of community participation, the involvement of women and weaker section will be
assured in the decision making. The village level activities will fall under the following broad
components.
WATER DISTRIBUTION MANAGEMENT

The activities under this component will primarily be building environment for project
acceptance. A village level committee viz. Village Water Health and Sanitation Committee
(VWHSC) will be formed in every project village if, VHSC already exist in SWAJALDHARA &
total sanitation programme than this will be part of that committee. This committee will sign an
agreement with the PHED and will take-up all the tasks related to the project. By involving the
villagers, the VWHSC will select the sites of public stand posts (PSP) & CWT (Cattle Water
Trough).
The VWHSC will collect monthly water charges and deposit to the PHED. The VWHSC will
maintain the internal water supply system and keep it in the functioning status. The villagers will
be trained and motivated for controlling wastage of water as well as hygienic way of using water.
The VWHSCs will be trained and facilitated to take up all these tasks. Following will be the
major steps under WDM.
• Environment Building for project acceptance: Minimum 3 nos of meetings with

villagers are required for each sector of water distribution management and women
participation with at least 30% representation from total households of village in each
meeting. Meetings of 2 sectors can be held on the same day but in different shifts. These
meetings should be continued till the village become positive for accepting concept of the
project. Additional 2-meetings/ get together with the students in school should also be kept.
This component also includes designing projects and message specific posters (at least 2
different types) in consultation with the department. For a village of population 250 & less,
pasting of such posters at minimum 2 different places in a village is required. Quantity of
such posters to be pasted shall be increased in proportion to village population. This also
includes poster pasting in schools and other public building. NGO has to make provision for
mass communication with the villagers by any one of the following three modes i.e picture
show, puppet show or culture show. Such show shall be kept minimum 1 in each panchayat
and shall be project specific/ task specific. All the above activity shall be intimated to the
department in advance.
• Village general meeting and VWHSC formation.
• WHC orientation and job distribution
• Map making through PRA Village census by VWHSC : Size of village map, type
of map (hand prepare/blue print/computer drawn), information to be marked on the
map, provision of approval of draft map from the department and number of such
maps to be provided shall be decided in consultation with Engineer-In-Charge
• Devising payment model for monthly water charges
• Security money collection and PHED- VWHSC agreement
• Site selection of PSPs & CWTs
• Community level training programmes on operation, maintenance fault reporting,
record keeping etc. one person per 250 population of village with minimum of 2
person in each village shall be trained. Training shall include repair of pipe line in
village boundary, repair of PSP’s & CWTs, material required for maintenance &
availability of such materials etc.
• Follow –up of use and maintenance of PSPs.
• Follow-up (for six months) of regular deposition of monthly water charges.
WOMEN PARTICIPATION:
Women are the primary users of water. They need to be involved in every step of implementation.
In the society they have lesser say in decision making. Therefore, the community participation
initiatives will focus on bringing women in the groups and empower them so they can play a
pivotal role in village level water supply related decisions. The major steps under women
participation components are as follows:
• Environment building among women (identification of issues of women’s concern,
sensitizing women about project, identification of women about project, identification of
women leader, contacting women in small groups)
• Large group meeting and selection of women representative for WHC
• Women Group and Self Help Group formation as per need
• Map making through PRA
• Site selection for PSPs and CWTs
• Selection and training of Stand Post Attendants
• Capacity building measures
HEALTH EDUCATION:
The ultimate aim of the project is to improve in the standards of health of the target communities.
Merely providing safe water can not improve the health status if the villagers do not consume it in
the safe way and do not maintain the hygienic environmental conditions. The health education
efforts will focus on educating the villagers about related health and hygiene practices especially
about the water born & Sewage born diseases. A module for health education shall be submitted
by the contractor for approval.
Selected NGO will perform all the above activities in every village. After the award of work
selected NGO will set-up project and field offices. The NGO will prepare the detailed strategies
of every component and work. It will collect primary data of every village and will make action
plan of every village. After that the NGO will implement the work in the close co-ordination with
PHED. The selected NGO will also establish rapport with other department/organisations, which
are directly or indirectly related to this work.
Methodology:
Activities in the following three programme component will be done in a stepwise
approach through three stages: preparation, implementation and follow up.
1. Water Distribution Management, as the core component
2. Health Education, to realise the potential for improved health
3. Women Participation, essential across all activities.
A fourth activity is building a system of monitoring and evaluation and of management
information functioning in a two way mode, from head office to cluster office and village
and vise-versa.
In a village, Community participation activities will start by collecting basic information
which includes (i) No of houses & Residents in each house. (ii) House wise cattle
population (iii) Economic & social structure of villages (iv) Existing water supply facility
in village & source wise command etc.
This information will be used for preparing local level planning, after that the activities
of component will be stared for every phase i.e. preparation, implementation and follow
up, a separate set of activities has been proposed. These activities will be carried out in a
stepwise manner so they can achieve the overall objectives of the Community
participation. Though the activities in the component are different, they have strong
integration and interdependence among themselves.
On an average the Community participation activities will work 12 months in a village. It
takes almost 3 months to complete the activities of one phase. During the preparation
phase and the implementation phase the field teams of the selected will work closely with
villagers and prepare them for taking responsibility. During the follow-up phase of six
months, the NGO will monitor the activities from a distance and will provide support
when needed. After completion of all three phases the Community participation activities
will be withdrawn from a village. Thereafter villagers and VWHSCs will manage the
system independently. IEC activity shall continue even after handing over to VWHSC
for the entire O&M period.
In case of delay in construction of the water supply scheme in certain villages, time for
start of IEC activities in such villages shall be rescheduled/deferred suitably to match the
construction schedule. The extension of the IEC activities may required to be deferred
upto a maximum of 9 months time or more on mutual agreement for which no extra
payment shall be made over & above the quoted lump sum price
For the implementation of project components in the villages, the selected NGO will open
the appropriate number of cluster offices in the project area. The project staff of selected
NGO will work in close co-ordination with the PHED staff.
It shall responsibility of selected NGO to educate the villagers about conjunctive use of
water as per latest guidelines of NRDWP.
To assess the progress of the work, NGO shall submit the weekly progress report,
photographs of the activities carried in that period and action plan for the following
week.
Activities of different components will be implemented in a village in following steps
Activities in a village
Collection of Basic Information
Making of Village Action Plan

Component Wise Activities
Water Distribution Women Participation Health Education
Management
Preparation Phase
Environment Building Environment Building Introducing Health Benefits of
(a) identification of Issues Project to Leaders and Small

Groups
Village General Meeting and (b) sensitizing Women about Health Education in WHC
WHC Formation Project
WHC Orientation and Job ( c) Identification of Women
Distribution Leaders
Water Distribution Women Participation Health Education

Management
Map Making (d) Contacting Women in
Small Group
Large Group Meeting & WR
Selection
Implementation Phase
Census Site Selection Health education for all
villagers
Security Money Collection & Users Group Formation
PHED-WHC agreement
Site Selection Stand Post Attendant (SPA)
Selection
Village Construction work Capacity Building
Water Supply Functional
Community Level Training
Work shop in schools
Follow-up Phase
follow-up of use and Support in Monitoring Use & Follow-up on Use &
Maintenance Maintenance of PSP,CWT, Maintenance
Sanitation Units
Regular Deposition of the
Bill’s Payment
• CWT : Cattle Water Trough
• PSP : Public Stand Post
• SPA : Stand Post Attendant
• SU : Sanitation Unit
• WG : Women Group
• SHG : Self Help Group
• WHC : Water & Health Committee
• U & M: Use & Maintenance
• PRA : Participatory Rural Appraisal
2.13 COVERAGE OF VILLAGES/TOWN DURING EXECUTION
The contractor shall work out working plan and execute the work in such a manner that
beneficiaries start getting water during execution period. Villages/ towns to be benefited under
this contract shall be commissioned in a phased manner for which department shall provide
water. The department shall provide water. The contractor shall take up various activities so as to
benefit villages/ towns after completion of 19 months of execution period and thereafter go on
commissioning additional no. of villages on span basis, in remaining 12 months of the execution
period. Coverage of villages/ towns shall be on cluster basis so as to wind up the activities
cluster-wise. Contractor shall commission the clusters as per following schedule:

S. No. Targeted period for coverage Targeted cluster number Number of villages to
be covered
1 First two month (months 20- Cluster nos. CL 1003 CL 33 Villages
21) period after completion of 1004A CL 1004B CL 1010 CL
19 months of execution period 1011 CL 1012
2 Second two month (months 22- Cluster nos. CL 1021 CL 1026 38 villages
23) period after completion of CL 1027 CL 1028 CL 1029 CL
19months of execution period 1030
3 Third two month (months 24- Cluster nos. CL 1001 CL 1002 28 villages
19 months of execution period 1008
4 Fourth two month (months 26- Cluster nos. CL 1009 CL 2013 38 Villages
19 months of execution period 1018
5 Fifth two month (months 28- Cluster nos. CL 1017A CL 28 Villages
29) period after completion of 1017B CL 1019 CL 1020 CL
19 months of execution period 1031 CL 1032
6 Sixth Two month (months 30- Cluster nos. CL 1033 CL 1034 48 villages & 1
31) period after completion of CL 1035 CL 1036 CL 1037, Town
19 months of execution period 915, 916, 925, 933 and
Jahazpur Town
In the event of non-adherence to above targets, compensation as per Special Conditions

Part A, Volume I, clause 11.7 shall be levied. Number of clusters to be benefited in a
particular month period shall remain the same. However, contractor may choose to cover
some other cluster included in different month period in lieu of cluster proposed to be
covered in a particular month period depending on the progress. Under this clause, work
for providing required quantity of water at Village Transfer Chamber is only included.
2.14 STAFF REQUIRED DURING EXECUTION
2.14.1 General
The Department lays great importance on the quality and authority delegated to the Contractor’s
key staff deployed in the field to execute and supervise the works. The Contractor is required to
ensure deployment of qualified and experienced staff in sufficient numbers on site to ensure
quality of work. The Engineer-in-Charge shall be at liberty to object to and require the
Contractor to remove from the work any person, who in the opinion of the Engineer-in-Charge
misconducts himself or is incompetent or negligent in the proper performance of his duties. Such
person shall not be employed again without permission of the Engineer-in-Charge. The general
requirement shall be as below:
2.14.2 Project In-Charge
He shall be person deployed by the Contractor as an overall in-charge for the Contract. He shall
be delegated with Power of Attorney to sign on behalf of the Contractor on all issues related to
Contract and payments. He should be a senior level staff member of the Contractor.

2.14.3 Dy. Managers (works)
There shall be at least one Dy. Manager for each of the major components of the Contract viz.
Pumping Stations, Pipe Line Work, ESR work and IEC activities. He shall be stationed in project
area all the time. The Dy. Manager shall have minimum following qualifications:
Education: B.E. (relevant discipline) for Pumping Stations, Pipeline and ESR works and BA with
specialization in rural development/social work.
Experience: Minimum 6 years of general field supervision of Contracts and minimum 3 years
experience in supervision in construction/erection of similar works.
2.14.4 Supervisory Staff (works)
There shall be supervisory staff with following minimum qualifications deployed in sufficient
numbers to ensure day to day quality supervision of the work:
Education: B.E. in relevant discipline with minimum 3 years experience in relevant field or
Diploma Holder in relevant discipline with 5 years field experience in relevant field.
The following Minimum number of supervisor staff to be deployed, when the activities of related
discipline is under execution:
S. No. Works Min. Nos. to be

deployed
1. Pumping Station (each for Seven PS)
Civil 1
Electrical 1
Mechanical 1
Instrumentation 1
Safety Engineer 1
QA/QC Engineer 1
2. Pipe Line Work
Manufacture 1
Laying (Each laying site) 1
3. CWR/ESR (Each Active site)
Civil 1
4. IEC Activities 3
The Project In-Charge and Dy. Managers will be deployed after approval of their CVs by the
EIC. The staff as mentioned above shall be maintained when the works on the relevant field are
being actively carried out.
The Contractor will be expected to arrange and maintain a fleet of experienced workers and
foremen and other support staff as required on sites in sufficient numbers.
2.15 SPARES FOR PIPELINE WORKS
Contractor shall supply spares for pipeline works to the department before the commencement of
O&M contract period as listed in schedule of prices volume- IV.
2.16 TOOLS & TACKLES
Contractor shall supply spares for pipeline works to the department before the commencement of
O&M contract period as listed in schedule of prices volume- IV.
2.17 FIELD LABORATORY
The Contractor is required to establish a field laboratory at site office for ensuring the timely inspection of
the material and works. The laboratory will be equipped with testing facilities sufficient to cope with the
requirements of the tests to be conducted on site. It should have at least the following equipment, which
may be supplemented with additional equipment as may be found necessary by the Engineer-in-
charge/Contractor.
The Test Equipment, meters, instruments etc., used for testing shall be calibrated at Recognized
Test Laboratories at regular intervals and valid certificates shall be made available to the
Engineer-in-charge. The calibration certificates should be produced in advance for the approval
of the Engineer-in-charge and if necessary they shall be got recalibrated or substituted before
commencement of the tests.
List of Minimum Laboratory Equipment/Instrument
S. No. Name of Equipment/Instrument
A. General:
1 Balance 20 kg capacity-self indicating type
2 Electronic Balance 5 kg capacity accuracy 0.5 gm
3 Sieves analysis set of IS with lid and pan: 450 mm diameter:
63 mm, 53 mm, 37.5 mm, 26.5 mm, 13.2 mm, 9.5 .mm, 6.7 mm and
4.75 mm size
4 Sieves analysis set of IS with lid and pan:200 mm diameter: 2.36 mm,
2.0 mm, 1.18 mm, 600 micron, 425 micron, 300 micron, 150 micron,
and 75 micron
5 Measuring tape, vernier scale, Digital Screw Gauge, die for concrete
cubes, vibrating platform, tools and tackles
6 First aid box
B. For Soils and Aggregates:
1 Dry Bulk Density Test apparatus (sand pouring cylinder, tray, can
etc.) complete
2 Core cutter apparatus 10 cm dia, 10/15 cm height, complete with
dolly, rammer etc.
C. For Cement and cement concrete:
1 Slump testing apparatus
2 Compression strength testing machine
D. For DI/uPVC Pipes:
1 Ultra sonic gauges for thickness measurement of coating, lining and
MS/DI pipe plate.
2 Hydraulic Testing Equipments calibrated pressure gauge
E. For Pumps & Motors:
1 Dial gauge
2 Portable Temperature Measuring Equipment
3 Illumination Measuring Equipment
4 Portable Tachometer

2.18 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS:
Wherever reference is made to the Departmental design, drawings, or concept, it may be

understood that these are concepts of the Department and the responsibility for correctness of
designs, drawings and safety of equipment/structure shall rest on the contractor. Bidders are
advised to inspect the site for further clarifications and to understand the scope of work. It is the
bidder’s responsibility to carry out all the works required to complete the scheme under this
project whether it has been mentioned or not.
UNLESS MENTIONED OTHERWISE, IF FOR ANY SPECIFIC PROVISION REFERENCE HAS
BEEN MADE IN MORE THAN ONE SPECIFICATION, THE PROVISION MORE STRINGENT
SHALL BE APPLICABLE.
The contractor should note it clearly and carefully that all the data, information, reports and
drawings etc. available in this tender document are concept of the Department which are for the
purpose of information to the contractors and will have no bearing on the contractual obligations.
The contractor will have a choice to make use of the data, reports, information, drawings etc
provided in this volume but the Department does not stand any guarantee to this
data/information/reports/designs/drawings. The contractor will solely responsible for preparing
and submitting the required data/ information/ reports/ designs/ drawings after carrying out
appropriate field survey, data collections designs etc for the approval of Engineer In-charge.
Approval of all designs and drawings, material to be used, equipment specifications and the
samples prior to start work at site shall be obtained by the contractor.
STANDARDS
Except as otherwise specified in this technical specification, the Indian Standards and Codes of
practice in their latest version, National Building code, PWD specification of the state of
Rajasthan and Manual of water supply of GOI shall be adhered to for the supply, handling,
laying, installation, and site testing of all material and works.
2.19 OPERATION AND M AINTENANCE FOR 10 YEARS:
The works included are as defined below:-

2.19.1 General
The scope of O&M for 10 years shall include operation and

maintenance of all works executed at all 06 no. headworks under
this contract, O&M of all transfer mains, rising mains, distribution
mains, internal village distribution pipelines, internal town
distribution pipelines (with all pipe appurtenances) laid under this
contract, O&M of all reservoirs (CWRs/ESRs) constructed under
this contract. Maintenance of existing distribution lines of Jahazpur
town shall also be done by the contractor without operating them.
Within the frame work of the contractors responsibilities given above,

the contractor shall carry out the following activities, but these shall
not limit requirement of other activities, which otherwise are
required as per term and conditions of contract or to fulfill
contractors responsibilities or are essential as per good industrial
practices. The contractor shall be responsible for:
a) Providing designed per day requirement of water to each ESR and from each ESR to each
VTC of village and each zone of the town. System shall be tested for design demand but shall
be run as per actual demand based on population as per directions of EIC.
b) Chlorination of water in CWR as per requirement (Minimum 3 ppm chlorine dosing) for
which liquefied chlorine shall be provided by the contractor. The year-wise water demand for
188 villages of Jahazpur and 25 villages of Kotri tehsil and Jahazpur town is given below:
Year Annual Water Demand, MLD
Jahazpur and Kotri tehsil Jahazpur Town
2016 10.73 2.80
2017 10.92 2.85
2018 11.12 2.91
2019 11.32 2.96
2020 11.53 3.01
2021 11.74 3.07
2022 11.95 3.12
2023 12.17 3.18
2024 12.39 3.24
2025 12.61 3.29

Year Annual Water Demand, MLD

Jahazpur and Kotri tehsil Jahazpur Town
2026 12.84 3.35
2027 13.08 3.42
2028 13.31 3.48
2029 13.55 3.54
c) To check the residual chlorine at the tail end of each zone. It should be as per CPHEEO
manual requirement.
d) Providing the minimum specified staff as specified in Clause 2.19.2 during operation and
maintenance period and additional staff as per requirement during periodic maintenance and
in emergencies.
e) Providing all required consumables required for functioning/operation & maintenance of
equipment.
f) Metering is of utmost importance in this contract. Flow measurements of meters at Pumping
stations and at ESR will be recorded daily, and will be signed by representatives of
Department and Contractor.
g) Preventive/breakdown maintenance of all pumps, electrical, mechanical & instrument
equipment, installed under the contract. All costs including costs of all material, equipment,
etc required for operation and/or maintenance (preventive and/or breakdown) to be borne by
the contractor.
h) Maintenance of the lighting fixtures and the lighting system of all areas and replacement of
all non-functional lighting fixtures within 24 hours.
i) Maintaining;
• Repair history of all pipeline, mechanical, electrical and instrumentation control
equipment Logbooks:
∼ Every day power availability, input voltages, kWH meter, power factor
readings at pumping station.
∼ Daily Operation of pumps with every hour readings for operating
voltage, amperage and power factor, pressure on the manifold, pressure
at outlet of pumps and flow rate in manifold.
∼ Maintain record of net operating pressure, discharge and energy
consumption of each pump so as to arrive at the operating efficiency.
This record should be logged through the PLC installed in the pumping
station.
• Last periodic maintenance done for all reservoirs of the system.
• Observations made during patrolling of the pipeline.
In addition to maintenance of above logbooks, the contractor is required to maintain one
observation book at each pumping station. Observations made in the observation book, by
departmental officers, must be complied with immediately and compliance report shall be sent
monthly to EIC.

i) Providing tools and tackles and spares, at the start of the O&M period, as per list given in
price schedule (Vol. IV) and maintaining adequate additional inventory of spares/accessories
or equipment itself for repair of system so that the electrical, mechanical, pipe and pipe
appurtenances, can work efficiently as per the guarantees given or minimum required
efficiencies asked for in the contract, without any additional costs to department.
j) Providing manpower and materials for the required repairs of all facilities along with the
manpower and materials for repair of the buildings, reservoirs and pipeline built under the
contract.
k) Maintenance of the stores for the electrical, mechanical and instrumentation equipment. The
maintenance of stores will include but shall not be limited to:
• Loading / unloading of materials received and issued for works.
• Proper arrangement of material in stores to ensure its safety and easy availability.
• Maintaining store area neat and tidy.
• Keeping records and Accounting the incoming materials
• Keeping records and Accounting the consumed materials
The contractor shall be solely responsible for the safety and security of the goods in the store
and its accountability and will be responsible for any loss or damages in stores for any reason.
He may opt for insurance cover against the value of the goods to be stored without any
additional costs on the Department.
l) Patrolling of the water mains laid in the contract, to identify and report the damages / defects
pipe and pipe appurtenances, CD works, en-route structures.
n) Emergency Maintenance/Periodic routine maintenance: Providing a fleet consisting of
suitable hauling machine, sufficient inspection/patrolling vehicles and material hauling
vehicles and any other vehicles/machinery/equipment for adequate and timely repairs and/or
for routine/periodic maintenance /patrolling of the system.
o) Periodic routine maintenance of buildings & reservoirs constructed under this contract. Such
maintenance must ensure adequate cleanliness, ventilation, illumination and structural safety.
In addition to this, the general hygienic standards must be maintained and adequate plantation
should be done.
p) Maintenance of road-cut repairs carried out under the contract.
q) Updating and periodic submissions of the operation and maintenance manual as defined in
specifications for O&M works. The contractor shall take up all periodic maintenance works
provided in the approved O&M manual.
r) Submission of monthly report.
s) Co-ordination with other contractors and/ or agencies responsible for the Execution,
operation and maintenance for regional schemes and Electric Supply Company.
The O&M period shall commence after complete execution of the project as defined in contract
document i.e. 31 months and one year defect liability after award of work or actual date of
completion of defect liability period whichever is later. However, the part commissioning of the
project on completion of certain units, if possible, before completion of execution period, and if
Department desires to use these units, the same shall be put to O&M without reckoning such

period towards the 10 years period of O&M, however charges for power shall be borne by the
department during this period.
During Operation & Maintenance either after commencement of the O&M period as
mentioned above or during execution period i.e. part operation & maintenance if
required by department due to part handing over of the system before completion of
execution period of 36 months the following charges towards O&M shall be paid by the
Department / Contractor.
1. Power charges shall be paid by department. Any power factor surcharge if
levied by power supply agency shall be borne by the contractor.
2. Chemical i.e. liquefied chlorine shall be provided by the Contractor.
3. All other cost involved for O&M viz. cost of spares, staff, communications,
consumables, stationery, T&P, vehicles etc. shall be borne by the contractor.
Under this contract, the contractor is required to operate and maintain all the works carried out at
all pumping stations including all civil, EMI and ancillary works executed under this contract,
CWRs, Existing & Proposed ESRs, Transfer mains, Rising mains from Pumping stations to
ESRs, Cluster Distribution main, internal village distribution pipelines, PSPs and CWTs for
clusters and pumping stations, CWR, ESR, rising mains, distribution mains, internal town
distribution pipelines for town for the entire period specified in the contract (as on
commencement date of O&M period and all the additions, alterations done there after). The
maintenance of existing distribution pipelines of Jahazpur town shall be done by the contractor.
A joint inspection shall be carried out before commencement of O & M work and following
documents shall be inspected:
(i) As built drawings of civil works and EMI works, test reports of pump/motor/valves
shall be displayed on wooden board duly laminated in respective pumping station.
(ii) O&M Manual
(iv) Log books (formats)
During operation and maintenance the contractor shall ensure that the Department gets
the required and envisaged flow(s) at each VTC of village and each zone of town as per
requirement at desired pressure.
The duties of the contractor under this contract shall include the following but shall not
be limited to:
a) Identification and obtaining all the clearances required for the operation of the facility and for
the fulfillment of its obligations under the Conditions of Contract.
b) Arrange all the necessary manpower & services for the operation and maintenance of the
system as per scope defined above including normal watch & wards etc.
c) Make all necessary arrangements for the tools and plants, machinery, equipments, furniture
and transportation vehicles necessary for operation and maintenance and timely repairs.
d) Procure and store all required materials, equipment, lubricants, inventory for repair and
operation and maintenance at such locations.
e) Be responsible for the security of the facility and comply with applicable laws and/or
statutory requirements as may be applicable in the land from time to time.
f) Co-ordinate and communicate with other agencies like PWD, Railway, AVVNL, Water
Resources Deptt., Telephone Deptt. etc.
g) Be responsible to minimize wastage of water by attending to leakages of pipe, air valve, scour
valve etc. and breaches immediately and shall repair/restore within 12 hours from the notice
of such leakage / breach. In no case the down time of the pipe/machine should exceed 12
hours.
h) Pump/motor/transformer/capacitor bank etc. should be repaired quickly within reasonable
time in order to avoid down time of the system exceeding 12 hours.
i) Maintaining, foolproof operation of all PLC and SCADA systems at all locations round the
clock uninterrupted. Any fault in PLC system, it should be rectified within 24 hours.
j) Maintaining the 11/0.415 KV sub-stations at each headworks as per standard practice/norms.
k) Ensure adoption of newly developed energy conservation measures/regulations viz energy
audit, CFL lighting etc.
l) The power factor of electrical system at all location should not be less than 0.96. The power
factor surcharge / load surcharge billed by AVVNL in any month of O&M period or part
O&M period shall be recoverable from the contractor’s monthly O&M bill.
m) Be responsible for most efficient use of power in running of plant and machinery even
lighting load.
n) The Contractor shall carry out his activities in the facility in such a manner that water will not
be wasted, leaked or spilled onto the site or elsewhere. The Contractor shall bear the cost of
correcting any adverse consequences resulting from such wastage, leakage or spillage, and
shall maintain history of such event in history sheet.
o) The contractor shall keep records for daily water drawl from all pumping stations through
SCADA system which shall include Flow rates, pressure, operation state of pumps at each
head works, chlorine doses, flow & pressure at each ESR and VTC, operational status of all
mechanical, electrical & instrumentation equipment. The record shall be kept in formats as
approved by EIC. Contractor shall submit these records to EIC on monthly basis.
p) The contractor shall submit report above operations regularly as described here under daily /
weekly / monthly through e-mail. Monthly report should also be submitted in hard copies.
q) Maintaining the drinking water supply facilities in all pump houses, office & residential
buildings and all its units.
r) The plantation done on headworks should be maintained and dead plants should be replaced.
s) To keep the entire campus area, particularly toilets neat and clean and dis-infected by using
Phenyl, acid and other chemicals at all head works.
t) Up keeping and maintaining all illumination system, internal and external at all head works
by changing the default equipment immediately.
2.19.2 Deployment Of Minimum Staff for O&M
The minimum permanent staff to be deployed for each section by the contractor for carrying out
the O&M functions shall be as follows:
A. General Staff (common for the whole project)
S. Designation Qualification Minimum Nos.

No. Experience
1. O&M In-Charge Graduate Engineer 5 years 1

2. O&M Engineer Graduate Engineer-Electrical/ 5 years 1

Mechanical
3. SCADA operator Relevant Computer Course 5 years 2
4. Electrician ITI/Diploma 5 years 3
B. At Pumping Stations
S. Designation Minimum Experience Nos. Required Total

N0. Qualification At each Pumping
station
1. Pump Driver ITI 5 years 4 24
(Elect/Mech.)
2. Helpers 8th Pass - 3 18
3. Watchman 8th Pass - 3 18
4. Gardener - 1 6
5. Sweeper - 1 6
C. For Pipelines
S. Designation Qualification Experience Numbers

No.
1. Fitters ITI-Fitting Trade 5 years 5
2. Helpers 8th pass - 10
Note:
(1) The above requirement is minimum only. The contractor will arrange extra work force, as
and when required, so as to smoothly run the repair and maintenance including
preventive maintenance, repairs etc. and general cleanliness of the installations.
(2) The above staff strength is exclusive of leave/rest reserve required for different category
of staff. The contractor shall ensure, the personnel given in the above table for all the
seven days in a week.
(3) The contractor shall make appropriate arrangements for maintenance of items like
patrolling, vehicle operations and other activities defined to fulfill its obligations under
R&M contract.
2.19.3 Pipeline Works
a) Maintaining everyday observations including meter readings of all meters

installed in the VTC and in pumping stations and ESRs.
b) Repair of leakage’s, damage to any portion of pipes and pipe appurtenances,
pillars, thrust blocks etc., and shall be done to within 12 hours from identification.
c) Emergency Repair(s) of burst(s) for maintaining regular supplies immediately.
d) Operation of all valves quarterly to check its functioning for operation.
Maintenance of all valves. Inspection of surge protection equipment/system if any
and repair them if required. Contractor shall submit quarterly reports of all such
activities done.
e) To maintain minimum level of inventory required for repair of pipe leakage(s)

and burst(s), valves (air valve, sluice valves, butterfly valves), flow meters, surge
protection devices or any other pipe appurtenances or equipment(s) installed.
f) Quarterly lubrication of all gear boxes along the alignment.
g) To maintain the valve chambers along the pipeline in clean and dry conditions.
h) To make necessary arrangements for de-watering in situations warranted for
O&M.
i) To maintain the soil cover on the pipe damaged due to rains, run-off or due to
other reasons.
j) Maintaining clean conditions at pillars and fixity blocks along pipelines.
k) Maintain all the existing rising and distribution pipelines within the project area.
2.19.4 Pumping Stations
a) Maintaining everyday observations including meter readings of all

electromagnetic meters installed at pumping stations.
b) Chlorination of water in CWR as per requirement for which liquefied chlorine
shall be provided by the department. However, the department may ask the
contractor to supply the chlorine for which actual cost shall be reimbursed to the
contractor on production of the bill.
c) Routine maintenance of the pumps and motors as per recommendation of the
manufacturers.
d) Routine maintenance of the entire control system and instruments as per
recommendation of the manufacturer.
e) The contractor shall be responsible for keeping SCADA system fully functioning
for all times. Suitable arrangement shall be made for preventing loss of data
during any break-down.
f) Replacement of damaged control, communication and power supply cables.
g) Repair/replacement of all instruments such as flow meters, pressure gauges, level-
sensors, float levels, temperature scanners, vibration and noise meters along with
all other equipments. The down time of any individual instrument as referred
above shall not exceed 12 hours.
h) Periodic calibration of all measuring/metering equipments and resetting of all
relays at every sixth month.
i) To maintain all consumables for printing without any additional cost to the
department.
j) To produce and submit daily and monthly customized reports from each pumping
station using SCADA system.
k) Repair/replacement of damaged electrical equipments/parts for proper functioning
of electrical system.
l) Maintenance of cooling and lubrication system.
m) Replacement of bearings, neck rings, and impeller rings; shafts, sleeves/bushes,

damaged impellers etc. and other damaged parts so that the operation of pumps
ensures the guaranteed efficiencies with desired noise and vibration levels.
n) Routine & periodic maintenance of the cranes as per recommendation of the
manufacturer.
o) Breakdown maintenance of all electrical, mechanical & instrumentation
equipment etc.
p) Re-painting of the exposed mild steel pipeline specials, pumps, motors, valves,
ladders, railings and steel structures like entry gate, grating etc in the P.S. campus
in the 3rd , 5th , 8th and 10th years of O&M to keep them in good shape.
q) Repainting of lighting poles and structures and other electric equipment in the
3rd, 5th, 8th & 10th year of O&M.
r) Repainting annually suction pipeline projected in sump including bell-mouth,
sluice gates, trash-racks, level gauges and other steel structures in contact with
water.
s) To keep the surrounding areas of the pumping stations free from shrubs, grass and
other vegetations.
t) To maintain/ shorten the gap uniformly between neck and neck ring of all pumps
as per recommendation of the manufacturer.
u) Be responsible for maintaining the required Power Factor at all the pumping
stations. Additional capacitor banks shall be added wherever required due to de-
rating or other wise. The contractor shall add capacitance by additional capacitors
with all loads, so that average monthly power factor remain not less than 0.96.
Contractor shall be liable for recovery of power factor surcharge billed by
AVVNL for his failure to maintain power factor. No claim against incentive given
by AVVNL for maintaining PF above 0.95 shall be admissible to contractor.
2.19.5 Grid Sub-stations
The contractor shall maintain all Electric Substations at all head works which includes
following duties & responsibilities;
a) Routine and periodical checking of all equipments and structures installed at
switchyard to ensure their normal functioning.
b) Regular cleaning of switchyard to ensure no growth of any kind of vegetation.
c) Regular checking of oil levels in all types of transformers and to supplement as
and when required and the contractor to arrange oil filtration at his level whenever
required.
d) To keep all joints leads, nut bolts in tightened position.

e) To maintain all relays in healthy condition and to recalibrate in 3rd and 5th year.
f) To maintain the required earthing level.
g) To repaint all equipments and steel and other supporting structures in 3rd and 5th
year.
2.19.6 Water Reservoirs (CWRs/ESRs):
The Contractor shall carry out following maintenance work, during O & M period :
a) Repair of damaged portions of reservoirs.
b) To operate and check all valves, instruments and automation systems once in 3 months
and do the required maintenance work to ensure their smooth and proper functioning.
c) Cleaning and bleaching of the reservoir once in 6 months as per direction of
Engineer in Charge. The date of cleaning and bleaching shall be painted on the
signboard installed near the reservoir.
d) Repair of the damaged portions of the plinth protection works.
e) Repainting during the 5th year of O&M period
f) To maintain the reservoir, its surrounding and the campus in a neat and tidy
manner.
g) Other activities required for maintaining the tanks and their surroundings in neat
conditions.
The contractor shall also carry out the ordinary repair to buildings during the O & M
period. The repairs may include but not limited to items: -
(i) Easing of doors and windows, monsoon repairs to roofs, attention to
drains, rainwater spouts and attention to plinth protection.
(ii) External white or color wash, external or internal painting, internal
distempering, renewal of approach roads within the campus.
The frequency of repairs must not be less than as specified below:
S. Nature of Repair Frequency of Repair

No.
1. External finishing of residential quarters, In the 5th & 10th years of O&M
office buildings and pump houses (Cement
base Paint) after attending minor repairs such
as damage to plaster, pointing etc.
2. Internal finishing of residential quarters, In the 5th & 10th years of O&M
office buildings and pump houses (Oil bount
distemper) after attending minor repairs such
as damage to plaster, floor etc.
3. Painting of woodwork & steel works In the 5th & 10th years of O&M
including shutters of residential quarters,
office buildings and pump houses.

S. Nature of Repair Frequency of Repair

No.
4. External finishing (Cement based paint) after In the 5th & 10th years of O&M
attending minor repairs of all CWRs
5. External finishing (Cement based paint) after In the 5th & 10th years of O&M
attending minor repairs of all ESRs

3.0 SPECIFICATIONS FOR PIPELINE WORK
These specifications will cover providing & laying of transfer mains, rising mains, cluster
distribution pipelines, distribution mains and internal villages distribution pipelines for cluster
scheme of 213 villages of JahajpurJahazpur and Kotri Tehsil and JahajpurJahazpur Town mainly
of DI, BWSC, HDPE, uPVC and MS pipes. The selection of pipe diameter and class shall be as
per the ultimate pumping systems i.e. ultimate demand of the year 2045.
3.1 PREPARATORY SUBMISSIONS
The Contractor shall prepare and submit the following:
3.1.1 L-Section
The contractor shall produce the detailed plan and L-section drawings to the department showing
the proposed placement of pipes and HGL for this package along the alignment.
For the comprehensive overview of the stretch, the comprehensive L-Section has to be made
available for finalizing the alignment of the pipeline.
The following general criteria must be adhered while preparing the plan and L-section of the
pipeline:
Pipelines in general to be laid underground in most of the reaches with average soil cover of 0.9
m.
Wherever the pipeline is to cross the existing oil and natural gas pipelines or OFC cables, the
contractor shall take necessary permissions of the concerned authorities and lay the pipeline
accordingly with all required structures. The department shall provide assistance to the extent
possible to obtain such permission. The contractor shall be liable to all damages/claims/etc. on
account of damages or accident caused due to damages of such lines
The laying of pipes must not obstruct the flow of water in the natural drains. The pipe must cross
the drains either from below the scour levels or above the high flood levels. If crossed above the
bed level, appropriate structures at support and in between the nallah/ drain/ canal / river must be
provided with DI pipe in the exposed section. The structure must be protected by suitably planned
river training works. If laid below ground, it must have sufficient cover without change in the
existing grade of nallah/river/canal. The damaged portions of the embankment and the bed must
be restored in portions the pipeline is laid below canal bed levels with proper compaction and the
canal bed and sides must be lined with CC lining at least 40mm thick. If laid with cover less than
0.9 m, the pipe should be anchored with rock on which it is laid and shall be encased with
minimum 100 mm reinforced cement concrete all around the pipe.
Wherever the pipeline is laid with an embankment, the embankment must not create pounding of
water. If the conditions are unavoidable, suitable CD works must be provided.
Wherever road crossing is to be done or when it is placed near the road edge, sufficient cement
concrete encasing as per design has to be provided so that IRC class AA loading can be applied
without any damage to the pipe section laid at the crossing.

The drawings have to show the G.L., Invert level of pipe, depth of cutting / filling, H.G.L. for
flow corresponding to Ultimate phase flows, design working/operating pressure in pipes, type of
structures for crossing rivers,/canals,/ nallahs, etc. submitted for approval by the department.
They also have to show the proposed locations of sluice valves, air valves, scour valves and
specials and the proposed locations and types of the water hammer control devices. No additional
cost shall be payable on account of change in placement of pipeline in pursuant to the given
principle herein.
Based on surveys done by Contractor and on the hydraulic data of the pipeline system, the
Contractor has to prepare the final detailed Drawing according to the Indian Standards, and
subjected to the provisions given in this bid document.
3.1.2 Drawings & Designs
The drawing has to be prepared in close coordination with the Engineer-in-Charge and shall be
subject to his approval. The approval procedures have to be followed as prescribed in the Special
Conditions of Contract. Submissions:
• Structural Design (For BWSC Pipeline) and Hydraulic Design of pipeline with HGL of
entire section
• Design of Pipe Class.;
• Design & Drawings of pipe support structures;
• Design & Drawings of Thrust and Anchor Blocks ;
• Design of Surge Protection System;
• Design & Drawings of all CD structures;
• Design & Drawings of allied works;
• Design and Drawing of OFC/road crossing;
3.1.2.1 Hydraulic Design for water mains

After the approval of L-Section, the HGL of the Water Main shall be prepared for the following
parameters:
a) Flow rate As per Clause 1.2.1 given in system
description
Pumping Hrs. For Transfer mains: 22 hrs.
For Rising mains: 16 hrs. for rural areas and
20 hrs. for urban town
b) Length of pipeline As per detailed survey and approved L-
section of Water Main.
c) Formulae to be used to determine pipe Modified Hazen William Formula
frictional losses
d) Roughness Co-efficient for Modified C = 1.0
Hazen William’s
e) Head Losses due to contraction To be accounted separately
/Expansion to Entrance
3.1.2.2 Structural Design Criteria
The general requirement for design of BWSC pipe shall be as per IS 15155. All
pipes shall be designed to withstand the effects of internal water pressure,
overburden, water hammer pressure, external loads etc.
3.2 STANDARDS
Except as otherwise specified in this technical specification, the Indian/International Standards
and Codes of Practice in their latest version shall be adhered to for the design, manufacturing,
inspection, factory testing, packing, handling and transportation of product. Should any product
be offered conforming to other standards, the equipment or products shall be equal to or superior
to those specified and the documentary confirmation shall be submitted for the prior approval of
the Engineer-in-Charge.
This specification requires a reference to the following standard specifications
IS: 2062 Steel for General Structural Purposes

IS: 3589 Steel Pipes For Water and Sewage
IS: 5822 Code of Practice for laying of Electrically Welded Steel Pipes for
Water Supply
IS: 8329 Centrifugally cast (spun) ductile iron pressure pipes for water, gas
and sewage.
IS: 12288 Code of practice for use and laying of ductile iron pipes
Specifications for Bar Wrapped Steel Cylinder pipes (Including
IS:15155
Fittings)
IS:783 Code of practice for Laying of Concrete Pipes
IS: 4985 Unplasticized PVC pipes for potable water supplies
IS: 7634 Code of practice for laying of Unplasticized PVC pipes
IS: 4984 High Density polyethylene pipes for Water Supply
IS 7634 Laying & jointing of polyethylene (PE) Pipes
IS: 10151 PVC and its copolymers for its safe use in contact with foodstuffs,
pharmaceuticals, and drinking water
IS: 10500 Drinking water specification
IS: 12235 Methods of test for unplasticized PVC pipes for potable water
supplies
IS: 4669 Methods of test for PVC resin
IS: 12818 Unplasticized PVC screen and casing pipes for bore/tubewell
IS: 3400 Methods of test for vulcanised rubber (part-1 to 22)
IS: 1387 General requirements for the supply of metallurgical material
IS: 210 Grey iron casting
IS: 1536 Centrifugally cast (spun) iron pressure pipe for water, gas and
sewage
IS: 1537 Vertically cast iron pressure pipe for water, gas and sewage
IS: 1538 Cast iron fittings for pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage
IS: 5531 CI specials for Asbestos cement pressure pipes for water gas &
sewage
IS: 1363 Hexagon head bolts, screws and nuts of product grade A and B
(part:1-5)
IS: 1367 Technical supply conditions for threaded steel fasteners
IS: 780 Sluice valve for water works purposes
IS: 2906 Specifications for sluice valves for water works purposes
IS: 318 Leaded tin bronze ingots and casting

IS: 8543 Methods of testing plastics: Determination of density of solid
plastics
IS: 7181 Horizontally cast iron double flanged pipes for water, gas and
sewage.
IS: 8794 CI detachable joints for use with Asbestos cement pressure pipes
IS: 5382 Rubber sealing rings for gas mains, water mains and sewers
IS: 5531 Cast iron specials for asbestos cement pressure pipes for water,
gas and sewage
IS: 779 Water meters
IS: 3624 Pressure and vacuum gauges
IS: 341 Black japan, types A, B and C
IS: 9862 Ready mixed paint, brushing, bituminous, black, lead free, acid,
alkali, water and chlorine resisting
IS: 1239 Mild steel tubes, tubular and other wrought steel fittings
IS: 7328 High density polyethylene materials for moulding and extrusion
IS: 4984 Specification for high density polyethylene pipes for potable water
supplies; sewage and industrial effluents
IS: 554 Dimensions for pipe threads where pressure tight joints are
required on the threads
IS: 1592 Asbestos cement pressure pipes - Specifications
IS: 778 Specifications for copper alloy gate, globe and check valves for
water works purposes
IS: 12820 Dimensional requirements for rubber gaskets for mechanical joints
and push on joint for use with cast iron pies and fittings for
carrying water, gas and sewage.
IS: 9523 Specification for DI fittings for pressure pipes for water, gas, and
sewage.
ISO: 2045 Single socket for uPVC and uPVC pressure pipes with elastic
sealing ring type joints - Minimum depth of engagement
ISO: 2507 PVC pipes and fittings- Vicat softening temperature - Test method
and specification
ISO: 3603 Fittings for PVC pipe with elastic sealing ring joints pressure test
for leakproofness
ISO: 1167 Thermoplastics pipes for the transport of fluids - Resistance to
internal pressure - Test method and basic specification
ISO 3451-5 Determination of Ash: Part-5 - Poly vinyl chloride
ASTM: D Standard test method for degree of fusion of extruded PVC pipe
2152 and moulded fittings by Acetone immersion
MTNL Mahanagar Telephone Nigam Limited; Technical specifications
for cable ducts.
BS: 4772 Specification for DI fittings
IS: 7634- Code of practice for plastic pipe works for potable water supplies
Parts 1-3
CPHEEO Manual on Water Supply and Treatment, III edition, Ministry of
Urban Development, New Delhi- May 1999.
3.3 DI PIPELINE
3.3.1 Ductile Iron Pipe
The pipes will be centrifugally cast (spun) Ductile Iron pipes for Water and Sewage conforming
to the IS 8329: 2000 and shall be marked with BIS/ISS. The pipes used will be either with push
on joints (Rubber Gasket Joints) or Flanged joints. The class of pipe to be used shall be of the
class K-9/K-7.
The pipes shall be coated with bitumen as per appendix C and have factory provided cement
mortar lining in the inside as per the provisions of Appendix B of the IS 8329: 2000.
The pipes will be supplied in standard length of 5.50 and 6.00 meters length with suitably
rounded or chamfered ends. Each pipe of the push on joint variety will also be supplied with a
rubber EPDM gasket. Any change in the stipulated lengths will be approved by the Engineer – in-
charge. The gaskets will confirm to the IS 5382:1985.
The gaskets should also be supplied by the manufacturer of the pipes. They should preferably be
manufactured by the manufacturer of the pipes. In case they are not, it will be the responsibility
of the manufacturer of the pipes to have them manufactured from a suitable manufacturer under
its own supervision and have it tested at his/sub contractors premises as per the contract. The pipe
manufacturer will however be responsible for the compatibility and quality of the products.
The flanged joints will confirm to the Clause 6.2 of IS 8329. The pipe supply will also include
one rubber gaskets for each flange.
3.3.2 Inspection and Testing:

The pipes will be subjected to following tests for acceptance:
• Visual and dimensional check as per Clause 13 and 15 of IS 8329
• Mechanical Test as per Clause 10 of IS 8329
• Hydrostatic Test as per Clause 11 of IS 8329
• The test reports for the rubber gaskets shall be as per acceptance tests of the IS 5832 and
will be in accordance to Clause 3.8
The sampling shall be as per the provisions of the IS 8329
3.3.3 Marking
• All pipes will be marked as per Clause 18 of IS 8329 and show as below:
• Manufacturer name/ stamp
• Nominal diameter
• Class reference
• All pipes should be ISI Marked.
• A white ring line showing length of insertion at spigot end

3.3.4 Packing and Transport:

The pipes should be preferably transported by road from the factory and stored as per the
manufacturer specifications to protect damage.
3.3.5 Specials for Ductile Iron Pipes

3.3.5.1 General
This section covers the general requirements for Ductile Iron (DI) fittings suitable for Tyton
joints to be used with Ductile Iron pipes with flanged and Tyton jointing system.
3.3.5.2 Types of specials
The following types of DI fittings shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with IS: 9523
or BS: 4772.
• flanged socket
• flanged spigot
• double socket bends (900, 450, 22 1/2 0, 11 1/4 0)
• double socket branch flanged tee
• all socket tee.
• double socket taper.
• All Flanged Tee.
• All Flanged taper.
3.3.5.3 Supply
All the DI fittings shall be supplied with one rubber ring for each socket. The rubber ring shall
conform to IS: 12820 and IS: 5382 as described in the preceding chapter. Flanged fittings shall be
supplied with one rubber gasket per flange and the required number of nuts and bolts.
3.3.6 Lubricant for ductile iron pipes and specials

3.3.6.1 General
This section covers the requirements for lubricant for the assembly of Ductile Iron pipes and
specials suitable for Tyton push-in rubber ring joints
3.3.6.2 Specification
The lubricant has to have the following characteristics:
• must have a paste like consistency and be ready for use
• has to adhere to wet and dry surfaces of DI pipes and rubber rings
• to be applied in hot and cold weather; ambient temperature 0 - 50 °C, temperature of
exposed pipes up to 70 °C
• must be non toxic
• must be water soluble
• must not affect the properties of the drinking water carried in the pipes
• must not have an objectionable odour

• has to inhibit bacterial growth

• must not be harmful to the skin
• must have a shelf live not less than 2 years
3.3.6.3 Acceptance tests
• They shall be conducted in line with the provisions of the IS 9523
3.3.7 Packing
All the DI fittings shall be properly packed with jute cloth. Rubber rings shall be packed in
polyethylene bags. Rubber rings in PE bags and nuts, bolts etc. shall be supplied in separate jute
bags.
The fittings should also be supplied by the manufacturer of the pipes. They should preferably be
manufactured by the manufacturer of the pipes. In case they are not, it will be the responsibility
of the manufacturer of the pipes to have them manufactured from a suitable manufacturer under
its own supervision and have it tested at his/sub contractors premises as per the contract. The pipe
3.4 BAR WRAPPED STEEL CYLINDER (BWSC) PIPES

3.4.1 SCOPE
This Specification covers the requirements for design, manufacturing, testing,
supplying, laying, jointing, welding and testing at works and site of Bar Wrapped
Steel Cylinder (BWSC) pipes used for water supply mains.
3.4.2 APPLICABLE CODES
The manufacturing, testing, supplying, jointing, welding and testing of BWSC

pipes shall comply with all currently applicable statutes, regulations, standards
and Codes. In particular, the following standards, unless otherwise specified
herein, shall be referred. In all cases, the latest revision of the Codes shall be
referred to. If requirements of this Specification conflict with the requirements of
the standards/ Codes, these Specifications shall govern.
3.4.3 DESIGN
The BWSC-16/BWSC-12 pipes shall be used for transfer mains/rising mains,

where 16/12 stands for factory test pressure in Kg/cm2. The BWSC pipes shall be
designed as per the Specifications for BWSC pipes, to withstand the likely extreme
conditions of stresses that may arise during all stages of manufacturing handling
and service. The designs shall be submitted to the Engineer-in-Charge for approval.
All pipes shall be designed to withstand the effects of internal water pressure,
overburden, water hammer pressure, external loads etc.
In case of corrosive soils in which pipes are to be laid, necessary precautions

against chemical attack and corrosion shall be taken in manufacturing these pipes
with prior approval from engineer in charge. The design of BWSC pipes shall be in
accordance with the basic assumptions and general requirements stipulated in IS:
15155
3.4.3.1 WORKING PRESSURE
The maximum sustained internal pressure excluding surge to which each portion of
the pipe line may be subjected when installed.
3.4.3.2 SITE TEST PRESSURE
1. 5 times working pressure pertaining to the section or 1.1 times static pressure,
whichever is more (surge pressure is to be controlled within 25 Percent of pump
head in case of pumping main)
3.4.3.3 FACTORY TEST PRESSURE
a) Site test pressure plus 0.1 N/mm2 for working pressure up to 1 N/mm2,
and
b) Site test pressure plus 0.2 N/mm2. for working pressure above 1 N/mm2
3.4.3.4 SURGE (WATER HAMMER) PRESSURE
Pressure which is produced by a change of velocity of the moving stream and becomes
maximum, when there is sudden stoppage which may be caused by the closing of a valve
for by shutting down a pump station, Surge pressure is to be controlled within 25 percent
of pump head.
3.4.3.5 DESIGN CRITERIA
The reinforcement of the pipe shall consist of a welded steel cylinder, and bar / wire is
directly wrapped under low tension. The average circumferential stress in the steel
cylinder and bar / wire reinforcement of the pipes shall be as given below:
a) At factory test pressure, stress shall not exceed 187 N/mm2 nor 75 percent of the
minimum yield strength of the steel used in the cylinder.
b) At site test pressure, stress shall not exceed 165 N/mm2 nor 66 percent of the
c) At working pressure, stress shall not exceed 125 N/mm2 nor 55 percent of the
The yield strength considered shall be the lower value of the steel cylinder and the
bar/wire.
The structural properties of the pipe, together with the bedding and backfill, shall be
designed to limit the deflection of pipe to not more than D2/ (1.02x 105) mm, D is the
nominal inside diameter of the pipe measured in millimeters of the total area of
circumferential reinforcement. The area of bar / wire reinforcement in square millimeters
per linear meter of pipe, shall not be less than 83 percent of inside diameter of the pipe, in
mm or 487 mm2/m linear. The bar/ wire shall not be less than 5.0 mm in diameter. The

design clear spacing between bars/ wires shall not be less the diameter of the bar/ wire
used and the centre bar/ wire spacing shall not exceed 50 mm.
The nominal cylinder thickness shall be as per table 1 of IS: 15155. Design of bar/wire
wrapped steel cylinder pipe with mortar lining and coating shall be done as per IS 15155.
3.4.4 MATERIAL
(i) CEMENT
The cement used for the manufacture of BWSC pipes shall conform to one of the
following:
1. 43 / 53 grade Ordinary Portland Cement conforming to IS: 8112 / IS: 12269

2. Rapid Hardening Portland cement conforming to IS: 8041
3. Slag cement (with not more than 50% slag) conforming to IS : 455
4. Sulphate Resistant Cement conforming to IS: 12330
5. Super sulphated Cement conforming to IS: 6906
(ii) AGGREGATE
Fine aggregates shall conform to I.S.383. The requirements of 4 Grading of IS: 383 shall
not apply. Manufacturer shall furnish the grading curve for fine aggregate. The variation in
finesses modulus during manufacture shall not be more than ± 5 percent. Silt Content in
fine aggregates shall be less than 3 percent. The fineness modulus of aggregates for
coating shall be between 2.6 to 3.2.
(iii) WATER
The water used for cement mortar preparation and for curing the pipes shall conform to
requirements given in 5.4 of IS: 456.
(iv) ADMIXTURES
Admixtures may be used with the approval of the purchase. However, use of any
admixture containing chlorides in any form shall be prohibited. The admixture shall
conform to IS: 9103.
(v) STEEL REINFORCEMENT

The reinforcement steel Bar/wire used for manufacturing BWSC pipes shall conform to
the Specifications of IS: 432 part 1 or IS: 432 part 2 or IS: 2062. The Bar /wire other than
above Indian Standards may be permitted if their properties match as per above I.S
specifications.
(vi) STEEL FOR CYLINDER, JOINT RINGS AND SPECIALS

Steel plates for Cylinder, Joint Rings and Specials shall confirm to IS: 2062 or IS 5986
provided minimum yield strength shall be 250 N/mm2. The steel sheet or plates other than
above Indian Standards may be permitted if their properties match as per the above I.S
specifications.

(vii) DIMENSIONS AND TOLERANCES

• Nominal internal diameter of the pipes, minimum wall thickness and minimum
thickness of cement mortar lining shall be as per IS: 15155.
• The cement mortar coating shall provide a minimum cover of 19 mm over the
bar/wire reinforcement or 25 mm over the cylinder, whichever is greater.
• Pipe sections shall be manufactured in lengths of 5 m to 7 m unless otherwise

specified or approved by Engineer.
• The tolerances applicable to the internal diameter shall be as per table 2 of IS

15155.
• The wall thickness shall not be less than the design thickness by the more than 5
percent or 5mm whichever is greater. The manufacturer shall declare the wall
thickness for any given design and the above tolerance shall be applicable to that
wall thickness
• Tolerance on length of pipe shall be ±2.5 % of the specified length.
• The tolerance on the circumference of the joint rings shall be as per clause 5.2.4
of IS 15155
3.4.5 MANUFACTURE
The Manufacturer of Bar Wrapped Steel Cylinder Pipes shall have the experience of
manufacturing the same type of pipe for at least 3 years and should have the capability of
meeting the requirements of tender specifications.
3.4.5.1 FABRICATION OF STEEL CYLINDERS
The steel cylinders shall be formed either by spiral welding or circumferential or

longitudinal welding, and the steel socket and spigot joint rings /steel end rings shall be
welded to the ends before testing. Representative weld samples shall be made at the
beginning of each production run, when either the pipe diameter or cylinder thickness is
changed. A representative weld sample test shall consist of three reduced section tension
specimens and three bend test specimens.
3.4.5.2 FABRICATION OF JOINT RINGS
The steel socket and spigot joint rings shall be designed and fabricated to ensure that joint
will be self centering when the pipe is laid and joined. The Structure of pipe Joint will be
Rubber ring Joint or Welded Joint.
Each ring shall be formed by one piece of steel or a number of pieces of steel butt welded
together. The rings shall be expanded beyond their elastic limit so as to achieve accurate
dimensions and shape.
3.4.5.3 CEMENT MORTAR LINING

The thickness of inside cement mortar lining shall be as per Table 1 of IS: 15155. The steel
cylinder with joint rings attached shall be placed horizontally on the spinning machine and
may be held by spinning frame. Effective measures shall be taken to maintain the
circularity of the steel cylinder during spinning process. Feeding and Spinning speed of the
mould shall be such that mortar will get evenly distributed and sufficiently compacted for
the designed uniform thickness and the duration of the spinning shall be such to achieve
required mortar strength and to permit removal from the spinning machine without damage.
3.4.5.3.1 MORTAR
Before the steel cylinder is wound with bar/ wire reinforcement, a cement mortar lining
shall be centrifugally cast within the cylinder to provide a dense, hard, smooth lining of the
thickness as per IS 15155. Minimum cement content in cement mortar lining shall be 540
kg/m3. Dry proportions of cement and sand shall be 1 part of cement to 1½ parts of sand by
volume. Water cement ratio in the mix shall not be less than 0.42. The water soluble
chloride ion content of the cement mortar lining mix, expressed as a percentage of the mass
of cement shall not exceed 0.20 percent. The minimum 28- days compressive strength of
cement mortar shall be 35 N/mm2 and at the time of wrapping of bar/ wire shall be 10
N/mm2.
3.4.5.3.2 MORTAR PREPARATION AND LINING
The work of inside lining shall be done at the manufacturer’s place. The cement, aggregate
and water shall be batched by weighing. The material shall be mixed thoroughly.
Immediately before applying the cement mortar lining, all loose mill scale, excessive rust,
oil, grease and other foreign substance shall be removed from all steel surfaces to which the
lining is to be applied. End gauge rings shall be attached securely to the pipe ends to
control the lining thickness, prevent mortar leakage, hold back the lining in the socket ring
and stiffen and hold the pipe ends round. The end gauge rings shall remain in place until
the end of the primary cure unless other measures at least equally effective are taken to
stiffen and hold the pipe ends round. Immediately on completion of the lining operation,
the pipe shall be moved for curing. Care shall be exercised at all times during handing to
prevent damage to the lining.
3.4.5.3.3 CURING BEFORE PLACING BAR/ WIRE REINFORCEMENT

Lining shall be cured either by steam or by water or by a combination of steam and water,
or by use of approved curing compounds. The curing of lining shall be done for a period,
till it attains the required strength.
3.4.6 REINFORCEMENT BAR/ WIRE WRAPPING
After the lining has been cured, the M. S. bar /wire shall be wrapped around the lined steel
cylinder in a helical form under a mild tension of 50 to 70 MPa at the predetermined
spacing for the full length of the steel cylinder except wire anchoring at the ends.
The number of turns per meter shall not be less than required by the pipe design. The
nominal wire size for bar/wire wrapping shall not be less than 5 mm in diameter.

Methods and equipments for wrapping the bar/wire shall be such that bar/wire shall be
wound around the cylinder in helical form at the predetermined design spacing and capable
of controlling the tension. As the circumferential bar/wire reinforcement is wound, a
cement slurry shall be applied to the cylinder just ahead of the bar/ wire at a rate of not less
than 0.5 l/m2. The slurry shall consist of 1.2 kg of cement to 1 l of water.
3.4.7 CEMENT MORTAR COATING

The work of coating shall be done at the manufacturer’s place. The cement mortar coating
shall provide a minimum cover of 19 mm over the bar/wire reinforcement or 25 mm over
the cylinder whichever is greater. After the lined cylinder has been wrapped with
reinforcement bar/ wire, the steel cylinder and reinforcement bar/ wire shall be protected
with a layer of rich cement mortar. Cement mortar coating shall be applied by rotary
brushes or by other approved methods and shall preferable be applied within 16 h after the
bar/wire is wound. The cement, sand and water shall be thoroughly mixed, before being fed
into the cover coating machine. The minimum cement content in the mortar shall be 540
kg/m3 and the proportion of cement and sand shall be 1 to 3 by volume, when the mix is
dry. The water cement ratio shall not be less than 0.27. Rebound or dropping not exceeding
one- fourth of the total mass of mix may be used but the resulting mix proportions shall not
be, leaner than original design mix. Rebound not used within 1 h, shall be discarded. The
minimum 28 days compressive strength of cement mortar shall be 35 N/mm2. Pneumatic
process in which mixing of ingredients is carried out at the nozzle or gun, shall not be
permitted.
The cement mortar coating shall have a minimum thickness as per the specification over all
steel, except at end face and the spigot portion going inside socket, where it will be not less
than 15 mm. To achieve adequate bond between cylinder and coat, approved bonding agent
shall be applied, at ends of pipe for a width of 100mm, along the circumference to prevent
separation between steel and cement mortar coating at ends.
Concurrently with the cement mortar coating, cement slurry shall be applied on the wound
cylinder at a rate of not less than 0.45 l/m2 just ahead of the cement mortar coating. The
slurry shall consist of 1.5 kg. of cement to 1 l of water.
The thickness shall be checked for every pipe as soon as, coating is done and to be
corrected, if required.
The cement mortar coating shall be cured either by steam or by water or by combination of
steam and water, or by use of approved curing compounds. If water curing is used for
coating it shall be kept moist for a period of at least 7 days.
After the cement mortar coating is cured is cured and prior to transport, the coating on each
pipe shall be checked for delimitation and hollows by tapping the exterior, with a hammer
having a head weight of not more than 0.5 kg. Any hollows or drumming areas detected by
sounding should be repaired by approved methods.

3.4.8 WORKMANSHIP
All pipes shall be finished clearly and free of surface flaws, laminations and all other
defects. The ends shall be square with the axis of the pipe.
When measured by means of a one meter straight edge, the deviation from straight per
meter length shall not exceed 5 mm.
Pipe shall be free from local depressions or bulges greater than 5 mm extending over a
length, in any direction, greater than twice the thickness of barrel. The external surface of
the pipe may be sand faced, when coating of cement mortar is applied.
3.4.9 HANDLING AND TRANSPORTATION OF PIPES
• Pipes shall be carefully supported and handled so as to avoid injury to the fresh lining.
If a pipe section has be rolled or otherwise moved, such operation shall be done slowly
and with every reasonable precaution against damage. Any portion of the lining,
coating that may become damaged shall be repaired with polymer mortar.
• Pipes shall be handled and transported to the site carefully
• Pipes manufactured at factory are to be carried to the site of work directly or stacked
suitably and neatly along the alignment/ road side/elsewhere near by the work site, as
directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
• All pipes shall be loaded in trucks by mechanical crane/ tripod and unloaded carefully
using crane/ tripod. No unloading using crow bars or on tyres will be allowed in any
case. Rubber belt may be used instead of crow bars or chains.
• Extreme care shall be taken while handing the pipes.
3.4.10 LOWERING & LAYING OF PIPES

• Pipes shall be lowered, laid and jointed carefully.
• Each pipe shall be thoroughly checked for any damages before laying and only the
pipes which are approved by the Engineer-in-Charge shall be laid.
• As directed by the Engineer-in-Charge, sand bedding shall be done in rocky areas. At

other places, consolidation of bottom depth to the required grade will be done, as far as
possible.
• The trench shall be kept free of water till the jointing/ welding has been properly done.
• Walking on completed line shall not be permitted until trenches are back filled.
• In additional, the provisions of IS: 5822 shall also be applicable.
3.4.11 JOINTING OF PIPES

All pipes shall be laid true to line and level. The Pipe joint shall be rubber ring joint or
field welded Joint. In case of rubber ring pipe joint, the joint shall be designed such that,
when fitted with the correct size rubber sealing ring, the joint shall be self centering,
flexible and watertight. In case of field welded pipe joint, the welding should comply with
IS 816: 1969 and the Electrodes used for welding should comply with IS 814: 1991.
3.4.11.1 JOINT PROTECTION
Pipe Joints are covered with rich cement mortar from inside & Outside of the joint is
protected with rich cement mortar using polyethylene diaper. Polyethylene diaper ensures
proper placing of mortar throughout the periphery even at the bottom of the joint. The
diaper remains in position and helps to retain the moisture inside requiring no further
curing of the joint.
3.4.11.2 WELDING OF CLOSURE GAPS
Final welding of closure gaps should be carried out within a temperature range of average
air temperature +8 0 C. For buried pipelines final welding may best be done after
intermediate pipes have been backfilled.
3.4.12 SPECIALS AND FITTINGS
The steel for fabricated steel plate specials, is cut, shaped and welded so that finished
special has the required shape and internal dimensions. Adjacent segments are jointed by
butt welding. Before lining and coating the welding of special shall be tested by use of hot
oil or dye penetrate according to IS 3658 and defects, If any shall be rectified. The steel
plate thickness for specials shall be as given in IS 7322.
In die penetration test, a white wash is applied over the weld on one side of the cylinder, on
other side when coloured paraffin or similar product is applied over the weld, no coloured
spot shall appear on the Whitewash before 4 h. if any coloured spots appear before 4 h.
weld shall be repaired and retested.
Specials and fittings for BWSC pipes shall be made out of steel plate fabricated to the
required dimensions and given a coating of cement mortar inside and outside and shall be
as per the specifications below:
These specials shall be suitable for fixing BWSC pipeline and shall conform to the
requirements of IS: 15155 and IS: 7322.
The steel for fabricated steel plate fittings is cut, shaped and welded so that the finished has
the required shape and interior dimensions. Adjacent segments shall be jointed by means of
lap or butt welding.
The steel used for manufacturing of specials shall conform to IS: 2062 or its equivalent.
The specials shall be lined inside and outside with 25mm thick cement mortar, reinforced
with 50 x 50 mm weld mesh of specified guage. The cement mortar inside shall be 1:1.5 (1
part cement: 1.5 part sand) and cement mortar outside shall be 1:2 (1 part cement: 2 part
sand).
All the specials laid shall be tested for hydrostatic pressure as specified for BWSC pipe and
to the pressure specified for pipes in the reaches where the specials are fitted.
All fittings shall be inspected by the Engineer-in-Charge or his representative at the place
of manufacture, or at site.
Extreme care shall be taken while carting the specials to site, so that inside or outside
coating is not damaged. If damages are observed it shall be repaired as per manufacturer’s
guidelines.
3.4.13 TESTING
Pipes shall be given different tests for ensuring quality of manufacture as per IS: 15155 &
IS: 3597 and quality of laying as per IS:783 & 5822.
3.4.13.1 DIMENSIONAL TESTS
3.4.13.1.1 INTERNAL DIAMETER

The internal diameter shall be measured at each end at approximately 50 mm from the
ends. Two measurements of the internal diameter at 90 to each other shall be made at each
end and center. The internal diameter shall be maintained within the tolerance specified.
3.4.13.1.2 WALL THICKNESS

Measurement of outside circumference of the pipe shall be made at three positions and
average outside diameter of the pipe shall be calculated. The inside diameter shall be
measured at three positions and average shall be calculated. The wall thickness shall be
calculated as follows:
(Average outside diameter – Average inside diameter)

2
The wall thickness shall be maintained within the tolerance specified.
Cement mortar Lining Thickness shall be maintained within the tolerance specified.
3.4.13.1.3 INTERNAL BARREL LENGTH

The length shall be measured on four longitudinal at 90° intervals. The average reading
shall be internal barrel length.
3.4.13.1.4 STRAIGHTNESS
The straightness shall be measured by 1 m long gauge. The deviation from straight line
taken between two points 1 m apart, along the pipe barrel shall not exceed 5 mm.
3.4.13.1.5 HYDROSTATIC TEST FOR STEEL CYLINDER OF PIPE

Each Steel cylinder, with joint rings welded to its ends, shall be tested by the manufacture
to a hydrostatic pressure not less than that determined by the following formula.
P = 2Sty
Dyi
Where
P = Minimum hydrostatic test pressure in N/mm2
S = Stress in pipe wall during hydrostatic test in N/mm2, which shall be 0.75 times the
specified minimum yield stress of the steel used, or as directed by the engineer.
Ty = Cylinder thickness in mm and
Dy = Inside diameter of steel cylinder in mm.
The test pressure shall be held for 1 min to observe the weld seams. There shall be no leaks.
Any leaks in the welded seam shall be repaired, after which the pipe section shall be
retested hydrostatically. If on re-test a section shows any leaks in the welded seams, it shall
be repaired and re-tested.
3.4.13.1.6 PIPE TEST AT FACTORY

One in Fifty finished pipe shall be subjected to factory pressure test. The pipe shall be
tested in accordance with IS 3597.
The pipe shall be tested for a period of 3 min. During the test the pipe shall be absolutely
water-tight and show no leaks, weeping of defects considered detrimental to the pipe’s
performance. No crack in the external surface shall be wider than 0.5 mm on a length
exceeding 300mm using a feeler gauge.
3.4.13.1.7 PERMEABILITY TEST ON COATING

The drop of water level, in the specimens of pipes selected when tested according to
method described in IS 3597 shall not exceed 2 cm3 at the end of two hours and the final
permeability between fourth and fifth hours shall not exceed 0.3 cm3 when a higher result
is obtained, the test shall be repeated on twice the number of pipes originally tested and the
lot shall be accepted, if all pipes pass the test. Where retest is not satisfactory, all pipes
from that lot may be tested individually and only those with satisfactory results shall be
accepted. No additional treatment of any type shall be allowed on the pipe before
permeability test is taken. The criteria for acceptance are the final permeability. The
measurement shall be taken immediately after factory test. In case this is taken later, then
the pipe has to be kept wet for 48 hrs prior to test.
3.4.13.1.8 BOILING ABSORPTION TEST ON COATING MORTAR

Coating mortar samples shall be drawn and tested for boiling absorption test According to
ASTM Standard C 497 method “A”.
Test value shall consist of the average of a minimum of three samples taken on same day
from the same working shift. The average absorption shall not exceed 9 percent and no
individual sample shall have an absorption exceeding 11 percent .Testing shall be
performed on a weekly basis.
3.4.13.1.9 HYDROSTATIC TESTING OF THE FINISHED PIPE
One in 50 pipes shall be subjected to Hydrostatic test to the factory test pressure after 7 days
curing is completed. The factory test pressure shall be maintained for a period of 3 minutes.
During the test pipe shall be absolutely water tight and show no leaks.
3.4.13.1.10 MEASUREMENT
The net length of pipes as laid or fixed shall be measured in running meters correct to a cm.
Specials shall be excluded and measured along centerline in running meters and paid for
separately under the relevant item. The portion of the pipe overlapped at the joints shall not
be included in the length of pipe work. Excavation, refilling, shoring and timbering in
trenches masonry of concrete pillars and thrust blocks wherever required shall be measured
and paid for separately under relevant items of work.
3.5 UPVC PIPES
3.5.1 Scope
This section of the document specifies the required properties of the pipes made of unplasticized
polyvinyl chloride (uPVC) with socket(s) suitable for elastomeric sealing ring type joints for
conveyance of water under pressure for supply of drinking water. The pipes are intended to be used
for buried water mains with ambient atmospheric temperature reaching up to 50°C and soil surface
temperature rising more than 65°C. The stipulations given in this document for uPVC pipe which
are not covered by any other code/standard, shall be governed by the provisions of IS 4985
The pipes will be supplied with one end plain with chamfer and other end socket suitable for
elastomeric sealing ring type joints in accordance with IS: 4985.
Each pipe shall be supplied along with a rubber ring suitable for the socket for elastomeric sealing
ring type joints.
3.5.2 Material
The material from which the pipes are made shall consist substantially of unplasticized polyvinyl
chloride conforming to IS: 10151, to which may be added only those additives that are absolutely
needed to facilitate the manufacture of the polymer, and the production of sound, durable pipes of
good surface, finish, mechanical strength and opacity.
The total quantity of additives like plasticizers, stabilisers, lubricants and fillers shall not exceed
7.0%.
The bulk density of uPVC pipe shall be 1.39 to 1.44 g/ cm3.
PVC resin of suspension grade K-66/K-67 shall be used for extrusion of uPVC pipe.
3.5.3 Classification
The pressure rating of pipes shall be of class-3 in accordance with IS: 4985
3.5.4 Dimensions of the pipes and the sockets
The dimensions and tolerances of pipes shall comply to clauses of IS: 4985.
The tolerance on outside diameter and wall thickness of pipe shall be as per Table-1 given in IS:
4985.
The dimensions of the socket for elastomeric sealing ring type joint shall be in accordance with
Clause 7.2.1.2 and Tables 4 and 5 of the IS 4985
The pipe shall be supplied in straight lengths of 6 m with tolerance of + 20 mm and -0 mm. The
effective length of socket pipe shall be considered as shown in Figure-3 of IS: 4985.
3.5.5 Physical & chemical properties
The pipe shall confirm to the Clause 10 of IS 4985-2000 for its physical and chemical properties
except for the density and ash content provisions which shall be as per the stipulations of Contract.
The colour of the pipes shall be dark grey.

Influence on water intended for human consumption shall be governed by IS: 12235.
All plastic and non plastic material for components of the uPVC piping system e. g. Elastomeric
sealing ring, lubricants, when in permanent or in temporary contact with water which is intended
for human consumption, shall not adversely affect the quality of the drinking water.
3.5.6 Mechanical properties
Hydrostatic strength of the pipes
The pipes and integral sealing ring will confirm to internal hydrostatic pressure in accordance with
Clause 11.1 and sampling as per annex D of IS 4985
3.5.7 Tests and conformity criteria

3.5.7.1 quality assurance from the manufacturer
The following in house tests shall be carried out on the raw material:
grade (K-value)
particle size distribution
bulk density of resin
bulk density of compound
The manufacturer will also have the following tests conducted from Standard Test
Laboratory
Effect on water quality
Internal Hydrostatic Test (Type)
3.5.7.2 Acceptance Test
All uPVC pipes of the same size and class manufactured on a particular machine shall be
considered as a lot for quality control inspection. However, the maximum size of a lot shall
not be more than 1000 pipes.
The sampling procedure and scale of sampling for visual inspection and dimensional
requirements shall be as per given in Annexure-D of IS: 4985.
The pipes shall be tested for lot acceptance.
The following acceptance tests shall be conducted in accordance with IS: 4985 and IS:
12235.
Visual and dimensional check
Reversion test.
Vicat Softening test
Ash Content
Bulk density
Resistance to external blows
Internal hydrostatic pressure test for pipes and joints
Opacity

3.5.8 Markings
Each pipe shall be clearly marked as indicated below:
Manufacturers name and trademark
Outside diameter in mm.
Class of pipe and pressure rating
All pipes should be ISI marked.
Month and year of manufacturing
Length of pipe
Marking of insert depth of spigot
Each pipe shall also be marked in centre strip as circumference 1” wide at intervals not more than 3
meters to show the class of pipe.
Class 3 – Green
3.5.9 Packing and transport

The socket and spigot end of all the pipes shall be provided with tightly fitted end caps, protecting
the inside of the pipes effectively against dirt etc. The end caps shall be of suitable high density
(HD) plastic material in any colour other than black. They shall be fitted to the pipes prior to
packing and transportation.
The pipes shall be transported to the store and site by trucks in pre packed bundles to ensure
adequate protection during transport. At the time of packing and stacking of pipes the sockets shall
be alternated within the pile and shall project sufficiently for the pipes to be correctly supported
along their whole length. The pipes shall rest uniformly on the vehicle bed over their whole length
during transport, carefully placed and firmly secured against unwarranted movement during
transportation to the satisfaction of Engineer In charge.
3.5.10 Supply of uPVC Pipes:-
The Contractor shall supply uPVC pipes marked with BIS/ISS. The Contractor will have to supply
uPVC pipes manufactured by manufacturers having ISO 9000-2000 certification and who has been
in the business of supply of uPVC pipes with elastomeric rubber ring joints and have proven record
of successful supply and testing for minimum one year. The Contractor will have to present a
certified photocopy of this certification for manufacturer he propose to procure his material from
before starting supplies.
3.5.11 Rubber Rings for PVC Pipes and Specials

3.5.11.1 Scope
This section prescribes the requirements for materials used for vulcanised solid rubber sealing rings
for water supply at ambient temperature. It covers rubber rings for uPVC pipes.
3.5.11.2 Material
The rubber shall be free from extractable substances which impart taste, odour or toxicity to water.
The rubber or its compound shall not content toxic materials, such as compounds of mercury,
antimony, manganese, lead or copper.
The rubber rings shall be vulcanized from Ethylene propylene (EPDM). The colour of material
shall be black.
The rubber ring shall be long term termite resistant.
The sealing ring shall have no detrimental effect on the properties of the pipe and shall not cause
the test assembly to fail the functional requirements
3.5.11.3 Appearance and homogeneity

The rings shall be homogeneous, free from porosity, grit, excessive blooms, blisters, or other visible
surface imperfections. The fin or flash shall not exceed 0.4 mm and width 0.8 mm.
Rubber rings shall be made of a properly vulcanized virgin rubber compound containing no scrap or
reclaim.
The surface of the rubber rings shall be smooth, free from pitting cracks, blisters, air marks, and any
other imperfection that may affect its behavior in service. The body of the rubber ring shall be free
from porosity and air pockets.
3.5.11.4 Dimensions and tolerances.
The profile and dimensions of the rubber ring shall be such that under normal circumstances
efficient sealing can be expected for the socket dimensions.
The nominal measurements and the tolerances shall be in accordance with the figures stated by the
manufacturer and they shall be laid down in a drawing.
3.5.11.5 Physical requirements.
The rubber ring shall have the ISI mark and will confirm to IS: 5382 and comply with the following
physical properties when tested in accordance with IS: 3400
Properties EPDM
Tensile Strength 11 MPa
Hardness 50, +5, -4 IRHD
Elongation at break Min. 400%
Compression Set 12%
Test condition 27degree C., 72h,
Max. permanent deformation
Water absorption Test Max. 10%
Accelerated ageing Test
Hardness -5 to +8 IRHD
Tensile Strength ± 20%
Elongation at break -30% to +10%
3.5.11.6 Marking
Each sealing ring shall be permanently marked with:
• The Manufacturer’s name or trade mark.
• The month and year of manufacture
• Diameter of pipe for which the ring is suitable.
• Type of rubber material
• ISI marked.
3.5.11.7 Testing
The scale of sampling and criteria for conformity shall be in accordance with IS: 5382. The
following tests shall be conducted for conformity.
• Hardness
• Tensile strength
• Elongation at break
• Compression set
• Accelerated ageing
• Water absorption
• Stress relaxation
The test pieces shall be cut from the finished product. Where this is not possible because the sample
would be too small, the manufacturer shall provide test slabs from the same batch of rubber and
vulcanised to the same degree and in the same manner as that of the rubber from which the rubber
rings have been manufactured.
Wherever it is not possible to cut standard test piece from the rings, for determination of tensile
strength and elongation at break, test piece in the shape of dumb bell as shown in Figure - 2 of IS:
5382 shall be used with the rate of traverse of moving grip as 15 cm/min.
3.5.11.8 Packing
Maximum 10 pieces of rubber ring shall be packed in one polyethylene bag. The colour of the
polyethylene bags shall be preferably black or dark grey. The rubber rings packed in polyethylene
bags shall be supplied in bituminised polyethylene lined jute bags to protect them from undue
exposure to light and heat.
The rubber rings should also be supplied by the manufacturer of the pipes. They should preferably
be manufactured by the manufacturer of the pipes. In case they are not, it will be the responsibility
of the manufacturer of the pipes to have them manufactured from a suitable manufacturer under its
own supervision and have it tested at his/sub contractors premises as per the contract. The pipe
3.5.12 Specials For uPVC Pipe System

3.5.12.1 Manufacturing and type of sealing joint
All the uPVC fittings shall be fabricated from class-4 uPVC pipes only.
The socket dimensions shall be in accordance with the pipe sockets. The rubber sealing rings for
pipe/specials shall be in accordance with the specifications .
3.5.12.2 Type of specials
Double sockets
The double socket special shall be suitable for elastomeric sealing ring type joint as per the
enclosed drawing. The dimensions of the fitting shall be as given in Table below.
Table for dimensions of Double Sockets
S Suitable for pipe OD Min. length of fitting Min. spacer (I) mm

No. (mm) (h) mm
1 63 235 20
2 90 266 20
3 110 288 20
4 140 314 20
5 160 334 20
6 225 404 30
7 280 460 30
8 315 485 30
Double Socket Bends:

The fabricated bends shall be suitable for elastromeric sealing ring type joint as per the enclosed
drawing. The dimensions of the double socket bends shall be as given below:
S.No. Outside diameter in Radius (r) mm Angle of bend in L1 = L2
mm degrees

1 63 221 90 359
221 45 230
2 90 315 90 469
315 45 285
3 110 385 90 551
385 45 326
4 140 490 90 674
490 45 387
5 160 560 90 756
560 45 428
6 225 788 90 1023
788 45 562
7 280 980 90 1268
980 45 674
8 315 1100 90 1410
1100 45 746
3.5.12.3 Quality control tests

All the fitting shall be tested for socket dimension, workmanship/surface finish and leak tightness in
accordance with for uPVC pipes.
3.5.12.4 Supply of specials
All the PVC fittings shall be supplied along with necessary rubber rings. The rubber rings shall be
supplied in black coloured polyethylene bags. The fittings shall be packed and supplied in jute bags
or in cardboard or wooden boxes according to their size.
The fittings should also be supplied by the manufacturer of the pipes. They should preferably be
manufactured by the manufacturer of the pipes. In case they are not, it will be the responsibility of
the manufacturer of the pipes to have them manufactured from a suitable manufacturer under its
own supervision and have it tested at his/sub contractor’s premises as per the contract. The pipe
3.6 HDPE PIPES AND SPECIALS

3.6.1 Applicable Codes
High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) black pipes conforming to IS : 4984 shall only be supplied. .
The raw material used for the manufacture of pipe should not constitute toxic hazard, should not
support microbial growth and should not give rise to unpleasant taste or order, cloudiness or
discoloration of water.
High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) black pipes shall be manufactured. Pipes shall be manufactured
from virgin PE-100 Polyethylene food grade raw material which will comply with the requirements
of ISO/directive of testing material: 9080. The raw material should be of food grade quality. Pipe
shall be manufactured as per ISO 4427. The nominal pressure of pipes required shall be as specified
in the scope of work. The pipe material shall be suitable for conveyance of drinking water for
which the certificate of recognized institute shall be provided. The pipes shall conform to the test
requirement prescribed in ISO 4427. The minimum factory test pressure for Hydraulic test shall be
2 time the pipe pressure rating for 60 sec. No defect / leakage / cracks should be visible after
hydraulic test.
Re-cycled material shall not be used for manufacturing.
Nominal outside diameters shall conform to ISO 161-1.
The tolerances on pipes shall be in accordance with ISO 11922-1.
The nominal wall thickness of pipes shall be as per ISO 4427.
3.6.2 Specification of Pipes

3.6.2.1 Colour
The colour of the pipe shall be black. Each pipe shall contain minimum three equi-spaced
longitudinal stripes of width 3 mm (Min) in blue colour. These stripes shall be more than 0.2 mm in
depth. The material of the stripes shall be of the same type of resin, as used in the base compound
for the pipe.
3.6.2.2 Dimensions of pipes and ovality of pipe

Outside diameter, tolerance and ovality of pipes shall be as per table 2 of IS 4984. Ovality shall be
measured as the difference between maximum outside diameter and minimum out-side diameter
measured at the same cross section of the pipe, at 300mm away from the cut end. For pipes to be
coiled, the ovality shall be measured prior to coiling. For coiled pipes, however, re-rounding of pipe
shall be carried out prior to the measurement of ovality.
3.6.2.3 Length of straight Pipe & marking on pipe
The length of straight pipe used shall be more than 6 m or as agreed by Engineer-in-Charge. Short
lengths of 3 meter (minimum) up to a Maximum of 10 % of the total supply may be permitted. Each
straight length of pipe shall be clearly marked in indelible ink/paint on either end and for coil at both
ends or hot embossed on white base every meter throughout the length of pipe/coil with the
following information:
(a) Manufacturer’s name/Trade-mark,
(b) Designation of pipe
(c) Lot No./Batch No.
(d) BIS certification marking on each pipe.
3.6.2.4 Coiling
The pipes supplied in coils shall be coiled on drums of minimum diameter of 25 times the nominal
diameter of the pipe ensuring that kinking of pipe is prevented. Pipe beyond 110 mm dia shall be
supplied in straight length not less than 6m.
3.6.2.5 Appearance
Pipe shall be free from all defect including indentation, delaminating, bubbles, pinholes, cracks, pits,
blisters, foreign inclusion that due to their nature degree or extent detrimentally affect the strength
and Serviceability of the pipe.

The pipe shall be as uniform as commercially practicable in colour opacity, density and other
physical properties as per relevant IS code or equivalent International Code. The inside surface of
each pipe shall be free of scouring, cavities, bulges, dents, ridges and other defects that result in a
variation of inside diameter from that obtained on adjacent unaffected portions of the surface. The
pipe ends shall be cut clearly and perpendicular to the axis of the pipe.
3.6.2.6 Marking
All pipes will be marked as per ISO 4427 and subjected to the following minimum requirements:
(i) Manufacturer name/ stamp with last two digits of year of manufacturing,
(ii) PHED
(iii) The dimensions(Nominal outside diameter X nominal wall thickness)
(iv) Designation of pipe material (PE 100, PE 80, etc)
(v) Nominal pressure (PN)
(vi) Number of ISO Standard
3.6.2.7 Testing of Pipe :
HDPE pipes are subjected to following tests :-

Internal pressure creep rupture test
Longitudinal Revision Test
Overall Migration Test
Density
Melt Flow Rate (MFR)
Carbon Black Content and Dispersion
The other required tests on HDPE pipes shall be as per the IS 4984 -1995 Clause no 8 & 9.
3.6.3 Specials for HDPE Pipes

Unless otherwise mentioned, the specials and the jointing material for HDPE pipes shall be Fusion
fittings conforming to GBE/PL2:PART 4. Fusion fittings with integral heating element shall be used
in general. All fittings shall be of class B with operating pressure of 2 bars.
3.6.3.1 Material Requirements:

The compound from which the body of the fitting is produced shall comply with BS 3412. The
natural polymer shall have a nominal density, as determined using the procedure defined in ISO
1872-1, greater than 0.93 g/ml. Fittings shall be produced from material class PE 100 and with
required strength of 10.0 MPa
The fittings shall be free from cracks, voids, blisters, holes, distortion, dents, injurious incisions,
inclusions or any other likely to impair their performance. For each fitting the fusion time shall be
the same.
3.6.3.2 COMPRESSION FITTINGS:

Compression fittings shall be of blue polypropylene as per ISO: 3458-59 or equivalent international
standard of PN 16 rating for use in drinking water system. Department may demand for
manufacturer’s test report for the fittings.
The heating elements of tapping tees and branch saddles shall be protected by a shield which should
remain in place during normal handling.
Electrical terminal shrouds shall be protected by a removable cap.
Fittings shall be individually sealed in transparent polyethylene, or equivalent bags. The finished
product may be got tested at standard test house.
3.6.3.3 CERTIFICATION:
Certified records appertaining to the materials used (traceable to batches of fittings for compound),
inspection and testing done by manufacturer shall be submitted along with the supply of fittings.
3.7 MS PIPELINE
3.7.1 Specifications
This part of the specification covers manufacturing, supply, delivery, lowering, laying,
jointing, internal lining, outer coating, testing and commissioning of mild steel pipes.
Manufacturing of MS pipes shall be done in conformity with IS: 3589. The MS pipes shall
be fabricated out of steel plates or strips of fresh mild steel coils (HR coils/HR plates)
conforming to IS: 2062, and having minimum specified tensile strength of 410 MPa. MS
pipes shall be of grade 410, spirally welded pipes, having butt-welded joints with beveled
ends, as per IS: 3589. The electrode shall be conforming to IS 814. The length of MS pipes
in general shall be 12 m so as to minimize field joint, however in exceptional condition
alternately length of pipe less than 12 m can be got approved from EIC prior to
procurement of pipe. The minimum wall thickness shall be as per IS 3589. :10 mm for
1200 mm dia MS pipes or the designed thickness approved by Engineer-In-Charge,
whichever is more. A negative tolerance of –2% in the thickness of MS pipe shall be
permissible. The preferred thickness mentioned in IS: 3589-2000 will have no implication.
MS Pipes and specials shall be provided with internal cement mortar (1:1.5) lining and the
outer surface shall be coated with reinforced guniting in cement mortar (1:3) for MS pipes
to be laid below ground and with epoxy paint for MS pipes to be laid above ground and for
MS pipes to be laid in the road/railway crossing using box culvert pushing/pipe
pushing/micro tunneling method, of standards and make approved by Engineer in Charge.
The MS pipes and specials used in the pump houses and CWRs shall have food grade
epoxy coating with primer on the inside surface and outside surface, as per specifications.
In case of pipes and specials used inside the CWR, the outer coating of approved primer
and Epoxy paint shall be done.
3.7.2 Manufacturing process shall ensure that –

1. Base material i.e. HR coils/ HR Plates shall be of required quality.
2. Production equipment is well designed.
3. Quality control is comprehensive.
4. Steel Plates/ coils - The pipe shall be fabricated out of steel plates or strips of fresh mild
steel coils (HR coils) conforming to IS-2062 or equivalent ISO, and having minimum
specified tensile strength of 410 MPa. The steel plates for fittings, specials and stiffeners
shall be of mild steel conforming to IS: 2062 or equivalent ISO.
5. Welding consumables - such as electrodes, filler rods and wires shall conform to IS: 814,
IS: 3613, IS: 6419 and IS: 7280.
6. Aggregate - The aggregates shall conform to IS: 383.

7. Water - The water used in preparation of concrete mix shall conform to the requirements of
mixing water given in IS: 456.
8. Steel for Reinforcement shall conform to IS: 1786.
Before fabrication of pipes and specials / fittings is commenced, the copies of the mill sheets and
the manufacturer's test certificates for plates/ coils and other materials for the fabrication, shall be
submitted by the Contractor to the Engineer-in-Charge or his representative for his approval.
3.7.3 Chemical Composition and Requirements

The supplied steel shall conform to the chemical composition presented in Table -A, unless
otherwise modified by Engineer-in-Charge or his representative. The ladle analysis of steel,
should be carried out by the method specified in relevant parts of IS 228 (IS 228 – Method
of chemical analysis of steel) or any other established instrumental/ method. However,
where the method is not given in IS 228 and its relevant parts, a suitable method shall be
adopted as agreed between the Engineer-in-Charge or his representative and the contractor.
The product analysis shall be carried out on the finished plates. The chemical requirements
for steel plates are indicated in Table A.
Table A – Chemical Requirements
Element Ladle Analysis Permissible Variations for Product Analysis
(% max.) Over the Specified Limit (% max.)
Carbon (C) 0.20 0.02
Manganese (Mn) 1.3 0.05
Sulphur (S) 0.40 0.03
Phosphorus (P) 0.04 0.005
Note:
Carbon Equivalent (CE) = C + Mn/6 + (Cr+Mo+V)/5 + (Ni+Cu)/15
CE based on ladle analysis should be 0.45 as per IS 3589
The minimum Si in silicon killed steel shall not be less than 0.10%. When the steel is Al/Al-Si
killed, the requirement regarding minimum silicon content need not apply.
When micro-alloying elements like Nb, V and Ti are used individually or in combination the total
content shall not exceed 0.2%.
Copper may be present between 0.20 to 0.35 percent as mutually agreed to between the Engineer-
in-Charge or his representative and the contractor (or manufacturer). The copper bearing quality
shall be designated with a suffix Cu, for example, Fe 410 Cu + WA
Nitrogen content of the steel should not exceed 0.012%, which shall be ensured by the
manufacturer/ Contractor by check analysis.
Details of elements other than those specified may be supplied if asked by Engineer-in-Charge or
his representative.
3.7.4 Mechanical Properties and Requirements

As the plate/coil sizes ordered are as per the actual sizes required for the project, separate test piece
of required sizes shall be sent along with each lot.
(a) Tensile Tests

The tensile strength, yield strength and percentage elongation of steel shall be determined
from standard test pieces cut either lengthwise or crosswise from plates. The test shall be
carried out on the standard test piece prepared in accordance with test edition of IS 1608 or
its international equivalent standard.

Number of Tensile Tests

For every 500 tonnes of finished steel, one tensile test shall be conducted.
(b) Bend Test

The test piece shall be either lengthwise or crosswise from plates. Bend test shall be
conducted in accordance with IS 1599 or its international equivalent standard. For bend test
piece at room temperature shall withstand bending through 180 to an internal diameter not
greater than specified in Table -B, without cracking.
Number of Bend Test
For every 500 tonnes of finished steel, one bend test shall be conducted.
Table B – Mechanical Requirements
S. No. Mechanical Property Value
1. Tensile strength, Min, Mpa 410
2. Yield Strength, Min, Mpa 250
3. Bend Test (Internal dia.), as per clause 9.3 of IS 3589. 2t
Note:
1. ‘t’ is the thickness of plate
2. Test temperature shall be agreed upon between the manufacturer/ contractor and the
Engineer-in-Charge or his representative.
(c) Ultrasonic Test
All plates shall be tested by ultrasonic equipment to check for manufacturing defects such
as voids, layers etc. The contractor shall supply test certificates to this effect from
manufacturer.
(d) Retest
If any one test piece first selected failed to pass any of the tests specified in the above
clause two further samples shall be selected for testing in respect to each failure. If the test
pieces from both these additional samples pass, the material represented by the test samples
shall be deemed to comply with the requirements of that particular test. If the test piece
from either of these additional sample fail the material represented by the test samples shall
be discarded.
3.7.5 Tolerances for plates
The tolerances for the thickness of steel plates shall be as under:
Description Tolerances
Negative Positive
Tolerance on plate thickness 2% 10%
3.7.6 Testing
The pipes shall be tested to the following requirements:
a) Continuous monitoring of dia and forming.
b) Visual inspection of all pipes from inside and outside for permissible tolerances as
per IS: 3589.
c) Ultrasonic testing of weld as per IS: 4260 during welding.
d) Radiographic testing as per IS: 4853. for 20cm length from both the ends.
e) Each pipe shall be hydraulically tested at the manufacturer’s works to a test
pressure as mentioned in IS: 3589.
f) Mechanical tests of finished pipes as per IS 3589.
3.7.7 Marking
Each pipe shall be legibly marked as per IS: 3589 which shall read as PHED – PROJECT NAME -
O.D. – Pipe thickness – designation.
3.7.8 Quality Assurance
During the whole process of manufacturing, department's representative and/or representative of
third party inspection agency shall be present to supervise the Quality Assurance process and
witness the test performed.
3.7.9 Fabrication Of Ms Specials & Fittings

3.7.9.1 General
Only MS specials shall be used with MS pipeline. Unless and otherwise mentioned in the para
below, the dimensions of all MS specials and fittings (bends, tees, scour tee, reducers, enlargers,
etc.) shall in general confirm to the principals of IS: 7322. The specials (other than tapers and
flanges) shall be fabricated from the MS pipes manufactured confirming to IS: 3589. The thickness
of MS pipes used for manufacturing of specials shall be adequate to sustain field test pressure but
shall not be less than the thickness of pipe with which the specials are to be used.
The Contractor shall submit the detailed drawing for each special to be used in the pipeline. On
approval of the same by the Engineer-in-Charge, the Contractor will take up the manufacturing.
Tolerance for steel fittings shall confirm to the requirements of IS: 7322
3.7.9.2 Flanged Branches
Flanged branches shall be fabricated in accordance with the general specification and to the
Engineer-in-Charge’s requirement.
All the flanges shall be machined to standard thickness, square to the axis of the pipe.
3.7.9.3 Bends
Bends to provide change of alignment in pipe laying shall be manufactured to suit the site
conditions. As far as possible bends of more than 45º shall not be provided. Bends shall be
manufactured from tested pipes by angle cutting of the barrel or by such other standard procedure
and re-welding. Bends shall be lined internally and coated externally as specified for the pipes.
a) Bends shall be fabricated taking into account the vertical and horizontal angles for each
case.
b) The bends shall have welded joints and the upstream and downstream ends of each
bend shall have a straight piece of variable lengths as required.
c) Bends shall be designed with deflection angle not more than 10 deg. between two
segments.
d) When the point of intersection of a horizontal angle coincides with that of a vertical
angle, or when these points can be made to coincide, a single combined or compound
bend shall be used.
3.7.9.4 Tapers
Tapers shall be manufactured out of steel plates. The tapers shall be suitable for connections to the
sluice valves or flanged tailpiece on one side and to MS pipe on the other side.
3.7.9.5 MS flanges
The nominal size and thickness of the MS flanges as defined for plate flanges of required pressure
rating confirming to IS 6392 shall be used in accordance to the design pressure at the place of
installations. Nominal Size of flange shall be in conformity to the equipment or pipe appurtenance
with which they are to be used.
3.7.9.6 Blind Flanges

Blind flanges shall be provided at all ends left unattended for the temporary closure of work and
also for commissioning a section of the pipeline or for testing the pipeline laid. For temporary
closures, non-pressure blank flanges consisting of mild steel plates, tack welded at the pipe ends
may be used. For pipes subjected to pressures, the blank flanges or domes suitably designed as per
Engineer-in-Charge’s requirements shall be provided. The thickness of the blank flanges shall be as
defined in IS 6392 for the nominal size and design pressure at the place of installation, the flange
drilling for all flanges upto 1500 mm ID shall conform to the provisions of IS 1538
3.7.9.7 Stiffener Rings
The Contractor shall provide stiffener rings wherever directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. The
Contractor shall weld the same to the pipes with one circumferential run on each side.
3.7.9.8 Straps
In general the use of straps shall not be made. Whenever, its uses are unavoidable, approval of
Engineer-in-Charge shall be taken. Wherever pipe laying work is done from two faces and/or has to
be done in broken stretches due to any difficulty met with at site, the final connection has to be
made by introducing straps to cover gaps upto 30 cm length. Straps shall also be provided as per
the procedure of fixing expansion joints by the method described. Such straps shall be fabricated in
the field by cutting pipes, slitting them longitudinally and slipping them over the ends to be
connected in the form of a collar. The collar shall be in two halves and shall have its inside
diameter equal to the outside diameter of the pipe to be connected. A minimum lap of 8 cm on
either ends of the pipe shall be kept and fillet welds shall be run both internally and externally for
circumferential joint. The longitudinal joints of the collar shall be butt-welded.
All fillet welds shall have a throat thickness of not less than 0.7 times the width of welding.
3.7.9.9 Closing or Make up sections
Closing or make up sections shall be furnished at appropriate locations on the line to permit field
adjustments in pipeline length to compensate for shrinkage in field welded joints, differences
between actual and theoretical lengths and discrepancies in measurements.
3.7.9.10 Test Heads
Test heads may be ellipsoidal, standard dished as per ASME code or hemispherical heads. They
shall be welded in the shop and removed after the test. Allowance shall be made in the length of
the pipe section receiving the test head for the welding and removal of the head and preparation of
the plate edges for the final weld after testing.
3.7.9.11 Walkways, Stairs, Ladders, Hand Rails etc.
Walkways, stairs, rungs, ladders, hand rails, etc. wherever necessary shall be provided as per the
directions of Engineer-in-Charge. These shall conform to well established good engineering
practices.
3.7.10 Inspection and Tests on Pipe and Fittings/Specials
The pipe shall be tested as per provision of Clause 3.7.6 of this Chapter.
Each special or fittings shall be subjected to tests as per IS: 7322 before inner and outer coating.
The hydraulic test pressure shall be as per IS: 3589 for specials. Dye penetration test as prescribed
in IS:7322 is acceptable in lieu of hydraulic test for bends only.
The workmanship and marking on pipes must be conforming to Clause 3.7.7 of this Chapter. All
works and material under specification will be rigidly inspected during all phases of manufacture
and testing and such inspection shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to furnish
material and perform work in accordance with these specifications.
The Engineer-in-Charge or the authorized inspection agency shall have free access to those parts of
the plants that are concerned with the furnishing of materials of the performance of work under this
specification. The bidder shall furnish the Engineer-in-Charge reasonable facilities and space
without charge for inspection, testing and obtaining of any information he desires in respect of the
quality of material used and the progress and manner of the work.
Sampling of pipes shall be taken as per IS 4711-1974.
Contractor shall provide and operate suitable equipment capable of conducting the specified
hydraulic test pressure to the inside surfaces of the pipe and of sustaining the pressure for the
required period
3.7.11 Internal Lining of MS Pipes- cement MORTAR LINING

3.7.11.1 Scope
This specification covers the requirements of providing materials and application of cement mortar
lining of 12 mm thickness by mechanical and/or hand application (limited to special cases) to the
internal surfaces of MS pipes. The work shall be started only after obtaining the written approval of
the Engineer in this respect. The field hydraulic test is to be taken either before or after the lining
work, the decision of engineer in charge in this regard shall be final. Considering the suitability of
applying lining on pipes and specials and inspection of lining, the Engineer in Charge may also
direct the contractor for lining at manufacturer’s place, decision of the Engineer in Charge shall be
final and binding on the contractor.
3.7.11.2 Applicable Codes and Specifications

The following specifications, standards and are made a part of this specification. All standards,
specifications, codes of practices referred to herein shall be the latest edition including all
applicable official amendments and revisions. Unless until clearly specified, in case of discrepancy
between this specification and those referred to herein, these specification shall govern.
1) AWWA C602-76 - American Water Works Association (AWWA) Standard for Cement
Mortar Lining of Water Pipelines - 4 in. and larger - In Place.
2) IS-11906 – Recommendations for cement-mortar lining for cast iron, mild steel and ductile
iron pipes and fittings for transportation of water
3) IS 3589-2001 – Steel pipes for water & sewerage – Specifications given for Cement
Protective lining and coating for steel pipe shop applied.
3.7.11.3 Method of application

All lining work shall be done by machine/hand application (limited to special cases).
3.7.11.4 Workmanship
All works shall be performed in a thorough and workmanlike manner by trained personnel with
previous experience under the supervision of experienced men skilled in the in-situ application of
cement-mortar lining to pipelines and underground works such as tunnel, shaft.
3.7.11.5 Programme of lining and plant and equipment
The Contractor shall furnish the method he proposes to adopt for approval of Engineer in Charge
along with complete details of similar work executed by him.
3.7.11.6 Materials of Construction
a) Cement
Cement required for mortar lining shall be OPC/PPC/SRC conforming to IS 8112/IS 12269/IS
1489/IS 12330. The minimum cement content shall be 330 Kg/m3.
b) Admixture
To improve workability, density and strength of the mortar, admixtures as approved by the Engineer
in Charge may be used by the Contractor at his own cost. No admixtures shall be used that would
have a deleterious effect on water flowing in the pipe, which is required for drinking proposes.
c) Sand
Sand shall consist of inert granular material. The grains shall be strong, durable, and uncoated. The
sand shall be well graded and shall pass a 1.18 mm mesh screen (ASTM No.16) with not more than
5 percent passing 150 micron sieve (ASTM No.100). Sand shall be free from injurious amounts of
dust, clay, lumps, shale, soft or flaky particles mica, loam, oil, alkali, and other deleterious
substances. The total weight of such substances shall not exceed 3 percent of the combined weight
of the substances and the sand that contained them. Limitations shall apply to specific substances as
follows :
Substance Maximum allowable percentage by weight

Shale 1
Clay lumps 1
Mica and deleterious substances other 2
than shale and clay lumps
Organic impurities - Sand shall not show a colour value darker than the reference standard colour
solution prepared as required by ASTM 6.40 `Test for Organic Impurities in Sands for Concrete'.
d) Water
Water for mixing mortar shall be clean and free from injurious amounts of mud, oil, organic
material or other deleterious substances.
3.7.11.7 Design of Lining

3.7.11.7.1 General
Composition of mortar for the lining shall be composed of cement, sand and water mixed to such
consistency as to produce a dense and homogenous lining that will adhere firmly to the pipe
surface. Contractor should get approval of the details of the admixtures he proposes to use..
3.7.11.7.2 Proportion
Dry proportions of cement and sand shall be 1 part of cement to 1½ parts of sand by volume. Slight
modifications in composition could be made at site to suit the characteristics of the sand used. Each
bag of cement shall be weighed and converted into volume for its use. Admixtures, if permitted,
shall be used in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
3.7.11.7.3 Water Content
Water content shall be the minimum that is required to produce a workable mix, with full allowance
made for water collecting on the interior of pipe surface. Water cement ratio will not exceed 0.51.
3.7.11.7.4 Mixing
Mortar shall be well mixed and of proper consistency to obtain a dense, homogenous lining. Where
premixed mortar is used, it shall be done so before initial set.
3.7.11.7.5 Thickness of Lining

Cement mortar lining shall be 12 mm thick for pipes of both the sizes. A thickness tolerance of
+20% shall be permitted on pipes and +40% on fittings.
3.7.11.8 Method of Construction

3.7.11.8.1 Access Openings
Necessary openings as approved by Engineer-in-Charge shall be provided in the pipelines. After
lining is completed, closure pieces will be welded to the pipe. Mortar lining of closure pieces and
adjacent area shall be included in the rates quoted.
3.7.11.8.2 Preparation of Pipe Surface

The interior surface of pipe to be lined shall be cleaned to remove all rust, chemical or other
deposits, loose and deteriorated remains of old coating materials, oil, grease, and all accumulations
of water, dirt, and debris. The cleaning of the surface shall be carried out by the use of suitable
chemical or mechanical means with the approval of Engineer in Charge. The extent of cleaning
shall be to the satisfaction of the Engineer in Charge.
All loose mill scale, dirt, rust, and accumulation of construction debris shall be removed from the
interior off the steel pipeline. The pipeline shall be cleaned by use of a power-driven cleaner
incorporating revolving brushes on rotating arms. After this cleaning the pipe shall be flushed with
potable water and all standing water removed.

3.7.11.8.3 Machine Application of Mortar Lining Clean up ahead of machine

Immediately prior to the travel of the lining machine through the pipeline, all foreign material shall
be removed. This includes sand and loose mortar that might have accumulated since the work of
preparation of surfaces was completed.
3.7.11.8.4 Lining Procedure

The in-situ lining shall be placed by centrifugal method in one course by a machine traveling
through the pipe and discharging the mortar at a high velocity over all pipe sections and long radius
bends. The discharge shall be from the rear of the machine so that the freshly applied mortar will
not be marked. The rate of travel of the machine and the rate of mortar discharge shall be
mechanically regulated so as to produce uniform thickness throughout. The mortar must be densely
packed and shall adhere to the pipe wherever applied.
3.7.11.8.5 Surface Finish
Mortar lining shall be mechanically trowelled except for the places where hand trowelling is
expressly permitted by the Engineer in Charge.
3.7.11.8.6 Trowelled Lining

The lining machine shall be provided with attachments for mechanically trowelling the mortar.
Both the application and trowelling of the mortar shall take place at the rear of the machine so that
the freshly placed and trowelled mortar will not be damaged. The trowel attachment shall be such
that the pressure applied to the pipe shall be uniform and produce a lining of uniform thickness with
a smooth and even finished surface free of spiral shoulders. The finished surface of machine-placed
and trowelled linings in pipe shall be examined according to the procedures in referred codes in
Clause 3.7.11.2.
3.7.11.8.7 Examining procedures
In the stretch of pipe that has been lined and trowelled in each day's run, ten places shall be selected
in straight sections of the pipe by the Engineer in Charge. In each of the ten places the thickness of
the lining shall be measured as directed by the Engineer. Thickness of lining shall be ascertained
frequently during placing of mortar and trowelling. Hair cracks or cracks upto 0.25 mm width in
saturated linings and not over 300 mm in length are acceptable.
3.7.11.8.8 Untrowelled lining
The finished surface shall be smooth and regular except that it may exhibit a slightly dimpled
appearance. Edges or uneven build up caused by irregularity in the travel route of the machine will
not be allowed.
3.7.11.8.9 Hand Application of Mortar Lining (in special cases only)
Hand placed mortar shall have a uniform and smooth surface with smooth transitions to adjacent
machine placed linings.
Cement mortar lining of bends, specials, areas closely adjacent to valves and other such places
where machine placing may not be practical shall be performed by hand. The Engineer in Charge
may order the correction for any defect by hand application.

Cement mortar for hand work shall be of the same materials at the mortar for machine placed
lining.
The areas to be lined shall be thoroughly cleaned as specified earlier and, if necessary, shall be
moistened with water immediately prior to placing the hand-applied mortar.
Steel finishing trowels shall be used for the hand application of cement mortar, except at bends the
outer edges of hand trowelled areas may be brushed in order to reduce the abutting offset.
All hand finishing work in a section of the pipeline shall be completed within 24 hours after
completion of the machine application of mortar lining to that section. If necessary, application of
mortar lining by machine shall be delayed or stopped to assure compliance with this schedule.
3.7.11.8.10 Special requirements at Laterals connections
Lateral connections to the pipe that is being lined shall not be left obstructed by the lining
operations.
Before the lining is placed, the openings in the pipeline leading to air valves, blow offs, manholes
and appurtenances, as well as to laterals and connections that transmit pressure or carry water from
the pipeline, shall be temporarily covered or plugged with suitable devices. These shall be removed
later without damaging the cement-mortar.
3.7.11.9 Curing
Curing shall commence immediately after completion of the mortar lining and hand finishing of a
section of pipeline. This shall, however, not be later than 8-hours after mixing of mortar. The lining
shall be kept continuously in moist condition for a period of 7 days. During the operation of lining,
finishing and curing, exterior surface of the pipe exposed to sunlight shall be sprinkled with enough
water to keep the pipe cool. Open ends of pipes shall be suitably closed so as to maintain a moist
atmosphere and prevent draught. Curing of mortar lining and simultaneous cooling of the pipeline
externally shall be continued even beyond the period of 7days as directed by the Engineer. In the
opinion of Engineer, if the water for curing as per the specification may not be available, Engineer
shall order the Contractor to use chemical curing which shall be carried out as per the
manufacturers specifications. No extra payment will be made on this account. If the contractor
desired so, use of approved curing compound will be permitted.
3.7.11.10 Tests of cement mortar used for lining
A) Mortar Test Cylinders
A set of at least two standard test cylinders, 50 mm in diameter by 300 mm in length, shall be made
each day. The test cylinders shall be cured with the pipe at the same temperature for the same total
length of the time. Other sizes cylinders, such as 50 mm x 100 mm may be used to test compressive
strength. If the 7 - day test requirements are meet, then the 28 - day test need not be completed.
Alternatively, test blocks of the same material as used for the lining shall be made in 150 mm cube
moulds and subjected to Works cube crushing tests. Each block shall be removed from its mould as
soon as practicable and cured under the conditions of temperature and humidity identical with those
in which the lining of the pipe is cured. The number of tests shall be at least 4 cubes for each age
and each water cement ratio. The works cube strength of the test cube shall not be less than 310
Kg/cm2 after 28 days of curing or 180 Kg/cm2 of 7 days of curing. The density of the test cube
shall not be less than 2300 Kg/m3.
B) Centrifugal Test Cylinders
Centrifugally spun test cylinders may be substituted for mortar test cylinders, at the option of the
manufacturer. The test cylinder shall be spun about their longitudinal axis in 150 mm diameter by
300 mm long steel molds at a speed that will simulate the compaction of mortar in the lining to
produce a spun cylinder wall thickness of at least 35 mm. The net cross-sectional area of the hollow
cylinder shall be used to determine its compressive strength. Damaged cylinders shall not be tested.
C) Strength of Mortar lining
Mortar test cylinders shall obtain a minimum compressive strength of 18MPa in 7 days and 31 MPa
in 28 days. Pipe made with mortar lining that does not meet the strength requirements set forth
herein shall be subject to rejection.
The average of any 10 consecutive strength test of cylinders representing each mortar mix shall be
equal to or greater than the specified strength, and not more than 20 percent strength tests shall
have valves less than the specified strength. No cylinder test result shall be less than 80 percent of
the specified strength.
3.7.11.11 Inspection
3.7.11.11.1 Responsibility of Engineer in Charge and Contractor
The entire procedure of applying cement mortar lining shall be subject to continuous inspection by
the department’s representative/representative of third party inspection agency but such inspection
shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to furnish material and perform work in
accordance with this specification. All cement mortar lining not applied in accordance with this
specification shall be subject to rejection by the Engineer in Charge. Lining so rejected shall be
removed and replaced by the Contractor at his own expense.
3.7.11.11.2 Defective Lining
Defects in lining including but not restricted to sand pockets, voids, oversanded areas, blisters,
cracked and dummy areas, and thin spots shall be removed, and the area shall be repaired by hand
application to the full required thickness of the mortar lining. Defective areas encompassing the full
diameter of the pipe shall be replaced by machine wherever practical. Defective lining rejected at
the time of lining shall be removed before initial set of the mortar. Defective lining rejected after
initial set shall be replaced or repaired by the most practical method as determined by the Engineer
in Charge.
3.7.11.11.3 Guarantee
If on examination by the Engineer in Charge the cement-mortar lining work within a period of two
years after final completion and acceptance of the Contract Work reveals evidence of defective
materials or workmanship as defined in this specification but not limited to the same, then the
Contractor shall perform the remedial work at his own expense in a manner acceptable to the
Engineer.
3.7.11.11.4 External Coating on Mild Steel Pipes:

MS Pipe above Ground

The outer surface of the exposed MS pipeline shall be protected by applying two coat of
zinc rich primer of DFT 25-50 micron each and two coats of DFT 100-125 micron each of
high build bituminous paint coat as per manufacturer instruction and of approved shade
conforming to relevant IS after cleaning the surface.
4.2.1. General
All oil and grease shall be removed from surface to be painted by washing with a suitable solvent and
by wiping with rags until completely clean. After removal of all oil and greases, removing all rust,
loose scale and dirt by sandblasting, grit blasting or other effective means shall clean surfaces of metal
work required to be painted. Surface, which will be permanently or intermittently submerged or
subjected to moisture from spray or excessive condensation, shall be cleaned to clean metals by sand
or grid blasting. After cleaning, all surfaces shall be maintained free from oil, greases, rust, dirt and
other contaminations until they have received the final coat of paint.
Surface of stainless steel and bronze and machined surfaces which are attached or adjacent to metal
work that is being cleaned or painted shall be protected by adhesive tape or other suitable means
during the cleaning and painting operations.
4.2.2. Sand Blasting
The surface of the steel pipes and specials to be painted shall be thoroughly cleaned by sand or shot
blast cleaning process to SA 2.5 finish, to remove all rust mill scale etc. Applying a suitable metal
cleaning solution and wiping with clean rags shall remove oil and grease. All foreign matter, which
cannot be removed by blasting process, shall be removed as directed by the Engineer/Owner.
Blasting should be done at a pressure of 5.62 kg/sq.cm. (80 p.s.i.) at the compressor end and at 4.93
kg/sq./cm. (70 p.s.i.) at nozzle end. This pressure should be maintained during the entire blasting
operations. Improper jointing of hosepipes and resultant reduction in pressure at nozzle end shall be
checked and avoided.
The blast-cleaned surface shall be primed immediately after blasting is over. The sequence and the
programme of blast cleaning and application of red oxide primer shall be arranged in such a way that
the blast cleaned surface shall not remain uncovered with red oxide primer for more than 2 hours.
Any deviation from above shall require the approval of the Engineer/Employer.
4.2.3. Manual Cleaning
Wherever the Engineer approves manual cleaning shall be thoroughly cleaned by using scrapers and
wire brushes to remove all rust, mill scale etc. to give a shining metallic (SA 2.5) surface. The surface
so cleaned shall be washed with water and allowed to dry. A metal cleaning solution of approved
make shall then be applied over it. After it is dry, the surface shall be again washed with water,
scrapping wire brushes simultaneously. A copious use of water is necessary at this state to ensure that
the metal cleaning solution is completely removed. The primer coat shall be applied immediately after
the surface has become dry.
4.2.4. Shop Painting
4.2.4.1. General
Immediately after cleaning and inspection, and before removal from the shop, all metal work except
machine finished surfaces, and surfaces of metals to be embedded in concrete, shall be given one coat
of zinc rich epoxy primer followed by two coats of high build bituminous paint as specified hereafter.
Surface not accessible after assembly or erection shall be given a second shop coat of primer.
Machine finished surfaces shall be effectively coated with white lead to prevent rust.

No coating shall be applied closer than 100 mm from ends of pipes and specials and this coating shall
be done after field welding. The exposed steel surfaces shall be protected by rust preventive
applications, which shall not interfere with the field welding.
4.2.4.2. Application of Primer
No primer shall be applied without prior approval of the Engineer/Owner. During rain or fog, shells of
the pipes and specials shall be protected from weather by suitable housing.
The proportion of mixing of base and hardener shall be as specified by the manufacturer by weight
and volume. The mix of red oxide primer shall be prepared at the work site/yard not earlier than 15
minutes before applying the same on pipe and specials surfaces.
One coat of epoxy primer shall be applied by spray.
No thinner shall be added to the ready mix paint without previous approval of the Engineer/Owner,
and the finishing coats on top of the primer coat, shall only be applied after allowing the film to cure
for at least 48 hours.
The priming coat shall be uniform in thickness and free from floods, runs, sags, drips, or bare spots.
Any bare spots shall be re-coated with an additional application of the primer. All runs, sags, floods or
drips shall be removed or all such defects shall be remedied by re-priming as per the instruction of the
Engineer/Owner.
4.2.4.3. Application of two coats of high build bituminous paint
Application of the paint under very strong sun or in the early morning in winter shall be avoided.
After application of zinc rich epoxy primer to the surface should be cleaned by duster and
inspected. If during inspection any portion is found rusting the same shall be removed by emery
paper and coated with zinc rich epoxy primer. When complete section is checked as above, two
coats of high build bituminous epoxy paint shall be applied. When one coat is applied, the date of
application of this coat should be written on either end of section. Before application the paint shall
be properly stirred so as to get a good mix.
The painting shall be done by cross brushing i.e. one coat shall be given vertically and another coat
shall be given horizontally so as to get required thickness, a good looking surface and also to avoid
sagging of paint. To distinguish the second coat from first coat, the tint of the second coat shall be
changed slightly. Every successive coat of paint shall be given only after the lapse of 48 hours of
painting the previous coat. Before applying the next coat, the surface shall be properly cleaned by
duster. The paint shall be stirred every time before applying with brush.
4.2.4.4. Field Painting

The Contractor shall take proper care during loading/ unloading and transport of the pipes and
specials from the shop to the site of erection to preserve the shop paint in the best practicable
condition.
After erection of the pipeline on installation all rust spots, damaged areas and site-welded portion of
the pipeline shall be cleaned to metal and shall be painted with one coat of zinc rich epoxy primer
and two coats of high build bituminous epoxy paint.
After lapse of 48 hours of application of repairing coats specified above a finish coat of high build
bituminous epoxy paint shall be applied to exterior surface of the entire pipeline, care being taken
to clean the surface with duster prior to application of the said finish coat.
4.2.4.5. Inspection
The entire procedure of applying the paint as specified will be rigidly inspected right form the
cleaning stage to the application of final coat by the Engineer/Owner. If, at any time, it is found that
the procedure of applying the paint is not as per the standards laid down, all such painting work
done shall be rejected and shall be rectified by the Contractor at his own cost, as directly by the
Engineer / Employer.
4.2.4.6. Paint thickness

After completing 2 coats of high build bituminous epoxy paint inspection of paint thickness will be
done by the Engineer in Charge using Elcometer or other standard measuring devices. If the
thickness is found to be less than specified by the manufacturer, the pipe shall be resurfaced to
bring the same to the specified thickness as directed by the Engineer in Charge. The Contractor
shall provide all instruments and facilities for testing free of cost.
4.2.4.7. GENERAL REQUIREMENT OF THE MATERIAL
The high build bituminous epoxy paint shall confirm to relevant BIS. All test on paint material and
painted surface as specified in relevant BIS should be carried out.
4.2.4.8. Covering Capacity
Covering capacity of paint shall be checked by taking into account the actual consumption of paint
on site by dividing the area covered by paint by the quantity of paint actually consumed. The
covering capacity of primer and paint shall not be less than that specified by the manufacturer.
4.3. EXTERNAL COATING FOR MS PIPELINE BELOW GROUND WITH P-COATING
4.3.1. General
All MS pipes laid below ground or provided with soil cover shall be coated externally, in the
factory, with prefabricated polyolefin tape coating as per AWWA C 214-00. This specification
covers the minimum requirements for procurements and supply of all materials, plant, equipment,
plant sites, consumables, utilities and application. The Contractor shall perform all work in
accordance with these specifications and the latest pipeline coating practices, and shall complete the
work in all respects to the full satisfaction of the Employer’s Representative. The entire coating
operation starting from cleaning and surface preparation till coating shall be performed under the
supervision of skilled personnel who are well conversant with the work. Pipes which have been
cleaned and primed, or cleaned, primed and coated, without having been inspected and approved
shall be rejected. The outer coating should be done at the manufacture work where steel pipes are
manufactured.
This specification is not intended to be all inclusive and the use of guidelines set forth here does not
relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for the quality and performance of the applied coating
system, and to supply coating material capable of performing its intended service.
Welded field joints shall be coated with heat shrinkable cross-linked polyolefin coatings as
described in AWWA C2l6-00. Heat shrinkable coating shall consist of a polyolefin backing that has
been cross linked by either electron beam or chemical means and coated with adhesive. Heat
shrinkable coating shall be field applied or shop applied.
All MS special sections, connections and fittings to be used for underground MS pipeline shall be
coated with cold applied tape consisting of liquid adhesive and prefabricated tape as described in
AWWA C209-00.
The Contractor shall propose the name of manufacturer of the coating. The manufacturer shall be
ISO certified. The Contractor shall produce a certificate from the manufacturer stating at least two
projects, with Employer’s satisfaction certificate, where the coating has performed satisfactorily for
at least 5 years. The recommendations of the manufacturer regarding coating process, repairs, etc,
shall also be provided by the Contractor. The manufacturer should give guarantee for supply of the
required quantity as per the project time schedule and take responsibility for supervising the coating
application and repair works. Suitable certificate from manufacturer shall be provided for the same.
4.3.2. Plant, Scale and Installation
Plants, equipment, machinery and other facilities shall be in first class operating conditions to meet
the job requirements of quality production.
The Contractor shall, at his own risk and cost, provide and prepare the required areas for storage of
bare and coated line pipes, other materials, coating plant sites, stock-piling area and other
temporary installations required under this Contract. For each area, the Contractor shall provide the
Employer’s Representative with copies of agreements, as required with the land owners and/or
relevant authorities, covering all aspects of establishing, operating, maintaining, closing down and
completion activities, including cleaning and restoration of the sites, and payments for servitude
and claims for damages, as applicable.
The Contractor shall, at his own cost, provide a fully equipped laboratory and test facilities with
adequate inventory to carry out all tests required for testing of raw materials and coated pipes so as
to ensure quality coating and regular production.
The plant coating capacity should be such that it can meet the project schedule.
4.3.3. Referenced Codes, Standards and Relevant Documents:
The following documents (latest revision) are referenced in this specification and are a part of
referenced Standards / Codes and/ or specification. The more stringent of these shall apply. In case
of conflict between this specification and the referenced documents, this specification shall apply.
ANSI/AWWA C214 - Standard for Tape Coating Systems for the Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines
ANSI /ASTM D149 - Standard Test Method for Dielectric Breakdown Voltage and Dielectric
Strength of Solid Electrical Insulating Materials at Commercial Power Frequencies.
ANSI/ASTM D570 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics
ANSI/ASTM D4218 - Standard Test Method for Determination of Carbon Black Content in
Polyethylene Compounds by the Muffle-Furnace Technique.
ASTM D1000 - Standard Test Method for Pressure-Sensitive Adhesive-Coated Tapes Used for
Electrical and Electronic Applications
ASTM E96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials
ASTM Gl4 - Standard Test Method for Impact Resistance of Pipeline Coatings (Falling Weight
Test)
ASTM G17 - Standard Test Method for Penetration Resistance of Pipeline Coatings (Blunt Rod)
ANSI/AWWA C209 - Standard for Cold-Applied Tape Coatings for the Exterior of Special
Sections, Connections, and Fittings for Steel Water Pipelines
ANSI/AWWA C216 - Standard for Heat-Shrinkable Cross-Linked Polyolefin Coatings for the
Exterior of Special Sections, Connections, and Fittings for Steel Water Pipelines
NACE RP-O2-74 - High-Voltage Electrical Inspection of Pipeline Coatings Prior to Installation
SSPC-PA 2 - Measurement of Dry Paint Thickness with Magnetic Gauges
SSPC-SP l - Solvent Cleaning
SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3 - Commercial Blast Cleaning External Coating on Pipeline - Cold Applied
Tape
4.3.4. Tape Coating for MS Pipe
4.3.4.1. General
The buried Mild Steel pipeline shall be protected with cold applied tape protective coating
conforming to AWWA C214 (Cold Applied Tape Coating Systems for Exterior of Steel Water
Pipelines). Protective coating shall consist of a coating system consisting of primer, inner tape wrap
and outer wrap. The coating system shall be applied in a coating plant. The materials provided shall
meet the provisions of AWWA C214. Work or material that fails to conform to this standard may
be rejected at any time before final acceptance
Coating System
System components:
The prefabricated polyolefin tape coating system shall be at least three layers consisting of the
following
A liquid adhesive layer
An inner-layer tape for corrosion protection.
An outer-layer tape for mechanical protection

The inner-layer tape and outer-layer tape shall be made of prefabricated tapes in rolls. The
properties of the entire system shall conform to the appropriate values .
4.3.4.2. Liquid Adhesive

The liquid adhesive shall consist of a mixture of suitable rubber and synthetic compounds and a
solvent. The liquid adhesive shall be applied to the properly prepared pipe surface before
application of the inner-layer tape. The function of the liquid adhesive is to provide a bonding
medium between the pipe surface and the inner-layer tape.
4.3.4.3. Inner-layer Tape

The inner-layer tape shall be a two-layer tape consisting of a polyolefin (only) backing layer with a
laminated butyl-based adhesive layer. The inner tape shall be compatible with the liquid adhesive.
The manufacturer shall certify that the backing material shall be polyolefin only, containing not less
than 1.0 percent nor more than 3.5 percent, by weight, of nonpolyolefinic material consisting of
carbon black and antioxidants. The inner-layer tape shall be applied after the liquid adhesive and
before the outer-layer tape.
4.3.4.4. Outer-layer Tape

The outer-layer tape shall be a two-layer tape consisting of a polyolefin (only) backing layer with a
laminated butyl adhesive layer. The manufacturer shall certify that the backing material shall be
polyolefin only containing not less than 3.0 percent or more than 7.0 percent, by weight, of
nonpolyolefinic material consisting of pigments, antioxidants and stabilizers. The outer-layer tape
shall be compatible with the inner-layer tape. The primary functions of the outer-layer tape shall be
to provide mechanical and outdoor weathering protection to the tape system, and secondarily, to
contribute to the overall corrosion-protection properties of the system. The outer-layer tape backing
shall be compounded so that it will be resistant to outdoor weathering. The outer-layer should be of
suitable quality for the local environment, as follows:
Storage Temperature : 0 to 500C.
Over-ground Condition : 0 to 500C.
Under-ground Condition : 70C to 350C.
Soil Nature : As provided in Section 9, Drawings
Underground Water Table : Generally dry but gets saturated during monsoon (3 months/year)
Ultraviolet-ray Protection : Required in outer layer.
4.3.4.5. Coating-system Thickness

Depending on operating and installation conditions, more than one application of inner-layer tape
and outer-layer tape can be used. The total thickness and combination of the various layers used
shall be approved by the Employer’s Representative, with proper consideration given to the
manufacturer's recommendations. However, in no case shall the thickness be less than those stated
in the following Tables:
Table 4.3.4.5.1.physical Properties of the Liquid Adhesive

Property
Color Base Weight Flash Point
Black Rubber and Flammable - 6-8 lb/gal (0.72 – 0.965g/l) -10oF (-17oC) or
Synthetic Resins greater
Non - 10 – 12 lb/gal (1.20 – 1.44 kg/l) none
flammable
Table 4.3.4.5.2.: Physical Properties of Inner Layer Tape

Requirement
Property Minimum Maximum Test Method
(Ref AWWA
C214-00)
Width Deviation 5% or 1/4 in. (6 mm) +5% Sec. 5.3.1
whichever is smaller
Thickness [20mil (508 µm)] Nominal 19 mil (483 µm) 22 mil (559 Sec. 5,3.2
µm)
Ratio of Adhesive to Total Inner 40% of total t 60% of total t Sec, 5.3.2
Layer Tape Thickness, t
Adhesion to Prepared Steel 200 ozf/in width Sec. 5.3.3
(2,190 N/m width)
Water Absorption (24 h) -0.2% by wt Sec. 5.3.4
Water-vapor Transmission Percent by 0.2 perms Sec. 5.3.5
Weight [1.15 x 10-11kg
(Pa.s.m2)]
Dielectric Strength 6,000 V/single thickness Sec. 5.3.6
Insulation Resistance 500,000 megohms Sec. 5.3.7

Tensile Strength 20 lbf/in Sec. 5.3.8
(3,500 N/m width)
Elongation 100% Sec. 5.3.9
Nonpolyolefinic Material Percent by 1.0% 3.5% Sec. 5.3.12
Weight
Test methods are all for tests performed in laboratories. If field test methods for any property are
required, consult with the tape manufacturer.
Table 4.3.4.5.3.: Physical Property of Outer Layer Tape
Requirement
(Ref AWWA
C214-00)
Width Deviation 5% or 1/4 in. (6 mm) +5% Sec. 5.3.1
Thickness [30mil (762 µm)] Nominal 27 mil (686 µm) 33 mil (838 µm) Sec. 5,3.2
Adhesion to Inner Layer 20 ozf/in width Sec. 5.3.3
(200 N/m width)
Tensile Strength 40 lbf/in Sec. 5.3.8
(7000 N/m Width)

Elongation 100% Sec. 5.3.9
Nonpolyolefinic Material Percent by 1.0% 3.5% Sec. 5.3.12
Weight
required, consult with the tape manufacturer
Table 4.3.4.5.4.: Physical Properties of Total System
Requirement
(Ref AWWA
C214-00)
Thickness
80 mil, nominal 73 mil (1,854 µm) 88 mil (2,235 Sec. 5.3.3
µm)
Dielectric Strength 12000V Sec. 5.3.6
Impact Resistance 25 lbf. in. (2.8 N.m) Sec. 5.3.10
Penetration/Deformation Resistance 25% with no holiday at 72 0F Sec. 5.3.11
(220C)
required, consult the tape manufacturer
4.3.4.6. Component Requirements
4.3.4.6.1. Liquid Adhesive
The liquid adhesive shall be supplied by the manufacturer that supplies the inner layer tape. The
liquid adhesive shall comply with all code and regulatory requirements in effect at the point of
application. The liquid adhesive shall not settle in the container forming a cake or sludge that
cannot be easily mixed by hand or mechanical agitation and it shall have good machine-application
properties.
4.3.4.6.2. Inner-layer Tape
The backing and adhesive shall be made from materials that provide high electrical resistivity,
resistance to corrosive environments, low moisture absorption and permeability, and shall provide
an effective bond to a properly prepared steel surface. The inner-layer tape shall be of material that
will resist excessive mechanical damage during normal application operations and shall be
sufficiently pliable for the intended use. The inner-layer tape shall withstand, without tearing, the
tensile force necessary to obtain a tightly wrapped inner coating free of voids. The properties of the
inner-layer tape shall conform to the appropriate values.
Form: The inner-layer tape shall be supplied in roll form wound on hollow cores with a minimum
inside diameter of 75 mm.
Dimensions: To ensure a proper smooth coating, the inner-layer tape shall be provided in standard
widths consistent with the pipe diameter. Width shall be as approved by Employer’s Representative
however in no case it shall be less than 300 mm.
4.3.4.6.3. Outer-layer Tape
Materials used in the outer-layer tape provide some electrical resistivity, low moisture absorption
and permeability, and resistance to corrosive environments. Materials used shall provide
mechanical protection during handling and outdoor storage. The outer-layer tape shall be
sufficiently pliable for normal application operations and shall form an effective bond to the inner-
layer tape. The properties of the outer-layer tape shall conform to the appropriate values.
Form: The outer-layer tape shall be supplied in roll form wound on hollow cores with a minimum
inside diameter of 75 mm.

Dimensions: The outer-layer tape shall be provided in standard widths and lengths. The width of
the outer-layer tape shall be at least equal to that of the inner-layer tape
Tests: The tape coatings shall conform to the physical properties stated in Tables. The tape
manufacturer shall provide the Employer’s Representative with certified test reports on each order
of tape supplied.
4.4. Coating Application
4.4.1. General
The coating application shall be a continuous operation starting with properly prepared pipe
surface. Three steps, which shall be performed consecutively, shall consist of (1) liquid adhesive
application; (2) application of the inner-layer tape directly onto the prepared pipe surface; and (3)
application of the outer-layer tape directly on top of the inner-layer tape. The coating materials shall
be stored in a clean, dry area. During steps 2 and 3, one or more layers of inner-layer tape and
outer-layer tape may be applied as specified and approved by the Employer’s Representative.
4.4..2. Pipe Preparation

Metal Surface Condition:
Bare pipe shall be free from mud, mill scale, mill lacquer, wax, coal tar, asphalt, oil, grease, or any
other foreign material. Before blast cleaning, surfaces shall be inspected and precleaned according
to SSPC-SP 1 to remove oil, grease, and loosely adhering deposits. Visible oil and grease spots
shall be removed using a solvent. Only solvents that do not leave a residue shall be used. Preheating
to remove oil, grease, and mill scale may be used provided that all pipe is preheated in a uniform
manner to avoid distortion.
Blast cleaning: After drying and removing all loosely adhering foreign materials, the pipe surface
shall be cleaned by blasting with sand, grit, or shot to achieve a surface preparation at least equal to
that specified in SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3. The blast anchor pattern or profile depth shall be 1 mil to
3 mil (25 pm to 75 pm) measured in accordance with ASTM D4417.
Visual comparative standards: The Contractor shall prepare a representative area on an actual work
surface, as well as visual standards on minimum 6 in. x 6 in. x ¼ in. (150 mm x 150 mm x 6 mm)
panels. When the visual standard meets the requirements of blast cleaning, the panels shall be
wrapped in plastic, sealed with tape or otherwise protected from surface contamination or
corrosion, and maintained as a visual reference standard throughout the coating operations. The
standard section shall be sealed carefully to prevent rusting. Alternatively, other industry-accepted
visual comparative standards agreed on may be used.
Abrasive working mix: For consistent surface finish, a stabilized working mix shall be maintained
in abrasive-recycling blasting machines by frequent small additions of new grit, shot, or sand (all
commensurate with abrasive consumption); infrequent large additions shall be avoided. The
abrasive working mix abrasive-recycling blasting machines shall be maintained clean of
contaminants by continuous effective operation of blasting-machine scalping and air-wash
separators.
Surface inspection: The cleaned exterior pipe surface shall be in inspected for adequate surface
preparation. Surface imperfections, such as slivers, scabs, burrs, weld spatter, and gouges, shall be
removed by hand filing or grinding if necessary to prevent holidays.
Protection from moisture: Blast-cleaned pipe surfaces shall be protected from conditions of high
humidity, rainfall, or surface moisture. No pipe shall be allowed to flash rust before coating. To
ensure a dry pipe surface at the time of liquid adhesive application, the minimum steel substrate
temperature shall be 7°C and at least 3°C above the dew point.
4.4.3. Weld Seam Cover:
• Longitudinal and coil splice welds: Weld seam cover tape shall be compatible with the
liquid adhesive. Before applying the inner-layer tape, the longitudinal and coil splice weld seams
shall be ground flush for a distance of 450 mm along the length of the pipe on both ends. These
weld seams shall be coated with liquid adhesive and then covered with a strip of tape recommended
by the manufacturer. The width of the weld seam tape will be as recommended by the manufacturer
and as approved by Employer’s Representative. The weld seam tape shall conform to the provisions
of these specifications.
• Spiral welds: The spiral weld seam shall be ground flush a full 450 mm along the length of
the pipe on both ends prior to the coating process. Covering the spiral weld seams with a stripping
tape is required only when the profile and position of the weld seam prevents conformability .of the
tape to the steel surface. This condition is encountered more often on larger diameter (>60 in.
[1,500 mm]) pipelines. In these cases, the weld treatment shall be specified by the Employer’s
Representative after consultation with the tape manufacturer
4.4.4. Coating Application

4.4.4.1. Liquid Adhesive Application
The liquid adhesive shall be applied in a uniform thin film at the coverage rate recommended by the
manufacturer. The liquid adhesive shall be thoroughly and continuously mixed and agitated during
application to prevent settling. The liquid adhesive may be applied to the entire exterior surface of
the pipe by spray-type or rug-type methods or other suitable means to cover the entire exterior
surface of the pipe. The liquid adhesive coat shall be uniform and free from floods, runs, sags,
drips, or bare spots. The liquid-adhesive-coated pipe surface shall be free of any foreign substances,
such as sand, grease, oil, grit, rust particles, or dirt. Before applying the inner-layer tape, the liquid
adhesive layer shall be allowed to dry in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation.
4.4.4.2. Application of Inner-layer Tape
The inner-layer tape shall be applied directly onto the prepared pipe surface using mechanical
constant-tension coating equipment. The inner layer tape shall be spirally applied with overlap
width and application tension as recommended by manufacturer. When applied to spirally welded
pipe, the direction of the tape spiral shall be generally parallel to the weld spiral. The minimum
overlap shall not be less than 25 mm. When a new row of tape is started, the ends shall be
overlapped at least 150 mm measured circumferentially.
4.4.4.3. Application of Outer-layer Tape
The outer-layer tape shall be applied over the inner-layer tape using the same type of mechanical
equipment used to apply the inner-layer tape. The overlap of the outer-layer tape shall not coincide
with the overlap of the inner-layer tape. The minimum overlap of the applied tape and minimum
end lap of two rolls shall be the same as that of inner-layer tape. The outer-layer tape shall be
applied at a minimum roll temperature of 21°C. The tape manufacturer shall be consulted for
recommended temperatures of roll above 21°C to enhance conformability of the outer-wrap to the
pipe surface
Cutbacks
Cutbacks shall be 150 mm +/- 25 mm. The cutbacks may be a straight edge for the total thickness
of the coating, or they may be tapered, as approved by the Employer’s Representative.
Coating Repair in Plant/ Field
All holidays visually or electrically discovered either at the coating plant or in the field shall be
repaired by peeling back and removing the outer and inner layers from the damaged area. The
exposed areas shall then be coated with liquid adhesive and either (1) a length of inner-layer tapes
shall be wrapped around the pipe to cover the defective area; or (2) a patch of inner-layer tape shall
be applied directly to the defective area as specified by the Employer’s Representative. The
minimum lap at the damaged area shall be 100 mm all around. The repaired area shall be tested
with a holiday detector as per specifications after the repair is completed. If holidays are not found,
the repaired area shall be covered with the outer-layer tape with a minimum lap of 100 mm beyond

the inner-tape patch. Tape conforming to AWWA C209 may be used as a replacement for the inner-
layer tape when repairs are made.
4.4.5. Field Procedures
At all times during construction of the pipeline, the Contractor shall use caution to prevent damage
to the protective coating on the pipe. No metal tools or heavy objects shall be permitted to
unnecessarily contact the finished coating. Workmen shall not be permitted to walk on the coating
except when necessary. In these cases, they shall wear shoes with rubber or composition soles and
heels or other suitable footwear that will not damage the coating. Any damage to the pipe or the
protective coating from any cause during the installation of the pipeline shall be repaired.
Protection During Welding
A 450 mm wide strip of heat-resistant material shall be draped over the top half of the pipe on each
side of the coating holdback during welding to avoid damage to the coating by hot weld spatter.
The welder grounding clamp shall not be attached to the coated part of the pipe.
Hoisting
Pipe shall be hoisted using only wide-belt nylon slings or the equivalent. The use of caliper clamps,
metal chains, cables, tongs, or other equipment likely to cause damage to the coating shall not be
acceptable, nor shall dragging or kidding of the pipe be permitted. The Contractor shall allow
inspection of the coating on the underside of the pipe while the pipe is suspended from the slings.
4.4.6. Inspection and Testing
Material Acceptance
Acceptance of the proposed coating materials shall be as specified by the Employer’s
Representative from the following options: (1) acceptance of the manufacturer's certified test
reports submitted by the Contractor; (2) acceptance of testing of samples of proposed materials
submitted by the Contractor with testing conducted by a responsible commercial laboratory
designated by the Employer’s Representative; or (3) acceptance of another basis defined and
specified by the Employer’s Representative.
Inspection and Testing by the Employer’s Representative
Optional Inspection:
At the option of the Employer’s Representative, the entire procedure of applying the protective
coating material as described will be inspected from surface preparation to completion of coating.
The inspection shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to provide material and perform
work in accordance with the specifications.
Coating Application Inspection:
The entire coating operation by the Contractor will be supervised by qualified experts from the
manufacturer. The CV of the manufacturer's expert shall be approved by the Employer's
Representative. All coating work will be done in the presence of the Employer’s Representative.
All coating work done in the absence of the Employer’s Representative will be subject to rejection.
Access of Employer’s Representative:
The Employer’s Representative shall have free access to those parts of all plants that are involved
in the providing of materials or the performance of work according to specifications.
Facilities for Employer’s Representative:
The Contractor shall provide the Employer's Representative with reasonable facilities and space
without charge to inspect, test, and obtain any information as desired regarding the character of
material used, how the materials were applied, the progress and manner of the work, and the results
obtained.
Coating-System Tests
Width Deviation
A specimen of inner-layer tape and outer-layer tape at least 0.9 m long shall be removed from each
of three randomly selected rolls. The width of the specimen shall be measured at several points
along the length of the sample to the nearest 1.6 mm using a standard steel scale. The width
deviation shall not exceed the specified limits.
Thickness
The thickness of the inner-layer tape and outer-layer tape shall be measured at not less than 10
locations on the three rolls of tape coating used. The measurements shall be made with a
micrometer calibrated to read in thousandths of an inch and having contact feet of not less than 6
mm in diameter. Thickness measurements outside the specified limits shall constitute failure of the
tape to meet the thickness requirements.
Adhesion
The prefabricated inner-layer tape shall be tested for adhesion to a prepared steel surface in
accordance with ASTM D1000 (modified to include a 24-hour dwell time of tape to primed
substrate prior to adhesion peel test). The outer-layer tape shall be tested for adhesion to the inner-
layer tape in accordance with ASTM D1000 with above modification. An average value below the
specified limits shall constitute failure of the tape to meet the adhesion requirement.
Water Absorption
The prefabricated inner-layer tape coating shall be tested for water absorption in accordance with
ASTM D 570. An average value in excess of the specified limits shall constitute failure of the tape
to meet the water-absorption requirements.
Water-vapor Transmission:
The prefabricated inner layer tape coating shall be tested for water-vapor transmission in
accordance with ASTM E96, method B (at 23°C). An average value in excess of the specified
limits shall constitute failure of the tape to meet the water-vapor transmission requirements.
Dielectric Strength
The prefabricated inner-layer tape and the outer-layer tape together shall be tested for dielectric
strength in accordance with ASTM D149. Any below the specified limits shall constitute failure of
the tape to meet the dielectric-strength requirements.
Insulation Resistance
The prefabricated inner-layer tape coating shall be tested for insulation resistance in accordance
with ASTM D1000. An average value below the specified limits shall constitute failure of the tape
to meet the insulation-resistance requirements.
Tensile Strength
The prefabricated inner-layer tape and outer-layer tape shall be tested for tensile strength in
accordance with ASTM D1000. An average value below the specified shall constitute failure to
meet the tensile-strength requirements.
Elongation
The prefabricated inner-layer tape and outer-layer tape shall be tested for elongation in accordance
with ASTM D1000. An average value below the specified limits shall constitute failure to meet the
elongation requirements.
Impact Resistance
The total tape system shall be tested for impact resistance in accordance with ASTM G14. Five
samples shall be tested and the results averaged. An average value below the specified limits shall
constitute failure of the coating system to meet the impact-resistance requirements.
Penetration / Deformation Resistance
The total tape system shall be tested in accordance with ASTM G17 at 22°C. Five samples shall be
tested and the results averaged. An average value above the specified limits shall constitute failure
to meet the penetration-deformation resistance requirements with no holiday.
Nonpolyolefinic Material Content
The inner-layer tape and the outer-layer tape shall be tested for nonpolyolefinic content in
accordance with ASTM D4218. Sections 9.11, 9.12, and 9.13 of ASTM D4218 need not be
performed in this test method to obtain accurate results. The adhesive layer must not be present on
the tape backing when performing the ASTM D1218 test. Consult the tape manufacturer for the
preferred method of adhesive removal. The tests should be performed only on samples taken from
tape supplied by the tape manufacturer. Five samples shall be tested and the results averaged. An
average value outside the specified limits shall constitute failure to meet this requirement
4.4.7. Coated-Pipe Tests
Thickness
The thickness of the coating system shall be checked in accordance with SSPC-PA 2. The
thickness shall be in accordance with specified limits and shall be checked at a frequency specified
by the Employer’s Representative.
Electrical Inspection for Continuity
Each coated pipe section shall be electrically tested for flaws in the coating using a suitable holiday
detector approved by the Employer’s Representative. The detector shall impress a minimum of
6,000 V. Reference should be made to NACE RP-02-74. The electrical inspection shall take place
on the inner-layer tape before the outer-layer tape is applied. If a holiday is detected, it shall be
repaired as per specifications.
4.4.8. Rejection
Pipe: The Employer’s Representative may reject pipe if the surface condition does not comply with
the requirements. Pipe rejected because of inadequate cleaning shall be re-cleaned and re-inspected.
Coating Works: When inspection is provided by the Employer’s Representative all coating work
not done in the presence of the Employer’s Representative may be subject to rejection. If at any
time the procedure of applying the coating material does not meet the requirements of the
specifications all the coating work shall be rejected
Coating Materials: If any sample of coating material is found not to conform to the specifications,
then the coating material represented by that sample shall be rejected. If samples of the Contractor's
coating materials that have been previously approved are found not to conform to the specifications,
then all the coaling material shall be rejected.
4.4.9. Delivery
Marking
Containers shall be plainly marked with the name of the manufacturer, type of material, batch or lot
number, date of manufacture, storage conditions, and information as required by federal and state
laws.
Packaging and Shipping
Packaging
All inner-layer tapes, outer-layer tapes, and liquid adhesives shall be packaged in suitable
containers to ensure acceptance and safe delivery to their destination. Preference of individual or
multiple packaging of the tapes and size liquid adhesive container shall be as specified by the
Employer’s Representative. Rolls of inner-layer pipe and outer-layer tape shall be packaged in
quantities not to exceed the weight limitations of the container specifications. Each roll of inner-
layer tape and outer-layer tape shall be protected from adhering to other rolls, to the container, or to
the packaging material itself using separators. Liquid adhesive shall be packaged in 5 gal (19 l)
pails, 55 gal (210 l) drums, or other suitable containers.
Shipping, Handling and Storage
Coated pipe shall be handled, stored and shipped in a manner that will prevent damage to the
coating. Pipe also shall be handled and stored in a manner to prevent damage to pipe walls and
ends. Pipe or coating damaged in handling or other operations shall be repaired. Handling during
the period of coating also shall be such as to avoid damage to the coating. Thermal expansion is a
characteristic of the coating that may cause uneven areas on the coated pipe surface, but does not
adversely affect the coating system's performance. These areas do not require any repair.
Stacking: Sufficient spacers or padding shall be .used to prevent damage to the pipe and coating.
Shipping: Pipe shall be transported from the coating yard to the jobsite using sufficient shoring or
tonnage, padding and banding to adequately protect the pipe and its coating.
Loading: Pipe shall be loaded for shipping in compliance with existing shipping standards and
regulations.
Trench-side Storage: Pipe stored along the trench side shall be suitably supported off the ground to
avoid damage to the coating.
4.5. Coating of Welded Joints for MS Pipeline
4.5.1. General
This section provides with the requirements for heat-shrinkable coating, including material
application, inspection, testing, marking and packaging requirements.
4.5.2. Quality
All materials provided by the Contractor shall be of the specified quality. The entire operations of
applying the heat shrinkable coating shall be performed by workers trained in the application of
heat-shrinkable coating system. The materials provided shall meet the provisions of AWWA C216.
Work or material that fails to conform to this standard may be rejected at any time before final
acceptance
4.5.3. Coating System

Heat-shrinkable coatings consist of material fabricated from cross-linked polyolefin sheet or tubing
pre-coated with an adhesive. After they are installed, the coating shall conform to all surface
contours of the pipe.
Sleeve Requirements
Heat shrinkable polyolefin material shall conform to the following requirements:
Material
The Heat Shrinkable polyolefin coating shall be a laminate that consists of a cross linked polyolefin
backing and a homogeneous adhesive layer. The adhesive may be either a tack, pressure-sensitive
amorphous adhesive (mastic) or a non tacky, semi crystalline adhesive (hot melt). The prefabricated
heat-shrinkable polyolefin coating shall be one of the following types:
Type I, Tubular-type Coatings: These are installed before joining the pipe ends by sliding the
coating from a free end of the pipe onto the area to be coated.
Type II, Wraparound-type Coatings: These are wrapped circumferentially around the pipe area to
be coated. Each wraparound coating is provided with either a separate or a built-in closure, as
supplied by the manufacturer that secures the overlap during the shrinking process. The closure
shall meet the technical requirements given in Table 4.3.14, with the exception of thickness which
shall be a minimum of 24 mil (0.6 mm) as supplied.
Form
Type I coatings are provided in sleeves of predetermined diameters to fit the steel pipe. Type II
coatings may be supplied in individually precut sizes or in roll form. A roll form product is wound
on hollow cores with a minimum inside diameter of 75 mm.
Dimensions
The manufacturer shall provide precut coatings in standard widths as specified by Employer’s
Representative but not less than 450 mm. It should be adequate to provide the stipulated overlaps
on the pipe/fittings coating.
Table 4.5.1. Physical Properties of Heat-shrinkable Coatings
Property Minimum Maximum Test Method (Ref
AWWA C216)
Width Deviation ± 10% width or 0.25 in - Sec 5.3.1
(6mm), whichever is
smaller
Thickness (as supplied) Type I: 60mil (1.5mm) - Sec 5.3.2

Type II: 60mil - Sec 5.3.2
(1.5mm)
Water-vapor Transmission - 0.05 g/h/m2 Sec 5.3.3
Dielectric Strength 400 V/mil (15 V/µm) Sec 5.3.4
Volume Resistivity 1014 ohm Centimeter - Sec 5.3.5
Adhesion to Steel 8 lbs/linear in. - Sec 5.3.6
Heat Shock (test for cross No visual cracking, - Sec 5.3.7
linking of backing) flowing, or dipping
Tensile Strength 2200 psi (15.2 MPa) - Sec 5.3.8
Elongation 400% - Sec 5.3.9
Impact Resistance 25 in-lb (282 cm-N) - Sec 5.3.11
Thickness
Type I and Type II heat-shrinkable polyolefin coatings shall have a minimum thickness of 60 mil
(1.5 mm) as supplied.
Coating requirements
Table 4.5.1.shows the requirements for the physical properties of heat shrinkable coatings.
4.5.4. Field and Shop Coating Application
Equipment
The Contractor’s equipment for cleaning and coating shall be designed and maintained to comply
with the procedures and to obtain the results required by these specifications
Surface Preparation
Bare Surface
Bare surface shall be free from mud, mill scale, lacquer, wax, paint, coal tar, asphalt, oil, grease, or
any other foreign material. Before blast cleaning, surfaces shall be inspected and, if required, pre-
cleaned according to SSPC-SP1 to remove oil, grease, and loosely adhering deposits. Only
prevailing code safety solvents that do not leave a residue shall be used. Preheating to remove oil,
grease, mill scale, water and ice may be used, provided all surfaces are preheated in a uniform
manner to avoid distortion. Welds shall be cleaned of all welding slag, spatter and scale and shall be
allowed to cool before the coating is applied. Sharp edges or burns that could puncture or cut the
coating shall be removed by grinding or filling.
Blast Cleaning
All metal surfaces shall be blast cleaned to achieve a surface preparation equivalent to SSPC-SP
6/NACE No.3.
Protection from Moisture
Blast-cleaned surface shall be protected from conditions of high humidity, rainfall or surface
moisture and shall not be allowed to flash rust before the coating is applied. If rust occurs, the
surface must be prepared again by blast cleaning in the mill or shop or by either blast cleaning or
wire-brush cleaning in the field. At the time of coating/adhesive application the steel substrate shall
be at least 3°C above the dew point.
Wire Brush Cleaning
Surfaces that have been blast cleaned in a mill or shop before shipment to a field location shall be
cleaned using a solvent wash and wire brushing or other approved means at the time the heat-
shrinkable coating is applied. All wire brushed metal surfaces shall be prepared according to SSPC-
SP 2 or SSPC-SP 3.

Coating and Wrapping

The manufacturer/Contractor shall provide the Employer’s Representative with the specific
application procedure used for each type of coating system. The total thickness applied shall as
specified by Employer’s Representative, with consideration of the manufacturer’s
recommendations, but in no instance shall the total thickness be less than the specified minimum
thickness.
The heat-shrinkable coating shall bond to and overlap the mill coating by a minimum of 50 mm
after final application. The supplied width should be a minimum of 127 mm wider than the exposed
steel area to be covered. Maximum and minimum temperatures for applying and handling coatings
specified by the manufacturer shall be followed.
Coating Repair
All damaged or flawed areas, holidays, and mislays shall be repaired by using Type I, Type II
coatings, Alternatively, cold-applied tape coatings conforming to AWWA C209 or polyethylene
patch sticks or patch materials as recommended by the manufacturer and approved by Employer’s
Representative may also be used. The damaged area shall be covered with a minimum of 50 mm
overlap around the damaged area by using either a precut patch or wraparound coating. The
repaired area shall be tested with a holiday detector after the repair is completed.
Outdoor Storage
Because environmental conditions vary, the Employer's Representative should consult with the
manufacturer as to the specific conditions, including ultraviolet light exposure, to which the coated
pipe will be subjected when it is stored above ground prior to installation.
4.5.5. Field Procedures - As already discussed
4.5.6. Inspection by the Employer's Representative - As already discussed
4.5.7. Acceptance Testing - As already discussed
4.5.8. Material and Coating-Systems Tests
Laboratory tests to establish material compliance with the provision of these specifications are as
follows:
4.5.8.1. Coating Width

For Type I and Type II coatings, three discrete product sleeves shall be selected at random and
placed on a smooth, flat surface. The width of the specimen shall be measured to the nearest 1/16
in. (1.6 mm) at 10 locations along the length of the sample. Any deviation from values in Table
4.3.14 shall constitute failure of the width requirement.
4.5.8.2. Impact Resistance:

The heat-shrinkable coating shall be tested for impact resistance according to ASTM G14.
Alternatively, DIN 30672 Class B (pass/ fail) testing may also be used.
4.5.8.3 Coating Thickness

The thickness of the coating, as supplied, shall be .measured at not less than 10 locations on each of
the three specimens. The coating thickness shall be measured with a micrometer calibrated to read
in thousand of an inch and having contact feet of not less then l/4 in. (6 mm) in diameter. The
average of the 10 measurements shall be not less than specified. No single measurement shall
deviate more than 15 percent from the average value. The thickness of the adhesive shall be at least
equal to, but not more than three times, the thickness of the cross-linked polyolefin backing.

4.5.8.4. Water-vapor Transmission

The hear shrinkable coating shall be tested for water-vapor transmission according to ASTM E96
(method B). A value in excess of the specified limit shall constitute failure of the coating to meet
the water vapor transmission requirement
4.5.8.5. Dielectric Strength

The heat shrinkable coating shall be tested for dielectric breakdown according to ASTM D149
using a 1-in (25-mm) diameter electrode and 500-V/s voltage rise. A value below the specified
limit shall constitute a failure of the coating to meet the dielectric strength requirement.
4.5.8.6. Volume Resistivity

The heat-shrinkable coating shall be tested for volume resistively according to ASTM D257. A
value below the specified limit shall constitute failure of the coating to meet the volume receptivity
requirement.
4.5.8.7. Adhesion
The heat shrinkable coating system shall be tested for adhesion according to ASTM D1000. A
value below the specified limit shall constitute failure of the coating to meet the adhesion
requirement.
4.5.8.8. Heat Shock

This test is to be conducted and values determined to ensure that the backing of the heat shrinkable
coating is sufficiently cross linked. The heat-shrinkable coating shall be tested for heat shock by
removing the adhesive from the coating before performing the test and hanging a strip of the
prepared backing in a 392°F (200"C) oven for 4 hr. The backing will shrink but should show no
dripping, flowing, or cracking as specified.
4.5.8.9. Tensile Strength

The heat-shrinkable coating shall be tested for tensile strength according to ASTM D638. An
average value below the specified limit shall constitute failure to meet the tensile requirement.
4.5.8.10. Elongation
The heat-shrinkable coating shall be tested for elongation according to ASTM D638. An average
value below the specified limit shall constitute failure to meet the elongation requirement.
4.6. Electrical Inspection for Continuity
After the heat-shrinkable coating has been properly applied, the Contractor shall conduct an
electrical inspection of all wrapped surfaces with an electrical holiday detector. Any defect in the
coating shall be satisfactorily repaired at the expense of the Contractor.
Detector
The electrical equipment used to coat the heat-shrinkable coating in the shop or yard and in the field
shall be a portable, low-amperage, adjustable-voltage pulse holiday detector that employs an
audible signaling device. The holiday detector shall use coil spring electrode or a brush electrode.
The primary input power shall be no higher than 20 W, and the minimum pulses at crest voltage
shall be 20 Hz. The operating voltage of the detector shall be determined by the following formula:
V= 1,250 √t
Where:
V = the inspection voltage
t -average system thickness in mil (0.001 in.)
Because of variables, such as relative humidity and temperature, the detector voltage shall be
checked no less than twice daily that is before starting work in the morning and before resuming
work in the afternoon. To ensure proper inspection voltage the equipment shall be properly
grounded and the voltage adjusted according to the instructions of the equipment manufacturer.
Detector Use
After the voltage has been properly checked, the electrode shall be passed over the coated surface
one time only, at a rate of approximately 30-60 ft/min (9-18 m/min). If the electrode is stopped
while passing over the coated surface, the current to the electrode should be cut off immediately to
avoid possible damage to the coating.
Holiday Detection and Repair
Any holidays will be indicated by an electric spark between the electrode and the metal surface and
by an audible signal. The heat-shrinkable coating shall pass the electrical inspection test if no
electrical spark occurs. If an electric spark occurs between the electrode and the metal surface, the
holiday shall be marked with a suitable indicator such as chalk or crayon to identify the area for
repair.
4.7. Rejection - As already discussed.
4.8. Delivery
Packaging
Heat-shrinkable coatings shall be packaged in containers that ensure acceptance and safe delivery to
their destination. Preference for individual or multiple packaging of heat-shrinkable coating may be
as suggested by manufacturer.
Individual Items
Each heat-shrinkable coating item shall be packaged to prevent adherence to the packaging material
or the container.
Multiple Items
Coating shall be packaged in quantities not to exceed the weight limitation of the container
specification.
Marking
The carton packaging shall be plainly marked with the name of the manufacturer, type of material,
batch or lot number, date of manufacture and information as required by federal and state or
provincial laws.
Shipping Handling and Storing
Coated articles shall be handled, stored and shipped in a manner that will prevent damages to the
coating. The Contractor shall be responsible to repair any coating damaged in handling or other
operations at no additional cost.
4.9. Coatings for Exterior of Special Sections, Connections and Fittings
4.9.1. General
This section provides the requirements for cold applied tapes for the exterior of special sections,
connections and fittings, including material application, inspection, testing, marking and packaging
requirements.
The protective coating system described in this section consists of a prefabricated cold-applied tape
and liquid adhesive applied to the exterior surface of steel water pipe specials, connections, and
fittings.
4.9.2. Materials and Workmanship

The materials provided shall meet the provisions of AWWA C209. Work or material that fails to
conform to this standard may be rejected at any time before final acceptance
4.9.3. Material Requirements

Liquid Adhesive
Liquid adhesive shall be of a type that can be applied without heat and produce an effective bond
between the surface to be protected and the applied tape. Liquid adhesive shall comply with
pollution control requirements that are in effect at the location of use. Liquid adhesive that may
settle in the container shall not form a cake that cannot be mixed easily by hand stirring or agitation.
Liquid adhesive shall have satisfactory properties for spraying, brushing, or other acceptable
application methods, and a minimum tendency to produce bubbles during application. Liquid
adhesive and prefabricated tape shall be from the same manufacturer.
Prefabricated Tape
Materials
Prefabricated cold-applied tape shall be made from materials that provide high electrical resistivity,
resistance to corrosive environments and low moisture absorption and permeability, and shall
conform to the physical property requirements established in accordance with the test procedures.
In addition, the tape shall be compatible with and provide an effective bond to the primed steel
surface and the previously applied plant or field coatings, and shall seal to itself. The prefabricated,
cold-applied tape shall consist of a laminate composed of a plastic film backing and a homogeneous
elastomeric sealant layer.
The sealant layers, in some instances, are covered with release liners or separators. These liners or
separators must be removed prior to performing physical property tests and before application to
primed steel surfaces.
Tapes shall resist excessive mechanical damage during normal application operations and be
sufficiently pliable so as to conform to the surface to be coated. The tapes also shall withstand,
without tearing, the tensile force necessary to obtain a tightly wrapped coating.
Form
The prefabricated tape shall be supplied in sheets, pads, or rolls wound on hollow cores as directed
by Employer’s Representative. Hollow cores shall have a minimum inside diameter of 1½ in. (38
mm).
Dimensions
Prefabricated tape shall be provided in standard widths of 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 9 and 12 in. (50, 75, 100,
150, 200, 225 and 300 mm) as approved by the Employer's Representative. Typical standard
lengths are 50, 75, and 100 ft. (15, 23, and 30 m). Pads and sheets shall be sized to fit the area to be
covered allowing for overlap.
Thickness
Prefabricated tape rolls shall be provided in the minimum thickness as approved by the Employer’s
Representative, but in no case shall the thickness be less than as shown below:
Table 4.9.1.: Physical Properties of Tape and Coating
Property Minimum Test Method
(Ref. AWWA
C209-00)
Width Deviations: Maximum ± 5% of width or 1/4 in. (6mm), Sec 5.3.2.1
Thickness: Minimum 30 mil (750µm) ± 5% minimum Sec 5.3.2.2
Water–vapor Transmission 0.25 perm (1.44 ng/{pa.s.m2}, Sec 5.3.2.3

minimum
Dielectric Breakdown 400 V/mil (15 V/µm) Sec 5.3.2.4
Insulation Resistance: Minimum 500,000 megohms, minimum Sec 5.3.2.5
Adhesion (Bond) to Primed Steel: 20 ozf/in. (220 g/cm) width, minimum Sec 5.3.2.6
Minimum
4.9.4. Coating Application (Field and Shop)

Equipment, Surface Preparation and Visual Comparative Standards, Protection from
Moisture
- AS discussed already.
Priming
A uniform, continuous coat of liquid adhesive shall be applied according to the manufacturer’s
recommendations, as approved by Employer's Representative. The liquid adhesive coverage and
curing or drying time shall be sufficient to ensure an effective bond between the substrate and the
coating. Liquid adhesive application shall be limited to the amount of surface area that can be
wrapped during the same workday as application of the liquid adhesive; otherwise, the steel must
be re-primed. After liquid adhesive application, and before the tape is applied, care shall be taken to
prevent the contamination of the primed surface by any foreign materials such as dirt and moisture.
In case of restriction on use of liquid adhesive because of emission regulation, tape systems not
requiring the use of liquid adhesives may be used provided that the tape material continues to meet
the requirements with prior approval of Employer's Representative.
Coating and Wrapping
The total thickness to be used shall be as approved by Employer's Representative, but in no instance
shall the total applied thickness be less than the thickness shown in Table 4.3.15 using a minimum
overlap of 1 in. (25 mm). Where the tape coating joins with mill-applied coatings, it shall overlap
the mill coatings by a minimum of 3 in. (75 mm) and bond to them. When the use of hand-or
power-operated machines to apply the tape is recommended, the Contractor shall use the machine
approved by the Employer's Representative.
Maximum and minimum temperatures for application and handling specified by the manufacturer
shall be followed.
Coating Repair
Damages, flawed areas, holidays, or mislaps to coatings applied to special sections, connections,
and fittings from any cause during installation and before final acceptance shall be repaired by
peeling back and removing the tape layers from the affected area. The repair area shall be brushed
with a primer, then a patch of tape covering a minimum of 4 in. (100 mm) around the affected area
shall be applied by wrapping it around the pipe or by applying a patch of tape as specified by
manufacturer and approved by Employer’s Representative. After the repair is completed, the
repaired area shall be tested with a holiday detector.
Field Procedures - AS discussed already.
Inspection - AS discussed already.
Electrical Inspection for Continuity - AS discussed already.
Testing
Acceptance of the proposed coating materials shall be as specified by the Employer’s
Representative from the following options: (1) acceptance of the manufacturer's certified test
reports submitted by the Contractor; (2) acceptance of testing of samples of proposed materials
submitted by the Contractor with testing conducted by a responsible commercial laboratory
designated by the Employer’s Representative; or (3) acceptance of another basis defined and
specified by the Employer’s Representative.
4.10. Tape and Coating System Tests
Tape Width
Remove a specimen of tape at least 3 ft. (0.9 m) long from each of three randomly selected rolls, or
select three sheets or pads of tape specimens at random, and place on a smooth, flat surface.
Measure the width of the specimen tape at several points along the length of the sample to the
nearest 1/16 in. (1 mm). Any width deviation outside the limits shown in Table 4.3.15 shall
constitute failure of the width test.
Tape Thickness
Measure the tape thickness at not less than 10 locations on each of three sheets, pads or rolls of
specimens. The measurements shall be made with a micrometer calibrated to read in thousandths of

an inch (millimeters) and shall have contact feet not less than ¼ in. (6 mm) in diameter. Any
thickness measurement below the specified limits shall constitute failure of the thickness test.
Water Vapor Transmission
Test the prefabricated cold applied tape for water vapor transmission according to ASTM E96,
method B. A value in excess of the specified limits shall constitute failure of the tape to meet the
water vapor transmission requirements.
Dielectric Breakdown
Test the prefabricated cold applied tape for dielectric breakdown according to ASTM D1000. A
value below the specified limits shall constitute a failure of the tape to meet the dielectric strength
requirements.
Insulation Resistance
Test the prefabricated cold applied tape for insulation resistance according to ASTM D1000. A
value below the specified limits shall constitute failure of the tape to meet the insulation resistance
requirements.
Adhesion to Primed Steel
Test the coating system for adhesion according to ASTM D1000, method A, modified for use of
primer. A value below the specified limits shall constitute failure of the tape to meet the adhesion
requirements.
Delivery
Marking
The containers shall be plainly marked with the name of the manufacturer, type of material batch or
lot number, date of manufacture, and information as required by federal, state, or provincial laws.
Packaging and Shipping
Packaging
All tapes and liquid adhesives purchased or used according to these specifications shall be
packaged in containers that ensure acceptance and safe delivery to their destination. Preferences for
the individual or multiple packaging of tape and the size of liquid adhesive containers may be
specified by the Employer's Representative.
Individual Items: Each sheet, pad, or roll of tape shall be packaged to prevent adherence to the
packaging material or the container.
Multiple Items: Multiple sheets, pads, or rolls shall be packaged in quantities not to exceed the
weight limitation of the container specification. Each sheet, pad, or roll of tape shall be protected
from adhering to other sheets, pads, rolls of tape, the container, or to the packaging material using
separators.
Liquid Adhesive: Liquid adhesive shall be packaged in 1 gal (3.8 l) cans, 5 gal (18.9 l) pails, or
other containers acceptable to the Employer's Representative and the manufacturer, and that comply
with internationally accepted best practices and regulations.
Shipping, Handling and Storage
Coated articles shall be handled, stored and shipped in a manner that will prevent damage to the
coating. Coating damaged in handling or other operations shall be repaired satisfactorily at no
additional cost to the Employer's Representative. Damaged coatings shall be repaired.
3.7.11.12 MS Pipe Above Ground

The outer surface of the exposed MS pipes (laid above ground) and MS pipes which shall be laid for
road/railway crossings by box culvert method, shall be protected by applying externally 2 coats and
one field coat of epoxy paint over a coat of zinc rich epoxy primer as specified hereunder.
3.7.11.12.1 Specification for Paint for Pipeline Above Ground

3.7.11.12.2 Material
Zinc rich epoxy primer and epoxy paint conforming to the following specifications and as per the
approved make shall be used for painting. Each lot of the paint supplied shall be accompanied by the
certified copies of the results of the tests carried out by the manufacturer.
If any sample of the paint and /or primer is not conforming to the specifications, the entire
consignment to which the sample may pertain shall be rejected. Only those primers and painting
materials that have been approved by Engineer in Charge shall be used for the work.
3.7.11.12.3 Zinc Rich Epoxy Primer
DESCRIPTION Consisting of Base material and catalyst

CATALYST Catalyzed epoxy resin / zinc phosphate
SHADE As approved by Engineer in Charge
CHARACTERISTICS The paint shall provide a complete rust inhibitive barrier
coating of high mechanical and abrasion resistance. The
film shall be compatible for fusion and spot weld.
POT-LIFE 4 – 6 hours
MIXING RATIO The proportion of mixing of base and catalyst should be
as specified by the Manufacturer by weight and volume.
The mixed primer shall conform to the specifications
detailed
DRYING TIME Touch – 60 Min
Handle – 4 Hours
Hard – 24-48 hours
FLASH POINT Above 220 C
THICKNESS OF EACH COAT As per manufacturers recommendations
NO. OF COATS Minimum One subjected to total good finish on the pipe
surface
3.7.11.12.4 Epoxy Paint
COMPOSITION Catalyzed Epoxy Resin Suitably pigmented

SHADE As approved by Engineer in Charge, the shades of the two coats shall
be clearly differentiated with effect of the final colour darkness.
CHARACTERISTICS The paint shall not impart any taste or odour to the water it carries, and
shall be non-toxic. It shall afford a highly durable protective air-tight
coating to prevent corrosion or rust of iron and steel against air
moisture and shall be sufficient elastic to prevent its cracking,
blistering or peeling. It shall retain its consistency at the ordinary
atmospheric temperature when packed in suitable containers. After
application or drying, the paint shall not show any surface cracks due
to weathering action or expansion and contraction. Its resistance to
water must be perfect. Also, it shall be resistant to weak acids and
alkalies, neutral salts and to dry heat upto 60 deg. C. It shall give good
brushability.
SHELF LIFE The paint which has been under storage for more than 6 months shall
not be used. In order to ensure non-settlement of heavier contents, the

paint drums should be turned upside down every 14 day or such a
period as the manufacturers recommend. For this purpose, dates when
the overturning is to be done may be painted on the drum ends.
NO. OF COATS Minimum 2 shop coats and touching or finishing coat after installation
of pipes at site as per requirement
OVERCOATING INTERVAL Minimum – 24 Hours
Maximum – 5 days
CURING TIME (i.e time interval As per manufacturers recommendation
between final paint &
transportation)
3.7.11.13 Painting - General

Except with the permission of the Engineer-in-Charge, nothing but ready mixed paints of an
approved make and brand shall be used. Thinning and heating of the paints shall not be permitted
except with specific approval and in accordance with instructions. Any warming of the paint shall
be performed by means of hot water bath and paint shall not be heated to temperature higher than
40 deg. C. All paints shall be in thoroughly mixed condition at the time of application. On
completion of the work, the contractor shall remove any oil strains or paint spots, leaving the
surface in a clean and applicable condition.
Paint shall be applied only to dry, freshly cleaned surfaces, free from dust; rust; scale; grease; or
other substances which might affect the adhesion or the durability of the coating. In no case the
paint shall be applied to the surfaces that are not to be applied. Application during rainy or misty
weathers, unless unavoidable, in which the work shall have suitable and satisfactory protection and
such protection shall be maintained until the paint has dried.
All paint shall be applied by skilled workmen in workmanship manner and the average coverage
shall not be less than to that recommended for first class work with the type of paint and on the kind
of surface being painted.
3.7.11.13.1 Preparation of Surface for Painting - General

i) All oil and grease shall be removed from surface to be painted by washing with a suitable
solvent and by wiping with rags until completely clean. After removal of all oil and greases,
surfaces of metal work required to be painted shall be cleaned by removing all rust, loose
scale and dirt by sandblasting, grit blasting or other effective means. Surface which will be
permanently or intermittently submerged or subjected to moisture from spray or excessive
condensation shall be cleaned to clean metals by sand or grid blasting. After cleaning, all
surfaces shall be maintained free from oil, greases, rust, dirt and other contamination’s until
they have received the final coat of paint.
ii) Surface of stainless steel and bronze and machined surfaces which are attached or adjacent to
metal work that is being cleaned or painted shall be protected by adhesive tape or other
suitable means during the cleaning and painting operations.
3.7.11.13.2 Sand/Shot Blasting

i) The surface of the steel pipes and specials to be painted shall be thoroughly cleaned by sand
or shot blast cleaning process to SA 2.5 finish, to remove all rust mill scale etc. Oil and grease
shall be removed by applying a suitable metal cleaning solution and wiping with clean rags.
All foreign matter which can not be removed by blasting process shall be removed as directed
by the Engineer-in-Charge.
ii) Blasting should be done at a pressure of 5.62 kg/sq.cm. (80 p.s.i.) at the compressor end and
at 4.93 kg/sq./cm. (70 p.s.i.) at nozzle end. This pressure should be maintained during the
entire blasting operations. Improper jointing of hose pipes and resultant reduction in pressure
at nozzle end shall be checked and avoided.
iii) The blast cleaned surface shall be primed immediately after blasting is over. The sequence
and the programme of blast cleaning and application of primer shall be arranged in such a
way that the blast cleaned surface shall not remain uncovered with primer for more than 2
hours.
iv) Any deviation from above shall require the approval of the Engineer-in-Charge.
3.7.11.13.3 Manual Cleaning

Wherever manual cleaning is approved by the Engineer the internal surface of specials shall be
thoroughly cleaned by using scrapers and wire brushes to remove all rust, mill scale etc. to give a
shining metallic (SA 2.5) surface. The surface so cleaned shall be washed with water and allowed
to dry. A metal cleaning solution of approved make shall then be applied over it. After it is dry, the
surface shall be again washed with water, scrapping wire brushes simultaneously. A copious use of
water is necessary at this state to ensure that the metal cleaning solution is completely removed.
The primer coat shall be applied immediately after the surface has become dry.
3.7.11.13.4 Shop Painting
3.7.11.13.4.1 General
i) Immediately after cleaning and inspection, and before removal from the shop, all metal work
except machine finished surfaces, and surfaces of metals to be embedded in concrete, shall be
given one coat of primer followed by two coats of epoxy paint as specified hereafter. Surface
not accessible after assembly or erection shall be given a second shop coat of primer.
ii) The exposed steel surfaces shall be protected by rust preventive applications, which shall not
interfere with the field welding.
3.7.11.13.4.2 Application of Primer
i) No primer shall be applied without prior approval of the Engineer-in-Charge. During rain or
fog, shells of the pipes and specials shall be protected from weather by suitable housing.
ii) The proportion of mixing of base and hardener shall be as specified by the manufacturer by
weight and volume. The mix of primer shall be prepared at the work site/yard not earlier than
15 minutes before applying the same on pipe and specials surfaces.
iii) One coat of primer shall be applied by spray.
iv) No thinner shall be added to the ready mix paint without previous approval of the Engineer-
in-Charge, and the finishing coats on top of the primer coat, shall only be applied after
allowing the film to cure for at least 48 hours.
v) The priming coat shall be uniform in thickness and free from floods, runs, sags, drips, or bare
spots. Any bare spots shall be re-coated with an additional application of the primer. All runs,
sags, floods or drips shall be removed or all such defects shall be remedied by re-priming as
per the instruction of the Engineer-in-Charge.
3.7.11.13.5 Field Painting
The Contractor shall take proper care during loading/ unloading and transport of the pipes and
specials from the shop to the site of erection to preserve the shop paint in the best practicable
condition.
After erection of the pipeline on installation all rust spots, damaged areas and site welded portion of
the pipeline shall be cleaned to metal and shall be painted with one coat red oxide primer and two
coats of graphite enamel paint.
After lapse of 48 hours of application of repairing coats specified above a finish coat of epoxy paint
shall be applied to exterior surface of the entire pipeline, care being taken to clean the surface with
duster prior to application of the said finish coat.
3.7.11.13.6 Covering Capacity

Covering capacity of paint shall be checked by taking into account the actual consumption of paint
on site by dividing the area covered by paint by the quantity of paint actually consumed. The
covering capacity of primer and paint shall not be less than that specified by the manufacturer.
3.7.11.13.7 Inspection
The procedure of applying the paint as specified will be inspected right form the cleaning stage to
the application of final coat by the Engineer-in-Charge. If, at any time, it is found that the procedure
of applying the paint is not as per the standards laid down, all such painting work done shall be
rejected and shall be rectified by the Contractor at his own cost, as directly by the Engineer-in-
Charge.
3.7.11.13.8 Paint thickness
After completing 2 coats paint inspection of paint thickness will be done by the Engineer in Charge
using Elcometer or other standard measuring devices. If the thickness is found to be less than
specified by the manufacturer, the pipe shall be resurfaced to bring the same to the specified
thickness as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. All instruments and facilities for testing shall be
provided by the Contractor.
3.7.11.13.9 Adhesion
Two parallel knife cuts about 100 mm long and 20 mm apart shall be made through the coating. If
necessary, the test knife may be heated to make the cut. The painted surface between the two cuts
shall be lifted off the pipe with a stiff blade. If the paint film does not peel off more than the width
of the cut, the bond shall be deemed to be satisfactory. Should the width of peel exceed the width of
the cut, two additional tests shall be made on the same pipe at two different locations. The painted
surface shall be accepted if both the tests are satisfactory. If the results of either of these tests are
unsatisfactory, the painting work shall be rejected.
3.8 TRANSPORTATION/STORAGE OF PIPES AND SPECIALS

The contractor has to transport the pipes and other materials from manufacturer to the site stores
and from the site stores to the site of laying as per the instructions given by the engineer-in charge.
Pipes should be handled with care to avoid damage to the surface and the socket and spigot ends,
deformation or bending. Pipes shall not be dragged along the ground or the loading bed of a
vehicle. Pipes shall be transported on flat bed vehicles/trailers. The bed shall be smooth and free
from any sharp objects. The pipes shall rest uniformly on the vehicle bed in their entire length
during transportation. Pipes shall be loaded and unloaded manually or by suitable mechanical
means without causing any damage to the stacked pipes.
The transportation and handling of DI pipes shall be made as per IS 12288.Transportation and
handling of uPVC and HDPE pipes shall be done as per relevant IS. All precautions set out shall be
taken to prevent damage to the protective coating damage of the jointing surfaces or the ends of the
pipes. If transportation of HDPE pipes from a distance greater than 300km than pipes shall be
received only when bare coils of pipe have been wrapped with hessian cloth. The truck use for
transportation of the uPVC/HDPE pipes shall be exclusively used of uPVC/HDPE pipes only with
no other material loaded-especially no metallic, glass and wooden items. The truck shall not have
sharp edges that can damage the pipe. The uPVC/HDPE pipes shall be covered by suitable
protective cover during transportation from manufacturer’s place to site store. uPVC/HDPE pipes
with deep scratches developed during transportation shall not be accepted. At site, the uPVC/HDPE
pipes and coils shall not be dragged over rough ground. Storage of PE pipes in hot areas shall not be
allowed. While storing the pipes at temperatures above 450 C, continuous support shall be given by
leveled sand layer or by other suitable methods. If due to unsatisfactory storage or handling of
uPVC/HDPE pipes, pipe is damaged or ‘kinked’, the damaged portion shall be cut out completely.
Whatever method and mean of transportation is used, it is essential that the pipes are carefully
placed and firmly secured against uncontrolled movement during transportation to the satisfaction
of engineer in charge.
Damage to the lining must be repaired as per relevant IS code before pipe laying according to the
instructions of the pipe manufacturer after taking approval of EIC. Pipes shall not be thrown
directly on the ground or inside the trench.
When using mechanical handling equipment it is necessary to employ sufficient personnel to carry
out the operation efficiently with safety. The pipes should be lifted smoothly without any jerking
motion and pipe movement should be controlled by the use of guide ropes in order to prevent
damage caused by pipes bumping together or against surrounding objects.
Rolling or dragging pipes along the ground or over other pipes already stacked shall be avoided.
The pipes should be given adequate support at all the times. Pipes should be stored on a reasonably
flat surface free of stones and sharp projections so that the pipe is supported throughout its length.
In storage pipe racks should be provide continuous support and sharp corners of metal racks should
be avoided. Pipes should not be stacked in large piles for all pipes. Socket and Spigot pipes should
be stacked in layer with sockets placed in alternate ends of the stack to avoid lop sided stacks.
Pipes should not be stored inside another pipe. On no account the pipes should be stored in stressed
or bent condition or near the sources of heat. Pipes should not be stacked more than 1.5 m high and
pipes of different sizes and classes should be stacked separately. The ends of the pipes should be
protected from abrasion. The pipes should be protected from U.V. rays and excessive heat at all
times. Their storage facility should be well ventilated.
The contractor shall provide proper and adequate storage facility to protect all the materials and
equipments against damage from any cause whatsoever and in case of any such damage /theft, the
contractor shall be held responsible.
The contractor will lay the pipelines along the alignments as per the approved L-sections, layout
shall be given by the Engineer-in charge or his authorized representatives. The layout shall be given
keeping in view the information available regarding existing services like water lines, sewer lines,
telephone and electric lines/cables. In the event some services fall in the alignment of lines to be
laid, the contractor shall have to shift the alignment or such services. The contractor shall take all
due care to avoid damage to any such services and in case of any damage occurring to them in
progressing the work, the contractor shall make good the same at his own cost. No additional time
and payment shall be allowed on this account.
Rubber rings shall be handled and stored in their original packing, protected against sunlight and
contacts with petroleum products, solvents and paints.
The contractor shall provide suitable lifting equipment for loading, unloading and laying of
the pipes.
3.9 SPECIFICATIONS FOR LAYING AND JOINTING OF PIPE LINE

3.9.1 General
The contractor will inspect the route along which the pipeline is proposed to be laid. The pipe
alignment is duly marked on the field by demarcation pillars. However efforts shall be made by the
contractor to make minor deviations from the marked alignment so as to keep the pipe alignment as
straight as possible and to avoid damage of public and private properties along the alignment. The
alignment of pipeline and location of specials & chambers may be changed at site in co-ordination
and with prior approval of the Engineer-In-Charge. The final alignment on which the pipeline shall
be laid shall be marked in field and got approved from the Engineer in Charge or his representative.
Where ever there is need for deviation, it should be done with the use of necessary specials or by
deflection in pipe joints (limited to 75% of permissible deflection as per relevant standards). The
alignment as proposed should be marked on ground with a line of white chalk and got approved
from Engineer-In-Charge. The position of fittings, valves, shall be as per directions of engineer-in-
charge.
The contractor shall ensure that the quality of laying is perfect in all respect to give Cr value equal
to 1.
3.9.2 Standards
Except otherwise specified in this technical specification, the Indian Standards and Codes of
Practice in their latest version, National Building code, PWD specification of the state of Rajasthan
and Manual of water supply of GOI shall be adhered to for the supply, handling, laying,
installation, and site testing of all material and works. The laying of pipeline shall be done in
confirmations to the following standards:
IS: 12288 For DI Pipes

IS: 783 & IS: 5822 For BWSC Pipes
IS: 7634 For uPVC/PE Pipes
IS: 5822 For MS Pipes
3.9.3 Alignment and the L-Sections

Pipes shall be laid along the alignment given by the department and to the grade approved by the
department. The gradient in which the pipe alignment shall be approved will be based on the
following principles:
On average, the change in slopes per km. length shall not be more than 10 in number.
The slopes provided shall be such that in existing ground level conditions, the cover over the laid
pipe is not less than 0.6 m, if the pipe is to be laid above ground. The average cover generally
should not be less than 0.9 meters. In case of HDPE/uPVC pipes, the pipes shall have a minimum
cover of 900 mm when laid under roads with light traffic or under cultivated soils and 1.25 m when
laid under roads with heavy traffic. When the soil has poor bearing capacity and is subject to heavy
traffic, the pipes shall be laid on a concrete cradle.
3.9.4 Tools and equipment

The contractor has to provide required tools and equipment required for the timely, efficient and
professional implementation of the work as specified in the time schedule given in the special
conditions of the contract. On demand he shall provide to the Engineer in Charge a detailed list of
tools and equipment available. If in the opinion of the Engineer in Charge the progress or the
quality of the work cannot be guaranteed by the available quantity and type of tools and equipment
the contractor has to provide additional ones to the satisfaction of the Engineer in Charge.
The Contractor will always have a surveyor and leveling instrument on site.
3.9.5 EARTH WORK

3.9.5.1 General

The Contractor shall furnish all tools, plant, instruments, qualified supervisory personnel, labour,
materials, any temporary works, consumables, any and everything necessary, whether or not such
items are specifically stated herein for completion of the work in accordance with the Employer’s
Requirements.
The Contractor shall survey the site before excavation and set out all lines and establish levels for
various works such as grading, basement, foundations, plinth filling, roads, drains, cable trenches,
pipelines etc.
The excavation shall be carried out to correct lines and levels. This shall also include, where
required, proper shoring to maintain excavations and also the furnishing, erecting and maintaining
of substantial barricades around excavated areas and warning lamps at night.
Excavated material shall be dumped in low lying land, regular heaps, bunds, riprap with regular
slopes within the lead specified and levelling the same so as to provide natural drainage and
avoidance of formation of any puddle of water near pipe alignment. Rock/soil excavated shall be
stacked properly as approved by the Engineer in Charge. As a rule, all softer material shall be laid
along the center of heaps, the harder and more weather resisting materials forming the casing on the
sides and the top. Rock shall be stacked separately.
Topsoil shall be stock piled separately for later re-use.
3.9.5.2 Clearing
The area to be excavated/filled shall be cleared of fences, trees, plants, logs, stumps, bush,
vegetation, rubbish, slush, etc. and other objectionable matter. If any roots or stumps of
trees are encountered during excavation, they shall also be removed. The material so
removed shall be disposed off as approved by the Engineer in Charge. Where earth fill is
intended, the area shall be stripped of all loose/ soft patches, top soil containing
objectionable matter/ materials before fill commences.
3.9.5.3 Excavation
Excavation shall be taken out to such widths, lengths, depths and profiles as are shown on the
approved L-section or such other lines and grades as may be agreed with the Engineer in Charge.
Rough excavation shall be carried out to a depth of 150mm above the final level. The balance shall
be excavated with special care.
Soft pockets shall be removed below the final level and extra excavation filled up with lean
concrete as approved by the Engineer in Charge. The final excavation should be carried out just
prior to laying the blinding course.
To facilitate the permanent works the Contractor may excavate, and also backfill later, outside the
lines shown on the drawings provided by the Contractor as agreed with the Engineer in Charge.
Should any excavation be taken below the specified elevations, the Contractor shall fill it up with
concrete of the same class as in the foundation resting thereon, up to the required elevation without
any cost to the Department.
All excavations shall be to the minimum dimensions required for safety and ease of working. Prior
approval of the Engineer in Charge shall be obtained by the Contractor in each individual case, for
the method proposed for the excavation, including dimensions, side slopes, dewatering, disposal,
etc. This approval shall not in any way relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for any
consequent loss or damage. The excavation must be carried out in the most expeditious and
efficient manner. Side slopes shall be as steep as will stand safely for the actual soil conditions
encountered. Every precaution shall be taken to prevent slips. Should slips occur, the slipped
material shall be removed and the slope dressed to a modified stable slope.
3.9.5.4 Excavation For Laying pipe along the road

While laying the pipeline below ground along the road side, the contractor shall observe the
following:
The contractor shall not be allowed to take earth from the burrow pits if excavation
required to take additional earth results in side slopes steeper than 1:1 in clay
dominating soil and 1:1.5 in case of silty sand or sandy soils.
If invert of pipe is kept above the existing burrow pit level or part of pipe is above it,
the minimum side slopes of 1:1 in clay dominating soil and 1:1.5 in case of silty sand
or sandy soils shall be provided on the side towards the burrow pit area so as to provide
required cover. The side slopes shall be properly compacted upto 90% of modified
Procter density.
If earth is taken for providing required cover to pipe from the burrow pits, the burrow
pits shall be so graded upto the nearest drain, that no impounding of water is possible in
burrow pit area.
If the pipeline is laid just near the road section, as far as practical minimum cover of
1.0 m shall be ensured. Whenever this requirement of cover cannot be ensured,
concrete casing of deigned thickness as per considerations given for design in this
chapter shall be provided.
3.9.5.5 Excavation by the Use of Explosives
Unless otherwise stated herein, I.S. 4081: Safety Code for Blasting and related Drilling Operations” shall be followed.
As far as possible all blasting shall be completed prior to commencement of construction. At all stages of
excavation, precautions shall be taken to preserve the rock below and beyond the lines specified for the
excavation, in the soundest possible condition. The quantity and strength of explosives used, shall be such as
will neither damage nor crack the rock outside the limits of excavation. All precautions, as directed by
Engineer in Charge, shall be taken during the blasting operations and care shall be taken that no damage is
caused to adjoining buildings or structures as a result of blasting operations. In case of damage to permanent
or temporary structures, Contractor shall repair the same to the satisfaction of Engineer in Charge at his cost.
As excavation approaches its final lines and levels, the depth of the charge holes and amount of explosives
used shall be progressively and suitably reduced.
The contractor shall obtain a valid Blasting License from the authorities concerned. No
explosive shall be brought near the work in excess of quantity required for a particular amount of
firing to be done; and surplus left after filling the holes shall be removed to the magazine. The
magazine shall be built as away as possible from the area to be blasted. Engineer in Charge’s prior
approval shall be taken for the location proposed for the magazine.
In no case shall blasting be allowed closer than 30 metres to any structure or to locations where
concrete has just been placed. In the latter case the concrete must be at least 7 days old.
For blasting operations, the following points shall be observed.
i) Contractor shall employ a competent and experienced supervisor and
licensed blaster in-charge of each set of operation, who shall be held
personally responsible to ensure that all safety regulations are carried out.
ii) Before any blasting is carried out, Contractor shall intimate Engineer in
Charge and obtain his approval in writing for resorting to such operations.
He shall intimate the hours of firing charges, the nature of explosive to be
used and the precautions taken for ensuring safety.
iii) Contractor shall ensure that all workmen and the personnel at site are excluded
from an area within 200 m radius from the firing point, at least 15 minutes before
firing time by sounding warning whistle. The area shall also be given a warning by
sounding a distinguishing whistle.

iv) The blasting of rock near any existing buildings, equipments or any other property
shall be done under cover and Contractor has to make all such necessary muffling
arrangements. Covering may preferably be done by MS plates with adequate dead
weight over them. Blasting shall be done with small charges only and where
directed by Engineer in Charge, a trench shall have to be cut by chiseling prior to
the blasting operation, separating the area under blasting from the existing
structures.
v) The firing shall be supervised by a Supervisor and not more than 6 (six) holes at a
time shall be set off successively. If the blasts do not tally with the number fired,
the misfired holes shall be carefully located after half an hour and when located,
shall be exploded by drilling a fresh hole along the misfired hole (but not nearer
than 600 mm from it) and by exploding a new charge.
vi) A wooden tamping rod with a flat end shall be used to push cartridges home and
metal rod or hammer shall not be permitted. The charges shall be placed firmly into
place and not rammed or pounded. After a hole is filled to the required depth, the
balance of the hole shall be filled with stemming which may consist of sand or
stone dust or similar inert material.
vii) Contractor shall preferably detonate the explosives electrically.
viii) The explosives shall be exploded by means of a primer which shall be fired by
detonating a fuse instantaneous detonator (F.I.D) or other approved cables. The
detonators with F.I.D. shall be connected by special nippers.
ix) In dry weather and normal dry excavation, ordinary low explosive gunpowder may
be used. In damp rock, high explosive like gelatin with detonator and fuse wire
may be used. Underwater or for excavation in rock with substantial accumulated
seepage electric detonation shall be used.
x) Holes for charging explosives shall be drilled with pneumatic drills, the drilling
pattern being so planned that rock pieces after blasting will be suitable for handling
without secondary blasting.
xi) When excavation has almost reached the desired level, hand trimming shall have to
be done for dressing the surface to the desired level.
Any rock excavation beyond an over break limit of 75 mm shall be filled up as
instructed by Engineer in Charge, with concrete of strength not less than M10.
Stopping in rock excavation shall be done by hand trimming.
xii) Contractor shall be responsible for any accident to workmen, public or Employer’s
property due to blasting operations. Contractor shall also be responsible for strict
observance of rules, laid by Inspector of explosives, or any other Authority duly
constituted under the State and / or Union Government as applicable at the place of
excavation.
3.9.5.6 Stripping Loose Rock
All loose boulders, detached rocks partially and other loose material which might move therewith
not directly in the excavation but so close to the area to be excavated as to be liable, in the opinion
of Engineer in Charge, to fall or otherwise endanger the workmen, equipment, or the work shall be
stripped off and removed from the area of the excavation. The method used shall be such as not to
render unstable or unsafe the portion, which was originally sound and safe.
Any material not requiring removal in order to complete the permanent works, but which, in the
opinion of Engineer in Charge, is likely to become loose or unstable later, shall also be promptly
and satisfactorily removed.
3.9.5.7 Timber Shoring
Wherever required close timbering shall be done by completely covering the sides of the trenches
and pits generally with short, upright members called 'polling boards'. These shall be of minimum
25 cm x 4 cm sections or as approved by the Engineer in Charge. The boards shall generally be
placed in position vertically side by side without any gap on each side of the excavation and shall
be secured by horizontal walling of strong wood at maximum 1.2 metre spacing, strutted with
ballies or as approved by the Engineer in Charge. The length of the ballie struts shall depend on the
width of the trench or pit. If the soil is very soft and loose, the boards shall be placed horizontally
against each side of the excavation and supported by vertical walling, which in turn shall be
suitably strutted. The lowest boards supporting the sides shall be taken into the ground and no
portion of the vertical side of the trench or pit shall remain exposed, so as to render the earth liable
to slip out.
Timber shoring shall be 'close' or 'open' type, depending on the nature of soil and the depth of pit or
trench. The type of timbering shall be as approved by the Engineer in Charge. It shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor to take all necessary steps to prevent the sides of excavations,
trenches, pits, etc. from collapsing.
Timber shoring may also be required to keep the sides of excavations vertical to ensure safety of
adjoining structures or to limit the slope of excavations, or due to space restrictions or for other
reasons. Such shoring shall be carried out, except in an emergency, only under instructions from the
Engineer in Charge.
The withdrawal of the timber shall be done carefully to prevent the collapse of the pit or trench. It
shall be started at one end and proceeded with, systematically to the other end. Concrete or
masonry shall not be damaged during the removal of the timber.
In the case of open timbering, the entire surface of the side of trench or pit is not required to be
covered. The vertical boards of minimum 25 cm x 4 cm sections shall be spaced sufficiently apart
to leave unsupported strips of maximum 50 cm average width. The detailed arrangement, sizes of
the timber and the spacing shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer in Charge. In all other
respects, the Employer’s Requirements for close timbering shall apply to open timbering.
In case of large pits and open excavations, where shoring is required for securing safety of
adjoining structures or for any other reasons and where the planking across sides of excavations/pits
cannot be strutted against, suitable inclined struts supported on the excavated bed shall be provided.
The load from such struts shall be suitably distributed on the bed to ensure no yielding of the strut.
3.9.5.8 Dewatering
The Contractor shall ensure that the excavation and the structures are free from water during
construction and shall take all necessary precautions and measures to exclude ground/rain water so
as to enable the works to be carried out in reasonably dry conditions in accordance with the
construction programme. Sumps made for dewatering must be kept clear of the
excavations/trenches required for further work. The method of pumping shall be approved by
Engineer in Charge, but in any case, the pumping arrangement shall be such that there shall be no
movement of subsoil or blowing in due to differential head of water during pumping. Pumping
arrangements shall be adequate to ensure no delays in construction. The dewatering shall be
continued for at least (7) seven days after the last pour of the concrete. The Contractor shall,
however, ensure that no damage to the structure results on stopping of dewatering.
The Contractor shall study the sub-soil conditions carefully and shall conduct any tests necessary at
the site with the approval of the Engineer in Charge to test the permeability and drainage conditions
of the sub-soil for excavation, concreting etc., below ground level.
The scheme for dewatering and disposal of water shall be approved by the Engineer in Charge. The
Contractor shall suitably divert the water obtained from dewatering from such areas of site where a
build up of water in the opinion of the Engineer in Charge obstructs the progress of the work, leads
to unsanitary conditions by stagnation, retards the speed of construction and is detrimental to the
safety of men, materials, structures and equipment.
When there is a continuous inflow of water and the quantum of water to be handled is considered in
the opinion of Engineer in Charge, to be large, a well point system- single stage or multistage, shall
be adopted. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer in Charge, details of his well point system
including the stages, the spacing, number and diameter of well points, headers etc., and the number,
capacity and location of pumps for approval.
3.9.5.9 Rain Water Drainage

Grading in the vicinity of excavation shall be such as to exclude rain/ surface water draining into
excavated areas. Excavation shall be kept clean of rain and such water as the Contractor may be
using for his work by suitably pumping out the same. The scheme for pumping and discharge of
such water shall be approved by the Engineer in Charge.
3.9.5.10 Bench mark
Temporary benchmarks, at least one in every Kilometer shall be fixed for rising mains before the
contractor in any section starts any work. These benchmarks shall be fixed away from the field of
work so as not to be disturbed during the execution and shall be securely fixed in concrete.
3.9.6 Fencing, Watching and Lightening
The posts of the fencing shall be of timber, securely fixed in the ground not more than 2.5 m. apart.
They shall not be less than 10 cm in dia. or not less than 1.25 m above the surface of ground. There
shall be two rails, one near the top of the posts and the other about 0.5 m above the ground and each
shall be of 5 cm to 10 cm in dia. and sufficiently long to run from post to post which they shall be
bound with strong ropes. The method, of projecting rails beyond the posts and tying together where
they meet will not be allowed on any account. All along the edges of the excavated trenches, a bund
of earth about one metre high shall be formed where so required by the Engineer-in-Charge for
further protection. Proper provision shall be made for lighting at night and watchman shall be kept
to see that this is properly done and maintained. In addition to the normal lighting arrangements, the
contractors shall provide wherever such work is in progress, battery operated blinking light (6 volts)
in the beginning and end of a trench with a view to provide suitable indication to the vehicular
traffic. The contractor shall provide and display special boards printed with fluorescent paints
indicating the progress of the work along the road. The contractor shall be held responsible for
payment of all claims for compensation as a result of accident or injury to any person or property
due to improper fencing, inadequate lighting or non-provision of red flags. The contractors shall at
their own cost provide all notice boards before opening of roads as directed by the Engineer-in-
Charge. The contractors shall make arrangements to direct traffic whenever work in through fare is
in progress.
3.9.7 PIPE LAYING BELOW GROUND

3.9.7.1 Trench excavation
The earth work shall be carried out as specified above.
Before excavating the trench the alignment of pipeline and L-section shall be approved by
Engineer-in-charge. The work of trench excavation should be commensurate with laying and
jointing of the pipeline. It should not be dug in advance for a length greater than 3 days ahead of
work of laying and jointing of pipeline unless and otherwise directed by the Engineer in charge. It
is proposed to ensure the following:-
Safety precautions have to be incorporated in the work progress

Hindrances to the public have to be minimized
The trench shall not be allowed to erode
The trench must not be filled with water.
The trench must not be refilled before laying of the pipes.
The bed for the laying of the pipes has to be prepared according to the L-section
immediately before laying of the pipes.
The trench excavation of DI pipeline shall be in accordance with IS:12288. Pipe trenches shall be
excavated to the lines and levels shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer. The depth
of the excavated trench shall be as given in the drawings or as directed by the Engineer. The width
of the trench at bottom between the faces of sheeting shall be such as to provide 250 mm clearance
on either side of the DI pipe except where rock excavation is involved. No pipe shall be laid in a
trench until the section of trench in which the pipe is to be laid has been approved by the Engineer-
in-Charge.
The depth should be sufficient to provide an average cover of 0.9 meter so that the pipe line will not
interfere with the cultivation of land. It may be necessary to increase the depth of pipeline to avoid
land drains or in the vicinity of roads, railways or other crossing. Care should be taken to avoid the
spoil bank causing an accumulation of rain water.
The bottom of the trench shall be trimmed and leveled to permit even bedding of the pipes. It
should be free from all extraneous matter, which may damage the pipe or the pipe coating.
Additional excavation shall be made at the joints of the pipes, so that the pipe is supported along its
entire length.
All excavated material shall be stacked in such a distance from the trench edge that it will not
endanger the work or workmen and it will avoid obstructing footpaths, roads and drive ways.
Hydrants under pressure, surface boxes, fire or other utility controls shall be left unobstructed and
accessible during the construction work. Gutters shall be kept clear or other satisfactory provisions
made for street drainage, and natural water – courses shall not be obstructed.
To protect persons from injury and to avoid damage to property, adequate barricades, construction
signs, torches, red lanterns and guards, as required, shall be placed and maintained during the
progress of the work and until it is safe for traffic to use the roadways. All materials, piles
equipment and pipes which may serve as obstruction to traffic shall be enclosed by fences or
barricades and shall be protected by illuminating proper lights when the visibility is poor.
As far as possible, the pipe line shall be laid below existing services, like water and gas pipes,
cables, cable ducts and drains but not below sewers, which are usually laid at greater depth. Where
it is unavoidable, pipeline should be suitably protected. A minimum clearance of 150 mm shall be
provided between the pipeline and such other services.
Trees, shrubbery fences, poles, and all other property and surface structures shall be protected. Tree
roots shall be cut within a distance of 50 cm from pipe joints in order to prevent roots from entering
them. Temporary support, adequate protection and maintenance of all under ground and surface

structures, drains, sewers and other obstructions encountered in the progress of the work shall be
provided. The structures, which will be disturbed shall be restored after completion of the work.
Wherever necessary to prevent caving, trench excavations in soils such as sand, gravel and sandy
soil shall be adequately sheeted and braced. Where sheeting and bracing are used, the net trench
width after sheeting shall not be less than that specified above. The sides of the excavation shall be
adequately supported at all times and, except where described as permitted under the Contract, shall
be not battered. Generally, safety measures against caving have to be provided for trenches with
vertical walls if they are deeper than 2.0 m.
3.9.7.2 Trench Excavation to Commensurate With the Laying Progress
The work of trench excavation should be commensurate with laying and jointing of the pipeline. It
should not be dug in advance for a length greater than 500 m ahead of work of laying and jointing
of pipeline unless other wise defined by the Engineer. The Contractor has to ensure the following:
I. Safety protections as mentioned above have to be incorporated in the work process
II. Hindrances to be public have to be minimized
III. The trench must not be eroded before the pipes are laid
IV. The trench must not be filled with water when the pipes are laid
V. The trench must not be refilled before laying of the pipes.
The bed for the laying of the pipes has to be prepared according to the L-Section immediately
before laying of the pipes.
3.9.7.3 Bedding of the Pipes:
The pipeline shall generally be laid in ordinary sandy soil for which no extra bedding shall be
provided. In such case, while doing the excavation, the bottom of the trench shall be prepared in a
manner so as to match the curvature of the pipe as far as possible subtending an angle of about 120o
at the center of pipe. Wherever the bottom of the trench is of such a nature (i.e. any type of rock /
hard soil/ boulder) which is likely in the opinion of the Engineer-in-Charge to cause damage to the
pipe or coating or an unsuitable material is encountered which cannot support the pipe, the
contractor shall excavate the trench to an additional depth below the required depth and shall refill
to required level with suitable material such as loose soil/ sand, to be approved by the Engineer-in-
Charge. The bedding thickness shall be not less than 15 cm under the barrel of the pipes. The
complete pipe has to be covered and surrounded by the same material as used for bedding so that a
total cover of 30cm above the barrel can be achieved. The excavated hard/dense soil can be refilled
after bedding and covering of the pipe with the loose soil/sand.
The bedding shall be compacted with a light hand rammer. Adding sand during ramming
shall make up any reduction in thickness due to compaction. For the purpose of the bedding
under this item only screened fine sand of grain size not larger than 2mm shall be used. The
sand shall be a clean, uncoated and free form clay lump, injurious amounts of dust, soft
particles, organic matter, loam or other deleterious substances.
If the sand supplied is unclean it shall be washed. In no case shall sand containing more than 3.5 %
by dry volume or 5% by wet volume of clay, loam or silt be accepted. Tests specified for
determining silt in sand and organic impurities as described in IS:383 shall apply. Sieved and
washed sand shall be stored on the works in such a manner as to prevent intrusion of any foreign
matter, including coarser particles of sand or any clay or metal or chips. Tests as indicated above
shall be performed if called for by the Engineer-in-Charge at the expense of the Contractor.
During the work of providing sand bedding and laying the pipeline over it, loose material from the
sides or edges of the trench shall be prevented from falling inside the trench, by providing shoring
and taking other measures. Also where necessary, trench shall be kept dry by pumping out seepage
water continuously.
3.9.8 Laying and Jointing of Pipes

The laying of DI pipes as per IS: 12288, BWSC pipes as per IS: 783 & IS: 5822 and PE/uPVC
pipes as per IS: 7634, however the specific references given herein shall prevail on the provisions
of the standards. Pipes should be lowered into the trench with tackle suitable for the weight of
pipes. For smaller sizes, up to 200mm nominal bore, the pipe may be lowered by the use of ropes
but for heavier pipes suitable mechanical equipment have to used.
All construction debris should be cleared from the inside of the pipe either before or just after a
joint is made. This is done by passing a pull-through in the pipe, or by hand, depending on the size
of the pipe. All persons should vacate any section of trench into which the pipe is being lowered.
On gradients of 1:15 or steeper, precautions should be taken to ensure that the spigot of the pipe
being laid does not move into or out of the socket of the laid pipe during the jointing operations. As
soon as the joint assembly has been completed, the pipe should be held firmly in position while the
trench is back filled over the barrel of the pipe.
The designed anchorage shall be provided to resist the thrusts developed by internal pressure at
bends, tees, etc.
Where a pipeline crosses a water course, the design and method of construction should take into
account the characteristics of the water course to ascertain the nature of bed, scour levels,
maximum velocities, high flood levels, seasonal variation, etc. which affect the design and laying of
pipeline. The pipe shall be laid accordingly with adequate protection.
The assembly of the pipes shall be made as recommended by the pipe manufacturer and using the
suitable tools.
The socket and spigot ends of the pipes shall be brushed and cleaned. The chamfered surface and
the end of the spigot end have to be coated with a suitable lubricant recommended by the
manufacturer of the pipes. Oil, petroleum bound oils, grease or other material, which may damage
the rubber gasket, shall not be used as lubricant. The rubber gasket shall be inserted into the cleaned
groove of the socket. It has to be checked for correct positioning.
The two pipes shall be aligned properly in the pipe trench and the spigot end shall be pushed axially
into the socket either manually or with a suitable tool specially designed for the assembly of pipes
and as recommended by the manufacturer. The spigot has to be inserted up to the insertion mark on
the pipe spigot. After insertion, the correct position of the socket has to be tested with a feeler
blade.
Deflection of the pipes –if any- shall be made only after they have fully been assembled. The
deflection shall not exceed 75% of the values indicated by the pipe manufacturer.
3.9.8.1 Stringing of pipes along the alignment
The pipes shall be laid out properly along the proposed alignment in a manner that they do not
create any significant hindrance to the public and that they are not damaged.
Stringing of the pipes end to end along the working width should be done in such a manner that the
least interference is caused in the land crossed. Gaps should be left at intervals to permit the passing
of equipment across the working area. Pipes shall be laid out that they remain safe where placed
and that no damage can occur to the pipes and the coating until incorporated in the pipeline. If
necessary, pipes shall be wedged to prevent accidental movement. Precautions shall be made to
prevent excessive soil, mud etc. entering the pipe.
Generally, the pipes shall be laid within two weeks from the date of their dispatch from the
manufacturer / store.
3.9.8.2 Precautions against Floatation

When the pipeline laid underground or above ground in a long narrow cutting gets submerged in
water collected in the trench of cutting it is subjected to an uplift pressure due to buoyancy and is
likely to float if completely or partly empty. In the design of pipelines, provision is to be made to
safeguard against floatation providing sufficient overburden or by providing sufficient dead weight by
means of blocks, etc. Pipe shall be protected against floatation by providing anchor blocks. Factor of
safety for calculations for check against floating shall be taken as 1.5.
In the case of works extending over one or more monsoon seasons, however, special care and
precautions are necessary during the progress of work on this account. The Contractor shall close
down pipe laying operations well in time for the monsoon. The work of providing blocks, refilling the
earth to the required level, compacting the same, etc. shall always be done as soon as the pipeline in
the cutting has been laid.
The Contractor shall see that the water shall not be allowed to accumulate in open trenches. Where
work is in an incomplete stage, precautionary work, such as blank-flanging in the open ends of the
pipeline and filling the pipeline with water etc. shall be taken up as directed by the Engineer.
Such works shall be to the Contractor's account and no separate payment shall be made for the same.
The Contractor's rate for pipe laying shall be deemed to include such precautionary measures against
floatation.
Protection of the pipeline against floatation during the Contract Period shall be the responsibility of
the Contractor. Should any section of the pipeline float due to his negligence, etc. the entire cost of
laying it again to the correct line and level shall be to his account.
3.9.8.3 Fill, Backfilling and Site Grading
Trenches shall be backfilled with approved selected excavated material only after the
successful testing of the pipeline. The tamping around the pipe shall be done by hand or
other hand operated mechanical means. The water content of the soil shall be as near the
optimum moisture content as possible. Filling of the trench shall be carried out
simultaneously on both sides of the pipe in such a manner that unequal pressure does not
occur. Each layer shall be consolidated by watering, ramming, care being taken to avoid
damage to the pipeline.
Fill, Backfilling
General
All fill material shall be subject to the Engineer in Charge’s approval. If any material is rejected by

Engineer in Charge, the Contractor shall remove the same forthwith from the site. Surplus fill
material shall be deposited/disposed off as directed by Engineer in Charge after the fill work is
completed.
No earth fill shall commence until surface water discharges and streams have been properly
intercepted or otherwise dealt with to the approval of the Engineer in Charge.
Material
To the extent available, selected surplus soil from excavations shall be used as backfill. Backfill
material shall be free from lumps, organic or other foreign material. All lumps of earth shall be
broken or removed. Where excavated material is mostly rock, the boulders shall be broken into
pieces not larger than 150 mm size, mixed with properly graded fine material consisting of
murum or earth to fill the voids and the mixture used for filling.
If fill material is required to be imported, the Contractor shall make arrangements to bring such
material from outside borrow pits. The material and source shall be subject to the prior approval
of the Engineer in Charge. The approved borrow pit areas shall be cleared of all bushes, roots
of trees, plants, rubbish, etc. Topsoil containing foreign material shall be removed. The
materials so removed shall be disposed of as directed by Engineer in Charge. The Contractor
shall provide the necessary access roads to borrow areas and maintain the same if such roads do
not exist.
Sand Filling
Where backfilling is required to be carried out with local sand it shall be clean, medium grained and
free from impurities. The filled-in-sand shall be kept flooded with water for 24 hours to ensure
maximum consolidation. The surface of the consolidated sand shall be dressed to required level
or slope. Construction of floors or other structures on sand fill shall not be started until the
Engineer in Charge has inspected and approved the fill.
Refilling of trenches
On completion of the pipe laying operations in any section, for a length of about 100m and while
further work is still in progress, refilling of trenches shall be started by the Contractor with a
view of restricting the length of open trenches. Pipe laying shall closely follow the progress of
Trench Excavation and the Contractor shall not permit unreasonably excessive lengths of trench
excavation to remain open while awaiting testing of the pipeline. If the Engineer considers that
the Contractor is not complying with any of the foregoing requirements, he may prohibit further
trench excavation until he is satisfied with the progress of laying and testing of pipes and
refilling of trenches. Only soft earth and murrum of good quality free from stones boulders,
roots, vegetation etc., shall be utilised after the lumps are broken for filling in around the pipes
for atleast 30cm all around for pipes. Filling shall be done in layers not exceeding 150mm and
compacted to 70 to 80% of max. dry density percent of the maximum dry density as per part
VII of IS:2720. The excavated material nearest to the trench shall be used first. Care shall be
taken during backfilling, not to injure or disturb the pipes, joints or coating. Filling shall be
carried out simultaneously on both sides of the pipes so that unequal pressure does not occur.
Walking or working on the completed pipeline shall not be allowed unless the trench has been
filled to height of at least 30cm over the top of the pipe except as may be necessary for tamping
etc., during backfilling work.
The remaining portion of the trench may be filled in with a mixture of hard and soft material free
from boulders and clods of earth larger than 150mm in size if sufficient quantity of good earth
and murrum are not available. Filling in shall be done in layers not exceeding 225mm in
thickness accompanied by adequate, ramming etc., so as to be compacted to 70 to 80% of the
maximum dry density as per part VII of IS:2720. Water contents of the soil shall be as near the
optimum moisture content as possible. The trench shall be refilled so as to build up to the
original ground level, keeping due allowance for subsequent settlement likely to take place.
The Engineer in Charge shall, at all times, have powers to decide which portion of the excavated
materials shall be for filling and in which portion of the site and in what manner it shall be so
used.
If any material remains as surplus it shall be disposed of as directed by the Engineer, which
includes loading, unloading, transporting and spreading as directed within a distance of 1 km. If
the Contractor fails to remove the earth from site within 7 days after the period specified in a
written notice, the Engineer may arrange to carry out such work at the Contractor's risk and cost
or may impose such fine for such omission as he may deem fit. Particular care shall be taken to
keep the trench dry during the entire refilling operation.
If suitable material for refilling is not available for excavation the Contractor shall bring earth,
murrum of approved quality as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
No mechanical plant other than approved compacting equipment shall run over or operate within
the trench until backfilling has reached its final level or the approval of the Engineer has been
obtained.
In case of excavation of trenches in rock, the filling upto a level 30 cm above the top of the pipe
shall be done with fine materials such as earth, murum, etc. The filling up to the level of the
centre line of the pipe shall be done by hand compaction in layers not exceeding 8 cm whereas
the filling above the centre line of the pipe shall be done by hand compaction or approved
means in layers not exceeding 15 cm. The filling from a level 30 cm above the top of the pipe
to the top of the trench shall be done by hand or other approved mechanical methods with
broken rock filling of size not exceeding 15 cm mixed with fine material as available to fill up
the voids.
Filling of the trenches shall be carried out simultaneously on both sides of the pipe to avoid unequal
pressure on the pipe.
Subsidence in filling: Should any subsidence take place either in the filling of the trenches or near
about it during the maintenance period of 12 months from the completion of the Contract
Works, the Contractor shall make good the same at his own cost or the Engineer may without
notice to the Contractor, make good the same in any way and with any material that he may
think proper, at the expense of the Contractor. The Engineer may also, if he anticipates
occurrence of any subsidence, employ persons to give him timely notice of the necessity of
making good the same, and the expenses on this account shall be charged to the Contractor.
For the purpose of back-filling, the depth of the trench shall be considered as divided into the
following three zones from the bottom of the trench to its top:
Zone A: Back-filling by hand with sand, fine gravel or other

approved material placed in layers of 150 mm and
From the bottom of the
compacted by tamping. The back-filling material
trench to the level of the
shall be deposited in the trench for its full width of
centre line of the pipe
each side of the pipe, specials and appurtenances
simultaneously. Special care shall be taken to avoid
damage of the pipe and the coating or moving of
the pipe.
Zone B: Back-filling and compaction shall be done by hand
or approved mechanical methods in layers of 150
From the level of the
mm, special care shall be taken to avoid damage of
centre line of the pipe to
the pipe and the coating or moving of the pipe.
a level 300 mm above
the top of the pipe

Zone C: Back-filling shall be done by hand or approved

mechanical methods in 15 cm layers after
From a level 300 mm
compacting and carried to the level necessary to
above the top of the pipe
allow for the temporary restoration of road and path
to the top of the trench.
surfaces, and also for hard-core (if and where
ordered) on roads or to such level as will leave the
requisite space for the top soil, road surface etc. to
be reinstated as directed by the Engineer.
In case of agricultural or waste land and after
approval by the Engineer back-filling may be made
in thicker layers and with less compaction up to
200 – 300 mm above the initial ground level.
Where the excavation is made through permanent pavements, curbs, paved footpaths,
or where such structures are undercut by the excavation, the entire back-fill to the
Subgrade of the structures shall be made with sand in accordance with IS 12288.
The excavated material may be used for back-fill in the following cases, provided it
complies with IS 12288 Clause 4.11.1:
a) In Zone C: In cases where settlement is unimportant back-fill shall be neatly
rounded over the trench to a sufficient height to allow for settlement to the required
level.
b) In any zone, when the type of back-fill material is not indicated or specified,
provided that such material consists of loam, clay, sand, fine gravel or other materials
which are suitable for back –filling in the opinion of the Engineer.
All excavations shall be backfilled to the level of the original ground surfaces unless
otherwise shown on the drawings or ordered by the Engineer, and in accordance with
the requirements of the specification. The material used for backfill, the amount
thereof, and the manner of depositing and compacting shall be subject to the approval
of the Engineer, but the Contractor will be held responsible for any displacement of
pipe or other structures, any damage to their surfaces, or any instability of pipes and
structures caused by improper depositing of backfill materials.
Trenches shall be backfilled with selected material placed in layers not exceeding 15
cm in thickness after compacting, wetted and compacted to a density of not less than 90
percent of the maximum dry density at optimum moisture content for zone A, zone B
and zone C of the surrounding material. Any deficiency in the quantity of material for
backfilling the trenches shall be supplied by the Contractor at his expense. Water for
compaction shall be arranged by the contractor at his cost.
The Contractor shall at his own expense make good any settlement of the trench
backfill occurring after backfilling and until the expiry of the defects liability period.
Trenches crossing a road shall be backfilled with selected material placed in layers not
exceeding15cm in thickness after compacting wetted and compacted to a density of not
less than 90 percent of the maximum dry density at optimum moisture content of the
surrounding material. Any deficiency in the quantity of material for backfilling the
trenches shall be supplied by the Contractor at his expenses.
On completion of pressure and leakage tests exposed joints shall be covered with
approved selected backfill placed above the top of the pipe and joints in accordance
with the requirements of the above specifications. The contractor shall not use
backfilling for disposal of refuse or unsuitable soil.
3.9.9 Transverse Anchors
Pipes on slopes need be anchored when there the backfill around the pipe is likely to slide away or
washed out due to run off in case of rains and thereby carrying the pipe with it. Generally for slopes
up to 30º and in very good drained soil, carefully tamped in layers of 100 mm under and over the
pipe, right up to the top of the trench will not require anchoring.
For steeper slopes, one out of every three pipe shall be held by straps fastened to vertical support
anchored in concrete. Minimum two supports one at the top and other at the bottom of slope shall
invariably be provided when the slope is more than those defined below.
The maximum spacing of anchors in steeply inclined pipelines should be as shown below, subjected
to minimum two anchors for single stretch of gradient more than 1 in 15:
Gradient of pipeline Spacing of transverse
anchors in meters
1 in 2 and steeper 5.5
Below 1 in 2 to 1 in 4 11.0
3.10 PIPE LAYING ABOVE GROUND

Before commencing the work the bidder shall submit the working drawing of every km of pipeline
laying as per the approved L-section of the pipeline for the section concerned. He shall also study
the details of the type of saddles/ concrete pedestals to be provided before the actual work of
casting is taken in hand.
Before execution the contractor shall submit detailed designs and drawings and all supports such as
portal frames, saddles, ring girders, thrust blocks anchors etc for approval of the department.
Pipe to be laid above the ground shall be laid on concrete pedestal supports. Construction of
pedestals shall be as per the design approved by Engineer in Charge. Base concrete of 150 mm M10
grade shall be provided on the excavated foundation pit. Minimum one support shall be provided
for each pipe. The foundation of the pedestal shall be kept at a minimum depth of 0.75 meters
below ground level in sandy soils or soil mixed with boulders. In case the base is a rocky stratum
the foundation can be placed on firm rock. The construction of foundation raft and pedestal column
shall be done in M15 grade of concrete. The top of the pedestal shall be provided with a suitable
haunch to provide a suitable seat for the pipe. The top of pedestal support shall ensure that the
pipeline is laid in grade approved by Engineer in Charge. The complete pedestal shall be finished to
standard engineering practices.
Pipes shall be fixed on the support using a mild steel strap if it is not anchored at support. The
thickness of the MS strap shall be not less than 6 mm and its minimum width shall be 25mm. The
MS strap than shall be painted with an approved paint.
Supports, anchor and thrust blocks shall be constructed before commencing the pipe laying work in
any section. The construction of the blocks shall be carried out in 3 stages. In the first stage the
lower part upto 150 mm below the invert of the pipeline including concrete chairs to support it shall

be constructed; in the second stage the pipeline on this part of the block shall be laid; and lastly, the
remaining block around and over the pipeline shall be constructed.
The fixidity saddles/ concrete pedestals and ordinary saddles/ concrete pedestals shall be cast-at
least 3 weeks before the pipeline is laid on them. After all saddles/ concrete pedestals between
successive fixity points have been cast, a line plan showing the actual position thereof shall be
prepared, after taking levels and measuring distances. In case of any errors in casting the pedestals,
corrections shall be applied. The pipe laying work shall then start from one end and shall proceed
towards the other end. The method of jointing the pipes and erecting them on previously cast
R.C.C. saddles/ concrete pedestals shall be determined by the Contractor depending upon the type
of plant equipment and personnel available with them.
The pipe strakes shall be assembled in position on the saddles/ concrete pedestals either by the
cranes, portable gantries, shear legs or any other equipment approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.
During assembly, the pipeline shall be supported on wooden sleepers and wedges, with the free end
of the pipeline held in position by slings to avoid deflection.
3.10.1 Protection against scouring of foundation

Providing pitching:
Wherever the pipeline pedestal or portal foundation are located near a nallaha or are across
a nallaha, the bidder shall provide a cut-off wall upto the scour depth all around the footing/
foundation at a distance of 2 times the depth of foundations below the existing ground
level. The portion between the cut-off wall and the foundation shall be filled with
compacted soil and 30cm thick stone pitching shall be done with weight of stone not less
than 40 kg. The minimum section of cut-off wall shall be of 0.3m in width and minimum
2m in depth. The cut-off wall shall be of RR masonry in cement mortar 1:4 laid on 1:3:6
Cement concrete mix minimum 15cm thickness.
Providing longitudinal walls and cross walls:

Wherever pipe is laid on pedestal across a nallah/drain or in ravines with drain flowing
across the pipe alignment, longitudinal check wall or curtain wall shall be provided on both
sides of the pipe foundations. The cut-off wall on the upstream side of nallah/drain shall be
taken at least up to 2m depth from the general ground level or up to the scour depth which
ever is more. The downstream side of cut off wall shall be taken 2.5 m in depth. The area
between two walls shall be filled with compacted soil and a gentle slope shall be provided
for drainage of water in case of minor drain, but a flexible apron shall be provided for
bigger nallah. The minimum width of cut off walls shall be 0.3m. The wall shall be of RR
stone masonry in cement mortar 1:4 and the exposed top face shall be provided 25mm
cement coping in M-15 grade or grade as per IS 456 concrete. The base course shall be of
1:3:6 mix concrete of minimum 15 cm thickness.
3.10.2 Anchoring of the pipeline

Thrust blocks shall be provided at each bend, tee, taper, end piece to prevent undue
movements of the pipeline under pressure. They shall be constructed as per actual design
and approval of Engineer in Charge according to the highest pressure during operation or
testing of the pipes, the safe bearing pressure of the surrounding soil and the friction
coefficient of the soil. Nominal steel shall be provided as per the provisions of CPHEEO
manual and the construction of block shall be done in M15 grade of concrete.

3.10.3 Expansion Joints

Expansion joints shall be provided to take care for variation of temperature range from 2.8o C to
45.6o C for all pipe lengths laid above ground level and left un-covered. At least one expansion
joint shall be provided for every exposed pipe length exceeding 20 meters. Each expansion joint
must be placed between two anchor blocks providing fixidity at two ends.
Burrow type Expansion joints shall be used conforming to EJMA / ASME specifications.
Expansion joint adopted shall accommodate expansion and contraction movement of pipe by
suitable displacement. Expansion joints shall be provided at appropriate locations as per provision
in IS: 5822-1994 and as shown in the approved L-section. The maximum distance between the
expansion joints shall be limited to 300 metres. These joints shall be equal to the internal diameter
of the pipeline and shall be tested at 1.5 times the designed working pressure. Maximum movement
of 15 cms must be possible at each expansion joint without any damages to pipe.
3.11 DAMAGE TO PUBLIC UTILITIES

All precautions shall be taken during excavation and laying operations to guard against
possible damage to any existing structure/pipeline of water, gas, sewage etc. After
excavation of trenches, pipe shall not be lowered unless the dimensions of trenches and
bedding for work for pipes at the bottom of the trenches are approved by Engineer-in-
Charge. Pipes and fittings/specials shall be carefully lowered in the trenches. Special
arrangements such as cranes, tripods with chain pulley block for lowering the pipes and
fittings/specials shall be made by contractor. In no case pipes and fittings/specials shall be
dropped. The contractor has to responsible for any damages during the laying of pipe line.
3.12 REINSTATEMENT OF ROAD/ FOOTPATH

Wherever the road is required to be cut, the contractor has to obtain prior permission from
the concerned authorities and prepare a negotiable diversion, at his cost, before taking up
road cutting. If the necessary charges for reinstatement of road/foot path shall be deposited
by the department, if demanding by concern department/authority concern authority. After
the line has been laid and the trench refilled to the original level, the traffic may be allowed
to pass through. After the pipe is laid the road must be properly re-graded and the damaged
portion of road as well as the re-graded portions must be constructed upto the sub-grade
level as per the specifications in the Chapter for Road Work of this Volume-II of bid
document and requirement of concern authority.
3.13 CLEARING THE SITE

All surplus materials, and all tools and temporary structures shall be removed from the site
as directed by Engineer-in-Charge and the construction site left clean to the satisfaction of
Engineer-in-Charge.
3.14 FIELD HYDRAULIC TEST

• The Field Hydrostatic test pressure shall be as described in following related paras &
provisions in the IS codes.

• The working pressure and surge pressure shall be calculated for ultimate flow ie pumping
for demand of year 2045.
• Before start of the testing the pipe shall be kept filled at low pressures for minimum 24
hours to allow absorption of water by lining.
• Pressure building shall be gradual.
• The duration of the test shall be 24 hours after attaining full pressure.
• Allowable leakages shall not exceed 0.1-liter/ mm of pipe diameter per km of pipeline per
day for each 30 m head of pressure applied.
• Rebuilding of pressure up to the testing pressure shall be done after every fall of 10% from
the testing pressure.
• Length of a section for testing preferably shall not be more than 1.5 km and as per
directions of Eic.
• Joints shall be kept open during testing. Adequate anchorages shall be provided to avoid
any movement of pipes.
The contractor shall provide and maintain all requisite facilities, instruments, for the field
testing of the material. All pipes, specials, valves and civil works shall be replaced by the
contractor free of cost if damaged during testing. All pipes, specials, valves and Civil
Works shall be replaced by the contractor free of cost if damaged during testing being a
SPR contract.
3.14.1 Flushing And Disinfection Of Mains

The pipeline shall be disinfected before commissioning for use. After testing the main, it
shall be flushed with water of sufficient velocity to remove all dirt and other foreign
materials. When this process has been completed, disinfections (using liquid chlorine,
sodium or calcium hypo-chlorite) shall be done as per of IS: 5822.
3.14.2 Testing of The Pipelines

3.14.2.1 Sectional tests
After laying and jointing, the pipeline shall be tested for tightness of barrels and joints, and stability
of thrust blocks in sections approved by the Engineer in Charge. The length of the sections depends
on the topographical conditions. Preferably the pipeline stretches to be tested shall be between two
chambers (air valve, scour valve, bifurcation, and other chamber).
The water required for testing shall be arranged by the contractor himself. The Contractor shall fill
the pipe and compensate the leakage during testing. The Contractor shall provide and maintain all
requisite facilities, instruments, etc. for the field testing of the pipelines. The testing of the pipelines
generally consists in three phases: preparation, pre-test/saturation and test, immediately following
the pre-test. Generally, the following steps are required which shall be monitored and recorded in a
test protocol if required:
• Complete setting of the thrust blocks.
• partial backfilling and compaction to hold the pipes in position while leaving the joints
exposed for leakage control
• opening of all intermediate valves (if any)
• fixing the end pieces for tests and after temporarily anchoring them against the soil (not
against the preceding pipe stretch)

• at the lower end with a precision pressure gauge and the connection to the pump for
establishing the test pressure
• at the higher end with a valve for air outlet
• If the pressure gauge cannot be installed at the lowest point of the pipeline, an allowance in
the test pressure to be read at the position of the gauge has to be made accordingly
• Slowly filling the pipe from the lowest point(s).
• the water for this purpose shall be reasonably clear and free of solids and suspended
matter
• Complete removal of air through air valves along the line.
• Closing all air valves and scour valves.
• Slowly raising the pressure to the test pressure while inspecting the thrust blocks and the
temporary anchoring.
• Keeping the pipeline under pressure for the duration of the pre-test / saturation of the lining
by adding make-up water to maintain the pressure at the desired test level. Make up water
to be arranged by Contractor himself at his own cost.
• Start the test by maintaining the test pressure at the desired level by adding more make-up
water; record the water added and the pressure in intervals of 15 minutes at the beginning
and 30 minutes at the end of the test period.
• Water used for testing should not be carelessly disposed off on land which would
ultimately find its way to trenches.
• The field testing pressures for pipelines & duration of test shall be follows:
S. PIPE TEST PRESSURE TEST DURATION

No. MATERIAL
1. PE/ uPVC 1.5 times the design working 6 Hours (Pipe to be filled
Pipes Pressure i.e. at 9 kg/sq.cm. for for 24 hours before testing)
class-3
2. DI Pipes As per Annexure E of IS : 8329 6 Hours (Pipe to be filled

for 24 hours before testing)
3. BWSC Pipes 1.5 times the working pressure 24 Hours
Acceptance Criteria for DI pipes shall be that the required addition of water to maintain pressure is
not more than
Q = 1 liter per Km per 10 mm of pipe diameter per 30 m test pressure for 24 Hours
Acceptance Criteria for uPVC/HDPE pipes shall be that the required addition of water to maintain
pressure is not more than
Q = 4.5 liter per 1.6 Km per 25 mm of pipe diameter per 30 m test pressure for 24 Hours
The sectional tests shall be accepted if the quantity of water required to be added to maintain test
pressure during test duration is less than mentioned above in case of DI and Upvc/HDPE pipeline.

No section of the pipe work shall be accepted by the Engineer in Charge until all requirements of
the test have been obtained.
On completion of a satisfactory test any temporary anchor blocks shall be broken out and stop ends
removed. Backfilling of the pipeline trench shall be completed. After sectional testing, it will be the
responsibility of the contractor that the pipelines be filled with water upto commissioning of the
system.
3.14.2.2 Failure to pass the test
All pipes or joints which are proved to be in any way defective shall be replaced or remade and re-
tested as often as may be necessary until a satisfactory test shall have been obtained. Any work
which fails or is proved by test to be unsatisfactory in any way shall be redone by the Contractor.
3.14.3 Pre-Commissioning & Commissioning Tests
After successful sectional testing & leakage test, Pre-Commissioning & commissioning tests shall
be performed when the work in the section is completed in all respect and the gaps /
interconnections are made.
Commissioning general
After successful sectional tests after pipe laying and other pre-commissioning tests after physical
completion, the pipeline shall be commissioned by the Contractor. Dynamic commissioning shall
be made in conjunction with or after the commissioning of the respective system.
During testing/commissioning, the Contractor shall supply all material and labour to supervise,
adjust, test, repair and do all things necessary to maintain the testing/ commissioning. This shall
include labour on a 24 hour-a-day basis during the test period and for such other period of
continuous operation as the Engineer in Charge may consider necessary to establish the efficient
operation of the cluster distribution system.
If any test result shows noticeable variation from the specification requirements for the system the
Contractor shall immediately take steps to rectify the deficiency without any extra cost to Engineer
in Charge.
The Contractor shall test and commission the system for 7 days at a stretch, from the date of
commissioning. On expiry of this period the system shall be taken over by the Engineer in Charge
and a taking-over certificate shall be issued by the Engineer in Charge, provided all defects and/or
deficiencies noticed are rectified to the satisfaction of the Engineer in Charge.
Generally, the timing of most of the commissioning tests will depend on the availability of the
respective pumps, the water and power availability at the pumping station and the completion of the
reservoir.
Should the supply of water from the pumping station fail or should any other event beyond the
Contractor's control interfere, the commissioning shall be during such a number of operational
periods as the Engineer in Charge may consider equivalent. Any repairs or replacement required
during this period shall be done by the Contractor at his own cost.
The Contractor shall allow for commissioning to be conducted at any time during the
commissioning period without extra charges under the Contract.
The main indicators for the successful commissioning are:

no leaks in pipes, joints, specials and valves

all valves are properly installed and operational
execution of the entire work including finishing according to the drawings and the
specifications
submission of as built drawings
Dynamic commissioning
The dynamic commissioning shall commence after the work has been physically completed to the
satisfaction of the Engineer in Charge. It shall simulate the design and operation conditions which
are as follows:
All branches into existing lines (if already in position) to be shut off.
Pump in operation, pump discharging into the transmission main. This is for the
commissioning of the transmission pipe only.
Water being put into the system through overhead tank or direct pumping as the case
maybe.
Closing of the valves against full static or dynamic pressure.
Operation of all valves including scour valves (open-close-open).
Operation of all air valves.
Operation of all locking arrangements of valve chambers.
3.15 SURGE CONTROL SYSTEM:

The analysis, design, manufacturing & construction / installation of surge protection
devices for all transfer mains and rising mains shall be carried out by the contractor. It is
envisaged that the surge control system shall be so designed such as to ensure that after
installation or construction of requisite surge devices, the maximum working pressure
including instantaneous surge pressure at any point, in the pipe line is less than 1.1 times
the maximum working pressure of the particular pipe line for the ultimate capacity
pumping (demand of year 2045). The surge protection system has to be designed for the
ultimate flow characteristics. The design shall be got done using the software developed by
IISc, Banglore, any IIT or Linga Reddy, Hyderabad. Contractor shall be at liberty to
provide any surge protection system designed by software developed by IISc, Banglore,
any IIT or Linga Reddy, Hyderabad and meeting Tender Specifications including ZVV-
ACV combination, Air Vessel, Surge Towers etc. The detailed designs and drawings shall
be submitted for the approval of the department. No work related to installation of surge
protection devices shall be taken up without prior approval of the department. All
equipment shall be of reputed manufacture and shall confirm to Indian Standards or
equivalent.
3.16 ROAD / RIVER / NALLAH CROSSINGS

The road crossings shall be done in such a fashion that no joint comes under the carriage way and
shoulders. The cover below the road surface should be minimum 0.90 meters otherwise suitably
designed concrete encasing in M15 grade of concrete shall be provided. The river and nallah
crossings shall be done by placing pipe below ground level, anchoring the pipe in base rock (if
available) and thereafter providing suitably designed anchor blocks. The work shall be carried out
in confirmation of design requirement of concerned authorities e.g.
PWD/NHAI/Railways/Irrigation Deptt etc.

3.17 THRUST BLOCKS / ANCHOR BLOCK

It is proposed to provide anchorage in the form of “thrust block” at each deflection in horizontal as
well as in vertical alignment of the pipeline as per requirement of designs, which shall resist the
unbalanced pressure at bends. Gravity type of thrust blocks shall be provided at horizontal and
vertical deflection in pipeline and shall be designed according to the test pressure and the soil
conditions at the site of the thrust block. The thrust shall be according to the field test pressure of
the pipe, acting on the outer diameter including the compressed rubber gasket. Before designing the
thrust block the Contractor, in coordination with the Engineer-in-Charge shall assess the stability of
the soil considering erosion due to wind and water.
The thrust blocks shall be of concrete M20 or grade as specified in IS 456, cast on site with
surface reinforcement of about 5 kg/m2. The thrust block on pipe diameters less than 150 mm could
be non reinforced, subjected to approval of EIC. The calculations for the dimensioning and the
shape of the thrust blocks have to be approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.
Design of thrust block shall be done in accordance to the provisions laid down in IS 5330-1984.
The thrust blocks shall be of reinforced cement concrete on site as per design and drawings to be
approved by Engineer. Typical drawings of thrust blocks are enclosed in the volume III of the
tender document. However, these drawings are for indicative purposes only. The contractor shall
submit his own designs and drawings based on the actual site conditions for the approval of the
Engineer-in-charge.
The thrust blocks shall be cast directly against the undisturbed soil. If this is not possible, the
backfilled soil at the contact surface shall be compacted well to full satisfaction of Engineer so that
anchor block is not displaced during operation and testing.
3.17.1 Backfilling around chambers and thrust blocks

After the completion of chambers and thrust blocks the space between the structure and the
excavation shall be backfilled with compacted material. Such backfill shall be placed in layers of 15
cm measured before compaction, wetted, if necessary, to optimum moisture and compacted well as
per instruction of engineer in charge
3.18 INSTALLATION OF VALVES & METERS

The installation of valves shall be made according to the instructions of the manufacturer and the
Engineer in Charge. The installation of pressure reducing valves shall be as per manufacturer’s
specifications. The bulk meters shall be installed as per the manufacturer’s recommendations with a
bye-pass of same size. For isolation of meters and use of the pipeline valves shall be installed at
distance recommended by the manufacturer. For installation of valves & meters on bye-pass,
flanged pipes and specials and suitable dismantling pipe with detachable joint shall be used. For
installation of different units on a transfer chamber, the arrangements shall be as shown in the
drawing of transfer chamber in Volume III of the tender document.
Air Valves of 80 mm dia. shall be installed on a 3 mtr MS vertical pipe having flange at top end.
The vertical pipe shall be internally painted using epoxy paint and encased in concrete before being
fixed in position on the main pipeline. The size of the vertical pipe shall be equal to the size of the
air valve to be installed on the pipe. The Air Valves of size less than 80 mm shall be installed in a
pre-fabricated MS chamber as per drawing given in Vol. IV.
3.18.1 FIXING:
Loading at store and unloading at site of works shall be done carefully using suitable mechanical
handling devices such as crane, chain pulley etc. The arrangement for housing of the valves with
chambers shall stable & firm foundations. The chamber and top roof cover with removable lid shall
be provided so that it shall be possible to remove or replace or recondition the valves seats and to
remove the parts without removing the valves from the pipe work. For this suitable flange adapters
may be provided. Butterfly valves shall be installed in the pipe work in such a manner that they can
be removed from the line for dismantling and replacement of rubber seats.
The tightening of nut and bolts shall be done smoothly in such a way that no excessive strain occurs
on any one side. The nuts shall be tightened on diametrically opposite site at a time.
3.18.2 JOINTING MATERIAL:

Each valve shall be supplied with all necessary joint ring, nuts, bolts and washers for completing
the joints such that it will ensure effective sealing of large orifice even at low pressures.
The weights of floats, in case of air valves, of the same size and type shall not differ by more than
2%.The timber, if used in the manufacture of floats shall be seasoned and those provided in large
orifice shall be ebonite coated. The float provided in high pressure chamber, if manufactured from
seasoned wood, shall be coated with “ethylene propylene Rubber” (EPDM)
Sluice or butterfly valves shall be installed between flanges according to the instructions of the
manufacturer.
Valves shall be placed on a support of concrete so that no shear stress is in the flanges. In case of
axial thrust due to closure of a valve against pressure the valve shall be anchored in the support in a
suitable manner to transfer the thrust into the floor slab of the chamber.
Scour valves shall be installed at the locations specified by the engineer-in-charge.
3.18.3 Civil Works
Specification of material used, workmanship, testing and sampling of materials shall be in
accordance to respective provisions laid down in the chapter for “Specifications for Civil Works” of
this Volume II of bid document.
3.18.4 Design Considerations:
The design of various components of civil works to be provided along the alignment shall be done
for “design loading” as approved by Engineer-In-Charge.
The design of anchor blocks, thrust blocks shall be done for as per the provision of IS codes.
The pipeline paid near the road or placed for crossing the road hall be suitably encased in M15
cement concrete of design thickness.
Grade of Concrete:
For construction of Valve Chambers, Anchor blocks, pedestal support and thrust blocks, M20 grade
of concrete shall be used. The leveling course, wherever provided shall be of M10 grade.
3.19 CHAMBERS FOR VALVES ON PIPE LINE
3.19.1 General
The valve chamber shall be provided to house the different valves. A leveling course of 100 mm
thick PCC (1:3:6) shall be provided at the base.
The general arrangement is shown in the drawing of chambers given in Volume III of the Tender
document. At all important chambers locking arrangements shall be provided, such locations shall
be given by Engineer in Charge. The walls shall be designed to withstand lateral earth pressures.
Pre-cast removable Ferro cement covers shall be provided to provide access within the chamber.
Wherever longitudinal forces can occur due to closing of a butterfly valve/scour valve, these have
to be taken into account by anchoring the valve either in an anchor block or against the walls of the
chamber. The same applies for reducers and tees installed in chambers. The forces have to be
calculated with the maximum pressure, which can occur due to hydraulic, static or transient
conditions. The minimum force has to correspond to a pressure of 2 bar. The calculations for the

dimensioning and the type of such anchoring and the clamps have to be approved by the Engineer-
in-Charge. The backfill of the chambers has to be compacted to required density.
To house a number of valves, meters etc. in a common chamber, specially designed chambers as
per the provisions detailed herein can also be provided. Drawings and designs of such chambers
shall be got approved by the Engineer in Charge.
They shall be constructed in cement concrete of M20 grade and P.C.C in 1:3:6 . The top slab cover
shall be pre cast reinforced cement concrete slabs. The pre cast slabs shall be provided for a length
and width which allows dismantling of the valve without problems. Typical drawings of valve
chambers are enclosed in the volume III of the tender document. However, these drawings are for
indicative purposes only. The contractor shall submit his own designs and drawings based on the
actual site conditions for the approval of the Engineer-in-charge.
The chambers shall be constructed after the laying of the pipes and the assembly of specials and
valves. The size of the chambers shall be according to the following criteria as per direction of
engineer in charge.
3.19.2 Construction Features
The minimum clear opening of the valve chambers shall be as tabulated below:
Size of Valve in Minimum dimensions Minimum dimensions

mm In direction of flow in across the direction of
mm flow in mm
80-100 900 1200
150-300 1200 1200
350-600 1500 1200
The valve chambers shall be made of M20 grade of concrete or in stone or brick masonry as per
directions of Engineer-in-Charge. All valve chambers on pipe line shall be of RCC in M20,
chambers in campus or near reservoirs can be of masonry in cement mortar 1:6. The thickness of
the walls shall be as per detailed design in consideration to the site conditions. Live load of 150 Kg/
sq. cm shall be considered on the valve chamber roof. The valve chambers shall be covered with
Ferro Cement covers which shall be constructed to the specifications given herein after. The height
of the chamber shall be taken at least 15 cm above natural ground level and it shall be ensured that
the run off or other flowing water nearby normally does not enters the valve chamber. Provisions
shall be made so that the projections out of ground of the chamber do not form an obstruction to the
road traffic.
The minimum thickness of valve chamber shall be as follows:
1 RCC Walls : 125 mm
2 Floor M20 grade : 100 mm
3 Reinforced Cement Covers : 100 mm
4 RR Stone wall below Plinth : 450 mm
5 RR stone masonry above plinth : 300 mm
6 Brick Masonry in walls : 250mm
7 Brick Partition Wall : 100mm
8 Plaster on Stone masonry : 25 mm
9 Plaster on Brick masonry : 15 mm
A locking facility shall be provided for all chambers using MS rod, hooks and a liver. The locking
arrangement shall be firmly secured in the valve walls.

Provision shall be kept for access to the roof of the chamber and from roof to the floor of the
chamber through suitable, masonry/RSS/cast iron/ Galvanised MS ladder steps of width not less
than 30 cm.
Each Valve Chamber shall be provided with CC floor in M20 grade of concrete. For drainage of
water filled inside the chamber, a 25 mm drain pipe leading to a soakage pit of diameter 900 mm
and minimum depth below floor as 750 mm shall be provided. The soakage pit shall be filled with
boulders.
Minimum 25 mm GI pipe shall be taken above the air valve chamber for providing necessary
ventilation.
Pipes passing through walls should be coated by two layer of soft material (Hessian felt) to allow
for differential settling and longitudinal expansion if directed by engineer in charge. Only metallic
pipes may be cast into the walls for anchoring purposes.
The work shall include excavation, consolidation, leveling, lean concrete as per drawing, in
foundations, finishing, refilling. It shall include all labour and material required for the complete
chamber.
3.19.3 Side Clearance required for Chambers
Minimum distance of flanges from walls : 30 cm
Minimum distance of sockets from walls : 30 cm
Minimum distance between highest point of equipment and roof slab : 30 cm
3.19.4 Special Provision in Scour valve chambers
Scour valve chambers shall be constructed according to the typical drawings given in Volume III.
The chambers for scour valves shall be off-line and placed on the scour pipe. The provisions shown
in the scour valve drawings are to be provided for wet & dry type of scour valve chambers. NP3
RCC Hume pipe shall be taken up to the nearest drain and shall be suitably pitched at the outlet
with dry type of scour valve chamber. For wet type of scour valve chambers, a attached wet
chamber shall be constructed with overflow facilities and pitching on the overflow sides for safety
of the chamber.
All specifications and constructional details for the valve chambers apply for the scour chambers
accordingly.
3.19.5 Safety Foot Rest
Safety foot rest shall be provided in valve chambers as shown in respective drawings. Safety foot
rest shall be of minimum 6 mm thick plastic and encapsulated as per IS:10910 on 12 mm dia steel
bar confirming to IS 1786 having minimum cross section as 23 x 25 mm and overall minimum
length 263 mm and width as 165 mm with minimum 112 mm space between protruded legs having
2 mm tread on top surface by ribbing or chequering besides necessary and adequate anchoring
projections on tail length on 138 mm as per standard drawing and suitable to withstand the bend test
and chemical resistance test as per specification.
Alternatively, Precast RCC footsteps or MS footsteps in a frame of angle and with a welded plate
duly painted, as per the approval of Engineer-in-Charge can be provided.
3.19.6 Mild Steel Chambers
In special circumstances where construction of RCC chamber is not otherwise possible or by
construction of such chamber obstruction is caused to the road traffic, MS pre-fabricated chambers
shall be used. Prior to installation of such chambers, there drawings shall be got approved by the
Engineer-in-Charge. The MS chambers shall be fabricated using 75 x 75 x 6 mm angle or Tee, 25 x
6 mm Flat and 3 mm sheet. The fabricated members shall be carefully painted on both sides with
epoxy paint of approved make and shade.

4.0 SPECIFICATIONS FOR VALVES
4.1 GENERAL
This chapter describes the minimum requirements for the provision of Sluice Valves, Butterfly
Valves, Dual-Plate Check Valves and Air Valves. Prior to the procurement of valves the Contractor
shall obtain the Engineer-in-Charge’s approval for the materials to be used.
• General applicable Standards to be applied to the Works under this Section shall be Indian
Standards and British Standards or other approved International Standard.
• As far as practicable all valves of the same type shall be from the same manufacturer.
• Valves for pipeline installation shall comply with the relevant provisions of the appropriate BS,
IS and other international standards.
• A certificate from the manufacturer’s shop testing shall be provided for review by the Engineer
in charge.
• Before delivery to Site all working surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned and if metal protected
with grease. The initial charges of oil, grease and similar materials necessary for the correct
setting to work and operation of valves and penstocks shall be provided by the Contractor.
Packing must be sufficient to ensure complete protection of the fitting during transit and storage
and all valves are to have their openings sealed until installation.
• The valve stem, thrust washers, screws, nuts and all other components exposed to the water
shall be of a corrosion resistant grade of stainless steel. Valves shall be free from sharp
projections. Butterfly valves shall be provided with bypass arrangement having rising spindle
gate valves. Bypass may be integral with valve or connected between pipes. Minimum size of
by pass for valves in main is 150 mm.
• All valves shall be protected against corrosion. Minimum required application shall be factory
applied electrostatic epoxy powder coating or food grade epoxy system 250 microns thick.
• Provision for indicator tags shall be made for identification / location of valves. Marking shall
be either cast on the bonnet or the body and shall show the following:
Manufacturer’s name or mark
Year of valve casting
Size of valve
Designation of working pressure
Direction of closing/opeing clearly indicated on the handwheel or body as appropriate.
Client’s Name
• The nominal size and thickness of the MS flanges shall be as defined for plate flanges of
2
pressure rating 1.0, 1.6 and 2.5 N/mm conforming to IS 6392. The pressure rating of the
flanges shall be equivalent to the valve with which they are being installed. The selection of the
flange out of these three ratings shall be based on the design pressure at the place of
installation, the flange drilling for all flanges upto 1500 mm ID shall conform to the provisions of
IS 1538. No new or additional holes shall be drilled on site. Tapped holes are not acceptable in
flanges.
• Gaskets shall be of Nitrile rubber and ready made matching with respective flanges. Gaskets
cut out from rubber sheets are not acceptable.
4.2 INSTALLATION

• All valves, gates and appurtenances shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations and as per the specifications laid for pipe laying, and to the locations
indicated on the drawings.
• The installation shall be true to alignment and rigidly supported.
• As soon as installation and operating conditions permit, all valves and appurtenances shall be
given a field test to be witnessed by the Engineer in charge to demonstrate that they meet all
requirements and operating conditions.
• Valves shall be PN rating 1.0, 1.6, 2.0 and 2.5 (as required) based on hydraulic considerations
as per the sum of the hydraulic working pressure and design surge pressure at the point of
installation.
4.3 OPERATION
• All sluice valves and butterfly valves on pipeline shall be manually operated and they shall be
provided with suitable hand wheel or key. For valves greater than 300 mm diameter gear
operators shall be used. The direction of closing shall be clearly indicated on the hand wheel or
body as appropriate.
• All sluice valves and butterfly valves in the pumping stations shall be electrically operated with
provision of manual operation. The direction of closing shall be clearly indicated on the hand
wheel or body as appropriate.
• Manual operation of valves shall be so that the torque effort required to operate the hand wheel
manually, lever or chain shall not exceed 20 kg-m applied by an operator.
• Valves shall be provided with operating hand wheels, caps, extension spindles and valve boxes
as required. Extended valve spindles shall have spindle guides and operating caps.
• For sluice valves upto 600mm diameter installed in underground chamber or otherwise not
easily accessible, the Contractor shall furnish extension spindles and/or keys, or chains with
extension oil cups or such similar fittings or appliances as may be required to permit easy
access for proper operation, lubrication etc. Valves shall be suitable for frequent operation as
well as operation after long periods of idleness in either open or closed position.
• Unless detailed otherwise all hand wheels shall have the words “open” and “close” cast in
English with arrows indicating the direction of rotation. All hand wheels shall be of a solid cast
type.
• Operation must be possible by one man against maximum design working pressure. For
butterfly valves the gearbox shall be provided with self locking devices. A locking facility shall
be provided for the BF valve in either the fully open, fully closed or intermediate position. Gate
valves and butterfly valves shall be provided with position indicators, to show whether the
valve is in the open or close position.
• Scour valves shall be provided with extension spindle with supports for operation from
operating level/ground level, as required.
4.4 BUTTERFLY VALVES

4.4.1 General

The valves shall be with integral body seat and bubble tight shut-off type, suitable for ON-OFF &
regulated operation.
Butterfly valves shall be of double eccentric and resilient seated type generally as per BS EN 593,
BS 5155 and IS 13095. Valves on rising mains which are used for only isolation purposes shall be
provided with stainless steel extension spindle/telescopic arrangement so that valves can be
operated manually or by a portable electric actuator from ground level and without entering the
chamber.
Butterfly valves shall be suitable for mounting in any position. The valve shall be free from induced
vibrations. Butterfly valves shall be suitable for bi-directional pressure testing with dead-tight shut
off even after long period of operation. The valves shall be of double flanged short body or wafer
long type.
The valve seat shall be of replaceable design. When the valve is fully closed, the seal shall seat
firmly. The seat surfaces shall be machined smooth to provide a long life for the seal. All fasteners
shall be set flush so as to offer the least resistance possible to the flow through the valve.
The shaft shall be stainless steel with Bronze or equivalent seal with self-lubricating bearings. Disc
pins shall be stainless steel. Rings shall be bi-directional self-adjusting suitable for pressure or
vacuum service. Removal and replacement of seals shall be possible without removing the
operating mechanism, valve shaft and without removing the valve from the pipeline. Valve shafts
shall be a one-piece unit extending completely through the valve disc, or of the "stub shaft" type,
which comprises two separate shafts inserted into the valve disc hubs.
All valve spindles and hand wheels shall be positioned to give good access for operational
personnel. Valve of diameter 450 mm and above shall be provided with enclosed gear arrangement
for ease of operation. The gear box shall be of worm and worm wheel design type, totally enclosed,
grease filled and weather proof. The operation with gearing shall be such that they can be opened
and closed by one man against an unbalanced head of 1.15 times the specified rating. Valve and
gearing shall be such as to permit manual operation in a reasonable time and not exceed a
required rim pull of 200 N. The valve disc shall have a 90 degree turn.
The disc shall be designed to withstand the maximum pressure differential across the valve in either
direction of flow. The disc shall be contoured to ensure the lowest possible resistance to flow and
shall be suitable for throttling operation.
It should be possible to open the valve with upstream pipe fully filled and downstream
pipe empty. The shaft shall be designed to withstand the maximum torque that will be
imposed by the operator. It shall be secured to the discs by tapered stainless steel
cotter pins.

Valves shall be provided with a continuous mechanical position indicator to show the position of
the disc, mounted on the driven shaft end.
Rigid adjustable stop mechanism shall be provided within the gear box or elsewhere on the valve to
prevent movement of the disc beyond the fully open or closed position (i.e. set points).
Valves shall be capable of closing against the maximum flow that can occur in practice. The
breakaway torque under maximum differential head conditions shall be within the manufacturer’s
limits.
All hand wheels shall be arranged to turn in a clockwise direction to close the valve, the direction
of rotation for opening and closing being indicated on the hand wheels.
All hand wheels shall be provided with an integral locking device to prevent operation by
unauthorised persons.
4.4.2 Features of Construction
The requirement shall be as follow: -

S. No. Particulars Required specifications
(A) General requirements
a) Conforming to BS 5155 Generally or IS : 13095
b) Fluid handled Clear Water
c) Rating (PN 1.0,1.6 and 2.5)
As per design pressure at the point of
installation
d) Temperature of fluid 4 to 45 degree Celsius
(B) Service
a) Tight shut off Yes
(C) Modes of operation
a) Direction of rotation of hand Clock-wise for closing
wheel
b) Orientation of hand wheel w.r. Perpendicular
to pipeline
(D) Type of construction
a) Flanged or Wafer Double flanged short body or double flanged
wafer long series
b) Face to face dimension As per BS 5155 or IS : 13095
c) Whether lifting lugs and Yes
mounting feet are required
d) Valve installation Horizontal
(E) Any other Information
(i) Limit stops should be provided in open and closed position with protection
against excessive operating force with mechanical position indicator
(ii) Locking arrangements should be provided for the valve disc to

S. No. Particulars Required specifications

facilitate removal of gear box.
(F) Tests to be carried out As per BS 5155 or IS : 13095
4.4.3 Material of Construction

S.No. Item Material of construction
(1) Body Spheroidal Graphite Iron IS 1865 Gr 400/12
Ductile Iron DIN 1693- GGG 50
(2) Disc Spheroidal Graphite Iron IS 1865 Gr 400/12
Ductile Iron DIN 1693- GGG 50
(3) Shaft Stainless steel BS 970 Grade 413 S19
(4) Disc Seal Ring EPDM
(5) Disc Seal Retaining Ring Stainless steel ASTM 351-CF8M
(6) Body Seat Stainless steel AISI 316/ Nickel weld overlay
micro finished/ integral micro finished saet
with valve body
(7) Shaft Bearing Bronze with EPDM `O’ ring seal
(8) Internal Fasteners Stainless steel SS 316
(9) Nuts, bolts & washers for pipe High tensile steel hot dip galvanized
flanges
(10) Coating Internal and external with electrostatic epoxy
powder coating or liquid food grade epoxy
coating with minimum dry film thickness of
250 microns.
4.5 SLUICE VALVES

4.5.1 Constructional Features
The valves shall be resilient seated, bubble-tight, straight and pocket less body passage, inside stem
screw and electrostatic epoxy powder (EP-P) coated INSIDE AND OUTSIDE. The face to face
dimensions shall conform to provisions of IS 14846/EN 558-1, Basic series F4/BS 5163. All tests
shall be carried out as per these standards.
Valves shall be of non-rising spindle type except for the bypass valves. The spindles shall be of
such lengths that when the valves are closed the bottom ends of the spindles engage fully in the
spindle nuts. The spindle collars of thrust plates shall be concentric and machined, suitable for the
specified test pressure. The thickness and bearing of the nut shoulders shall be adequate to resist
operating thrusts. Spindles shall be greased and supplied with a cap top. Valve shafts shall be a one-
piece unit extending completely through the valve disc, or of the ‘stub shaft’ type, which comprise
two separate shafts inserted into the valve disc hub.
The gate face rings shall be screwed into the gate or securely pegged over the full circumference.
They shall also have renewable channel and shoe linings. The gap between the shoe and channel
shall be limited to 1.5 mm. Valves of 600 mm and above shall be provided with thrust bearing
arrangement for ease of operation.
Valve of diameter 400 mm and above shall be provided with enclosed gear arrangement for ease of
operation. The operation gear of all valves shall be such that they can be opened and closed by one
man against an unbalanced head 15% in excess of the maximum specified rating. Valve and any
gearing shall be such as to permit manual operation in a reasonable time and not exceed a required
rim pull of 200 N.
Valves spindles and hand wheels shall be positioned to give good access for operational personnel.
Hand wheels shall be arranged to turn in a clockwise direction to close the valve, the direction of
rotation for opening and closing being indicated on the hand wheels.
Valves shall have two position marked at the shut end of the scale, first one corresponding to the
position of the gate tangential to the bore of the seating and the second position below the first,
corresponding to the position of the gate as it sits on the seating after moving a further distance
equal to the depth of the seating.
The valves shall be so designed that the gates may be removed without removing the bodies from
the connecting pipe work. The gate guides shall be cast integrally with the valve bodies and be of
adequate strength and of sufficient length to guide the gates throughout their full length of travel. In
the fully open positions, the gates shall be fully withdrawn well clear of the stream and the spindles
shall not protrude into the bores of the valves.
All Sluice valves shall be open end tested.
The Contractor shall provide test certificates for materials, strength and leakage in accordance with
BS 5163 / IS 750.
4.5.2 Materials of Construction
Item Material of Construction
Body, Dome Spheroidal Graphite Iron IS 1865 Gr 400/12 or Gr500/7
Ductile Iron DIN 1693- GGG50
Wedge Spheroidal Graphite Iron IS 1865 Gr 400/12 or Gr500/7
Ductile Iron DIN 1693- GGG50
Rubber lined with EPDM
Spindle / Stem SS: IS 6603 04 Cr17 Ni 12 M0 2 / AISI 316
Bonnet Gasket EPDM
Internal Fasteners Stainless steel SS316
Nuts, bolts & washers for High tensile steel Hot dip galvanized for valves in chambers.
pipe flanges Stainless steel SS316 for buried valves
Coating Internal and external with powder or liquid food grade epoxy
coating with minimum dry film thickness of 250 microns.

1.7 4.6 Kinetic Air Valves

1.8 4.6.1 General
The valves shall be as per the scope of work. The valves shall be capable of exhausting air from
pipe work automatically when been filled. Air being released at a sufficiently higher rate to prevent
the restriction of the Inflow rate. Similarly the valve shall be capable of ventilating pipe work
automatically when being emptied. The air inflow rate being sufficiently high to prevent the
development of a vacuum in pipeline. The valve shall automatically released air accumulating in
pipeline work during normal working condition.
Kinetic Air valves (to be provided on rising mains only) shall be tamper proof & of double orifice
type with a large orifice for ventilation for exhaust of air of the pipeline and small orifice for
release of air under working pressure. The valve shall be suitable for maximum working pressure
in the system. All air valves shall be provided with isolating valve and flanged end connection.
Single Air valves (to be provided in distribution mains only) shall be of large orifice type. The valve
shall be suitable for maximum working pressure in the system.
Air valves shall be designed to prevent premature closure prior to all air having been discharged
from the line. The orifice shall be positively sealed in the close position but float (Ball) shall only be
raised by the liquid and not by mixture of air and liquid. The sealing shall be design to prevent the
floats striking after long period in the close position.
The aperture of valves must be properly designed for which the contractor shall submit design
calculations for necessary approvals before the procurement of valves.
The air valves should be as per AWWA 512-2007/ IS-14845.
All branched outlets, including air valve, Tees will be provided with one ½”BSP coupling duly
plugged for measurement of pressure in due course. The closing plug will be in Stainless Steel (AISI
304 or equivalent) with Hex. Head and will be provided with copper washer for sealing.
Air valves shall thus be designed to automatically operate so that

they will positively open under internal pressure less than atmospheric pressure to emit air
in bulk during pipeline draining operation.
Exhaust air in bulk and positively close as water, under low head, fills the body of the valve
during filling operation;
Not blow shut under high velocity air discharge; and
Exhaust accumulated air under pressure while the pipe is flowing full of water.
All air valves shall be constructed so that internal working parts which may become necessary for
repairs shall be readily accessible, removable and replaceable without use of special tools and
removing the valves from the line.
All flanges will be drilled as per I.S. 1538. The gaskets shall be of nitrile rubber.
4.6.2 Material of Construction
Item Material of Construction
Body and cover Spheroidal Graphite Iron IS 1865 Gr 400/12 or Gr500/7
Ductile Iron DIN 169 GGG50
Seat ring Dexine (Nitrile Rubber) on bronze seat

Low pressure ball SS 304
High pressure ball SS 304
Internal Linkages Stainless steel 304
1.9 4.7 Dual Plate Check Valves

4.7.1 General
The valve shall be of flanged type suitable for mounting on a horizontal pipeline.
Valves shall possess high speed closing characteristics and be designed for minimum slam
condition when closing.
Dual plate check valves shall conform to API 594 and API 598. They shall have resilient sealing.
The spring action shall optimise the equal closing rates of each plate especially when the friction
coefficients are uneven due to one plate resting upon one another. The plates shall not drag on the
seat while opening. The plates shall not vibrate under full or partial flow condition.
The minimum body-wall thickness shall conform to those given in Table 1B of API Standard 594.
The face-to-face dimensions of valves (including valves with ring-joint facings) shall conform to
those mentioned in Table 2B of API Standard 594.
The valve body shall be furnished with a clearly visible cat, forged, machined-in, or die-stamped
arrow to indicate the direction of flow through the valve.
Double Flanged quick closing non slam spring loaded dual plate, generally conforming to API 594
for pressure rating as per requirement at particular section, of size equivalent to the delivery pipe,
shall be provided with following material of construction:
(a) Rating As per requirement at particular section

(b) Body CI to IS:210 Gr. FG 260 for PN 1.0 and
CS/MS for PN 2.0
(c) Plate CS : A 216 Gr WCB
(d) Hinge Pin /Stop Pin SS AISI 431
(e) Springs SS AISI 316
(f) Body & Plate Seat 13% Chromium overlay
(g) Seal EPDM
(h) Retainer Carbon Steel
(i) Body Bearing SS AISC 316
(j) Plate Bearing SS AISC 316

1.10
1.11 4.8 Non-Return Valves
Non-return valves shall double flanged and be installed on the delivery side of the pumps, and shall
be suitable for installation in a horizontal pipeline. Rapid natural closing to be non-slam by suitable
design of spring return mechanism, to ensure that the valve will rapidly fully close the moment
forward flow of the water ceases i.e. on pump shutdown, external counter weights will not be
acceptable. To prevent excessive head loss, larger diameter non-return valves will be provided with
several smaller and lighter flaps in a single bulkhead. In this case stopper to be provided for the
upper door to avoid contact with shell.
Body CI to IS Gr FG 200
Door CI to IS Gr FG 200
Spring Spring steel BS:970
Body ring S S. AISI 304
Door ring SS. AISI 304
Hinge pin AISI 410 /431 Hardened and ground
1.12
1.13 4.9 Dismantling Joint:
1.14 ALL BUTTERFLY, SCOUR VALVES, METERS OR ANY OTHER ONLINE VALVES ETC.
SHALL BE INSTALLED BETWEEN FLANGES WITH A FLEXIBLE MS DISMANTLING
JOINT AT ONE SIDE. THE JOINT MUST ALLOW DISMANTLING OF THE VALVE, METERS
ETC. WITHOUT CAUSING STRESS TO THE JOINTS OF THE ATTACHED PIPES. THE
MINIMUM CLEARANCE OF THE DISMANTLING JOINT SHALL BE FIVE (5) CM. THE
PRESSURE CLASS OF THE DISMANTLING JOINT SHALL BE THE SAME AS THAT OF
THE PIPE. DRAWINGS OF THE DISMANTLING JOINT SHALL BE SUBMITTED TO THE
ENGINEER-IN-CHARGE FOR APPROVAL. THE NUTS AND BOLTS OF THE JOINT
SHALL BE GALVANISED. THE JOINTS SHALL BE PAINTED/COATED AS PER
SPECIFICATION GIVEN FOR EXPOSED PIPES.
4.10 FLANGES
The nominal size and thickness of the flanges shall be as defined for pressure rating 1.0, 1.6
and 2.5 N/mm2 conforming to IS 6392. The pressure rating of the flanges shall be
equivalent to the valve with which they are being installed. The selection of the flange out
of these three ratings shall be based on the design pressure at the place of installation.
Valves shall be flanged and the flange face at right angles to the valve centerline. Backside
of valve flanges shall be machined or spot faced for proper seating of the head and nut.
Flanges shall be machined on faces and edges to IS 6392 or BS 4504. Flange drilling shall
conform to IS 1538.
No new or additional holes shall be drilled on site. Tapped holes are not acceptable in
flanges.

4.11 Nuts, Bolts & Washers

The jointing material such as nuts, bolts, washers, pig lead, rubber packing, etc. shall be provided
by the Contractor.
Nuts and bolts shall be of the best quality bright steel, machined on the shank and under the head
and nut. Studs, bolts and nuts shall be galvanised. Bolts shall be of accurate length so that only one
thread shall show through the nut in the fully tightened conditions. Nuts and bolts shall conform to
IS 1363 and IS 1367.
Washers, locking devices and anti-vibration arrangements shall be provided where necessary.
Where there is a risk of corrosion, bolts, nuts and studs shall be designed so that the maximum
stress does not exceed half the yield stress of the material under any conditions. All bolts, nuts and
screws which are subject to frequent adjustment or removal in the course of maintenance and repair
shall be made of nickel bearing stainless steel.
The Contractor shall supply all holding down, alignment leveling bolts complete with anchorages,
nuts washers and packing required to fix the plant to its foundations, bed plates, frames and other
structural parts.
The Contractor shall procure and keep at site, reasonable excess quantities to cover wastage of
those materials which will be normally subject to waste during erection, commissioning and setting
to work.
Throughout erection, the valves shall be supported properly on wooden sleepers, etc. and shall be
concreted immediately thereafter, as directed. Before the valves are actually fixed, they shall be
cleaned and greased and it should be seen that all parts are in perfect working condition. In the case
of air valves, the Contractor shall take special care of the dexine joints and the ebonite and /or
vulcanite balls until they are fixed in position. They shall be kept immersed in water in suitable
containers.
1.15 4.11 Gear Box For Valves

Gear box must be self locking type, with a continuous indicator. Travelling nut and screw type of
gear boxes are not acceptable
The gear box of quadrant type or traveling nut type must conform to the provisions of AWWA C-
504. The rated torque capability of each operator shall be sufficient to seat, unseat and rigidly hold
in any intermediate position the valve disc it controls under the operating conditions specified.
Operating torque must be as per requirements given in clause 4.3.
The operator must essentially be of self locking type with or without additional spur gear
arrangement to ensure that the effort on hand wheel is limited to the pull specified.
All valve operators shall be equipped with adjustable mechanical stop-limiting devices to prevent
over-travel of the valve disc in the open and closed positions. Either end of the worm shaft must be
provided with needle roller bearing to take on the lateral thrust.

The housing for the gearing must be enclosed and sealed in such a way that there is no leakage of
oil / grease even after long period of un-use and there is no ingress of rain water. Operator for
valves, which are likely to be submerged in water for long period during the rainy season, must be
water tight.
The hand wheels may be provided with extension for easy grip. The hand wheels must have a
provision for locking with a chain and pad lock. All operators when fitted to the valve shaft must
ensure clock wise closing and this must be indicated on the housing. A mechanical indicator is to be
provided to show disc travel and end of travel.
4.11.1 Material of Construction:

Housing and Cover : Same as valve body
Quadrant : SG Gr 500-7
Spur Gears : EN-8 with hardened pinions of EN-19
Worm : EN-19, hardened
Bearings : FAG/SKF/Equivalent
“O” rings : Nitrile rubber
Hand wheel : Steel / SG Iron
4.12 ELECTRIC ACTUATOR
Actuators shall be suitable for the medium, climatic, environmental and pressure conditions of the
system in which they are to be fitted.
Actuators shall be provided with:
a) AC Electric Motor.
b) Reduction gear unit.
c) Torque switch mechanism.
d) Limit switch mechanism complete with set of limit switches and additional two spare
sets for suitable position.
e) Hand wheel, for manual operation.
f) Valve position indicator.
g) Hand-auto lever with suitable locking arrangement.
h) 10 W single phase space heater in the switch compartment.
i) Blinking light throughout the valve operation.
j) Junction box for terminating power and control cables.
k) With additional accessories for integrating with PLC system.
The actuator shall be suitable for operation on 415V, 3 phase, 50 Hz power supply. The motor
winding insulation shall conform to class B as per relevant BS and motor shall be protected by
suitable thermal overload relays. The actuator shall be capable of producing not less than 1.5 times
the required operator torque at the required time cycle of valve operation. The transmission shaft
connecting the actuator to the valve shall be provided with 2 bearings one at actuator end and one at

valve end with universal couplings at suitable places. The required number of switch/contacts shall
be provided to meet requirements for PLC system.
The electric motors shall be of the squirrel cage type as per IS: 325 with insulation to IS 1271 Class
B. The windings shall be impregnated to render them non-hygroscopic and oil resistant. All internal
metal parts shall be painted. The motor shall be rated for 15 minutes. They shall also be suitable for
operating on the specified electric supply and shall satisfactorily open and close the valve under
variations of electric supply specified.
Motor shall be protected by suitable overload protection device.
The reversing contactor starter and local controls shall be integral with the valve actuator. The
starter shall comprise mechanically and electrically interlocked reversing contactors of appropriate
rating fed from a 110 Volt control transformer. The common connection of the contactor coils at the
transformer shall be grounded. HRC cartridge type primary and secondary fuses shall be provided.
Local control shall comprise pushbuttons for open, close and stop operations and a Lockable
Local/Remote/off selector switch. The control schematics shall be subject to approval.
Internal wiring shall be of 650/1100 volt grade PVC insulated stranded copper conductor of
minimum 1.5 sq. mm for control circuits and of minimum 4 sq.mm copper for the power circuit.
Each wire shall be number identified at each end. The terminals shall be of stud type. Cable entries
shall be suitable for PVC insulated/ sheathed, armoured cables. A separate terminal box shall be
provided for the heater. A separate terminal box shall be provided for cabling to control circuits.
The actuator enclosure shall be fully weatherproof and hose proof to IP 67 and shall be fitted with
an anti-condensation heater, which shall be switched off when the motor is running.
The torque switch mechanism shall function as follows to stop the motor on closing or opening of
the valve, or upon actuation by the torque when the valve disc is restricted in its attempt to open or
close.
The torque switch in the closing direction shall interrupt the control circuit if mechanical overload
occurs during the closing cycle or when the valve is fully closed.
The torque switch in the opening direction shall interrupt the control circuit if mechanical overload
occurs during the opening cycle or when the valve is fully open.
The mechanism shall facilitate adjustment of the torque at which the switches are required to
operate.
Non-adjustable limit switches shall stop the motor and give indication when the disc has attained
the fully open or closed position.
The adjustable limit switches shall have control rated 2A, 48V DC for specified system interlock, at
the desired value position in both the opening and closing directions.
Motor operators shall be provided with clearly visible local valve position indicators mounted on
the operator assembly to give an indication whether the valve is fully open, fully closed or in an
intermediate position.
Settings and emergency operation shall be possible with the use of a hand wheel. The Hand wheel
shall be of stainless steel and the drive mechanically independent of the motor drive and any
gearing should limit the operating torque at the hand wheel to less than 15 kg and be such as to
permit emergency manual operation in a reasonable time. During electric operation the hand wheel
shall not rotate.
Actuators shall be adjusted at the manufacturer’s works to ensure that they provide the correct,
fully, open position and fully closed position. Mechanical adjustable stops shall be provided to
prevent over-travel of the valve in the open and closed positions.
4.13 INSPECTION AND TESTS

The following Inspection and Testing procedures shall be carried out for all the equipment as
applicable:
(i) Visual Inspection.

(ii) Material Certificates for all the specified material shall be furnished.
(iii) Dimension Checking.
(iv) Hydrostatic / Leak testing for all pressure parts, Pneumatic Leak Test wherever
applicable.
(v) Operation check.
The Contractor shall maintain proper identification of all materials used, along with reports for all
internal / stage inspection work carried out, based on the specific job requirement and or based on
the datasheets / drawings / specifications.
Requirement of shop tests for Valves are listed below:
a) During testing there shall be no visible evidence of structural damage to any of the valve
components.
b) Each valve operated actuator shall be shop-operated at least three times from the fully closed to
the fully opened position, and the reverse, under no-flow condition, to demonstrate that
complete assembly is workable.
The tests mentioned below shall be hold points and to be witnessed by a duty authorized
representative of the department and/or third party inspection agency:
The following tests shall be carried out for butterfly valves in line with IS 13095:
a. Seat leakage test. Seat test shall be carried out in each direction and the valve shall be drop
tight.
b. Body hydrostatic test
c. Disc strength test at body test pressure in each direction.
d. Valve operation with and without actuator
The following tests shall be carried out for sluice valves in line with IS 14846:
a. Seat leakage test
b. Body hydrostatic test
c. Valve operation
The material certificates, physical properties, heat treatments and shop test certificates of valve body, disc,
wedge and shaft shall be duly approved and certified by the manufacturer and these shall be subject
to review & approval by the Engineer.
Notwithstanding the above requirement for inspection and quality control, the following inspection and
quality control measures shall be carried out by manufacturer:
a. Magnetic particle tests on body and disc/door.
b. Dye penetration tests on metal seats.
c. Ultrasonic tests on shafts.
d. Overload Torque Test shall be carried out on the gear boxes of the valves. The test shall be
carried out by applying 1.5 times the rated torque.

5.0 SPECIFICATIONS FOR CIVIL WORKS

5.1 CIVIL AND B UILDING WORKS
5.1.1 General
This part of the specification covers the design loads to be considered specifications of material and
workmanship for the civil works. Material used and workmanship for the civil works of pump
house, offices, residential quarters, campus development, civil works associated with pipeline
laying etc. to be done under the contract will adhere to the provisions laid down in this chapter.
For materials used other than those specified, the material must conform to the requirement of
respective Indian Standards. The contractor shall get prior approval of the materials proposed to be
used under the contract as per the provisions of Special Conditions of Contract, from the Engineer-
in-Charge.
5.1.2 Design Considerations:
The contractor shall be responsible for the safety of structures, correctness of design and drawings,
even after the approval of the same by Engineer-in-Charge. Complete detailed design calculations
of foundations and superstructure together with general arrangement drawings and explanatory
sketches shall be submitted to the Engineer-in-charge. Separate calculations for foundations or
superstructures submitted independent of each other shall be deemed to be incomplete and will not
be accepted by the Engineer-in-charge.
The design considerations described hereunder establish the minimum basic requirements of plain
and reinforced concrete structures, masonry structures and structural steel works. However, any
particular structure shall be designed for the satisfactory performance of the functions for which the
same is being constructed.
5.1.3 Design Standards
All designs shall be based on the latest Indian Standard (I.S.) Specifications or Codes of Practice
unless otherwise specified. The design standards adopted shall follow the best modern engineering
practice in the field based on any other international standard or specialist literature subject to such
standard reference or extract of such literature in the English language being supplied to and
approved by the Engineer-in-charge. In case of any variation or contradiction between the
provisions of the I.S. Standards or Codes and the specifications given along with the submitted
tender document, the provision given in this specification shall be followed.
5.1.4 Design Life
The design life of all structures and buildings shall be 60 years.
5.1.5 Design Loading
All buildings and structures shall be designed to resist the worst combination of the following
loads/ stresses under test and working conditions; these include dead load, live load, wind load,
seismic load, stresses due to temperature changes, shrinkage and creep in materials, dynamic loads:

5.1.5.1 Dead Load
This shall comprise all permanent construction including walls, floors, roofs, partitions, stairways,
fixed service equipments and other items of machinery. In estimating the loads of process
equipment all fixtures and attached piping shall be included.
5.1.5.2 Live Load
Live loads shall be in general as per I.S. 875. However, the following minimum loads shall be
considered in the design of structures:
i) 2.00 kN/m2
Live load on roofs
ii) Live load on floors supporting equipment such as pumps, 10.00 kN/m2
blowers, compressors, valves etc.
Live load on all other floors walkways, stairways and 5.00 kN/m2
Iii)
platforms
In the absence of any suitable provisions for live loads in I.S. Codes or as given above for any
particular type of floor or structure, assumptions made must receive the approval of the Engineer-
in-charge prior to starting the design work. Apart from the specified live loads or any other load due
to material stored, any other equipment load or possible overloading during maintenance or
erection/ construction shall be considered and shall be partial or full whichever causes the most
critical condition.
5.1.5.3 Wind Load
Wind loads shall be as per I.S. 875. Part 3
5.1.5.4 Earthquake Load
This shall be computed as per I.S. 1893 taking into consideration soil foundation system,
importance factor appropriate to the type of structure basic horizontal seismic coefficient/ seismic
zone factor & average acceleration coefficient.
5.1.5.5 Dynamic Load
Dynamic loads due to working of plant items such as pumps, blowers, compressors, switch gears,
traveling cranes, etc. shall be considered in the design of structures
5.1.6 Joints
Movement joints such as expansion joints, complete contraction joints, partial contraction joints
and sliding joints shall be designed to suit the structure. However contraction joints shall be
provided at specified locations spaced not more than 7.5 m in both right angle directions for walls
and rafts.
Expansion joints of suitable gap at suitable intervals not more than 40 m shall be provided in walls,
floors and roof slabs. No expansion joint in water retaining structure shall be allowed.
The positions of construction joints should be specified by the designer & indicated on the
drawings. If there is a need on site to revise any specified position or to have additional joints, the
proposed positions should be agreed with the designer.

The concrete at the joint should be bounded with that subsequently placed against it, without
provision for relative movement between the two concrete should not be allowed to run to a feather
edge & vertical joints should be formed against stop edges.
Expansion joints for non liquid retaining structures shall be provided as per IS 3414.
5.1.7 Design Conditions For Underground Or Partly Underground Liquid Retaining

Structures
All underground or partly underground liquid containing structures shall be designed for the
following conditions:
1 liquid depth up to full height of wall : no relief due to soil pressure from outside to be
considered;
2 structure empty (i.e. empty of liquid, any material, etc.) : full earth pressure and surcharge
pressure wherever applicable, to be considered;
3 partition wall between two compartments : to be designed as one compartment empty and other
full;
4 structures shall be designed for uplift in empty conditions with the water table as indicated in
geo-technical report & due care should be taken for seasonal variation on higher side.
5 walls shall be designed under operating conditions to resist earthquake forces from earth
pressure mobilization and dynamic water loads;
6 Underground or partially underground structures shall also be checked against stresses
developed due to any combination of full and empty compartments with appropriate
ground/uplift pressures from below to base slab. The design shall be such that the minimum
gravity weight exceeds the uplift pressure at least by 20%.
5.1.8 Foundations
1 The minimum depth of foundations for all structures, equipments, buildings and frame
foundations and load bearing walls shall be as per IS 1904 & as per site conditions.
2 Bearing capacity of soil shall be determined as per IS : 6403.
3 Care shall be taken to avoid the foundations of adjacent buildings or structure
foundations, either existing or not within the scope of this contract. Suitable
adjustments in depth, location and sizes may have to be made depending on site
conditions. No extra claims for such adjustments shall be accepted by the Employer.
4 A structure subjected to groundwater pressure shall be designed to resist floatation.
The dead weight of empty structure shall provide a factor of safety of 1.2 against uplift
during construction and service.
5 Where there is level difference between the natural ground level and the foundations
of structure or floor slabs, this difference shall be filled up in the following ways.
6 In case of non-liquid retaining structures the natural top soil shall be removed till a firm
strata is reached (minimum depth of soil removed shall be 500 mm) and the level
difference shall be made up by compacted backfill as per specifications. However the
thickness of each layer shall not exceed 150 mm. The area of backfilling for floor slabs
shall be confined to prevent soil from slipping out during compaction.
7 In case of liquid retaining structures, the natural top soil shall be removed as described
above and the level difference shall be made up with Plain Cement Concrete not
weaker than M 10.
8 If pile foundations are used, the contractor shall conduct the initial routine test as per
IS 2911 at his own cost, to determine the safe load bearing capacity of piles.
5.1.9 Design Requirements For Concrete Structures
The following are the design requirements for all reinforced or plain concrete structures.
1. All blinding and leveling concrete shall be a minimum 100 mm thick in concrete grade M10
unless otherwise specified.
Liquid Retaining Structures: All structural reinforced concrete shall be of a minimum M25
grade with a maximum 40 mm aggregate size for footings and base slabs and with a maximum
20 mm aggregate size for all other structural members.
2. The reinforced concrete for water retaining structures shall have a minimum cement content of
300 kg/m3 with a maximum 20 mm size aggregate and 330 kg/m3 with a maximum 40 mm
size aggregate.
3. The minimum reinforcement in walls, floors and roofs in each of two directions of right angles
within each surface zone shall be as per 7.1 of IS: 3370 part 2.
4. The nominal cover of concrete for all steel, including stirrups, links, sheathing and spacers shall
be as per 7.2 of IS: 3370 Part 2.
5. All buildings shall be provided with damp proofing for basement and floors and water proofing
for roofs.
6. Any structure or pipeline crossing below roads shall be designed for Class AA of IRC loading.
7. The bridges and bridge supporting structures shall be designed to safely withstand the loadings
such as loads and torque transmitted through scrapper blades, motor etc. depending on the
arrangement offered.
8. All pipes and conduits laid below the structural plinth and road works shall be embedded in
reinforced concrete of grade M20 of minimum thickness 150 mm.
9. Suitable admixtures may be used with the approval of engineer in charge.
10. Construction of floors and walls of Liquid Retaining structures shall be as per 9.4 & 9.5 of IS :
3370 Part 1.
The following minimum thicknesses shall be used for different reinforced concrete members,
irrespective of design thicknesses.
(i) Walls for liquid retaining structures 150 mm
(ii) Roof slabs for liquid retaining structures (other than flat slabs) 150 mm
(iii) Bottom slabs including roof slabs for liquid retaining structures 200 mm
(iv) Floor slabs including roof slabs, walkways, canopy slabs 100 mm
(v) Wall of cables/ pipe trenches, underground pits etc. 150 mm
(vi) Column footings 300 mm
(vii) Parapets, Chajja 100 mm
(viii) Pre-Cast trench cover 75 mm
Design requirement of RCC liquid retaining structures/grade of concrete/minimum cement content
and for other provisions, these shall be governed by the provisions of IS 456 and IS 3370,
whichever is more stringent.

5.2 Materials & Standards
The term “materials” shall mean all materials, goods and articles of every kind whether raw,
processed or manufactured and equipment and plant of every kind to be supplied by the Contractor
for incorporation in the Works.
Except as may be otherwise specified for particular parts of the works the provision of clauses in
“Materials and Workmanship” shall apply to materials and workmanship for any part of the works.
All materials shall be new and of the kinds and qualities described in the Contract and shall be at
least equal to approved samples.
Materials and workmanship shall comply with the relevant Indian Standards (with amendments)
current on the date of submission of the tender.
Where the relevant standard provides for the furnishing of a certificate to the Engineer-in-charge, at
his request, stating that the materials supplied comply in all respects with the standard, the
Contractor shall obtain the certificates and forward it to the Engineer-in-charge.
The specifications, standards and codes listed below are considered to be part of this Bid
specification. All standards, specifications, codes of practices referred to herein shall be the latest
editions including all applicable official amendments and revisions.
In case of discrepancy between two standards the provisions more stringent shall be followed. In
case of discrepancy between the Bid Specification and the Standards referred to herein, the Bid
Specification shall govern.
IS No. Title
Construction Planning and Storage of Materials
4082 : Recommendation on stacking and storage of construction materials at site
(first revision)
7969 : Safety code for handling and storage of building materials
EARTHWORK
883 : Design of structural timber in building - Code of practice (third revision)
1498 Classification and identification of soils for general engineering purposes
(first revision) (Amendments 2) (Reaffirmed)
2682 : 1984 Chlordane emulsifiable concentrates (second revision) (Amendment 1)
(Reaffirmed 1994)
3764: 1992 Excavation work - Code of safety (first revision)
4081 Safety code for blasting and related drilling operations
6313 (Part 2) Code of practice for anti-termite measures in buildings: Part 2
Preconstructional chemical treatment measures (Reaffirmed)
FOUNDATIONS
269 : 33 grade ordinary Portland cement.
432 (Part 1) Mild steel and medium tensile steel bars and hard-drawn steel wire for
concrete reinforcement: Part 1 Mild steel and medium tensile steel bars (third
revision)
455 Portland slag cement
456 Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete (Reaffirmed 2000)
1080 : 1986 Code of practice for design and construction of shallow foundations on soils
(other than raft, ring and shell)
1489 (Part 1) Portland pozzolana cement: Part 1 Fly ash based
1489 (Part 2) Portland pozzolana cement: Part 2 Calcined clay based
1786 High strength deformed steel bars and wires for concrete reinforcement

1904 Code of practice for design and construction of foundations in soils: General
requirements
2062 Steel for general structural purposes
2950 (Part 1) Code of practice for design and construction of raft foundations: Part 1
Design
2974 (Part 1) Code of practice for design and construction of machine foundations: Part 1
Foundations for reciprocating type machines
Foundations for impact type machines (hammer foundations)
2974 (Part 3) Design and construction of machine foundations - Code of practice: Part 3
Foundations for rotary type machines (medium and high frequency)
Foundations for rotary type machines of low frequency
Foundation for impact machines other than hammers (forging and stamping
press, pig breakers, drop crusher and jolter)
3629 Specification for structural timber in building (first revision) (Reaffirmed
1991)
4091 : 1979 Code of practice for design and construction of foundations for transmission
line towers and poles (first revision) (Reaffirmed 1987)
6403 Code of practice for determination of bearing capacity of shallow
foundations.
6909 Specification for supersulphated cement
8009 (Part 1) Code of practice for calculation of settlement of foundations: Part 1 Shallow
foundations subject to symmetrical static vertical loads
8009 (Part 2) Code of practice for calculation of settlement of foundations: Part 2 Deep
foundations subjected to symmetrical static vertical loading.
4138 Safety code for working in compressed air.
8041 Rapid hardening Portland cement
9456: 1980 Code of practice for design and construction of conical and hyperbolic
paraboloidal types of shell foundations.
19556 Code of practice for design and construction of diaphragm walls.
11089 Code of practice for design and construction of ring foundation
12269 53 grade ordinary Portland cement.
13094 Guidelines for selection of ground improvement techniques for foundation in
weak soils.
13301 Guidelines for vibration isolation for machine foundations
SP 36 (Part 2) Compendium of Indian Standards on soil engineering : Part 2 Field testing
:1988
MASONRY
Part 1 Mortars
269 33 grade ordinary Portland cement
383 Coarse and fine aggregates from natural sources for concrete
456 Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete
1344 Calcined clay pozzolana
2116 Stand for masonry mortars
2250 Code of practice for preparation and use of masonry mortars

2720 (Parts 1 to Methods of test for soils
41)
3812 Fly ash for use as pozzolana and admixture
6452 Specification for high alumina cement for structural use
8043 Hydrophobic Portland cement
12600 Low heat Portland cement
SP 20 (S &T) : Handbook on masonry design and construction
SP 21 (S &T) Summaries of Indian Standards for building materials
Part 2 Brickwork
2645 Integral cement waterproofing compounds
5454 Methods of sampling of clay building bricks
4014 Part 1 & Code of practice for steel tubular scaffolding
2
8042 White Portland cement
9103 Admixture for concrete
SP 20 (S &T) Handbook on masonry design and construction
SP 21 (S &T) Summaries of Indian Standards for building materials
1077 Common burnt clay building bricks
2212 Code of practice for brick work
3696 (Part 1) Safety code of scaffolds and ladders: Part 1 Scaffolds
4014 (Part 2) Code of practice for steel tabular scaffolding: Part 2 Safety regulations for
scaffolding
SP 25 (S & T) Handbook on caused and prevention of cracks in building
Stonework
1123 Method of identification of natural building stones
1127 Recommendations for dimensions and workmanship of natural building
stones for masonry work
1128 Limestone (slab and tiles)
1129 Recommendation for dressing of natural building stones
1130 Marble (blocks, slabs and tiles)

1597 (Part 1) Code of practice for construction of stone masonry: Part 1 Rubble stone
masonry
1597 (Part 2) Code of practice for construction of stone masonry: Part 2 Ashlar masonry
1905 Code of practice for structural use of un-reinforced masonry
2250 Code of practice for preparation and use of masonry mortars
3316 Specification for structural granite
3622 Specification for sandstone (slab and tiles)
3696 (Part 1) Safety code of scaffolds and ladders: Part 1 Scaffolds
4101 (Part 1) Code of practice for external facing and veneers: Part 1 Stone facing
12440 Pre-cast concrete stone masonry blocks
SP 20 (S & T) Handbook on masonry design and construction
SP 21 (S & T) Summary of Indian Standards for building materials
Plain And Reinforced Concrete
383 Coarse and fine aggregates from natural resources for concrete
432 Mild steel and medium tensile steel bars and hard drawn steel wire for
(Part 1 & 2) concrete reinforcement: Part 1 Mild steel and medium tensile steel bars. Part
2 Hard drawn steel wire
516 Method of test for strength of concrete
712 Building limes
875 (Part 1) Code of practice for design loads (other than earthquake) for buildings and
structures: Part 1 Dead loads -Unit weights of building material and stored
materials
structures: Part 2 Imposed loads
structures: Part 3 Wind loads
structures: Part 4 Snow loads
structures: Part 5 Special loads and load combinations
650 Standard sand for testing of cement
3085 Method of test for permeability of cement mortar & concrete
9284 Method of test for abrasion resistance of concrete
5816 Method of test for splitting tensile strength of concrete cylinders
8142 Method of test for determining setting time of concrete by penetration
resistance
12600 Low heat Portland cement masonry cement
3466 Masonry cement
3558 Code of practice immersion Vibrator for consolidating concrete
13620 Fusion bonded epoxy coated reinforcing bars
1343 Code of practice for Prestressed concrete
883 Design of structural timber in building - Code of practice
1199 Methods of sampling and analysis of concrete


1566 Hard-drawn steel wire fabric for concrete reinforcement
1786 High strength deformed steel bars and wires for concrete reinforcement
1791 Batch type concrete mixers
1946 Code of practice for use of fixing devices in walls, ceilings and floors of solid
construction
2062 Steel and general structural purposes
2386 (Part 1) Methods of test for aggregates for concrete: Part 1 Particle size and shape
2386 (Part 2) Methods of test for aggregates for concrete: Part 2 Estimation of deleterious
materials and organic impurities
2386 (Part 3) Methods of test for aggregates for concrete: Part 3 Specific gravity, density,
voids, absorption and bulking
2386 (Part 4) Methods of test for aggregates for concrete: Part 4 Mechanical properties
2386 (Part 5) Methods of test for aggregates for concrete: Part 5 Soundness
2386 (Part 6) Methods of test for aggregates for concrete: Part 6 Measuring mortar making
properties of fine aggregates
2386 (Part 7) Methods of test for aggregates for concrete: Part 7 Alkali aggregate reactivity
2386 (Part 8) Methods of test for aggregates for concrete: Part 8 Petrographic examination
2502 Code of practice for bending and fixing of bars for concrete reinforcement
2505 Concrete vibrators - Immersion type - General requirements
2506 General requirements for screed board concrete vibrators
2514 Concrete vibrating tables
2751 Recommended practice for welding of mild steel plain and deformed bars for
reinforced construction
3025 Methods of sampling and test (physical and chemical) for water used in
industry
3036 Laying lime concrete for a waterproofed roof finish - Code of practice
4031 (Part 1) Methods of physical tests for hydraulic cement: Part 1 Determination of
fineness by dry sieving
4098 Lime-pozzolana mixture (first revision)
4656 Form vibrators for concrete
4925 Concrete batching and mixing plant
4926 Ready mixed concrete
4990 Plywood for concrete shuttering work
7861 (Part 1) Code of practice for extreme weather concreting: Part 1 Recommended
practice for hot weather concreting
7861 (Part 2) Code of practice for extreme weather concreting: Part 2 Recommended
practice for cold weather concreting
9012 Recommended practice for Concreting

9013 Method of making, curing and determining compressive strength of

accelerated cured concrete test specimens
9103 Admixtures for concrete
10262 Recommended guidelines for concrete mix design
12269 53 Grade ordinary Portland Cement
13330 Sulphate resisting Portland Cement
13311 (Part 1) Non-destructive testing of concrete - Methods of test: Part 1 Ultrasonic pulse
velocity
13311 (Part 2) Non-destructive testing of concrete - Methods of test: Part 2 Rebound
hammer
SP 23 (S & T) Handbook on concrete mixes (based on Indian Standards)
SP 24 (S & T) Explanatory handbook on Indian Standard Code for plain and reinforced
concrete
SP 33 (S & T) Handbook on timber engineering
SP 34 (S & T) Handbook on concrete reinforcement and detailing
Anti-Termite Measures
6313 (Part 1) Code of practice for anti-termite measures in buildings: Part 1 Constructional
measures
6313 (Part 2) Code of practice for anti-termite measures in buildings: Part 2 Pre-
constructional chemical treatment measures (first revision)(Amendments 3)
Door and Windows (Wood And Metal)
208 Door handles
303 Plywood for general purposes
399 Classification of commercial timbers and their zonal distribution
401 Code of practice for preservation of timber
419 Putty, for use on window frames
1003 (Part 1) Timber panelled and glazed shutters: Part 1 Door shutters
1003 (Part 2) Timber panelled and glazed shutters: Part 2 Window and ventilator shutters
1038 Steel doors, windows and ventilators
1081 Code of practice for fixing and glazing of metal (steel and aluminium) doors,
windows and ventilators
1328 Veneered decorative plywood
1658 Fibre hardboards
1659 Block boards
2191 (Part 1) Wooden flush door shutters (cellular and hollow core type): Part 1 Plywood
face panels
2191 (Part 2) Wooden flush door shutters (cellular and hollow core type): Part 2 Particle
board and hard board face panels
2202 (Part 1) Wooden flush door shutters (solid core type): Part 1 Plywood face panels
2202 (Part 2) Wooden flush door shutters (solid core type): Part 2 Particle board and hard
board face panels
2553 (Part 1) Safety glass: Part 1 General purpose
2835 Flat transparent sheet glass
3087 Wood particle boards (medium density) for general purposes
3097 Veneered particle boards
3129 Low density particle boards
3348 Specification for Fibre insulation boards

3478 Specification for high density wood particle boards

3548 Code of practice for glazing in building
10521 Collapsible gates
6248 Metal rolling shutters & grills
10451 Steel sliding shutters
1361 Steel windows for industrial buildings, ventilation blinds for windows
4021 Timber door, window and ventilator frames
1826 Venation blinds for windows
1948 Aluminum doors, windows and ventilators
4020 Door shutters, method of test
(Parts 1-16)
4351 Specification for steel door frames
4913 Code of practice for selection, installation and maintenance of timber doors
and windows
4962 Specification for wooden side sliding doors
5187 Flush bolts
5437 Figured, rolled and wired glass
5509 Fire retardant plywood
5539 Specification for preservative treated plywood
6198 Legged, braced and battened timber door shutters
6248 Specification for metal rolling shutters and rolling grills
6534 Guiding principles of grading and inspection of timber
6701 Tungsten filament miscellaneous electric lamps
7316 Decorative plywood using plurality of veneers for decorative faces
7452 Hot-rolled steel sections for doors, windows and ventilators
10439 Code of practice for patent glazing
10451 Steel sliding shutters
10521 Collapsible gates
10701 Structural plywood
11433 (Part 1) One part grade polysulphide base joints sealant: Part 1 General requirements
11433 (Part 2) One part grade polysulphide base joints sealant: Part 2 Methods of test
12896 Classification of Indian timbers for door and window shutters and frames
SP 21 (S & T) Summarise of Indian Standards for building materials
SP 33 (S & T) Handbook on timber engineering
Floors and Floor Coverings
77 Linseed oil, boiled for paints
455 Portland stag cement
533 Gum spirit of turpentine (oil of turpentine)
651 Salt glazed stoneware pipes and fittings
653 Linoleum sheets and tiles
657 Materials for use in the manufacture of magnesium oxychloride flooring
compositions
658 Code of practice for magnesium oxychloride composition floors
712 Building limes

723 Steel countersunk head wire nails
809 Rubber flooring materials for general purposes
1195 Bitumen mastic for flooring
1196 Code of practice for laying bitumen mastic flooring
1197 Code of practice for laying of rubber floors
1198 Code of practice for laying, fixing and maintenance of linoleum floor
1237 Cement concrete flooring tiles
1322 Bitumen felts for waterproofing and damp-proofing
1443 Code of practice for laying and finishing of cement concrete flooring tiles
1580 Bituminous compounds for water proofing and caulking purposes
1609 Code of practice for laying damp-proofing treatment using bitumen felts
1661 Code of practice for application of cement and cement-lime plaster finishes
2114 Code of practice for laying in-situ terrazzo floor finish
2116 Sand for masonry mortars
2180 Heavy duty burnt clay building bricks
2386 (Part 4) Methods of test for aggregates for concrete: Part 4 Mechanical properties
2571 Code of practice for laying in-situ cement concrete flooring
3384 Specification for bitumen primer for use in waterproofing and damp proofing
3414 Code of practice for design and installation of joints in buildings
3461 Specification for PVC - asbestos floor tiles
3462 Specification for unbacked flexible PVC flooring
3502 Steel Chequered plates
3583 Specification of burnt clay paving bricks
3622 Specification for sandstone (slabs and tiles)
3629 Specification for structural timber in building
3670 Code of practice for construction of timber floors
4441 Code of practice for use of silicate type chemical resistant mortars
4442 Code of practice for use of sulphur type chemical resistant mortars
4443 Code of practice for use of resin type chemical resistant mortars
4456 (Part 1) Methods of test for chemical resistant mortars - Part 1 Silicate type and resin
type
4456 (Part 2) Methods of test for chemical resistant mortars - Part 2 Sulphur type
4457 Ceramic unglazed vitreous acid resisting tile
4631 Code of practice for laying of epoxy resin floor toppings
4832 (Part 1) Specification for chemical resistant mortars: Part 1 Silicate type
4832 (Part 2) Specification for chemical resistant mortars: Part 2 Resin type
4832 (Part 3) Specification for chemical resistant mortars: Part 3 Sulphur type
4860 Acid resistant bricks
4971 Recommendations for selection of industrial floor finishes
5318 Code of practice for laying of flexible PVC sheet and tile flooring
5389 Code of practice for laying of hardwood parquet and wood block floors
5491 Code of practice for laying of in-situ granolithic concrete flooring topping
5760 Compressed argon
5766 Code of practice for laying of burnt clays brick flooring

7193 Glass fibre base coaltar pitch and bitumen felts
8374 Bitumen mastic, anti-static and electrically conducting grade
9077 Code of practice for corrosion protection of steel reinforcement in RB and
RCC construction
9197 Epoxy resin, hardness and epoxy resin compositions for floor toppings
9472 Code of practice for laying mosaic parquet flooring
10440 Code of practice for construction of RB and RBC floors and roofs
Wall and Ceiling Finishes and Coverings and Walling
451 Technical supply conditions for wood screws
459 Corrugated and semi-corrugated asbestos cement sheets
710 Marine plywood
712 Building limes
733 Wrought aluminium and aluminum alloy bars, rods and sections for general
engineering purposes
737 Wrought aluminium and aluminum alloy sheet and strip for general
engineering purposes
777 Glazed earthenware wall tiles
883 Design of structural timber in building - Code of Practice
1130 Marble (blocks, slabs and tiles)
1237 Cement concrete flooring tiles
1328 Veneered decorative plywood
1414 Code of practice for fixing wall covering
1542 Sand of plaster
1635 Code of practice for field slaking of building lime and preparation of putty
1658 Fibre hardboards
1659 Block boards
1661 Code of practice for application of cement and cement-lime plaster finishes
1946 Code of practice for use of fixing devices in walls, ceilings and floors of solid
construction
2095 Gypsum plaster boards
2098 Asbestos cement building boards
2114 Code of practice for laying in-situ terrazo floor finish
2116 Sand for masonry mortar
2185 (Part 1) Concrete masonry units : Part 1 Hollow and solid concrete blocks
2185 (Part 2) Concrete masonry units : Part 2 Hollow and solid light weight concrete blocks
2185 (Part 3) Concrete masonry units : Part 3 Autoclaved cellular aerated concrete blocks
2402 Code of practice for external rendered finishes
2441 Code of practice for fixing ceiling covering
2547 (Part 1) Gypsum building plaster : Part 1 Excluding premixed lightweight plaster
2547 (Part 2) Gypsum building plaster : Part 2 Premixed lightweight plaster
2691 Burnt clay facing bricks
2818 Indian hessian : Part 1 General
2849 Specification for non-load bearing gypsum partition blocks
3087 Wood particle boards (medium density) for general purposes
3097 Veneered particle boards
3129 Low density particle boards
3348 Specification for fibre insulation boards
3466 Specification for masonry cement
3478 Specification for high density wood particle boards
3630 Code of practice for construction of non-load bearing gypsum block partitions
3677 Unbonded rock and slag wool for thermal insulation
4101 (Part 1) Code of practice for external facing and veneers: Part 1 Stone facing
4101 (Part 2) Code of practice for external facing and veneers: Part 2 Cement Concrete
facing
4101 (Part 3) Code of practice for external facing and veneers: Part 3 Wall tiling and
mosaics
4407 Code of practice for reed walling
4671 Expanded polystyrene for thermal insulation purposes
5390 Code of practice for construction of timber ceiling
5509 Fire retardant plywood
6730 Felt nails
6738 Panel pins and lost head nails
6760 Slotted countersunk head wood screws
7316 Decorative plywood using plurality of veneers for decorative faces
12727 Code of practice for no fines cast in-situ cement concrete
Roofs and Roofing
158 Ready mixed paint, brushing, bituminous, black lead-free, acid alkali and heat
resisting
217 Cutback bitumen
277 Galvanized steel sheet (plain and corrugated)
280 Mild Steel wire for general engineering
432 (Part 1) Mild steel and medium tensile steel bars and hard-drawn steel wire for
concrete reinforcement: Part 1 Mild steel and medium tensile steel bars
451 Technical supply conditions for wood screws
455 Portland stag cement
459 Corrugated and semi-corrugated asbestos cement sheets
725 Copper wire nails
730 Hook bolts for corrugated sheet roofing
805 Code of practice for use of steel in gravity water tanks
808 Dimensions for hot-rolled steel beam, column channel and angle sections
883 Design of structural timber in building - Code of Practice
1120 Coach screws
1199 Methods of sampling and analysis of concrete
1254 Corrugated aluminium sheet
1343 Code of practice for Prestressed concrete
2098 Asbestos cement building boards
2119 Code of practice for construction of brick-cum-concrete composite (Madras
terrace) floor or roof
2204 Code of practice for construction of reinforced concrete shell roof
2527 Code of practice for fixing rainwater gutters and down pipes for roof drainage
2690 (Part 1) Burnt clay flat terracing tiles: Part 1 Machine made
2690 (Part 2) Burnt clay flat terracing tiles: Part 2 Hand made
3007 (Part 1) Code of practice for laying of asbestos cement sheets: Part 1 Corrugated
sheets
3007 (Part 2) Code of practice for laying of asbestos cement sheets: Part 2 Semi-corrugated
sheets
6061 (Part 1) Code of practice for construction of floor and roof with joints and filler
blocks : Part 1 with hollow concrete filler blocks
blocks : Part 2 with hollow clay filler blocks
blocks : Part 3 Precast hollow clay blocks joints and hollow clay filler blocks
blocks : Part 4 With precast hollow clay blocks slab panels
6332 Code of practice for construction of floor and roofs using precast doubly
curved shell units
8869 Washers for corrugated sheet roofing
12093 Code of practice for laying and fixing of sloped roof coverings using plain
and corrugated galvanized steel sheet (ISO 6589-1983)
12506 Code of practice for improved thatching of roof with rot and fire retardant
treatment
Damp - Proofing and Waterproofing
73 Paving bitumen
702 Industrial bitumen
1195 Bitumen mastic for flooring
1203 Determination of penetration
1346 Code of practice for waterproofing of roofs with bitumen felts
1580 Bituminous compounds for water proofing and caulking purposes

1609 Code of practice for laying damp-proofing treatment using bitumen felts
1635 Code of practice for field slaking of building lime and preparation of putty
1834 Hot applied sealing compound for joint in concrete
2116 Sand for masonry mortars
2508 Low density polyethylene films
2527 Code of practice for fixing rainwater gutters and down pipes for roof drainage
2541 Code of practice for preparation and use of lime concrete
2645 Integral cement water proofing compounds
2690 (Part 1) Burnt clay flat terracing tiles: Part 1 Machine made
2690 (Part 2) Burnt clay flat terracing tiles: Part 2 Hand made
3036:1992 Laying lime concrete for a waterproofed roof finish
3037 Bitumen mastic for use in waterproofing of roofs
3067 Code of practice for general design details and preparatory work for damp-
proofing and waterproofing of buildings
3370 (Part 1) Code of practice for concrete structures for the storage of liquids: Part 1
General Requirements
4098 Lime-pozzolana mixture
4365 Code of practice for application of bitumen mastic for water proofing of roofs
5871 Bitumen mastic for tanking and damp-proofing
6494 Code of practice for waterproofing of underground water reservoirs and
swimming pools
7193 Glass fibre base coaltar pitch and bitumen felts
7198 Code of practice for damp-proofing using bitumen mastic
7290 Recommendations for use of polyethylene film for waterproofing of roofs
9759 Guidelines for dewatering during construction
9918 Code of practice for application of silicone based water repellent
12027 Silicone-based water repellents
12054 Code of practice for application of silicone based water repellent
13182 Waterproofing and damp-proofing of wet areas in building Recommendations
Joints in Buildings (Control of Cracks In Buildings)
1834 Hot applied sealing compound for joint in concrete
1838 (Part 1) Performed fillers for expansion joint in concrete pavements and structures
(non extruding and resilient type): Part 1 Bitumen impregnated fibre
1838 (Part 2) Performed fillers for expansion joint in concrete pavements and structures
(non extruding and resilient type): Part 2 CNSL Aldehyde resin and coconut
pith
3414 Code of practice for design and installation of joints in buildings
10958 General check list of functions of joints in buildings
11433 (Part 1) One part grade polysulphide based joint sealant: Part 1 General Requirements
11817 Classification of joints in buildings for accommodation of dimensional
deviations during construction
11818 Method of test for laboratory determination of air permeability of joints in
buildings
12118 (Part 1) Two parts polysulphide based sealant: Part 1 General requirements
White Washing, Colour Washing and Painting of Masonry, Concrete and
Plaster Surfaces (Calcareous Surfaces)
44 Iron oxide pigments for paints

55 Ultramarine blue for paints

109 Ready mixed paint, brushing, priming, plaster, to Indian Standard Colour No.
361 and 631 White and off white
133 Enamel, interior: (a) undercoating, (b) finishing
resisting
168 Ready mixed paint, air drying, for general purpose
427 Distemper, dry, colour as required
428 Distemper, oil emulsion, colour as required
702 Industrial bitumen
712 Building limes
2395 (Part 1) Code of practice for painting concrete masonry and plaster surfaces : Part 1
Operation and workmanship
2395 (Part 2) Code of practice for painting concrete masonry and plaster surfaces : Part 2
Schedule
2547 (Part 1) Gypsum building plaster: Part 1 Excluding premixed lightweight plaster
2547 (Part 2) Gypsum building plaster: Part 2 Premixed lightweight plaster
2932 Enamel, synthetic, exterior (a) undertaking (b) finishing
2933 Enamel, exterior (a) undertaking (b) finishing
3140 Code of practice for painting asbestos cement building products
5410 Cement paint
5411 (Part 1) Plastic emulsion paint: Part 1 for interior use
5411(Part 2) Plastic emulsion paint: Part 2 for exterior use
6278 Code of practice for whitewashing and colour washing
9862 Ready mixed paint, brushing, bituminous, black lead-free, acid alkali, water
and chlorine resisting
Painting, Varnishing and Allied Finishes (Wood And Metals)
102 Ready mixed paint, brushing, red lead, non settling, painting
110 Ready mixed paint, brushing, Grey filler, for enamels for use over primers
117 Ready mixed paint, brushing, finishing exterior, semi-gloss for general
purposes to Indian Standard Colours No. 101 to 104, 169,174,216, 217, 219,
275, 278, 280,281, 283, 352 to 354, 358 to 365, 384 to 388, 397, 410, 442 to
444
124 (Part 3) Ready mixed paint, brushing, finishing exterior, semi-gloss for general
purposes: Part 3 (superseding IS 119)
purposes white
purposes black
133 Enamel, interior: (a) undercoating, (b) finishing
137 Ready mixed paint, brushing, matt or eggshell flat, finishing, interior to
Indian Standard colour as required
144 Ready mixed paint, brushing, petrol resisting, air-drying, for interior painting
of tanks and container, red oxide (colour unspecified)
resisting
198 Varnish gold size
207 Gate and shutter hooks and eyes
337 Varnish, finishing interior

348 French polish
423 Plastic wood for joiners filter
524 Varnish, finishing, exterior, synthetic, air drying
525 Varnish, finishing, exterior and general purposes
1477 (Part 1) Code of practice for painting of ferrous metals in buildings: Part 1
Pretreatment
1477 (Part 2) Code of practice for painting of ferrous metals in buildings: Part 2 Painting
2338 (Part 1) Code of practice for finishing of wood and wood based materials: Part 1
Operations and workmanship
2338 (Part 2) Code of practice for finishing of wood and wood based materials: Part 2
Schedules
2339 Aluminium paint for general purposes, in dual container
2554 (Part Code of practice for painting of non ferrous metals in buildings
1&2)
2524 (Part 1) Code of Practice for painting of non-ferrous metals in buildings; Part 1
Pretreatment
2524 (Part 1) Code of Practice for painting of non-ferrous metals in buildings; Part 2
Painting
2932 Enamel, synthetic, exterior (a) undertaking (b) finishing
2933 Enamel, exterior (a) undertaking (b) finishing
3531 Glossary of terms relating to corrosion of metals
3536 Ready mixed paint, brushing, wood primer, pink
3537 Ready mixed paint, finishing interior, for general purposes, to Indian
Standard Colours No. 101, 216, 217, 219, 275, 281, 352, 353, 358 to 361,
363, 364, 388, 410, 442, 444, 628, 631, 632, 634, 693, 697, white and black
3539 Ready mixed paint, undercoating for use under oil finishes to Indian Standard
Colours, as required
3585 Ready mixed paint, aluminium, brushing priming water resistant, for
woodwork
4597 Code of Practice for finishing of wood and wood based products with
nitrocellulose and cold catalysed materials
6005 Code of practice for phosphating of iron and steel
Water Supply And Drainage
Part 1 Water Supply
1172 Code of basic requirements of water supply, drainage and sanitation
1239 (Part 1) Mild steel tubes, tubular and other wrought steel fittings: Part 1 Mild steel
tubes
1536 Centrifugally cast (spun) iron pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage
1537 Vertically cast iron pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage
1592 Asbestos cement pressure pipes
3114 Code of practice for laying of cast iron pipes
5822 Code of practice for welded steel pipes for water supply
1626 (Part 1) Asbestos cement building pipes and pipe fittings, gutters and gutter fittings
and roofing fittings: Part 1 (Pipe and pipe fittings)
2064 Selection, installation an maintenance of sanitary appliances - Code of
practice
2065 Code of practice for water supply in buildings
2692 Ferrules for water services

3076 Low density polyethylene pipes of potable water supplies; sewage and
industrial effluents
4984 Specification for high density polyethylene pipes for potable water supplies;
sewage and industrial effluents
4985 Specification for unplasticised PVC pipes for potable water supplied
7558 Code of practice for domestic hot water installations
7634 (Part 2) Code of practice for plastics pipe work for potable water supplies : Part 2
Laying and jointing polyethylene (PE) pipes
7634 (Part 3) Code of practice for plastics pipe work for potable water supplies : Part 3
Laying and jointing of UPVC pipes
12183 (Part 1) Code of practice for plumbing in multi-storeyed buildings: Part 1 Water
supply
1916 Steel cylinder pipes with lining and coating
4127 Code of practice for laying of salt glazed stoneware pipes
12709 Glass fibre reinforced plastic pipes, joints and rings for potable water supply
3597 Concrete pipes-methods of test
7319 Perforated concrete pipes
NBC National Building Code of India
SP 35 (S & T) Handbook of water supply and drainage with special emphasis on plumbing
Part 2 Building Drainage
277 Galvanized steel sheet (plain and corrugated)
458 Precast concrete pipes (with and without reinforcement)
651 Salt glazed stoneware pipes and fittings
782 Caulking lead
783 Code of Practice for laying of concrete pipes
1230 Cast iron rainwater pipes and fittings
1536 Centrifugally cast (spun) iron pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage
1537 Vertically cast iron pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage
1592 Asbestos cement pressure pipes
1626 (Part 1) Asbestos cement building pipes and pipe fittings, gutters and gutter fittings
and roofing fittings: Part 1 (Pipe and pipe fittings)
1726 Cast iron manhole covers and frames
1742 Code of Practice for building drainage
3006 Specification for chemically resistant glazed stoneware pipes and fittings
4111 Code of Practice for ancillary structures in sewerage system
(Parts 1 to 5)
4733 Methods of sampling and test for sewage effluents
4984 Specification for high density polyethylene pipes for potable water supplies;
sewage and industrial effluents
4985 Specification for unplasticised PVC pipes for potable water supplied
5329 Code of Practice for sanitary pipe work above ground for buildings
5455 Cast iron steps for manholes
12592 (Parts 1 Precast manhole covers & frames
& 2)
4350 Concrete porous pipes for Under drainage
2470 (Parts 1 & Code of Practice for installation of septic tank
2)

784 Prestressed concrete pipes

Special Construction Procedures Earthquake Effects, Etc.
1893 Criteria for earthquake resistant design of structures
4326 Earthquake resistant design and construction of buildings- Code of practice
13920 Ductile detailing of reinforced concrete structures subjected to seismic forces
- Code of practice
13935 Repair and seismic strengthening of buildings - Guidelines
4991 Criteria for blast resistant design of structures for explosions above ground
6922 Criteria for safety and design of structures subject to underground blasts
2190 Selection, installation and maintenance of first-aid fire extinguishers - Code
of practice
3696 (Part 2) Safety code of scaffolds and ladders: Part 2 Ladders
4912 Safety requirements for floor and wall openings, railings and toe boards
General
10005 S.I. units and recommendations for use of their multiples and of certain other
units
6060 Code of practice for day lighting of factory buildings
3103 Code of practice for industrial ventilation
3483 Code of practice for noise reduction in industrial buildings
2440 Guide for day lighting of buildings
1200 (1 to 28) Method of measurement of Building and Civil Engg. Works
7973 Code of practice for architectural and building working drawings
962 Code of practice for architectural and building drawings
13415 Code of safety for protective barrier in and around buildings
4801 Safety code for blasting and related drilling operations
8969 Safety code for erection of concrete framed structures
5.2.1 Samples and Tests of Materials
The Contractor shall submit samples of such materials as may be required by the Engineer-
in-charge and shall carry out the specified tests directed by the Engineer-in-charge at the
Site, at the supplier’s premises or at a laboratory approved by the Engineer-in-charge
without any extra cost.
Samples shall be submitted and tests carried out sufficiently early to enable further samples
to be submitted and tested if required by the Engineer-in-charge.
Approval by the Engineer-in-charge as to the placing of orders for materials or as to
samples or tests shall not prejudice any of the department’s powers under the Contract.
5.2.2 Standards
Materials and workmanship shall comply with the relevant Indian Standards (with
amendments upto date).
Where the relevant standard provides for the furnishing of a certificate to the Engineer-in-
charge, at his request, stating that the materials supplied comply in all respects with the
standard, the Contractor shall obtain the certificates and forward it to the Engineer-in-
charge.

The specifications, standards and codes listed in this chapter are considered to be part of
this Bid specification. All standards, specifications, codes of practices referred to herein
shall be the latest editions including all applicable official amendments and revisions.
5.3 Earthwork
5.3.1 General
The Contractor shall furnish all tools, plant instruments, qualified supervisory personnel,
labour, materials, any temporary works, consumables, any and everything necessary,
whether or not such items are specifically stated herein for completion of the work in
accordance with the Department’s Requirements.
The Contractor shall survey the site before excavation and set out all lines and establish
levels for various works such as grading, basement, foundations, plinth filling, roads,
drains, cable trenches, pipelines etc. Such survey shall be carried out by taking accurate
cross sections of the area perpendicular to established reference/grid lines at 8 m in case of
buildings and 30 m in case of roads and pipe lines works intervals or nearer, if necessary,
based on ground profile and thereafter properly recorded.
The excavation shall be carried out to correct lines and levels. This shall also include,
where required, proper shoring to maintain excavations and also the furnishing, erecting
and maintaining of substantial barricades around excavated areas and warning lamps at
night.
Excavated material shall be dumped in regular heaps, bunds, riprap with regular slopes and
leveling the same so as to provide natural drainage. Rock/soil excavated shall be stacked
properly as approved by the Engineer-in-charge. As a rule, all softer material shall be laid
along the centre of heaps, the harder and more weather resisting materials forming the
casing on the sides and the top.
Topsoil shall be stock piled separately for later re-use.
5.3.2 Clearing
The area to be excavated / filled shall be cleared of fences, trees, plants, logs, stumps, bush,
vegetation, rubbish, slush, etc. and other objectionable matter. If any roots or stumps of
trees are encountered during excavation, they shall also be removed. The material so
removed shall be disposed off as approved by the Engineer-in-charge. Where earthfill is
intended, the area shall be stripped of all loose/ soft patches, top soil containing
objectionable matter / materials before fill commences.
5.3.3 Excavation
Excavation for permanent work shall be taken out to such widths, lengths, depths and
profiles as are shown on the approved drawings or such other lines and grades as may be
agreed with the Engineer-in-charge Rough excavation shall be carried out to a depth of 150
mm above the final level. The balance shall be excavated with special care. Soft pockets
shall be removed below the final level and extra excavation filled up with material as
approved by the Engineer-in-charge. The final excavation should be carried out just prior to
laying the blinding course.
To facilitate the permanent works the Contractor may excavate, and also backfill later,
outside the lines shown on the approved drawings or as agreed with the Engineer-in-charge.
Should any excavation be taken below the specified elevations, the Contractor shall fill it

up with concrete of the same class as in the foundation resting thereon, upto the required
elevation at no cost to the department.
All excavations shall be to the minimum dimensions required for safety and ease of
working. Prior approval of the Engineer-in-charge shall be obtained by the Contractor in
each individual case, for the method proposed for the excavation, including dimensions,
side slopes, dewatering, disposal, etc. This approval, shall not in any way relieve the
Contractor of his responsibility for any consequent loss or damage. The excavation must be
carried out in the most expeditious and efficient manner. Side slopes shall be as steep as
will stand safely for the actual soil conditions encountered. Every precaution shall be taken
to prevent slips. Should slips occur, the slipped material shall be removed and the slope
dressed to a modified stable slope.
5.3.4 Rock
5.3.4.1 Stripping Loose Rock
All loose boulders, detached rocks partially and other loose material which might move
therewith not directly in the excavation but so close to the area to be excavated as to be
liable, in the opinion of Engineer-in-charge, to fall or otherwise endanger the workmen,
equipment, or the work shall be stripped off and removed from the area of the excavation.
The method used shall be such as not to render unstable or unsafe the portion, which was
originally sound and safe.
Any material not requiring removal in order to complete the permanent works, but which,
in the opinion of Engineer-in-charge, is likely to become loose or unstable later, shall also
be promptly and satisfactorily removed.
5.3.5 Fill, Backfilling and Site Grading
5.3.5.1 General
All fill material shall be subject to the Engineer-in-charge’s approval. If any material is
rejected by Engineer-in-charge, the Contractor shall remove the same forthwith from the
site. Surplus fill material shall be deposited/disposed off as directed by Engineer-in-charge
after the fill work is completed.
No earthfill shall commence until surface water discharges and streams have been properly
intercepted or otherwise dealt with to the approval of the Engineer-in-charge.
5.3.5.2 Material
To the extent available, selected surplus soil from excavations shall be used as backfill.
Backfill material shall be free from lumps, organic or other foreign material. All lumps of
earth shall be broken or removed unless otherwise stated. Where excavated material is
mostly rock, the boulders shall be broken into pieces not larger than 150 mm size, mixed
with properly graded fine material consisting of murrum or earth to fill the voids and the
mixture used for filling.
If fill material is required to be imported, the Contractor shall make arrangements to bring
such material from outside borrow pits. The material and source shall be subject to the prior
approval of the Engineer-in-charge. The approved borrow pit areas shall be cleared of all
bushes, roots of trees, plants, rubbish, etc. Top soil containing foreign material shall be
removed. The materials so removed shall be disposed of as directed by Engineer-in-charge.

The Contractor shall provide the necessary access roads to borrow areas and maintain the
same if such roads do not exist.
5.3.5.3 Filling in pits and trenches around foundations of

structures, walls, etc.
The spaces around the foundations, structures, pits, trenches, etc., shall be cleared of all
debris, and filled with earth in layers not exceeding 15 cm, each layer being watered,
rammed and properly consolidated to the satisfaction of Engineer-in-charge. Earth shall be
rammed with approved mechanical compaction machines. Usually no manual compaction
shall be allowed unless the Engineer-in-Charge is satisfied that in some cases manual
compaction by tampers cannot be avoided. The final backfill surface shall be trimmed and
leveled to a proper profile to the approval of the Engineer-in-charge.
The filling shall be done after the concrete or masonry is fully set and done in such a
manner as not to cause undue thrust on any part of the structure.
5.3.5.4 Plinth Filling
Plinth filling shall be carried out with approved material such as soil, sand or murum as in
layers not exceeding 15 cm watered and compacted with mechanical compaction machines.
When filling reaches the finished level, the surface shall be flooded with water, unless
otherwise directed, for at least 24 hours, allowed to dry and then the surface again
compacted as specified above to avoid settlement at a later stage. The finished level of the
filling shall be trimmed to the level/slope specified.
Compaction of large areas be carried out by means of 12 ton rollers smooth wheeled,
sheep-foot or wobbly wheeled rollers. In case of compaction of granular material such as
sands and gravel, vibratory rollers shall be used. A smaller weight roller may be used only
if permitted by the Engineer-in-charge. As rolling proceeds, water sprinkling shall be done
to assist consolidation. Water shall not be sprinkled in case of sandy fills.
The thickness of each unconsolidated fill layer can in this be upto a maximum of 300 mm.
The Contractor will determine the thickness of the layers in which fill has to be
consolidated depending on the fill material and equipment used and the approval of the
Engineer-in-charge obtained prior to commencing filling.
The process of filling in the plinth, watering and compaction shall be carried out by the
contractor in such a way as not to endanger the foundation columns, plinth walls etc.
already built up. Under no circumstances Black cotton soil shall be used for plinth in
filling.
Rolling shall commence from the outer edge and progress towards the centre and continue
until compaction is to the satisfaction of Engineer-in-charge, but in no case less than 10
passes of the roller will be accepted for each layer.
The compacted surface shall be properly shaped, trimmed and consolidated to an even and
uniform gradient. All soft spots shall be excavated, then filled and consolidated.
At some locations/areas, it may not be possible to use rollers because of space restrictions,
etc. The Contractor shall then be permitted to use pneumatic tampers, rammers, etc. and he
shall ensure proper compaction.
5.3.5.5 Sand Filling in Plinth and Other Places
Where backfilling is required to be carried out with local sand it shall be clean, medium grained
and free from impurities. The filled-in-sand shall be kept flooded with water for 24 hours to
ensure maximum consolidation. The surface of the consolidated sand shall be dressed to
required level or slope. Construction of floors or other structures on sand fill shall not be started
until the Engineer-in-charge has inspected and approved the fill.
5.3.5.6 General Site Grading
Site grading shall be carried out as indicated in the approved drawings. Excavation shall be
carried out as specified in the Department’s Requirements. Filling and compaction shall be
carried out as specified under relevant Clause and elsewhere unless otherwise indicated
below.
If no compaction is called for, the fill may be deposited to the full height in one operation
and leveled. If the fill has to be compacted, it shall be placed in layers not exceeding 200
mm and leveled uniformly and compacted as indicated in relevant Clause before the next
layer is deposited.
To ensure that the fill has been compacted as specified, field and laboratory tests shall be
carried out by the Contractor.
Field compaction tests shall be carried out in each layer of filling until the fill to the entire
height has been completed. This shall hold good for embankments as well. The fill will be
considered as incomplete if the desired compaction has not been obtained.
The Contractor shall protect the earth fill from being washed away by rain or damaged in
any other way. Should any slip occur, the Contractor shall remove the affected material and
make good the slip.
5.3.5.7 Fill Density
Unless otherwise specified the compaction, where so called for, shall comply with
minimum 90% compaction by Standard Proctor at moisture content differing not more than
4% from the optimum moisture content. The Contractor shall demonstrate adequately by
field and laboratory tests that the specified density has been obtained.
5.3.5.8 Timber Shoring
The provisions of relevant ISS shall apply.
5.3.5.9 Dewatering
The Contractor shall ensure at his cost that the excavation and the structures are free from
water during construction and shall take all necessary precautions and measures to exclude
ground/ rain water so as to enable the works to be carried out in reasonably dry conditions
in accordance with the construction programme. Sumps made for dewatering must be kept
clear of the excavations/ trenches required for further work. The method of pumping shall
be approved by Engineer-in-charge, but in any case, the pumping arrangement shall be such
that there shall be no movement of subsoil or blowing in due to differential head of water
during pumping. Pumping arrangements shall be adequate to ensure no delays in
construction. The dewatering shall be continued for at least (7) seven days after the last
pour of the concrete. The Contractor shall, however, ensure that no damage to the structure
results on stopping of dewatering.

The Contractor shall study the sub-soil conditions carefully and shall conduct any test
necessary at the site with the approval of the Engineer-in-charge to test the permeability
and drainage conditions of the sub-soil for excavation, concreting etc., below ground level.
The scheme for dewatering and disposal of water shall be approved by the Engineer-in-
charge. The Contractor shall suitably divert the water obtained from dewatering from such
areas of site where a build up of water in the opinion of the Engineer-in-charge obstructs
the progress of the work, leads to unsanitary conditions by stagnation, retards the speed of
construction and is detrimental to the safety of men, materials, structures and equipment.
When there is a continuous inflow of water and the quantum of water to be handled is
considered in the opinion of Engineer-in-charge, to be large, a well point system-single
stage or multistage, shall be adopted. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer-in-
charge, details of his well point system including the stages, the spacing number and
diameter of well points, headers etc., and the number, capacity and location of pumps for
approval.
If any foundation pits are filled due to accumulation of surface flow during the progress of
work or during rainy season, or due to any other cause all pumping required for dewatering
the pits & removing silt shall be done without extra cost.
5.3.5.10 Rain Water Drainage
Grading in the vicinity of excavation shall be such as to exclude rain/ surface water
draining into excavated areas. Excavation shall be kept clean of rain and such water as the
Contractor may be using for his work by suitably pumping out the same. The scheme for
pumping and discharge of such water shall be approved by the Engineer-in-charge.
5.4 Concrete
5.4.1 General
The Engineer-in-Charge shall have the right at all times to inspect all operations including
the sources of materials, procurement, layout and storage of materials, the concrete
batching and mixing equipment and the quality control system. Such an inspection shall be
arranged and the Engineer-in-Charge’s approval obtained, prior to starting of concrete
work. This shall, however, not relieve the Contractor of any of his responsibilities. All
materials which do not conform to the Specifications shall be rejected.
Materials should be selected so that they can satisfy the design requirements of strength,
serviceability, safety, durability and finish with due regards to the functional requirements
and the environmental conditions to which the structure will be subjected. Materials
complying with codes/standards shall generally be used. Other materials may be used after
approval of the Engineer-in-Charge and after establishing their performance suitability
based on previous data, experience or tests.
5.4.2 Materials
5.4.2.1 Cement
Unless otherwise called for by the Engineer-in-charge, cement shall be ordinary Portland
cement conforming to IS: 2697, IS: 8112 or IS: 12269. Super Sulphated cement conforming
to IS 6909 or super resistant Portland cement conforming to IS 12330 or Pozzolana
Portland Cement conforming to IS 1489.

Sulphate resistant cement conforming to IS 12330 shall be used for all cement concrete
works below ground level at
1. For RCC works to be done in river or nallah section, below existing ground level where
resistivity is below 2000 ohm-cm.
2. for all stretches along pipe alignment having soil resistivity below 1000 ohm-cm for
guniting in MS pipe or for support structures/anchor blocks/thrust blocks to be laid
having soil resistivity below 2000 ohm-cm for MS pipeline above ground,
3. For all RCC works done in foundation (below ground) at head works.
Only one type of cement shall be used in any one mix. The source of supply, type or brand
of cement within the same structure or portion thereof shall not be changed without
approval from the Engineer-In-Charge.
Cement which is not used within 90 days from its date of manufacture shall be tested at a
laboratory approved by the Engineer-In-Charge and until the results of such tests are found
satisfactory, it shall not be used in any work.
5.4.2.2 Aggregates (General)
It shall comply with requirement of IS 383 and as specified in IS 456-2000. Aggregates

shall consist of naturally occurring stones (crushed or uncrushed), gravel and sand. They
shall be chemically inert, strong, hard, clean, durable against weathering, of limited
porosity, free from dust/slit/organic impurities/deleterious materials such as iron pyrites,
cod, mica, slate, clay alkali, soft fragments, sea shells and conform to IS: 383. Aggregates
such as slag, crushed over burnt bricks, bloated clay aggregates, sintered fly ash and tiles
shall not be used.
Aggregates shall be washed and screened before use where necessary or if directed by the
Engineer-in-Charge.
Aggregates containing reactive silica shall not be used.
The maximum size of coarse aggregate shall be as stated on the drawings but in no case
greater than ¼ of the minimum thickness of the member.
Plums 160 mm and above of a reasonable size may be used in mass concrete fill where
directed. Plums shall not constitute more than 20% by volume of the concrete when
specifically permitted. The plums shall be distributed evenly and shall not be closer than
160 mm from the surface. For heavily reinforced concrete members as in the case of ribs of
main beams the nominal maximum size of aggregate shall be restricted to 5 mm less than
minimum clear distance between the main bars or 5 mm less than the minimum cover to
reinforcement whichever is smaller. Coarse and fine aggregates shall preferably batched
separately, specially for design mix concrete.
The largest possible size, properly graded should be used in order to reduce water demand.
Graded aggregate shall confirm to requirements in Table 1, 2, 3 & 4. All in aggregate shall
confirm to requirements in Table 5.
Table 1: Graded Aggregate

Percentage Passing for Normal size of Aggregate
IS Sieve Designation 40 mm 20 mm 16 mm 12.5 mm
80 100 - - -
40 95-100 100 - -
20 30-70 95-100 100 100
16 - - 90-100 -
12.5 - - - 90-100
IS Sieve Designation 40 mm 20 mm 16 mm 12.5 mm

10 10-35 25-55 30-70 40-85
4.75 0-5 0-10 0-10 0-10
2.36 - - - -
Table 2 Single Sized Aggregate (Ungraded)

Percentage Passing for Normal size of Aggregate
IS Sieve Designation 63 mm 40 mm 20 mm 16 mm 12.5 mm 10 mm
80 100 - - - - -
63 85-100 100 - - - -
40 0-30 85-100 100 - - -
20 0-5 0-20 85-100 100 - -
16 - - - 85-100 100 -
12.5 - - - - 85-100 100
10 0-5 0-5 0-20 0-30 0-45 85-100
4.75 - - 0-5 0-5 0-10 0-20
2.36 - - - - - 0-5
Table 3
Making Single Sized to Graded Aggregate
Cement Nominal size of Part of Single Size Aggregate to be Mixed to Get Graded
Concrete Graded Aggregate Aggregate (by Volume)
Mix Required 50 mm 40 mm 20 mm 12.5 mm 10 mm

1:6:12 63 9 - 3 - -
40 - 9 3 - -
1:5:10 63 7.5 - 2.5 - -
40 - 7.5 2.5 - -
1:4:8 63 6 - 2 - -
40 - 6 2 - -
1:3:6 63 4.5 - 1.5 - -
40 - 4.5 1.5 - -
20 - - 4.5 - 1.5
1:2:4 40 - 2.5 1 - 0.5
20 - - 3 - 1
12.5 - - - 3 1
1:1.5:3 20 - - 2 - 1
Note: Proportions indicated are by volume. If single sized aggregate specified is not
available, the volume of single sized aggregates shall be varied with a view to
obtain the graded aggregate.
Table 4: Grading of Fine Aggregates

Percentage Passing for
IS Sieve Grading Zone I Grading Zone II Grading Zone III Grading Zone IV
Designation
10 mm 100 100 100 100
IS Sieve Grading Zone I Grading Zone II Grading Zone III Grading Zone IV
Designation
4.75 mm 90-100 90-100 90-100 90-100
2.36 mm 60-95 75-100 85-100 95-100
1.18 mm 30-70 55-90 75-100 90-100
600 micron 15-34 35-59 60-79 80-100
300 micron 5-20 8-30 12-40 15-50
150 micron 0-10 0-10 0-10 0-15
Note For crushed stone sands, the possible limit on 150 micron IS sieve is increased to
20 percent. This does not affect 5 percent allowance permitted to other sieves.
Table 5
Percentage Passing All-in-Aggregate Grading of IS Sieve
IS Sieve Designation
mm 40 mm Nominal Size 16 mm Nominal Size
80 100 -
40 95-100 95-100
20 45-75 95-100
4.75 mm 25-45 30-50
600 micron 8-30 10-35
150 micron 0-6 0-6
Fine aggregates are divided into 4 zones. Typical good sand falls in Zone II grading,
however, finer or coarse sand may be used with suitable adjustment in the ratio of
quantities of coarse to fine aggregates.
Very fine sands as included in Zone IV grading should not be used except when the
concrete is closely controlled by design mixes.
5.4.2.3 Water
Water used for both mixing and curing shall conform to IS: 456-2000 and free from injurious
amounts of oils, acids, alkalis, salts, sugar, organic materials that may be deleterious to concrete
or steel. The pH value of water shall not be less than 6.
5.4.2.4 Reinforcement
Reinforcement shall be any of the following:

1. Mild Steel and medium tensile bars to IS 432 Part 1.
2. High strength deformed bars and wires to IS 1786.
3. Rolled steel Grade A made from structural steel to IS 2062.
All reinforcement shall be free from loose mill scales, loose rust and coats of paints, oil, mud or
other coatings, which may destroy or reduce bond.
5.4.2.5 Admixtures
Accelerating, retarding, water reducing and air entraining admixtures shall conform to IS :
9103 and integral water proofing admixtures to IS : 2645.
Admixtures may be used in concrete as per manufacturer’s instructions only with the
approval of the Engineer-in-Charge. An admixture’s suitability and effectiveness shall be
verified by trial mixes with the other materials used in the works. If two or more
admixtures are to be used simultaneously in the same concrete mix, their interaction shall
be checked and trial mixes done to ensure their compatibility. There should also be no
increase in risk of corrosion of the reinforcement or other embedments.
Calcium chloride shall not be used for accelerating set of the cement for any concrete
containing reinforcement or embedded steel parts. When calcium chloride is permitted such
as in mass concrete works, it shall be dissolved in water and added to the mixing water by
an amount not exceeding 1.5 percent of the weight of the cement in each batch of concrete.
The designed concrete mix shall be corrected accordingly.
5.4.3 Samples and Tests
All materials used for the works shall be tested before use.
Manufacturer’s test certificate shall be furnished for each batch of cement /steel and when
directed by the Engineer samples shall also be got tested by the Contractor in a laboratory
approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.
Sampling and testing shall be as per IS: 2386 under the supervision of the Engineer-in-
Charge.
Water to be used shall be tested to comply with requirements of IS: 456.
The Contractor shall furnish manufacturer’s test certificates and technical literature for the
admixture proposed to be used. If directed, the admixture shall be got tested at an approved
laboratory at no extra cost.
5.4.4 Design Mix Concrete
The mix design shall produce concrete having reduced workability (consistency) and
strength not less than approximate values given in table below. Workability shall be
controlled by direct measurement of water content and checking it at frequent intervals by
method prescribed in IS 1199.
a) Mix Design and Testing
For Design Mix Concrete, the mix shall be designed according to IS: 10262 and SP 23 to
provide the grade of concrete having the required workability and characteristic strength
not less than appropriate values given in IS: 456. The design mix shall be cohesive and
does not segregate and should result in a dense and durable concrete and also capable of
giving the finish as specified. For liquid retaining structures, the mix shall also result in
water tight concrete. The Contractor shall exercise great care while designing the concrete
mix and executing the works to achieve the desired result.
The minimum cement content for Design Mix Concrete shall be as per IS: 456.
The minimum cement content stipulated above shall be adopted irrespective of whether the
Contractor achieves the desired strength with less quantity of cement. The Contractor’s
quoted rates for concrete shall provide for the above eventuality and nothing extra shall
become payable to the CONTRACTOR in this account. Even in the case where the quantity
of cement required is higher than that specified above to achieve desired strength based on
an approved mix design, nothing extra shall become payable to the CONTRACTOR.
It shall be the Contractor’s sole responsibility to carry out the mix designs at his own cost.
He shall furnish to the Engineer-in-Charge at least 30 days before concreting operations, a
statement of proportions proposed to be used for the various concrete mixes and the
strength results obtained. The strength requirements of the concrete mixes ascertained on
150 mm cubes as per IS: 516 shall comply with the requirements of IS: 456.
Minimum Specified Characteristic Compressive
Grade Compressive Strength Strength
N/sq.mm at 7 days N/sq. mm at 28 days
M15 10.0 15.0
M20 13.5 20.0
M25 17.0 25.0
M30 20.0 30.0
M35 23.5 35.0
M40 27.0 40.0
Grades lower than M20 shall not be used for reinforced concrete (general) Grading lower
than M25 shall not be used for reinforced concrete in liquid retaining structures.
A range of slumps which shall generally be used for various types of construction unless
otherwise instructed by the Engineer-in-Charge is given below:
Structure / Member Slump in millimeters

Maximum Minimum
Reinforced foundation walls and footings 75 25
Plain footings, caissons and substructure walls 100 25
Slabs, Beams and reinforced walls 75 25
Pump & miscellaneous Equipment Foundations 100 25
Building columns 50 25
Pavements 50 25
Heavy mass construction 50 25
b) Batching & Mixing of Concrete
Proportions of aggregates and cement, as decided by the concrete mix design, shall be by
weight. These proportions shall be maintained during subsequent concrete batching by
means of weigh batchers capable of controlling the weights within one percent of the
desired value.
Amount of water added shall be such as to produce dense concrete of required consistency,
specified strength and satisfactory workability and shall be so adjusted to account for
moisture content in the aggregates. Water-cement ratio specified for use by the Engineer-
in-Charge shall be maintained. Each time the work stops, the mixer shall be cleaned out and
while recommencing, the first batch shall have 10% additional cement to allow for sticking
in the drum.
Arrangement should be made by the Contractor to have the cubes tested in an approved
laboratory or in field with prior consent of the Engineer-in-Charge. Sampling and testing of
strength and workability of concrete shall be as per IS:1199, IS : 516 and IS : 456.
5.4.5 Nominal Mix Concrete
Mix Design & Testing
Mix Designing and preliminary tests are not necessary for Nominal Mix Concrete.
However works tests shall be carried out as per IS: 456. Proportions for Nominal Mix
Concrete and w/c ratio may be adopted as per Table 9 of IS: 456. However it will be the

Contractor’s sole responsibility to adopt appropriate nominal mix proportions to yield the
specified strength.
Batching & Mixing of Concrete

The Proportions of materials used for concrete of grades shall be as given below :
Proportions for Nominal Mix of Concrete
Grade of Total Quantity for Dry Aggregate by Proportion of Fine Quantity of

Concrete Mass per 50 kg of Cement Aggregate to Coarse Water per 50 kg
(as Sum of Fine and Coarse Aggregate of Cement, Max
Aggregates), in kg, Max (by Mass) in Litres
M5 800 Generally 1:2 Subject 60
to an upper limit of
1:1.5 and a lower limit
of 1:2.5
M 7.5 625 -do- 45
M 10 480 -do- 34
M 15 350 -do- 32
M 20 250 -do- 30
Note: 1 The proportions of the fine to coarse aggregates should be adjusted from upper
limit to lower limit progressively as the grading of the fine aggregates becomes
finer and maximum size of coarse aggregate becomes larger. Graded coarse
aggregate (see Table 5.1) shall be used.
2 Example: For an average grading of fine aggregate (that is, Zone II of IS 383:1970,
Table 4) the proportions shall be 1:1.5, 1:2 and 1:2.5 for maximum size of
aggregates 10 mm, 20 mm and 40 mm respectively.
3 This table envisages batching by weight, Volume batching when done the nominal
mixes would roughly be 1:3:6, 1:2:4 and 1:1.5:3 for M 10, M 15 and M 20
respectively.
4 For underwater concreting the quantity of coarse aggregate, either by volume or
mass, shall not be less than 1.5 times nor more than twice that of the fine aggregate.
Mixing
Concrete shall be mixed in a mechanical mixer conforming to IS 1791. The mixing shall be
continued until there is uniform distribution of materials and the mass is uniform in colour
and consistency. If there is segregation after unloading, the concrete should be remixed.
In beginning, contractor shall prepare at least 30 cubes of each grade intended to be used
for testing at 1,3,7,14 & 28 days and prepare a graph with their possible deviation to be
referred at later stage. The cube shall be casted & tested as per relevant code in the presence
of EIC.
5.4.6 Formwork
Formwork shall be all inclusive and shall consist of but not be limited to shores, bracings,
sides of footings, walls, beams and columns, bottom of slabs etc. including ties, anchors,
hangers, inserts, false work, wedges etc.
The design and engineering of the formwork as well as its construction shall the
responsibility of the Contractor, However, if so desired by the Engineer-in-Charge, the
drawings and calculations for the design of the formwork shall be submitted to the
Engineer-in-Charge for the approval.
Formwork shall be designed to fulfill the following requirements:
1. Sufficiently rigid and tight to prevent loss of grout or mortar from the
concrete at all stages and appropriate to the methods of placing and
compacting.
2. Made of suitable materials.
3. Capable of providing concrete of the correct shape and surface finish within
the specified tolerance limits.
4. Capable of withstanding without deflection the worst combination of self
weight, reinforcement and concrete weight, all loads and dynamic effects
arising from construction and compacting activities, wind and weather
forces.
5. Capable of easy striking out without shock, disturbance or damage to the
concrete.
6. Soffit forms capable of imparting a camber if required
7. Soffit forms and supports capable of being left in position if required
8. Capable of being cleaned and/or coated if necessary immediately prior to
casting the concrete; design temporary openings where necessary for
these purposes and to facilitate and the preparation of construction joints.
The formwork may be of timber, plywood, steel, plastic or concrete depending upon the
type of finish specified. Sliding forms and slip form may be used with the approval of the
Engineer-in-Charge. Timber for formwork shall be well seasoned, free from sap, shakes,
loose knots, worm holes, warps and other surface defects. Joints between formwork and
structures shall be sufficiently tight to prevent loss of slurry from concrete, using seals if
necessary.
The faces of formwork coming in contact with concrete shall be cleaned and two coats of
approved mould oil applied before fixing reinforcement. All rubbish, particularly
chippings, shavings, sawdust, wire pieces dust etc. shall be removed from the interior of the
forms before the concrete is placed. Where directed, cleaning of forms shall be done by
blasting with a jet of compressed air at no extra cost.
Forms intended for reuse shall be treated with care. Forms that have deteriorated shall not
be used. Before reuse, all forms shall be thoroughly scraped, cleaned, nails removed, holes
suitably plugged, joints repaired and warped lumber replaced to the satisfaction of the
Engineer-in-Charge. The Contractor shall equip himself with enough shuttering to allow for
wastage so as to complete the job in time.
Permanent formwork shall be checked for its durability and compatibility with adjoining
concrete before it is used in the structure. It shall be properly anchored to the concrete.
Wire ties passing through beams, columns and walls shall not be allowed. In their place
bolts passing through sleeves shall be used. Formwork spacers left in-situ shall not impair
the desired appearance or durability of the structure by causing spalling, rust staining or
allowing the passage of moisture.
For liquid retaining structures, sleeves shall not be provided for through bolts nor shall
through bolts be removed if provided. The bolts, in the latter case, shall be cut at 25 mm
depth from the surface and the hole made good by cement mortar of the same proportion as
the concrete just after striking the formwork.
Where specified all corners and angles exposed in the finished structure shall have
chamfers or fillets of 20 mm x 20 mm size.

Forms for substructure may be omitted when, in the opinion of the Engineer-in-Charge, the
open excavation is firm enough (in hard non-porous soils) to act as a form. Such
excavations shall be larger, as approved by the Engineer-in-Charge, than that required as
per drawing to compensate for irregularities in excavation.
The Contractor shall provide adequate props carried down to a firm bearing without
overloading any of the structures.
The shuttering for beams and slabs shall be so erected that the side shuttering of beams can
be removed without disturbing the bottom shuttering. If the shuttering for a column is
erected for the full height of the column, one side shall be built up in sections as placing of
concrete proceeds or windows left for placing concrete from the side to limit the drop of
concrete to 1.0 m or as approved by the Engineer-in-Charge. The Contractor shall
temporarily and securely fix items to be cast (embedments/ inserts) in a manner that will
not hinder the striking of forms or permit loss of grout.
Formwork showing excessive distortion, during any stage of construction, shall be
repositioned and strengthened. Placed concrete affected by faulty formwork, shall be
entirely removed and formwork corrected prior to placement of new concrete at
Contractor’s cost.
5.4.7 Preparation Prior to Concrete Placement
Before concrete is actually placed in position, the inside of the formwork shall be cleaned
and mould oil applied, inserts and reinforcement shall be correctly positioned and securely
held, necessary openings, pockets, etc. provided.
All arrangements- formwork, equipment and proposed procedure, shall be approved by the
Engineer-in-Charge. Contractor shall maintain separate Pour Card for each pour as per the
format agreed.
5.4.8 Check for Reinforcement and concreting
All reinforcement shall be checked and recorded prior to pouring of concrete by an authorised
representative of the engineer in Charge. Similarly the entire concrete pouring work shall be
done in the presence of authorised representative. The contractor shall therefore give a notice of
a minimum three days to the engineer in Charge or his representative such that the works can
be checked by him or his authorised representative.
5.4.9 Transporting, Placing and Compacting Concrete
Concrete shall be transported from the mixing plant to the formwork with minimum time lapse
by methods that shall maintain the required workability and will prevent segregation, loss of
any ingredients or ingress of foreign matter or water. During hot or cold weather, concrete shall
be transported in deep containers other suitable measures to reduce loss of water by evaporation
and heat loss in cold weather may also be adopted.

In all cases concrete shall be deposited as nearly as practicable directly in its final position
to avoid rehandling. To avoid segregation, concrete shall not be rehandled or caused to
flow. For locations where direct placement is not possible and in narrow forms and
Contractor shall provide suitable drops and “Elephant Trunks”. Concrete shall not be
dropped from a height of more than 1.0 m. Care shall be taken to avoid displacement of
reinforcement or formwork.
Concrete shall not be placed in flowing water. Under water, concrete shall be placed in
position by tremies or by pipeline from the mixer and shall never be allowed to fall freely
through the water.
While placing concrete the Contractor shall proceed as specified below and also ensure the
following:
1. Continuously between construction joints and pre-determined abutments.
2. Without disturbance to forms or reinforcement
3. Without disturbance to pipes, ducts, fixings and the like to be cast in; ensure
that such items are securely fixed. Ensure that concrete cannot enter open
ends of pipes and conduits etc.
4. Without dropping in a manner that could cause segregation or shock.
5. In deep pours only when the concrete and formwork designed for this purpose
and by using suitable chutes or pipes.
6. Do not place if the workability is such that full compaction cannot be achieved
7. Without disturbing the unsupported sides of excavations; prevent
contamination of concrete with earth. Provide sheeting if necessary in
supported excavations, withdraw the linings progressively as concrete is
placed.
8. If placed directly onto hardcore or any other porous material, dampen the
surface to reduce loss of water from the concrete.
9. Ensure that there is no damage or displacement to sheet membranes.
10. Record the time and location of placing structural concrete.
Concrete shall normally be compacted in its final position within thirty minutes of leaving
the mixer. Concrete shall be compacted during placing with approved vibrating equipment
without causing segregation until it forms a solid mass free from voids thoroughly worked
around reinforcement and embedded fixtures and into all corners of the formwork.
Immersion vibrators shall be inserted vertically at points not more than 450 mm apart and
withdrawn slowly till air bubbles cease to come to the surface, leaving no voids. When
placing concrete in layers advancing horizontally, care shall be taken to ensure adequate
vibration, blending and melding of the concrete between successive layers. Vibrators shall
not be allowed to come in contact with reinforcement, formwork and finished surfaces after
start of initial set. Over-vibration shall be avoided; under vibration is likewise harmful.
The vibrator should penetrate rapidly to the bottom of the layer and atleast 15 cm into the
preceding layer if there is any. It should be held generally 5 to 15 sec. until the compaction
is considered adequate and then withdrawn slowly at thereof about 8 cm/s.
Concrete may be conveyed and placed by mechanically operated equipment after getting
the complete procedure approved by the Engineer-in-Charge. The slump shall be held to
the minimum necessary for conveying concrete by this method. When concrete is to be
pumped, the concrete mix shall be specially designed to suit pumping. Care shall be taken
to avoid stoppages in work once pumping has started.
Except when placing with slip forms, each placement of concrete in multiple lift work,
shall be allowed to set for at least 24 hours after the final set of concrete before the start of
subsequent placement. Placing shall stop when concrete reaches the top of the opening in
walls or bottom surface of slab, in slab and beam construction, and it shall be resumed
before concrete takes initial set but not until it has had time to settle as approved by the
Engineer-in-Charge. Concrete shall be protected against damage until final acceptance.
5.4.10 Mass Concrete Works
Sequence of pouring for mass concrete works shall be as approved by the Engineer-in-
Charge. The Contractor shall exercise great care to prevent shrinkage cracks and shall
monitor the temperature of the placed concrete if directed.
5.4.11 Curing
Curing and protection shall start immediately after the compaction of the concrete to
protect it from
1. Premature drying out, particularly by solar radiation and wind;
2. leaching out by rain and flowing water;
3. rapid cooling during the first few days after placing;
4. high internal thermal gradient;
5. low temperature of frost;
6. vibration and impact which may disrupt the concrete and interfere with its bond to the
reinforcement
7. After the concrete has begun to harden i.e. 1 to 2 hr. after laying curing shall be started.
8. All concrete, unless approved otherwise by the Engineer-in-Charge, shall be cured by
use of continuous sprays or ponded water or continuously saturated coverings of
sacking, canvas, hessain or other absorbent material for the period of complete
hydration with a minimum of 7 days. The quality of curing water shall be the same as
that used for mixing.
9. Where a curing membrane is approved to be used by the Engineer-in-Charge, the same
shall of a non-wax base and shall not impair the concrete finish in any manner. The
curing compound to be used shall be approved by the Engineer-in-Charge before use
and shall be applied with spraying equipment capable of a smooth, even textured coat.
10. When concrete is used as subgrade for flooring, the flooring may be commenced before
the curing period of subgrade is over, but curing of subgrade shall be continued along
with the top layer of flooring for a minimum period of 7 days.
11. Curing may also be done by covering the surface with an impermeable material such as
polyethylene, which shall be well sealed and fastened.
5.4.12 Construction Joints and Keys
The position and arrangement of construction joints shall be as indicated by the contractor in
his working drawings dually approved by the department. Concrete shall be placed without
interruption until completion of work between construction joints. If stopping of concreting
becomes unavoidable anywhere, a properly formed construction joint shall be made with the
approval of the Engineer-in-Charge.

Dowels for concrete work, not likely to be taken up in the near future, shall be coated with
cement slurry and encased in lean concrete as indicated on the drawings or as approved by
the Engineer-in-Charge.
Before resuming concreting on a surface which has hardened all laitance and loose stone
shall be thoroughly removed by wire brushing/hacking and surface washed with high
pressure water jet and treated with thin layer of cement slurry for vertical joints and
horizontal layers.
When concreting is to be resumed on a surface which has not fully hardened, all laitance
shall be removed by wire brushing, the surface wetted, free water removed and a coat of
cement slurry applied. On this, a layer of concrete not exceeding 150 mm thickness shall be
placed and well rammed against the old work. Thereafter work shall proceed in the normal
way.
For horizontal joints, the surface shall be covered with a layer of mortar about 10-15 mm
thick composed of cement and sand in the concrete mix. This cement slurry or mortar shall
be freshly mixed and applied immediately before placing concrete. In the opinion of EIC, if
time lag is sufficiently high/large between old and new concrete pouring, a suitable epoxy
resin of good quality should be used without any extra cost.
5.4.13 Foundation Bedding
All earth surfaces upon which or against which concrete is to be placed, shall be well
compacted and free from standing water, mud or debris. Soft or spongy areas shall be
cleaned out and filled with either soil-cement mixture, lean concrete or clean sand
compacted as approved by the Engineer-in-Charge. The surfaces of absorptive soils shall be
moistened.
Concrete shall not be deposited on large sloping rock surfaces. The rock shall be cut to
form rough steps or benches by picking, barring or wedging. The rock surface shall be kept
wet for 2 to 4 hours before concreting.
Excavation, in clay or other soils that are likely to be affected by exposure to atmosphere,
shall be concreted as soon as they are dry. Alternatively, unless otherwise mentioned the
bottom of the excavation shall be protected immediately by 8 cm thick layer of cement
concrete not leaner than M10 or in order to obtain a dry hard bottom, the last stretch of
excavation of about 10 cm shall be removed just before concreting.
5.4.14 Repair and Replacement of Unsatisfactory Concrete
Immediately after the shuttering is removed, all defective areas such as honey-combed
surfaces, rough patches, holes left by form bolts etc, shall be inspected by the Engineer-in-
Charge who may permit patching of the defective areas or reject the concrete work.
All through holes for shuttering shall be filled for full depth and neatly plugged flush with
surface.
Rejected concrete shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at no additional cost to
the Employer.
For patching of defective areas all loose materials shall be removed and the surface shall be
prepared as approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.
Bonding between hardened and fresh concrete shall be done either by placing cement
mortar or by applying epoxy. The decision of the Engineer-in-Charge as to the method of
repairs to be adopted shall be final and binding on the Contractor. The surface shall be
saturated with water for 24 hours before patching is done with cement sand mortar. The use

of epoxy for bonding fresh concrete shall be carried out as approved by the Engineer-in-
Charge.
5.4.15 Hot Weather Requirements
Concreting during hot weather shall be carried out as per IS 7861 (Part I).
Adequate provision shall be made to lower concrete temperatures which shall not exceed
40 deg C at time of placement of fresh concrete.
Where directed by the Engineer-in-Charge, the Contractor shall spray non-wax based
curing compound on unformed concrete surfaces at no extra costs.
5.4.16 Cold Weather Requirements
Concreting during cold weather shall be carried out as per IS: 7861(Part II).
The ambient temperature during placement and upto final set shall not fall below 5 deg. C.
Approved antifreeze/accelerating additives shall be used where directed.
For major and large scale concreting works the temperature of concrete at times of mixing
and placing, the thermal conductivity of the formwork and its insulation and stripping
period shall be closely monitored.
5.4.17 Liquid Retaining Structures
The Contractor shall take special care for concrete for liquid retaining structures,
underground structures and those others specifically called for to guarantee the finish and
water tightness.
The Contractor shall make all arrangements for hydro-testing of structure, all arrangements
for testing such as temporary bulk heads, pressure gauges, pumps, pipe lines etc.
The Contractor shall also make all temporary arrangements that may have to be made to
ensure stability of the structures during construction.
Any leakage that may occur during the hydro-test or subsequently during the defects
liability period or the period for which the structure is guaranteed shall be effectively
stopped either by cement/epoxy pressure grouting, guniting or such other methods as may
be approved by the engineer-in-charge. All such rectification shall be done by the
contractor to the entire satisfaction of the engineer-in-charge at no extra cost to the
department.
5.4.18 Testing Concrete Structures for Leakage
Hydro-static test for water tightness shall be done at full storage level or soffit of cover
slab, as may be directed by the Engineer-in-Charge, as described below:
In the case of structures whose external faces are exposed, such as elevated tanks, the
requirements of the test shall be deemed to be satisfied if the external faces show no sign of
leakage or sweating and remain completely dry during the period of observation of seven
days after allowing a seven day period for absorption after filling with water.
In the case of structures whose external faces are buried and are not accessible for
inspection, such as underground tanks, the structures shall be filled with water and after the
expiry of seven days after the filling, the level of the surface of the water shall be recorded.
The level of water shall be recorded again at subsequent intervals of 24 hrs. over a period
of seven days. Backfilling shall be withheld till the tanks are tested. The total drop in
surface level over a period for seven days shall be taken as an indication of water tightness
of the structure. The Engineer-in-Charge shall decide on the actual permissible nature of
this drop in the surface level, taking into account whether the structures are open or closed
and the corresponding effect it has on evaporation losses. Unless specified otherwise, a
structure whose top is covered shall be deemed to be water tight if the total drop in the
surface level over a period of seven days does not exceed 40 mm.
Each compartment/segment of the structure shall be tested individually and then all
together.
For structures such as pipes, tunnels etc. the hydrostatic test shall be carried out by filling
with water, after curing as specified, and subjecting to the specified test pressure for
specified period. If during this period the loss of water does not exceed the equivalent of
the specified rate, the structure shall be considered to have successfully passed the test.
5.4.19 Waterstops
5.4.19.1 Material
The material for the PVC waterstops shall be a plastic compound with the basic resin of
polyvinyl chloride and additional resins, plasticizers, inhibitors, which satisfies the
performance characteristics specified below as per IS : 12200. Testing shall be in
accordance with IS : 8543.
a) Tensile strength 3.6 N/mm2 minimum
b) Ultimate elongation 300% minimum
c) Tear resistance 4.9 N/mm2 minimum
d) Stiffness in flexure 2.46 N/mm2 minimum
e) Accelerated extraction
i) Tensile strength 10.50 N/mm2 minimum
ii) Ultimate elongation 250% minimum
f) Effect of Alkali 7 days
i) Weight increase 0.10% maximum
ii) Weight decrease 0.10% maximum
iii) Hardness change ± 5 points
g) Effect of Alkali 28 days
i) Weight increase 0.40% maximum
ii) Weight decrease 0.30% maximum
iii) Dimension change ± 1%
PVC water stops shall be either of the bar type, serrated with centre bulb and end grips
for use within the concrete elements or of the surface (kicker) type for external use.
PVC water stops shall be of approved manufacture. Samples and the test certificate shall
be got approved by the Engineer-in-Charge before procurement for incorporation in the
works.
Water stops shall be cleaned before placing them in position. Oil or grease shall be
removed thoroughly using water and suitable detergents.
Water stops shall be procured in long lengths as manufactured to avoid joints as far as
possible. Standard L or T type of intersection pieces shall be procured for use depending on
their requirement. Any non-standard junctions shall be made by cutting the pieces to profile
for jointing. Lapping of water stops shall not be permitted. All jointing shall be of fusion
welded type as per manufacturer’s instructions.
Water stops shall be placed at the correct location/level and suitably supported at intervals
with the reinforcement to ensure that it does not deviate from its intended position during
concreting and vibrating. Care shall also be taken to ensure that no honeycombing occurs
because of the serrations/ end grips, by placing concrete with smaller size aggregates in this
region. Projecting portions of the water stops embedded in concrete shall be thoroughly
cleaned of all mortar/concrete coating before resuming further concreting operations. The
projecting water stops shall also be suitably supported at intervals with the reinforcement to
maintain its intended position during concreting so as to ensure that it does not bend
leading to formation of pockets. In addition, smaller size aggregates shall be used for
concreting in this region also.
5.4.20 Preformed Fillers and Joint Sealing Compound
5.4.20.1 Materials
Preformed filler for expansion / isolation joints shall be non-extruding and resilient type of
bitumen impregnated fibres conforming to IS: 1838 Part I or IS 1838 Part 2.
Bitumen coat to concrete/masonry surfaces for fixing the preformed bitumen filler strip
shall conform to IS: 702. Bitumen primer shall conform to IS: 3384.
Sealing compound for filling the joints above the preformed bitumen filler shall conform to
Grade ‘A’ as per IS: 1834.
Other organic solvents such as polysulphate based joint sealents to IS: 433 Part 1 or IS
12118 Part 1 may be used with the approval of Engineer-In-Charge.
5.5 WATER SUPPLY AND SANITARY WORKS
5.5.1 Sanitary Installation
All sanitary appliances including sanitary fittings, fixtures, toilet requisites shall be of size,
and design as approved by the Engineer-In-Charge.
All porcelain fixtures, such as wash basin, sink drain board, water closet pan, urinal, ‘P’
trap etc., shall have hard durable glazed finish. They shall be free from cracks and other
glazing defects. No chipped porcelain fixtures shall be used. The colour and shades of
fixtures must be got approved from EIC.
Joints between iron and earthenware pipes shall be made perfectly air and water tight by
caulking with neat cement mortar.
5.5.1.1 Indian Type Water Closet
This shall be the long pan pattern with separate footrests made of glazed earthenware,
glazed vitreous china or of glazed fire clay. The general requirements shall conform to IS :
2556 (Parts III and X). Pans shall be provided with 100 mm vitrious china trap ‘P’ or ‘S’
type with a minimum 50 mm water seal and 50 mm dia. Vent horn. Pan shall be laid at the
correct location and level over a bed of cement-sand admixture. It shall be Ist quality WC,
Orissa pan of size 580 mm x 440 mm.
5.5.1.2 European Type Water Closet
Water closets shall be either of glazed earthenware, glazed vitreous china or glazed fire
clay as specified and shall be of “Double Siphonic type” conforming to IS:2556 (Part VIII).
The closets shall be of one piece construction with approved plastic/bakelite seat and cover.
Each water closet shall have 4 fixing holes having a minimum diameter of 6.5 mm for
fixing to floor and shall have an integral flushing rim of suitable type.
5.5.1.3 Urinals
Urinals shall be of the bowl pattern, either flat back or angle back type lipped in front. They
shall be of glazed earthenware, glazed vitreous china or glazed fire clay, and of size 610 x 400
x 80 mm conforming to IS 2556 (Part VI) with 25 mm dia. GI waste pipe coupling etc.. The
urinals shall be of one piece construction. Each urinal shall be provided with not less than two
fixings holes of a minimum dia of 6.5 mm on each side. Each urinal shall have an integral
flushing box rim of suitable type and inlet or supply horn for connecting the flush pipe. The
flushing rim and inlet shall be of the self-draining type. It shall have a weep-hole at the flushing
inlet of the urinal. At the bottom of the urinal, an outlet horn for connecting to an outlet pipe
shall be provided. The exterior of the outlet horn shall not be glazed and the surface shall be
provided with grooves at right angles to the axis of the outlet to facilitate fixing to the uniform
and smooth throughout to ensure efficient flushing.
5.5.1.4 Flushing Cisterns
The flushing cisterns shall be automatic or manually operated, high level or low level, as
approved by the Engineer-In-Charge. For water closets and urinals high level cistern is
intended to operate with minimum height of 125 cm and a low level cistern a maximum
height of 30 cm between the top of the pan and the underside of the cistern, They shall be
of cast iron, glazed earthenware, or pressed steel complying iron, glazed requirement of IS
774. Automatic flushing cistern for urinals shall conform to IS 2326.
5.5.1.5 Wash Basins
1. Wash basins shall be of glazed earthenware, glazed vitreous china or glazed

fire clay as approved by the Engineer-In-Charge and conforming to IS. 2556.
Type Size
Flat Back 630 x 450 mm
Flat Back 550 x 400 mm
Wash basins shall be of one piece construction, including a combined overflow.
All internal angles shall be designed so as to facilitate cleaning. Each shall
have rim sloping inside towards the bowl on all sides except skirting at the
back. Basins shall be provided with single or double tap holes as approved.
The tap holes shall be square. A suitable tap hole button shall be supplied if
one tap hole is not required in installation. Each basin shall have a circular
waste hole to which the interior of basin shall drain. The waste hole shall be
either rebated or bevelled internally with diameter of 65 mm at top and a depth

of 10 mm to suit a waste plug having 64 mm diameter. Each basin shall be
provided with a nonferrous 32 mm waste fittings. Stud slots to receive the
brackets on the under side of the wash basins shall be suitable for a bracket
with stud not exceeding 13 mm diameter, 5 mm high and 305 mm from the
back of basin to the centre of the stud. The stud slots shall be of depth
sufficient to take 5 mm stud. Every basin shall have an integral soap holder
recess or recesses which shall fully drain into the bowl. The position of the
chain stay-hole shall not be lower than the overflow slot. A slot type of overflow
having an area of not less than 5 sq.cm. shall be provided and shall be so
designed as to facilitate cleaning of the overflow. The Department’s
Requirements for waste plug, chain and stay shall be the same as given for
sinks.
2. All the waste fittings shall be chromium plated, Bottle trap shall conform to IS.
5434. The chromium plating shall be of service grade No. 2 conforming to IS.
1068.
5.5.1.6 Sinks
The sinks shall be of glazed earthenware, glazed vitreous china or glazed fire clay
as approved by the Engineer-In-Charge conforming to IS. 2556 (Part V) and shall
be of the following sizes.
a. 450 x 300 x 150 mm.
b. 600 x 450 x 200 mm.
They shall be of one piece construction, including a combined overflow. The floor
of the sink shall gently slope towards the outlet. The outlet shall in all cases be
suitable for waste fitting having flange of 64 mm. diameter and the waste hole shall
have a minimum diameter of 65 mm at the bottom to suit the waste fittings. The
waste hole shall be either rebated or bevelled having a depth of 10 mm. Each sink
shall be provided with a non-ferrous 40 mm dia. waste fitting. The sink shall have
overflow of the weir type and the inverts shall be 30 mm below the top edge. Each
sink shall be provided with a waste plug, of suitable dia. chain and stay. The plug
shall be of rubber or other equally suitable material and shall be water tight when
fitted. Plug chains shall be of brass wire chromium plated. It shall have an overall
length from the collar to the stay of not less than 300 mm. There shall be a
triangular or D shackle at each end, one of which shall be brazed to the plug and
the other securely fixed to the stay. The 150 mm long shank of the waste shall be
threaded conforming to the requirements of IS. 2556 for sinks only. The waste
fittings and plug fittings shall be chromium plated. The chromium plating shall be of
service grade No. 2 conforming to IS. 1068.
5.5.1.7 Stop Cock and Bib Cock
A bibcock (bibtap) is a draw off tap with a horizontal inlet and free outlet and stopcock
(stoptap) is a valve with a suitable means of connections for insertion in a pipeline for
controlling or stopping the flow. They shall be of specified size and shall be of the screw
down type. The closing device should work by means of a disc carrying a renewable non-
metallic washer, which shuts against water pressure on a seating at right angles to the axis
of the threaded spindle which operates it. The handle shall be either crutch or butterfly type
securely fixed to the spindle. The cocks shall open in anti-clockwise direction. When the
bib cocks and stop cocks are required to be chromium plated, the chromium plating shall be
of service Grade No. 2 conforming to IS 1068 in finish and appearance, the plated articles
shall be free from plating defects such as blisters, pits, roughness and shall not be stained or
discoloured.
These fittings shall be of brass heavy class, chromium plated (C.P.) and of approved
manufacture and pattern with screwed of flanged ends as specified. The fittings shall in all
respects comply with the requirements of IS 781. The standard size of brass fittings shall be
designated by the nominal bore of the pipe to which the fittings are attached. A sample of
each kind of fitting shall be approved by the EIC and all supplies made according to the
approved samples.
All cast fittings shall be sound and free from laps, blow holes and fittings, both internal and
external surfaces shall be clean, smooth and free from sand etc. Burning, plugging stopping
or patching of the casting shall not be permitted. The bodies, bonnets, spindles and other
parts shall be truly machined and when assembled the parts shall be axial, parallel and
cylindrical with surfaces smoothly finished. The area of the water way of the fittings shall
not be less than the area of the nominal bore.
The fittings shall be fully examined and cleared of all foreign matter before being fixed.
The fittings shall be fitted in the pipeline in a workman like manner. The joints between
fittings and pipes shall be made leak-proof. The joints and fitting shall be leak proof when
subjected to a pressure test approved by the Employer’s Representative and the defective
fittings and joints shall be replaced or redone.
5.5.1.8 Cast Iron Soil Waste and Vent Pipes and Fittings
All cast iron pipes and fittings shall be of uniform thickness with strong and deep sockets,
free from flaws, air holes, cracks, sand holes and other defects and conform to IS 1536. The
diameter approved shall be internal diameter of pipe. The pipes and fittings shall be true to
shape, smooth and cylindrical and shall ring clearly when struck over with a light hand
hammer. All pipes and fittings shall be properly cleaned of all foreign material before being
fixed.
All plug bends of drainage pipes shall be provided with inspection and cleaning caps,
covers, which shall be fixed with nuts and screws. Pipes shall be fixed to the wall by W.I.
or M.S. holder bat clamps, unless projecting ears with fixing holes are provided at socket
end of pipe. The clamps shall be fixed to the walls by embedding their hooks in cement
concrete blocks (1:2:4) 10 cm x 10 cm making necessary holes in the walls at proper
places. All holes and breakages shall be made good. The clamps shall be kept 25 mm clear
of the finished face of the walls to facilitate cleaning and painting of pipes.
C.I. pipes and fittings which are exposed shall be first cleaned and then painted with a coat
of red lead primer. Two coats of zinc paint with white base and mixed with pigment of
required colour to get the approved shade shall be given over the base primer coat.
The thickness of fittings and their socket and spigot dimensions shall conform to the
thickness and dimensions approved for the corresponding sizes of straight pipes.
The connection between the main pipe and branch pipes shall be made by using branches
and bends with access for cleaning . Floor traps shall be provided with 25 mm dia puff pipe
where the length of the waste is more than 1800 mm or the floor trap is connected to a
waste stack through bends.
All cast iron pipes and fittings including joints shall be tested by a smoke test to the
satisfaction of the Engineer-In-Charge and left in working condition after completion. The
smoke test shall be carried out as stated under :
Smoke shall be pumped into the pipe at the lowest and from a smoke machine which
consists of a bellow and a burner. The material usually burnt is greasy cotton waste which
gives out a clear pungent smoke which is easily detectable by sight as well as by smell if
there is a leak at any point of the pipeline.
Water test and air test shall be conducted as stipulated in IS 5329.
5.5.1.9 Galvanised Mild Steel (G.I.) Pipes
The pipes shall be galvanised mild steel welded pipes and seamless screwed and sockets
types conforming to the requirements of IS 1239, for medium grade. They shall be of the
diameter (nominal bore) approved. The sockets shall be designated by the respective
nominal bores of the pipes for which they are intended. The pipes and sockets shall be
finished neatly, well galvanised on both inner and outer surfaces, and shall be free from
cracks, surface flaws, laminations and other defects. All screws, threads shall be clean and
well cut. The ends shall be cut cleanly and square with the axis of the tube.
All screwed tubes and sockets shall have pipe threads conforming to the requirements of IS
554. Screwed tubes shall have taper threads while the sockets shall have parallel threads.
The fittings shall be of malleable cast iron or mild steel types complying with all the
appropriate requirements as approved for pipes. The fittings shall be designated by the
respective nominal bores of the pipes for which they are intended. The fittings shall have
screw threads at the ends conforming to the requirements of IS 554. Female threads on
fittings shall be parallel and male threads (except on running nipples and collars of unions)
shall be tapered.
The pipes shall be cleaned and cleared of all foreign matter before being laid. In jointing
the pipes, the inside of the socket and the screwed end of the pipes shall be oiled and
rubbed over tight white lead and few turns of spun yarn wrapped around the screwed end of
the pipe. The end shall then be screwed in the socket, tee, etc. with the pipe wrench. Care
should be taken that all pipes and fittings are properly jointed so as to make the joints
completely water tight and pipes are kept at all times free from dust and dirt during fixing.
Burrs from the joint shall be removed after screwing. After laying, the open ends of the
pipes shall be temporarily plugged to prevent access of soil or any other foreign matter.
Any threads exposed after jointing shall be painted or in the case of underground piping
thickly coated with approved anticorrosive paint to prevent corrosion.
For internal work the galvanised iron pipes and fittings shall run the surface of the walls or
ceiling (not in chase) unless otherwise specified. The fixing shall be done by means of
standard pattern holder bat clamps, keeping the pipes about 1.5 cm clear of the wall. Pipes
and fittings shall be fixed truly vertical/ horizontal, When it is found necessary to conceal
the pipes, chasing may be adopted or pipes fixed in the ducts of recesses etc. provided there
is sufficient space to work on the pipes with the usual tools. The pipes shall not ordinarily
be buried in walls or solid floors. Where unavoidable, pipes may be buried for short
distances provided adequate protection is given against damage, but the joints in pipes shall
not be buried. M.S. pipe sleeve shall be fixed at a place where a pipe is passing through a
wall or floor for reception of the pipe and to allow freedom for expansion/contraction and
the movements/maintenance. In case the pipe is embedded in walls or floors it should be
painted with anti-corrosive bitumanastic paint of approved quality. The pipe should not
come in contact with lime mortar or lime concrete as the pipe is affected by lime. Under the
floors the pipes shall be laid in layer of sand filling or as approved by the Engineer-In-
Charge.
G.I. pipes with socket and spigot ends shall be provided with lead caulked joints wherever
specified and the joints shall conform to the requirements of IS 3114.
The work of excavation and backfilling shall be done true to line and gradient in
accordance with general Department’s requirements for earthworks in trenches for pipes
laid underground.
The pipes shall be laid on a layer of 10.0 cm sand and filled upto 15 cm above the pipes. A
sand cushion of 15 cm on either side of the pipe shall also be provided. The remaining
portion of the trench shall then be filled with excavated earth. The surplus earth shall be got
rid of as directed. When excavation is done in rock the bottom shall be cut deep enough to
permit the pies to be laid on a cushion of sand 75 mm minimum.
The pipes and fittings after they are laid and jointed shall be subjected to hydrostatic
pressure test as approved by the Engineer-In-Charge and shall satisfactorily pass the test.
Pipe line system shall be tested in sections as the work proceeds, keeping the joints exposed
for inspection. Pipes shall be slowly and carefully charged with water allowing all air to
escape. All draw off taps shall then be closed and water pressure gradually raised to test
pressure. Care shall be taken to ensure that pressure gauge is accurate and preferably should
have been recalibrated before the test. Pump used having been stopped, the section of the
pipeline shall maintain the test pressure for at least half an hour. Any joints or pipes found
leaking shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor.
5.5.1.10 Stoneware pipes and fittings
All pipes with spigot and socket ends shall conform to IS 651/3006 and shall be of grade
‘A’. These shall be sound, free from visible defects such as fine cracks or hair cracks. The
glaze of the pipes shall be free form crazing. The pipes shall give a sharp clear note when
struck with a light hammer.
The following information shall be clearly marked on each pipe and fitting:
a. Internal diameter;
b. Grade;
c. Date of manufacture;
d. Name of manufacturer or his registered trade-mark or both
All pipes and fittings shall have ISI mark. Laying and Jointing of GSW pipes and fittings
shall confirm to ISS: 4127.
5.5.1.11 Soak Pit
Soak pit shall be constructed at the location specified by the Engineer-In-Charge.

Earthwork excavation shall be carried out to the exact dimensions. Brick masonry lining
with open joints shall be constructed in the pit upto 150 mm below the outlet pipeline.
Brick in cement mortar 1:6 shall be constructed above this level upto ground. Well burnt
brick aggregates of nominal size 40 mm to 80 mm and coarse sand shall be filled within the
chamber. Construction of pit lining and filling of the brick ballast shall progress
simultaneously.
5.5.1.12 Manholes
Location
Manholes shall be constructed at places approved by the Engineer-In-Charge.
Frame and Covers

Frame and covers for manholes shall be of required type and dimensions as per the
relevant drawings prepared by the Contractor. The following information shall be
clearly marked on each cover.
a. Year of Manufacture,
b. Identification mark of the purchaser,
c. Sewers/ SWD,
d. Arrow showing direction of flow
e. Cast Iron Frame and Cover
The cast iron frame and cover shall be of gray cast iron as per IS:1726. The frame and
cover shall be coated with black bituminous composition. Coating shall be smooth and
tenacious. It shall not flow when exposed to temperature of 630C and shall not be brittle as
to chip of at the temperature of 0C. The covers shall have a raised chequered design to
provide an adequate non-slip grip. The rise of the chequer shall be not less than 4 mm. The
locking device for the cover shall be provided as approved by the Engineer-In-Charge. The
CI covers for the load test shall be selected at one for every lot of fifty or part thereof for
each type and size manufactured and as approved by the Engineer-In-Charge. The frame
shall be fixed in cement concrete of M 15 grade all round and finished with neat cement.
The manhole frame shall have 560 mm diameter clear opening and shall weigh not less
than 208 kg. including cover. In case of rectangular CI frame and cover of 900 mm x 600
mm clear opening, the total weight shall not be less than 275 kg. In case of scraper manhole
the frame shall have clear opening of 1200 mm x 900 mm and shall weigh not less than 900
kg including cover. The manhole cover and frame shall be painted with three coats of anti-
corrosive paint after fixing in position.
Ferro Cement Concrete covers with CI Frame

Supply & fixing of fibre-reinforced ferro-cement drain cover (light duty) designed for valve
chambers for class “B loading” dually marked on cover with adequate steel reinforcement
having thickness 75 mm, anticorrosive bitumen painted MS plate rim and on MS lifting
hooks, additives and admixtures like plasticizers, shrinkage resistance compound, abrasion
resistant etc. as per approved drawing and design complete in all respect.
The frame shall be of angle iron of size 80 x 80 x 6 mm duly painted with anti-corrosive
paint having hold fast all along perimeter for fixing in concrete.
Miscellaneous
If any damage is caused to the other services such as water supply pipeline, sewer, cable,
etc. during the construction of manholes and erection of vent shafts, the Contractor shall be
held responsible for the same and shall replace the damaged services to the full satisfaction
of the Engineer-In-Charge.
The interior of manholes shall be cleared of all debris after construction and before testing
the same for water tightness by the Contractor.
5.6 Building Details
5.6.1 Brickwork
5.6.1.1 Materials
Bricks used in the works shall conform to the requirements laid down in IS : 1077, IS 2180,
IS 2222, IS 2691, IS 3952, IS 6165. The class of the bricks shall be as specifically indicated
in the respective items of work prepared by the Contractor.
Bricks shall have following dimensions:
Length mm Width mm Height mm
Non Modular Bricks 230 110 70
230 110 30

Common burnt clay bricks are classified on the basis of compressive strength as given
below:
Class designation 10 7.5 5 3.5
Avg. compressive strength N/ mm2 10 7.5 5 3.5
Bricks shall be sound, hard, homogenous in texture, well burnt in kiln without being
vitrified, hand/ machine moulded, deep red, cherry or copper coloured, of regular shape and
size and shall have sharp and square edges with smooth rectangular faces. The bricks shall
be free from pores, cracks, flaws and nodules of free lime. They shall have smooth
rectangular faces with sharp corners and shall be uniform in colour, tolerance of brick
dimension shall be ± 3% for designation 10 & above and ± 8% for lower designation. Hand
moulded bricks shall be moulded with a frog and those made by extrusion process may not
be provided with a frog. Bricks shall give a clear ringing sound when struck.
The sample size for all the tests shall be as follows :
Brick Lot size Sample Size
Class 10 more than 50000 bricks 20 bricks
7.5, 5, 3.5 more than 100000 bricks 20 bricks
The sampling shall be at random & samples shall be stored in a dry place until tests are
done.
5.6.1.2 Compressive Strength:
Five bricks shall be tested. The average compressive strength shall be as per class
designation. The compressive strength of individual brick shall not be less than 20 % of the
specified value.
5.6.1.3 Water absorption:
Five bricks shall be tested for water absorption and shall not exceed 20 % by weight upto
class 12.5 & 15% by weight for higher classes.
5.6.1.4 Efflorescence:
Five bricks shall be tested for efflorescence. The efflorescence shall be ‘nil’ to ‘moderate’.
Sample bricks shall be submitted to the Engineer-in-Charge for approval and bricks supplied
shall conform to approved samples. If demanded by Engineer-in-Charge, brick samples shall be
got tested as per IS : 3495 by Contractor. Bricks rejected by Engineer-in-Charge shall be
removed from the site of works within 24 hours.
Mortar for brick masonry shall consist of cement and sand.

Mortar leaner than 1.5 and richer than 1:3 shall not be used.
5.6.1.5 Preparation of Mortar
Mortars shall be prepared and tested as per IS 2250. Mixing of cement mortar shall be done
in a mechanical mixers.
Materials:
Water : Water used shall be clean and reasonably free from injurious or deleterious
materials such as oils, acids, alkalis, salts. The pH value of water shall not be less than 6.
Cement : Cement shall conform to any of the following :
33 Grade Ordinary Portland Cement IS : 2697
Sand : Sand for masonry mortars shall confirm to IS 2116
5.6.1.6 Workmanship
Workmanship of brick work shall conform to IS: 2212. All bricks shall be thoroughly soaked in
clear water for at least one hour immediately before being laid. The cement mortar for brick
masonry work shall be as specified in the respective item of work prepared by the Contractor.
Brick work 230 mm thick and over shall be laid in English Bond unless otherwise specified.
100mm/ 115 mm thick brickwork shall be laid with stretchers. For laying bricks, a layer of
mortar shall be spread over the full width of suitable length of the lower course. Each brick
shall be slightly pressed into the mortar and shoved into final position so as to embed the brick
fully in mortar. Only full size bricks shall be used for the works and cut bricks utilised only to
make up required wall length or for bonding. Bricks shall be laid with frogs uppermost.
All brickwork shall be plumb, square and true to dimensions shown. Vertical joints in
alternate courses shall come directly one over the other and be in line. Horizontal courses
shall be levelled. The thickness of brick courses shall be kept uniform. In case of one brick
thick or half brick thick wall, atleast on e face should be kept smooth and plane, even if the
other is slightly rough due to variation in size of bricks. For walls of thickness greater than
on e brick both faces shall be kept smooth and plane. All interconnected brickwork shall be
carried out at nearly one level so that there is uniform distribution of pressure on the
supporting structure and no portion of the work shall be left more than one course lower
than the adjacent work. Where this is not possible, the work be raked back according to
bond (and not saw toothed) at an angle not exceeding 45 deg. But in no case the level
difference between adjoining walls shall exceed one meter. Brick work shall not be raised
more than one metre per day.
Bricks shall be so laid that all joints are well filled with mortar. The thickness of joints shall
not be less than 6 mm and not more than 10 mm. The face joints shall be raked to a
minimum depth of 10 mm/ 15 mm by raking tools during the progress of work when the
mortar is still green, so as to provided a proper key for the plastering/ pointing respectively
to be done later. When plastering or pointing is not required to be done, the joints shall be
uniform in thickness and be struck flush and finished at the time of laying. The face of
brickwork shall be cleaned daily and all mortar droppings removed. The surface of each
course shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dirt before another course is laid on top.
During harsh weather conditions, newly built brick masonry works shall be protected by
tarpaulin or other suitable covering to prevent mortar being washed away by rain.

Brickwork shall be kept constantly moist on all the faces for at least seven days after 24 hrs
of laying. The arrangement for curing shall be got approved from the Engineer-in-Charge.
Double scaffolding having two sets of vertical supports shall be provided to facilitate
execution of the masonry works. The scaffolding shall be designed adequately considering
all the dead, live and possible impact loads to ensure safety of the workmen, in accordance
with the requirements stipulated in IS : 2750 and IS : 3696 (Part - I). Scaffolding shall be
properly maintained during the entire period of construction. Single scaffolding shall not be
used on important works and will be permitted only in certain cases as decided by the
Engineer-in-Charge. Where single scaffolding is adopted, only minimum number of holes,
by omitting a header shall be left in the masonry for supporting horizontal scaffolding
poles. All holes in the masonry shall be carefully made good before plastering/ pointing.
In the event of usage of traditional bricks of size 230 mm x 115 mm x 75 mm, the courses
at the top of the plinth and sills as well as at the top of the wall just below the roof/ floor
slabs and at the top of the parapet shall be laid with bricks on edge.
All brick work shall be built tightly against columns, floor slabs or other structural
members.
To overcome the possibility of development of cracks in the brick masonry following
measures shall be adopted.
For resting RCC slabs, the bearing surface of masonry wall shall be finished on top with 12
mm thick cement mortar 1:3 and provided with 2 layers of Kraft paper Grade 1 as per IS :
1397 or 2 layer of 50 micron thick polyethylene sheets.
RCC/ steel beams resting on masonry wall shall be provided with reinforced concrete bed
blocks of 150 mm thickness, projecting 150mm on either sides of the beam, duly finished
on top with 2 layer of Kraft paper Grade 1 as per IS : 1397 or 2 layers of 50 micron thick
polyethylene sheets.
Steel wire fabric shall be provided at the junction of brick masonry and concrete before
taking up plastering work.
Bricks for partition walls shall be stacked adjacent to the structural member to predeflect
the structural member before the wall is taken up for execution. Further, the top most
course of half or full brick walls abutting against either a deshuttered slab or beam shall be
built only after any proposed masonry wall above the structural member is executed to
cater for the deflection of the structural element.
Reinforced cement concrete transomes and mullions of dimensions as indicated in the
construction Drawings to be prepared by the Contractor are generally required to be
provided in the half brick partition walls.
Where the drawings prepared by the Contractor indicate that structural steel sections are to be
encased in brickwork, the brickwork masonry shall be built closely against the steel section,
ensuring a minimum of 20 mm thick cement-sand mortar 1:4 over all the steel surfaces. Steel
sections partly embedded in brickwork shall be provided with bituminous protective coating to
the surfaces at the point of entry into the brick masonry.

5.6.2 Uncoursed Random Rubble Masonry
5.6.2.1 Materials
Stones for the works shall be of the specified variety which are hard, durable, fine grained
and uniform in colour (for superstructure work) free from defects like cracks, sand holes,
patterns of soft / loose materials veins, other defects. Quality and work shall conform to the
requirements specified in IS: 1597 (Part-I). The percentage of water absorption shall not
exceed 5 percent as per test conducted in accordance with IS: 1124. The Contractor shall
supply sample stones to the Engineer-in-Charge for approval. Stones shall be laid with its
grains horizontal so that the load transmitted is always perpendicular to the natural bed.
Cement-stand mortar for stone masonry works shall be as per IS 2250.
5.6.2.2 Scaffolding
Type of scaffolding to be used shall be as specified in the section of brick masonry.
5.6.2.3 Workmanship
For all works below ground level the masonry shall be random rubble uncoursed with
ordinary quarry dressed stones for the hearting and selected quarry dress stones for the
facing.
For all R.R. masonry in superstructure the masonry shall be well bounded, faced with
hammer dressed stones with squared quoins at corners. The bushing on the face shall not be
more that 40 mm on an exposed face and on the face to be plastered it shall not project by
more than 12 mm nor shall it have depression more than 10mm from the average wall
surface.
Face stones shall extend back sufficiently and bond well with the masonry. The depth of
stone from the face of the wall inwards shall not be less than the height or breadth at the
face. The length of the stone shall not exceed three times the height and the breadth on base
shall not be greater than three-fourths the thickness of wall nor less than 150 mm. The
height of stone may be upto a maximum of 300 mm. Face stones or hearting stones shall
not be less than 150 mm in any direction.
Chips and spalls shall be used wherever necessary to avoid thick mortar joints and to ensure
that no hollow spaces are left in the masonry. The use of chips and spalls in the herating
shall not exceed 20 percent of the quantity of stone masonry. Spalls and chips shall not be
used on the face of the wall and below hearting stones to bring them to the level of face
stones.
The maximum thickness of joints shall not exceed 20 mm. All joints shall be completely
filled with mortar. When plastering or pointing is not required to be done, the joints shall be
struck flush and finished as the work proceeds. Otherwise, the joints shall be raked to a
minimum depth of 20 mm by a raking tool during the progress of the work while the mortar
is still green.
Through or bond stones shall be provided in wall upto 600 mm thick and in case of wall
above 600mm thickness, a set of two or more bond stones overlapping each other by at
least 150mm shall be provided in a line from face to back. Each bond stone or a set of bond
stones shall be provided for every 0.5 sq.m of wall surface.
All stones shall be sufficiently wetted before laying to prevent absorption of water from the
mortar. All connected walls in a structure shall be normally raised uniformly and regularly.
However if any part of the masonry is required to be left behind, the wall shall be raked
back (and not saw toothed) at an angle not exceeding 45 deg. Masonry work shall not be
raised by more than one metre per day.
Green work shall be protected from rain by suitable covering. Masonry work shall be kept
constantly moist on all the faces for a minimum period of seven days for proper curing of
the joints.
5.6.3 Coursed Rubble Masonry (First Sort) for Superstructure
5.6.4 Materials
The materials specification for the work shall be as specified in the section of random
rubble masonry above.
5.6.5 Scaffolding
Type of scaffolding to be used shall be as specified in the section of brick masonry.
5.6.6 Workmanship
All Courses shall be laid truly horizontal and shall be of the same height in any course. The
height of course shall not be less 150mm and not more than 300mm. The width of stone
shall not be less than its height. Face stones shall tail into the work for not less than their
height and atleast 1/3rd the number of stones shall tail into the work for a length not less
than twice their height but not more than three-fourths the thickness of the wall whichever
is smaller. These should be laid as headers and stretchers alternately to break joints by
atleast 75mm.The face stones shall be squared on all joints and bed; the bed joints being
hammer or chisel dressed true and square for at least 80 mm back from the face and the
side joints for atleast 40 mm. The face of the stone shall be hammer dressed so that the
bushing shall not be more than 40mm on an exposed face and 10mm on a face to the
plastered. No portion of the dressed surface shall show a depth of gap more than 6mm from
a straight edge placed on it. The remaining unexposed portion of the stone shall not project
beyond the surface of bed and side joints.
No spalls or pinning shall be allowed on the face. All bed joints shall be horizontal and side
joints shall be vertical and no joints shall be more than 10mm in thickness. When plastering
or pointing is not required to be done, the joints shall be struck flush and finished as the
work proceeds. Otherwise, the joints shall be raked to a minimum depth of 20mm by a
raking tools, during the progress of the work while the mortar is still green.
Hearting shall consists of flat bedded stones carefully laid on their proper beds and solidly
bedded in mortar. The use of chips shall be restricted to the filling of interstices between
the adjacent stones in hearting and these shall not exceed 10 percent of the quantity of the
stone masonry. Care shall be taken so that no hollow spaces are left any where in the
masonry.
The requirement regarding through or bond stones shall be as specified in clause 5.6.6 with
the further stipulation that these shall be provided at 1.5m to 1.8m apart clear in every
course but staggered at alternate courses.
The quoins which shall be of the same height as the course in which they occur, shall not be
less than 450mm in any direction. Quoin stones shall be laid as stretchers and headers
alternately. They shall be laid square on their beds, which shall be rough chisel dressed to a
depth of at least 100mm from the face. These stones shall have a minimum uniform chisel
drafts of 25mm width at four edges, all the edges being in the same plane.

5.6.7 Damp - Proof Course
5.6.7.1 Materials and Workmanship
All the walls in a building shall be provided with damp-proof course covering plinth to
prevent water from rising up the wall. The damp-proof course shall run without a break
throughout the length of the wall, even under the door or other opening. Damp-proof course
shall consist of minimum 50mm thick cement concrete of 1:2:4 nominal mix with nominal
reinforcement and approved water-proofing compound admixture conforming to IS:2645 in
proportion as directed by the manufacturer. Concrete shall be with 10mm down graded
coarse aggregates.
The surface of brick work/stone masonry work shall be levelled and prepared before laying
the cement concrete. Side shuttering shall be properly fixed to ensure that slurry does not
leak through and is also not disturbed during compaction. The upper and side surface shall
be made rough to afford key to the masonry above and to the plaster. Damp-proof course
shall be cured properly for at least seven days after which it shall be allowed to dry for
taking up further work.
5.6.8 Miscellaneous Inserts, Bolts etc.
All the miscellaneous inserts such as bolts, pipes, plate embedments etc., shall be accurately
installed in the building works at the correct location and levels, all as detailed in the
construction drawing to be prepared by the Contractor. Contractor shall prepare and use
templates for this purpose, if so directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. In the event, of any of the
inserts are improperly installed, contractor shall make necessary arrangement to remove and
reinstall at the correct locations/levels all as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
5.6.9 Wood work in Doors, Windows, Ventilators & partitions
5.6.9.1 Materials
Timber to be used shall be first class Teak wood as per IS : 4021. Timber shall be of the
best quality and well seasoned by the suitable process before being planed to the required
sizes. The maximum permissible moisture content shall be from 10 to 16 percent for timber
50mm and above in thickness and 8 to 14 percent for timber less than 50mm in thickness
for different regions of the country as stipulated in IS : 287 . Timber shall be close grained,
of uniform colour and free from decay, fungal growth, boxed heart, pitch pockets of streaks
on the exposed edges, borer holes, splits and cracks. Flush door shutters of the solid core
type with plywood face panel shall conform to IS : 2202 (Part-1)
Transparent sheet glass conform to the requirements of IS : 2835 or IS :2553 (Part-1).
Wired and figured glass shall be as per IS: 5437. Builder’s hardware for fittings and
fixtures shall be of the best quality from approved manufacturers. Each wooden door
shutter shall have a minimum of three hinges and two fastenings like tower bolt, handle and
tachle mortise lock etc. floor stoppers, handles, kick plates etc. shall also be provided. Each

window shutter shall have minimum of 3 hinges and one fastening like tower bolt and one
handle for opening and closing.
5.6.9.2 Workmanship
The workmanship and finish of wood work in doors, windows, ventilators and partitions
shall be of a very high order. Contractor shall ensure that work is executed in a professional
manner by skilled carpenters for good appearance, efficient and smooth operation of the
shutters.
All works shall be executed as per the detailed Drawing prepared by the Contractor and
approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.
All members of the door, window, and ventilator shall be straight without any warp or bow
and shall have smooth well planed faces. The right angle shall be checked from the inside
surfaces of the respective members of the frame. Frames shall have mortice and tenon
joints which shall be treated with an approved adhesive and provided with metal or wood
pins. The vertical members of the door frame shall project 50 mm below the finished floor
level. The finished dimension of frames shall be rebated on the solid for keying with the
plaster and for receiving the shutters. The depth of rebate for housing the shutter shall be 15
mm. The size of the frames shall be as specified in the respective items of work prepared
by the Contractor. The workmanship shall generally conform to the requirements specified
in IS : 4021.
The face of the frames abutting the masonry or concrete shall be provided with a coat of
coal tar.
Three hold fasts using 25mm x 6mm mild steel flats 225mm long with split ends shall be
fixed on each side of door and window frames, one at the centre and the other two at 300
mm from the top and bottom of the frame, for window and ventilator frames less than 1m
in height, two hold fasts on each side shall be fixed at quarter points. Timber panelled
shutters for doors, windows and ventilators shall be constructed in the form of framework
of stiles and rails with panel insertion. The panels shall be fixed by either providing
grooves in the stiles and rails or by beading. glazing bars shall be as detailed in the
Drawing prepared by the Contractor. The stiles and rails shall be joined by mortice and
tenon joints at right angles. All members of the shutter shall be straight without any warp or
bow and shall have smooth, well planed faces at right angles to each other. The right angle
for the shutter shall be checked by measuring the diagonals and the difference shall not be
more that + 3mm. Timber panels made from more than one piece shall be jointed with a
continuous tongued and grooved joint, glued together and reinforced with metal dowels.
The workmanship shall generally conform to the requirements specified in IS : 1003(Parts
1 & 2). The thickness of the shutter, width/thickness of the stiles/rails/panel type shall be as
specified. Marine plywood panels conforming to IS : 710 shall be used for doors where
specified.
Details of the wooden flush door shutters, solid core type with specific requirement of the
thickness, core, face panels, viewing glazed panel, venetian louvre opening, teak wood
lipping etc. shall be as specified and approved by Engineer-in-Charge. Panel of shutter shall
be of marine plywood conforming to IS: 710. Flush door shutters shall be from reputed
manufacturers and Contractor shall submit test results as per IS: 4020, if so desired by the
Engineer-in-Charge.
Glazing of door, window, ventilator and partitions shall be with either flat transparent sheet
glass, wired or figured glass. Transparent sheet glass be of ‘B’ quality as per IS: 2835. The
thickness and type of glazing to be provided shall be as specified.

The material of the fittings and fixtures either of chromium plated steel, cast brass, copper
oxidised or anodised aluminium shall be as specified. The number, size and type of the
fittings and fixtures shall be as specified.
Wood work shall not be provided with the finishes of painting / varnishing etc. unless it has
been approved by the Engineer-in-Charge. The type of finish and the number of coats shall
be as stipulated in the respective items of work prepared by the Contractor.
Wooden railing and architraves shall be of the size and shape with the fixing arrangement
as indicated in Drawing prepared by the Contractor. The framework of the partitions with
mullions and transomes shall be with the sections of dimensions as specified. Panels of
double/single glazing/plywood shall be fixed as per details specified. Partitions shall be
fixed rigidly between the floor and structural columns/beams including provision of
necessary shims for wedging etc. Finished work shall be of rigid construction, erected truly
plumb to the lines and levels, at locations as per construction Drawing prepared by the
Contractor.
Any carpentry work which show defects due to inadequate seasoning of the timber or bad
workmanship shall be removed and replaced by contractor with work as per Specifications.
5.6.10 Steel Doors, Windows and Ventilators
5.6.10.1 Materials
Hot rolled steel sections for the fabrication of steel doors, windows and ventilators shall
conform to IS: 7452 which are suitable for single glazing.
Pressed steel door frames for steel flush doors shall be out of 1.25mm thick mild steel
sheets of profiles as per IS: 4351.
Transparent sheet glass shall conform to the requirements of IS: 2835. Wired and figured
glass shall be as per IS: 5437.
Builder’s hardware of fittings and fixtures shall be of the best quality from the approved
manufacturers.
Hot rolled sections shall confirm to IS 7452 Fire check doors shall conform to IS 3614 Part
1 & 2. Steel windows for industrial buildings shall confirm to IS 1361.
All steel doors, windows and ventilators shall be of the type as specified in the respective
items of work prepared by the Contractor and of sizes as indicated in the Drawings
prepared by the contractor. Steel doors, windows and ventilators shall conform to the
requirements as stipulated in IS: 1038. Steel windows shall conform to IS: 1361 if so
specified.
Doors, windows and ventilators shall be of an approved manufacture. Fabrication of the
unit shall be with rolled section, cut to correct lengths and metered. Corners shall be welded
to form a solid fused welded joint conforming to the requirements of IS: 1038. Tolerance in
overall dimensions shall be within + 1.5mm. The frames and shutters shall be free from
warp or buckle and shall be square and truly plain. All welds shall be dressed flush on
exposed and contact surfaces. Punching of holes, slots and other provision to install fittings
and fixtures later shall be made at the correct locations as per the requirements. Samples of
the units shall be got approved by the Engineer-in-Charge before further
manufacture/purchase by the contractor.
Type and details of shutter, hinges, glazing bar requirement, coupling, locking
arrangement, fittings and fixtures shall be as described in the respective items of work
and/or as shown in the drawings prepared by the Contractor for single or composite units.
For windows with fly proof mesh as per the item of work prepared by the Contractor, rotor
operator arrangement, for the operation for the glazed shutters from the inside shall be
provided.
Pressed steel door frames shall be provided with fixing lugs at each jamb, hinges, lock
strike plate, mortar guards, angle threshold, shock-absorbers of rubber or similar materials
as per the requirements of IS : 4351. Pressed steel door frames shall be fixed as built-in as
the masonry work proceeds. After placing it plumb at the specified location, masonry walls
shall be built up solid on either side and each course grouted with mortar to ensure solid
contract with the door frame, without leaving any voids. Temporary struts across the width
shall be fixed, during erection to prevent bow/sag of the frame.
Door shutters of flush welded construction of section size 105 x 60 mm shall be 45mm
thick fabricated with two outer skills of 1.25mm thick steel sheets, 1mm thick steel sheet
stiffeners and steel channel on all four edges. Double shutters shall have meeting stile edge
bevelled or rebated. Provision of glazed panel, louvres shall be made as per the items of
works and/or Drawing prepared by the Contractor. Shutters shall be suitably reinforced for
lock and other surface hardware and to prevent sagging/twisting including hold fast of 15 x
3 mm MS oxidised fittings such as butt hinges, sliding bolts, handles tower bolts etc.
complete in all respect including applying priming coat of approved steel primer. Single
sheet steel door shutters shall be fabricated out of 1.25mm thick steel sheets, mild steel
angles and stiffeners as per the Drawings prepared by the Contractor.
MS sheet single leaf door shutter of 20 SWG in angle iron frame of 35x35x5 mm shall be
suitably diagonally braced with 25x3 mm flat iron above and below lock of size 50x5 mm
shall be provided only for Toilets.
Doors, windows and ventilators shall be fixed into the prepared opening. they shall not be
“build-in” as the masonry work proceeds, to avoid distortion and damage of the units. The
dimensions of the masonry opening shall have 10mm clearance around the overall
dimensions of the frame for this purpose. Any support of scaffolding members on the
frames/glazing bars is prohibited.
Glazing of the units shall be either with flat transparent glass or wired / figured glass of the
thickness as specified in the items of works prepared by the Contractor. All glass panels
shall have properly squared corner and straight edges. Glazing shall be provided on the
outside of the frames.
Fixing of the glazing shall be either with spring glazing clips and putty conforming to IS :
419 or with metal beads. Pre-formed PVC or rubber gaskets shall be provided for fixing the
beads with the concealed screws. The type of fixing the glazing shall be as indicated in the
items of work and/or in Drawings prepared by the Contractor.
Steel doors, windows and ventilators shall be provided with finish of either painting as
specified or shall be hot dip galvanised with thickness of the zinc coating as stipulated all
as described in the respective items of works prepared by the Contractor.
The material of the Builders hardware of fittings and fixtures of chromium plated steel, cast
brass, brass copper oxidised or anodised aluminium shall be as specified in the items of
works prepared by the Contractor. The number, size and type of fittings and fixture shall be
as in the Drawing / items of works prepared by the Contractor.
Installation of the units with fixing lugs, screw, mastic caulking compound at the specified
locations shall generally conform to the requirements of IS : 1081 . necessary holes etc
required for fixing shall be made by the Contractor and made good after installation.
workmanship expected is of a high order for efficient and smooth operation of the units.

5.6.11 Aluminum Doors, Windows, Ventilators & Partitions
5.6.11.1 Materials
Aluminium alloy used in the manufacturer of extruded sections of the fabrication of doors,
windows, ventilators shall conform to designation HE9-WP of IS: 733.
Transparent sheet glass shall conform to the requirements of IS: 2835. Wired and figured
glass shall be as per IS: 5437.
All aluminium doors, windows, ventilators and partitions shall be of the type and size as
specified. The doors, windows, ventilators shall conform to the requirements of IS : 1948.
Aluminium windows shall conform to IS : 1949; if so specified.
All aluminium units shall be supplied with anodized finish, the minimum anodic film
thickness shall be 0.015mm.
Doors windows and ventilators shall be of an approved manufacture. Fabrication of the
units shall be with the extruded sections, cut to correct lengths, mitred and welded at the
corners to a true right angle conforming to the requirements of IS: 1948. Tolerance in
overall dimensions shall be within + 1.5 mm. The frames and shutters shall be free from
warp or buckle and shall be square and truly plane. Punching of holes, slots and other
provisions to install fittings or fixtures later shall be made at the correct locations, as per the
requirements.
Aluminium swing type doors, aluminium sliding windows, partitions shall be as specified.
IS: 1948 and IS:1949 referred to incorporates the sizes, shapes, thickness and weight per
running metre of extruded sections for the various components of the units. However, new
sizes, shapes, thickness with modifications to suit snap-fit glazing clips etc. are being
continuously being added by various leading manufacturers of extruded sections, which are
available in the market. as such, the sections of the various components of the unit
proposed by the Contractor, will be reviewed by the Engineer-in-Charge and will be
accepted only if they are equal to or marginally more than that given in the codes/ad
specified.
The framework of partitions with mullions and transomes shall be with anodised
aluminium box sections. Anodised aluminium box sections shall be in-filled with timber of
class 3 (silver oak or any other equivalent) as per IS: 4021. The outer frame shall be of size
101.6 x 44.45 x 3.11mm rectangular tubular section and the shutter shall be made out of
specially extruded tubular section of size for sill member shall be 99.2 x 44.45 x 3.18mm
including glazing of 5.5 mm thick plain glass PVC/Neoprene weather stripping screwless
aluminium bidding fixer such as lock, handle, tower bolt and self closing device of
approved make. Panels of double / single glazing/plywood shall be fixed as per details
indicated in the Drawing to be prepared by the Contractor. Partitions shall be fixed rigidly
between the floor and the structural columns/beams including provision of necessary shims
for wedging etc. Finished work shall be of rigid construction, erected truly plumb to the
lines and levels, at locations as per the construction Drawings to be prepared by the
contractor.
Specific provisions as stipulated for steel doors, windows, ventilators under clause 8.7.8
shall also be applicable for this item work. Glazing beads shall be of the snap-fit type
suitable for the thickness of glazing proposed as indicated in the items of works prepared
by the contractor. a layer of clear transparent lacquer shall be applied on aluminium
sections to protect them from damage during installation. This lacquer coating shall be
removed after the installation is completed.
5.6.12 Steel Rolling Shutters
Rolled shutters shall be of an approved manufacture, conforming to the requirements

specified in IS: 6248.
The type of rolling shutter shall be self coiling type (manual) for clear areas upto 12 sq.m,
gear operated type (mechanical) for clear areas upto 35 sq.m and electrically operated type
for areas upto 50 sq.m. Mechanical type of rolling shutters shall be suitable for operation
from both inside and outside with the crank handle or chain gear operating mechanism duly
considering the size of wall/column. Electrical type of rolling shutter shall also be provided
with a facility for emergency mechanical operation.
Rolling shutters shall be supplied duly considering the type, specified clear width/height of
the opening and the location of fixing as indicated in the Drawings prepared by the
Contractor.
Rolling shutters of approved make, made of 80 x 1.25mm MS laths interlocked together
through their entire length and jointed together at the end by end locks mounted on
specially designed pipe shaft with brackets, side guides and arrangements for inside and
outside locking with mechanical device chain and crank operation for operating rolling
shutters exceeding 10.00 Sqm including spring hooks, providing and fixing necessary 25.3
cm long wire springs grade No.2 and MS top cover 1.25 mm thick (RS). Shutters shall be
built up of interlocking laths 75mm width between rolling centres formed from cold rolled
steel strips. The thickness of the steel strip shall not be less than 0.90mm for shutters upto
3.50m width and not less than 1.20mm for shutters above 3.50m width. Each lath section
shall be continuous single piece without any welded joint.
The guide channel out of mild steel sheets of thickness not less than 3.15 mm shall be of
either rolled, pressed or built up construction. The channel shall be of size as stipulated in
IS: 6248 for various clear widths of the shutters.
Hood covers shall be of mild steel sheets not less than 0.90mm thick and of approved
shape.
Rolling shutters shall be provided with a central hasp and staple safety device in addition to
one pair of lever locks and sliding locks at the ends.
All component parts of the steel rolling shutter (excepting springs and insides of guide
channel) shall be provided with one coat of zink chrome primer conformity to IS: 2074 at
the shop before supply. These surface shall be given and additional coat of primer after
erection at the site along with the number of coats and type of finish paint as specified in
the respective items of works prepared by the Contractor.
In case of galvanised rolling shutter, the lath sections, guides, lock plate, bracket plates,
suspension shaft and the hood cover shall be hot dip galvanised with a zinc coating
containing not less than 97.5 percent pure zinc. The weight of the zinc coating shall be at
least 610 gms/sq.m
Guide channels shall be installed truly plumb at the specified location. Bracket plate shall
be rigidly fixed with necessary bolts and holdfasts. Workmanship of erection shall ensure
strength and rigidly of rolling shutter for trouble free and smooth operation.
5.6.13 Base Concrete
The thickness and grade of concrete and reinforcement shall be as specified in items of
works prepared by the Contractor.
Before placing the blinding concrete, the sub-base of rubble packing shall be properly
wetted and rammed. Concrete for the base shall then be deposited between the forms,
thoroughly tamped and surface finished level with the top edges of the forms. Two or three
hours after the concrete has been laid in position, the surface shall be roughened using steel
wire brush to remove any scum or laitance and swept clean so that the coarse aggregates
are exposed. The surface of the base concrete shall be left rough to provide adequate bond
for the floor finish to be provided later.
5.6.14 Marble Flooring
5.6.14.1 Material
Marble stone flooring table rubbed with, 18 to 20 mm thick Makarana Adanga/andhiar/

Marble (upto tile size 1501 to 3600 sqcm) over 20 mm (Av.) thick base of CM 1:4 jointing
with white cement mortar 1:2 (1 white cement: 2 marble dust) with pigment to match the
shade of the marble slab including grinding, rubbing and polishing shall be provided.
Dressing of Slabs/Tiles
Every stone shall be cut to the required size and shape, fine chisel dressed on all sides to the
full depth so that a straight edge laid along the sides of the stone shall be fully in contact
with it. The top surface shall also be fine chisel dressed to remove all waviness. All angle
and edges of the marble slabs shall be true, square and free from chippings and the surface
shall be true and plane.
The thickness of the slab/tiles shall not be less than 18 mm to 20 mm thick.
Laying
Base concrete or the RCC slab on which the slabs are to be laid shall be cleaned, watted
and mopped. The bedding for the slab/tiles shall be with cement mortar 1:4 or with lime
mortar (1 lime putty : 1 surkhi : 1 coarse sand) as given in the description of the item.
The average thickness of the bedding mortar under the slab shall be 20 mm and the
thickness at any place under the slab shall be not less than 12 mm.
The slab/tiles shall be laid and jointed in the same manner as prescribed for terrazzo and
plain cement tiling work below.
Polishing & Finishing

The slab/tiles for flooring and for stair treads shall be delivered to site after the first
machine grinding. Machine grinding and polishing shall be commenced only after a lapse
of 14 days of laying. The sequence and three numbers of machine grinding operations,
usage of the type of carborundum stones, filling up of pin holes, watering etc upto granite
finish shall be carried out all as specified in IS: 1443.
5.6.15 Terrazzo and Plain Cement Tiling Work
5.6.15.1 Materials
Terrazzo tiles shall generally conform in all respects to standards stipulated in IS:1237.
Tiles shall be of the best quality manufactured adopting hydraulic pressure of not less than
14 N/mm2.
The type, quality, size, thickness, colour etc., of the tiles for flooring / dado / skirting shall
be as specified.
The aggregates for terrazzo topping shall consist of marble chips which are hard, sound and
dense. Cement to be used shall be either ordinary portland cement or white cement with or
without colouring pigments. The bidder mix shall be with 3 parts of cement to 1 part of
marble powder by weight. The proportion of cement shall be inclusive of any pigments. For
every one part of cement -marble powder binder mix, the proportion of aggregates shall be
1.75 parts by volume, if the chips are between 1 mm to 6 mm and 1.50 parts by volume if
the chips are between 6 mm to 25 mm.
The minimum thickness of wearing layer of terrazzo tiles shall be 5 mm for tiles with chips
of size varying from 1 mm upto 6 mm or from 1 mm upto 12 mm. This shall be 6 mm for
tiles with chips varying from 1 mm upto 25 mm. The minimum thickness of wearing layer
of cement /coloured cement tiles shall be 5 mm. This shall be 6 mm for heavy duty tiles .
Pigment used in the wearing layer shall not exceed 10 percent of the weight of cement used
in the mix.
Laying and finishing of tiles shall conform to the requirements of workmanship stipulated
in IS:1443.
Tiling work shall be commenced only after the door and window frames are fixed and
plastering of the walls/ceiling is completed. Tiles which are fixed to the floor adjoining the
wall shall go 10 mm under the plaster. Wall plastering shall not be carried out upto about
50 mm above the level of proposed skirting/dado.
The base concrete shall be furnished to a reasonably plane surface about 40 to 45 mm
below the level of finished floor. Before the tiling work is taken up, the base concrete or
structural slab shall be cleaned of all loose materials, mortar droppings, dirt, laitance etc.
using steel wire brush and well wetted without allowing any water pools on the surface.
A layer of 25 mm average thickness of cement mortar consisting of one part of cement to 6
parts of sand shall be provided as bedding for the tiles over the base concrete. The thickness
of bedding mortar shall not be less than 12 mm at any place. The quantity of water to be
added for the mortar shall be just adequate to obtain the workability for laying. Sand for the
mortar shall conform to IS:2116 and shall have minimum fineness modulus of 1.5. The
surface shall be left rough to provide a good bond for the tiles. The bedding shall be
allowed to harden for a day before laying of the tiles.
Neat cement slurry of honey like consistency using 4.4 kg of cement per sq. m. of floor
area shall be spread over the hardened mortar bedding over such an area at a time as would
accommodate about 20 tiles. Tiles shall be fixed in this slurry one after the other, each tile
being gently tapped with a wooden mallet till it is properly bedded and in level with the
adjoining tiles. The joints shall be in straight lines and shall normally be 1.5 mm wide. On
completion of laying of the tiles in a room, all the joints shall be cleaned and washed fairly
deep with a stiff broom/wire brush to a minimum depth of 5 mm. The day after the tiles
have been laid, the joints shall be filled with cement grout of the same shade as the colour
of the matrix of the tile. For this purpose white cement or grey cement with or without
pigments shall be used. The freshly laid portions of the tiles shall be prevented from
damage by providing suitable barriers. The flooring should be kept moist and left
undisturbed for 7 days for the bedding /joints to set properly. After this it may be used for
light traffic. Heavy traffic shall not be allowed on the floor for atleast 14 days after fixing
of the tiles.
About a week after laying the tiles, each and every tile shall be lightly tapped with a small
wooden mallet to find out if it gives a hollow sound; if it does, such tiles along with any
other cracked or broken tiles shall be removed and replaced with new tiles to proper line
and level. The same procedure shall be followed again after grinding the tiles and all
damaged tiles replaced, properly jointed and finished to match. For the purpose of ensuring

that such replaced tiles match with those laid earlier, it is necessary that the Contractor shall
procure sufficient quantity of extra tiles to meet this contingency.
Wherever a full tile cannot be provided, tiles shall be cut to size and fixed. Floor tiles
adjoining the wall shall go about 10 mm under the plaster, skirting or dado.
The skirting and dado work shall be executed only after laying tiles on the floor. For dado
and skirting work, the vertical wall surface shall be thoroughly cleaned and wetted.
Thereafter it shall be evenly and uniformly covered with 10 mm thick backing of 1:4
cement sand mortar. For this work the tiles as obtained from the factory shall be of the size
required and practically full polished. The back of each tile to be fixed shall be covered
with a thin layer of neat cement paste and tile shall then be gently tapped against the wall
with a wooden mallet. Fixing shall be done from the bottom of the wall upwards. The joints
shall be in straight lines and shall normally be 1.5 mm wide. Any difference in the
thickness of the tiles shall be evened out in the backing mortar or cement paste so that the
tile faces are in conformity and truly plumb. Tiles for use at the corners shall be suitably cut
with beveled edges to obtain a neat and true joint. After the work has set, hand polishing
with carborundum stones shall be done so that the surface matches with the floor finish.
Wall plastering of the strip left out above the level of skirting/dado shall be taken up after
the tiles are fixed.
Chequered terrazzo tiles for flooring and for stair treads shall be delivered to site after the
first machine grinding. Machine grinding and polishing shall be commenced only after a
lapse of 14 days of laying. The sequence and three numbers of machine grinding
operations, usage of the type of carborundum stones, filling up of pin holes, watering etc.
shall be carried out all as specified in IS: 1443.
Tiles shall be laid to the levels specified. Where large areas are to be tiled the level of the
central portion shall be kept 10 mm higher than that at the walls to overcome optical
illusion of a depression in the central portion. Localised deviation of ± 3 mm in any 3 m
length is acceptable in a nominally flat floor.
5.6.16 In -Situ Terrazzo Work
5.6.16.1 Materials
The requirements of marble aggregates for terrazzo topping shall be as per clause 5.6.15.1.
Cement shall first be mixed with the marble powder in dry state. The mix thus obtained
shall be mixed with the aggregates in the specified proportions. Care shall be taken not to
get the materials in to a heap which results in the coarsest chips falling to the edges and
cement working to the centre at the bottom. Materials shall be kept, as far as possible, in an
even layer during mixing. After the materials have been thoroughly mixed in the dry state,
water shall be added, just adequate to obtain plastic consistency for the desired workability
for laying. The mix shall be used in the works within 30 minutes of the addition of water to
the cement.
The thickness, type, quality, size and colour of chips etc. for the in-situ terrazzo finish for
flooring/dado/skirting shall be as specified in the respective items of works prepared by the
Contractor. Laying and finishing of in-situ work shall conform to the requirements of
workmanship stipulated in IS: 2114.
In-situ terrazzo finish shall be laid over hardened concrete base. The finish layer consists of
an under layer and terrazzo topping. The underlayer shall be of cement concrete of mix

1:2:4 using 10 mm down graded coarse aggregates. The combined thickness of under layer
and topping shall not be less than 30 mm for flooring and 20 mm for dado/skirting work.
The minimum thickness of toppings shall be 9 mm with marble size chips between 4 mm to
7 mm and 12 mm with chips size between 7 mm to 10 mm.
Both the underlayer and later the topping shall be divided into panels not exceeding 2 sqm
for laying so as to reduce the possibility of development of cracks. The longer dimension of
any panel shall not exceed 2 m. Dividing strips shall be used to separate the panels. When
the dividing strips are not provided, the bays shall be laid alternately, allowing an interval
of at least 24 hours between laying adjacent bays.
Dividing strips shall be either of aluminum, brass or other material as indicated in the items
of works prepared by the Contractor. Aluminum strips should have a protective coating of
bitumen. The thickness of the strips shall be not less than 1.5 mm and width not less than
25 mm for flooring work.
Concrete base shall be finished to a reasonably plane surface to a level below the finished
floor elevation equal to the specified thickness of terrazzo finish. Before spreading the
underlayer, the base concrete surface shall be cleaned of all loose materials, mortar
droppings, dirt, laitance etc. and well wetted without allowing any water pools on the
surface. Dividing strips or screed strips, if dividing strips are not provided shall be fixed on
the base and leveled to the correct height to suit the thickness of the finish. Just before
spreading the underlayer the surface shall be smeared with cement slurry at 2.75 Kg/sq.m.
Over this slurry, the underlayer shall be spread and leveled with a screeding board. The top
surface shall be left rough to provide a good bond for the terrazzo topping.
Terrazzo topping shall be laid while the underlayer is still plastic and normally between 18
to 24 hours after the underlayer is laid. Cement slurry of the same colour as the topping
shall be brushed on the surface immediately before laying is commenced. The terrazzo mix
shall be laid to a uniform thickness and compacted thoroughly by tamping and with a
minimum of troweling. Straight edge and steel floats shall be used to bring the surface true
to the required level in such a manner that the maximum amount of marble chips come up
and spread uniformly all over the surface.
The surface shall be left dry for air-curing for a period of 12 to 18 hours. Thereafter it shall
be cured by allowing water to stand in pools for a period of not less than 4 days. Machine
grinding and polishing shall be commenced only after a lapse of 7 days from the time of
completion of laying. The sequence and four numbers of machine grinding operations,
usage of the type of carborundum stones, filling up of pinholes, wet curing, watering etc.
5.6.17 Kota Stone Slab work
5.6.17.1 Materials
The slabs shall be of approved selected quality, hard, sound, dense and homogeneous in
texture, free from cracks, decay, weathering and flaws. The percentage of water absorption
shall not exceed 5 percent as per test conducted in accordance with IS: 1124.
The slabs shall be machine cut to the required thickness. Tolerance in thickness for
dimensions of tile more than 100 mm shall be ± 5 mm. This shall be ± 2 mm on dimensions
less than 100 mm.
Slabs shall be supplied to the specified size with machine cut edges to the full depth. All
angles and edges of the slabs shall be true and square, free from any chipping giving a
plane surface. Slabs shall have the top surface machine polished (first grinding) before
being brought to site. The slabs shall be washed clean before laying.

The type, size, thickness and colour/shade etc., of the slabs for flooring/dado/skirting shall
be as specified in the respective items of works prepared by the Contractor and approved by
Engineer-in-charge.
Preparation of the concrete base, laying and curing shall be as per clause 5.6.15.2.
Dado/skirting work shall be as per clause 5.6.15.2. The thickness of the slabs for
dado/skirting work shall not be more than 25 mm. Slabs shall be so placed that the back
surface is at a distance of 12 mm. If necessary, slabs shall be held in position temporarily
by suitable method. After checking for verticality, the gap shall be filled and packed with
cement sand mortar of proportion 1:3. After the mortar has acquired sufficient strength, the
temporary arrangement holding the slab shall be removed.
Chequered terrazzo tiles for flooring and for stair treads shall be delivered to site after the
first machine grinding. Machine grinding and polishing shall be commenced only after a
lapse of 14 days of laying. The sequence and three numbers of machine grinding
operations, usage of the type of carborundum stones, filling up of pin holes, watering etc.
5.6.18 Glazed Tile Finish
5.6.18.1 Materials
Glazed earthenware tiles shall conform to the requirements of IS: 777. Tiles shall be of the
best quality from an approved manufacturer. The tiles shall be flat, true to shape and free
from flaws such as crazing, blisters, pinholes, specks or welts. Edges and underside of the
tiles shall be free from glaze and shall have ribs or indentations for a better anchorage with
the bedding mortar. Dimensional tolerances shall be as specified in IS: 777.
The total thickness of glazed tile finish including the bedding mortar shall be 20 mm in
flooring/dado/skirting. The minimum thickness of bedding mortar shall be 12 mm for
flooring and 10 mm for dado/skirting work.
The bedding mortar shall consist of 1 part of cement to 3 parts of sand mixed with just
sufficient water to obtain proper consistency for laying. Sand for the mortar shall conform
to IS: 2116 and shall have minimum fineness modulus of 1.5.
Tiles shall be soaked in water for about 10 minutes just before laying. Where full size tiles
cannot be fixed, tiles shall be cut to the required size using special cutting device and the
edges rubbed smooth to ensure straight and true joints.
Coloured tiles with or without designs shall be uniform and shall be preferably procured
from the same batch of manufacture to avoid any differences in the shade.
Tiles for the flooring shall be laid over hardened concrete base. The surface of the concrete
base shall be cleaned of all loose materials, mortar droppings etc. well wetted without
allowing any water pools on the surface. The bedding mortar shall then be laid evenly over
the surface, tamped to the desired level and allowed to harden for a day. The top surface
shall be left rough to provide a good bond for the tiles. For skirting and dado work, the
backing mortar shall be roughened using a wire brush.
Neat cement slurry using 3.3 kg cement per sq. m. of floor area shall be spread over the
hardened mortar bed over such as area as would accommodate about 20 tiles. Tiles shall be
fixed in this slurry one after the other, each tile being gently tapped with a wooden mallet
till it is properly bedded and in level with the adjoining tiles. For skirting and dado work,
the back of the tiles shall be smeared with cement slurry for setting on the backing mortar.
Fixing of tiles shall be done from the bottom from the bottom of the wall upwards. The
joints shall be in perfect straight lines and as thin as possible but shall not be more than 1
mm wide. The surface shall be checked frequently to ensure correct level/required slope.
Floor tiles near the walls shall enter skirting/dado to a minimum depth of 10 mm. Tiles
shall not sound hollow when tapped.
All the joints shall be cleaned of gray cement with wire brush to a depth of atleast 3 mm
and all dust, loose mortar etc. shall be removed. White cement with or without pigment
shall then be used for flush pointing the joints. Curing shall then be carried out for a
minimum period of 7 days of the bedding and joints to set properly. The surface shall then
be cleaned using a suitable detergent, fully washed and wiped dry.
5.6.19 In-Situ Cement Concrete Floor Topping
5.6.19.1 Materials
The mix proportion for the in-situ concrete floor topping shall be 1:2.5:3.5 (one part
cement: two and half parts sand: three and half parts coarse aggregates) by volume unless
otherwise specified.
The aggregates shall conform for the requirements of IS: 383.
Coarse aggregates shall have high hardness surface texture and shall consist of crushed
rock of granite, basalt, trap or quartzite. The aggregate crushing valve shall not exceed 30
percent. The grading of the aggregates of size 12.5 mm and below shall be as per IS: 2571.
Grading of the sand shall be within the limits indicated in IS: 2571.
The thickness of the floor topping shall be as specified in the items of work prepared by the
Contractor. The minimum thickness of the floor topping shall be 25 mm.
Preparation of base concrete/structural slab before laying the topping shall be as per clause
5.6.13. The surface shall be rough to provide adequate bond for the topping.
Mixing of concrete shall be done thoroughly in mechanical mixer unless hand mixing is
specifically permitted by the Engineer-in-Charge. The concrete shall be as stiff as possible
and the amount of water added shall be the minimum necessary to give just sufficient
plasticity for laying and compacting. The mix shall be used in the work within 30 minutes
of the addition of water for its preparation.
Floor finish shall be laid in suitable panels to reduce the risk of cracking. No dimension of
a panel shall exceed 2 meters and the length of a panel shall not exceed one and a half times
its breadth. Topping shall be laid in alternate panels, the intermediate panels being cast
after a gap of atleast one day. Construction joints shall be plain vertical butt joints.
Screed strips shall be fixed dividing the area into suitable panels. Immediately before
depositing the concrete topping, neat cement slurry at 2.75 kg/sqm of area shall be
thoroughly brushed into the prepared surface. Topping shall then be laid, very thoroughly
tamped, struck off level and floated with wooden float. The surface shall then be tested
with a straight edge and mason’s spirit level to detect any inequalities and these shall be
made good immediately.
Finishing of the surface by troweling shall be spread over a period of one to six hours
depending upon the temperature and atmospheric conditions. The surface shall be trowelled
3 times at intervals so as to produce a smooth uniform and hard surface. Immediately after
laying, the first trowelling just sufficient to give a level surface shall be carried out
avoiding excessive trowelling at this stage. The surface shall be re-trowelled after sometime
to close any pores and to scrap off excess water or laitance, which shall not be trowelled
back into the topping. Final trowelling shall be done well before the concrete has become
too hard but at time when considerable pressure is required to make any impression on the
surface. Sprinkling of dry cement or cement sand mixture for absorbing moisture shall not
be permitted.
Immediately after the surface is finished, it shall be protected suitably from rapid drying
due to wind/sunlight. After the surface has hardened sufficiently to prevent any damage to
it, the topping shall be kept continuously moist for a minimum period of 10 days.
It is preferable to lay the topping on hardened base concrete, as against being laid
monolithically with a lesser thickness, since proper levels and slopes with close surface
tolerances is achievable in practice, owing to its greater thickness. Further, as this would be
laid after all other building operations are over, there will be no risk of any damages or
discoloration to the floor finish which are difficult to repair satisfactorily.
5.6.20 In-Situ Granolithic Concrete Floor Topping
The requirements of materials and workmanship shall be all as per clause 5.6.19 for in situ
cement concrete floor topping except that the mix proportion of the concrete shall be 1:1:2
(cement : sand : coarse aggregates) by volume.
The minimum thickness of granolithic floor topping on hardened concrete base shall be 40
mm.
5.6.21 Floor Hardener Topping
Floor Hardener topping shall be provided either as integrally finished over the structural
slab/grade slab or laid monolithically with the concrete/granolithic floor finish on top of
hardened concrete base.
Floor hardener of the metallic or non-metallic type suitable for the performance of
normal/medium /heavy duty function of the floor, the quantum of ingredients and the
thickness of topping shall be as specified in the respective items of work prepared by the
Contractor.
For monolithic application with the floor finish/slab the thickness of the layer shall be 15
mm. The topping shall be laid within 2 to 3 hours after concrete is laid when it is still
plastic but stiffened enough for the workmen to tread over it by placing planks. The surface
for the concrete layer shall be kept rough for providing adequate bond for the topping.
Laitance shall be removed before placing the topping. The topping shall be screed and
thoroughly compacted to the finished level. Trowelling to smooth finish shall be carried out
as per clause 5.6.19. After the surface has hardened sufficiently, it shall be kept
continuously moist for atleast 10 days.
The procedure for mixing the floor hardener topping shall be as per mnanufacturer’s
instructions.
Surface shall be prevented from any damages due to subsequent building operations by
covering with 75 mm thick layer of sand.

5.6.22 PVC Sheet/Tile Flooring
5.6.22.1 Materials
PVC floor covering shall be of either unbacked homogeneous flexible type in the form of
sheets/tiles conforming to IS:3462 or homogeneous PVC asbestos tiles conforming to IS:
3461.
The surface of the sheet/tiles shall be free from any physical defects such as pores, blisters,
cracks etc. which affects the appearance and serviceability. Tiles /sheets shall meet with the
tolerance limits in dimensions specified in the IS. Contractor shall submit the test
certificates, if so desired by the Engineer-in-Charge.
Each tile/sheet shall be legible and indelibly marked with the name of the manufacturer or
his trade mark, IS certificate mark, and batch number.
The adhesive to be used for laying the PVC flooring shall be rubber based and of the make
as recommended and approved by the manufacturer of PVC sheets/tiles.
The type, size, colour, plain or mottled and the pattern shall be as specified in the respective
items of work prepared by the Contractor.
PVC Floor covering shall be provided over an underbed of cement concrete floor finish
over the base concrete or structural slab. It is essential that the sub-floor and the underbed
are perfectly dry before laying the PVC flooring. This shall be ensured by methods of
testing as stipulated in Appendix -A of IS: 5318.
The surface of the underbed shall have trowelled finish without any irregularities which
creates poor adhesion. Surface shall be free of oil or grease and thoroughly cleaned of all
dust, dirt and wiped with a dry cloth.
PVC sheets/tiles shall be brought to the temperature of the area in which they are to be laid
by stacking in a suitable manner within or near the laying area for a period of about 24
hours. Where air-conditioning is installed, the flooring shall not be laid on the underbed
until the A/C units have been in operation for atleast 7 days. During this period, the
temperature range shall be between 20 deg. C and 30 deg. C and this shall be maintained
during the laying operations and also for 48 hours thereafter.
Layout of the PVC flooring shall be marked with guidelines on the underbed and PVC
tiles/sheets shall be first laid for trial, without using the adhesive, according to the layout.
The adhesive shall be applied by using a notched trowel to the surface of the underbed and
to the backside of PVC sheets/tiles. When the adhesive has set sufficiently for laying, it will
be tacky to the touch, which generally takes about 30 minutes. The time period need be
carefully monitored since a longer interval will affect the adhesive properties. Adhesive
shall be uniformly spread over only as much surface area at one time which can be covered
with PVC flooring within the stipulated time.
PVC sheet shall be carefully taken and placed in position from one end onwards slowly so
that the air will be completely squeezed out between the sheet and the background surface
and no air pockets are formed. It shall then be pressed with a suitable roller to develop
proper contact. The next sheet shall be laid edge to edge with the sheet already laid, so that
there is minimum gap between joints. The alignment shall be checked after each row of
sheet is completed and trimmed if considered necessary. Tiles shall be laid in the same
manner as sheets and preferably, commencing from the centre of the area. Tiles should be
lowered in position and pressed firmly on to the adhesive with minimum gap between the
joints. Tiles shall not be slided on the surface. Tiles shall be rolled with a light wooden

roller of about 5 kg to ensure full contact with the underlay. Work should be constantly
checked to ensure that all four edges of adjacent tiles meet accurately.
Any excess adhesive which may squeeze up between sheet/tiles shall be wiped off
immediately with a wet cloth. Suitable solvents shall be used to remove hardened adhesive.
A minimum period of 24 hours shall be given after laying for the development of proper
bond of the adhesive. When the flooring is thus completed, it shall be cleaned with a wet
cloth soaked in warm soap solution.
Metallic edge strips shall be used to protect the edges of PVC sheets/tiles which are
exposed as in doorways/stair treads.
Hot sealing of joints between adjacent PVC sheet flooring to prevent creeping of water
through the joints shall be carried out, using special equipment as per manufacturer’s
instructions.
5.6.23 Acid Resisting Brick / Tiling Work (for lab)
5.6.23.1 Materials
The ceramic unglazed vitreous acid resisting tiles shall conform to the requirements of IS:
4457. Acid resistant bricks shall conform to the requirements of IS: 4860.
The finished tile/brick when fractured shall appear fine grained in texture, dense and
homogeneous. Tile/brick shall be sound, true to shape, flat, free from flaws and any
manufacturing defects affecting their utility. Tolerance in dimensions shall be within the
limits specified in the respective IS.
The tiles/bricks shall be bedded and jointed using chemical resistant mortar of the resin
type conforming to IS: 4832 (Part II). Method of usage shall generally be as per the
requirements of IS: 4443.
The resin shall have viscosity for readily mixing with the filler by manual methods. The
filler shall have graded particles, which permit joint thickness of 1.5 mm.
The base concrete surface shall be free form dirt and thoroughly dried. The surface shall be
applied with a coat of bitumen primer conforming to IS: 3384. The primed surface shall
then be applied with a uniform coat of bitumen conforming to IS: 1580. Tiles or bricks
shall be laid directly without the application of bitumen, if epoxy or polyester resin is used
for the mortar.
Just adequate quantity of mortar which can be applied within the pot life as specified by the
manufacturer shall be prepared at one time for bedding and jointing. Rigid PVC/Stainless
Steel/chromium plated tools shall be used for mixing and laying.
For laying the floor 6 to 8 mm thick mortar shall be spread on the back of the tile/brick.
Two adjacent sides of the tile/brick shall be smeared with 4 to 6 mm thick mortar.
Tile/brick shall be pressed into the bed and pushed against the floor and with the adjacent
tile/brick, until the joint in each case is 2 to 3 mm thick. Excess mortar shall then be
trimmed off and allowed to harden fully. Similar procedure shall be adopted for the work
on walls by pressing the tile/brick against the prepared wall surfaces and only one course
shall be laid at a time until the initial setting period.
The mortar joints shall be cured for a minimum period of 72 hours with 20 to 25%
hydrochloric acid or 30 to 40% sulphuric acid. After acid curing, the joints shall then be
washed with water and allowed to thoroughly dry. The joints shall then be filled with
mortar to make them smooth and plane. Acid curing is not required to be carried out if
epoxy or polyester and furane type of resin is used for the mortar.
Resin mortars are normally self curing. The area tiled shall not be put to use before 48
hours in case epoxy, polyester and furane type of resin is used for the mortar. If phenolic or
cashew nut shell liquid resin is used for the mortar, the area tiled shall not be put to use for
7 to 28 days respectively, without heat treatment. This period shall be 2 to 6 days
respectively, if heat treatment is given with infrared lamp.
5.6.24 Epoxy Lining Work
5.6.24.1 Materials
The epoxy resin and hardener formulation for laying of jointless lining work in floors and
walls of concrete tanks/trenches etc. shall be as per the requirements of IS: 9197.
The epoxy composition shall have the chemical resistance to withstand the following
conditions of exposure:
a) Hydrochloric acid upto 30% concentration
b) Sodium hydroxide upto 50% concentration
c) Liquid temperature upto 60 deg. C.
d) Ultraviolet radiation
e) Alternate wetting and drying
Sand shall conform to grading zone III or IV of IS: 383.
The hardener shall be of the liquid type such as aliphatic Amine or an Aliphatic/Aromatic
Amine Adduct for the epoxy resin. The hardener shall react with epoxy resin at normal
ambient temperature.
Contractor shall furnish test certificates for satisfying the requirements of the epoxy
formulation if so directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
The minimum thickness of epoxy lining shall be 4 mm. It is essential that the concrete
elements are adequately designed to ensure that water is excluded to permeate to the
surface, over which the epoxy lining is proposed.
The epoxy lining shall be of the trowel type to facilitate execution of the required thickness
for satisfactory performance.
The concrete surfaces over which epoxy lining is to be provided shall be thoroughly
cleaned of oil or grease by suitable solvents, wire brushed to remove any dirt/dust and
laitance. The surfaces shall then be washed with dilute hydrochloric acid and rinsed
thoroughly with plenty of water or dilute ammonia solution. The surfaces shall then be
allowed to dry. It is essential to ensure that the surfaces are perfectly dry before the
commencement of epoxy application.
Just adequate quantity of epoxy resin which can be applied within the pot life as specified
by the manufacturer shall be prepared at one time for laying and jointing.
Rigid PVC/stainless steel/chromium plated tools shall be used for laying. Trowelling shall
be carried out to obtain uniformly the specified thickness of lining.
Lining shall be allowed to set without disturbance for a minimum period of 24 hours. The
facility shall be put to use only after a minimum period of 7 days of laying of the lining.

5.6.25 Water -Proofing
5.6.25.1 General
The work shall include waterproofing for the building roofs, terraces, toilets, floor slabs,
walls, and any other areas and at any other locations and situations as directed by the
Engineer-In-Charge. The water proofing shall be done only for flat slabs.
The waterproofing treatment shall be carried out on top of brick bat coba laid in cement
sand mortar 1:4 in square pattern having a thickness 75 to 100 mm so as to maintain a roof
slope of 1 in 60. The brick bats shall be covered by 25 mm thick finishing coat of cement
sand mortar 1:4 mix including water proofing compound @ 2% of cement used.
The work shall be carried out by an experienced specialist Sub-Contractor who shall be
appointed only after prior approval of the Engineer-in-Charge.
5.6.25.2 Modified Bituminous Membrane
Modified Bituminous Membrane shall be “SUPER THERMOLAY” 4 mm thick weighing

4 Kg/sq.m, manufactured using APP Polymer modified bitumen with a central core of non-
woven polyester reinforcement (200 gms/sqm) and with top and bottom layers of
thermofusible film (top layer could also be sand finished) of stanoland make, duly
approved by the EIC.
5.6.25.3 Water proofing of Horizontal Surfaces (Pumping

Station)
The waterproofing shall be applied as follows:

Bitumen primer shall confirm to IS: 3384. Bitumen felt shall confirm to IS: 1322 & IS:
7193. Bonding material for used between successive felts and between roof surface and felt
shall confirm to industrial blown type bitumen of grade 85/25 or 90/15 confirming to IS:
702. For top dressing bitumen shall be industrial blown type as per IS: 702 of penetration
note more than 40.
A roll of Modified Bituminous Membrane shall be unrolled over the primed surface and
completely bonded to the substrate by pressing down even for the full width of the roll
using a wooden roller. Torching shall be done, where recommended by the manufacture
and where directed by the Engineer-in-Charge, as the unrolling progresses.
The side overlaps shall be minimum 100 mm whereas the end overlaps shall be minimum
150 mm; both shall be bonded and sealed by flame torching.
Care shall be taken that the membrane is lapped with the treatment along the vertical
surface and roof gutter treatment for at least 500 mm.
The membrane shall be properly overlapped/terminated at all openings, rainwater
downtakes etc. to ensure that such junctions do not become sources of leakage.
Top of membrane finally shall be painted with anti-glow reflective paint.
5.6.25.4 Waterproofing of Vertical Surfaces at Roof Level and

Gutters
The waterproofing shall be applied as described in (a) above.

Modified Bituminous membrane shall be unrolled and bonded to the substrate after
applying a coat of bitumen and by pressing down evenly for the full width of the roll.
Light torching shall be done to ensure complete bonding.

The membrane shall be overlapped with treatment for the horizontal surface by at least 500
mm. The membrane shall be taken upto a pre-cut chase anchored and sealed.
5.6.25.5 Khurras and Rainwater Down Pipes
Down pipes shall be isolated from RCC work with 6 mm polyethylene foam fixed with
adhesive (Araldite) and sealed with silicone sealant prior to laying membrane. A water
proofing flashing composed of one layer of Hessain based self finished felt Type 3 Grade 1
and two layers of aluminium foil of 0.075 mm thickness shall be provided. This flashing
shall be carried into the down take pipes for at least 150 mm and sealed with hot bitumen.
The Contractor shall closely coordinate the work with the agency providing and fixing the
rainwater down take pipes.
5.6.25.6 Testing
The treated area (flat and horizontal only shall be tested by allowed water to stand on the
treated areas to a depth of 150 mm for a minimum period of 72 hours.
The treated area (flat and horizontal) shall have continuous slope towards the rainwater
outlets and no water shall pond anywhere on the surface.
5.6.26 Cement Plastering Work
5.6.26.1 Materials
The proportions of the cement mortar for plastering shall be 1:4 (one part of cement to four
parts of sand). Cement and sand shall be mixed thoroughly in dry condition and then just
enough water added to obtain a workable consistency. The quality of water and cement
shall be as per relevant IS standards. The quality and grading of sand for plastering shall
conform to IS: 1542. The mixing shall be done thoroughly in a mechanical mixer unless
hand mixing is specifically permitted by the Engineer-in-Charge. If so desired by the
Engineer-in-Charge sand shall be screened and washed to meet the Specifications. The
mortar thus mixed shall be used as soon as possible preferably within 30 minutes from the
time water is added to cement. In case the mortar has stiffened due to evaporation of water
this may be re-tempered by adding water as required to restore consistency but this will be
permitted only upto 30 minutes from the time of initial mixing of water to cement. Any
mortar which is partially set shall be rejected and removed forthwith from the site.
Droppings of plaster shall not be re-used under any circumstances.
Preparation of surfaces and application of plaster finishes shall generally conform to the
requirements specified in IS: 1661 and IS: 2402.
Plastering operations shall not be commenced until installation of all fittings and fixtures
such as door/ window panels, pipes, conduits etc. are completed.
All joints in masonry shall be raked as the work proceeds to a depth of 10 mm / 20mm for
brick/ stone masonry respectively with a tool made for the purpose when the mortar is still
green. The masonry surface to be rendered shall be washed with clean water to remove all
dirt, loose materials, etc., Concrete surfaces to be rendered shall be roughened suitably by
hacking or bush hammering for proper adhesion of plaster and the surface shall be evenly
wetted to provide the correct suction. The masonry surfaces should not be too wet only

damp at the time of plastering. The dampness shall be uniform to get uniform bond
between the plaster and the masonry surface.
Interior plain faced plaster

This plaster shall be laid in a single coat of 12 mm thickness. The mortar shall be dashed
against the prepared surface with a trowel. The dashing of the coat shall be done using a
strong whipping motion at right angles to the face of the wall or it may be applied with a
plaster machine. The coat shall be trowelled hard and tight forcing it to surface depressions
to obtain a permanent bond and finished to smooth surface. Interior plaster shall be carried
out on jambs, lintel and sill faces, etc. as shown in the drawing and as directed by the
Engineer-in-Charge.
Plain Faced Ceiling plaster

This shall be applied in a single coat of 6 mm thickness. Application of mortar shall be as
stipulated in above paragraph.
Exterior plain faced plaster

This plaster shall be applied in 2 coats. The first coat or the rendering coat shall be
approximately 14 mm thick. The rendering coat shall be applied as stipulated above except
finishing it to a true and even surface and then lightly roughened by cross scratch lines to
provide bond for the finishing coat. The rendering coat shall be cured for atleast two days
and then allowed to dry. The second coat or finishing coat shall be 6mm thick. Before
application of the second coat, the rendering coat shall be evenly damped. The second coat
shall be applied from top to bottom in one operation without joints and shall be finished
leaving an even and uniform surface. The mortar proportions for the coats shall be as
specified in the respective item of work. The finished plastering work shall be cured for
atleast 7 days.
Interior plain faced plaster 20 mm thick if specified for uneven faces of brick walls or for
random/ coursed rubble masonry walls shall be executed in 2 coats similar to the procedure
stipulated in above paragraph.
For external plaster, the plastering operation shall be commenced from the top floor and
carried downwards. For internal plaster, the plastering operations for the walls shall
commence at the top and carried downwards. Plastering shall be carried out to the full
length of the wall or to natural breaking points like doors/ windows etc. Ceiling plaster
shall be completed first before commencing wall plastering.
Double scaffolding shall be used as specified:
The finished plaster surface shall not show any deviation more than 4mm when checked
with a straight edge of 2 m length placed against the surface.
To overcome the possibility of development of cracks in the plastering work following
measures shall be adopted.
1. Plastering work shall be deferred as much as possible so that fairly complete drying
shrinkage in concrete and masonry works take place.
2. Steel wire fabric shall be provided at the junction of brick masonry and concrete to
overcome reasonably the differential drying shrinkage/thermal movement.
3. Ceiling plaster shall be done, with a trowel cut at its junction with wall plaster.
Similarly trowel cut shall be adopted between adjacent surfaces where discontinuity of
the background exists.

5.6.27 Cement Pointing
5.6.27.1 Materials
The cement mortar for pointing shall be in the proportion of 1:3 (one part of cement to
three parts of fine sand). Sand shall conform to IS: 1542 and shall be free from clay, shale,
loam, alkali and organic matter and shall be of sound, hard, clean and durable particles.
Sand shall be approved by Engineer-in-Charge and if so directed it shall be washed/
screened to meet specification requirements.
Where pointing of joints in masonry work is specified, the joints shall be raked at least 15
mm/20 mm deep in brick/stone masonry respectively as the work proceeds when the mortar
is still green.
Any dust/ dirt in the raked joints shall be brushed out clean and the joints shall be washed
with water. The joints shall be damp at the time of pointing. Mortar shall be filled into
joints and well pressed with special steel trowels. The joint shall not be disturbed after it
has once begun to set. The joints of the pointed work shall be neat. The lines shall be
regular and uniform in breadth and the joints shall be raised, flat, sunk or ‘V’ as may be
specified in the respective items of work. No false joints shall be allowed.
The work shall be kept moist for atleast 7 days after the pointing is completed. Wherever
coloured pointing has to be done, the colouring pigment of the colour required shall be
added to cement in such proportions as recommended by the manufacturer and as approved
by the Engineer-in-Charge.
5.6.28 Water-Proofing Admixtures
Water-proofing admixtures shall conform to the requirements of IS: 2645 and shall be of
approved manufacture. The admixture shall not contain calcium chloride. The quantity of
the admixture to be used for the works and method of mixing etc. shall be as per
manufacturer’s instructions and as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
5.6.29 Painting of Concrete, Masonry & Plastered Surfaces
5.6.29.1 Materials
Oil bound distemper shall conform to IS: 428. The primer shall be alkali resistant primer of
the same manufacture as that of the distemper.
Lead free acid, alkali and chlorine resisting paint shall conform to IS: 9862.
Colour wash shall be made by addition of a suitable quantity of mineral pigment, not
affected by lime, to the prepared white wash to obtain the shade/tint as approved by the
Engineer-in-Charge.
All the materials shall be of the best quality from an approved manufacturer. Contractor
shall obtain prior approval of the Engineer-in-Charge for the brand of manufacture and the
colour/shade. All materials shall be brought to the site of works in sealed containers.

Contractor shall obtain the approval of the Engineer-in-Charge regarding the readiness of
the surfaces to receive the specified finish, before commencing the work on painting.
Painting of new surfaces shall be deferred as much as possible to allow for thorough drying
of the sub-strata.
The surfaces to be treated shall be prepared by thoroughly brushing them free from dirt,
mortar droppings and any loose foreign materials. Surfaces shall be free from oil, grease
and efflorescence. Efflorescence shall be removed only by dry brushing of the growth.
Cracks shall be filled with Gypsum. Workmanship of painting shall generally conform to
IS: 2395.
5.6.29.3 White Wash
The prepared surfaces shall be wetted and the finish applied by brushing. The operation for
each coat shall consist of a stroke of the brush first given horizontally from the right and the
other from the left and similarly, the subsequent stroke from bottom upwards and the other
form top downwards, before the first coat dries. Each coat shall be allowed to dry before
the next coat is applied. Minimum of 2 coats shall be applied unless otherwise specified.
The dry surface shall present a uniform finish without any brush marks.
5.6.29.4 Colour Wash
Colour wash shall be applied in the same way as for white wash. A minimum of 2 coats
shall be applied unless otherwise specified. The surface shall present a smooth and uniform
finish without any streaks. The finished dry surface shall not show any signs of peeling/
powdery and come off readily on the hand when rubbed.
5.6.29.5 Cement Paint
The prepared surfaces shall be wetted to control surface suction and to provide moisture to
aid in proper curing of the pain. Cement paint shall be applied with a brush with stiff
bristles. The primer coat shall be a thinned coat of cement paint. The quantity of thinner
shall be as per manufacturer’s instructions. The coats shall be vigorously scrubbed to work
the paint into any voids for providing a continuous paint film free form pinholes for
effective water proofing in addition to decoration. Cement paint shall be brushed in
uniform thickness and the covering capacity for two coats on plastered surfaces shall be 3
to 4 kg/ sq.m. A minimum of 3 coats of the same colour shall be applied. Atleast 24 hours
shall be left after the first coat to become sufficiently hard before the second coat is applied.
The painted surfaces shall be thoroughly cured by sprinkling with water using a fog spray
at least 2 to 3 times a day. Curing shall commence after about 12 hours when the paint
hardens. Curing shall be continued for atleast 2 days after the application of final coat. The
operations for brushing each coat shall be as detailed above.
5.6.29.6 Oil bound Distemper
The prepared surfaces shall be dry and provided with one coat of alkali resistant primer by
brushing. The surface shall be finished uniformly without leaving any brush marks and
allowed to dry for atleast 48 hours. A minimum of two coats of oil bound distemper shall
be applied, unless otherwise specified. The first coat shall be of a lighter tint. Atleast 24
hours shall be left after the first coat to become completely dry before the application of the
second coat. Broad, stiff, double bristled distemper brushed shall be used for the work. The
operations for brushing each coat shall be as detailed above.
5.6.29.7 Acid, Alkali Resisting Paint
A minimum of 2 coats of acid/ alkali resisting paint shall be applied over the prepared dry
surfaces by brushing. Primer coat shall be as per manufacturer’s instructions.
5.6.29.8 Acrylic Emulsion Paint
Acrylic emulsion paint shall be applied in the same way as for plastic emulsion paint. A
minimum of 2 finishing coats over one coat of primer shall be provided unless otherwise
specified.
5.6.30 Painting & Polishing of Wood Work
5.6.30.1 Materials
a) Wood primer shall conform to IS : 3536

b) Filler shall conform to IS : 110
c) Varnish shall conform to IS : 337
d) French polish shall conform to IS : 348
e) Synthetic enamel paint conform to IS : 2932
colour/ shade. All materials shall be brought to the site of works in sealed containers.
The type of finish to be provided for woodwork of either painting or polishing, the number
coats, etc. shall be as specified in the respective items of work to be prepared by the
Contractor.
Primer and finish paint shall be compatible with each other to avoid cracking and
wrinkling. Primer and finish paint shall be from the same manufacturer.
Painting shall be either by brushing or spraying. Contractor shall procure the appropriate
quality of paint for this purpose as recommended by the manufacturer. The workmanship
shall generally conform to the requirements of IS: 2338 (Part I).
All the wood surfaces to be painted shall be thoroughly dry and free from any foreign
matter. Surfaces shall be smoothened with abrasive paper using it across the grains and
dusted off. Wood primer coat shall then be applied uniformly by brushing. The number of
primer coats shall be as specified in the item of work to be prepared by the Contractor. Any
slight irregularities of the surface shall then be made-up by applying an optimum coat of
filler conforming to IS: 110 and rubbed down with an abrasive paper for obtaining a
smooth surface for the undercoat of synthetic enamel paint conforming to IS: 2932. Paint
shall be applied by brushing evenly and smoothly by means of crossing and laying off in
the direction of the grain of wood. After drying, the coat shall be carefully rubbed down
using very fine grade of sand paper and wiped clean before the next coat is applied. Atleast
24 hours shall elapse between the application of successive coats. Each coat shall vary
slightly in shade and this shall be got approved by the Engineer-in-Charge. The number of

coats of paint to be applied shall be as specified in the item of work to be prepared by the
Contractor.
All the wood surfaces to be provided with clear finishes shall be thoroughly dry and free
from any foreign matter. Surfaces shall be smoothened with abrasive paper using it in the
direction of the grains and dusted off. Any slight irregularities of the surface shall be made
up by applying an optimum coat of transparent liquid filler and rubbed down with an
abrasive paper for obtaining a smooth surface. All dust and dirt shall be thoroughly
removed. Over this prepared surface, vanish conforming to IS: 337 shall be applied by
brushing. Varnish should not be retouched once it has begun to set. Staining if required
shall be provided as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. When two coats of varnish is
specified, the first coat should be a hard-drying undercoat or flatting varnish which shall be
allowed to dry hard before applying the finishing coat. The number of coats to be applied
shall be as specified. For works where clear finish of French polish is specified the
prepared surfaces of wood shall be applied with the polish using a pad of woolen cloth
covered by a fine cloth. The pad shall be moistened with polish and rubbed hard on the
surface in a series of overlapping circles to give an even finish over the entire area. The
surface shall be allowed to dry before applying the next coat. Finishing shall be carried out
using a fresh clean cloth over the pad, slight dampening with methylated spirit and rubbing
lightly and quickly in circular motions. The finished surface shall have a uniform texture
and high gloss. The number of coats to be applied shall be as specified.
5.6.31 Painting of Steel Work
5.6.31.1 Materials
a) Zinc chrome primer shall conform to IS: 2074

b) Synthetic enamel paint shall conform to IS: 2932
c) Aluminium paint shall conform to IS: 2339
colour/ shade. All the materials shall be brought to the site in sealed containers.
Painting work shall be carried out only on thoroughly dry surfaces. Painting shall be
applied either by brushing or by spraying. Contractor shall procure the appropriate quality
of paint for this purpose as recommended by the manufacturer. The workmanship shall
generally conform to the requirement of IS: 1477 (Part 2).
The type of paint, number of costs etc. shall be as specified in the respective items of work.
Primer and finish paint shall be compatible with each other to avoid cracking and
wrinkling. Primer and finish paint shall be from the same manufacturer.
All the surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned of oil, grease, dirt, rust and scale. The methods
to be adopted using solvents, wire brushing, power tool cleaning etc., shall be as per IS:
1477 (Part - I) and as indicated in the item of work.
It is essential to ensure that immediately after preparation of the surfaces, the first coat of
red oxide-zinc chrome primer shall be applied by brushing and working it well to ensure a
continuous film without holidays. After the first coat becomes hard dry, a second coat of
primer shall be applied by brushing to obtain a film free from ‘holidays’. After the second
coat of primer is hard dry, the entire surface shall be wet rubbed cutting down to a smooth
uniform surface. When the surface becomes dry, the under cost of synthetic enamel paint of
optimum thickness shall be applied by brushing with minimum of brush marks. The coat
shall be allowed to hard dry. The under coat shall then be wet rubbed cutting down to a
smooth finish, taking adequate care to ensure that at no place the undercoat is completely
removed. The surface shall then be allowed to dry.
The first finishing coat of paint shall be applied by brushing and allowed to hard dry. The
gloss from the entire surface shall then be gently removed and the surface dusted off. The
second finishing coat shall then be applied by brushing.
At least 24 hours shall elapse between the applications of successive coats. Each coat shall
vary slightly in shade and this shall be got approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.
5.6.32 Plaster of Paris Board False Ceiling
5.6.32.1 Materials
Plaster of Paris Boards

The plaster of Paris boards to be used in the false ceiling shall be of an approved
manufacture of manufactured at site by methods and materials approved by Engineer-in-
Charge. The plaster of Paris shall be of the calcium-sulphate semi-hydrate variety and shall
contain not less than 35 percent sulfur trioxide and other requirements as per IS: 2547 (Part
- I) However, its fineness shall be such that the residue, after drying, and sieving on I.S.
sieve designation 3.35 mm for 5 minutes shall not be more than 1 percent by weight. Initial
setting time shall not be less than 13 minutes. The average compressive strength of plaster
determined by testing 5 cm cubes 24 hours after removal from moulds and drying in an
oven at 40 Deg. C till the weight of the cubes is constant, shall not be less than 84 Kg per
sq. cm.
The plaster of Paris boards reinforced with Hessian cloth or coir shall be prepared in
suitable sizes as shown on the drawings or as directed by Engineer-in-Charge. Wooden
forms of height equal to the thickness of boards shall be placed on truly level and smooth
surface such as a glass sheet. The edges of the boards shall be truly square. The glass sheet
or surface on which form is kept and the form sides shall be given a thin coat of non-
staining oil to facilitate the easy removal of the board. Plaster of Paris shall be evenly
spread into the form up to about half the depth and Hessian cloth or coir shall be pressed
over the plaster of Paris layer. The weight of Hessian cloth or coir in the board shall be 250
gm per sq. m. The ends of the Hessian/ coir reinforcement shall be turned over at all edges
to form a double layer for a width of 50 mm. The Hessian cloth shall be of an open wed
texture so as to allow the plaster below and above to intermix with each other and form an
integral board. The form shall then be filled with plaster of Paris, which shall be uniform
pressed and the wire cut to an even and smooth surface. The board shall then be allowed to
set initially for an hour or so and then removed from the form and allowed to dry and
harden for about a week. The board after drying and hardening shall give a ringing sound
when struck. The boards shall be true and exact to shape and size and the exposed face
shall be truly plane and smooth. The size of boards shall generally be 600 mm x 600 mm x
12 mm thick. Boards shall be kept dry in transit and stored flat in a clean dry place and
shall not be exposed to moisture. The boards shall always be carried on edges.
Timber Frame Work

Timber for framework of false ceiling grid and hangers shall be of good quality and well
seasoned. It shall have uniform colour, reasonably straight and close grains and shall be
free from knots, cracks and sapwood. It shall be treated with approved anti-termite

preservative as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. Extreme care shall be taken so that the
preservative treatment does not stain the ceiling boards. In case metal hangers are used,
these shall be M.S. flats or bars, having two coats of red oxide zinc chromate paint primer,
as shown on drawings or as approved by Engineer-in-Charge.
Metal Frame Work

The metal frame work may be made of sections of light metal, such as anodized aluminium,
mild steel or as shown on the drawings. The shape of cross-section shall be such as to
facilitate proper suspension and proper fixing of the ceiling boards covering them and shall
be structurally sound and rigid.
5.6.32.2 Construction
Contractor shall ensure that the frame to support the ceiling is designed for structural
strength and the sizes, weight and strength of ceiling boards to be fixed and other loads due
to live load, air-conditioning ducts, grills, electrical wiring and lighting fixtures, thermal
insulation, etc. as shown on the drawings. Contractor shall also submit a detailed drawing
to show the grid work, sizes of grid members, method of suspension, position of openings
for air-conditioning and lighting, access doors, etc.
Structural design of timber member for the frame shall be in accordance with IS: 883, and
metal sections shall be of appropriate size and thickness and shall be approved
manufacture, all as approved by Engineer-in-Charge.
The false ceiling grid work shall be carried out as per the approved drawings or as directed
by Engineer-in-Charge. In case of timber grid work, the grid shall consist of teak wood
runners of minimum size 60 mm deep x 40 mm wide along one direction at 1.2 m centre to
centre and secondary runners of size 50 mm deep to 40 mm wide at 60 mm centre to centre
perpendicular to the main runners.
The timber grid work shall be suspended with the help of wooden hangers or metal hangers
at 1.2 m centre to centre in both the directions. Wooden hangers shall be adopted for flat
R.C. roof slab structures whereas metal hangers for flat R.C. roof or structural steel floors/
tresses. Metal hangers shall be fabricated from mild steel/ galvanished flats of 35 mm x 6
mm size or bars of 10 mm dia. Threaded at the lower end and anchored securely in the roof
concrete or welded to inserts provided on the underside of slabs, beams etc. All M.S.
hangers shall be given two coats of red oxide zinc chromate paint primer. In case the wood
work is of A.C. sheeting supported on purlins an trusses, hangers shall be suspended from
roof steel work. The arrangement of metal hangers shall be such that the level of false
ceiling can be adjusted during fixing of the ceiling frame work. The ceiling frame work
shall be secured to hangers by means of washers and nuts. The ends of main runners shall
preferably be embedded into the masonry work.
The metal frame work when it is anodised aluminium false ceiling grid system shall consist
of aluminium main member of special T-Profile of 38 mm x 38 mm x 1.5 mm thick,
interlocking with each other to form frames of various sizes, 600 mm x 600 mm or as
shown on the drawing. The main members shall be suspended from the roof structures by
means of steel hangers as described for timber frame work and supported at the walls by
means of anodised aluminium wall angles.
In the case of timber frame work, all the edges of the plaster of paris board shall be fixed to
frame members by means of counter sunk and rustless screws of 2.74 mm size, 40 mm long
at a spacing of 100 mm to 150 mm c/c and 12 mm from the edge of the board. Holes for
screws shall be drilled and screws slightly countersunk into the boards. The boards shall be
fixed to wooden framework with a joint clearance of about 3 mm. The joints shall always
be in perfect line and plane.
In case of aluminium grid system, boards shall be just placed into the frames formed by the
main ‘T’ members and the cross members fitted with the clips for locking boards.
Contractor shall take utmost care so as not to force the boards in position and a slight gap
shall be provided so as not to make a tight joint. The boards shall be cut with a saw, if
required, to any shape and size.
As the work of false ceiling may be inter-connected with the work of air-conditioning ducts
and lighting, Contractor shall fully co-operate with the other agencies entrusted with the
above work, who may be working simultaneously. Contractor shall provide necessary
openings, in the false ceiling work for air-conditioning, lighting and other fixtures.
Additional framing, if required, for the above opening shall also be provided at no extra
cost to Employer. Removable or hinged type inspection or access trap doors shall be
provided at locations specified by Engineer-in-Charge.
5.6.32.3 Finishing
It is essential that false ceiling work should be firm and in perfect line and level and all
boards free from distortion, bulge and other defects, All defective boards and other material
shall be removed from site immediately and replaced, and ceiling restored to original finish
to the satisfaction of Engineer-in-Charge.
The workmanship shall be highest order and all joinery work for timber work shall be in
the best workmanship manner. The joints for aluminium frame work shall be of be inter-
locking type so that when the cross member is in place, it cannot be lifted out.
The countersunk heads of crews and all joints shall be filled with plaster of paris and
finished smooth. After filling the joints, a thick skin of the finishing material shall be
spread about 50 mm wide on either side of the joint and on to it shall be trowelled dry a
reinforcing scrim cloth about 10 mm wide. If metal scrim is used, a stiffer plaster will be
necessary to enable the trowelling of the scrim down to the board.
5.6.32.4 Fire Stopping
In case of fire protective ceilings, fire resisting barriers at suitable intervals shall be
provided. These shall completely close the gap between the false ceiling and soffit of the
structural slab. The material of the barrier shall be as indicated by Engineer-in-Charge.
(Reference may be made to the British Standards Institutions CP 290: Code of Practice for
suspended ceiling and lining of dry construction using metal fixing system, for guidance).
5.6.33 Asbestos Cement Corrugated Sheet Roofing
1. Asbestos cement corrugated sheets: The sheets shall be of the approved

quality and shall conform to IS: 459. The sheets shall free from cracks, chipped
edges or corners and other damages.
2. Slope: The roof shall not be pitched at flatter slope than 1 vertical to 5
horizontal. The normal pitch adopted shall usually be 1 vertical to 3 horizontal.
3. Laying: The sheets shall be laid on the purlins, rafters and other roof members
as indicated in the working drawing approved by the Engineer-in-charge.
The maximum spacing of purlins under sheets shall be 1.40 m in the case of 6 mm
thick sheets and these shall in no case be exceeded. Ridge purlins shall be fixed at
75 mm to 115 mm from the apex of the roof.
The top bearing surfaces of all purlins and of other roof members shall be in one
plane so that the sheets when being fixed shall not require to be forced down to
rest on the purlins. The finished roof shall present a uniform slope and the line of
corrugations shall be straight and true. The sheets shall be laid with the smooth
side upwards.
The sheets shall be laid with the side lap of half a corrugation and end lap of 15 cm
minimum in the case of roofs with a pitch flatter than 1 vertical to 2.5 horizontal or
in the case of very exposed situations, the minimum permissible end lap shall be
20 cms. Side laps should be laid on the side facing away from the prevailing
mansoon winds.
The free overhang of the sheets at the eaves shall not exceed 30 cm. Corrugated
sheets shall be laid from left to right starting at the eaves. The last or top row
sheets shall all have the bottom right hand corner cut with the exception of the last
sheet which shall be laid uncut. If for any reason such as on considerations of the
direction of prevailing winds, laying is to be started from the bottom right hand
corner, then the laying procedure should be reversed.
Fixing:
Sheets shall be secured to the purlins and other roof members by means of 8 mm
diameter galvanised iron J or L hook bolts and nuts. The grip of the J or L hook bolt
on the side of the purlin shall not be less than 25 mm. Each galvanised iron J or L
hook bolt shall have a bitumen washer and a galvanised iron washer placed over
the sheet before the nut is screwed down from above. On each purlin there shall
be one hook bolt on the crown adjacent to the side lap on the either side. Bitumen
washer shall be of approved manufacture.
The GI flat washer shall be 25 mm in diameter, 1.6 mm thick and the bitumen
washer shall be 35 mm in diameter and 1.5 mm thick. The length of J bolt or crank
bolt shall be equal to depth of purlin plus 90 mm.
Holes for hook bolts etc. shall be drilled and not punched, always through the
crown of the corrugation and not in valleys, in location to suit the purlins while the
sheet are on the roof in the correct position. The diameter of holes shall be 2 mm
more than the diameter of the fixing bolts. No hole shall be nearer than 40 mm to
any edge of a sheet or any accessory.
5.6.34 Cable Cellar
In case of positive suction centrifugal pumping station, the pump/motor sets are
located at minus level and it is possible to design a cable cellar just below
electrical/instrumentation control room. This is to facilitate easy cable laying and
termination with sufficient loop of cable and enough height and sufficient bending
radius.
5.7 Lighting System
5.7.1 Scope
This part of specifications covers supply and installation of all equipment necessary
for a complete lighting and receptacle systems, Clear Water Pump House and all
other building etc. The type of lighting fixtures and receptacles, illumination level
and approximate quantity required shall be detailed by the contractor before
execution of works so as to achieve the required criteria.
5.7.2 Drawings and Data
The contractor shall furnish relevant descriptive and illustrative literature on lighting
fixtures and accessories dimensioned drawings/ data for the respective lighting
fixtures with manufacturer’s catalogue numbers.
It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to work out a detailed layouts in order
to provide the level of installations as indicated under Design Criteria and shall be
furnished for the approval of the Engineer-in-Charge before commencement of
installation
5.7.3 General Requirements
The Lighting system includes the following items:

a) Lighting fixtures complete with Lamps and accessories
b) Lighting system equipment
c) Light control switches, receptacle units with control switch units, lighting wires,
conduits and other similar items necessary to complete lighting system
d) Lighting fixture supports, street lighting poles and flood light towers
e) Lighting main distribution board, lighting panels.
f) Multi core cables for street, boundary and flood lighting
g) Provision of automatic on-off road switches through solar system
5.7.4 Design Requirement
Lighting Layout
It shall be responsibility of the contractor to work out a detailed layouts for different
units/areas in order to provide the levels of illumination as indicated in the design
requirement above. The contractor shall be responsible for measuring the levels of
illumination after installation and establish compliance with the specification.
Levels of Illumination
The design, manufacture and performance of equipment shall conform to the latest
Indian standard.
Lighting system shall be designed considering following Lux levels.
Pump Houses
- pump room area 150 Lux
- maintenance bays 250 Lux
- elect. control room 250 Lux
- Control Room 250 Lux
- Duty Room 250 Lux
- Area in front of building 50 Lux
- Surrounding areas 10 Lux
Campus Areas
- Front gate of campus and
Other main crossings 50 Lux
- Along the campus roads 20 Lux
- Along Campus Boundary 20 Lux
Office buildings
- Rooms 250 Lux
- Corridors & Stairs 100 Lux
- Bathroom 100 Lux
Residential buildings
- Rooms 250 Lux
- Corridors & Stairs 150 Lux
- Bathroom 100 Lux
In order to have higher illumination for maintenance and repairs in the pump room area
outlets of 16 A SPN shall be provided for the connection of portable lamps. 16 A SPN
switch with socket shall be provided in every bay of the pump house on the suction and
delivery side walls. The flexible lighting fixture shall be suitable for GLS lamps.
5.7.5 Lighting System Equipment
5.7.5.1 Main Distribution Boards And Lighting Panels

Constructional Features
Boards and panels shall be sheet steel enclosed and shall be fully dust and vermin
proof, providing a degree protection of IP 52. Outdoor panels shall in addition be
completely weatherproof with a sloping canopy for protection rain and providing a
degree of protection of IP 54. The sheet used for frame, enclosures, doors, covers
and partitions shall be cold rolled 2 mm thick.
All boards and panels shall be provided with hinged doors for access to equipment.
Doors shall be gasketted all round with neoprene gaskets. For the main floor
mounted distribution boards with the switch fuse units arranged in tier formation,
the hinged door of each unit shall be interlocked so as to prevent opening of the
door when the switch is ON and to prevent closing of the switch with the door not
fully closed. However, a device for by-passing the interlock shall be provided to
enable the operation of the switch with the door open, when necessary, for
examination \ maintenance. For wall mounting 1phase ways lighting panels when
provided with MCBs, a hinged, latched front door shall be provided with key-locking
facility and a slotted Bakelite sheet shall be provided inside. Only the MCBs
operating knobs or the fuse cap covers shall project out of the Bakelite sheet slots
for safe operation and neat appearance. Incomer to lighting panels shall be
provided with TPN MCB with ELCB.
All accessible live connections/metals shall be shrouded and it shall be possible to
change individual fuses, switches, MCBs form the front of the boards / panels
without danger of contact with live metal.
For floor mounting type distribution boards, adequately sized mounting channels
shall be supplied and for wall/column/structure mounting type panels suitable
mounting straps shall be provided.
Adequate interior cabling space and suitable removable cable entry plates shall be
provided for top/bottom entry of cables through glands and or conduits as required.

Necessary number of glands to suit the specified cable size shall be provided.
Cable glands shall be screwed on type and made of brass.
Two earthing terminals shall be provided to suit the earthing conductor.
All sheet steel parts shall undergo rust-proofing process which should include
degreasing, de-scaling and a recognised phosphating process. The steel works
shall then be painted with two coats of Zinc – chormate primmer and two coats of
final stove-enamelled finish paint of specified colour.
5.7.5.2 Busbars
Busbars shall be copper conductor of hard drawn (HD) and high conductivity.
Busbars shall be fully insulated by encapsulation in epoxy resin with moulded caps
protecting all joints of heat shrinkable PVC sleeves and tapes.
Busbars shall be provided with at least the minimum clearances in air as per
applicable standards for 500V, 3 phase system.
Busbars shall be adequately sized for the continuous current rating such that the
maximum temperature of the busbars, busbar risers/droppers and contacts does
not exceed 85 C under site reference temperature.
The busbars, busbars connections and busbar supports shall have sufficient
strength to withstand thermal and electro-mechanical stresses of the fuse/MCBs let
through/cut-off current associated with the specified short-circuit level of the
system.
Busbar supports shall be made from suitable insulating material such as Hylam
sheets, glass reinforced moulded plastic materials, permali wood or cast resin.
Separate supports shall be provided for each phase of the busbars. If a common
support is provided for all three phases, anti-tracking barriers shall be incorporated.
The neutral bus of the main 3 phase 4 wire distribution board shall be rated not
less than 50% of the phase busbars. The neutral bus of the 1 phase ways lighting
panel shall be rated same as the phase busbars. The neutral bus should have
sufficient terminals and detachable links for full number of single-phase outgoing
lighting circuits.
5.7.5.3 Panels / Boards’ Component Equipment
Switches/Miniature Circuit Breakers (MCB)

Switches/MCBs shall be hand operated, air break, quick make, quick break type
conforming to applicable standards.
The switch shall be protected by fuses and the MCB shall be provided with
overload / short-circuit protective device for protection under overload and short-
circuit conditions. The minimum breaking capacity of MCBs shall be 6 kA r.m.s. at
415 V/220 VD.C.
Switch shall have provision for locking in both fully open and closed position. MCBs
shall be provided with locking facility.
The connections between switch and fuse shall be insulated and all live
connections shall be shrouded.

Fuses
Fuses generally shall be of the HRC cartridge fuse-link type having a certified
rupturing capacity of 80 kA at 440 V. Fuses upto 63A for distribution system of
medium short circuit levels may be of HRC cartridge screw-cap, D type, having a
certified rupturing capacity of not less than 46kA at 440 V and 16kA at 250 V D.C.
Fuses shall be provided with visible indication to show that they have operated.
Cartridge fuses shall preferably be mounted in moulded in moulded plastic carriers.
If fuse-carriers are not provided, insulated fuses pulling handle shall be provided
for each size of fuse for each switchboard.
5.7.5.4 Indicating Instruments and Meters
Whenever required, instruments and meter shall be of the flush mounting type.
They shall be suitably mounted so as to provide for easy access to CTs and small
wiring.
Instruments shall be of minimum 96 mm square size,, shall have provision for zero
adjustment outside the cover and black numerals on white dial.
Watt-hour meters shall be of direct reading electro-dynamometer type complete
with cyclometer type dials and reverse running stops.
Ammeter/Voltmeter selector switches having 3 positions and off, with stay-put
contacts rated 10A shall be provided when specified.
Potential fuses shall be provided at the tap-off point from the busbars for the
voltmeters.
Instrument Transformers
Current and voltage transformers shall be of the dry type, of metering accuracy
class 1.0. Unless otherwise specified, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor
to ensure that the VA burden of the instrument transformer is adequate for the
meters connected to it.
Test links shall be provided in both secondary leads of the CTs to easily carry out
current and phase angle measurement test. Facilities shall be provided for short-
circuiting and grounding the CTs at the terminal blocks.
Voltage transformers shall be provided with suitably rated primary and secondary
fuses.
Indicating Lamps
Indicating lamps shall be of the filament type and low watt consumption. Lamps
shall be provided with series resistors.
5.7.5.5 Internal Wiring
Panels/ boards shall be supplied completely wired, ready for the external
connections at the terminal blocks. Wiring shall be carried out with 650 / 1100 V

grade, PVC insulated, stranded aluminum / copper conductors of adequate sizes

shall be used to suit the rated circuit current.
Engraved identification ferrules, marked to correspond with the wiring diagram
shall be fitted at both ends of each wire.
Engraved identification ferrules, marked to correspond with the wiring diagram
shall be fitted at both ends of each wire.
All wiring shall be terminated on terminal blocks. Terminal blocks shall be on piece
rated 500 V, of reputed make, preferably stud type for higher current ratings such
that wires are connected by cable-lugs and complete with nuts and washers.
Terminals shall be adequately rated for the circuit current, the minimum rating shall
be 20A.
Terminal for circuit with voltage exceeding 125 V shall be shrouded.
Terminal shall be numbered and provided with identification strip for identification
of the circuit.
Terminals blocks for C.T. secondary lead wires shall be provided with shorting and
disconnecting/earthing facilities.
5.7.5.6 Labels & Diagram Plate
All door mounted equipment as well as equipment mounted inside the switchboard/
panels shall be provided with individual labels with equipment designation/rating.
Also the boards/panels shall be provided on the front with a label engraved with the
designation of the board/panel.
Labels shall be made of non –rusting metal, 3-ply lamicoid or engraved PVC
Inside the door of the 1 phase ways lighting panels a circuit diagram/description
shall be fixed for reference and identifications.
5.7.5.7 Light Control Switches
Light control switches of ratings and types, i.e. decorative/industrial shall be

supplied as required. The switches shall be suitable for use on 240 V, 1Ph, 50 Hz
supply.
Switches shall be of flush type for mounting behind an insulated plate or
incorporated with a switch plate for mounting flush with the surface or wall or
switch box/suitable enclosure. The switch box/enclosure may be recessed into or
mounted on a wall as per the requirement of project layouts.
The size of enclosure boxes shall be chosen to accommodate the number or
switches to be installed at the particular location. The enclosures shall be 18 gauge
sheet steel galvanised. The enclosures box shall be covered with
perspex/insulating cove. An enclosure intended for surface mounting shall not have
holes or gaps in its sides other than those expressly provided for cable entry.

5.7.5.8 Receptacle Units
Receptacle units shall consist of socket outlet with associated switch and plug. The
socket outlet and switch or MCB shall be flush mounted within galvanised 18
gauge steel enclosure with insulation cover. The box may be recessed into
mounted on a wall as per requirement of project layout.
The receptacle units shall be suitable for 240 V, 1 Ph-N, 50 Hz/415 V, 3 Ph – N, 50
Hz supply as required.
Single phase receptacles shall be associated with a switch/MCB of same current
rating and receptacle shall become live only when the associated switch/MCB is in
“ON” position.
Three phase receptacles shall be associated with a TPN switch housed in the
same enclosures. The receptacle shall become live only when the associated
switch is in “ON” position.
The plugs shall be provided with cord grips to prevent strain and damage to
conductors / wires at connection and entry points.
5.7.5.9 Lighting Wires
The wires for wiring in lighting system shall be 250/440V, 1//C, PVC insulated,
unarmoured with stranded copper conductors and shall be laid in recessed conduit
unless otherwise specified.
The minimum area of conductors shall be 1.5 sq. mm for receptacles rated 15 A
and 5 A Receptacles and 2.5 sq. mm for receptacles rated 15 A and above.
The wires shall be coded white for phase/positive of D.C. and black for
neutral/negative of D.C.
5.7.5.10 Conduits
Rigid steel/non-metallic conduits and their associated fittings as required shall

conform to applicable standards. The minimum size of conduit shall be 20 mm for
surface installation and 25 mm for concealed installation.
Steel conduits shall be seamed by welding and hot dip gavanised. They shall be
supplied in standard lengths of 5 m.
Supply of conduits shall include all associated fitting like couplers, bends and tees
as required for lighting system installation work.
5.7.5.11 Junction Boxes
Junction boxes with terminals shall be supplied for branching and terminating
lighting cables when required for outdoor areas, 3 phase receptacles etc.
The Junction Boxes shall be dust and vermin proof and shall be fabricated from 14
gauge sheet steel and shall be complete with removable cover plate with gaskets,
two earthing terminals each with nut, bolt and washer. Boxes shall be additionally
weather proof.

The boxes shall have provision for wall, column, pole or structure mounting and
shall be provided with cable / conduit entry knock outs, terminal blocks, HRC fuses
as required.
The terminal blocks, with specified number of terminals, shall be mounted securely
on brackets welded to the back sheet of the box. The terminals shall be 600 V,
grade one piece construction complete with terminals, insulation barriers,
galvanised nuts, bolts and washers and provided with identification strips of PVC.
The terminals shall be made of copper alloy and shall be of box clamp type.
The boxes shall be painted with on shop coat of red oxide zinc chromate primmer
followed by a finishing coat of paint.
5.7.5.12 Lighting Poles and Flood Light Pole Mounting
Lighting poles for street light and flood light shall be of stepped tubular steel poles
construction as per applicable standard. These poles shall be coated with
bituminous preservative paints on the inside as well as embedded outside surface.
Exposed outside surface shall be painted with one coat of red lead oxide primer.
After completion of installation two coats of aluminium shall be applied.
Poles for mounting flood lights shall be supplied whenever required. Unless
otherwise specified, poles shall be painted with Red lead oxide primer and two
coats of aluminium paint. A steel ladder shall be provided. The length of each step
of the ladder shall be at least 300 mm and spacing between two adjacent steps not
more than 300 mm.
The supply of poles shall be complete with fixing bracket/necessary pipe reducer
for fixing the fitting and also include the necessary associated pole mounted
junction boxes. The required size of poles and the junction box shall be as per the
requirement.
5.7.6 Lighting Fixtures (luminaries)
Luminaries shall be designed for continuous trouble-free operation without

reduction in lamp life or without deterioration of materials and internal wiring.
Outdoor fittings shall be weather-proof and rain-proof type.
The Luminaries shall be designed so as to facilitate easy maintenance, including
cleaning, replacement of lamps/starters etc.
Connections between different components shall be made in such a way that they
will not work loose by small vibration.
All Luminaries shall be supplied complete with lamps suitable for operation on a
supply voltage and the variation in supply voltage, frequency and combined voltage
and frequency of ± 10% ± 5% and ±10% respectively.
Fluorescent type, mercury vapour and sodium vapour type Luminaries shall be
complete with accessories like lamps, ballasts, power factor improvement
capacitors, starters, re-wireble fuse and fuse base. These shall be mounted as far
as possible in the luminaire housing only. If these cannot be accommodated
integral with the Luminaries then a separate metal enclosed control gear box shall
be included to accommodate the control accessories together with a terminal block

suitable for loop-in, loop-out connections. Outdoor type fixtures shall be provided
with outdoor type weather-proof box.
Fluorescent type Luminaries with more than one lamp shall be provided with
capacitors connected in lead-lag circuit for correction of stroboscopic effect.
Each luminaire shall have a terminal block suitable for loop-in, loop-out and T-off
connection by 250/400 V, 1 core, PVC insulated copper/aluminium conductor wires
up to 4 sq.mm in size. In outdoor areas the termination at the luminaire shall be
suitable for 1100V, PVC insulated, copper/aluminium conductor, armoured cables
of sizes up to 6 sq.mm conductor. Terminals shall be of stud or clamp type. The
internal wiring should be completed by means 2 core, 2.5mm2 copper cable and
terminated on the terminal block. Terminal blocks shall be mounted with minimum
two fixing screws.
Mounting facility and conduit knock-outs for the luminaires shall be provided.
5.7.6.1 Earthing
Each luminaire shall be provided with an earthing terminal suitable for connection
to the earthing conductor of 12 SWG GI wire.
Where separate control gear box is provided for housing the accessories the same
shall be provided with an earthing terminal suitable for connecting earthing
conductor of 12 SWG GI wire.
All metal or metal enclosed parts of the luminaire/control gear box shall be bonded
and connected to the earthing terminal so as to ensure satisfactory earthing
continuity.
5.7.6.2 Painting/Finish
All surfaces of the Luminaire/Control gear box housing accessories shall be

thoroughly cleaned and degreased. It shall be free from scale, rust, sharp edges
and burrs.
The luminaire housing shall be stove-enameled/epoxy stove-enamelled-vitreous
enamelled or anodised as indicated under various types of fittings.
The finish of the luminaire shall be such that no bright spots are produced either by
direct light source or by reflection.
5.7.6.3 Decorative Luminaires
Fluorescent Luminaires
These luminaires shall be generally indoor type provided with cold rolled cold
annealed (CRCA) sheet steel channel/rail cum reflector housing complete with all
electrical control accessories mounted on it. The finish shall be stove enamelled.
Luminaires shall be suitable for the number of lamps of specified wattage, direct
mounting on ceiling/wall/column pendant mounting or for recess mounting in false
ceiling.

5.7.6.4 Industrial Luminaires
The luminaire shall be provided with CRCA sheet steel mounting, rail with reflector
of minimum 20 SWG thickness and complete with all control accessories mounted
on it. The finish shall be vitreous enamelled.
Luminaires shall be suitable for the number of lamps of specified wattage, direct
mounting on ceiling/wall/column/pendent mounting.
5.7.6.5 Incandescent/Mercury Vapour/Sodium Vapour

Luminaires
Bulk Head Luminaire

The luminaire shall be of robust construction, with cast aluminium/vitreous
enamelled housing, heat and shock resistant prismatic or clear glass cover fixed
with neoprene gaskets for sealing. For mechanical protection to the glass cover,
round steel wire-guard with vitreous enamelled finish shall be provided.
The luminaire shall be suitable for incandescent lamp up to 150 watts, for direct
mounting to ceiling/wall/column and used for general purpose indoor lighting.
High and Medium Bay Luminaries

High and medium bay luminaires shall be with cast aluminium housing, anodised
aluminium mirror polished reflector canopy with eye bolt for suspension, cooling
fins and glass cover.
The luminaire shall be suitable for mercury vapour lamps up to 1000 watts and
sodium vapour lamps up to 400 watts. The control gear accessories shall be
mounted integral with the luminaire.
High bay luminaires shall be used when the mounting height is above 8 metres
while medium bay luminaires shall be used when the mounting height is around 6
to 8 metres.
5.7.6.6 Flood Light Luminaries
General Purpose flood light luminaire

Flood light luminaires shall be of weather proof construction with cast aluminium
housing, anodised aluminium mirror polished reflector, heat resistant, toughened
glass cover and necessary neoprene gaskets to prevent ingress of dust.
The housing shall be supported on a cast iron base and capable of being swivelled
in both horizontal and vertical directions and locked in any desired position.
The Luminaires shall be suitable for single and dual mercury vapour or sodium
vapour lamps up to 400 watts, incandescent lamps up to 1000 watts or halogen
lamps up to 1000 watts. When mercury vapour or sodium vapour lamps are
specified, the same shall be mounted in a separate sheet metal enclosed/cast
aluminium weather proof control gear box.

The luminaire shall be provided with cable gland on the canopy in down ward
direction for cable connection.
It shall be possible to replace the lamp from the canopy without opening the front
glass.
5.7.6.7 Outdoor Lantern Luminaries
Post Top Lantern

Post top lantern Luminaires shall be generally outdoor weather proof type for
illumination of walkways, gate posts, gardens etc.
The luminaire shall be suitable up to 200 W incandescent lamp, 125 W mercury
vapour lamps or 70 W sodium vapour lamp.
Sub station Lantern
Sub-station lantern shall be generally outdoor weather proof type for illumination of
switchyard equipment.
The Luminaires shall be suitable up to 200 watts incandescent lamp 125 W
mercury vapour lamp or 70 W sodium vapour lamp.
5.7.6.8 Street Lighting Luminaries
Street lighting fluorescent luminaire shall be outdoor weather proof type for
illumination of secondary roads, walkways, peripheral lighting of buildings etc.
The luminaire shall be of semi-cut off or non-cut off type, with CRCA sheet steel
housing, vitreous enamelled, plain or corrugated clear acrylic cover, complete with
integral mounted control gear, neoprene gaskets, side pipe entry or top suspension
type.
The luminaire shall be suitable for 1x40 watts or 2x40 watts fluorescent tubes and
for mounting heights up to 4 meters.
Mercury vapour and sodium luminaires

Street light mercury/sodium vapour luminaires shall be outdoor weather proof type
for illumination of main roads, traffic islands etc.
The luminaire shall be of semi-cut off with cast aluminium housing, acrylic or
prismatic cover, polished aluminium reflectors, complete with integral mounted
gear , neoprene gaskets and with rear pipe entry.
The luminaires shall be suitable up to 400 watts mercury or sodium vapour lamps
and for mounting height from 4 metres to 12 metres.
5.7.6.9 Portable Emergency Light Luminaries
Emergency light of Installite luminaries shall be indoor type for providing

emergency light during failure of normal AC supply.

The luminaire shall be with CRCA sheet enclosure, complete with metallised mirror
reflector, leak proof re-chargeable battery rated for two hour discharge, battery
charger, charge-on lamp, push button switches , automatic changeover
switch/relay , two meter length cord with plug, mounting pads and other
accessories required for satisfactory operation of the luminaire.
The luminaire shall be suitable for connection to 240 V,50Hz single phase supply.
On failure of normal A.C. supply the luminaire shall pick-up automatically and on
restoration of A.C. supply the luminaire shall switch off automatically.
The luminaire shall be suitable for incandescent lamp up to 40W or fluorescent
lamp up to 20W.
5.7.7 Accessories for luminaires
5.7.7.1 Reflectors
The reflectors shall be made of CRCA sheet steel/aluminium/silvered

glass/chromium plated sheet chromium plated sheet copper as indicated for above
mentioned luminaires.
Reflectors made of steel shall have vitreous enamelled finish . Aluminium used for
reflectors shall be anodized/epoxy stove enamelled/mirror polished.
Reflectors shall be free from scratches or blisters and shall have a smooth and
glossy surface having an optimum light reflecting coefficient so as to ensure the
overall light output specified by the Contractor.
Reflectors shall be readily removable from the housing for cleaning and
maintenance without disturbing the lamps and without the use of tools. They shall
be securely fixed to the housing by means of positive fastening device of captive
type.
5.7.7.2 Lamp/Starter Holder
Lamp holder shall have low contact resistance, shall be resistant to wear and shall
be suitable for operation at the specified temperature without deterioration in
insulation value. They shall hold the lamps in position under normal condition of
shock and vibration met wit under normal installation and use.
Lamp holders for the fluorescent lamps shall be of the spring loaded bi-pin rotor
type. Live parts of the lamps holder shall not be exposed during insertion or
removal of lamp or after the lamp has been taken out. The lamp holder contacts
shall provide adequate pressure on the lamp cap pins when the lamp is in working
position.
Lamp holders for incandescent, mercury vapour and sodium vapour lamps shall be
of Edison Screw (E.S.) type.
The starter holders shall be so designed that they are mechanically robust and free
from any operational difficulties. They shall be capable of withstanding the shocks
met wi6thin normal transit, installation and use.

5.7.7.3 Ballasts
The ballasts shall be designed to have a long service life and low power loss. The
ballasts shall be of the inductive, heavy duty type copper wire wound, filled with
thermosetting, insulating, moisture repellent polyester compound filled under
pressure or vacuum. Ballasts shall be provided with taps to set the voltage + 10%
of 240V. End connections and taps shall be brought out to a suitable terminal block
rigidly fixed to the ballast enclosure. Ballasts shall be free from hum and such of
those which produce hum shall be replaced by Contractor free of cost.
Ballasts shall be mounted using self locking, anti-vibration fixings and shall be easy
to remove without demounting the fittings. They shall be in dust tight, non
combustible enclosures.
Separate ballast for each lamp shall be provided in case of multi lamp luminaires,
except in the case of 2x20 Watts luminaries.
5.7.7.4 Starters
Starters shall have bimetal electrodes and high mechanical strength. Starters shall
be replaceable without disturbing the reflector or lamps and without the use of any
tool. Starters shall have brass contacts and radio interference capacitors.
5.7.7.5 Capacitors
The capacitors shall have a constant value of capacitance and shall be connected
across the supply of individual lamp circuits.
The capacitors shall be suitable for operation at specified supply voltage conditions
and shall have a value of capacitance so as to correct the power factor of their
corresponding lamps circuit to the extent of 0.95lag or better.
The capacitors shall be hermetically sealed preferably in a metal enclosure to
prevent seepage of impregnate and ingress of moisture.
5.7.7.6 Lamp
Lamps shall be capable of withstanding small vibrations and the connections at

lead in wires and filaments | electrodes shall not break under such circumstances.
General Lighting Service (GLS) lamps shall be tungsten filament incandescent
type. The filament shall be coiled coil type rated for 230\250 volts, Single phase
A.C.
Lamps shall be with Edison Screw type metal lamp caps to prevent pilferage.
Laps shall be milky white for diffused, soft, glare free lighting and rated upto 100
watts.
5.7.7.7 Fluorescent Lamps
Fluorescent lamps shall be low pressure mercury vapour type with low wattage
consumption and high efficiency and longer burning life (about 2500 hours).

Lamps shall be of white light type suitable for operation on 240 V, single phase
A.C. in standard lengths of 2, 4 and 5 feet and ratings upto 65 watts.
Lamps shall be provided with features to avoid blackening of lamp ends.
5.7.7.8 High intensity discharge lamp
These lamps include high pressure mercury vapour lamps and high pressure
sodium vapour.
High pressure mercury vapour lamps shall be with quartz discharge tube, internal
coated shell quick restrike time (of within 5 minutes) and with burning life (about
5000 hours) in standard ratings upto 1000 watts.
High pressure sodium vapour lamps shall be with polycrystalline translucent,
coated discharge tube, coated, shell, quick restrike time (of within 5 minutes) and
with burning life (about 10,000 hours) in standard ratings upto 400 watts.
5.8 Deserts Coolers
5.8.1 General
The Deserts Coolers shall be of steel body complete with Fan, Motor, Filter Pads,
Water Pumps etc. suitable for operation 230 or 240 Volts ± 10 % single phase 50
Hz Ac supply confirming to IS-3315/1994. The pump set shall be confirming to IS
11981/87 with latest amendment.
Technical parameters of components of desert cooler are as follows:

S. Particulars Capacity
No. 4000 cum per hour 5000 cum per hour
1. Overall Dimensions of the cooler
Width(measured along discharge grill 700 mm 770 mm
side)
Height 910 mm 950 mm
Length 600 mm 770 mm
2 Air Grill Dimensions
Inside Dimensions(in mm) 505x505 525x525
Outside Dimension (in mm) 645x645 695x610
Gross area of the grill (in sqm) 0.20 0.30
Net area of the grill (in sqm) 0.20 0.29
3 Filter Pads
Area in (in sqm) 0.9 1.0
Material of the Filter pads Wood Wool Wood Wool
4 Tank Dimensions
Size of tank ( in mm) 700x700x170 770x770x170
Capacity of Tank 80 litres 80 litres
5 Maximum power consumption of the air 280W 350W
cooler with load at rated voltage at zero
static pressure condition
S. Particulars Capacity
No. 4000 cum per hour 5000 cum per hour
6 Nominal capacity at zero pressure (cum 4000 5000
per hour)
7 Fan
Size/Dia (in mm) 450/500 525/550
Material of Fan Blade MS Sheet/ Aluminium
Speed of Motor ± 10 % Single speed motor 900 rpm, two speed
motor high speed 1300 rpm and low speed
1250 rpm
Horse power 1/8 or 1/7 1/6 or 1/5
Power Factor 0.9 0.9
Type of enclosures of fan motor Totally enclosed type (TE)
Maximum full load current of fan motors 1.3
(amps)
8 Pump
Type Centrifugal Vertical Type (ISI marked)
Out put (Head) 1 metre
Out put (delivery) 7 litres per metre
Maximum power consumption 45 watts
HP 1/70
RPM± 10 % Minimum 1200 RPM
Type of enclosures of pump motor Totally enclosed type
Make of pump motor ISI
Material of Pump Shaft Stainless steel
5.9 Water Coolers
5.9.1 General
Water cooler shall conform to IS 1475/78 with latest amendment suitable for
operation on 230 volts ±10 %, 50 cycles single phase AC supply. It shall be
supplied with hermetically sealed type suction cooled compressor with overload
protection conforming to IS 10167 (part I/83 with amendment no.1). It shall have
cooling capacity of 40 litres per hour with storage capacity as 80 litres. The other
technical parameters are as under:
S. No. Particulars Parameter

1 Overall Dimensions of
Unit
Width 590 mm
Depth 735 mm
Height 1555 mm
Tank
S. No. Particulars Parameter

Width 485 mm
Depth 455 mm
Height 485 mm
2 Details of Cabinet
Material of Construction CRCA Sheet/Coated GI
Thickness 1 mm
Surface Treatment Powder Coated
Type of finish Structural
Dimensions of SS front panel below water 410mm X 465 mm
3 outlets
Details of pedestal
Material of construction Stainless steel
SS conforming AISI 304
Thickness 2.65 mm
Method of securing to the cabinet SS bolts washer and nuts
4 Rated voltage of water cooler 230 ±10 % volts
5 Details of compressor
Capacity of compressor 900 Kcal per hour
Max output of compressor motors 0.25 KW
Rated
Current 3.1 (nominal) Amps
Speed 2850 RPM
Voltage 230±10 % volts
Maximum full current of compressor 3.4 Amps
Warranty of compressor One year
Class of insulation B
Power consumption (max) during operation 575 watts
under capacity rating test condition
5.10 RAIN WATER HARVESTING STRUCTURES
Designing, constructing and maintaining Rain Harvesting structures for collection of

rain water through roofs of permanent structures into an underground tank of
capacity sufficient to store the quantity of water collected over the particular roof as
per the average rain fall intensity in that area. The contractor shall collect the data
of rainfall for last 10 years and than shall design the tank capacity incorporating
rain water collection as per the available data and roof area. The contractor shall
also install a Rain water gauge at every headwork.
The collection of rainwater along all structural buildings, reservoirs shall be done
with plinth protection work with proper drainage arrangement along the plinth
protection work as approved by EIC. To protect berms of roads, drainage work
along the berm shall be done as approved by EIC.

6.0 Specifications For Elevated Service Reservoirs &

Clear Water Reservoirs
6.1 GENERAL:
The construction of Elevated Service reservoir and Clear water reservoir shall be carried out
in accordance with the drawings specification mentioned herein and relevant IS amended up
to date. The general arrangement of the piping system shall be as per drawings enclosed with
the tender documents. In cases where the specifications given below are silent about any
aspects in respect of any item, the work shall be carried out as per the relevant IS code of
practice in the latest version and as per sound engineering practice as decided by the
Engineer-in-Charge.
Some of the important IS codes to be referred during execution of the work are as follows:
EARTH WORK
- IS 3764 – Safety code for excavation works
- IS 3720 – Methods of tests for soils
SOIL INVESTIGATION
- IS – 1988 – SBC
CONCRETE WORKS
- IS.280 – Mild steel wire for general engineering purposes
- IS.269 – Portland cement
- IS.383 – Coarse and fine aggregate
- IS.432 – Medium tension steel bars and hard drawn steel wire
- IS.456 – Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete
- IS.516 – Methods of testing for strength of concrete
- IS.1199 – Method of sampling and analysis of concrete
- IS.1566 – Fabric reinforcement
- IS.1786 – Cold twisted steel bars for concrete reinforcement
Reinforcement
- IS. 3370 – Code of practice for concrete structures for the storage of liquids
- IS. 7861 – Recommended practice for hot weather concreting (Part-I)
- IS. 4082– Recommendation on stacking and storage of construction material on site.
GENERAL
- IS.875 - Code of practice for structural safety of buildings, loading standards
- IS.1911 – Dead loads
- IS.1893 – Criteria for earthquake resistant design and structures
- IS.2950 – Design of raft
- IS.1200 – Method of measurements
The scope of work for construction of reservoir includes survey, design, construction testing and
commissioning of partly underground clear water RCC reservoir having effective storage capacity
for locations as specified in Scope of Work along with all associated works viz: supply, installation,
of DI/C.I pipes, specials, valves etc. for Inlet/Outlet/Overflow/Interconnection with existing system
as described.
6.2 THE FOLLOWING ACTIVITIES SHALL BE CARRIED OUT BUT SHALL NOT BE
LIMITED TO
(i) The contractor shall carry out complete soil investigation of the site like S.B.C.
type of soil etc. and submit to Engineer-in-charge.
(ii) Approval of all designs and drawings, material to be used, equipments
specifications and the samples, prior to commencing of work at site.
(iii) Preparation and submission of the structural drawings etc. The drawings must be to
the scale as appropriate subject to the prior approval of the Engineer-in-charge.
(iv) Preparation and submission of all detailed working drawings on the basis of
conceptual designs and plans approved by the Engineer-in-charge.
(v) Providing adequately planned plinth protection works for Reservoirs.
(vi) Submission of “As Built” drawings.
No separate payment will be made for the reconnaissance survey, laboratory test, factory and
performance tests, testing and commissioning, etc. This shall be included in the rate quoted by the
contractor.
6.3 GENERAL RCC

The aggregates and cement shall be proportioned by weight only. The mixing shall invariably be
carried out in mechanical mixer and in such a way so as to avoid any loss of water or cement. No
hand mixed concrete will be allowed. It should be conveyed, placed in position and compacted by
suitable type of mechanical vibrator as rapidly as practicable but in no case the time of compaction
after mixing shall increase 30 minutes. Standby Concrete Mixer and Vibrator shall be available at
Site.
THE CONCRETE SHALL BE CURED PROPERLY BY KEEPING IT MOIST CONSTANTLY UNTIL END OF
THREE WEEKS FROM THE DATE OF CASTING.
Unless otherwise called for by the Engineer-in-charge, cement shall be ordinary Portland cement
conforming to IS: 269, IS: 8112 or IS: 12269, Super Sulphated cement conforming to IS 6909 or
super resistant Portland cement conforming to IS 12330 or Pozzolana Portland Cement conforming
to IS 1489. Only one type of cement shall be used in any one mix. The source of supply, type or
brand of cement within the same structure or portion thereof shall not be changed without approval
from the Engineer-In-Charge. Cement which is not used within 90 days from its date of
manufacture shall be tested at a laboratory approved by the Engineer-In-Charge and until the results
of such tests are found satisfactory, it shall not be used in any work.
All reinforcement used shall be of Tor steel (Fe 415) ISI marked shall be clean and free from loose
mill scales, rust and coating of oil or other coatings which may destroy or reduce bond. Minimum
size of reinforcement bars shall be of 8mm. Only steel shuttering shall be used. Shuttering shall be
new or in good condition without holes or dents. It has to be approved by the Engineer in Charge.
The individual elements should be in the good shape to ensure a gap free shuttering according to the
drawings. The paint used shall have good bonding and shall not stick to the concrete surface.
Suitable system have to be provided for keeping the surface in place and keeping the correct
distance in case of walls. The construction joints should be minimum and they have to be executed
with most care. Before continuing concreting the loose material has to be removed and they have to
be cleaned properly. Honey combing has to be avoided by suitable shuttering and proper use of
vibrators.

The water used for concreting shall be free from all undesirable salts and other impurities and shall
be fit for concreting as per IS: 456.
It is specifically being mentioned that the ground water available in this area may not be potable
and not fit for concreting; therefore transportation from nearby safe water source has to be
made. For the purpose of concreting and curing only potable water is to be used. For this purpose
contractor shall make a temporary masonry/RCC underground water reservoir of 3 days average
water consumption storage capacity. He shall provide a diesel pump set and necessary piping
arrangement to ensure proper curing.
The exposed surface of concrete shall be kept continuously in a wet condition by ponding or
covering with a layer of sackings, canvas, hessain or similar materials and kept continuously wet
for at least 28 days from the date of placing of concrete.
To obtain a dense concrete and to reduce chances of honeycombing adequate admixture approved
by Engineer-In-Charge shall be used as integral water proofing compound in concrete work. The
quantity of the admixture shall be as prescribed by the manufacturer and as approved by the
Engineer in Charge.
6.4 TESTING
Materials and workmanship shall comply with the relevant specifications as described in
subsequent clauses and in the Rajasthan PWD (B&R) Specification and Explanatory Notes for
Building and House Drainage. Any material or workmanship not covered by the above
specifications shall comply with the relevant Indian Standard (with upto date amendments).
6.5 MATERIAL
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer-In-Charge or his representative, samples of the
materials which will form part of the permanent works, sufficiently in advance of the start of the
work, so that necessary tests can be carried out for the approval of the Engineer-In-Charge or his
representative, before using any such material on site. Samples for the basic materials shall be
submitted from every supplier and from each consignment; if materials differ from one
consignment to another, the consignment differing from the accepted sample shall be replaced by
the Contractor free of cost. The format will be provided by Engineer-In-Charge.
The testing of materials to be used in the Works, or of the quality of finished items shall generally
be done in a laboratory approved by the Engineer-In-Charge or his representative. All testing
charges shall be borne by the Contractor. The following tests shall be carried on a routine basis:
(a) Gradation and specific gravity of coarse and fine aggregate to be used for concrete
work.
(b) Moisture content in fine and course aggregates, bulking of sand of fine aggregate.
(c) Determination of fines and deleterious materials, organic impurities and light weight places in
course and fine aggregate.
(d) Workability tests on concrete by means of slump cone.
(e) Determination of the crushing strength, absorption and efflorescence of bricks.
(f) Concrete cube crushing strength at 7 days and 28 days.
(g) Determination of flakiness index and crushing value for coarse aggregates.

The above tests (a) to (g) inclusive, shall be done on a routine basis as per the provisions of the
relevant Indian Standards, or as specified by PMC and explanatory notes shall be kept during the
construction period. The following additional tests of materials and workmanship shall also be
carried out at contractor’s cost, if the Engineer-In-Charge requires:-
(h) Chemical tests of fine and coarse aggregates, to determine the sulphate, chlorides and
other deleterious material present in the aggregate.
(i) Testing of cement (Physical and Chemical), as per IS 269 or IS 485, as the case may be.
(j) Tests on steel (Mild and High Tensile (Tor) as per IS 1786 to establish the Ultimate tensile
strength, yield stress, percentage elongation and chemical composition.
(k) Tests for suitability of water for concrete work.
In addition to the above tests, the Engineer-In-Charge or his representative, may request any other
test to be carried out from time to time as per the Indian Standards or the Rajasthan PWD
specification, at contractor’s cost.
6.6 CONCRETE
During the progress of construction sampling, preparation of test specimens, curing and testing of
concrete shall be conducted in accordance with IS 1199 and IS 516, to determine whether the
concrete being produced complies with the strength requirements as specified.
At least one slump test shall be carried out for every compressive strength test carried out, or as
directed by the Engineer in Charge. Six No.15 cm cubes shall be made for each cubic meter. or
portion thereof or for each pour per grade of concrete. This number may be increased at the
discretion of the Engineer In Charge. Six specimens shall preferably be prepared from different
batches, three being tested after 7 days and the remaining three being tested at 28 days. The
Contractor shall provide, at his own expense, all apparatus, labour and arrange for testing at a
laboratory, approved by the Engineer in Charge.
The concrete tested in accordance with “Testing of Concrete” clause above, shall be the criteria for
acceptance of concrete as per IS 456. The strength of concrete shall be the average strength of three
specimens tested at 28 days and conform to strength requirements for different grades of concrete.
If the advance 7 days tests show crushing strengths that are too low, corrective measures shall be
taken at once, at the Engineer’s direction, without waiting for the results of the 28 days tests.
6.6.1 FAILURE TO MEET STRENGTH REQUIREMENTS

In cases where concrete tested fails to meet the test requirements, the Engineer-In-Charge shall
have the right to require any one or all the following additional tests. These shall be carried out by
contractor at his own expense. The Engineer-In-Charge shall be the finally authority for interpreting
the results and shall decide upon the acceptance or otherwise.
Curing and load testing of the concrete member concerned represented by the test which
failed.
Replacement of any such portions of the structure. No payment shall be made for the
dismantling of the concrete, relevant form work, or reinforcement. Embedded fixtures and
reinforcement of adjoining structures damaged during dismantling shall be made good by
the contractor at his own expense.
Extended curing of the structure of the concrete represented by the specimen.

Collecting and testing of a core specimen from the hardened concrete. The location number
and size of such specimen shall be taken as directed by the Engineer In Charge.
Any Other tests i.e. ultrasonic/ or rebound hammer tests to be decided by the Engineer In
Charge, at the contractors own cost.
6.6.2 CHECK OF REINFORCEMENT AND CONCRETING

All reinforcement shall be got checked recorded prior to pouring of concrete, by a
representative of the Engineer-In-Charge. Similarly, the entire concrete pouring work shall
be done in the presence of an officer not below the rank of Site Engineer. The contractor
shall therefore, give a notice of a minimum three days to the Engineer-In-Charge or his
representatives, such that the work can be checked by him or his representative. No work
shall be covered before inspection and approval of Engineer-In-Charge.
6.6.3 MINIMUM REQUIREMENT FOR ALL REINFORCED OR PLAIN CONCRETE
STRUCTURES
a) The minimum grade of concrete for water retaining structures shall be M25 having
minimum cement content of 360 kg/m3 with maximum 20mm size downgraded coarse
aggregates.
b) Approved quality water proofing compound (chloride free) shall be added during
concreting of all water retaining structure, in the proportion specified by the
manufacturer/as per design mix or upto 2% (percent) by weight of cement.
6.7 PRECAUTIONS TO KEEP SERVICE RESERVOIR FREE FROM CONTAMINATION
As soon as possible after completion of reservoir and after all pipes have been laid the
Contractor shall remove all dirt, debris, materials, tools etc. from the reservoir and shall
wash and brush down with water the whole of the interior. He shall also if required by the
Engineer incorporate a mixture of chloride of lime in the water wash required.
The greatest care shall be taken to keep the entire reservoir free from any contamination.
Strict supervision shall be maintained over the workmen entering after first washing down.
Provision shall be made to enable workmen to wash their feet or footwear clean and
sterilize them before entering.
6.8 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS

As construction joints are week in shear normally construction joints, if required, shall be
provided in location where shear stress is minimum. However, construction joints should
be avoided in the bottom slab of any water retaining structure. In the walls of the water
retaining structures vertical construction joints should be avoided to the maximum possible
extent. In the event the Contractor solely for his convenience proposes construction joints
in the bottom slab and or vertical construction joints in the wall of the water retaining
structures, then the Contractor shall provide approved PVC water-stop of 230mm width
and 8 mm thick in all such joints. For the convenience of construction and to avoid
segregation of concrete horizontal construction joints shall be provided in a planned way at
a height not more than 2.0M in case of approved admixture, at his cost, is used by the
contractor in the concrete to increasing the workability of the concrete without affecting the
designed water cement ratio. In case such admixture is not used the height of such cast
shall be restricted maximum up to 1.5M.
All such construction joints should be prepared properly like removing of all loose
materials by wire brush and soaking with rich cement slurry mixed with approved water-
proofing compound in prescribed ratio, before pouring next concrete. Next pour of concrete
in any construction joints in water retaining structures should be within 24 hours of last
pour.
6.9 FINAL FINISHING

The contractor shall ensure that the entire structure along with all its installations are in a
finished and in new and fully operative condition when handed over. He shall repair and
remove all signs of damage occurred during the course of installation and fixing of
equipment. He shall also ensure that all the external surface is finished properly and the
entire site is cleared of all extra construction material, debris and excavated soil.
6.10 PIPES AND SPECIALS

The CI double flanged Pipes shall conform to IS-7181 / IS-1536 and CI double flanged
fitting specials shall be in accordance with IS-1538.
Sizes of different pipes for inlet, Outlet, Overflow and wash out pipes for different
locations shall be as per scope of work for ESRs & CWRs.
CI Double flanged Dismantling joints shall be installed in such a manner that valves can be
dismantled without stress to the joints. These shall be for minimum working pressures of
10 kg/cm2 (1Mpa) and shall be completely leak proof with proper gasket arrangement.
Flange dimensions shall conform to latest relevant IS code. Flanged specials shall be
supplied with required nuts, bolts and rubber gaskets. The dismantling joint shall be
internally and externally coated with hot applied (dip) bituminous paint.
6.11 ALL FLANGED SPECIALS

The cast iron flanged specials (all flanged tee, flanged tapers, bends, blank flanges. Puddle collar)
shall conform to IS 1538.
The specials shall be internally and externally coated with hot applied (dip) bituminous paint.
All flanged specials shall be used for nominal pressure of 25 kg/cm2 (2.5 Mps).
Flanged specials shall be supplied with the galvanised bolts, nuts and rubber gaskets. The
galvanised nut & bolts shall be supplied in jute bag; rubber gasket shall be supplied in polyethylene
bags. The rubber gaskets shall conform to IS 5382.
The length and size of the puddle collars to be fixed at different places of the structures shall be
decided by the Engineer in Charge.

6.12 PUDDLE COLLAR

All puddle collers shall be of C.I. The length and size of the puddle collars shall be as per
specification.
6.13 LADDER
M. S. ladder 450 mm wide, made up of 50mm x 50mm x 6 mm M.S. angle iron and 25mm
M.S. bars welded at 300mm c/c shall be provided outside from the balcony to top dome.
MS cage shall also be provided on this ladder as shown in drawing. The ladder from top
dome to inside platform and from platform to bottom dome in the container shall be of
aluminium.
6.14 RAILING
Hand railing around the platforms, Balcony, stairs and landings shall be consisting of 25mm
diameter medium B class GI pipes in two rows (one at the top and other at middle level) and
1000mm high vertical post 65x65x6 mm angle iron @ 1500mm center to center (At least two
vertical angles are to be provided wherever distance is less) with all accessories like elbows, tees
etc. including welding, threading and embedding in cement concrete floor. Railing shall be
protected against corrosion after welding. The pipe shall pass through hole in the vertical angle.
6.15 WATER LEVEL INDICATOR

Water level indicator consists of an approved copper float and iron counter weight and connected
by 4 mm thick steel flexible stranded wire passing over aluminum pulleys 7 cm diameter fixed on
GI medium class pipe which is installed as indicated in the drawing shall have to be provided. The
scale shall be calibrated in centimeters and should consist of MS sheet 20 gauge fixed over wooden
plank with an MS angle iron frame of 35 mm X 35 mm X 5 mm and painted with white enamel
bases, letters in black and red. The scale shall be located and fixed with RCC column at 2.3 m
above the ground for Service Reservoir.
For Ground Level Clear Water Reservoir the water level indicator will be fixed on outer portion of
vertical wall.
6.16 VENTILATOR
Ventilators shall be provided for all reservoirs. The size of ventilator shall be approved by EIC in
consideration to the tank size and shall be of CI cowl and a bend of 300 mm high with mosquito
proof jali of stainless steel shall be fixed at the opening. It shall be well painted and properly fixed
in concrete. Thickness in case of MS shall be not less than 3 mm.
6.17 LIGHTENING ARRESTER

Lighting arrester shall be of copper bar of 25mm dia and 2m. long to be provided at the top of ESR.
This is to be connected by a GI strip of 25 mm wide & 3mm thick. This conductor strip shall be
connected to a 450mm x 450mm x 3mm thick copper plate to be embedded below the average
ground level by digging a pit. The earthing system shall comply with Indian Electricity Rules and
shall confirm to IS 3043. The pit shall be refilled by alternate layers of salt and coke as shown in
the drawing and balance shall be filled with loose soil. The 40 mm dia GI watering pipe shall be
provided in the pit. Care shall be taken that earth pit does not sink.

6.18 PAINTING
The outer wall and surface of tanks above ground shall be painted with minimum two coats
of cement paint of approved shade.
6.18.1 PAINTING OF METALLIC SURFACES
All mild steel railing, gate, frame, MS ladders, ventilator, manholes, cover, float valves shall
receive a coat of primer of red oxide, two under coats and one finishing coat of an approved enamel
paint and of approved shades.
6.19 PLINTH PROTECTION

Plinth protection works are to be constructed all around the ESR and CWR, it shall be extended up
to 1m from fall of balcony or edge of raft slab, whichever is more all around service reservoir. It
shall consist of laying lean concrete 150 mm thick in M10, over compacted soil. Sectional details
shall be as indicated in the drawing included with the document.
The minimum free space between plinth protection and the first bracing of the ESR shall be 1.60
mtr.
6.20 WATER BARS

The water stop shall be of plastic compound, the basic resin of which shall be polyvinyl chloride.
The compound shall contain additional resins, plasticizers, inhibitors or other materials such that
when the material is compounded, it shall meet the requirements given in IS. Water stop bar shall
be of reputed make as approved by Engineer In charge. It shall be 230 mm wide and 8 mm thick.
The water stops shall be jointed in straight reaches only by experienced trained personnel using a
suitable device as approved by the Engineer In charge.
GI Water Stop GI Water stop consisting of 150 mm wide GI strip of 18 gauge (with 150 mm
overlap at the ends) shall be provided at construction joints in walls of water retaining structures as
per drawing and as instructed by the Engineer In charge.
6.21 POLYETHYLENE SHEET (FOR CWR)

In accordance with clause 9.4.1.2 of IS 3370 (part-I) – 1965, a layer of 125 micron thick
polyethylene film will be provided between lean concrete (100mm thick 1.3.6 concrete) and the
base slab. This is provided to reduce shrinkage cracks in the RCC base slab.
6.22 SLOGAN AND LOGO

The contractor shall paint a area of 6m x 3m on the vertical wall of the tank portion by using 3 coats
of plastic emulsion paint of shade as approved by Engineer In Charge to form a base for writing the
slogan with 75 mm thick boarder around the area. For writing the slogan the letters shall be of 30
cm size. The size of logo shall be 75 cm. The shade for painting the slogan will be approved and
directed by Engineer in Charge. The logo should indicate the name of the project, name of the
village and the capacity of the reservoir. The slogan shall be as directed by the Engineer-in-charge.
6.23 PIPE CLAMP

The clamp shall be 6mm thick 550mm wide MS flat fixed on pipe & column.

6.24 MAN HOLE COVER

Square manhole cover 800x800 mm shall be provided. The cover shall be made of 3 mm thick MS
flat. The frame shall be made of MS angle 80x80x4. The cover shall be connected to this frame by
using two nos. strung hinges.
6.25 FLOAT VALVE
The float valve system shall be installed at the end of inlet pipe inside the tank in each
CWR & ESR. The float valves shall comprise of two float valves i.e. main float valves and
the auxiliary float valve. The material of construction for different components of main float, are
given below:
S. No. Name of Part Material Specification

1. Body Cast Iron ISD 210, FG 200
2. Valve Cast Iron ISD 210, FG 200
3. Bottom Plate Cast Iron ISD 210, FG 200
4. Washer Plate Gun metal IS 318
5. Seat ring Gun metal IS 318
6. Link Gun metal IS 318
7. Liner Brass -
8. Eye Bolt for Valve Brass -
9. Lever fork Mild steel -
10. Valve face Synthetic rubber -
11. Float Ball Copper -
The float ball is to be suspended in cylindrical vessel fabricated from 4 mm hot-dip

galvanized MS sheet, so that free upward / downward movement is offered to the ball as
the water level rises / falls in the cylindrical vessel. The tank shall be hot dipped galvanized
after fabrication. The valve shall provide watertight closing with an upward movement of
165-175 mm in the vessel.
The auxiliary float valve shall be installed at the bottom of the cylindrical vessel. It shall be of
copper alloy. Corydon pattern with rough body and screwed male ends. The material of ball shall
be copper and shall be installed at the bottom of the vessel as shown in the drawing. The size of the
float and the length of the lever must ensure a watertight closing at a pressure of 6 kg/cm2. The
valve design must with view to a permanent withdrawal at pressures reaching 6 kg/cm2. This relates
to cavitations of the seat, the piston and the washers.
The material of construction of auxiliary float for different components, are as under:
Part No. Name of Part Material Specification

1. Float ball Copper -
2. Ball Cap Gun metal BS 1400 LG 2
3. Lever Brass rod BS 2872 or 2873 CZ 114
4. Split Pin Brass -

5. Piston Gun metal BS 1400 GL
6. Piston Cap Gun metal -
7. Washer Nitrile rubber -
8. Body Gun metal BS 1400 GL
The above valves shall be tested for the following hydrostatic pressure. The lever and its
connections to the ball must be designed for heavy-duty function.
Body of valve : 10 kg/cm2

Seat of valve: 6 kg/cm2
6.26 TESTING FOR WATER TIGHTNESS

The contractor shall carry out a water tightness test for the maximum water head condition i.e. with
the water standing at full supply level. All cost of testing shall be born by the contractor. This test
shall be carried out in accordance with the procedure given below:
For water tightness test, before the filling operations are started, the reservoirs shall be jointly
inspected by the Engineer In Charge and the representative of the Contractor and condition of
surfaces of wall, construction joints etc. shall be inspected and noted and it shall be ensured that
jointing material filled in the joints is in position and all openings are closed. The contractor shall
make necessary arrangement for ventilation and lighting of reservoir by way of floodlights,
circulators etc. for carrying out proper inspection of surface and internal conditions if so desired by
the Engineer in Charge.
The water retaining structures shall be filled with water gradually at the rate not exceeding 30 cm.
Rise in water level per hour and shall extend for a period of 72 hours. Records of leakages starting
at different level of water in the reservoirs, if any, shall be kept.
The tanks shall be filled with water and after the expiry of seven days after the filling, the level of
the surface of the water shall be recorded. The level of the water shall be recorded again at
subsequent intervals of 24 hours over a period of seven days. The total drop in surface level over a
period of seven days shall be taken as an indication of the water-tightness of the tank. The actual
permissible nature of this drop in the surface level shall be decided by taking into account whether
the tanks are open or closed and the corresponding effect it has on evaporation losses and/or on
account of rainfall. However, underground tanks whose top is covered may be deemed to be water-
tight if the total drop in the surface level over a period of seven days does not exceed 20 mm.
In case of tanks whose external faces are exposed such as elevated tanks, the requirements of the
tests shall be deemed to be satisfied if the external faces show no signs of leakage and remain
apparently dry over the period of observation of seven days after allowing a seven day period for
absorption after filling.
If the structure does not satisfy the conditions of test, and the daily drop in water level is
decreasing, the period of test may be extended for further seven days and if specified limit is then
reached, the structure may be considered as satisfactory. The roofs of liquid-retaining structures
should be water-tight and should be tested on completion by flooding the roof with water to a
minimum depth of 25 mm for 24 h or longer, if so specified. Where it is impracticable, because of
roof slopes or otherwise, to contain a 25 mm depth of water, the roof should have continuous water
applied by a hose or sprinkler system to provide a sheet flow of water over the entire area of the
roof for not less than 6 h. In either case the roof should be considered satisfactory if no leaks or
damp patches show on the soffit. Should the structure not satisfy either of these tests then after the
completion of the remedial work it should be retested in accordance with this clause. The roof
insulation and covering if any should be completed as soon as possible after satisfactory testing. If
the structure does not satisfy the test requirements, and the daily drop in water level is decreasing,
the period of test may be extended for a further seven days and if the specified limit is not
exceeded, the structure may be considered as satisfactory.
In case the drop in water level exceed the permissible limit with the stipulated period of test, the
Contractor shall carry out such additional works and adopt such measures as may be directed by the
Engineer In Charge to reduce the leakage in the permissible limit. The entire rectification work that
shall be carried out in this connection shall be at Contractor’s cost.
If the test results are unsatisfactory, the Contractor shall ascertain the cause and make all necessary
repairs and repeat the water retaining structure test procedures, at his own cost. Should the re-test
results still be unsatisfactory after the repairs, the structure will be condemned and the Contractor
will dismantle and reconstruct the structure, to the original specification, at his own cost.
6.27 DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS:

6.27.1 DESIGN SUBMISSIONS
The contractor shall be responsible for the safety of structures, correctness of design and drawings,
even after the approval of the same by Engineer-in-Charge. Separate calculations for foundations or
superstructures submitted independent of each other shall be deemed to be incomplete and will not
be accepted by the Engineer-in-charge.
The design considerations described hereunder establish the minimum basic requirements of plain
and reinforced concrete structures, masonry structures and structural steel works. However, any
particular structure shall be designed for the satisfactory performance of the functions for which the
same is being constructed.
6.27.2 DESIGN STANDARDS

All designs shall be based on the latest Indian Standard (I.S.) Specifications or Codes of
Practice unless otherwise specified. The design standards adopted shall follow the best
modern engineering practice in the field based on any other international standard or
specialist literature subject to such standard reference or extract of such literature in the
English language being supplied to and approved by the Engineer-in-charge. In case of any
variation or contradiction between the provisions of the I.S. Standards or Codes and the
specifications given along with the submitted tender document, the provision given in this
specification shall be followed.
6.27.3 DESIGN LIFE

The design life of all structures and buildings shall be 60 years.

6.27.4 DESIGN LOADING

The structure shall be designed to resist the worst combination of the following loads/ stresses
under test and working conditions; these include dead load, live load, wind load, seismic load,
stresses due to temperature changes, shrinkage and creep in materials, dynamic loads:
Dead Load
This shall comprise all permanent construction including walls, floors, roofs, partitions, stairways,
fixed service equipments and other items of machinery. In estimating the loads of process
equipment all fixtures and attached piping shall be included.
Live Load
Live loads shall be in general as per I.S. 875. However, the following minimum loads shall be
considered in the design of structures:
i) : 2.00 KN/m2
Live load on roofs
ii) Live load on all other floors walkways, stairways and : 2.00 KN/m2
platforms
In the absence of any suitable provisions for live loads in I.S. Codes or as given above for any
particular type of floor or structure, assumptions made must receive the approval of the Engineer-
in-charge prior to starting the design work. Apart from the specified live loads or any other load
due to material stored, any other equipment load or possible overloading during maintenance or
erection/ construction shall be considered and shall be partial or full whichever causes the most
critical condition.
Wind Load
Wind loads shall be as per I.S. 875. Part 3
Earthquake Load
This shall be computed as per I.S. 1893-2002 taking into consideration soil foundation system,
importance factor appropriate to the type of structure basic horizontal seismic coefficient/ seismic
zone factor & average acceleration coefficient.
Partial safety factors for limit state design of reinforced concrete and prestressed concrete
structures. In the limit state design of reinforced and prestressed concrete structures, the following
load combinations shall be accounted for:
1) 1.5( DL+lL)
2) 1.2( DL+ZL+EL)
3) 1.5( DL+EL)
4) 0.9DL* 1.5EL
Other requirement:
• Minimum Depth of foundation: 2.0 M or as per report of SBC report whichever is more
excluding depth of lean concrete.
• Circular shaft is not allowed
• As wind/earth quake are basic load on brace. While designing brace no increase should be
allowed over permissible stresses
• Brace should be designed using steel beam theory and checked & corrected with STAAD
modeling.
• For making joint at junction of brace and column rigid, provision of additional
reinforcement should be made and for ESR of capacity more than 700 KL customary
haunches shall be provided.
• while designing staging live load on tank part should not be reduced for local
calculations in structural design
• In vertical wall reinforcement should be in two layers.
• For computing wind load terrain category 2 and class B structures shall be
considered. Minimum
• Minimum value of Reduction factor for circular shape shall be taken 0.7.
• The design should be based on elastic theory.
• Tank portion should be designed using membrane theory and it should be checked &
corrected for continuity analysis for the stress calculation.
• Minimum area of reinforcement in columns shall be 0.8% of cross sectional area of column
actually provided.
• Response reduction factor, depending on the perceived seismic damage performance of the
structure, characterized by ductile or brittle deformations. However, the ratio (I/R ) shall
not be greater than 1.0( Table 7). The values of R for buildings are given in Table 7. For
designing of staging ESR value of R should be taken 3.
6.28 JOINTS
Movement joints such as expansion joints, complete contraction joints, partial contraction joints
and sliding joints shall be designed to suit the structure.
No expansion joints in wall, floor & roof of water retaining structure shall be allowed.
The positions of construction joints should be specified by the designer & indicated on the
drawings. If there is a need on site to revise any specified position or to have additional joints, the
proposed positions should be agreed with the designer.
The concrete at the joint should be bounded with that subsequently placed against it, without
provision for relative movement between the two concrete should not be allowed to run to a feather
edge & vertical joints should be formed against stop edges.
6.29 DESIGN CONDITIONS FOR UNDERGROUND OR PARTLY UNDERGROUND

LIQUID RETAINING STRUCTURES
Ground or partly underground liquid containing structures shall be designed for the following
conditions:
Liquid depth up to full height of wall : no relief due to soil pressure from outside to be considered;
Structure empty (i.e. empty of liquid, any material, etc.): full earth pressure and surcharge pressure
wherever applicable, to be considered;
Structures shall be designed for uplift in empty conditions with the water table as indicated in geo-
technical report & due care should be taken for seasonal variation on higher side.
Walls shall be designed under operating conditions to resist earthquake forces from earth pressure
mobilization and dynamic water loads;
Ground or partially underground structures shall also be checked against stresses developed due to
any combination of full and empty compartments with appropriate ground/uplift pressures from
below to base slab. The design shall be such that the minimum gravity weight exceeds the
uplift pressure at least by 20%.
An increase cover of 15 mm is recommended for walls and roof bottom to account for contract with
chlorinated water in side the reservoir. The increase cover is not proposed for the base slab as
cement concrete screed topping is proposed to provide protection to the RCC Structure.
6.30 FOUNDATIONS
The minimum depth of foundations for the structures, frame foundations and load bearing walls
shall be as per IS 1904 and suitable for site.
Bearing capacity of soil shall be determined as per IS: 6403.
Care shall be taken to avoid the foundations of adjacent buildings or structure foundations, either
existing or not within the scope of this contract. Suitable adjustments in depth, location and sizes
may have to be made depending on site conditions. No extra claims for such adjustments shall be
accepted.
A structure subjected to groundwater pressure shall be designed to resist floatation. The dead
weight of empty structure shall provide a factor of safety of 1.2 against uplift during construction
and service.
Where there is level difference between the natural ground level and the foundations of structure or
floor slabs, this difference shall be filled up in the following ways
n) In case of liquid retaining structures, the natural topsoil shall be removed as described above
and the level difference shall be made up with Plain Cement Concrete not weaker than M 10.
o) Soil & Geo Technical Investigation
SBC tests shall be got done through an approved agency. For foundations, the structural design and
reinforcement drawings shall be prepared assuming maximum SBC of soil as 10 T/Sqm even if the
SBC testing is found to be 10 T/Sqm or more at foundation depth(minimum 2 m or as per SBC
report). If the SBC testing is found to be less than 10 T/Sqm at foundation depth, the structure shall
be designed on the basis of actual SBC found on testing for which no extra payment will be made
to contractor.
6.31 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

The following are the design requirements for all reinforced or plain concrete structures.
a) All blinding and leveling concrete shall be a minimum 100 mm thick in concrete grade
M15 unless otherwise specified.
Liquid Retaining Structures:
All structural reinforced concrete shall be of a minimum M25 grade with a maximum 40
mm aggregate size for footings and base slabs and with a maximum 20 mm aggregate size
for all other structural members.
Table 1 Minimum Cement Content, Maximum Water-Cement Ratio and
Minimum Grade of Concrete
Concrete Maximum Cement Minimum Minimum Grande of
Content kg/m3 Free Water Cement Ratio Cement Concrete
i) Plain concrete 250 0.5 M20
ii) Reinforced concrete 320 0.45 M30

iii) Prestressed 360 0.40 M40

concrete
NOTE:
1. Cement content prescribed in this table is irrespective of the grades of cement and it is
inclusive of additions mentioned in 5.2 of IS 456. The additions such as flyash or
ground granulated blast furnace slag may be taken into account in the concrete
composition with respect to the cement content and water cement ratio if the suitability
is established and as long as the maximum amounts taken into account do not exceed
the limit of pozzolana and slag specified in IS 1489 (Part 1) and N 455 respectively.
2. For small capacity tanks up to 50 m3 at locations where there is difficulty in providing
M30 grade concrete, the minimum grade of concrete may be taken as M25. However
this exception shall not apply in coastal areas.
Suitable admixtures may be used with the approval of Engineer in charge.
Construction of floors and walls of Liquid Retaining structures shall be as per 9.4 & 9.5 of IS: 3370
Part 1.
The following minimum thickness shall be used for different reinforced concrete members,
irrespective of design thickness.
(i) a) Walls for liquid retaining structures for capacity upto 200 KL : 150 mm
b) Walls for liquid retaining structures for capacity more than : 250 mm
200 KL
(ii) Roof slabs for liquid retaining structures (other than flat slabs) : 150 mm
(iii) Bottom slabs including roof slabs for liquid retaining structures : 200 mm
(iv) Floor slabs including roof slabs, walkways, canopy slabs : 100 mm
(v) Wall of cables/ pipe trenches, underground pits etc. : 150 mm
(vi) Column footings : 300 mm
(vii) Parapets, Chhajja : 100 mm
(viii) Pre-Cast trench cover : 75 mm
6.32 CONCRETE MIXES

Cement concrete (plain or reinforced) shall comply with the requirement of specifications of
Rajasthan PWD (B&R) Specification and Explanatory Notes for Buildings and House Drainage
except in so far as these are not altered or modified by specific stipulations as given in the
specifications herein. The concrete grades to be used shall not be leaner than following:
Water retaining structure i.e. container, beam platform in the M25
reservoir and roof
Other structural concrete M25
Lean concrete in foundation M15

7.0 Specifications For Pumping Stations (Mechanical &

Civil Works)
7.1 General
The technical specifications for the Mechanical equipment(s) and civil works for various pumping
stations are detailed below.
All valves, MS/CI/DI pipes and specials used in the pumping stations shall conform to the
specifications laid down in Chapter for specifications for valves and Chapter for specifications for
pipeline work of this volume of tender document. The design criteria, material specifications,
workmanship and testing of materials used for all civil works shall confirm to provisions laid down
in Chapter for specifications of civil works. Pre dispatch inspection, pre commissioning tests,
commissioning and trial runs shall be as detailed in respective chapters of this volume.
7.2 STANDARDS
Except as otherwise specified in these technical specification, the Indian Standards and Codes of
Practice shall be adhered to for the design, manufacturing, inspection and factory testing, handling,
installation and site testing of all material and equipment used for the work, or where a IS standard
does not exist, to an approved national or international standard.
Only equipment supplied by reputed manufacturers and approved by the Engineer-in-Charge will
be accepted.
7.3 MECHANICAL PLANT & EQUIPMENT
7.3.1 GENERAL
It is not the intent to specify herein all the details pertaining to the design, drawing, selection of
equipment/materials, procurement, manufacture, installation, testing & commissioning, however,
the same shall be of high engineering standard and shall comply with all currently applicable
standards, regulations & safety codes.
7.4 PUMPS
7.4.1 PUMP DUTY POINTS
Based on the preliminary survey and the water demand, the duty points required for the pumps is
specified herein after. However, due to minor change in alignment, the levels of inlet and outlet at
the terminal points etc., minor changes are expected which shall only be finalized after detailed
layout plan of head works and the L-section of the mains to be submitted by the contractor and as
approved by EIC. The selected pumps therefore may require suitable adjustments for operation in
different combination within the operating range defined herein after.
As it is the responsibility of the contractor to provide the designed flow to all the reservoirs, thus
the contractor on his own cost has to do the required surveys to verify the department data and the
designs. However to fulfill the contractors obligation the duty conditions asked herein after can be
increased to suit the system requirement as per the prevailing site conditions.
7.4.2 PUMPS AT DIFFERENT PUMPING STATIONS

The contractor shall work out the actual head requirements after confirming field survey for the
above requirement and finalizing suction & delivery levels & other hydraulic parameters.
Contractor has to check this design and modify, if the duty conditions exceed above minimum
requirement.
7.4.2.1 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

1. The contractor shall select suitable pumps for operation of Clear water pumping in
the specified operating range. All the pumps shall be of similar characteristics for
particular pumping main.
2. The pumps shall be Horizontal Split Casing type or mono-block and shall be
provided with suitable motors and accessories.
3. For each main minimum 2 pumps each (1working, 1 stand by) shall be provided
under this contract.
4. All the pumps shall be capable of developing the required total head at rated
capacity of design discharge for continuous operation. The contractor shall match
the performance curves of pumps to the operating range.
5. The pump shall have a stable head curve, i.e. the total head-capacity curve shall be
continuously rising towards the shut off head. The shut off head shall be at least
10% more than pump head at intersecting point of the pump curve with the upper
range system head curve.
6. The contractor shall guarantee a minimum overall efficiency of as per CPHEEO
manual for each pump to be installed under the contract, corresponding to delivery
of design discharge at duty point. The contractor shall specify the pump
performance. The efficiency for other pumps shall be as per manufacturer’s
standards.
7. The power characteristic shall be non-overloading and preferably flat for flows
higher than the best efficiency flow (BEF).
8. The required pump NPSH at duty point shall be adequately less than the available
NPSH. The horizontal split casing pumps shall be used with positive suction head.
9. Pump must be suitable for operating in parallel over the entire operating range. The
pump shall operate satisfactorily at any point between the maximum and minimum
system resistance, or at the end of the pump performance curve with respect to the
NPSH available at the lowest permissible suction water level.
10. The pumps shall be capable of reverse rotation up to 125% rated full speed of the
drive motor, due to back flow of water, without damage or loosening of threaded
components.
11. The first critical speed shall be away from the operating speed and in no case less
than 130% of the rated speed.
12. The specifications for flanges shall be as per the relevant IS code.
13. Spare parts supplied with the pump shall be identical to respective pump
components and shall be from original manufacturer.
14. Pumps shall run smooth without undue noise or vibration. Noise levels and velocity
of vibrations shall be within acceptable limits. Noise level shall be limited to 85
dba at a distance of 2 m. Velocity of vibrations shall be within 4.5 mm/s as per
relevant Hydraulic Institutes Standards and IS.
15. Unless otherwise specified the drive unit power rating shall be the maximum of the
following requirements:
• 15 % margin over the pump shaft input power required for the flow and
head as considered.
• 10 % margin over the maximum shaft input power required within the
“Range of Operation”.
• 30 % margin over the maximum shaft input power required within the
“Range of Operation” for pumps of BHP less than 15 HP.
• The range of operation shall be +10% to -25% of duty point head.

16. The contractor shall confirm that the pumps shall not be of a new design and a
pump of at least the same size and same type should be in operation for more than
5000 hours satisfactorily in at least two locations. The details of locations shall be
submitted in schedules.
7.4.2.2 GENERAL FEATURES OF PUMPS
The clear water pumps shall have the following features:
a) Type of Drive : 0.415 KV Squirrel cage induction motors.
b) NPSH : The NPSH provided for the pumps shall be at least 0.5 m more than that
required for the pump under all conditions of operation. Negative suction is also
acceptable provided additional priming pumps with 50% stand by are installed without
any additional cost.
7.4.3 SPECIFICATIONS FOR HORIZONTAL SPLIT CASING PUMPS

7.4.3.1 CODES AND STANDARDS
The design, manufacture and performance of the pumps specified herein shall comply with the
requirements of the applicable Codes and Standards, as follows, but not limited to:
No. Standard Title
1 IS 6595 Horizontal centrifugal pumps for clear, cold and fresh water.
(Part II)
2 IS 9137 Code for Acceptance Tests for Centrifugal, Mixed flow and Axial
pumps.
3 IS 13537 Technical specification for centrifugal pumps - Class 2
4 ISO 5199 Standards of the Hydraulic Institute of USA.
5 ISO 2373 Balancing of impeller.
6 IS 5120 Performance test of pumps
7 IS 11732 Mechanical Balancing
7.4.3.2 FEATURES OF CONSTRUCTION

IMPELLER
The impeller shall be an enclosed impeller, made in one piece and securely keyed on the shaft. The
installation will include means to prevent loosening of the impeller during operation, including
rotating in the reverse direction. The impeller shall be statically and dynamically balanced to
prevent vibration, as per ISO 2373.
CASING RING
The pump shall be provided with a renewable type casing ring, to offer wearing resistance.
Hardness of the casing ring shall be 50 BHN (Brinell Hardness Number Units) lower than the
impeller ring.
IMPELLER RING
The pump impeller shall be provided with a renewable type impeller ring on both ends. The
material of construction of these rings shall be similar to that of impeller and these shall be hot push

fit on impeller. The rings hardness shall be equal to impeller and 50 BHN more than the casing
rings.
SHAFT
Single integral shaft, shall be designed to withstand the torque loads throughout the whole range of
operating conditions, for the selected particular impeller diameter as well as all the impeller
diameters covered between minimum and maximum impeller diameters when coupled to the motor
shaft through flexible coupling. The shaft design should also include the possibility of running the
pump with an electric motor of higher power rating meant for future expansion with increased
impeller diameters.
SHAFT SLEEVES
Replaceable shaft sleeves shall be provided to protect the shaft where it passes through stuffing
boxes. The end of the shaft sleeve assembly shall extend through the packing gland. Shaft sleeves
shall be securely locked or keyed to the shaft to prevent loosening. Shaft and shaft sleeve assembly
shall ensure concentric rotation.
STUFFING BOXES
Stuffing boxes at driving end and non-driving end shall be of such design that they can be re-
packed, without removing any part, other than the gland and lantern ring. An axially split gland
should be used to facilitate changing the gland packing. Sufficient space shall be available for
maintenance purposes.
AIR RELEASE VALVES
Pump shall be provided with arrangement of valve to vent air, which may get accumulated in the
pump.
SEALING
Self sealing water connections should be provided.
FLANGES
Flanges shall be machined flat, with flange faces vertical and at right angles to the pump mounting
surface. Cast iron flange drilling and thickness shall conform to IS 1538, (part IV and VI) for ID
upto 1500mm and to IS 6392 for ID greater than 1500mm.
BEARINGS
Bearings shall be either grease or oil lubricated and should absorb the radial and axial thrusts, under
all operating conditions. Anti-friction bearing shall be of standard type and shall be selected to give
20,000 hours continuous operation at rated operating conditions. The rise in bearing oil/grease
temperature with continuous running of the pump shall be within the allowable limits which shall
not exceed 20°C for grease and 30°C for oil lubricated bearings above ambient temperature.
Cooling arrangements shall be provided if required. Bush bearings will not be acceptable.
BASE PLATE
The common base plate for pump and motor shall be fabricated from mild steel sections and have
sufficient rigidity to resist vibration and distortion. Suitable holes shall be provided for grouting and
they shall be so located that the base will be able to be grouted in place, without disturbing the
pump and motor. All pumps and motors shall be properly and accurately aligned, bolted and
doweled to the base plate. Adequate space shall be provided between pump drain connections and
base plate for installation of minimum 20 mm diameter drain pipe. Foundation bolts shall be
complete with nuts and flat and shake proof washers.
COUPLING
A flexible pin bush type coupling shall be provided, duly bored and keyed to the pump and motor
shafts.
The coupling and the pump shafts have to be designed so that the breaking load of the coupling
system is slightly below that of the shaft.
ACCESSORIES
All specified accessories and any other standard accessories required for correct and safe operation
of the pump shall be furnished with the pumps. All incidental piping (including valves) required for
sealing, lubrication and cooling of stuffing box packing and/or pump bearing shall be furnished by
the Contractor.
A mild steel fabricated coupling guard shall be provided to provide a safeguard against the open
rotating parts of the pump and motor.
Eye bolts (as many as required for safety), shall be provided for ease of lifting and installation.
7.4.3.3 TECHNICAL PARTICULARS

Features & Material of Construction
Casing Horizontal split casing
Drive Direct
Flange Drilling IS 1538
Prime mover Electric Motor (Refer Electrical section)
Casing Cast Iron IS: 210 – Gr. FG 260
Impeller & impeller rings SS (CF8M)
Shaft SS (AISI 410)
Shaft Sleeve SS (AISI 410)
Casing rings SS (CF8M, CA15)
Glands Bronze grade LTB2 of IS 318
Gland Packing Graphite Asbestos
Lantern Rings CI
Gaskets Manufacturer’s Standard
Fasteners (Bolts) Forged Steel for Pressure Parts and Carbon Steel for Non-
Pressure Parts.
Drive data
1 Motor 6.6 KV/0.415 KV motor, (TETV) Squirrel cage induction motors
7.4.3.4 ACCESSORIES REQUIRED TO BE SUPPLIED BY THE CONTRACTOR WITH PUMP

The contractor is supposed to provide at least the following accessories
• Base Plate
• Foundation Bolts
• Coupling
• Coupling guard
7.4.3.5 DRAWINGS AND INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED

During detailed engineering the Contractor shall submit the following:
• General arrangement, cross-sectional and dimensional drawings/data pertaining to selected
model.
• Complete detailed drawing of the base plate
• Complete performance curve with
a) H - Q curves for complete range of impellers between minimum and maximum size of
impellers and efficiency curves super imposed on them, highlighting selected impeller
diameter.
b) Shaft Power - Q curves for complete range of impellers.
c) Efficiency -Q curve for Maximum impeller diameter and selected impeller diameter.

• Test reports, performance curves and other particulars, as required by the applicable clauses
of this specification.
Instruction Manuals:
• Instruction manual for Erection
• Instruction for pre-commissioning check up, operation, abnormal conditions, maintenance
and repair
• Recommended inspection points and periods of inspection
• Schedule of preventive maintenance
• Recommendations for types of lubricants, lubricating points, frequency of lubrication and
lubricant changing schedule.
7.4.4 SPECIFICATIONS OF MONO BLOCK PUMPS

The mono block pumps shall conform to the requirements of the required head and flow as given in
the scope of work. The construction features of the pump shall conform to IS: 9079.
During detailed engineering the contractor shall submit the following:
• General arrangement, cross-sectional and dimensional drawings/data pertaining to
selected model.
• Complete detailed drawing of the base plate, if any
• Complete performance curve with (for pumps of BHP more than 50 HP)
(a) H - Q curves.
• Test reports, performance curves and other particulars, as required by the
applicable clauses of this specification.
Instruction Manuals:
• Instruction manual for Erection

• Instruction for pre-commissioning check up, operation, abnormal conditions,
maintenance and repair
7.4.5 DEWATERING/DRAINAGE PUMPS

These pumps must comply with following features.
7.4.5.1 GENERAL
The dewatering pump shall be of suitable capacity and head. The pump motor shall be suitable for
working with or without submergence in water. The motor rating shall be more than the maximum
power required by the pump.
The pumps shall be electric motor driven.
The pumps shall be vertical, centrifugal, non-clog type. The impeller shall be mounted on the
extended shaft of the motor.
The fixed set shall operate manually and automatically controlled by low and high level switches in
the drain pit.
7.4.5.2 FEATURES OF CONSTRUCTION

1 Impeller Bronze Grade LTB II of IS 318

2 Casing Cast Iron Grade FG 200 of IS 210/ Aluminium as per mfg.

Standard
3 Shaft 40C8 of IS 1570
4 Motor 415 V, 3Ph AC supply, submersible

• Leaflets on dewatering / water circulating pump.
• Cross sectional drawings with performance curves.
7.4.5.4 INSTRUCTION MANUALS:
• Installation manual for erection
• Recommendations for types of lubricants, lubricating points, frequency of
lubrication and lubricant changing schedule.
7.5 DELIVERY & SUCTION PIPES – DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS

• All in house pipes shall be of MS as per IS: 3589-2000. The minimum thickness shall
be as per IS: 3589-2000 or as per design or 6.35 mm which ever is more.
• All the in house piping shall be provided with internal food grade epoxy painting and
external enamel painting as approved by EIC.
• Pipes shall be welded with companion flanges of respective valves and dismantling
joints etc.
• The suction and delivery pipes shown in the conceptual drawings clear water
pumping stations are tentative. However the contractor shall check the same so as to
limit the velocity of flow in respective pipes, below 2 m/sec. The velocity in the
delivery pipes shall not exceed 1.8 m/s. The velocity in the suction pipe shall not
exceed 1.0 m/s. The velocity in suction manifold shall not exceed 0.6 m/s. These
velocities shall correspond to the ultimate demand of 2045.
7.6 EOT CRANE
EOT Cranes shall be provided over motor floor area, loading and unloading bay in
pumping stations.
Design, testing and commissioning of the related parts shall conform to the latest revision
of IS 3177 Class 2, medium duty for mechanical and Class 4 for electrical and IS 807.
For welded construction, such as for the bridge girders and carriages, rope drums, gear
boxes etc., steel shall conform to IS 2062 quality. For welding these members low
hydrogen electrodes shall be used.
7.6.1 CONSTRUCTIONAL DETAILS
7.6.1.1 GENERAL

Cranes will be of welded box girder construction and the design testing and commissioning
shall conform to the latest revision of IS 3177, class 4 for electrical and IS 807.
For welded construction, such as for the bridge girders and carriages, rope drums, gear
boxes etc.., steel shall conform to IS 226 quality for thickness up to 20mm; steel above
20mm thickness shall conform to IS 2062 quality. For welding these members low
Hydrogen electrodes shall be used.
Guards of an approved pattern and design, shall be attached to each end of the end
carriages, which shall push forward and off the track any object placed across it.
7.6.1.2 CONSTRUCTIONAL DETAILS
The double web, box construction crane bridge girders shall be in one piece or in pieces
suitable for transportation if in pieces the design of multi piece construction shall require
the approval of the Engineer in Charge.
Cross travel rails shall be fixed to the bridge girders by clamping only and not welding.
Plates, bars, angle sections and where practicable other rolled sections, used in the load
bearing members of structures shall be not less than 6 mm thickness.
The end carriages shall be of double web plate box construction or I section connected to
the girders by welding at top or by large gusset plates and fitted bolts to ensure maximum
rigidity. Drop stops and jacking pads shall be built-in features. Full length plate form of
checker plate of minimum thickness 6 mm shall be provided along both sides of the crane
to ensure easy, safe excess to the crane crab, travel gears and other parts. Safety railing
shall be provided on crane bridges and crab frame. Foot-walk shall have sufficient width to
give 500 mm minimum clear passage at all points, except between railing and bridge drive
where this clearance may be reduced to not less than 400mm.
7.6.1.2.1 ROPE DRUMS
Rope drums shall be of cast steel or fabricated from seamless tubes, conforming to the
relevant Indian Standards. Fabricated rope drums shall be stress relieved before any
machining takes place. The sizing of drum shall conform to IS 3177 Clause 5.
7.6.1.2.2 ROPE SHEAVES
Rope sheaves shall be of cast steel or fabricated from rolled steel plates, conforming to
Clause 6 of IS 3177.
7.6.1.2.3 WIRE ROPES
The wires shall be hemp cored for all cranes. Ropes shall be of regular right hand lay as
per IS 2266. The rope construction shall be 6 x 37 up to 16 mm diameter and 6 x 36 above
16 mm diameter, with a factor of safety specified as per Clause 5.6.1 of IS 3177 and of
approved makes only.
7.6.1.2.4 HOOK BLOCK
The sheaves shall be fully encased in close fitting guards fabricated from steel plate.
Smooth opening shall be provided in the guards to allow for free movement of the rope.
Holes shall be provided for oil drainage.
7.6.1.2.5 LIFTING HOOKS
The lifting hook shall be one that will best suit this type of crane and as per IS 3177.
Hooks shall be quality tested by a third party agency such as IS or Lloyds.
7.6.1.2.6 GEARS AND GEAR BOXES
Straight and helical spur gearing shall be used for all motions. All first reduction gears shall
have helical teeth. All pinions shall be integral with the shaft. All gears shall be hardened
and shall be of tempered alloy steel having metric module. Overhung gears shall not be
used. The design and general arrangement of gear boxes shall be as per Clause 10 of IS
3177. All gearing shall be totally enclosed/immersed in oil.
7.6.1.2.7 TRACK WHEELS

Crab/Crane wheels shall be double flanged. Wheels shall be mounted in anti-friction roller
bearings housed in “L” shaped bearing brackets for ease of removal during routine
maintenance. Flangeless wheels with guide rollers would also be acceptable.
Solid wheels shall be of forged/rolled steel or cast steel. In general the track wheels shall
conform to Clause 11 of IS 3177.
7.6.1.2.8 RAILS
The rails shall be specified as being suitable for the crane duty used, no square bars will be
acceptable. The rails shall be complete with end stops, holding down bolts and taper
washers and shall be suitable for connection to the station earth. Access to the crane for
maintenance purposes from the walking plate form by means of a steel ladder with cage
shall be provided. The crane shall be provided with full length walkway on drive side
girder and small walkway on other girder. Walkway shall be at least 500 mm clear inside.
7.6.1.2.9 COUPLINGS
All couplings shall be of steel or cast iron of grade 260 conforming to IS 210 and shall be
designed to suit the maximum torque that may be developed. The manual drive shaft and
hoist drum shall be connected to the gear box input shaft through a flexible shock absorbing
coupling as per Clause 8 of IS 3177.
7.6.1.2.10 BEARING AND BEARING HOUSING
Anti-friction bearing housings shall be used throughout, except where required otherwise
for technical reasons, conforming to Clause 7 of IS 3177.
7.6.1.2.11 SHAFTS
All shafts shall be made of steel as per Clause 9 of IS 3177.
7.6.1.3 ELECTRICAL DETAILS
The general technical details for the electrical systems specified elsewhere in the document
will apply to the electrical equipment for the gantry crane also. The following points deal
with the special requirements for the crane. In case of any contradiction with the electrical
specifications described elsewhere in this document, the special requirements detailed
hereafter shall have precedence.
415 V, 3 Phase, 4 wire electric power supply will be available at one point for the crane
bus. The Bidder shall provide a metal enclosed switch box housing a 63 A TPN switch, CT
operated ammeter and voltmeter, with selector switch. This switch box shall be located
approx. 1.2 meters above the floor level. The incoming cable must be of suitable size
aluminum conductor, PVC insulated, PVC sheathed, strip armored. From this switch
onwards, the Bidder shall arrange and terminate the supply at the crane bus.
7.6.1.3.1 DOUBLE GIRDER CRANE POWER SUPPLY
415 Volts +/- 10%, 3 Phase, 4 Wire, 50 Hz +/- 5%, AC through trolley lines.
7.6.1.3.2 CURRENT COLLECTOR
Two No. per trolley line shall be provided, each rated for 100% of total crane rating.
Double collectors on each earth trolley shall be provided and these shall be different from
those on the power trolley line. Collector rollers and shoes shall be designed to reduce
sparking to the minimum level possible.
An off/load manual isolator , with a locking facility shall be provided immediately after the
current collectors on the incoming line on the crane.
Power from the isolator shall be taken to the air circuit breaker located in protective panel
of the crane. The breaker shall be provided with under voltage, overload and short circuit
release or relays. The breaker can only be closed when:
• All controllers are in neutral position;

• None of the stator or directional contactors are in closed position;
• Door/gate switches are not actuated;
• Rotary and gravity limit switches for hoist motion not operated.
7.6.1.3.3 POWER SUPPLY FOR LIGHTING AND MAGNET CIRCUITS
Power for lighting and magnet circuits shall be tapped from the incoming side of isolator
near current collectors.
7.6.1.3.4 POWER SUPPLY FOR CROSS TRAVERSE MOTION
A flexible traveling crane system mounted on a retracting support system, shall be used.
The conductor shall consist of insulated multi-conductor or several single conductor cables
with permanent termination on the bridge and on the trolley. The flexible trailing cables
shall have ample length and shall be supported by means of properly designed movable
clamps. the clamps shall be fitted with rollers and shall run freely on a guide rail allowing
relative movement of bridge and trolley without undue stress or wear on the suspended
cables. The flexible copper cables shall be of butyl rubber or EPR insulated CSP sheathed
type 650/1100 V Grade.
7.6.1.3.5 PANELS
All panels shall be of free-standing floor mounted construction, suitable to withstand any
vibrations emanating from the crane. The panel and its components shall conform to
standards of Electrical Technical Specifications for LT Board, described elsewhere in this
document.
7.6.1.3.6 MOTORS
Heavy duty motors suitable for crane operation, shall be reversible, suitable for frequent
acceleration and mechanical breaking, totally enclosed, fan cooled, wound rotor type The
duty of the motor shall be S5, as per IS 325.
Class of insulation shall be “B”. The pullout torque is to be not less than 225% of full load
torque, corresponding to 40% CDF (Cycle Duration Factor of the motor).
The main motor shall have the speed ranges suitable for gearbox and operating speed for a
Class 2 crane.
7.6.1.3.7 BRAKES
Brakes shall be provided for hoisting motions. Brakes shall be thruster type. Brakes shall be
designed to be fail-safe whenever there is a current interruption, either intentionally or by
main power supply failure. The capacity of brakes, brake drums, shoes and brake
adjustment shall be as per Clause 14.4 of IS 3177.
7.6.1.3.8 LIMIT SWITCHES
Only drum limit switches are acceptable. Roller operated, resetting limit switches shall be
provided for all motors.
For each hoist motion, a rotary type over-winding self resetting limit switch shall be
provided. An indication shall be provided to the operator whenever this limit switch has
been operated. Limit switches shall be fitted to prevent over travelling and over traversing
and any other special requirements.
7.6.1.3.9 RESISTANCE
Resistance’s shall be air-cooled, robust, heavy duty, corrosion resistant, punched
stainless steel grid type/cast iron grid resistor. Suitable tapping points shall be provided.
Resistance boxes shall be mounted in racks that permit independent travel of any
selected box.

7.6.1.4 PENDENT CONTROLLER

1. Pendent push button station shall comprise of the following and be suitable for
110 V AC:
2. Key operated ON push button-standard green button.
3. On signal lamp-green lens.
4. Emergency OFF push button-standard red button.
5. Hoisting push button- standard black button.
6. Lowering push button-standard yellow button.
7. Micro Hoisting push button- standard black button.
8. Micro Lowering push button- standard black button.
9. Cross traverse forward push button- standard black button.
10. Cross traverse reverse push button- standard black button.
11. Micro Cross traverse forward push button- standard black button.
12. Micro Cross traverse reverse push button- standard black button.
13. Long traverse forward push button- standard black button.
14. Long traverse reverse push button- standard black button.
15. Micro Long traverse forward push button- standard black button.
16. Micro Long traverse reverse push button- standard black button.
17. Crane light ON/OFF push button.
18. Bell ON/OFF push button.
7.6.1.5 LIGHTING, SOCKET OUTLETS, BELL ETC.
Lighting shall be provided on stair-case, platforms and working areas, including one No.
floodlight on the underside of bridge. Fluorescent lamps with necessary fittings shall be
used for staircases, platforms etc. Adequate number of hand lamp socket outlets shall be
provided, along with switches. A hand lamp, with suitable guard protection for bulb,
shall be provided for each crane.
7.6.1.6 TECHNICAL PARTICULARS
Capacity and size Required – Clear Water Pump-houses
1 Capacity As per scope of work
2 Span To suit actual pump house plan, approved by Engineer in
Charge
3 Rated Speed Main Hoist – 2 m/min.
Macro Hoist – 0.2 m/min.
Cross-Traverse – 10 m/min.
Micro Cross-Traverse – 1 m/min.
Long Travel – 20 m/min.
Micro long travel – 2 m/min.
± 10% of rated speed while operating in full load condition
for lowering or hoisting.
4 Gantry As per building plan approved by Engineer in Charge.
Length
7.6.2 DRAWINGS AND INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED

During detailed engineering the Bidder shall submit the following:
Drawings showing general arrangement, clearance requirement, assembly, cross sectional
data and materials of construction for:
• EOT Crane unit.
• Bridge assembly and components.
• Bridge end trucks and Wheel assembly

• Trolley.
• Trolley wheel assembly.
• Drive and transmission unit for bridge travel, trolley travel, main hoist. and
auxiliary hoist.
• Suspension unit for main hook block and auxiliary hook block.
• Main hook block.
Drawings showing layout of controllers and protective panels inside the operator’s
cabin/pendant station.
Leaflets on proprietary items such as motors, brakes, gearbox and coupling etc.
Design calculations for the following :
• Bridge girder, rope drum, machinery shafts, gear box, motor rating, brake capacity,
bearing life, wheel loading etc.
Drawings, characteristics and other data for each drive motor.
Drawings on runway rails and their end stops, showing fixtures.
Material test certificates for all items, including hooks and wire rope.
Reports on various tests at shop and at site.
Control and protection scheme along with crane wiring drawing as well as a schematic
drawing of control wiring indicating ratings and specifications for motors, resistors, fuses
etc.
7.6.3 INSTRUCTION MANUALS:
• Ordering information for all replaceable parts
7.7 SPECIFICATIONS OF VALVES
7.7.1 GENERAL
The construction features and other specifications of valves shall be as defined in chapter for
specifications of valves. All valves shall be provided with the companion flanges.
7.7.2 PRESSURE RATING
The pressure rating of valves must at least be equal to the maximum expected pressure at the point
of installation with minimum PN1.0 / PN1.6 as the case may be.
7.7.3 SIZE
The size of valves must not be less than the size of the respective main (suction, delivery) pipes.
7.8 VENTILATION & COOLING OF PUMP ROOM
The ventilation and cooling system of the pump room must be designed to limit the temperature rise
at pump floor to a maximum 5° Centigrade above the ambient temperature. The ambient
temperature is to be taken as 40° Centigrade for design of ventilation and cooling system.
The contractor shall provide detailed calculations to determine the temperature of ambient air
within the pump room with all pumps in operation.
7.9 EXHAUST FANS

7.9.1 GENERAL
Exhaust fans of appropriate rating, in general shall be provided for all openings at the pumping
stations and in suitable numbers as per design of pumping station buildings at pump rooms and
switchgear rooms. The air change ratio by the selected fan must be provided for the approval of the
Engineer–in–Charge, before the selection of exhaust fans.
7.9.2 TECHNICAL PARTICULARS
OPERATING CONDITIONS
1 Fan designation Exhaust duty.
2 No. of fans and design to meet stipulated temperature difference and air
capacity circulation levels for limiting temperature rise within
specified limits.
3 Type Wall mounted, centrifugal
FEATURES OF CONSTRUCTION
1 Impeller Mild steel or Cast aluminium
2 Hub Cast Iron/Diecast aluminium
3 Casing Mild steel
4 Wall cowl Galvanised iron sheet - 22 gauge
5 Bird screen 14 gauge galvanised iron with 12 mm bird screen.
6 Motor TEFC IP 54, with speed of 1000 rpm synchronous for
H.T. motors and 1500 rpm synchronous or less for L.T.
motors
7.9.3 INSTRUCTION MANUALS:

7.10 PIPE FITTINGS
Pipe fittings of size 50 NB and below shall be forged conforming to IS-1239 Part-II. Fittings above
50 NB up to 200 NB shall be welded/seamless conforming to ASTM A-234 Gr. WP and
dimensional standard ANSI B.16.9. Fittings and specials of size 250 NB and above can be
fabricated from MS pipes fabricated as per relevant Indian standards.
All specials such as bends, tee’s, tapers, etc, must be fabricated from MS pipes as per provisions of
IS codes and specifications. Before fabrication the detailed drawings of fabrication of each special
must be got approved from the engineer-in-Charge. All specials must be brought to site after inner
lining and outer coating as specifications and provisions of IS Codes.
7.11 CAST IRON PIPES AND SPECIALS

If flanged cast iron pipes and specials shall be used in the pump houses and to the limit of both
pump station suction and delivery pipelines they shall be manufactured and tested according to IS
1536 and 1537 respectively. Flanges shall conform to IS 1538
7.12 DISMANTLING JOINTS
All butterfly valves, scour valves, Bulk water meters or any other online valves etc. shall be
installed between flanges with a flexible MS dismantling joint at one side. The joint must allow
dismantling of the valve, meters etc. without causing stress to the joints of the attached pipes. The
minimum clearance of the dismantling joint shall be five (5) cm. The pressure class of the
dismantling joint shall be the same as that of the pipe. Drawings of the dismantling joint shall be
submitted to the Engineer-in-Charge for approval. The Nuts and Bolts of the joint shall be
galvanized. The joints shall be painted/coated as per specification given for exposed pipes.
The contractor may also provide & install bellow type dismantling joint with material of
construction of bellow & internal sleeve as SS or SA 240 Gr-304. The bellow type-dismantling
joint shall be designed as per EJMA code, USA
7.13 TESTING AND INSPECTION
7.13.1 HYDROSTATIC TEST
The entire piping with valves and fittings will be site tested for pressure of 1.5 times the design
pressure. Duration of testing shall be a minimum of 30 minutes. In case the piping is to be in a
network, isolated portions with overlapping areas shall be tested. No pressure drop or leakage shall
be evident
7.14 MISCELLANEOUS
7.14.1 NUTS, BOLTS, STUDS AND WASHERS
Nuts and bolts shall be of the best quality bright steel, machined on the shank and under the head
and nut. Studs, bolts and nuts shall be galvanized. Bolts shall be of accurate length so that only one
thread shall show through the nut in the fully tightened conditions. Nuts and bolts shall conform to
IS 1363 and IS 1367.
Washers, locking devices and anti-vibration arrangements shall be provided where necessary.
Where there is a risk of corrosion, bolts, nuts and studs shall be designed so that the maximum
stress does not exceed half the yield stress of the material under any conditions. All bolts, nuts and
screws which are subject to frequent adjustment or removal in the course of maintenance and repair
shall be made of nickel bearing stainless steel.
The Contractor shall supply all holding down, alignment levelling bolts complete with anchorages,
nuts washers and packing required to fix the plant to its foundations, bed plates, frames and other
structural parts.
The Contractor shall procure and keep at site, reasonable excess quantities to cover wastage of
those materials which will be normally subject to waste during erection, commissioning and setting
to work.
7.14.2 GASKETS
Gaskets shall be of Nitrile rubber and ready made machined cut gaskets for respective flange shall
be used. Gaskets cut out from rubber sheet are not acceptable.
7.14.3 SUPPORT FOR PIPE WORK & VALVES
All necessary supports, saddles, fixing bolts & foundation bolts shall be supplied to support the pipe
work. Valves and other devices mounted in the pipe work shall be supported independent of the
pipes to which they connect. Wherever necessary RCC supports shall also be provided
7.14.4 GALVANIZING
Wherever galvanizing has been specified the hot dip process shall be used. The galvanized coating
shall be of uniform thickness. Weight of zinc coatings for various applications shall not be less than
those indicated below :
(A) FABRICATED STEEL

Thickness less than 2 mm but not less than 1.2 340 gm/m2
mm
Thickness 2 mm and above 460 gm/m2.
( B) FASTENERS
Up to nominal size M10 270
Over M10 300
Galvanizing shall be carried out after all drilling; punching, cutting bending and welding operations
have been carried out. Burrs shall be removed before galvanizing. Any site modification of
galvanized parts should be covered well by zinc primer and aluminum Paint.
7.14.5 PAINTING
Painting of exposed ferrous surface of all items of plant shall be carried out by the Contractor in
accordance with provision in the “Specifications for Civil Works”.
Immediately on arrival at the site all items of plant shall be examined for condition of the primer
coat/finish paint applied at the Manufacturer's works and unsatisfactory portions shall be cleaned
down to the bare metal, all rust being removed, and the surface made good with similar
primer/paint.
After erection, such items which are not finish painted shall be finish painted, items finish painted
at the Manufacturer's works shall be touched up for any damaged paint work.
No painting shall be carried out unless the item has been inspected and accepted by Engineer in
Charge or the person authorised by him. Shades of finish painting of equipment shall be approved
by Engineer-in-Charge.
7.14.6 LUBRICATION
A complete schedule of recommended oils and other lubricants shall be furnished by the
Contractor, in the operation and maintenance manuals. The number of types of lubricants shall be
kept to a minimum. In case of grease lubricated bearings for electric motors, a lithium base grease
is preferred.
The Contractor shall indicate the brand name of indigenously available equivalent lubricants with
complete duty specification, to enable the department to arrange procurement in future. The
Contractor shall furnish the schedule of quantities for each fill, frequency of filling and annual
requirement.
Where lubrication is effected by means of grease, preference shall be given to a pressure system
which does not require frequent adjustment or recharging. Frequent, for this purpose means more
than once in a month.
Where more than one type of special grease is required, a grease gun for each special type shall be
supplied.
All lubricant systems shall be designed so as not to cause a fire or pollution hazard.
The contractor shall supply flushing oil for such lubrication system when an item of plant is ready
for preliminary running.
7.15 ERECTION
7.15.1 GENERAL
The contractor's erection staff shall arrive on the site on dates to be agreed by the Engineer in
Charge who will give to the contractor advance notice in writing of the dates on which they will be
required. Before they proceed to the site, however, the contractor shall first satisfy himself, as
necessary, that sufficient material of his supply has arrived on site so that there will be no delay on
this account.
The contractor shall be responsible for setting up and erecting the equipment to the line and level
required.
7.15.2 LEVELING AND GROUTING OF MACHINERY

The pumps and motors shall be properly and accurately leveled and aligned on the concrete plinth
by means of tapered metal wedges and metal packing pieces before any grout is poured. After
correct alignment and leveling the foundation bolts shall be nipped up to hold the machine firmly in
position and it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to check that the position is maintained after
the grout has been poured but before it sets. The grout which will contain an approved expanding
agent will be mixed and poured by the Contractor. ACC shrinkomph (anti- shrinkage), grout mixer
or equivalent as approved by Engineer in Charge, is to be used for grouting.
The horizontality of base plate top shall be within 0.05 mm/metre. The base plate top surface and
pump motor box are to be blue matched to get a contact area of at least 80%.
After the grouting mixture has set, the foundation bolts shall be pulled up hard and the alignment
and level rechecked. The Engineer in Charge shall be informed at all times of the progress of this
work and when any checks on alignment and level are to be carried out so that he may witness the
checks if he so requires. The approval of the Engineer in Charge or his intimation that the
alignment or level of the machines is to his satisfaction shall in no way relieve the Contract of his
obligation under contract to properly install and align the machines and Pipe work and shall in no
way prejudice the Engineer in Charge's rights to order rectification of any installation work later
found to be improperly carried out.
7.15.3 NAME PLATES
Each main and auxiliary item to the Plant shall have permanently attached to it, in a conspicuous
position, a name plate and rating plate, each of weather-resistance and fire-resistance material.
Upon these shall be engraved or stamped the manufacturer's name, type and serial number of Plant,
details of the loading and duty at which designed to operate.
Details of proposed inscriptions shall be submitted to the Engineer in Charge for approval before
any labels are manufactured.
7.16 PUMP HOUSE CIVIL WORKS
7.16.1 PUMPING STATION BUILDINGS
The contractor shall design the pump house for making installation for ultimate demand design
pumping machinery with suitable space for electromechanical equipments. The design
considerations, material specifications, workmanship and testing of materials shall be as per
Chapter for “Specifications for Civil Works”. The general requirement of pump house buildings
shall be as follows:
S. No. PARTICULARS SPECIFICATIONS
1. Type of Structure RCC framed Structure
2. Plinth Level Minimum 0.60 meters above finished ground level.
3. Minimum Height of building

above finished floor Levels
i) At Pump/motor floor area As per the requirement of installation of pumping
machinery & valves and specials for ultimate
design demand for the year of 2045 with suitable
space as per provisions of IS codes and minimum
height below crane.
ii) Areas of Switchgear 4 meters minimum
iii) Loading/unloading 7 meters minimum for Pump Houses of 200 sqm
/maintenance bays area or more and 4 meters for PH of less than 200
sqm area.
iv) other areas 4 meters


4. External walls Below Ground RCC curtain wall upto plinth beam with cross
Level section as approved by the EIC
5. External walls above Ground Brick masonry 345 mm thick in Cement Sand
Level mortar 1:4
6. Internal walls Brick masonry 230 mm thick in Cement Sand
mortar 1:4
7. Partition walls Half Brick masonry in Cement Sand mortar 1:4
8. Area for Control Room Area as specified in scope of work / specifications.

The area shall have partitions with aluminum
framed glazed panel partitions of height upto lintel
level.
9. Area for Office Area as specified in scope of work / specifications.
10. External finish Three sides of the pumping station shall grit wash
in gray cement with matching colour grits except
back side. (back side wall shall cement paint
matching with other sides & as per approval of
EIC)
11. Plaster
Interior Plaster 20 mm thick in Cement Sand mortar 1:4
Plaster on external Walls 12.5 mm thick base plaster for Grit wash on three
sides of the buildings and back side wall shall 25
mm thick in Cement Sand mortar 1:4
Toilet Glazed tiles upto lintel level and plaster 20 mm
thick in Cement Sand mortar 1:4 above lintel level
12. Flooring
a) Pump/motor floor Floor metallic Hardner topping with CC base
b) Switchgear floor Kota Stone
c) Battery room/ Battery Charger Kota Stone

room/Operator office space/ duty
room/ office space/toilets and
other areas
d) Control room Kota Stone.
e) Walk ways MS Chequered plates on MS structures and Kota

Stone on RCC structures.
f) Corridors and stairs Kota stone
13. Painting
a) Inner areas of pump/motor room, Oil bound Distemper

store, maintenance bay, and other
areas
b) Control room / lobby / office area Acrylic Plastic Emulsion Paint
c) Outer building area Cement based paint
14. Doors


a) Control room Glass paneled Aluminum Double door shutters
with aluminum frame and single panel hinged
shutters with door closures. The first gate shall be
provided with air curtain of appropriate design to
ensure dust proofing.
b) Main Entrance Doors Glass paneled Aluminum door shutters with
aluminum frame and double panel hinged shutters
with door closures.
c) Switchgear room Glass paneled Aluminum door shutters with
aluminum frame and single panel hinged shutters
with door closures.
d) toilet and other areas Pressed steel frame with 38mm thick flush doors
shutter
15. Windows
a) On Outer Front Walls and other Glass paneled Aluminum shutters with aluminum
windows opening in main frame and double panel shutters. (All windows in
entrances Control room will be fixed without shutters of
same specifications)
b) Other Windows Steel section window with wire mesh and safety
grill
16. Cooling Arrangement
a) Entrance lobby Fans
b) Office rooms Fans and Coolers
c) Duty Room Fan and Coolers
d) PLC Control room Air Conditioner
7.17 MISCELLANEOUS REQUIREMENTS

7.17.1 NAMEPLATES, SIGNBOARDS, NOMENCLATURE
Each item of the plant shall have permanently attached to it in a conspicuous position a nameplate,
on which shall be engraved or stamped the manufacturer's name, type and serial number, year of
manufacture, details of the design capacity etc. Such labels shall be of non-hygroscopic material to
be approved by the Engineer in Charge.
Near by or on each item of the plant, shall be fixed a plate with the name and nomenclature (code)
of the item according to the project nomenclature. It shall be visible from a distance of several
metres.
The contractor shall also provide bilingual signboards and instruction tables of durable material,
throughout the plant, for the purposes of operation, maintenance and security:
• Danger and caution signs (English and local language)
• Preventive maintenance schedules (local language)
• Operating instructions (local language)
• Unit names (English and local language)
• Nameplates at the doors to the units (English and local language)
Signboards and plates shall be appropriately sized in relation to the relevant item and its
surroundings. Details of the proposed inscription, size, material and colours shall be submitted to

the Engineer in Charge for approval before any signboards or plates are manufactured. They shall
be compatible with the instructions in the operation manual.
All cables shall be provided with clip-on identification numbers on both ends and at all terminations
in between, for identification. The nomenclature shall correspond to the electrical as-built drawings.
The nomenclature and labelling of the plant shall be decided in close co-operation with the
Engineer in Charge.
7.17.2 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
The contractor shall provide dry powder type CO2 fire extinguishers (10 kg) for the pumping
stations at the locations specified in Scope of Work after consultation with the Engineer in Charge.
7.17.3 FIRST AID KITS
Complete first aid kits at all the sites shall be provided for the maintenance bays of the pump
houses. The first aid kit shall consist of all materials, medicines necessary for treatment of cuts,
wounds etc. Following materials in general in sufficient quantities shall be provided.
- Medical cotton, sterile cotton pads
- Cotton Bandages, elastic bandages
- Pair of scissors, packet of new shaving blades
- Sticking plaster for medical use.
- Band aid stripes
Following chemicals/medicines shall be provided in sufficient quantities:
- Tinctures iodine and mercury chrome
- Burnol ointment
- Bottles of spirit and of Dettol
- Toilet soaps
To be procured under medical advice
- Skin lotions and ointments for burns, acid effects
- Eye drops for soothing effects

8.0 SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL WORKS
8.1 GENERAL
It is not the intent to specify herein all the details pertaining to the design, drawing, selection of
equipment/materials, procurement, manufacture, installation, testing & commissioning, however,
the same shall be of high standard of engineering and shall comply with all currently applicable
standards, regulations & safety codes. These specifications cover the equipment to be installed in
switchgear, switchyard, DC supply system and other allied equipment, cables etc. along with the
specifications for workmanship, laying cables, earthing systems, lightning protection etc.
It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to design the electrical system based on the selection
of the mechanical equipment. The work will be executed as per the detailed designs and drawings
approved during execution.
The electrical equipment and system has to be connected with the Instrumentation system. The
details of the connectivity of the electrical system/equipment with the Instrumentation system has to
be worked out by the contractor to be commensurate with the requirement of the Instrumentation
system to be provided. The contractor shall provide all necessary accessories with the equipment
dealt herein or additional equipment required for effective functioning of the electrical and
Instrumentation systems.
The pre-dispatch inspection and pre-commissioning testing and commissioning details are provided
in respective Chapters. The specifications of material and workmanship of all civil works and
lighting fixtures shall be in compliance with the specifications given in the “Specifications for Civil
Works”.
The brief technical specifications of the various electrical equipment are given in subsequent
clauses comprising the following:
• Applicable Indian Standards
• Other considerations (if any)
• Technical parameters supplied by the department
• Drawings and documents for review/approval
The various systems covering the installation practices are described separately.
The scope of the contractor shall cover design and drawing of electrical systems, selection of the
equipment/materials, procurement, expediting, inspection, packing and forwarding, delivery at site,
erection, testing, commissioning, obtaining the statutory approvals, handing over the complete plant
etc.
8.2 POWER SUPPLY INFORMATION

The proposed power supplies are as follows:
1 33 kV AC Voltage variation +6 to -9% Three Phase, 50 Hz, effectively earthed
System Freq. Variation +3 to -5% AC System SC rating of 1500MVA
2 11 kV AC Voltage variation +6 to -9% Three Phase, 50 Hz, effectively earthed
System Freq. Variation +3 to -5% AC System SC rating of 300 MVA
3 6.6 kV AC Voltage variation +6 to -9% Three Phase, 50 Hz, effectively earthed
System Freq. Variation +3 to -5% AC System SC rating of 300 MVA
4 415V AC Voltage variation +10 to -15% Three Phase and neutral, 50 Hz,
System Freq. Variation +3 to -5% effectively earthed system, SC rating of
50 kA
5 240V AC Voltage variation + 10% to -15 Single phase and neutral, 50 Hz,
System % effectively earthed system
Freq. Variation + 3% to - 5%
6 110V DC Voltage variation +/- 15% Unearthed two wire system
Supply
The ambient temperature for design of the electrical equipment shall be 50° C.
8.3 FAULT LEVELS

The fault levels of the proposed units in the sub-station/pump house shall be as per IS: 2026 as
follows:
33 kV system : 1500 MVA
11 kV system : 300 MVA
6.6 kV system : 300 MVA
415 V system : 20 MVA
8.4 DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
8.4.1 GENERAL
The electrical installations proposed under the contract are for the project requirement. Wherever
found necessary, the installations shall be done considering the likely extension of the
system/system component for integration with the future extensions.
8.4.2 SUB-STATIONS AT VARIOUS HEADWORKS

The work includes designing, providing, erecting, constructing, testing and commissioning
of 11/0.415 KV Switchyards at Jahazpur, Pander, Khajoori, Amarwasi and Kishangarh
headworks for rural area and up-gradation of existing 11/0.415 KV Switchyard at Jahazpur
Town headworks for Urban area. The 11 KV electric feeders shall be made available near
Switchyard area. The work consists of construction of 11/0.415 KV Switchyards at
Jahazpur, Pander, Khajoori, Amarwasi and Kishangarh headworks for rural area and up-
gradation of existing 11/0.415 KV Switchyard Jahazpur Town headworks for Urban
area headworks shall comprise of providing and installation of transformers with off-load
tap changer of adequate capacity with 100 % standby transformer, and providing and
installation of all necessary equipment and structures such as double break isolators with
earth switch after incoming gantry with lattice structures, metering CT at incomer with
meters in indoor switchgear, lightening arrestors with lattice structures, Potential
Transformers with lattice structures, bus lattice structures, double break isolators without
earth switch on individual feeders of the transformers with lattice structures, 33 KV/11 KV
current transformers for metering and protection on individual feeders of the transformers
with lattice structures, outdoor vacuum circuit breakers and ASCR conductor, XLPE cables
after transformers, insulators, control cables, and other accessories including all civil
works to complete the work in all respect.
8.4.2.1 TRANSFORMER C APACITY

The transformer (1 No working + 1 No. standby) of 33/0.415 KV and 11/0.415 KV rating as per
requirement of respective sub-station for ultimate capacity with 100% standby equipments in all
respect shall be provided to cater the pumping station electrical load, which is capable to take load
of design demand load for the year of 2030 of all equipments. The transformer rating shall be
suitable for running of respective clear water pump motors and auxiliary load.
The design of transformer shall consider the following:

a) The loads of the proposed LT motors of designed demand of 2030 of the respective pumping
stations along with all other auxiliary loads of the equipment & lighting in pump house, and
other load in campus and other buildings /structures in the campus area.
b) Load factor of 0.90 for LT motors and 1.25 for lighting fixtures shall be considered, with a
power factor and efficiency of motors to be taken as per data sheet approved by EIC.
c) Subject to the above requirements, a minimum 2 transformers each of 11/0.415 kV of suitable
capacity (minimum 0.25 MVA) are to be provided at at Jahazpur, Pander, Khajoori,
Amarwasi and Kishangarh headworks for rural area and at Jahazpur Town for Urban
area headworks. The bus-bar shall be extendable.
8.4.2.2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS OF TRANSFORMERS
Standards
No Standard Description
1 IS 2026 Specification for power transformer
2 IS 2099 Specification for bushing for alternating voltages above
10000 V
3 IS 3347 Specification for porcelain transformer bushing
Other considerations
The height of the transformer foundation shall be such that the line terminal (33 KV/11 KV side)
shall at least be 3670mm above top of the finished ground level of the 33KV/11KV outdoor
switchyard.
The transformers of shall be complete with an off-load tap changing (OCTC) gear with all other
accessories shall be provided as per requirement.
Requirements of Indian Electricity Rules should be fulfilled wherever required.
Technical parameters
a) Application Power distribution
b) Rating and voltage ratio of each unit Suitable MVA - 2 Nos. with step
down voltage as per selected
motor voltage.
c) Percentage Impedance (subject to IS As per IS 2026
tolerance)
d) Cooling method ONAN
e) 3 Phase unit/single phase unit Three phase single unit
f) Winding material Copper
g) Type of winding Delta - Star
h) Vector Group Dyn11
i) Fault Level on HV side 1500 MVA for 33 KV

300 MVA for 11 KV
j) Neutral earthing of HV, LV system Solidly earthed
k) Whether fully insulated Yes
l) Impulse voltage withstand As per IS: 2026 Part - III
m) Power Frequency withstand voltage As per IS: 2026 Part - III
n) Temp. rise of oil by Thermometer 40 0 C over ambient
o) Temp. rise of winding by resistance 45 0 C over ambient
p) Tapping on winding HV
q) Total Tapping Range & step range +/-7.5% in step of 2.5%
r) HV side termination suitable for DOG ACSR Conductor
s) LV side termination suitability XLPE cable
t) LV wdg. neutral end Additional bushing for external
system earthing
u) Installation Outdoor
v) Colour shade of final painting as per IS 5 Yes - (Shade No. 632)
Marshalling box (MB)
a) Location Transformer body mounted
b) Application For housing WTI, OTI, and termination
of MOG, BR, PRV
c) Space heater and lamp in MB Required
d) Degree of protection IP 55
e) Colour shade of final painting as per IS 5 Yes - (Shade No. 632)
Accessories
Accessories required as per requirement and relevant IS.
a) Buchholz relay Required
c) WTI with 2 mercury contacts Required
c) OTI with 2 mercury contacts Required
d) MOG with 1 mercury contact Required
e) Silica gel breather Required
f) Oil conservator tank Required
g) Pressure relief valve for Required
h) Inspection manhole Required
i) Lifting lugs Required
j) OLTC locking arrangement Required
k) Tap position indicator Required
l) Jacking pad Required
m) Detachable radiators Required
n) Oil drain cum sampling valve Required
o) Air release drive for Required
p) Explosion vent Required

q) Skids Required
r) Wheels Bi-directional,
plain wheels
Drawing and documents required

• GA drawing of the complete transformer
• Foundation drawing for transformer
• GA drawings for bus duct termination, marshalling box
• Schematics and wiring diagrams for MB
• Instruction manual for installation, operation and maintenance
Inspection
All routine tests as per IS 2026

All type test certificate conducted on similar transformer to be forwarded
8.5 REQUIREMENTS OF PROTECTIONS AND METERING SUB-STATION(S) AND PUMPING

STATION(S)
Protections
Following protection/relays are proposed for incomer, transformers, motors and other plant feeders:
i. 33 KV/11 KV Incomer
a) PT fuse failure relay
b) AC instantaneous and IDMT over-current & earth fault relay, with tripping relay
ii. Main transformer with Off Load T.C.
HV side:
a) Inverse time definite min. time over-current relay with instantaneous over current
element
b) AC instantaneous and IDMT over-current & earth fault relay, with tripping relay and
transformer differential current relay.
c) Transformer Buchholz pressure relay with alarm and trip contacts.
d) Transformer Winding and oil temperature indicators with alarm and trip contacts.
e) Aux. Relays for MOG and PVR
LV side:
a) Inverse time definite min. time over-current relay with instantaneous over current
element
b) AC instantaneous and IDMT overcurrent & earth fault relay, with tripping relay and
transformer differential current relay.
iii. LT Motors
a) HRC fuses
b) Motor Protection Relay
c) Sensitive Earth Leakage Relay.
iv. Capacitor Feeder
a) APFC relay

v. Other Feeders For 415 V system

a) MCCB
b) MCB with HRC fuses
Meters
The following meters shall be provided
(i) On 33 KV/11 KV Incomer to bus and VCB as per respective SLD:
a) Ammeter with selector switch
b) Voltmeter with selector switch
c) Frequency meter
d) Power factor meter
e) KW & kWH meter or Multi Function meter
(ii) On 0.44 kV side of transformers, Ammeter and voltmeter with selector switches
(iii) On H.V./L.V side of transformers, Ammeter with selector switch
c) Multi Functional Meters Class 1.0
(iv) Each Motor panel must be provided with
c) Multi Functional Meters Class 1.0
(v) HT/LT Panel must be provided with Ammeter and Ammeter switch and Voltmeter with
selector switch
(vi) Capacitor feeders shall be provided with Ammeter and Ammeter selector switch
(vii) The DC board shall be supplied with
a) Ammeter
b) Voltmeter
8.6 DOUBLE BREAK ISOLATOR

8.6.1 Standards
S. Standard Description
No.
1 IS 9921 Specifications for A.C. Disconnectors (Isolator) and earth

switch.
2 IS 2544 Insulators
8.6.2 Technical parameters
a) Type of Isolator Manually operated, double break, centre post
rotating. Earth switch to be provided as shown
in the SLD
b) Rated voltage 33KV/11 KV

c) Rated Current 400 A

d) Terminal suitable for DOG ACSR Conductor
e) Installation Outdoor, As shown on the drawings
f) Height of operating handle 1200 mm approx. above operating floor
g) Creepage distance min 25 mm/kV
8.6.3 Drawing and documents required
• GA drawing of the isolator including structure.
• Instruction manual for installation, operation and maintenance.
8.6.4 Inspection
All routine test pertaining to isolators
All type test certificate conducted on similar isolators to be forwarded.
8.7 LIGHTNING ARRESTOR (LA)

8.7.1 Standards
S. No. Standard Description
1. IEC 99 Gap less type Lightning arrestors for alternating current
systems
2. IS 5621 Insulators
3. IS 3070 Lightening Arrestors.

a) Quantity Single pole, 3 Nos.
b) Type of LA Station class, gapless type
c) System voltage 33 KV/11 KV
d) Type of Earthing Effectively earthed
e) Rated arrestor voltage 30 kV (RMS)
f) Nominal discharge current 10 kA
g) Withstand test voltages
a) One minute power frequency Dry or wet kV 70
(RMS) 170
b) 10/50 micro sec. impulse kV (Peak)
h) Primary terminal Suitable for DOG ACSR
conductor.
i) Installation. Outdoor.
j) Creeping distance. Min. 25mm/KV.


• GA drawing of the LA including structure.
8.7.4 Inspection
All routine test pertaining to LA
All type test certificate conducted on similar LA to be forwarded.
8.8 DROP OUT FUSE (DOF)

8.8.1 Standards
1. IS 9385 Specification for high voltage fuse
2. IS 2544 Insulators
a) Type of DOF Expulsion type fuse type
b) Quantity and location As shown on the drawings
c) Rated voltage 33KV/11 KV
d) Rated Current As per requirement.
e) Fuse link rating Suitable for the load i.e. transformer rating
f) Primary terminal suitable for DOG ACSR Conductor
g) Installation Outdoor
h) Creepage distance min 25 mm / kV
• GA drawing of drop out fuse with mounting details.
• Fuse characteristic curves.
• Instruction manual for installation, operation and maintenance of DOF.
8.8.4 Inspection
All routine tests on DOF

All type test certificate conducted on similar DOF to be forwarded.
8.9 33/11 KV OUTDOOR TYPE VACUUM CIRCUIT BREAKER (VCB)

8.9.1 STANDARDS
1 IS 2516 Specification for outdoor circuit breaker
2 IEC-56 Specification for outdoor circuit breaker
8.9.2 OTHER CONSIDERATIONS

The circuit breaker shall be complete with operating mechanism and a galvanized iron (GI)
structural support.
The lowest terminal of the CB shall be at least 3670 mm above the top of the finished
ground level of the outdoor switchyard. If the standard height of the GI structure, being
supplied by the CB manufacturer is less, then to achieve the required ground clearance of
3670mm, the contractor shall decide the height of the CB foundation accordingly.
8.9.3 TECHNICAL PARAMETERS
a) Circuit breaker type Three pole group operated
b) Rated voltage, No. of phases, Frequency 33 kV, 3 ph, 50 Hz & 11 kV, 3 ph, 50 Hz
c) Rated operating duty 0-3 min - CO - 3 min-CO
d) Rated current at site ambient temp. 630 A
e) Rated breaking capacity 750 MVA, 13.12 kA (RMS)
f) Rated making current 32.80 kA (Peak)
g) Short time current withstand for 1 SEC. 13.12 kA (RMS)
h) Minimum no of auxiliary contacts 6 NO + 6 NC
i) Withstand voltages:
- One minute power frequency 70 kV (RMS)
- 1.2/50 micro sec impulse 170 kV (Peak)
j) Auxiliary control Voltage:
*For closing/tripping coil 110 V DC
*For spring charging motor 230 V, 1 ph, 50 Hz AC
* For space heaters and cubicle lighting 230 V, 1 ph, 50 Hz AC
k) Breaker Application In accordance with the drawings
l) Terminals suitable for DOG ACSR conductor
m) Purchasers ear thing conductor details 50 x 6 mm GI Strip
n) Creep age distance min 25 mm / kV
OPERATING MECHANISM CUBICLE

a) Designation Circuit breaker operating mechanism
cubicle
b) Location At switchyard
c) Type of Mounting Floor
d) Cable entry Bottom
e) Painting - exterior, interior Shade 632 as per IS 5, enamel
8.9.4 DRAWING AND DOCUMENTS REQUIRED

• General Arrangement (GA) drawing of the circuit breaker
• Main terminal detail drawing.
• GA drawing for operating mechanism cubicle.
• Schematic and wiring diagram for circuit breaker.
• GA drawing of supporting structures with foundation details.
8.10 CURRENT TRANSFORMERS (CT)

8.10.1 STANDARDS
1 IS 2705 Current transformers
2 IS 2099 Specification for bushing for alternating voltages above 10000V

The current transformers shall be provided with a GI supporting structure. The height of the
GI structure shall be such that the line terminal shall be 3670 mm above top of the finished
ground level of the outdoor switchyard.
S. Location for all out-door SUB-STATIONS
No.
a) Type Wound type, oil filled
b) System Neutral Earthing Effectively earthed
c) Incomer feeder CT details For 33 kV – 200/100/1-1A, 15VA, class 1.0 protection
5P10
For 11 kV – 200/100/5-5A, 15VA, class 1.0 protection
5P10
For other points ratio as per design current, secondary
current 5A, burden 15VA, protection 5P10
d) Short time current (kA) For 33 kV – 13.12
For 11 kV – 18
Thermal rating time (sec) 1
e) Dynamic Rating kA (Peak) 2.5 times of short time thermal current rating
f) Class of insulation A or better
g) Impulse withstand voltages 170 kVp
h) Power freq. withstand voltage 70 kV (RMS)
i) Creepage distance Min 25 mm / kV
j) Main terminal Suitable for DOG ACSR conductor
k) Secondary side Cable size For single core 3 phase CT common cable from the
junction box - 4C x 2.5 mm2 YWY, 2 Nos.
From terminal of each CT to Junction box - 4C x 2.5 mm2
YWY
Junction box shall be installed on middle CT GI
supporting structure
l) Grounding Conductor GI Flat 50 x 6 mm
m) Installation As per drawing
n) Painting Colour shade 632 as per IS 5
• GA drawing of the current transformers.
8.11 POTENTIAL TRANSFORMERS (PT)

8.11.1 STANDARDS
1 IS 3156 Potential transformers
2 IS 2099 Specification for bushing for alternating voltages above 10000V
Potential transformers shall be provided on gantry structure.
a) Quantity As per Scope of Work

b) Voltage ratio 33 kV/ 110V and 11 KV/110 V
c) Type of PT Electromagnetic, oil filled
d) Number of cores One /Two as per design requirements
e) Rating For 33 kV – VA rating – 100VA Dual, accuracy
class 1.0, primary voltage 33kV/√ 3 and
secondary voltage 100 V/√ 3
For 11 kV – VA rating – 100 VA Dual, accuracy
class 1.0, primary voltage 11kV/√ 3 and
secondary voltage 100 V/√ 3
f) Class of insulation A or better
g) Rated voltage factor 1.2 continuous
h) Impulse withstand voltage For 33 kV –170 kVp
For 11 kV – 95 kVp
i) Power frequency withstand 70 kV (RMS)
voltage
j) Creepage distance Min 25 mm / kV
k) Primary terminal Suitable for DOG ACSR conductor
l) Secondary side Cable size For single core 3 phase PT common cable from
the junction box - 4C x 2.5 mm2 YWY
From terminal of each PT to Junction box - 2C x
2.5 mm2 YWY
Junction box shall be installed on PT GI
supporting structure
m) Grounding Conductor GI Flat 50 x 6 mm
n) Installation As per drawing
o) Painting Colour shade 632 as per IS 5
• GA drawing of the potential transformers.
8.12 SWITCHYARD CONTROL PANEL

8.12.1 STANDARDS
1. IS 3427 Switchgear general requirements.
2. IS 8623 Factory built assemblies of Sw. Gr. & Cont. Gr. (V <650)
3. IS 2147 Degree of protection by enclosure for LV Sw. Gr. & Cont. Gr.
4. IS 3231 Protective relays.
5. IS 1248 Electrical Indicating Instruments.
6. IS 722 Integrating meters.
7. IS 8686 Static Protective Relays
8. IS 9224 HRC fuses
9. IS 6875 Control switches
10. IS 10118 Installation and maintenance of switchgear.

The switchyard control panel shall be made out of 2.5-mm thick CRCP sheet steel, free
standing type with rear access.
i) The minimum clearance on back and sides of switchyard panel shall be 1000 mm
and on the front side the same shall be 2500 mm.
1 Degree of Protection IP 52
2 Surface Finish Powder coating
3 Shade Light Grey, Shade : 631 ( IS : 5 )
(Interior & Exterior)
4 Gasket for Doors Neoprene Gasket shall be provided to make Panel dust &
vermin proof, conforming to degree of protection IP 52 as
per IS 13947 Part I.
5 Earth bus & Earthing Earth bus of Aluminum shall be provided throughout the
conductor length of panels. The horizontal earth bus shall project
out of the panel at bottom and shall have at least two
holes for earth connections. The bus bar must be designed
for the 33 kV/11 kV fault level and continuous current
level.
The Earthing conductor shall be GI flat 50 x 10 mm
6 Space heater Panel space heater of adequate capacity shall be provided
in panel with thermostat control.
7 Cable lugs Cu cable lugs for power cables shall be fitted.
8 Cable glands Double compression brass cable glands shall be provided.
9. Cubicle illumination Shall be provided for all cable alleys
10. Operating Height Operating switches, push buttons and handles shall not be
placed below 300 mm and above 2000 mm.

a) Application Outdoor switchyard control
b) Installation Indoor
c) Breakers Particular Vacuum, Horizontal drawout type.
d) Control switch Required for breaker
e) Indicating lamps ON, OFF, TRIP, Spring charge for all circuit breakers
f) Relays Ph. & E - O/C, Under Voltage, Over Voltage, Trip circuit
supervision, Lockout
Aux. Relays for WTI, OTI, BR, MOG, PRV of
transformers ( similar to VAA relays)
Other relaying as per the single line diagram
All relays shall be rated for 1A rating.
g) Meters V + VS, A + AS for each CT current 1A & PT voltage
110V
h) Multi function meter Shall have built in ammeter, voltmeter, kW meter, kVA
details meter, PF meter, kWH meter, kVAH meter
i) Push button details Momentary type, 2 NO & 2 NC contacts
of 10 A at 240 V AC

j) Indicating lamp details LED type with series resistance,
k) Control fuse details HRC cartridge type with base & carrier.
Contractor to select rating.
l) Miscellaneous details Control Wiring shall be with stranded copper conductor
only, PVC insulated, 650 V /1.1 kV grade wires of 2.5
mm2 for CT circuits and 1.5 mm2 for other circuits.
Control terminals shall be of 10 A, 1100 V grade, clip on
type with din rail mounting.
CT terminals shall be provided with shorting link and
earthing facility
Control wiring – marked with ferrule No. at both ends.
Control panel shall be provided with Thermostat
controlled space heater & cubicle illumination.
m) Annunciation window Six windows for breaker and Eight windows for each
transformer, microprocessor based
n) Cable entry Bottom

• GA drawing of panel with foundation details.
• Single line, Schematic and wiring diagram for panels.
• Instruction manual for installation, operation and maintenance of various
components of control panel
8.13 BATTERY CHARGER CUM DCDB

8.13.1 STANDARDS
S. No. Standar Description
d
1. IS 8320 General requirements and methods of tests for lead acid

storage batteries.
2. IS 1651 Stationary cells and batteries, lead acid type with tubular positive
plates.
8.13.2 GENERAL
110V D.C, rechargeable lead acid batteries of specified A.H. capacity shall be provided for control
of switchgear at Jahazpur, Pander, Khajoori, and Amarwasi Pumping station to be constructed for
rural areas and at Jahazpur town Pumping station for urban area. pumping stations along with
suitable battery charger cum DCDB
1 Type of battery and charger Composite type with battery in the lower
cum DCDB compartment and charger cum DCDB in the
upper portion.
3 DC system 110 V, unearthed system
4 Type of battery Lead acid re-chargeable type
5 Capacity of battery 200 AH (minimum)
6 Type of electrode Tubular
7 Battery mounting On PVC trays in lower compartment.
8 Type of charger Float cum Boost charger

9 Float charger rating 10 A + Float charge current of battery
10 Boost charger rating Float charger rating + Boost charge current.
11 Float Boost charging current Approximately 20 A
12 Incoming power supply 415 V TPN
13 DC outgoing feeder Suitable number of outgoing as per
requirement. A DP rotary suitable for O/G
circuit. One of the outgoing feeders shall have
auxiliary relay with 1 NC contact such that on
loss of supply the DC emergency lighting will
become ON
14 Incoming power supply SFU, TP Contactor, on/off PBs, on/off lamps,
arrangement RYB indicating lamps etc.
15 Meters on DC side Voltmeter at Charger output and load side
ammeter for battery charger current and DC
load current.
16 Type of voltage adjustment Automatic charger to regulate charging supply,
based on battery voltage.
17 Cable entry Bottom
18 Cable sizes :
Battery charger 1 no x 4C x 16 mm2 AYWY
(incoming)DC battery 2 Nos. x 1C x 25 mm2 YY (to be provided by
battery charger manufacturer)
DC outgoing feeders each 2C x 4 mm2 YWY
19 Charger cum DCDB cubicle Made out of 2 mm CRCA sheet steel, with IP
52 degree of enclosure and applied with enamel
paint of shade 631 of IS 5.
20 Standard accessories for Battery Tester, rubber hand gloves, rubber
battery apron, etc.
• GA drawing of the battery and the charger cubicle
• Schematic diagram for battery and charger cum DCDB
• Instruction manual for installation, operation and maintenance for battery and
charger
8.14 6.6 kV H.T. Switchgears
8.14.1 Standards
1. IS 9046 AC contactors of voltages above 1kV, upto and including 11kV.
2. IS 9920/9921 Switches & switch Isolators for voltages above 1000 V
3. IS 13118 General requirements for CB for voltages above 1000V.
4. IS 3427 Metal enclosed Sw Gr & Cont. Gr (for V > 1kV & < 11kV).
5. IS 4237 General requirement of Switchgear and control gear
6. IS 2156 Circuit breaker
7. IS 2147 Degree of protection
8. IS 1248 Electrical Indicating Instruments.
9. IS 722 Integrating AC electric meters.
10. IS 2705 Current transformers.
11. IS 3156 Voltage transformers.
12. IS 10118 Installation and maintenance of switchgear.

13. IS 375 Marking and arrangement for switchgear busbars main
connections and auxiliary wiring.
8.14.2 Other requirements
1. For details of individual switchboard panel components refer to Main Single
Line Diagrams.
2. Switchboard Panel shall be made out of sheet steel in compartmentalized
design and shall be suitable for bottom cable entry on rear Side. The main
incomers and all outgoing feeders shall be through XLPE insulated Al
conductor cable. The horizontal bus bar chamber shall be on the top.
3. The motor characteristics shall be forwarded to HT panel manufacturer to
properly select the fuse rating. HRC fuse for HT motor feeder shall be
suitable for motor duty.
4. The minimum clearance on back and sides of each switchboard panel shall
be 1000 mm and on the front side the same shall be 2500 mm.
5. Additional set of NO - NC contacts shall be provided than the required
numbers.
6. System neutral earthing for 6.6 KV shall be through neutral grounding
reactor.
The others particulars are given below:
1. Sheet Steel Thickness
Enclosure and Doors 2.5 mm CRCA
Partitions and covers 2.0 mm CRCA
Gland Plate 3.0 mm HR Sheet
Base Frame min. 3.0 mm HR Sheet
2. Degree of Protection IP 4X
3. Surface Finish Powder coating
4. Shade(Interior & Exterior) Light Grey, Shade : 631 ( IS : 5 )
5. Control Connections
for PT and other 1.5 mm2 stranded Copper wire
connections
For CT circuits 2.5 mm2 stranded Copper wire
6. Gasket for Doors Neoprene Gasket
7. Earth bus & Earthing Earth bus of aluminum shall be provided

conductor throughout the length of panels. The horizontal
earth bus shall project out of the panel at bottom
and shall have at least two holes for earth
connections. The bus bar must be designed for
the 33 kV fault level and continuous current level
as per the total load for ultimate demand
The Earthing conductor shall be GI flat 50 x 10
mm
8. Space heater Panel space heater shall be provided in each
vertical panel with thermostat control
9. Cubicle illumination Shall be provided for all cable alleys

10. Operating Height Operating switches, push buttons and handles

shall not be placed below 300 mm and above
2000 mm.
a) TP busbar Material Bus Bar shall be of Copper. Bus bar shall be fully
insulated by encapsulation in epoxy resin with
mould caps protecting all joints or heat shrinkable
PVC sleeves and yaps
b) Min. clearance Phase to phase 140 mm & Phase to Earth 100mm
d) Impulse withstand voltage 60 kV for 6.6 kV motors
e) Power freq. Withstand -V 20kV RMS for 6.6 kV motors, 50 Hz for one
minute
f) Short time Rating 13.12 kA (rms) for 1 second
g) Max. Temp. of bus bar 800 C
h) Feeder details Ratings and other details will be governed by the
detailed design of the bidder indicative ratings are
given in respective SLD
Incoming Breaker Suitable Ampere Vacuum circuit breaker with
draw out facility
Control supply 110 V DC
Spring charge motor 230 V AC
Operating duty cycle 0-3 min-co-3 min-co
Motor & capacitor Feeder Isolator –400 A
HRC fuse - 400 A
Vacuum Contactor – 400 A with draw out facility.
Control supply 110 V DC
i) CT details Cast resin, bar primary type, 5 A CT
CT ratio, burden and class shall be governed by the
detailed design of the bidder, the indicative sizes
are shown in respective SLD
j) PT details Cast resin, single phase, wound type, 110 V PT
PT ratio, burden and class shall be governed by the
detailed design of the bidder, the indicative sizes
are shown in respective SLD
k) Relays Motor Protection Relay (MPR) – shall be provided

for all HT water pump motors. It shall be micro
processor based with multi function, protections
and rated for 5A. It shall be suitable for
connecting for remote signalling. The MPR shall
have all functions as in SPAM 150C of ABB.
For other details of relay and capacitor control
relays refer SLD.
l) Selector switch details AS for Ammeter with R,Y,B,OFF positions and
VS for Voltmeter with RY,YB,BR,OFF positions
m) Indicating Meter details Moving iron type, 90 deg scale, for AM & VM,
Suppressed scale in case of AM for motors
AM dial range to suit CT primary current.
VM dial range to suit PT primary voltage.
Size 144 mm2 for incomer feeders.
Size 96 mm2 for outgoing feeders

Accuracy Class 1.0
For other details refer SLD.
n) Multi Function Meter Shall have built in ammeter, voltmeter, kW meter,
kVA meter, PF meter, kWH meter, kVAH meter,
Frequency meter
p) Push button details Momentary type, 2 NO & 2 NC contacts of 10 A
q) Indicating lamp details LED type with series resistance,
r) Control fuse details HRC cartridge type with base & carrier.
Contactor to select rating.
s) Miscellaneous details CT terminals shall be provided with shorting link
and earthing facility
Control wiring - marked with ferrule nos. at both
ends.
t) General Bus bars shall be designed for taking future loads
also
8.14.4 Drawings and documents required
• GA drawing of 6.6 kV panel with foundation details
• Single line diagram for HV panels
• HRC fuse characteristic to be used with motors
• Schematic diagrams for various modules
Instruction manual for installation, operation and maintenance of various components of switchgear
e.g. VCB, VC, motor protection relay.
8.15 METAL ENCLOSED LT SWITCHGEAR

8.15.1 STANDARDS
1 IS 4237 Switchgear general requirements.
2 IS 5578 Guide for making of insulated conductors
3 IS 8623 Factory built assemblies of Sw Gr & Cont. Gr (for voltages < 650 V).
4 IS 2147 Degree of protection of enclosure for LV switchgear and control gear.
5 IS 1248 Electrical Indicating Instruments.
6 IS 722 Integrating AC electric meters.
7 IS 2705 Current transformers.
8 IS 3156 Voltage transformers.
9 IS 10118 Installation and maintenance of switchgear.
10 IS 11353 Guide for uniform system of marking and identification of conductor
and equipment terminals.
11 IS 13947 Specification for low voltage switchgear and control gear

This section is applicable for all 415V switchboard panels
Power control centre (PCC)
Power Distribution Board (PDB)
Supply to come from the new distribution panel to be provided on auxiliary transformer.
For general arrangement of switchgear components, refer to the SLD.

The switchboard panel shall be made out of sheet steel in compartmentalized design and shall be
suitable for bottom cable entry on rear side. The horizontal bus bar chamber shall be on the top
whereas vertical busbars shall be provided in bus alley at the front.
The minimum clearance on the back and sides of each switchboard panel shall be 1000 mm and on
the front side the same shall be 1500 mm.
At least 2 spare bays of 63 A will be kept in the panel for additional circuits in future. Indoor ACB's
shall be provided on the in-comer of each transformer in the panel. All lighting loads shall be taken
from bay(s) in LV panel to distribution board(s). The incoming breaker from auxiliary transformer
shall be ACB’s housed in respective panels.
Additional set of NO - NC contacts shall be provided than the required numbers.
1 Sheet Steel Thickness
Enclosure and Doors 2.0 mm CRCA
Partitions and covers 1.6 mm CRCA
Gland Plate 3 mm HR Sheet
Base Frame min 3 mm HR Sheet
2 Degree of Protection IP 52
3 Surface Finish Powder coating
4 Shade (Interior & Light Grey, Shade : 631 ( IS : 5 )
Exterior)
5 PVC Heat shrink Black sleeve with coloured tape for R/Y/B
Sleeve
6 Control Connections
for PT and other
connections 1.5 mm2 stranded Copper wire
For CT circuits 2.5 mm2 stranded Copper wire
7 Gasket for Doors Neoprene Gasket shall be provided to make Panel dust &
vermin proof, conforming to degree of protection IP 52.
8 Earth bus Earth bus of min 50 X 6 mm GI or suitable for fault level
of panel shall be provided throughout the length of
panels. The horizontal earth bus shall project out of the
panel at bottom and shall have at-least two holes for earth
connections.
9 Door closing All power switches shall be door interlocked
arrangement
10 Space heater Panel space heater shall be provided in each vertical
panel with thermostat control
11 Cable lugs Cu cable lugs for copper cables shall be fitted.
12 Cable glands Double compression brass cable glands shall be provided.
13 Operating Height Operating switches, push buttons and handles shall not be
placed below 300 mm and above 2000 mm.
14 Cubicle illumination Shall be provided for all cable alleys
15 Live connections Live connections from Bus Bar up to switches shall be
shrouded in order to avoid accidental touch.

1 TPN busbar details High Conductivity Al grade E91E for TPN bare busbar,
size shall be suitable for continuous current rating as per
the detailed design.
2 Min. clearance Phase to phase - 25 mm & Phase to earth - 20 mm

3 Power freq. Withstand 2.5 kV RMS, 50 Hz for one minute

4 Short Circuit Current 25 kA (RMS) for 1 second
5 Max. temp. of bus bar 70 0 C
6 CT details Cast resin, bar primary type, 5 A CT
CT ratio, burden and class shall be as per the maximum
current expected at the point of installation in the circuit,
indicative CT ratio and burden are shown in respective
SLD
7 MCB details Rating shall be as per the maximum current expected on
that circuit. MCB will be with static release, U/V &
current limiting feature for incomer and with static
release for each outgoing MCB
8 Contactor details Rating shall be as per the requirement of the motors
Duty shall be as per application
9 Relays Releases: All the releases for breakers should be of Static
Release Type.
Over Load Relay (OLR) : It shall be of thermal type with
hand reset PB on module door and with single phasing
preventions
10 Motor control supply 415/230 V, AC
11 Selector switch details AS for Ammeter with R, Y, B, OFF positions.
VS for Voltmeter with RY, YB, BR, OFF positions
12 Indicating Meter Moving iron type, 90 0 scale, for AM & VM,
details Suppressed scale in case of AM for motors
AM dial range to suit CT primary current.
VM dial range 0-600 volt.
Size 96mm2 Accuracy Class 1.0
13 Multi-function meter Shall have built in ammeter, voltmeter, kW meter, kVA
meter, PF meter, kWH meter, kVAH meter
14 Integrating Meter Electronic/Train gear type, calibrated for required CT-PT
details ratio
Accuracy Class 1.0, for other details refer drawings
15 Push button details Momentary type, 2 NO & 2 NC contacts
of 10 A at 240 V AC
16 Indicating lamp details LED type with series resistance,
17 Control fuse details HRC cartridge type with base & carrier. Contactor to
select rating.
18 Changeover switch 2 position, on load type
19 Miscellaneous details Control terminals shall be of 10 A, 1100 V grade, clip on
type with din rail mounting.
CT terminals shall be provided with shorting link and
earthing facility
Control wiring - marked with ferrule Nos. at both ends.
• GA drawing of each panel with foundation details
• Single line diagram for each panels
• Schematic diagrams for various modules
• Instruction manuals - installation, operation and maintenance of switchgear
8.16 H.T. Motors

8.16.1 Standards
No. Standard Description
1. IS 325 Squirrel cage induction motors
2. IS 4691 Type of enclosures
3. IS 6362 Method of cooling
4. IS 12075 Mechanical vibrations of rotating electrical machines
5. IS 12065 Permissible limits of noise level
6. IS 4029 Testing of induction motors
8.16.2 Other considerations
Contractor shall select the motor as per the required performance of pumps and ascertain
the required rating of the motor. Bidder shall also verify the starting characteristic and
acceleration time for motor selection.
Each motor shall be provided with vacuum contactor panel. The HT HRC fuse make, type
and characteristic shall be provided to the motor manufacturer for his necessary action.
The number of permissible restarts (hot & cold) per hour for each motor shall be informed
by the Bidder after obtaining the same from motor manufacturer.
Bidder shall co-ordinate between the pump supplier and motor supplier for selecting the
method of coupling, motor frame size, base frame details & foundation details.
The cable termination box provided with the motor shall be suitable to accept cables. The
contractor shall provide an adapter box for the same in case if the size of cable box is
inadequate. Cable termination box location shall be suitable for the cable routing proposed
for the pumping station by the bidder.
The motor shall be capable for safe starting and accelerating the load at 85% of the rated
voltage.
The locked rotor current of the motor shall not preferably exceed 500% of full load current
including 20% tolerance.
The motor shall be provided with 6 RTDs for stator winding each having DC resistance of
100 ohms at 0 deg C. The RTDs of platinum material, shall be embedded in the stator
winding at probable hot spot locations.
The bearings shall be provided with dial type thermometer having 2 separate NO contacts
each rated at 5A, 240 V AC or 0.5 A, 220 V DC, one contact for alarm and the other for
trip.
a) Tentative motor As per design of 6.6 kV motor
details
b) Syn. speed Fixed speed motors with Max. nominal speed 750/1000 RPM on
50Hz
b) Type of motors Totally enclosed tube ventilated (TETV) Squirrel cage induction
motors suitable for Horizontal Mounting
c) Motor duty Continuous, S1
d) Supply voltage & Voltage : 6.6 kV +10% to -15% Frequency : 50 Hz +3% to -5%
frequency Combined variation : +10% to -15%
conditions
e) Insulation class Class F
f) Starting Method Soft Starter
g) Cable termination Al conductor, XLPE insulated, armoured 6.6 kV (UE) grade cable.
details Cable termination box protection class IP 55.
h) Space heater 230 V space heater
i) Bearing Required at both ends

temperature
sensing
j) Winding temp. 6 Nos. required for each main pump motor.
sensing
k) Earthing GI strip as per Indian Standards
conductor
l) Performance Efficiency at full load - 90 % min.
details Power factor at full load - 0.85 min.
m) Painting details Enamel paint of shade 631 as per IS 5.
• GA drawing of the each motor showing dimensional details and terminal
box details
• Motor selection details
• Motor characteristics
Instruction manual for installation, operation and maintenance for motors
8.17 L.T. MOTORS
8.17.1 STANDARDS
1. IS 325 Squirrel cage induction motors
2. IS 12615 Energy Efficient Motors category eff1
3. IS 4691 Type of enclosures
4. IS 6362 Method of cooling
5. IS 12075 Mechanical vibrations of rotating electrical machines
6. IS 12065 Permissible limits of noise level
Contractor shall select the motor as per the required performance of pumps and ascertain the
required rating of the motor. Contractor shall also verify the starting characteristic and acceleration
time for motor selection.
Each motor shall be provided with vacuum contactor panel. The number of permissible restarts (hot
& cold) per hour for each motor shall be informed by the contractor after obtaining the same from
motor manufacturer.
The contractor shall co-ordinate between the pump supplier and motor supplier for selecting the
method of coupling, motor frame size, base frame details & foundation details.
The cable termination box provided with the motor shall be suitable to accept cables. The
contractor shall provide an adapter box for the same in case if the size of cable box is inadequate.
Cable termination box location shall be suitable for the cable routing proposed for the pumping
station by the bidder.
The motor shall be capable for safe starting and accelerating the load at 85% of the rated voltage.
The locked rotor current of the motor shall not preferably exceed 500% of full load current
including 20% tolerance.
The motor shall be provided with 6 RTDs for stator winding each having DC resistance of 100
ohms at 0 deg C. The RTDs of platinum material shall be embedded in the stator winding at
probable hot spot locations.
The bearings shall be provided with dial type thermometer having 2 separate NO contacts each
rated at 5A, 240 V AC or 0.5 A, 220 V DC, one contact for alarm and the other for trip.

a) Tentative motor details As per design of 0.415 kV motor

b) Syn. speed Nominal speed 1000/1500 RPM at 50Hz
c) Type of motors Totally enclosed tube ventilated (TETV) Squirrel

cage induction motors suitable for Horizontal
Mounting
d) Motor duty Continuous, S1
e) Supply voltage & Voltage : 415 V +10% to -15%

frequency conditions Frequency : 50 Hz +3% to -5%
Combined variation : +10% to -15%
f) Insulation class Class “F” or as required for motors
g) Starting Method Direct on line (DOL) for motors up to 22 kW

Soft starters for motors above 22 kW. But the motor
should be designed for continuous operation in
DOL mode. Motor may be started on DOL mode.
h) Cable termination details Al conductor, XLPE insulated, armoured 1.1 kV
(UE) grade cable.
Cable termination box protection class IP 55.
i) Space heater 230 V space heater
j) Bearing temperature Required at both ends

sensing
k) Winding temp. sensing As per provision of IS codes..
l) Earthing conductor GI strip as per Indian Standards
m) Performance details Efficiency at full load - 90 % min.

Power factor at full load - 0.85 min.
n) Painting details Enamel paint of shade 631 as per IS 5.

• GA drawing of the each motor showing dimensional details and terminal box
details
• Motor selection details
• Motor characteristics
• Instruction manual for installation, operation and maintenance for motors
8.18 H.T. Capacitors

8.18.1 Standards
Standard Description
IS 2834 Power factor improvement capacitors
8.18.2 Other considerations
Capacitor of adequate capacity in banks shall be connected to the main bus of the HT
panel through APFC to ensure an overall power factor of minimum 0.96.
a) Quantity and output The quantity and output must be
designed as per the requirement of
load to achieve the above-referred
objective.
b) Capacitor starting Through Vacuums Contactor, through
6.6 kV vacuum contactor
c) Capacitor type Mixed dielectric

d) Rated voltage and frequency 6.6 kV, 3 phase, 50 Hz

e) Maximum over voltage the unit 105 %
capacitor is capable of withstanding
continuously
• GA drawing of the capacitor unit, bank
8.19 LT CAPACITORS
8.19.1 STANDARDS
Standard Description
IS 2834 Power factor improvement capacitors
The Contractor shall check with manufacturer regarding providing of inductor coil.
The Contractor shall work out the automatic power factor control (APFC) scheme to achieve a
power factor of 0.96. The power factor improving capacitor requirement shall be as per the power
factor of the equipment selected by the Contractor.
a) Quantity and output Quantity and output must be designed as
per the requirement of load to achieve the
above-referred objective.
b) Power factor control Through APFC
c) Capacitor type MPP
d) Rated voltage and frequency 415 Volts 3 phase (line to line), 50 Hz
e) Maximum over voltage the unit 105 %
capacitor is capable of withstanding
continuously
• GA drawing of the capacitor unit, bank
• Instruction manual for installation, operation and maintenance for capacitor
8.20 H.T. Cables

8.20.1 Standards
No. Indian Standard Description
1. IS 7098 XLPE insulated electric Cables.
2. IS 5831 PVC insulation and sheath of electric cables.
3. IS 3975 Mild steel wires, strips and tapes for armoring of cables.
4. IS 1753 Aluminum conductors for insulated cables.
8.20.2 Other Considerations
The HT cable sizing shall be based on 150 MVA at 6.6 kV. The short circuit withstand
duration shall be 1.0 sec for all breaker feeders and 0.7 sec for HRC fuse control
feeders.
HT cable shall be of 6.6 kV, unearth grade.
HT Cables 3 core, Aluminum conductor, XLPE insulated, armored.
Cable Size As per design

• Cable catalogue
8.21 LT CABLES
8.21.1 Standards
1. IS 1554 PVC insulated electric Cables.
2. IS 8130 Conductors for insulated electric cables.
3. IS 5831 PVC insulation and sheath of electric cables.
4. IS 3975 Mild steel wires, strips and tapes for armouring of cables.
5. IS 1753 Aluminium conductors for insulated cables.
Power cable shall be of Al conductor, whereas control and lighting cables shall be of Cu conductor.
The minimum size of Al conductor cable shall be 4 mm2 and Cu conductor cable of 2.5 mm2.
Power cable sizing shall be based on the various de-rating factors recommended by cable
manufacturer, rated current, temperature rise of conductor and voltage drop.
Control cables of CTs shall be based on the VA burden of CT and relays, meters.
LT Cables PVC insulated, taped PVC inner sheath and outer sheath 650/1100
V grade, with multi-stranded aluminium/copper conductor,
armoured
Cable selection Cable shall be selected considering following points
1. Current rating of the load
2. De-rating due to grouping of cables
3. Voltage drop up to 3% in cable due to cable resistance
4. De-rating factor due to ambient temperature.
5. De-rating due to depth in case of buried cables
Spare cores for Up to 4 cores - nil
control cables 5 cores to 9 cores - 1 core
10 cores to 20 cores - 2 core
21 cores to 30 cores - 3 core
More than 30 cores - 4 core
• Cable catalogue
8.22 LIGHTING FIXTURES
8.22.1 STANDARDS
1. IS 1913 General & Safety requirements for electric lighting fittings.
2. IS 1777 Industrial lighting fittings with metal reflector
3 IS 5077 Decorative lighting outfits
4. IS 2149 Luminaries for street lighting
5. IS 6665 Code of practice for Industrial Lighting
The Lux levels for different areas of the pumping station are defined in the Chapter of
“Specifications for Civil Works”.
In order to have higher illumination for maintenance and repairs in the pump room area outlets of
16 A SPN shall be provided for the connection of portable lamps. 16 A SPN switch with socket
shall be provided in every bay of the pump house on the suction and delivery side walls. The
flexible lighting fixture shall be suitable for GLS lamps.
The contractor shall design the lighting system and get approval of the design along with related
drawings and specifications for the fixtures proposed for lighting.
8.23 EARTHING SYSTEM
8.23.1 GENERAL
All the material required for the earthing system shall be supplied and installed by the contractor.
The hot dip GI strip of 50 x 6 mm size shall be used.
All the material required for making earthing stations, such as electrode, charcoal, salt etc. shall be
supplied by the contractor. Excavation and refilling for laying of earth strip and for earth pit shall
also be in contractor’s scope.
The entire earthing system shall fully comply with Indian electricity act and rules. The contractor
shall carry out all changes desired by the electrical inspector, in order to make the installation
conform to I.E. Rules.
The earthing strips of LAs shall be directly connected to pipe type earthpit whereas earthing strips
of other equipments can be connected to grid.
The main earth grid shall be laid at a depth of 1000 mm below Grade level. In trenches, earth strip
shall be laid along the trench. It shall be protected against mechanical damage. Joints and tapping
in the main earth grid shall be made in such a way that reliable and good electrical connections are
permanently ensured. All joints except the equipment end shall be welded. All joints buried in
ground shall be suitably protected by applying two coats of bitumen and covering with Hessians
tape.
Conduits in which cables have been installed shall be bonded and earthed. Cable amours shall be
earthed at both ends.
Earth pipe electrodes shall be installed as per IS 3043. Their location shall be marked on earth pit
chamber covers.
The electrodes shall be tested for earth resistance by means of standard earth tester.
A disconnecting facility shall be provided for individual earth pit to check earth resistance.
All electrical equipment above 230 V shall be earthed at two points and equipment
230 V and below shall be earthed at one point.
Conductor size for connections to various equipment shall be as per the table as follows:
Equipment Conductor Size
Motors
Up to 11 kW 8 SWG GI wire
11 kW up to 22 kW 4 SWG GI wire
22 kW up to 37.5 kW 25 x 3 mm GI flat
37.5 kW to 90 kW 25 x 6 mm GI flat
90 kW to 200 kW 40 x 6 mm GI flat
Above 200 kW 50 x 10 mm GI flat
PCC 50 x 6 mm GI flat
PDB 50 x 6 mm GI flat
DG & other panel 50 x 6 mm GI flat
Local control station, street light pole 8 SWG GI wire
& its junction box
All switchyard equipment 50 x 6 mm GI flat
Main earth grid 50 x 6 mm GI flat
Lighting Panel 25 x 3 mm GI flat
Indoor fixtures 14 SWG GI wire
All paint, scale etc. shall be removed before earthing connections are made.
Anchor bolts or fixing bolts shall not be used for earthing connections.
8.23.2 EARTHING STATION - PLATE TYPE

The pipe of 40 mm dia. x 3000 mm long GI pipe shall be provided. At the bottom of the pipe 600
mm x 600 mm x 10 mm plate of GI shall be connected. Salt and coke shall be filled in layers of 25
mm up to one meter and balance shall be filled with loose soil. However, care shall be taken that
the earth pit does not sink. The brick chamber (400 x400) shall be made 75 mm above finished
ground level (FGL) and shall have a heavy-duty cast iron frame with hinged cover at top for
inspection. A 40 mm NB GI Watering pipe shall be provided in the pit.
8.24 AIR CONDITIONER
8.24.1 General
In general, window air conditioner shall be used, unless the installations and maintenance requires
providing ductile split type air conditioner installations. The air conditioner shall be of a suitable
capacity to maintain a temperature of 25° C in the control room considering extreme ambient
conditions of temperature and humidity. The air conditioner must be supplied of a reputed make.
8.24.2 Technical particulars
1 Location As per scope of work

2 Room size As per approved drawing
3 Outside temperature Ambient 50 0 C
4 Temperature 25° C
requirement
8.24.3 Drawings and information to be provided
• Outline drawings showing the principal dimensions and weights.
8.24.4 Instruction Manuals:
• Ordering information for all replaceable parts
8.25 LIGHTING SYSTEM

The cabling/wiring, installation and commissioning of complete illumination system shall comply
with all currently applicable statutes, regulations, fire insurance and safety codes.
Outdoor lighting shall be carried out by using 1.1 kV grade four core cable. The cabling for the
outdoor lighting fixtures will be done in loop-in/loop-out at respective outdoor fixture mounted
junction boxes. The indoor lighting shall also be carried out by using 2 Core, 2.5 mm2 copper
cables. The indoor office area wiring shall be carried in conduits.
Outdoor cabling shall be buried in ground whereas indoor lighting wiring (cable/conduit) shall be
of exposed type.
8.25.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Except as specifically approved by the Engineer-in-Charge, installation of conduits and lighting
fixtures shall be commenced only after all major services in that particular area have been
completed.
Location of lighting fixtures, switches and receptacles shall be shown on the drawings or indicated
by the Engineer in Charge and shall be relocated if required to suit the site conditions. 5A, 3 pin,
15A, 6 pin receptacles with switches shall be provided on the light control switchboards.
LP's shall be provided with labels indicating LP number and outgoing circuit feeder numbers.
LPs shall be provided with cable gland for incoming cable and knockouts for outgoing conduit
termination.
Cable and Conduit supports shall be provided at an interval of 300-400 mm for horizontal runs and
400-500 mm for vertical runs.
Cables and Conduits shall be kept, wherever possible at least 300 mm away from pipes, heating
devices and other equipment.
For the purpose of calculating connected loads of various circuits, a multiplying factor of 1.25 will
be made to the rated lamp voltage for lamp fixtures to take into account the losses in the control
gear.
Contractor shall supply junction boxes, pull boxes, terminal blocks, glands, conduits and
accessories (elbows, tees, bends etc.) and supporting/anchoring materials, to make the installation
complete.
In all types of cabling, due consideration shall be given to neatness and good appearance. The
decision of the Engineer-in-Charge, regarding acceptance of appearance, shall be final.
The rate for installation, testing and commissioning of the indoor lighting shall include the
mounting of fixtures with necessary materials, laying of cable/conduit, pulling of wires through
conduit and external earth wire, providing all accessories for cable/conduit installation, including
conduit fittings. Providing of light control switch board with switches, switch board mounted 5A, 3
pin receptacles with switches etc. The rate shall also be applicable for the lighting fixtures installed
outside the building as perimeter lighting, entrance lighting below canopy etc.
8.25.2 TESTING
Lighting installation shall be tested as per the instructions of the Engineer in Charge and shall
include but not be limited to the following:
Measure the insulation resistance of each circuit without the lamps being in place. It should be not
less than 1 M ohms to earth.
Current and voltage of all the phases shall be measured at the lighting panel busbars with all the
circuits switched on with lamps. If required, load shall be re-balanced on the three phases.
Check the earth continuity for all socket outlets. A fixed relative position of the phase and neutral
connections inside the socket shall be established for all sockets.
After inserting all the lamps and switching on all circuits, minimum and maximum illumination
level shall be measured in the area with an approved industrial lightmeter. Bidder shall supply an
approved lux meter for testing at no extra cost.
8.26 MISCELLANEOUS
8.26.1 CABLE GLANDS AND LUGS
All LT cable glands shall be made out of brass and shall be of double compression type.
All LT cable lugs shall be of tinned copper, crimping type.
8.26.2 CABLE TRAYS
Cable carrier system shall comprise of site fabricated ladder type cable trays made out of structural
steel and painted with two coats of red oxide primer and a final coat of enamel paint. The
construction of the cable trays shall be as per the site requirement and generally in line with the
tender drawings.
8.26.3 LIGHTING PANELS (LP)/ FAN DB
The panels shall be of 14 gauge sheet metal construction. Panels shall be equipped with phase and
neutral bus bars of adequate capacity and miniature circuit breakers (MCB). The incomer shall be
of ELMCB (earth leakage miniature circuit breaker) and outgoing circuits shall have only MCBs.
MCB shall be of 9 kA. Miniature circuit breakers shall be mounted in such a way that operating

levers project outside the front cover plates. A hinged door to cover the operating knobs shall be
provided. Synthetic rubber gasketing shall be provided between box and cover. The board shall be
provided with detachable top and bottom plates with 25 mm knockouts. All metal surfaces shall be
cleaned free of rust, given powder coating of shade 631 as per IS 5. A 415V danger board and
engraved nameplate shall be fixed on the panel. The lighting panels shall be marked with the
voltage and No. of phases of the supply.
8.26.4 RUBBER MATS
Electrical grade rubber mats shall be provided in the switchgear room in front of all panels.
8.27 CIVIL WORKS
The civil works required for electrical installation will also be part of this package. It shall be the
responsibility of the contractor to furnish the necessary design inputs such as transformer
foundation details, foundation details of supporting structures of CT, CB, DOF, Bus Post Insulators,
gantry, etc. to obtain then necessary approvals. The contractor shall also co-ordinate all inter-
discipline interfaces between civil and electrical work. Some of the major civil items are listed
below and briefly described in subsequent paragraphs.
• Road Crossings by RCC Pipes
• Trench for directly buried cables
• Civil works in switchyard
8.27.1 ROAD CROSSING BY RCC PIPES
Wherever required, RCC pipes of required diameter shall be provided across the road for road
crossings. For directly buried cables, the RCC pipe shall extend at least 500 mm beyond the road
edge. The RCC pipes shall be laid at least 600 mm below road level or at the trench bottom.
8.27.2 TRENCH FOR DIRECTLY BURIED CABLES
Cables shall be laid directly in trenches, wherever required. The trench shall be excavated along
the cable route and to the depth, as per drawing/directions of Engineer in Charge. A sand bedding
of at least 150 mm shall be placed before cables are laid. After laying the cables, the remaining
portion up to the top surface of cable shall be covered by sand. On top of this, a layer of bricks
shall be placed covering the width of the cables. The remaining portion of the trench shall
backfilled with the excavated soil and cable markers placed at every 50 meters.
All openings made by the contractor for laying of conduit, cable, earthing strip etc. shall be made
good at no extra cost. Wherever such openings are required, the Bidder shall work in co-ordination
with the civil team to minimise breaking and openings of walls.
8.27.3 Civil works in switchyard
1. An arrangements for lifting the transformer and loading/unloading
2. All necessary foundations for structures, equipment, fence posts/door posts etc.
3. Levelling of ground & gravel spreading.
8.28 LOCAL PUSH-BUTTON (PB) STATIONS

Construction Outdoor type weatherproof
Main pump motor On-off with ammeter
Other motors On-off
Valve motors Forward-stop –reverse spring return
starter with indication for full open/close
position of valve.

8.29 EMERGENCY DG SYSTEM

8.29.1 STANDARDS
1. IS 10000 Diesel Engine
2. IS 4722 Alternator

1 Diesel Engine Air cooled, coupled with alternator on common base
2 Fuel Oil Tank Suitable for 12 Hours continuous use
3 Engine Auxillaries Exhaust Pipe, Chimney, Silencer, Radiator, Battery and
Charger, Local Engine Panel, Flywheel
4 Alternator Minimum 25 KVA at Jahazpur, Pander, Khajoori, and
Amarwasi Pumping station to be constructed for rural
areas and at Jahazpur town Pumping station for urban
area , 3 phase, 4 wire, 50 Hz., 0.8 power factor, class of
insulation F, self regulated, self excited.
5 AMF Panel For automatic star and stop the DG in case of power
failure of main
8.29.3 DRAWINGS AND DOCUMENTS REQUIRED
• GA drawing of the engine and alternator
8.30 SPARE PARTS FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

The compulsory spare parts shall be provided as per the list enclosed under scope of work.
All spare parts shall be packed for long storage under the climatic conditions prevailing at the site.
Each spare part shall be labeled on the outside of its packing with its description, number and
purpose and, if more than one spare is packed in a single case, a general description of the case
contents shall be shown on the outside and a packing list enclosed.
8.31 SOFT STARTERS :
Soft starter for less reduced voltage starters which ensure a constant low starting current with
incremental voltage and torque to the motor to achieve smooth acceleration of the drive, is
proposed to be supplied.
The soft starter should be connected in series with the motor either on the line side or neutral side
and thus controls the starting current and starting torque.
The voltage across the motor should increases smoothly from the starting value (50-60%) to run
value (94-98%) with motor speed.
It should have a built in bypass contractor closes to ensure full voltage running of the motor which
can be time, current or speed based operated.
Applicable standards: High voltage soft starter should be designed and manufactured and tested in
line with relevant clauses of IEC/BS/IS standards. The general standards applicable are IEC 34, BS
4999, BS 5000 and IS 325.

9.0 Specifications For Instrumentation, Automation & Communication
9.1 GENERAL
This section of specifications defines the general requirement of instrumentation, automation and
PLC system to be installed at various headworks including SCADA system. For selection of field
instruments and control system or anything related to instrumentation, the Contractor shall follow the
specifications contained here in.
Irrespective of the detailed specifications of the respective items detailed in the chapters of
pumping stations, the contractor shall be required to provide all equipment, accessories, cabling,
earthing, providing necessary transducers/sensors, system hardware/software, programming logic
etc. to achieve the requirements listed in Clause 0 below.
Special care must be taken so that:
(i) The motorised valves shall be provided with open LS, close LS, R position of LR switch
and a 24V DC power pack for interface with PLC system.
(ii) The switchgear will be provided with drive available with, ON, OFF, trip status, L/R
switch, R position and 4-20mA isolated signal for Y ph current, power and bus voltage.
9.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENT OF PLC/SCADA SYSTEM
The entire PLC system is required to:
Receive & store the information From
A) ELECTRICAL SYSTEM:
a)
Input voltage, Amperage of 0.415 kV, and input voltage, Amperage to individual
motors & auxiliary transformers
b) Power consumption (kW & kWH) and power factor of all LT motors
c) Status of all relays used in electrical installations controlling LT motors
d) Status of all LT motors (on/off)
(B) MECHANICAL EQUIPMENTS
a) Status (on/off/percentage open) of all Butterfly/sluice Valves, on individual pumps
(delivery & Suction), manifold pipe etc.
(C) INSTRUMENTATION EQUIPMENTS
a) Flow data (instantaneous flow rates and total flow) from the pump house (through
flow meter & transducers installed on raw water main).
b) Level of water in the sump.
c) Pressures at delivery of each main pump & manifold.
Process the above information to Control
a) Shut down of pumps in case of any non transient abnormal conditions such as
low/high voltage, high current drawl, thermal over load, excessive shaft vibrations,
earth faults etc.
b) Shut down of pumps in case of low or high levels of water in sumps.
c) Operation of all butterfly/sluice valves to achieve described objective (a) to (h)
above.
d) Generation of reports.

Alarm Situations
The alarm schedule is indicative of what is required. The Contractor shall provide for the
annunciation of all alarms necessary in order to achieve control and monitoring requirements.
(i) Abnormal pressures in manifold.
(ii) Motor tripped on over-load.
(iii) Pumps failed to start/stop.
(iv) Valves unable to open/close.
(v) High/Low levels of water in sump.
(vi) Pump start sequence failed to complete
(vii) Pump stop sequence failed to complete
(viii) Emergency stop operated
(ix) MCB’s tripped
(x) UPS failure
(xi) Low power factor of motors.
9.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS OF INFORMATION & CONTROL SYSTEM
a) Instrumentation & Control system shall be designed, manufactured, installed and
tested by an experienced system integrator to ensure high standards of operational
reliability. Instruments mounted in field and on panels shall be suitable for
continuous operation. All electronic components shall be adequately rated and
circuits shall be designed so that change of component characteristics shall not affect
plant operation.
b) All I &C equipment shall be new, of proven design, reputed make, and shall be
suitable for continuous operation. Unless otherwise specified, all instruments shall be
tropicalised. The outdoor equipment shall be designed to withstand tropical rain and
temperature variation from –2 to + 60o C . Wherever necessary, space heaters, dust
and waterproof cabinets shall be provided. Instruments offered shall be complete with
all the necessary mounting accessories.
c) Electronic instruments shall utilize solid state electronic components, integrated
circuits, microprocessors, etc., and shall be of proven design.
d) For transmitting instruments, output signal shall be 4-20 mA DC linear having two
wire system.
e) Unless otherwise stated, overall accuracy of all measurement systems shall be ±1%
of measured value, and repeatability shall be ±0.5%.
f) After a power failure, when power supply resumes, the instruments and associated
equipment shall start working automatically.
g) The instruments shall be designed to permit maximum interchangeability of parts and
ease of access during inspection and maintenance.
h) The field instruments i.e. the instruments mounted outside the control panel shall be
mounted at a convenient height of approximately 1.5 m above grade platform.
i) Unless otherwise stated, field mounted electrical and electronic instruments shall be
weatherproof to IP-52
j) The instruments shall be designed to work at extremes of the ambient conditions of
temperature, humidity, and chlorine contamination that may prevail. The instruments
shall be given enough protection against corrosion.

k) Lockable enclosure shall be provided for the field-mounted instruments wherever

required.
l) All field instruments and cabinets/panel-mounted instruments shall have tag
plates/name plates permanently attached to them.
m) The performance of all instruments shall be unaffected for the ±10% variation in
supply voltage and ±5% variation in frequency simultaneously.
n) All wetted parts of sensors shall be made out of non-corrosive material capable of
working with chlorine content of 5 ppm.
o) For all instruments (transmitting analogue signals) installed in the field (outside
pump house), lightning protection units (LPU) shall be provided at both ends of the
connecting cable for the protection against static discharges/lightning and
electromagnetic interference.
p) Unless otherwise specified, double compression glands shall be used for glanding the
cable in field instruments and instrument control panel.
q) Pressure transmitters shall be provided with two valve manifold and a test port, so
that in site calibration can be carried out.
r) Two wire transmitters shall be provided with on-line test terminals.
9.4 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS
The PLC shall be Expandable mini programmable controller and shall have following
technical specifications;
Certified to UL, CSA, FM, Standards EN 61131-2, CE and shipbuilding approvals, Radio
interference suppression according to limit class A, programmable in LAD, FBD and STL,
Supply voltage 24 V DC, Execution time (bin.): 0.22µs, Data memory, max. 8KByte,
Program memory, max. 12KByte, 1 optional memory sub module, Backup time 100h(min.
70 h at 40 °C), 200 days (type.) with optional battery module, Maintenance-free if no
battery is used, 14 integr. DI 24V DC, 10 integr. DO 24 V DC, 0.75A, expandable with up
to 7 modules, 4 interrupts, 2 analog potentiometers, sensor power supply 280mA, 32Byte
bit memories, 256 counters, 256 timers, 6 high-speed counters, 30kHz, integrated RS 485
interface, max.187.5kBit/s for connecting other CPUs, PCs, operator control and
monitoring elements, printers, other ASCII devices, Ambient temperature 0 to 55 degrees
Celsius,
9.5 GSM/GPRS CONTROLLER:

1. The GSM/GPRS interface controller should operate on 10-30Vdc and shall be safe from the
transients in the LV supply from the transformer.
2. The GSM/GPRS interface and controller shall be of any standard make, suitable for operation
in the range of -5 to +55 degree celcius & relative humidity 30-95% without condensation.
3. Electromagnetic Compatibility shall confirm to EN55022 Emisiion test ( Class A) and EN
50082-1 Immunity test
4. GSM/GPRS interface & controller should have modbus communication capability with RS
485 built in serial port for data acquisition from Modbus devices and preferably Modbus
TCP/IP or IEC 608705-104 remote communication protocol.
5. The GSM/GPRS interface and controller should have provision for communication to mobile
control station/SCADA over GPRS. A pc executing programming software can be connected
to a controller through GSM/GPRS interface or M2M gateway for transferring application,
objects and commands.

Basic Features:
• Industrial GPRS interface devices
• Firewall and VPN for secure communication
• Mobile independent Static IP
• Should accept IP address from M2M gateway at server or from service provider
• 1x 10/100 base –T Ethernet port
• 1xRS 232/422/485 serial port
• 1xRS 232 device or console serial port
• should support 11 bit serial data
• should have provision for optional: internal heater, battery backup and I/O
extension
• Automatic re-establishment for communications in case of temporary failure of
wireless link
• Provision of fixed IP addresses needed for two way communications
• Inbuilt security mechanisms to prevent unauthorized entry to system. VPN
• ‘Watchdog to reboot the system
• Industrial grade hardware with -30 to 70 degree celcius
Processor
• 32 bit RISC processor
• 8MB flash memory
• 32 MB SD RAM memory
Power
• 6-26 V dc nominal input voltage
• 1-5 W power consumption
• Resettable fuse and ESD protection
Other
• Built in temperature sensor
• Built in real time clock
Enviornment
• -20 to 55 degree( w/o heater)
• -40 to 55 degree ( w/ heater)
• -30 to 85 degree ( storage)
• humidity 5 to 85% RH
Network Interfaces
• Ethernet port
• 10/100 Base –T . Shielded RJ45
• 1.5kV isolation transformer
• Ethernet IEEE 802-3, 802-2
GPRS
• Internal module and SIM card socket
• Compliant to GSM phase 2/2+
• FME external antenna connector (50 ohm)
• Dual band EGSM 900( 2W) and GSM 1800
• GPRS
• GPRS multi slot class10
• GPRS mobile station class B
• 85.6 kbps GPRS downlink speed
• 21.4 kbps GPRS uplink speed
• coding schemes CS1, CS2, CS3 ,CS4
• USSD support
Serial Port #1 console
• RS232 DTE male DB-9 connector
• Full modem and serial signals
• Speed 300-460 800 bps
• Data bits 7 or 8 , stop bits-1 or 2
• Parity – None , Even , Odd
• Flow control – None RTS/CTS
• Protection-15kV ESD and short circuit
• Console RS 232
• 1 stop bit
Serial Port #2 console
• RS232 , RS 422, RS 485 selectable
• Full modem and serial signals
• Speed 300-460 800 bps
• Data bits 7 or 8 , stop bits-1 or 2
• Parity – None , Even , Odd
• Flow control – None RTS/CTS
• Protection-15kV ESD and short circuit
• Console RS 232
• 1 stop bit
Software
• Network Protocols
o PPP,IP,ICMP,UDP,TCP,ARP
o DNS, DHCP, FTP, TFTP
o HTTP, POP3, SMTP
• Tunneling
o SSHv2 server and client
o SSHv1 server and client
o VPN using SSH protocol
o Authentication with 1024 bit RSA key
o Encryption with 3DES
• Management
o WWW, SSH, Telnet and console
o FTP,TFTP and HTTP software update
o Routing related
o Static Routing
o IP masquerading/NAT, firewall
o Serial device connectivity
o Device server application
o AT modem emulation
o Built in webserver and preconfigured pages for diagnostics using browser

o Network/ remote upgradable software
• Firewall
o LAN to GPRS
o GPRS to LAN
o GPRS to Interface
9.6 PC-BASED VISUALIZATION SCADA SYSTEM
To monitor and control the designated flows of clear water in the proposed water supply system,
SCADA System scheme envisages a Master Control Centre (to be constructed in other contract) to
be established in a purpose constructed building and Semi Master Control Center (SMCC) at
Jahazpur headworks along with Subsidiary Monitoring Centres (SMC) shall be established in the
control rooms of 06 pumping stations to be constructed under this contract and one PHED office at
Bhilwara. The SMC to be established under this contract shall be integrated with SMCC at
Jahazpur headworks which in turn shall be integrated with MCC at Telekheda headworks.
Design Requirements for the SCADA systems shall be as follows:
(a) The systems shall be designed, manufactured, installed and tested to ensure the high
standards of operational reliability. All electronic components shall be adequately rated and
circuits shall be designed so that change of component characteristics shall not affect plant
operation.
(b) All equipment shall be new, of proven design, reputed make, and shall be suitable for
continuous operation. Unless otherwise specified, all equipment shall be tropicalised.
Wherever necessary space heaters, dust and waterproof cabinets shall be provided.
Equipments offered shall be complete with all the necessary mounting accessories.
(c) On resumption of the supply following a power failure the SCADA system and associated
equipment shall start working automatically.
(d) The system shall be designed to permit maximum interchangeability of parts and ease of
access during inspection and maintenance.
The Subsidiary Monitoring Centres (SMC) will be located at:

• Jahazpur Pumping Station
• Pander Pumping Station
• Khajoori Pumping Station
• Amarwasi Pumping Station
• Kishangarh Pumping Station
• Jahazpur Town Pumping Station
• SE Office, PHED, Pur Road, Bhilwara
9.6.1 Proposed Work At Semi-Master Control Center (SMCC) AT Jahazpur
Headworks
It is proposed to provide the following at Semi - Master Control Center (SMCC) at Jahazpur
headworks:
xiv. The SMCC facility shall be housed in the new pump house under construction in a separate
package. A SCADA operator is to be provided as part of this package who shall sit at
Jahazpur headworks during the O&M period.
xv. Suitable furniture shall be provided at SMCC.
xvi. A communication network from suitable service provider (to be approved by EIC) along
with necessary equipment shall be procured and installed at SMCC.
xvii. The protocols and platforms of the communication system should match and be in sync
with various PLCs to be housed at PS of Jahazpur, Pander, Khajoori, Amarwasi and
Kishangarh for rural areas and of Jahazpur town for urban area.
xviii. The recurring expenditure during O&M, of this communication system, shall be borne
entirely by the contractor and shall be included in his O&M offer.
xix. Latest configuration standard PC considering ease of maintains with 24” TFT monitor with
comprising of Monitoring Software. The PC should work as Operator Working Station.
xx. Non Redundant Front end processor (PLC) for Monitoring and Data Poling from other
pumping stations ( As per below mentioned specification)
xxi. Monitoring SCADA software with run time unlimited tags shall have capability to handle
xxii. A4-size Laserjet printer
xxiii. Ethernet Switch, GSM Modem, etc. as required
xxiv. UPS (Min. 3KVA rating) with LASMF Batteries for power backup of 120 minutes backup
in case of power failure
xxv. Required cabling along with WP type cable glands, cable trays, conduit pipes, accessories,
erection hardware, etc.
xxvi. Required earthing system.
9.6.2 Proposed Work At Subsidiary Monitoring Centers (SMC)

THE SMC SCADA SYSTEM SHALL CONSIST OF A HIGH END PC BASED OPERATOR
WORKSTATION COMPLETE WITH 21” TFT SCREEN, KEYBOARD AND MOUSE, OPERATING
ON A HIGH SPEED ETHERNET BUS CABLE SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATING WITH:
• Laser printers for the purposes of alarm and event reporting

• Telecommunications systems operating with VSAT, ISDN and GPRS
communications media as appropriate.
THE SCADA SYSTEM SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH PROPRIETARY MICROSOFT WINDOWS
BASED SUPERVISORY CONTROL AND DATA ACQUISITION (SCADA) SOFTWARE. THE
SOFTWARE PACKAGE SHALL BE AS SUPPLIED FOR THE MCC SCADA SYSTEM.
THE SCADA SYSTEM SHALL BE CAPABLE OF PROVIDING A SERIES OF DISPLAYS OF

INFORMATION FROM THE OVERALL WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM, WHICH ARE APPROPRIATE TO
THE STATION AT WHICH IT IS LOCATED. TYPICALLY THESE SHALL BE:
a Upstream source of water and downstream user of water

b Local control centres forming part of the localised network of water supply.

THE SCADA SYSTEM SHALL NOT BE EQUIPPED TO UNDERTAKE ANY CONTROL

FUNCTIONALITY. THE SYSTEM SHALL ACT AS A “DUMB” TERMINAL ONLY, BUT SHALL
HAVE THE ABILITY TO PRINT LOCAL ALARMS AND EVENTS AS REQUIRED.
THE FOLLOWING TABLE INDICATES THE MINIMUM, BROAD TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR
THE SCADA SYSTEM AT EACH SUBSIDIARY MONITORING CENTRE AND IS GIVEN AS
INDICATIVE ONLY. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL OFFER THE LATEST MARKET PLACE DEVICES
TO SUIT THE SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS.
a. SCADA System operator stations 03 Nos.

• Processor: Intel Xeon Dual core, 3.0 GHz
• Memory: 1 GB RAM
• Combo drive, USB Ports
• Network adaptor
• HDD: 80 GB
• Network adaptor
•
Monitors: 21” TFT
b.
Printers
Laser printer, selectable paper width and selectable 03 Nos.
spacing between lines for on line printing of alarms
and event logging at each SMC’s.
• 132 columns/A4
• Black print only
• Fast Ethernet LAN connectivity
• Print speed 1200 Char/sec minimum
• Print head 9 pin
• Supply 230 volts 50Hz
c. Software
Complete Licensed software packages for all server
and PC installation including as machine.
SCADA software for PC: Windows based, graphic
facilities, suitable for industrial real time SCADA
system with all the functions such as viewing,
alarms, trending, archiving etc.
Network Management software at SMC : For 100
MBPS Ethernet LAN
Operator station software for SMCC : Windows
based with all facilities for real time SCADA
system for water supply management
Applications software : as a minimum, MS Office
and Adobe Acrobat Reader to provide the facility
for the formatting of SCADA information for
printing and reporting.
The subsidiary monitoring centre SCADA System shall provide the following facilities:
(i) Display status of all the items of the water supply transfer system relevant to the
particular SMC.
(ii) Display analogue values on the appropriate graphic screen
(iii)
Annunciate alarms along with time of occurrence of alarm
(iv)
Provide facilities for the operator to:
• Acknowledge alarms
• View a journal of alarms
• Display the duty / standby status of drives
• Display set points
• Provide real time and historic trending of analogue values
• Provide data archiving of all analogue values
• Display total running hours of pump drives
• All additional features required to assist in the effective and efficient
operation of the subsidiary monitoring centre.
Password protection shall be provided for security of operations. There shall be various levels of
security.
Features of the Software
(i) Graphic screens shall be provided as follows:
• Main and subsystem menus
• Related pumping station overviews and operational details
• Related local Control Centre overviews and operational details
• Any other data which will help the operator to smoothly operate the plant.
(ii) Graphical trending facilities shall be provided.
A backup power supply system shall be provided using UPS technology. The backup time shall be a
minimum of 8 hours for pumping stations and 4 hours for PHED office.
REMOTE TERMINAL UNIT
The RTU shall generally comply with the specifications as mentioned. The function of RTU is to
monitor level, suction and discharge pressure and actuated valve position. The RTU also monitors
loss of power and calculates and stores flow totals and average system pressures
The RTU communicates with the master control centre via GPRS. The “store and forward” should
be an inherent part of the RTU functionality. Communications to both telemetry and hardware is
accomplished using Ethernet and Serial communication ports on the RTU itself.
Hardware
Major hardware components of the RTU shall include but not be limited to:
a. Power Supply and Chassis
b. Central Processing Unit (CPU)
c. Input/Output Modules
d. Communications Equipment
General
a. The RTU shall be an intelligent, programmable, microprocessor based device that
can collect and store data, process and time stamp alarms, provide analogue and
discrete process control functions and communicate to remote workstations. The
RTUs shall support, RS 232/485 interface to communicate with GSM/GPRS
modem.
b. All components of the RTU system shall be manufactured to normally recognized
industry standards for temperature, electrical interference, vibration, etc. and
regularly sold for industrial installations.
c. The RTU system shall be of modular design with a plug-in central processing unit,
power supply and input/output modules. All components shall be marketed and
supported by the one manufacturer. All necessary cables shall be included.

d. The RTU shall be powered at 24VDC from a battery charger unit installed in the
distribution panel. The system power supplies shall be fused for overload
protection.
e. The RTU shall be capable of stand-alone operation in the event of failure of the
communication link to the remote workstations.
Power Supply and Chassis
a. The I/O chassis shall provide for directly mounting the CPU, power supplies,
communication modules, and the I/O modules. Chassis shall be available for direct
mounting in a 19-inch rack or alternatively, flush or surface mounted.
b. A single external 24 VDC main power supply shall have the capability of supplying
power to the internal power supply/sequencer, CPU and local input/output modules.
c. At the time of power-up, the power supply shall inhibit operation of the processor
and I/O modules until the DC voltages are within specifications.
d. The internal power supply shall not consume an available I/O slot.
Central Processing Unit (CPU)
a. The CPU shall be a plug-in module providing program execution, system timing,
local and remote I/O access, alarming, data storage, and communication handling.
b. The CPU shall be supplied with a battery-backed time of day clock and calendar.
c. A three-position, mechanical keylock switch, with removable key, shall be
provided. RUN mode will prevent any on-line modification to the application
control program. REMOTE mode will allow on-line modification via the network
connection only. LOCAL mode will allow modification via network and via a
locally connected PC.
d. The CPU shall perform on-line diagnostics to monitor the internal operation of the
RTU.
e. All on-line diagnostic information shall be accessible to the RTU application
program.
f. The CPU shall be capable of being programmed by an external PC via a serial
communication port on the RTU and remotely via the Ethernet communication
interface. The programming device shall have access to the application program,
the system configuration, all registers, I/O, system fault status, I/O override, and
system diagnostics.
g. The CPU shall contain several memory types suitable to the data being stored.
h. Non-volatile Flash memory shall be used to store the application program code,
historical data archive and audit files. Retained values, unreported alarms and data
shall be stored in battery backed RAM. The RAM memory battery backup system
shall be capable of retaining all memory for a minimum of three (3) months under
load and shall require no external or special vents
i. A low battery alarm variable shall be provided.
j. The program memory shall be sized as required to implement the functions
specified plus a minimum of 10% spare.
k. The RTU shall have the ability to perform automated archiving of historical
data to non volatile Flash RAM or battery backed RAM.
l. The RTU shall be able to monitor both analogue and digital values and log any
change to these values to a trail for auditing purposes.
Local Input/Output Modules (I/O)
a. The I/O count and type shall be determined, as that required to implement the
functions specified plus an allowance for active spares as noted below.
b. Each I/O drop or I/O location shall include 20 percent active input points (both DI
and AI) and 20 percent active outputs points (both DO and AO) for future use. The
spares shall be the same types of I/O modules supplied. Spare output points that
require the use of an external relay shall be supplied with the external relay.
Regardless of the spare requirement, all installed unused points on all I/O modules
shall be wired to terminal blocks in the termination cabinet in the order that they
occur on the I/O modules.
c. The I/O modules shall be available with local or remote terminations.
d. Field wiring terminal blocks shall be pull-apart type, if mounted on the I/O modules
to allow I/O module replacement without disconnection of the field wiring.
e. Each discrete input and output shall have an LED or other visible indication of
on/off status.
f. Discrete input and output modules shall have 500 V to the chassis and 1500 V
optical isolation to field devices.
g. All of the analogue inputs shall have at least 14 bit resolution and all analogue
outputs shall have at least 12 bit resolution. Analogue input and output system
accuracy shall be within 0.1% of full scale at 25° C and 0.3% of full scale from –
40° to +70° and shall have 500 V isolation to chassis.
Operating System
a. The RTU shall use a real-time, pre-emptive multitasking operating system allowing
program execution to be scheduled and prioritized.
b. The operating system shall reside in the RTU itself. It is not acceptable to transfer
data to a PC containing the operating system
RTU Programming Software
a. The supplier shall provide all RTU configuration software packages complete with
documentation, disks, licenses and copy protection devices to allow application
development.
b. The software package shall allow off-line program development and on-line
editing, monitoring, debugging, uploading and downloading of programs to the
RTUs via RS-232-C, RS-485.
c. All required hardware (including cables, cable adapters, etc.) to allow the RTU's
connection to a Standard RS-232-C, RS-485.
d. The software package shall include a software license agreement allowing the
Employer the right to utilize the software as required for any current or future
modification, documentation, or development of the RTU's furnished for this
project.
e. The system software shall be Microsoft Windows-based and run in a Windows
2000/NT/XP environment and include a 32-bit simulator capable of executing the
application program in the PC to allow the engineer to test and debug the program
prior to downloading to the RTU.
f. The software shall also include a live I/O simulator which will allow the developer
to test programs without the necessity of being connected to a RTU
g. The system shall provide extensive on-line program debugging tools to allow
analysis and troubleshooting of the application program. Live dynamic variable
values shall be displayed in the application program worksheets and languages in
which they were developed.

h. The username and password shall be stored on the RTU itself and not in the
application development software. The security features can only be adjusted by an
individual who has access to an administrative level ID and password for the RTU.
i. The software shall have extensive on-line Windows-based help screens.
Communication Ports and Remote I/O Communications
a. The CPU shall support up to three built-in serial communication ports for
programming, operator interface, peer-to-peer communications, and remote I/O
operations.
b. Serial ports expansion shall be available providing at least one additional RS 232
and one additional RS 485 port. In addition to the two serial ports, communication
expansion shall allow one built-in 900 MHz spread spectrum radio and one built-in
V.90 dial-line modem.
c. A ‘Virtual Port’ software function shall be included in the standard instruction set
to redirect serial messages to an IP Ethernet port allowing serial port expansion
through the use of commonly available Terminal Servers. It shall be possible to
mix protocols through the virtual port to multiple serial devices connected to
Terminal Servers.
Protocols
The RTU, in addition to the manufacturers own serial protocol, shall also support all the
presently used industry standard communication protocols.
HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE
Requirements
The HMI shall be of the touch screen type and shall be suitable for flush mounting in a floor
standing or wall mounting control panel. The facia shall be fully resistant to water and chemicals
normally found in use in the water industry, which may be carried on an operator’s gloved hand.
The HMI shall be capable of interfacing with a wide range of industry standard controllers and all
the commonly used communication protocols.
The HMI shall be capable of being programmed with a series of graphical screens to depict the
particular process being monitored and which can incorporate activated displays and suitable sub-
screens to undertake process control and process parameter changes, all via the touch screen
capability. The HMI shall generally be in accordance with the following:
Description Unit Particulars
Operating system Windows based
Display TFT > 10.4”
Display brightness Cd/m2 > 250
Display contrast > 200:1
Lifetime hr > 50,000
Memory Mb > 64
Communication ports (as a minimum) RS485, RS232, USB,
10/100 Base-T etc.
Expansion port facility Built in
Real time clock Built in
Input voltage, no. of phases and rated frequency V/-/Hz 24V DC
The HMI shall be complete with the necessary licensed software to set up the HMI unit to the
required operating conditions. The setting up shall be undertaken using a laptop computer running
the supplied software and the HMI shall be complete with all necessary cables and communication
facilities.
9.7 INSTRUMENTATION, AUTOMATION, COMMUNICATION CONTROL (IACC)

PANEL
9.7.1 General
The instrumentation, Automation, Communication Control Panel shall be sized to accommodate
PLC, GSM/GPRS controller, UPS, Cabling & internal wiring, receptacles, Digital Panel for
parameter to be monitored, space heaters, power supply etc.
Control Panel shall be CNC machine prefabricated out of CRCA sheet steel of thickness not less
than 2 mm, modular in construction, properly reinforced, powder coated and having rigid frame
structure. Internal mounting plate including the gland plate shall be 3 mm thick. The control panel
shall have dimensions as per system requirement. However, the control panel height shall not
exceed 2000 mm.
The exterior corners and edges shall be rounded to give a smooth overall appearance with
projections kept to a minimum.
Lifting lugs shall be provided for installation purposes and shall be replaced with corrosion resistant
bolts after installation.
Control Panel shall be completely metal enclosed and shall be dust, moisture and vermin proof.
Panel enclosures shall provide a degree of protection not less than IP 52 in accordance with
IS:13947 Part-I
Control Panel shall be free standing type. There shall be sufficient reinforcement to provide level
surfaces, resistance to vibrations and rigidity during transportation and installation.
Metal sills in the form of metal channels properly drilled shall be furnished along with anchor bolts
and necessary hardware for mounting the control panels. These shall be despatched in advance so
that they may be installed and leveled when concrete foundations are poured.
Cable entries to the panels shall be from the bottom with fire retardant spray compound sealing.
Control panels shall be provided with louvers along with washable micron filters AIRIN –
AIROUT fans will be provided.
9.7.2 Mounting
All equipments on front of panel shall be mounted flush or semi-flush. In case of semi-flush
mounting, only flange or bezel shall be visible from the front.
Equipment shall be mounted such that removal and replacement can be accomplished individually
without interruption of service to adjacent equipment.
Equipment mounted inside the panel shall be so located that terminals and adjacent devices are
readily accessible without the use of special tools. Terminal markings shall be clearly visible.
Earthing for Instruments
The panel shall be equipped with an earth bus securely fixed along the inside base of panel.
All metallic cases of instruments and other panel mounted equipment shall be connected to the
instrument earth bus.
Looping of earth connections which would result in loss of earth connection to other devices when
the loop is broken shall not be permitted. However, looping of earth connections between
equipment to create alternative paths to earth bus shall be provided.
A separate instrument earth bus will be created which will be floating and all the cable shields will
be terminated onto this bus. This bus will be connected to an electronic earth pit.

Frame Earthing
All metal parts other than those forming part of an electrical circuit shall be connected to a copper
earth bar run along the inside bottom of the panel. The minimum section of the earth bar shall be 25
mm x 3 mm. A 15 mm diameter hole is to be provided at each end of the bar. Connection of the
earth bar to the station earth shall be carried out by Contractor.
Space Heater
Strip type space heaters of adequate capacity shall be provided inside control panels to prevent
moisture condensation on the wiring and panel mounted equipment when the panel is not in
operation. The heaters shall operate on 230 V AC. Heaters inside the panels shall not be mounted
close to the wiring or any panel mounted equipment. The operation of heaters shall be controlled by
thermostats.
Interior Lighting and Receptacles
Each panel shall be provided with a CFL lighting fixture rated for 11 watt, 230V, 1 phase, 50 Hz
supply for the interior illumination of the panel during maintenance. The illumination lamp shall be
operated by door switch or manual switch. Each panel section shall be provided with separate
lighting.
Each panel shall be provided with 230V, 1 phase, 50 Hz, combined 5 amps and 15 amps, 3 pin
receptacle with a switch and neon indicating. The receptacle with switch shall be mounted inside
the panel at a convenient location. If the panel has front and rear doors then maintenance socket
shall be provided at both locations.
Voltage Level and Power Supply Units
Generally, voltage levels for control schemes and power supply for instruments in the panels, shall
be limited to 24 V DC. In case the instruments require power supply other than 24 V DC,
Contractor shall provide necessary transformers, converters, inverters and other associated
hardware required to generate the requisite power supply. The power supply distribution board for
panel mounted and field mounted instruments shall be provided. Power supply to all the
instruments mounted outside the control panel shall be provided from the power supply units in the
control panel. The power supply to all the instruments shall be without interruption and shall be
continued even in case of failure of 230 V A.C. power supply. UPS sizing should take this into
consideration.
Labels
All the equipment mounted on the front face of control panel as well as equipment mounted inside
the panels shall be provided with individual labels with equipment designation engraved. The labels
shall be mounted directly below the respective equipment. Also the panel shall be provided at the
top with a label engraved with panel designation.
Switches and Miniature Circuit Breakers (MCBs)
Each control panel shall be provided with necessary arrangement for receiving, distributing,
isolating and protecting of DC and AC supplies for various control, signaling, lighting and space
heater circuits. The incoming and sub-circuits shall be separately provided with Miniature Circuit
Breakers (MCBs). Potential circuits for relaying and metering also shall be protected by MCBs. All
such MCBs will be provided with an auxiliary contact to be used for providing MCB tripped alarm.
Intra-panel (Panel Internal) Wiring
Connections within a panel, between panel mounted devices and terminal blocks or between two
panel mounted devices will be made by 660 volt grade, stranded copper conductor insulated with

PVC and designed for a minimum conductor temperature of 90 degrees centigrade. The wires shall
be shielded, where necessary.
Panels shall be supplied completely wired internally, with a colour coding scheme decided mutually
between the Department and the Contractor, to equipment and terminal blocks and ready for
external cable connections at the terminal blocks.
Wires within the panel shall be continuous i.e. without splicing and shall comprise stranded copper
conductors. Internal wiring or wiring between the two assemblies shall be commensurate with
mechanical safety.
Wire termination shall be made with solderless crimping type of tinned copper lugs which firmly
grip the conductor and insulation. Insulated sleeves shall be provided at all the wire terminations.
Engraved core identification plastic ferrules, marked to correspond with panel wiring diagram shall
be fitted at both ends of each wire. Ferrules shall fit tightly on the wires and shall not fall off when
the wire is disconnected from terminal blocks. All wires directly connected to trip circuit of breaker
or device, shall be distinguished by the addition of a red coloured unlettered ferrule.
Terminal Blocks
Terminal blocks for power connection shall be 660V grade, 20 amps rated, one-piece moulded,
complete with stud type terminals, washers, nuts and lock nuts and identification markings.
Terminal block design shall include a white fibre marking strip with clear plastic, hinged terminal
covers. Markings on the terminal strips shall correspond to wire numbers on the wiring diagrams.
All control output terminals will be fused type and all other input signal terminals will be clip on
shrouded type.
All spare contacts and terminals of the panel mounted equipment and devices shall be wired to
terminal blocks.
There shall be a minimum clearance of 250 mm between the first row of terminal blocks and the
associated cable gland plate. Also the clearance between two rows of terminal blocks shall be a
minimum 250 mm.
Panel internal wiring shall not be looped directly from instrument to instrument. The same shall be
looped through the panel terminal block only.
If accidental short circuiting of certain wires is likely to result in malfunction of equipment, such as
closing or tripping of a breaker or positive and negative wires, these wires shall not be terminated
on adjacent terminal blocks.
Cable Supports
All external cables shall present a neat appearance and shall be suitably braced, placed in troughing
clipped or laced to prevent effects of vibration.
Terminal/Identification
Every terminal and test plug shall be uniquely identified within the terminal cabinet by means of a
terminal number. Appropriate labels shall be used to permit quick and unambiguous identification
of each terminal and test plug.
Painting of Control Panel/ Control Desk
All sheet steel work shall be phosphated in accordance with the following procedure :
i. The pre treatment shall be hot process with running water for rinsing.
ii. Oil, grease, dirt and swarf shall be thoroughly removed by emulsion cleaning.

iii. Rust and scale shall be removed by trickling with clean water followed by final
rinsing with dilute dichromate solution.
iv. The control panel shall be powder coated. Thickness of coating of minimum 60
microns. QA test certificate shall be furnished for thickness adhesion and hardening
of powder coating.
9.8 SPECIFICATIONS OF EQUIPMENT/SYSTEM
General criteria
The design /selection criteria to be applied to instrumentation systems shall be as follows:
(a) all instruments shall be suitable for continuous operation
(b) all transmitting instruments shall have a 4 - 20 mA linear output
(c) all digital outputs shall be volt free
(d) all instruments shall be designed for the ambient conditions of temperature
and humidity
(e) all wetted parts of instruments sensors shall be non-corrosive and suitable
for use with potable water containing residual chlorine
(f) all instrumentation systems for use out of doors shall be protected to IP 65
(g) all analogue displays shall be of the digital type with no moving parts
(h) instrumentation shall utilise solid state electronic microprocessor
technology and avoid the use where practical of any moving parts
(i) instruments shall resume operation automatically on application of power
following a power failure.
9.9 FLOW MEASURING SYSTEM

Flow measuring system shall consist of flow sensor/ transducers, flow integrator & flow
transmitter, digital flow indicator & integrator, remote reading device and any other item required
to complete the system. Full bore electromagnetic flow meters should be designed, manufactured
and calibrated according to ISO standard. The flow meter shall be capable of measuring bi-
directional flow. The Electromagnetic Flow meters shall withstand maximum working temperature
of about 600C and shall be of pressure rating PN1.6 unless specified otherwise.
9.9.1 General
Full Bore Electromagnetic Flow Meter shall be a velocity sensing electromagnetic type,
microprocessor based signal converter, sealed housing, flanged tube meter for 1.6 Mpa working
pressure with remote reading device which should be able to transfer data through GSM. The meter
shall be manufactured to highest standard available for mag-meters. The meter shall be equipped
with minimum six digit digital totalizes, reading in units of kiloliters and shall be accurate within
0.5% of true flow. The accuracy should be inclusive of linearity, hysterisis, repeatability and
pressure effect. The flow meter shall be supplied with a battery with life of 10 years without
changing the battery unit and battery must be an integral part of the meter. The meter assembly
shall operate within a range of 0.3 m/sec to 4 m/sec and be constructed as follows:
Meter Tube (Sensor) shall be fabricated from stainless steel tube and use class PN1.6 flat face
carbon steel flanges in accordance with IS 1538. The internal and external of the meter tube shall be
blasted to near white and lined with hard rubber preferably by SBR or EPDM. Meter tube shall
have a constant nominal inside diameter offering no obstruction to the flow.
Coil Housing shall be fabricated from stainless steel for corrosion resistance and welded to the tube
providing a completely sealed environment for all coils, electrode connections and wiring harness
capable of submerged or buried operation.

Signal Converter shall be pulsed DC coil excitation type with auto zeroing. The signal converter
shall be remotely mounted away from the meter. The converter shall indicate direction of flow and
provide a flow rate indication and a total of flow volume for both forward and revere directions.
The converter shall provide an isolated 4-20 mA output into minimum 500-ohm load and a
frequency output of a maximum of 0-10 KHZ and a scaled pulse output. The microprocessor based
signal converter shall have a self-diagnostic test mode and a backlit display that continuously
displays ‘Rate of Flow’ and ‘Total Volume’.
The converter shall be compatible with Microsoft Windows and other software programs with built
in terminal communication capabilities of RS 485, HART or other protocols for interface. The
converter shall be remotely mounted up to 200 m from the sensor, and shall be supplied with all
calibration complete for desired requirements.
Converter shall be supplied with a programmable low flow drop out and empty pipe zero return.
The signal converter housing should be die-cast aluminum with glass window. The converter cum
transmitter should be fully programmable from the front facia. The programming should be user
friendly, self-prompting menu driven.
Volumetric Testing of all meters must be performed and approved prior to shipment. The complete
meter assembly and signal converter must be wet accuracy tested and calibrated as a unit near
minimum, intermediate, and maximum specified flow ranges of the meter (full range of flow). The
volume of water used to conduct the test must be shown on a shipping tag attached to the meter.
To calibrate these meters, only direct volume comparison calibration method should be used. The
overall accuracy of the calibration rig should be at least three times better than the accuracy of the
full bore electromagnetic flow meter. The competent authority shall authorised by the department
as a third party inspection along with representative of department certify the testing. All the meters
shall be calibrated for a minimum of 5 point. The difference of the reading in the match pair should
not be more than 1.0 % of the volume of discharge measured in a day.
The manufacturer should have an ISO 9001 certification. The magnetic flow meter should perform
within the required accuracy of measured value without being affected by change in pressure due to
demand fluctuation. The length of the sensor should be strictly as per ISO up to DN 600 mm and
for other sizes it should be as per the manufacturer’s standard. All meters including all sizes, should
be of same make, style & premises of manufacturer for maintaining uniformity & less erroneous.
Contractor shall obtain the drawing/design approval prior to the supply of meters.
To avoid ingress of water in the sensor housing, sensor has to be of fully welded construction. The
maximum distance between flow sensor and the signal converter/transmitter should be at least 200
mts.
Supplier should have in-house calibration facility and should give calibration certificate for all the
flow meters. The flow meter should have grounding rings only. Calibration of each meter shall be
tested at in house facility of manufacturer. The test bench of such manufacturer should be certified
by a reputed company. In case the Bulk Water Meters are to be imported by the bidder than ISO or
EEC certification for such calibration is required.
9.9.2 Electromagnetic full bore type flow meter
9.9.2.1 Technical Specifications
A) Process Liquid
a. Liquid Type : Potable water/raw water
b. Type of solid : Silt particles
B) Operating Condition

a. Operating pressure : Max. up to 1.6 Mpa

b. Operating temperature : 0o C to 60o C.
C) Flow Sensor
a. Type : Pulsed DC excitation
b. System : Separate with cable output
c. Power supply : 240 V +/- 15 % AC, 50 Hz
d. End Connections : Flanges of Carbon Steel
e. Flange Rating : PN1.6
f. Electrode material : SS 316 (Stainless steel) /Platinum /Tantalum
g. Meter tube : SS 304 (Stainless steel)
h. Electrode type : Round head electrodes (Bullet nose)
i. Lining material : Hard Rubber (SBR or EPDM)/ Poly-urethane (PU)
j. Protection category : IP 65
k. Measuring accuracy : +/- 0.5% of Measured Value inclusive of Linearity,
repeatability, Pressure Effect and Hysterics between 0.5 -
4 m/s velocity.
and
+/- 1.0% of measured value in a day, difference in the
reading of match pair meters.
l. Coil Housing : SS 304 with fully welded construction
m. Connection / Junction Box : SS 304
n. Earthing : Grounding Rings in SS 316, or earthing electrodes
o. Fluid conductivity : > 5 µ Siemens/cm
p. Marking : Direction of flow with arrow, size, Sr. no, make
D) Flow Transmitter/Converter
a. Type : Microprocessor based, Modular Design, remote mounting
b. Display language : English
c. Ambient temperature : -20 C to +600 C
d. Display : Min. 2 line back lit LCD for indication of actual flow rate,
forward, reverse, sum totalizes
e. Outputs : One Current output (4 – 20 mA)
One scaleable pulse output
One Status output
f. Protection Category : IP 65
g. Enclosure : Die Cast Aluminum with polyurethane finish
with glass window

h. Programming : Through Key /keypad on front facia /optical touch key

i. Power Supply : 240 V+/- 15% AC, 50 Hz
j. Cable Gland : ½” NPT (4 glands of double compression type)
k. Mounting : Wall mounted
l. Interface : RS 485, based on EIA R 422/485 standard, or HART
m. Power failure mode : Provision of RAM/PROM to store parameter entered and
measured flow data during power failure
n. Max. Separation : Up to 200mtrs. between sensor & transmitter without any
signal boosters
o. Terminals : Shock – Hazard – protected push lock terminals
p. Error Identification : 0/3.6/22 m Amp
q. Interchangeability : Fully interchangeable with all sizes of flow sensors
r. Safety classification : General purpose certification
s. Flow Indicator Totalizes : Internal, 5 mm high, LED display with 6 digit LCD /
electromechanical Totalizes
9.9.3 Flow Loggers

Flow loggers totally sealed with rugged construction, with in built battery are required for recording
flow in water supply mains. The maximum expected pressure is 100 meters of water column.
The loggers must be equipped with a note pad area for storing manually entered information such
as location details, site observation, job description and must be supplied with an application
software which may use the node pad area for storage of scale factors, pulse significance, range
settings etc.
The loggers must have communication facility at base or on site to provide information on the
current status (i.e. logging/ stand by, clock setting, amount of data logged, present input values etc.)
and accepting user commends (start/stop, recording, clear of transfer data etc.) with data retrieval
facilities with the RS232C /432 terminals (Psion organiser, IBM PC etc.).
Connecting cables at least 10 meter long with accessories to download data from loggers to site and
connecting cables for communicating with IBM PC of at least 3 meters is to be provided with all
loggers. Each logger will also be supplied with suitable connectors (Quick release helical pressure
hose) to be installed on pipes and connecting them with loggers must also be supplied with a wall-
mounting bracket.
The loggers must fulfill the following criteria:
Inputs
Number of channels : Min. 8
Input impedance :>300 kilo-ohms
Input protection :protected against reverse connection
and over voltage.
Voltage input :Range 0-2 volts, +0.5% accuracy and resolution.
Event input :Switch closure or logic pulse, date and
time of event stored, resolution 10 secs.
State input :Switch closure or logic state.
On state change, date, time and new state
are stored resolution 10 secs.

Count input rate :Switch closures or logic pulse, maximum 10%
Outputs : 2 independent digital outputs for transducer power
control and alarm signaling
Serial port
Type :optically isolated, full duplex, asynchronous.
Command \ data format :ASCII or binary.
Memory
Type :Solid State, Non-volatile.
Size : Minimum 32 Kilobyte.
Data retention :5 to 10 years (i.e. life of logger).
Clock
Type :Crystal controlled calendar clock.
Supply
Type : Internally powered by single cell.
Life : 5 to 10 years, dependent on method of use.
Environmental
Operating temperature : 00 C to +500 C.
Protection classification : IP68 or equivalent NEMA specifications,
Submersible to 2 meters for unspecified
period.
Connectors 12-way input, 4-way serial port,
Mechanical
Mounting : Two fixing holes in base, tapped M4.
E) Flow Indicator and Integrator

1. Type : Microprocessor based
2. Display : Digital, seven segment back lit LCD/LED display
3. Digit Height : 14 mm or Higher
4. No. of Digits for
- Flow indicator : 5 Digits
- Flow integrator : 6 Digits
5. Input : 4-20 mA DC (Isolated) from flow transmitter through
analogue signal multiplier
6. Zero and span : Required
adjustment
7. Manual Reset Facility : Required (shall be key operated)
for flow integrator
8. Engineering units for
9. - Flow rate indicator : Cum/hr
- Flow integrator : ml
10. Battery backup for : Required
integrator
Note: Digital flow indicator and flow integrator shall be a combined unit.
F) Remote Reading Device

(i) The remote reading device should be able to transfer data through GSM. Its function
shall be to receive the reading from the flow meter at any fixed moment and transfer the
same to control room using GSM network. The unit shall be waterproof (IP 68). The
contractor shall also have to provide one SIM card per device for GSM connection. The
system should also have automated mechanism for detecting non-functional devices
and meters and also notify, through SMS, in case of tampering.
(ii) A Server Module is to be provided, which shall be installed at the control room and it
will act as a receiver for the data sent by the remote reading device. The server module
shall be connected to server computer through a USB cable for transferring the received
data. Contractor shall have to provide one SIM card for server module.
(iii) Application software- Contractor shall also have to provide customized application
software with the system according to field requirement. This application will display
the daily water meter reading, quantity of water supplied in last 24 hours. The reporting
software should have functionality like tabular and graphical display of daily meter
reading. The reporting software should be customized as per department’s
requirements.
(iv) In case of non-availability of power connection at meter installation site such as at off-
take point, solar panels with battery shall be provided with meter. The back-up of the
battery, with solar panel shall be at least 10 days. Alternatively, adequate re-chargeable
battery may be provided with the remote reading device with back up of minimum 6
months. The decision on this shall rest with EIC depending on recurring costs, ease of
maintenance and long life.
G) Signal Cable
The cable should be capable of transmitting low signal voltage U (milli volts, pico watts) via a
armored shielded cable from the primary head to the signal converter. The cable should be
resistance to interference from external magnetic fields. The cable should be suitable for laying
underground and under water installation.
H) Meter size
Meter size is designated by the nominal diameter (DN) of the flange.

i ) Overall length
For each meter size designation, there is a corresponding fixed overall length and tolerance both as
specified by the manufacturer standards. The length includes lining if it covers the flange face but
excludes accessories such as gaskets, grounding and protection rings.
j) Connections
The Flow meter shall be provided with flanges at both ends, the internal diameter of which shall be
equal to the nominal size of the meter. The dimensions and drillings of the flanges shall be in
accordance with IS 1538.
k) Rubber Gasket
The flat rubber gasket shall be 3 or 6 mm dual thickness of SBR material and shall be suitable for
making flange joints. The quality of flat rubber gasket shall be as per IS: 5382 and drilling of holes
shall be as per IS: 1538.

L) Nuts and bolts
Nuts and bolt shall be of best quality carbon steel, machined on the shank and under the head and
nut. Nuts and bolts shall be electro-galvanized. Bolts shall be of accurate length so that only one
thread shall show through the nut in the fully tightened condition. Nuts and bolts shall conform to
IS: 1363 and IS: 1367.
M) Material Supply
All the Flanged meters shall be supplied with one rubber gasket per flange and the required number
of nuts and bolts as per the meter size. Matching pair of grounding rings shall be supplied with all
the meter tube.
N) Quality control tests
All water meters of the same size and class manufactured by the same firm under similar condition
of production from the material of the same batch, components from the same source, shall be
considered as a lot for quality control inspection.
The sampling procedure and scale of sampling for visual inspection and other test shall be as per
Table-4 given in IS: 779.
The sample meters from a lot shall be inspected for workmanship to ensure that meter is free from
any damage, cracks, imperfections and other defects and uniform in dimensions.
O) Acceptance Tests
The flow meter having satisfied for quality control requirements shall be tested for lot acceptance.
The following acceptance tests shall be conducted in accordance with IS : 779 and IS : 2373.
• Pressure tightness (Hydrostatic test).
• Metering accuracy.
In addition, to above tests, manufacturer shall furnish a material certificate for meter tube, coil
housing, connection flange and electrode, if required the material may be tested at approved
laboratory for reconfirmation. If desired, the calibration and other test shall be witnessed by the
Department or their authorized III party inspector.
p) Packing
All the flow meters shall be packed in polyethylene bags. These larger size bulk flow meter shall be
packed in separate wooden crate, according to the size. Rubber gasket and nuts, bolts etc. shall be
supplied in separate jute bags.
9.9.3.1 Battery Backup system
The battery backup shall be used to operate electromagnetic flow meters during power failure. The
technical specification shall be as follows:
Make : Preferably APC make, ISO 9002 & 14001 series certified.
Type : Online or line interactive
Capacity : 500 VA wave form type Sine wave
Input voltage : 180-280 volts
Batteries : External batteries-SMF
Control panel : Voltage correction, overload indicator alarm
Life : 10 Years
Back-up Period : 10 hours (where electricity is available), 10 days (where electricity
is not available and meter is to be run with solar panel based
system)

9.9.3.2 Installation and maintenance

9.9.3.2.1 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION:
The installation of EMF meters shall be done on-line with one sluice valve of same size. If due to
site condition, on-line installation is not feasible, the meters shall be installed on bypass line with
one sluice valve of the same size. All the installation should be done with dismantling joint.
To ensure, during measurement the meters must remain completely filled with water, care should
be taken to avoid locations where chances of partial flow are high, such as pipes laid on slopes. The
meter should not be installed close to the strong electromagnetic fields such as close to power
transformer.
The electrode axis of the meter should be in horizontal plane for horizontal pipe runs. Care should
be taken to avoid installations of meters on the downstream of the control valves, 90, or 45 degree
elbows, or partially opened valves etc. to avoid cavitations /partial flow conditions.
A minimum of 5XD, straight pipe upstream and a run of 3XD pipe diameter downstream or as per
the recommendations of the manufacture, whichever is on the higher side must be ensured for all
the installation site to avoid turbulent flow profile at the meter location.
The flow direction of the water should correspond to the direction shown by the arrow on the
sensor.
9.9.3.2.2 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
The signal converter shall be installed remotely and mounted on the panel board/wall of the
pumping stations or any other suitable location directed by the engineer-in-charge.
A 5 Amp. single phase AC connection shall be made available, for power supply to the signal
converter and the sensor where meters are to be installed at headworks. In case of non-availability
of electricity such as at off-take point, solar panel with battery shall be provided with meter. All
other necessary fixers including wiring with proper cable conduit Safety fuses and other items
necessary for the installation of EMF shall be provided by the contractor to the entire satisfaction of
the engineer-in-charge and no payment shall be made on this account.
GI pipes shall be used as a conduit for connecting cables between signal converter and the sensor.
First few feet of the conduit must be run in flexible conduit near sensor terminal box and at the
signal converter. The signal converter shall be fitted with face sealing cable glands. Only ½” NPT
glands and double compression adapters may be used.
Only the specified signal cable recommended by the manufactures shall be fitted. The conduit entry
shall be sealed to prevent moisture entering the terminal box via the conduit.
The signal cable and GI pipe used for the installation shall be paid at actual, on per running meter
as per the item indicated in Price Proposal.
Proper grounding of flow meter with the help of grounding rings shall be ensured for proper
electrical contact between flowing liquid and the ground.
9.9.3.3 Protection of Meter
The Contractor shall construct a suitable RCC chamber for enclosing flow transducer to be
mounted on underground pipe lines. A concrete cabin shall be constructed above the chamber for
housing the flow transmitter.
The meter chambers shall be made of M 15 grade of concrete. The thickness of the walls shall be
as per detailed design in consideration to the site conditions. Live load of 150 Kg/sqcm shall be
considered on the chamber roof. The chamber shall be covered with ferro cement covers which
shall be constructed to the specifications given here after. The height of the chamber shall be taken
at least 15 cm above natural ground level and it shall be ensured that the run off or other flowing
water nearby normally does not enters the valve chamber. Provisions shall be made so that the
projections out of ground of the chamber do not form an obstruction to the traffic.
The minimum thickness of valve chamber shall be as per follows :-

I. RCC Walls : 125 mm

II. Floor M15 grade : 100 mm
III. Reinforced Cement Concrete : 100 mm
A locking facility shall be provided for all chambers using MS rods, hooks and a liver. The locking
arrangement shall be firmly secured in the chamber walls.
Provision shall be kept for access to the roof of the chamber and from roof to the floor of the
chamber through suitable, RCC/RSS/cast iron/galvanized MS ladder steps of width not less than 30
cm.
Each chamber shall be provided with CC floor in M 15 grade of concrete. For drainage of water
filled inside the chamber, a 25 mm drain pipe leading to a soakage pit of diameter 900 mm and
minimum depth below floor as 750 mm shall be provided. The soakage pit shall be filled with
boulders.
Pipes passing through walls should be coated by two layer of soft material (Hessian felt) to allow
for differential settling and longitudinal expansion if directed by engineer in charge. Only metallic
pipes may be cast into the walls for anchoring purposes.
The work shall include excavation, consolidation, leveling, lean concrete as per drawing, in
foundations, finishing, refilling. It shall include all labour and material required for the complete
chamber.
9.10 LEVEL MEASURING SYSTEM

9.10.1 General
(i) The level transmitter shall be mounted in suitable weatherproof lockable pedestal
enclosures near the level sensor.
(ii) Float and board type level measuring system shall be additionally provided for level
measurement and local display in each sump.
(iii) Level monitoring devices (the level sensor equipment shall be secured to prevent
interference by unauthorized personnel)
(iv) The necessary bracketry to secure the instruments to be mounted near sump and
surge tank.
(v) Ultrasonic type level measuring devices shall comprise of a transducer, a transmitter,
remote level indicator and all other items required to complete the control system.
(vi) The level sensor and the field-mounted transmitter shall be separate and
interconnected by integral cable of sufficient length.
(vii) The transducer shall be suitable for flange or bracket mounting as required and shall
be environmentally protected as per IP65. It shall have ambient temperature
compensation and adjustable datum setting facilities.
(viii) The design and application of this ultrasonic level meters shall take into account the
vessel or channel construction, the material size, shape, environment, process fluid or
material, the presence of foam, granules, size etc.
(ix) The installation shall avoid any degradation of performance from spurious
reflections, absorption, sound velocity variations, sensor detection area, temperature
fluctuations, specific gravity changes and condensation. For application where
spurious reflections are unavoidable the control unit shall be provided with facilities
for spurious reflection rejection.
(x) The transmitter will provided an isolated 4-20mA 2 wire o/p.

(xi) To remove the effect of water turbulence in reservoirs averaging facility should be
provided in the transmitter unit.
9.10.2 Ultrasonic type Level Measuring System
(a) General
i. Accuracy of measuring loop: ± 0.5% of full scale
(b) Sensor/transmitter Split type
i. Output : 4-20 mA
ii. Mounting : On top of reservoir
iii Range : As per requirement
iv Programming facility with
programmer : Required
(c) Remote Display Unit : Digital panel meter with
3½ digit backlit LCD/LED, ±
0.25% accuracy, 4-20 mA high
and low alarm set point, input
4-20 mA D.C.
(d) Analogue signal multipliers isolation : Required wit
and 2 outputs
9.10.3 Level Sensors (LS)

Level sensors of capacitance type, suspension mounted shall be provided for level measurement of
water in tanks/ sump/ reservoir. Guide pipe shall be provided for probe support.
Technical parameters
S. Title Description
No.
1 Name of instrument Level sensor
2 Location Out door/indoor on tanks/ sump/
reservoir
3 Application Measurement of water level
4 Mounting Flange /socket mounting
5 Input Level
6 Output DPDT contact rated 5A at 230 V A.C.
7 Accuracy 2.0% FSR
8 Required Range To suit the requirement
9 Power Supply 230 V AC or suitable
10 Connection Details 2x1.5 mm2 CYWY cable
9.10.4 Level Transmitter (LT)

Level transmitter shall be provided for continuous level measurement. Level transmitter
shall be of capacitance type with 4-20 mA output. Canopy arrangement shall be provided
for each LT.
S. Title Description
No.

1 Name of Instrument Level Transmitter

2 Location Outdoor, Tank Mounted
3 Application Transmission of water level
4 Mounting Direct/Flange Mounted
5 Input Water level
6 Output 4-20 mA
7 Accuracy : 2.0% FSR
8 Required Range To suit the requirement
9 Power Supply 230 V A.C. or suitable
10 Connection Details Single pair screened twisted core
cable
11 Enclosure Al Die cast, Weather Proof ,IP52
9.10.5 Level Indicators (LI)

Level indicators shall be digital, flush mounted, 7 segment red LED indication type and shall be
provided on the control panel for continuous level indication at sump/ tanks/ reservoir. Each level
indicator shall have input of 4 - 20 mA from respective field mounted level transmitter.
No Title Description
1 Name of Instrument Level Indicator
2 Location Control panel
3 Mounting Flush mounting
4 Application Water level
5 Input 4-20 mA from Level transmitter
6 Output Digital display
7 Power supply 230 V A.C. or suitable
8 Display 7 segment LED with 3 ½ digit display
9.11 PRESSURE MEASURING SYSTEM

9.11.1 General
s) Pressure measuring system shall consist of pressure transducer, transmitter and
digital pressure indicator and any other items required to complete the pressure
measuring system.
t) Pressure transmitter shall be rugged in construction and shall be suitable for
continuous operation. Pressure transmitters shall be designed for operation over
130% of full range.

u) Pressure transmitters shall be suitable for field mounting. They shall provide 4-20
mA DC output proportional to pressure. Transmitter output shall be isolated and shall
be suitable for transmitting over long distance. Pressure transmitters shall have high
degree of weatherproof protection as specified in technical particular.
v) Pressure sensor shall be capable of operating in the range of pumps discharge
pressure, and be of the diaphragm type. It shall be provided complete with impulse
tubings, fittings, two valve manifold with drain cock/calibration valve. Local and
remote display units shall be provided
9.11.2 Pressure Sensor & Transmitter
Sensor : Diaphragm Sensor 2 wire type
Wetted parts material : SS 316
Range : Adjustable over full span
Zero & Span Adjustment : Required
Output signal : 4-20mA, DC
Enclosure Protection : IP 65 of IS 13947 (Part I)
9.11.2.1 Display Unit

Remote display Unit : Digital panel meter with 3½
digit backlit LCD/LED, ±
0.25% accuracy, high and
low alarm set point, input 4-
20 mA D.C.
9.11.3 Pressure Switch
w) Electro-mechanical pressure switch shall be provided to detect high pressure in the
common discharge header of the pumping station.
x) The pressure switch shall have a manually adjustable set point and differential
switching level. The switch shall be provided complete with impulse tubing, two
valve manifold with drain cock/calibration valve, fittings etc.
i. Type : Non-Indicating
ii. Sensing Element : Bourden/Bellows
iii. Switch type : Microswitch
iv. Set pressure : Adjustable
v. Accuracy : ± 1% of span
vi. Switch Contacts : 2 NO + 2 NC
vii. Switch Rating : 24 V D.C., 2A
viii. Wetted parts material : SS 316
9.11.4 Pressure Gauges

y) Pressure gauges shall comply with IS 3624/ BS 1780. Glycerin filled dial shall be
provided where the gauge is subjected to pressure pulsation and/or vibrations. The
internal parts of pressure gauge shall be stainless steel.
z) Pressure gauges shall be provided on discharge of each pump and compound pressure
gauges shall be provided on suction of each pump. Pressure gauge shall be bourdon
type with a dial size of minimum 150 mm in diameter and calibrated for the required
range. The gauge shall be supplied complete with impulse tubing, two valve
manifold with drain cock/calibration valve, fittings etc. The pressure gauges shall
have an accuracy of ± 1% full scale and weather protection class IP 65. All wetted
parts material shall be SS 316.
aa) The minimum diameter for round pressure gauges shall be 150 mm unless specified
otherwise or where the gauge forms part of a standard item of equipment.
bb) The zero and span of pressure gauge shall not change by more than ±0.1 % of the
span per 0C changes in ambient temperature.
9.12 DATA LOGGERS
Data loggers can also be used for providing an analog signal of 4-20 mA to the PLC from the flow,
pressure and level sensors.
9.12.1 General characteristics
a) The loggers shall be totally sealed with rugged construction and an external power
supply of 240 V AC.
b) The loggers must be equipped with a notepad area for storage of manually entered
information (through PC) such as location details, site observations, job description,
time and date etc. It shall be supplied with an application software which may use the
notepad area for storage of scale factors, pulse significance, range settings etc..
c) The logger shall have communication facility RS232C (IBM PC). The connecting
cable must be of suitable lengths to connect it with PLC.
d) The pressure loggers will be supplied with quick release helical pressure hose to be
installed in pipes.
e) Loggers shall be provided with suitable wall mounting brackets.
9.12.2 Technical Parameters
Item Specifications
Number of channels 8
Input impedence > 300 K-Ohm
Event input Switch Closure or logic pulse, date and time of event stored,
resolution 10 sec.
State input Switch Closure or logic pulse, on state change, date and
time and new state are stored, resolution 10 sec.
Out puts 2 independent digital outputs for traducer power control and
alarm signaling (100 k output impedance)
Display Minimum light triggered eight character LCD
9.13 MICROPROCESSOR BASED ALARM ANNUNCIATOR

9.13.1 General
cc) Microprocessor based alarm annunciators shall be provided for generating audio
visual alarms for each abnormal condition as defined in scope of work. Alarms shall
be initiated by the opening and closing of volt-free contacts which shall remain
unchanged throughout the periods in which the alarm conditions exist. Alarm circuits
shall be capable of conversion from open-healthy to open-alarm or vice versa by a

simple modification after installation requiring no additional parts or special
equipment. Each alarm shall initiate the operation of both visual and audible devices.
The sound intensity of each audible device shall be suitable for the maximum sound
level of its environment. The sequence of alarm should be user selectable by dip
switch.
dd) The operation or acceptance of one alarm shall not inhibit the operation of the
audible device or the flashing of the appropriate alarm indicator if a future alarm
condition occurs.
ee) Alarm circuitry shall be arranged so that spurious or transient alarm states persisting
for less than 0.5 seconds do not initiate any action.
ff) Isolation facilities shall be provided for the hooter using an MCB
gg) Alarm annunciator/indicator legends or labels shall be arranged with three lines of
text as follows :
hh) The annunciator will be split architecture type and the facia will have LEDs.
9.13.2 Technical
Alarm annunciator shall be provided on instrument control panel for annunciation of alarms in
control room. The technical particulars of alarm annunciator are as follows:
(a) Technical Particulars
i. Type : Microprocessor based, split type with alarm
windows mounted on the front door and
electronic modules inside the panel
ii. Mounting : Flush with panel
iii. Construction : Modular
iv. Inputs : Potential free, NO/NC contacts
v. Size of windows : 60 mm X 26 mm
vi. Operating sequences : First up (user selectable dip switch)
vii. Bulbs per channel : 2 (Cluster LEDs)
viii. Push Buttons : For Reset, Accept and Test
ix Hooter : Required, electronic type
x Power supply : 24 V DC/240 V AC
xi. Power supply status : Required indication
xii Weather protection : IP-52 of IS 13947
xiii No. of Windows : 120 Nos. min
9.14 LIGHTNING PROTECTION UNIT (L.P.U.)

Two numbers of lightning protection units shall be provided for each signal loop. The lightning
protection unit shall be suitable for withstanding the surge arising out of high energy static
discharge/ lightning strikes and prevent the instrument from any damage. LPU shall provide three
stages of protection through a gas discharge tube, quick acting semiconductor like Tranzorb, zener
diodes, varistors and an automatic disconnect and reset circuit. LPU shall be a passive unit and shall
require no power for its operation. During a lightning strike it shall clamp on the allowable voltage
and pass the excess voltage to the ground. LPU shall be of self resetting type to minimize the down
time of the measurement loop. LPU shall have a weather proof casing and shall be suitable for
field/back of panel mounting. LPU provided shall be suitable for connecting in 24 V / 48 V, 4-20
mA DC signal lines. There should be total isolation between input, output and ground terminals.
The LPU shall have a minimum surge rating of 10 KA.
9.15 DIGITAL PANEL METERS
Digital Panel Meters (DPM) for pressure and level monitoring shall be microprocessor based and
modular in design. They shall accept 4-20 mA DC signals from transmitters. The DPM'S shall have
backlit LCD/LED display.
9.16 DIGITAL PANEL METERS FOR ELECTRIC PARAMETERS
Digital Panel Meters (DPM) for electric parameters to be monitored shall be microprocessor based
and modular in design. They shall accept 4-20 mA DC signals from transmitters. The DPM'S shall
have backlit LCD/LED display. Digital Panel meters shall be as per relevant Indian Standards of
any other equivalent standards as approved by EIC.
9.17 ANALOGUE SIGNAL MULTIPLIERS
The flow, level and pressure signals shall be provided with back of panel mounted signal
multipliers. They’ll provide loop power with option to select measurement with power and without.
The multiplier will provide 2 outputs of 4-20mA one for the panel mounted indicator and other for
connection to the PLC. There will be total galvanic isolation between field I/Os and also between
the 2 outputs.
9.18 IACC PANEL POWER SUPPLY
a) The IACCP primary power supply shall be derived from the respective LV
switchboard at 240 V AC. Power for the control system shall then be derived from
this source via an uninterruptible power supply (UPS). This shall be sized to provide
sufficient power to maintain communications and the instrumentation systems
functioning for a period of 1hour. The estimated load of I & C and communication
system must be worked out and got approved from Department, before procurement
of UPS.
b) The UPS shall be a proprietary item and shall be free standing. It shall incorporate a
static bypass switch and maintenance bypass in order to permit the removal of the
UPS from service without interrupting the power supply to the control system. An
AC distribution board shall be provided for I&C and communication system at each
PLC station. This AC distribution arrangement can be an integral part of the ICP.
c) In case of primary power failure, the input power to UPS shall be switched
automatically to auxiliary power (DG set) and power all critical elements of the
control system. It shall also sense the resumption in power supply and switch off the
power supply.
9.19 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS) SYSTEM
9.19.1 General Requirement
(i) The UPS shall be floor mounted, self contained and metal clad and shall be
suitable for supplying a non linear load.
(ii) It shall be possible to open the enclosures front door when the unit is in use
without exposing any live contact touch.
(iii) The UPS shall be on-line type incorporating minimum six pulse rectifier
and pulse width modulation inverter technology with microprocessor
control. It shall incorporate a static bypass switch that shall operate in
event of UPS failure, overload or manual initiation in order to transfer the
output supply to mains without disturbance to the output supply.
(iv) The UPS shall incorporate a DC under voltage trip circuit to
electromechanically trip the UPS output in order to protect the batteries.
(v) The noise level of the unit shall not exceed 60 dB(A) at 1 m from the UPS
cabinet.

(vi) The output of the inverter shall be a sine wave having less than 2% THD
for linear loads and less than 4% for 50% non linear loads. It shall be
suitable for load power factors 0.7 lag to 0.9 lead.
(vii) The unit shall have a dynamic response such that 100 % step load causes
an output voltage transient of less than ±4% with a recovery of less than
4ms. The load crest factor shall not be less than 3:1.
(viii) Indicators shall be provided for the following
• UPS status
• PS alarm conditions
(ix) The UPS shall provide volt free contact outputs for the following purpose :
• Warning, (viz., low battery voltage)
(x) The UPS shall have an overloaded capacity of 150% for 30 seconds and
shall be protected in the event of a short circuit of the output.
(xi) The batteries shall be housed, within a separate matching battery cubicle
suitable for location adjacent to the UPS. The batteries shall be of the
rechargeable, sealed maintenance free lead acid type. The battery supply to
the UPS shall be via a fused load break switch disconnecter circuit breaker.
The battery recharge time to 90% of full charge shall be approximately ten
times the discharge time at full load.
(xii) Terminals shall be shrouded to prevent accidental contact.
(xiii)
9.19.2 Technical specifications of UPS
The Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) System with SMF Lead Acid battery shall conform to the
minimum following specifications:
A. Input
Input Voltage : 230 V, ± 5%
Frequency : 50 Hz ± 5%
Nominal DC input : Bidder to design and
(Battery) submit calculations
B. Output
Output : 230 V,
Regulation mode : ± 1%
Load power factor : 0.8 to unity
Duty : Continuous
Ripple on DC : < 2%
C. General
Principal of operation : Shall be solid state,
pulse width
Modulation (PWM)
Cable entry : Bottom
Cooling method : Forced air
Type of Battery : Sealed Maintenance free
9.19.2.1 IACCP System Voltages
The following voltages shall be used for the control system:
TABLE 1.1
Item Voltage
Instrumentation power supplies 240 V AC / 24 V DC
PLC input-output modules 24 V DC
PLC input-output circuits/loops 24 V DC
The 24 V shall be derived from the UPS backed 240 V supply within the control panel by
providing a regulated DC power supply unit.
9.20 IACCP SYSTEM PROTECTION
All circuits shall be protected against short circuit by the provision of adequate numbers of
miniature circuit breakers of 10KA sec level.
For ease of maintenance and system security power supplies to each instrument loop and each PLC
module shall be protected with an individual MCB .
9.21 CABINETS FOR FIELD INSTRUMENTS
A Cabinet shall be provided for enclosing instruments and associated accessories which are
mounted outside the control panel such as transmitter, LPU, terminal blocks etc. at all measurement
locations.
It shall be fabricated from cold rolled steel with powder coating sheet of standard gauge and shall
be suitable for wall mounting or pedestal mounting as required.
The cabinet shall conform to IP-65 protection and shall have built in locking facility. The cabinet
shall be earthed properly. A steel plate/pipe, as per the requirement, shall be provided in the cabinet
for mounting the instrument and accessories.
9.22 INSTRUMENT POWER SUPPLY CABLES AND INSTRUMENTATION SIGNAL
CABLES
Cables shall be capable of satisfactorily withstanding without damage, transportation to site,
installation at site, and operation under normal and short circuit conditions of the various systems to
which the respective cables are connected when operating under the climatic conditions prevailing
at the site as indicated in this specification.
Cable joints in instrument signals and power supply cables shall not be permitted.
Cables shall be capable of satisfactory performance when laid on trays, in trenches, conduits, ducts
and when directly buried in the ground.
Cables shall be capable of operating satisfactorily under a power supply system voltage variation of
±15%, a frequency variation of ±5.0% .
9.22.1 Instrumentation Cables
9.22.1.1 Cables for Digital Signals and Power Supply to Instruments
660V/1100 V grade multicore cables, multistranded high conductivity annealed 1.0 sq.mm stranded
tinned copper conductor, extruded PVC insulated, with aluminium mylar tape, ATC drain wire run
continuously in contact with aluminium tape, inner sheathed with extruded PVC, armoured with
galvanised steel wire overall sheathed with extruded PVC conforming to IS:1554 & IEC:189 Part
II.
9.22.1.2 Cables for Analog Signals and Signals from Temperature Sensors
660 V/1100 V annealed, tinned, high conductivity 1.0 sq.mm stranded copper conductor extruded
PVC insulated two/three cores twisted into pair/traid, laid up collectively, individual pair/traid
shielded and overall shielded with aluminium mylar tape, ATC drain wire run continuously in
contact with aluminium side of the tape, inner sheathed with extruded PVC, armoured with
galvanised steel wire, overall sheathed with extruded PVC conforming to IS:1554 & IEC:189 Part
II.
9.22.1.3 Laying Of Cables

A distance of minimum 300mm shall be maintained between the cables carrying low voltage AC
and DC signals and a distance of minimum 600mm shall be maintained between cables carrying HT
and LT signals. In outdoor areas, the cables shall be directly buried. Each instrumentation and
power supply cable shall be terminated to individual panel/ terminal box. Identification of each
cable shall be by proper ferrules at each junction as per cable schedule to be prepared by
Contractor.
Cables shall be laid in accordance with layout drawings and cable schedule which shall be prepared
by Contractor and submitted for Engineer's Representatives approval.
All cable routes shall be carefully measured and cables cut to the required lengths, leaving
sufficient amount for the final connection of the cable to the terminals on either end. Various cable
lengths cut from the cable reels shall be carefully selected to prevent undue wastage of cables. A
loop of 1 meter shall be left near each field instrument before terminating the cable.
Cables shall be complete uncut lengths from one termination to the other.
All cables shall be identified close to their termination point by cable numbers as per cable
interconnection schedules. Identification tags shall be securely fastened to the cables at both the
ends.
Cable shall be rigidly supported on structural steel and masonry, using individually cast or
malleable iron galvanized clips, multiple cable supports or cable trays.
9.23 CHLORINE BUILDING, CHLORINATION, CHLORINE STORAGE

The plan of Chlorine building shall be got approved by EIC. The building shall be constructed in
stone masonry 300 mm thick or 230 mm thick brick masonry in cement mortar 1:4. The roof shall
be of RCC grade M20. The flooring shall be of cement concrete with granolatic topping.
Aluminium doors and windows shall be provided as per drawing approved by EIC.
The contractor shall provide full Chlorine tonners as per scope of work at each pumping station
with construction of sufficient store area with AC/GI sheet shade with 1.5 meter height brick
masonry boundary wall.
A sprinkler system will be installed above the whole storage area. It shall cover the storage area and
1m beyond. It will be directly connected to the main supply pipe. The valve of supply main shall be
installed at a place where it can be operated in case of emergency.
9.23.1 Chlorinators
The contractor shall supply and install Vacuum type floor mounted Chlorinators rating 5 kg/hr at
Jahazpur town headworks and of rating 2 kg/hr at Jahazpur, Pander, Khajoori, Amarwasi and
Kishangarh for rural areas headworks with 100% standby units with booster pumps, safety
equipment, neutralization tank, piping, chlorine gas sensor with hooter complete in all respect in
chlorinator room. Exhaust fans shall be provided in the room. The doors of the room shall open
outward.
The process water for chlorine solution shall be drawn from the pipes coming from the main
pipeline.
The Chlorinators shall be adjustable according to the chlorine requirements. Pressure gauges,
indicating chlorine gas pressure and injector pressure shall be mounted on the front of the
chlorinator and calibrated in metric units.
An injector module to suit the capacity of the chlorinator shall be provided with each chlorinator. A
spring diaphragm check valves (to close injector suction part when the injector is not operating) a
ball check valve or both shall be incorporated in the injector to prevent the back flow of water from
the injector into the chlorinator. The injector has to be designed according to the available pressure
conditions, which are governed by the available head in the backwash water reservoir at its lowest
level. The flow of the injectors shall be controlled with the help of rotameter. If the pressure is not

sufficient a booster pump system with small air vessel shall be provided to increase the pressure to
the required level.
All parts of the Chlorinators, the injector and its accessories shall be of suitable material resistant to
the chlorine (silver, silver plated Hastelloy C, PVC, Teflon, Borosilicate glass, ebonite lined cast
iron).
The Chlorinators and their injectors shall be cylinder/wall mounted with suitable mounting brackets
with anchor bolts. All connections, valves and other parts of the Chlorinators shall be easily
accessible for cleaning, maintenance and repairs. Pipe connections shall be flexible.
The complete chlorinator and injector units shall be piped, and pre-tested as a system with all
necessary valves, inlet connections, gauges and orifice control.
There shall be neither reactor towers nor evaporators. The sets along with booster pumps will be
provided for designed capacity.
Single Line flow diagram with technical data sheet of the offered chlorination plant should be
furnished for approval by Engineer-in-Charge.
9.23.2 Chlorine Tonners
The contractor shall supply full Chlorine tonners with rolling supports –4 nos. each at Jahazpur,
Pander, Khajoori and Amarwasi pumping stations to be constructed for rural areas headworks and
at Jahazpur town pumping stations for urban area and 2 nos. at Kishangarh pumping stations with
construction of sufficient store area with AC/GI sheet shade with 1.5 meter height brick masonry
boundary wall. The chlorine tonners shall be placed on concrete supports with two steel rollers each
for easy rotating of the drums as per relevant IS code. Each tonner shall be provided with pressure
gauge and isolating valve. For loading and unloading of tonners, one HOT of 2 ton capacity shall be
provided and installed by the Contractor at each pumping station.
The contractor shall provide chlorine tonner containers fabricated in general conforming to British
standard or any other specification of foreign origin. The Specifications adopted have to be
approved by Chief Controller of Explosive, Nagpur. The design and fabrication of tonners should
also be governed by Gas Cylinder Rules, 1981.
The contractor also arrange license from C.C.E. Nagpur for Public Health Engineering Department,
Government of Rajasthan for processing more than 5 containers at any time under the Gas Cylinder
Rules 1981.
He shall furnish all test certificates pertaining to the tonner containers issued by the inspecting
authority and approval by the C.C.E. Nagpur.
He shall also supply proper size spanners for opening and closing of tonner valves, adapted and
clamp and copper tube connector with each first time chlorine filled tonners.
The General Specifications of tonners shall be got approved by Engineer-in-Charge. The tonners
should be fitted with standard valves conforming to IS: 3224-1979, which should also be approved
by C.C.E. Nagpur.
Inspection and Testing:
Authorized inspector from any one of the following shall test and inspect tonner containers during
manufacturing and afterwards, as required under adopted specifications and approval procedures of
C.C.E. Nagpur:
i) Lloyd’s Register of Shipping
ii) Box Council Pvt. Ltd.
9.23.3 Operation of water and booster pumps for the chlorinators

The water supply shall be made from the internal system. The pressure shall be boosted by two
centrifugal booster pumps to be installed in the Chlorine Building, adjoining to the chlorination
room.
At least two pumps shall be supplied with isolating valves and the pressure gauges on delivery and
suction line and valves by pass with pressure release valve from delivery to suction for each pump.
The pump shall be connected to the common pipe fed from the back wash water tank. The pumps
shall be identical and suitable for single and parallel operation.
The pumps shall be directly coupled to drive motor by flexible couplings. The pump and the drive
motor shall be mounted on a common base plate of steel. Foundation or ground bolts shall be
supplied for each base plate.
The drive motor shall be of horizontal spindle, totally enclosed fan cooled squirrel cage motor and
shall be manufactured, tested and provided with insulation to class E or better. The rating of the
motor shall be at least 25% higher than the maximum power required by the pump over its operating
range. The operating voltage of drive motor shall be 415 volts, 3 phase, 50 Hz.
9.23.4 Chlorine and solution pipes
The gas and water piping system shall be designed according to the chlorine and injection water
flows and the hydraulic/pressure conditions. The pipes shall be laid as straight as possible on the
shortest route from the drums to the Chlorinators. They shall be fixed on well supported trays /
brackets and adequately sloped to allow for drainage. All steel supports shall be heavily painted in
chlorinated rubber paint.
The connections of the chlorine gas pipes to the cylinders and the Chlorinators shall be coiled for
flexibility during operation and maintenance. Each connection shall have a valve, a solenoid valve
and a pressure gauge. All pipes and valves of the connection shall be placed out of the reach of gas
cylinders hanging on the hook during manipulation.
Pipe material for the chlorine dosing plant
Medium Construction material Test pressure

Chlorine gas soft seamless copper tube 25 kg/cm²
with compressed fittings
Injector water (with or without Galvanised iron pipes and 10 kg/cm²
boosting) fittings, class C
Chlorine solution Rigid PVC pipes and 10 kg/cm²
fittings, class 3, not exposed
to open sunlight
After installation, the chlorine gas piping system shall be cleaned and dried. After drying,
the system shall be pressurised with dry air up to the test pressure and tested for leaks by
application of soapy water to the outside of all joints and connections. Leaking joints shall
be repaired, and only when all joints are made leak proof chlorine gas shall be gradually
introduced and the system shall again be tested for leaks.
The pipes for water and chlorine solution shall be tested with water with the respective test
pressure.
9.23.5 Chlorine Leakage control system and security equipment

For the detection of excess concentrations of chlorine in the air of the chlorinator room and the
chlorine storage area leak detection devices are to be provided at suitable sites. Two levels of
detection are envisaged:
Level of detection of chlorine leakage

Detection level Action Installation site and
number
Chlorine concentration at or Indicator lamp, acoustic alarm at 1 for drum storage
below the level of human the chlorine plant and at the main area
perception: control room; automatic start of 1 for chlorinator
Concentration level 1mg/l, emergency exhaust fans room
adjustable between 1 and 5 mg/l
Abnormally high concentrations Indicator lamp, acoustic alarm at 2 for drum storage
which could occur on leakage or chlorine plant and at main control area
failure of the chlorinating room; automatic opening of
equipment: valve of sprinkler system; closing
Concentration level 5 mg/l of chlorine valves, closing of
injector water valve
The Contractor shall provide following safety equipment at each chlorinator room, as a minimum:
f. canister type respirators with full face coverage masks suitable for chlorine
gaseous atmosphere - min. 2 no.
g. spare canisters for the respirators - min. 2 no.
h. self contained compressed air breathing apparatus complete with working
whistle and two spare air cylinders - min. 2 no.
i. a facility to recharge the compressed air cylinder or from a self contained
machine.
j. protective clothing such as PVC overall and gloves and rubber boots shall be
provided - min 2 sets.
The safety equipment supplied as per scope of work shall be stored in glass fronted non-locking
steel cabinets so that any deficiency in the equipment shall be apparent. 15 m hoses DN 1" with jet
and spray nozzle and valve are provided near the chlorine drum storage area in non locking steel
cabinets. They are connected to the process water system. The cabinets shall be located at strategic
places near the storage area with view to easy and safe accessibility in case of chlorine leakage.
Neutralization Tank
One neutralization tank of reinforced concrete shall be provided in the maintenance bay.
The capacity should be adequate to neutralize full two-chlorine tonner. The tank should be
suitably projected above the floor to prevent the entry of floor washings. It should be filled
with suitable neutralizing agent such as caustic soda (NaOH). The opening of the tank
should permit to place the chlorine tonner into it in any position. It’s top should be covered
with some thin plywood type cover which can be broken up easily in the emergency by the
tonner itself. The tank should be lined from inside with suitable material so that the
chemicals may not have any aggressive effect. The position of the tank should be such that
the tonner can be dumped into the tank easily by using the OHT crane for lifting the
damaged tonner.
Alternatively chlorine scrubber with suitably placed exhaust fan and piping can also be provided
with flow of water and caustic soda solution from the top of scrubber. The capacity of exhaust fan
should be suitable for exhaust of full tonner chlorine in gaseous form with chlorine air ratio of 1:3.
9.23.6 Operation and control of the chlorine dosing plant

A dedicated control Panel shall be provided in the chlorination control room. The operation of the
chlorination plant is as follows:
Operation of the chlorine dosing plant
Operation Chlorination
regulation of the chlorine rate Manual according to flow
regulation of the process water Manual
stop of chlorine gas flow Manual
stop of injector water Manual; automatic when chlorine pressure low (gas
drums empty) or in case of leaks
stop of chlorine flow at the Manual
chlorine drums
acoustic alarm Automatic in case of leakage in the chlorinator
room or in the chlorine storage area; low chlorine
level/ high chlorine level
Continuous fans in chlorinator Manual; running continuously linked to the
room emergency power supply system
Start chlorination Manual

0 SPECIFICATIONS FOR ANCILLARY CIVIL WORKS & CAMPUS

DEVELOPMENT
10.1 GENERAL
This part of specifications cover, development of campus areas of pump houses, CWRs and ESRs
to be constructed in the contract.
The specification for material/workmanship and lighting, campus works etc. shall be in conformity
to the specifications laid down in the chapter of “ Specifications of Civil Works” in this volume of
the bid document.
10.2 Preparatory Work
The proposals presented in this tender document are based on departmental concept. The details of
the morphology are to be checked by the Contractor before making the final layout plan of the units
of the head works / where the reservoir etc., are to be located. The head works land has to be graded
as per the approved site plan during execution so as to provide good landscaping and to avoid
flooding of campus areas. Whenever there is an abrupt change in levels the sides/boundaries of the
land allotted shall be neatly dressed with side slopes 1V: 3H. Surplus earth, if any, shall be disposed
of as per directions of the Engineer-in-Charge.
The Contractor shall provide and maintain a benchmark with a level and at a location approved by
the Engineer in Charge. All levels shall be deemed to refer to that benchmark. The Contractor may
establish other secondary benchmarks on the site.
During all stages of preparation, design and construction the Contractor has to cooperate with the
other Contractors working on the same site.
10.2.1 Topographical Survey
Before taking up the works of planning head works details, a detailed topographical survey shall be
conducted of the head works and surrounding areas. The extent of survey shall be governed by the
nearest drainage point for effluent out of the campus through campus drainage system.
Topographical and contour maps shall be prepared for the entire head works area and the drainage
out let point to scale agreed with the Engineer in Charge. The topographic map shall show all
existing details at head works.
The contour maps shall be prepared with contour interval of 0.25 meter for all head works.
10.3 CAMPUS DEVELOPMENT
The campus area of head works is to be developed which includes landscaping, construction of
boundary wall, providing drainage system, providing gates, plantation of trees etc.
10.3.1 Preparatory Works
The contractor shall undertake the following works
Approval of design & drawing of civil structures
(i) Approval of developmental plans and landscaping
(ii) Drainage plans & designs
(iii) Other designs / plans required for campus area development
10.3.2 Boundary Wall and Gates
Construction of Boundary wall (average height 1.2 meters above ground with wire fencing over
wall as per the conceptual drawing given in the drawing) all along the periphery of the acquired
land, and providing and installation of One Main gate, complete in all respect. The Wall, wherever
necessary must be designed for protection against steep slopes. The boundary wall shall be made in
RR stone masonry in CM 1:4 and shall be plastered inside with 25 mm thick in CM 1:4 and
pointing shall be done outside, the base concrete of cement concrete mix 1:4:8 of minimum 100
mm shall be provided. The top of wall shall be provided with 75 mm thick RCC coping in M15.
Minimum Gates size shall not be less than 2.4 meters x 1.2 meters.
10.3.3 General grading of Campus areas
The ground levels of the campus areas shall be properly graded as per the landscaping plan
approved. The landscaping shall be done considering the existing contour of the land and to avoid
proper drainage of the campus, providing adequate leveled area for different units to be housed in
the campus.
10.3.4 Horticulture and Land Scaping
Landscaping shall be done according to the topography of the area and should be planned so as to
make the campus a focal point. All the open areas must be covered by horticulture activity. Shadow
trees must be planted at a maximum distance of 30 m c/c along the periphery of the campus area.
1.0.1.1. Digging Holes for Planting Trees:
Holes or circular shape in ordinary soil shall be excavated to the dimensions ordered by the
Engineer-in-charge and shall be manured with powered neam/caster oil cake at the specified rate
alongwith farm yard manure or sludge shall be uniformly mixed with the excavated soil.
1.0.1.2. Tree Guards
The concrete tree guard of 5’ height shall be provided as specified by Engineer-in-charge.
The planted trees, etc. so developed shall be maintained in good condition during the execution and
maintenance period of the contract without any additional costs. The contractor shall ensure the
safety of plants and shall take all the activities such as re-plantation, manuring, use of pesticides,
matching, cutting etc. for growth of trees / plants and maintenance of plants.
10.3.5 Drainage System
Suitable drains of required capacity and size shall be constructed by contractor after getting
approval by the department. The approved drains must be provided all along the roads and to carry
other sullage wherever required, upto the nearest natural drain. Septic tanks of suitable size shall be
constructed for the pump house buildings and J-2 type quarters to be constructed under this
contract.
10.3.6 Parking Areas
Quarry rubbish parking areas shall be constructed within each campus area of pumping station in
available space. Minimum thickness of the quarry rubbish shall be 150mm.
10.4 INTERNAL ROADS
The internal roads shall be made in the campus of all headworks.
10.4.1 Scope of Specifications
This part of the specifications shall apply to all such road and CD works as are required to be
executed under the contract. It shall cover site clearance, construction/ preparation of earthen
embankment, sub grade, sub base (granular), base course, semi dense bituminous surfacing, CD
works, pipe culverts, shoulder construction, tack coat, and other associated civil works and
maintenance of the constructed road for 10 years. Contractor shall construct internal campus road of
3.75 Mtrs total width at all headworks with all associated CD and other works. In case of any
discrepancy or undefined specification, the MORTH specifications shall prevail. All road
structures, if otherwise not specified shall be constructed in accordance to the provisions and
principals laid down in the IRC publication 13.
The components of road construction work shall include following but not limited to:
10.4.2 Excavation
Making excavation for roadwork or Preparation of earthen embankment as per relevant clause and
preparation of sub grade as per relevant.
The sub-grade whether in cut or fill shall be well compacted to utilize its full strength and to
economise thereby on the overall thickness of pavement required. A top 50 cm portion of the road
way shall be compacted upto 100% of standard proctor density. In water logged areas, the level of
formation shall be above flood level at least by about 0.6 to 1.0 meter.
10.4.3 Sub- base
150 mm thick Sub-base will be laid in two equal layers of 75 mm consisting of quarry rubbish
material (may consist of materials like natural sand, moorum, gravel, laterite, kankar, brick metal,
crushed stone or any other material like stabilized soil which remain stable under saturated
condition) shall be consolidated /compacted to required grade & camber by power road roller 8-10
tonne weight including watering to attain 95% proctor density.
10.4.4 Base course

150 mm thick base course of water bound macadam shall be provided in two layers as follows:
a) Bottom Layer of WBM 63-45mm Grading-II (Type B, Hand Broken)- 75mm thick to water bound
macadam specification as per clause 404 of 'MoRTH' specification for road and bridge works
(Fourth Revision) including cost of material & water with all leads, spreading in uniform
thickness, hand packing, rolling with road roller 8-10 tonnes in stages to proper grade and camber
applying and brooming requisite type of screening/ binding material to fill up the interspaces of
coarse aggregate, watering and rolling making necessary earthen bond to protect edges, lighting,
guarding, barricading and maintenance of diversions (Compacted thickness as specified to be
measured)
b) Top layer of WBM 53-22.5mm Grading-II (Type B, Crusher Broken)- 75mm thick to water
bound macadam specification as per clause 404 of 'MoRTH' specification for road and bridge
works (Fourth Revision) including cost of material & water with all leads, spreading in uniform
thickness, hand packing, rolling with road roller 8-10 tonnes in stages to proper grade and camber
applying and brooming requisite type of screening/ binding material to fill up the interspaces of
coarse aggregate, watering and rolling making necessary earthen bond to protect edges, lighting,
guarding, barricading and maintenance of diversions (Compacted thickness as specified to be
measured)
10.4.5 Bituminous Surface Courses

It shall consists of
1) Application of primer coat over prepared surface of granular base with bitumen emulsion as
per IS 8887 and manufacturer’s specifications @ 7.5Kg /10 Sqm with a self propelled or towed
bitumen pressure sprayer equipped far spraying the material uniformly at specified rates and
temperatures (including cleaning of road surfaces) as per MoRTH specification clause 502, 112.
2) Application of Tack coat over prepared surface with bitumen emulsion as per IS 8887 and
manufacturer’s specifications @ 2.75Kg /10 Sqm with a self propelled or towed bitumen pressure
sprayer equipped for spraying the material uniformly at specified rates and temperature (excluding
cleaning of road surface) as per MORTH specification clause 502,112
3) Providing and laying 20mm thick open grade premix carpet with CRMB-60 and specified
graded crushed aggregates for wearing coarse including cost of antis tripping compound, to bring
the stripping value of aggregate within permissible limits as per specification, including loading of
aggregates with F.E. loader, heating binder and aggregates in hot mix plant 30 to 40 tonne
transporting the mix material with tipper and laying with paver finisher to the required level and
grade, rolling with power road roller 8-10tonne but excluding cost of tack and seal coat with all
lead of mix material as per MoRTH specification cl.511.
4) Providing & applying premixed seal coat type-B comprising of thin application of fine aggregate
including cost of antis tripping compound to bring the stripping value of aggregate with an
permissible limits as per specification, premix with bitumen binder @ 6.8 kg/10sqm in mini hot
mix plant, carriage manually of mixed material and laying and rolling with power road roller 8-
10tonne as per MoRTH specification cl 513
10.4.6 Shoulder Construction

150 mm thick Shoulder for road shall be 1.875 m wide on both side of road, shall be treated with
granular sub-base having proper drainage arrangement.
10.4.7 CD Works
To provide effective drainage across the road at all natural rivers, Nallahs and in areas where
impounding of water is suspected, the contractor shall design and provide required cross drainage
structures as per specification of IRC -13. The provided structures must ensure safety of their
foundation and protection of Nallah/river/road banks in embankment.
10.4.8 Methodology and Sequence of Work
Prior to start of the construction activities at site, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer-in-
Charge for approval, the detailed construction methodology including mechanical equipment
proposed to be used, sequence of various activities and schedule from start to end of the work.
Programme relating to pavement and shoulder construction shall be an integrated activity to be
done simultaneously in a coordinated manner.
10.5 CONSTRUCTION OF RESIDENTIAL AND OFFICE BUILDINGS
Six J-2 type quarter of minimum 65 sqm shall be constructed at various headworks. The contractor
shall submit the detailed drawings with required designs showing details of fittings, sanitary and
water supply pipelines, drainage arrangements and electrical drawings for the approval of Engineer-
in-Charge.
The plinth of the buildings shall be kept at least 0.60 meters above the campus road level. The
minimum specification of the various components of the building shall be as given below.
10.5.1 Technical Specifications For Office Buildings And Residential Quarter
S. Type of Quarter J-2 Type Qtr.

No.
1 Base concrete for 1:4:8, 30cm thick
foundation
2 Masonry in foundation RCC framed structure
and plinth
3 Damp proof course 1:2:4 R.C.C. minimum 75mm Tk.
4 Superstructure Brick Masonry in CM 1:4 23cm thick
5 Lintels sun-shades etc. R.C.C. lintels & sun shades as per approved drawing.
6 Roofing R.C.C. Roofing as per approved design with water

proofing admixtures approved by Engineer-in-Charge.
Roof Treatment Brick Bat Coba
7 Interior Finish (Cement 25mm in CM 1:6.

Plaster)
8 Exterior Finish 20mm Cement plaster 1:4 / Cement sand plaster as per
approved drawing
9 Flooring
a With CC 1:3:6 base Soling Stone with C.C. 1:3:6 base concrete
b Finish Living and Drawing - Terrazo

Gallery/Stairs/Kitchen/Toilets - Kota Stone
10 Skirting and dados 10 cm. Height of same material as used for floors &
glazed ceramic tiles in toilets upto lintel level
11 Windows (frame, Steel Section window as per design
panels, wiregauging,
safety bars)
12 Doors (Frames and Frame - pressed steel section
shutter) Shutters - Flush door 38 mm
13 White/ Colour/Cement Internal Finishing- Oil bound distemper
lime/ Decorative Finish External Finishing – Cement based Paint
14 Painting of doors, Synthetic enamel paint on steel members and spirit
Windows and walls polish on wooden members
15 Electrification (type of PVC concealed conduit wiring as per approved
wiring, fittings and drawing and specifications. 16 A and 6 A ampere
fixture) switches shall be taken as per requirements, in all
S. Type of Quarter J-2 Type Qtr.

No.
rooms and main board with MCBs and earthing
protections shall be installed for each unit.
16 Sanitary & Water
Supply
(I) Indian WC In all toilets
(ii) European WC In attach toilets with room
(A) Wash Basins One no. at common space
(iv) Sinks Steel sink
(v) Other accessories As per approved drawing
17 Other Specification PVC frames & shutters in Bath rooms/Toilets
18 Special fitting and
fixture
a Fans In every Room
b Tubelight In every Room
c CFL In every Room
d Exhaust fans Kitchen / Bathroom
e Coolers In every Room
10.6 SPECIFICATION FOR FURNITURE

Executive Table –
Godrej or Equivalent make table frame of 25x25 mm tubular section of 16 gauge ERW MS pipe,
with standard size two drawer on right side operate on precision made slides, using 22 gauge MS
sheet. Tabletop of 18mm thick particle board laminated with veneer top (shade to be approved by
EIC) and back panel having teal wood beading all around. Drawers to be provided with suitable
locking arrangement.
Size – 2135 mm x 865mm - height 735mm
Table –
Godrej or Equivalent make table frame of 25x25 mm tubular section of 16 gauge ERW MS pipe,
with standard size two drawer on right side operate on precision made slides, using 22 gauge MS
sheet. Tabletop of 18mm thick particle board laminated with veneer top (shade to be approved by
EIC) and back panel having teal wood beading all around. Drawers to be provided with suitable
locking arrangement
Size- 1675mmx865mm - height- 750mm
Computer Table –
Godrej or Equivalent make table frame of 25x25mm tubular section of 16 gauge ERW MS pipes 'C'
frame designed with sliding keyboard on nylon rollers. Table top and sliding board of 18mm pre-
laminated particleboard with PVC lipping.
Size -73 mm(w) x 88 mm(D) x 75mm(H).
Printer table –
Godrej or Equivalent make table frame of 25x25mm tubular section of 16 gauge ERW MS pipes 'C'
frame designed on nylon rollers. Tabletop and sliding board of 18mm pre laminated particleboard
with PVC lipping.
Size-73mm(w)x77mm(d)x75mm(h)

Revolving chairs with arms-

Godrej or Equivalent make chair with revolving seat on tubular pipe frame of 25mm diameter ERW
MS pipe of 14 gauge having high back with push back system and PU arms on five pronged base
with ball coaster and pneumatic seat height adjustment. Moulded PU foam on seat and back and
covered with good quality tapestry, colour & quality of tapestry shoed be used as approved by EIC.
Size-66mm(d)x66mm(w)
Height - 102.5mm-114.5mm
Seat height - 44mm-56mm
Visitor chair –
Godrej or Equivalent make chair made of 25mmx25mm tubular section of 14 gauge, 25mm
diameter ERW MS pipe of moulded PU foam on seat & back with upholstered seat and back by
good quality tapestry as approved by EIC.
Size-46mm(w)x82mm(h)
Seat height – 45 mm
Steel Almirah –
Godrej or Equivalent make office storewell made from high quality CRCA steel of 20 gauge having
anti rust treatment equipped with Godrej precision lock and four adjustable shelves with powder
coated finish of following sizes:
1980mmx915mmx485mm (Big)
1270mmx765mmx440mm (Small)
Filing cabinet –
Godrej or Equivalent make 4 drawer lateral filing cabinet made of premium quality CRCA
corrosion resistant steel of 20 gauge with 25mm teak wood table top and powder coated finish.
Drawer should be moved on precession balls slides with anti tipping and anti-rebound mechanism
provided with full length drawer pulls.
Lockers –
Godrej or Equivalent make industrial locker of 18 doors size 284mm(h) x 274mm (w) x 485mm (d)
made of 20 gauge premium quality CRCA anti corrosive steel fitted with Godrej precision lock,
handle and label holder.
Drawing cabinet –
Godrej or Equivalent make cabinet should made of premium quality corrosive resistant 20gauge
steel. A seamless, integral casing should farmed through careful welding of sheet metal
components. Drawers should be smoothly moved on a accurately fabricated precision slides having
nylon rollers. Drawers should be fitted with label holders, continuos pull out handles, and multi
lever Godrej lock with anti tipping and anti rebound mechanism.
Overall dimension - 625mm(h) x1170mm (w) x865mm (d)
Drawer dimension - 65mm(h) x1040mm (w) x780mm (d)
No. of drawers - 6
Meeting / conference table –
Conference table and chairs for 15 persons sitting, made of 1st quality teak wood. Design and
drawing for table to be got approved by EIC. Sitting chair shall be made of teak wood & moulded
PU foam on seat & back with upholstered seat and back by good quality tapestry as approved by
EIC.
Ordinary cane chair -
Godrej or Equivalent make made of 25mm diameter tubular MS ERW pipe of 14 gauge seasoned
teak wood seat and back with canning without arms, cantilevered chair duly polished and painted
and using half round canning.
43mm(w) x 57mm(d) x 88.5mm(h)
45mm seat height

Side racks –
Godrej or Equivalent make made of 35x35mm ERW MS angle section with five shelves. Shelves
material should be 20 gauge ERW MS sheet.
5 tier - 1800mmx900mmx375mm

11.0 PRE-DISPATCH INSPECTION
11.1 PRE-DISPATCH INSPECTIONS AND TESTS

The contractor shall submit a Quality Assurance Programme (QAP) for each item for approval of
Engineer-in-Charge. Actual manufacturing shall start only after approval of QAP.
It is proposed to get the equipment and material listed in the table below, inspected prior to
dispatch for work site through third party/project consultants/departmental engineer(s).
S. No. Equipment/Material
1. MS/DI/BWSC/uPVC/HDPE Pipes
2. MS/CI/DI/BWSC/uPVC/HDPE specials
3. All Valves
4. Dismantling Joints
5. Expansion Joints
6. Gear box and Electric Actuators
7. Dual Plate Check Valves
8. Surge Protection Equipment
9. All pumps and motors above 10 KW
10. EOT Crane and Manual Monorail Hoist
11. Transformers
12. Vacuum circuit breakers
13. Isolators
14. CT, PT & LA
15. Switch Yard Control Panel
16. LT Panels
17. Capacitor Panels
18. DG Set
19. Battery Charger
20. Chlorinator
21. Electromagnetic Flow Meters
22. Ultrasonic Flow Meters
23. Instrument Control Panels
24. Important equipment/instruments of PLC/SCADA system

The Contractor shall notify Engineer-in-Charge at least 4 weeks in advance for carrying out
the Pre-Dispatch inspection, and tests before the dispatch of materials. Failure to Pre-
Dispatch inspection/tests, the contractor shall be liable for all costs incurred against such
dispatches. No material scheduled or notified for pre-dispatch shall be accepted until
inspection/tests have been successfully carried at manufacturers or other selected premises
and the inspection report has been approved by Engineer-in-Charge and he has given
consent for dispatch of material.
In addition to the pre-dispatch inspections, the Engineer-in-Charge may ask for additional
certificates from manufacturer to satisfy with the quality of material used and for the
compliance to respective standards.
For all materials and equipments not listed above, the contractor shall produce
manufacturers test certificates for material, performance, efficiencies, workmanship and
standard compliance etc. as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge, to satisfy with the quality
of the material to be received.
The Engineer-in-Charge may also ask for Pre-Dispatch inspections for any other item(s)
not shown in the list of items requiring pre-dispatch inspection, for which the contractor
shall make necessary arrangements, without any additional costs to the Department.
1.1 11.2 Testing and Inspection Of DI/BWSC/uPVC/HDPE/MS Pipes
& Specials
The department's representative/representative of third party inspection agency shall be
stationed to witness the manufacturing and all the tests mentioned in the Chapter of
Specifications for Pipeline work. The pipes or specials will only be dispatched after
necessary certification by the Department's representative. The Engineer-in-Charge may
also ask for repetition of some tests, even after successful testing by the department's
representative in his presence or in front of a third party authorised by the Department. The
contractor in such cases will co-operate and provide all necessary facilities for re-testing,
without any additional costs to the Department.
All pipes will be tested at the factory test pressures in accordance to the relevant IS codes
for respective material.
1.2 11.3 Inspection and Testing For Butterfly Valves
Provision for pre-dispatch inspection with respective items are given in Chapter of
“Specifications for Valves”.
During testing there shall be no visible evidence of structural damage to any of the valve
component.
a) The following test shall be carried out for butterfly valves:
1. Seat leakage test at rated pressure
2. Body hydrostatic test at 1.5 times the rated pressure
3. Disc strength test at body test pressure
4. Valve operation with and without actuator
5. For effort Required in manual operation of valve
6. Crack opening test under tension
7. Other tests specified in BS 5155
8. General construction features of gear box as per requirement given in
relevant Chapter.

1.3 11.4 Inspection and Testing For Sluice Valves

component. Following tests shall be carried out.
a) Seat leakage test at rated pressure
b) Hydrostatic test at 1.5 times the rated pressure
c) Valve operation with and without actuator
d) For effort Required in manual operation of valve
e) Other tests specified in IS 14846
f) General construction features of gearbox as per requirement given in relevant
Chapter.
11.5 Inspection and Testing For Dual Plate Check Valves
component.
b) Body hydrostatic test at 1.5 times rated pressure
c) Other tests specified in API 598
11.6 Inspection and Testing For Air Valves
component.
b) Operation
c) As per relevant ISS
11.7 Inspection and Testing of Pumps
The performance and hydraulic tests of the clear water pumps shall be made with their
respective duty motors and frequency drive. The following inspections/tests shall be carried
out:
1. Performance Test As per IS 5120 & IS 9137 at reduced speed as
approved by Engineer-in-Charge.
Head v/s Discharge characteristic
Power absorbed v/s Discharge
Efficiency v/s Discharge
2. Visual Inspection Pumps shall be offered for visual inspection before
shipment. The pump components shall not be painted
before inspection.
11.8 Inspections and Testing Of Manual Monorail Hoist & EOT Crane
Performance Test: 125% overload test, deflection test and speed tests shall be conducted
for crane at manufacturer’s works.
11.9 Inspection Of Motors

Motors over 10 KW site rating shall be subject to full performance tests, (including Power
factor) which may be witnessed by the authorised person/agency of the department at the
Motor manufacturer’s works. These motors shall be tested coupled with the actual pump to
be supplied. Motors of 5.5 KW to 10 KW site rating shall be subject to performance tests but
will not be witnessed. Motors under 5.5 KW site rating shall be subject to “type test”
standards. Type test certificates that shall include the following shall be provided for all
motors:
a) Motor testing shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of IS 325.
b) Acceptance Tests - Full load test to determine efficiency, power factor and slip
shall be conducted on all the motors. No negative tolerance shall be permitted on
the tested motor efficiency
c) All type test certificates conducted on similar motors.
11.10 Inspection of Transformers and Switchyard Control Panel
Power transformer – All routine tests as per IS 2026.
All type test certificate conducted on similar transformer to be forwarded for
review.
All routine tests on switchyard control panel.
All type test certificate conducted on similar switchyard control panel to be forwarded.
11.11 Inspection of Vacuum Circuit Breakers
All Circuit Breakers will be tested as per IS 2516 and:
1. Routine tests including H.V. pressure test, milli-volt drop (Ductor) tests;
2. To ensure operation of the D.C. closing coil and satisfactory closing of the circuit
breaker with the voltage on the coil down to 80% of its rated voltage, and that mal-
operation does not occur with a voltage on the coil of 120% of its rated voltage.
3. To ensure the satisfactory trip operation of the circuit breaker at no load conditions
with the trip coil energized at 50% of its rated voltage.
4. The test figures for heat-run tests performed on identical panel types shall be made
available.
11.12 Inspection Of LT Switchgear
All routine tests on 0.44 KV panel
All type test certificate conducted on similar panels to be forwarded.
11.13 Inspection of LT Distribution Panel, Capacitor Panel and other Panels
All routine tests on all panels.
All type test certificate conducted on similar panels to be forwarded.
11.14 Protection and control circuits

Based on the completeness of the circuits in the final manufactured form within the
manufacturer’s works, the following tests shall be carried out:
a. Primary injection tests to ensure correct operation of the current operated protection relays
and direct acting coils over their full range of settings.
b. Balanced earth fault stability tests by primary current injection. Care must be taken to
reproduce accurately the burdens of interconnecting cables. A further test to ensure correct
polarity must be made after assembly.
c. With differential pilot wire schemes it may not be possible to apply primary injection
testing. In this case the circuits shall be proved by secondary injection. Current transformer
characteristics and calculations associated with the above tests shall be available for
inspection by the Engineer.

d. Tests on auxiliary relays e.g. Buchholz auxiliary, at normal operating voltage by operation
of associated remote relays.
e. Correct operation of control circuits at normal operating voltage by operating voltage by
operation of local control switches, and simulation of operation from remote control
positions.
11.15 Other Equipments
All the items listed below shall be inspected before dispatch for the general requirement of
testing in the standards to which they conform, the Department’s requirement as given in the
specifications, the general arrangements and for workmanship.
a) Expansion Joints
b) Gear box and Electric Actuators
c) Surge Protection Equipment
d) Chlorinator
e) Piping and Specials
f) Communication System Equipment
g) Capacitors
11.16 Manufacture’s certifications
In addition to the items listed below, the Department may ask for relevant certificates of the
manufacturer for any item supplied in the contract.
11.16.1 Cables
All cables supplied under the Contract shall be subject to routine tests in accordance with the
relevant Indian ISS. Cables will not be accepted on Site for installation until certificates
giving proof of compliance with the Specification and details of tests results have been
received and approved by the Engineer-in-Charge. A certificate shall be applicable to each
drum. The tests to be carried out on every drum at manufacturer’s premises shall include:
a. High voltage A.C. insulation pressure test between cores, each core to earth
metallic sheath or Armour as applicable;
b. Insulation resistance test;
c. Core continuity and identification;
d. Conductor resistance test.
11.16.2 Process Control and Indicating Instruments
All flow, level and process measurement controllers, transmitters, recorders, indicators,
vacuum and pressure gauges shall be subject to routine tests in accordance with the relevant
ISO/IS. Test Certificates and the copy of the applicable code of practice shall be provided
against each item of equipment.
11.16.3 Electrical Equipments
Tests to ensure the compliance to respective standards shall be provided for the Isolators,
MCB’s, relays, fuses post insulator and lightening arrestor and other electrical equipments.
11.16.4 Electrical Measuring Instruments and Meters
Tests shall be undertaken in accordance with the relevant ISO/IS to ensure accurate operation
of all meters such as Ammeters, Voltmeters, Frequency Meters, Power Factor Meters, KW,
KWh & KVAR meters and multi functional meters.
11.17 PLC & SCADA SYSTEM

All relevant tests on PLC & SCADA system shall be carried out in accordance with the
relevant IS/ISO or any International code followed in manufacturing and testing of such type
of equipments to ensure their accurate functional requirements as narrated in the tender
specifications/scope of work.

12.0 TESTING, COMMISSIONING & TRIAL RUN
12.1 INSPECTION AND TEST AFTER ERECTION

In addition to the progressive supervision and inspection by the Engineer-in-Charge the Contractor
shall offer for inspection to Engineer-in-Charge, the complete, work executed and its Parts on
which tests are to be carried out. After such inspection by Engineer-in-Charge, each
equipment/subsystem shall be tested by the Contractor in accordance with the applicable standards
in the presence of Engineer-in-Charge.
It is not the intent to specify herein all details about the commissioning activities. However the
commissioning checks in brief are given as guidance. The pre-commissioning test results shall be
documented for record purposes and compared with the shop test certificates.
12.2 TEST INSTRUMENTATION
All required test instrumentation, for the performance and efficiency tests, shall be supplied by the
Contractor and shall be retained by him, upon satisfactory conclusion of all such tests at the site. All
costs associated with the supply, calibration, installation and return of the test instrumentation shall
be included in the contract price. The test instrumentation for the performance tests shall be in
accordance with the code. All test instrumentation shall be as per Indian Standards as approved by
the Engineer in Charge. All calibration procedures and standards shall subject to the Engineer in
Charge's approval. Batch calibration will not be accepted.
1.4 12.3 Pipe Line
The sectional testing of DI, BWSC, HDPE/MS and uPVC pipelines (as the case may be) shall be
done as per provisions laid in the respective Chapters along with the laying of pipelines. The tested
pipeline will be joined by gap pieces to complete the total physical completion of works. The
maximum length for sectional testing in case of DI, BWSC, HDPE/MS and uPVC pipelines shall be
3 km.
The laid pipeline will be joined with respective manifold through valves. Just before the
commissioning the complete transmission main will be checked for:
a) All the manual/motorised valves in the system will be inspected for proper lubrication,
manual and electrical operation.
b) All air valves shall be inspected for proper fitting and operation of isolating valves.
c) All flange joints will be checked for tightness of all bolts, clamps, etc.
d) The entire transmission mains shall be checked for proper soil cover.
e) The structures will be checked for any constructional defects.
f) The valve chambers and their surroundings will be checked for its cleanliness.
g) The surge protection devices for their locations and chamber cleanliness
12.4 MECHANICAL
The erection, piping and wiring of each item shall be checked as per approved drawings, vendor’s
drawings, wiring schematics and cable terminations. If any minor modifications are noted, they
shall be incorporated in the appropriate “as built” drawings.
12.4.1 PUMPS
12.4.1.1 PRE-COMMISSIONING CHECKS
a) Check name plate details
b) Check tightness of all bolts, clamps, etc.
c) Check alignment of the pump and motor
d) Inspect the bearings visually and check that adequate lubrication has been
applied.
e) Confirm that the shaft is free and it is possible to easily rotate the shaft by
hand.
f) Check that the pump glands have been filled and tightened adequately.
g)
Ensure that the driver run tests have been successfully completed and the
direction of rotation of the driver is proper.
12.4.1.2 COMMISSIONING CHECKS
a) Couple the pump with the driver.
b) Open the suction valve of the pump slowly and allow the pump to slowly prime.
Keep the vent valve/cock open, until all air has been completely expelled and the
pump is flooded with water. If required the discharge valve of the pump may be
slightly opened and then closed subsequently.
c) After ensuring that the pump has been primed satisfactorily, the discharge valve is
closed and the suction valve is open, start the pump momentarily and stop it.
d) Check if the pump is making any abnormal sound and that acceleration and
deceleration of the shaft is smooth.
e) If found normal, the pump can be put on an eight hour trial run. For the trial run
make necessary arrangements for the discharge of the pump. During this trial run,
note down regular observations regarding the discharge pressure, bearing
temperature and bearing vibrations.
f) Check the alignment of the pump and motor.
12.4.2 VALVES OF ALL KIND
a) Check dimensional details and alignment
b) Check tightness of all bolts, joints, etc.
c) Check manual operation; in case of motor driven valves check electrical operation
d) Check for duration of full closure and opening cycles
a) Check operation in the starting and stop routine of the related pumps
b) Check for operation from control panel
c) Check for leakage of shaft glands, joints
12.4.3 SLUICE GATES
12.4.3.1 SEAT CLEARANCE CHECK
With the gate fully closed, the clearance between seating faces when checked with the thickness
gauge, shall not exceed 0.1 mm.
12.4.3.2 MOVEMENT TESTS
Each gate shall be shop operated three times from the fully open position to the fully closed
position and return to fully open, under no flow conditions to demonstrate that the assembly is
workable.
12.4.3.3 LEAKAGE TESTS
With the gate in closed position design pressure shall be applied for a period not lesser than 5
minutes to the unseating side of the sluice gate and the leakage shall not exceed the maximum
leakage permissible as per IS 15349.
12.4.3.4 HYDROSTATIC TESTS.
Finally a differential of one and a half times the design pressure shall be applied to the unseating
side of the gate. Under these tests no part shall show any deflection of deformation.
12.4.4 MANUAL MONORAIL HOIST
a) Long travel – Gantry length: Confirm level of both the strands within +/-2 mm.
b) Check that head clearance between crab and underside of roof is maintained
throughout full length of travel.
c) Confirm/check that column diaphragm plate is bolted properly
d) Check grouting condition, packer plate position.
e) Check tightness of all bolts, clamps etc.
f) Check that grounding connections have been properly connected.
g) Check that Bearings are in a good condition and are properly lubricated.
h) Open the terminal box and check that the connecting terminals are secure and the
clearance between the terminals is adequate.
i) Cross travel to be checked for parallel movement.
j) Rope drum and rope connections; check fixed securely with no kinks in rope.
k) Check gear box oil level/grease lubrication for all required points.
l) Check movement of hook block.
m) Confirm operation of brakes.
n) Pendant check.
o) Operate crane on “No Load”.
p) Check installation is free of vibrations and brake shudder.
a) Standard load test.
b) Standard overload test.
c) All operations through panel and pendant.
d) Manual traveling tests for long travel, cross travel,and electric hoist, micro-hoist
operations.
12.4.5 INSPECTION AND TESTING OF DEWATERING P UMPS
Routine Tests for performance, including automatic operation with variation in sump levels.
12.5 ELECTRICAL
The contractor shall arrange to carry out all tests are as per IS Specification to the satisfaction of the
EIC. The contractor will ensure that all works connected with the line and electrical plants have
been completed correctly as per Indian Electricity Rules and procedure. Any extra cost involved
due to incompleteness of work or bad workmanship found but subsequently, shall be set right
forthwith by the contractor at his cost.
12.5.1 TEST ON MOTORS
12.5.1.1 PRE-COMMISSIONING TESTS

a) Check that motor name plate details are as per the approved vendor drawings
and factory test reports
b) Check tightness of all bolts, clamps etc.
c) Check that earthing connections have been properly connected.
d) Check that bearings are in a good condition and are properly lubricated.
e) Open the terminal box and check that the connecting terminals are secure and
the clearance between the terminals is adequate.
12.5.1.2 COMMISSIONING TESTS
- Insulation resistance test of motor windings and cables.
- Continuity check for power and control cables.
- Winding resistance measurement in case of motors rated 55 kW and above.
- Control, interlock and protection schemes.
- Operation and setting of timer, in case of Star Delta starters.
- Phase sequence and rotation.
- No load trial run for observation of vibrations, temperature of bearings etc.
- On load operation, starting and running load current (also observe vibrations &
temperature).
- Operation of timer in case of star delta starters
12.5.2 TEST ON TRANSFORMERS
12.5.2.1 PRE- COMMISSIONING CHECKS:
i) Compare nameplate details with the specification.
ii) Check for any physical damage, in particular of bushings and cleanliness of
bushing.
iii) Check for tightness of all bolts, clamps and connecting terminals.
iv) Check for oil leakage and oil quantity and quality, positions of valves in oil lines,
removal of trapped air in oil lines and any oil leaks.
v) Breather conditions, check whether breathing line is free, silica gel is reactivated,
oil is available at the bottom.
vi) Check for clearances.
vii) Water tightness of terminal boxes.
viii) Check for all necessary minimum phase to phase and phase to earth clearances as
per the respective voltage level.
ix) Check for breather line, reactivation of silica gel if required and availability of oil
at the bottom of breather, acting as a seal.
x) Earthing of transformer tank and neutral.
xi) Ensure that all cooler and header valves are open.
xii) Check that the transformer is correctly installed with reference to its phasing.
12.5.2.2 COMMISSIONING TESTS :
i) Test oil for dielectric strength, tan delta, acidity, resistivity and dissolved
gases, Insulation resistance test of windings.
ii) Capacitance and tan delta test of condenser type bushings, before assembly.
iii) Test the transformer for the following :
• Voltage / turns ratio at all the taps.
• Winding resistance at all the taps.
• Short circuit impedance (at low voltage)
• Magnetic balance.
• Core loss at normal tap at low voltage.
• IR and PI.
iv) Vector group test.
v) Phase sequence test.
vi) Test the current transformers for following :
• Continuity test.
• Polarity test.
• Insulation resistance test.
• Magnetization characteristics.
• Rough ratio test ( if busing CTs provided prior to mounting of busing)
• Measurement of secondary winding resistance.
vii) Line connection as per phasing diagram.
viii) Winding resistance.
ix) Insulation resistance of control wiring.
x) Buchholz relay operation (for alarm and trip).
xi) OLTC control indicating and alarm circuit.
xii) Operation test of all protective devices (electrical and mechanical) and
interlocks.
xiii) Calibration of temperature indicators (oil and winding) and temperature relays.
12.6 TESTS ON CONTROL PANELS & SWITCHBOARDS
12.6.1 PRE- COMMISSIONING CHECKS:
i) Check nameplate details of every associated equipment according to specification.
ii) Check for physical damage.
iv) Check earthing.
v) Switch developments.
vi) Each wire shall be traced by continuity tests and it should be made sure that the wiring is as
per relevant drawings. All interconnections between panels/ equipment shall be similarly
checked.
vii) All the wires should be meggered to earth
12.6.2 COMMISSIONING TESTS :
i) Checks on relays.
ii) Checks on motors.

iii) Setting of relays, other alarms, tripping devices and interlocks as per scheme.
iv) Phase angle checks, measurement of magnitude and phase angle of current transformer
secondary currents and potential transformer secondary voltage.
v) Functional checking of all power and control circuits e.g. closing, tripping, control,
interlock, supervision and alarm circuits including proper functioning of the component
equipment.
12.6.3 TEST OF RELAYS :
i) Check nameplate details according to specification.
ii) Check for any physical damage.
iii) Check internal wiring.
iv) Megger all terminals to body.
v) Megger AC to DC terminals.
12.6.3.2 COMMISSIONING CHECKS:
i) Check operating characteristics over the entire range by secondary injection.
ii) Check minimum pick up voltage.
iii) Check operation of electrical / mechanical targets.
iv) Relay settings.
12.6.4 TESTS FOR METERS:
12.6.4.2 COMMISSIONING CHECKS:
i) Check calibration.
ii) Megger all insulated portions.
iii)
Check CT and VT connection with particular reference to their polarities
for relevant meters.
12.6.5 TESTS FOR CIRCUIT BREAKERS:
iv) Check oil level, air pressure and leakage (wherever applicable).
v) Check earth connections.
vi) Check cleanliness of insulators and bushings.
vii) Check all moving parts are properly lubricated.
viii) Check heaters provide.

ix) Check ground clearances, creepage lengths, cleanliness of insulator, gas

pressure etc. in case of outdoor 33 kV CB.
x) Check CB truck movement, alignment of male and female connections, fixed
type and draw out type control terminals etc
xi) Earthing connection of each pole in case of outdoor CB panel & scraping earth
of CB trolley in case of indoor switchgear
xii) Operating mechanism kiosk for wiring correctness and functional operation.
xiii) Check insulation resistance between phases and also between phase to earth
when CB is closed. Insulation resistance checking between two ends of each
pole when CB is open. Insulation measurement of control wiring.
xiv) Check alignment of breaker trucks for free movement, check operation of
shutters.
12.6.5.2 COMMISSIONING TEST:
i) Check control wiring for correctness of connections, continuity and IR values.
ii) Manual operation of breaker.
iii) Power closing / operating manually and electrically.
iv) Breaker tripping and closing time.
v) Trip free and anti pumping operation.
vi) IR Values, resistance and minimum pick up voltage.
vii) Contact resistance.
viii) Simultaneous closing and mechanical interlocks provided.
ix) Check electrical and mechanical interlocks provided.
x) Checks on spring charging motor, correct operation of limit switch and time of
charging,
xi) Checks on CTs.
xii) All functional tests.
12.6.6 ISOLATORS
a) Check nameplate details.
b) Check all components for any physical damage or signs of.
c) Check tightness of all nuts & bolts.
d) Check the insulation resistance of each pole.
e) Manual operation of phase blades and earth blades for isolators.
f) Check the contact resistance for phase and earth blade for isolators
g) Check cleanliness of insulator and bushings.
h) Check the clearances between blades in open and closed position of isolator.
i) Check for simultaneous closing of all phase blades in case of isolator
j) Check earthing of isolator/ DOF structure and operating handle of isolator.
k) Check control box with auxiliary contacts of phase blades/ earth blades for
further indication at CP for isolators
12.6.7 TEST FOR CABLES:
iii) Megger test between each core and armour / sheet.
iv) Continuity check.
v) Connections.
12.6.8 TESTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS:
i) Check all closing, tripping, supervision and interlock of control devices.
ii) Check operation of all alarm circuits.
iii) Earthing:
a) Measure resistance of each earth electrode by isolating the same from
station grid as well as from other earth electrodes.
b) Check continuity of grid conductors and wires.
12.6.8.2 COMMISSIONING TEST:
i) Cable Testing: All cables as per rating of motor installed to be high voltage
tested.
ii) In addition to above, any other tests specified by manufacturer shall be carried
out as per manufacturer’s instruction.
12.6.9 TESTS ON CABLES AFTER INSTALLATION
a) Physical checking of cable laying and termination arrangement, including
checking of phase to phase and phase to earth clearances, cable tag number as
per cable schedule etc.
b) Disconnect the cable at both ends and measure the insulation resistance,
continuity of conductor, application of HVDC test particularly only in case of
HT cables.
Check site results against shop test results.
On receipt at site all LT/HT power cables and LT cables shall be checked for quantity and size of
cables, the continuity test between two ends of the drum wound cable and insulation resistance shall
be measured before accepting the material. These test results shall be documented for record
purposes and compared with the pre-commissioning results.
Witnessed high voltage pressure tests shall not be carried out on PVC/SWAPVC control cables, but
it shall remain the responsibility of the Contractor to test the insulation of these cables both between
cores and between cores and earth during installation with a ‘Megger’ 500 volt hand generator. The
Contractor shall test all cables after installation to ensure correct phasing out of cores, continuity of
cores sheath and armour over the whole length of the cable.
12.6.10 EARTHING SYSTEM TESTS

The Contractor shall demonstrate to the Engineer that the resistance of the electrodes to earth and
the earth conductor continuity is in accordance with the Specification. The tests shall be made on
completion of the installation.
The test shall be performed from each major item of plant, by using an ‘Earth Megger’ and
auxiliary return conductor.
12.6.11 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION - GENERAL
12.6.11.1 FUNCTIONAL CHECKING
Check all operations e.g. open/close/forward/reverse/start/stop etc. as per block logic diagram.
Check all indication circuits.
Check all alarm circuits.
Check all protective devices and their settings, by primary or secondary injection method.
Shorting and earthing of all spare cores of any CT.
12.6.11.2 EARTHING SYSTEM

Measure earth resistance of individual earth pit when isolated from other electrodes/grid.
Check continuity of grid conductor and earth leads.
Make soil resistivity test.
a) Check the entire earth grid resistance with multiple earth electrodes.
b) Check for method of connections for buried grid conductor, earth electrodes
with grid, earthing conductor at grid and earthing conductor at equipment end.
c) Check tightness of all bolts, wherever bolt type fasteners are used.
12.6.11.3 RELAYS
a) Check for relay Tag No., make, type and supply details etc.
b) Check relay circuit connections, CT core used, CT ratio and other parameters,
ferrules for panel wiring etc.
c) Primary or secondary current injection testing of relays for their operation such
as indication/alarm/ control etc. (In case of Voltage element of relays, supply
the circuit by proper voltage.)
d) Insulation resistance.
e) Tightness of all bolts, terminations etc.
12.6.11.4 METERS
a) Check for Tag No., make, type, dial range, ferrules for panel wiring and supply
details etc.
b) Check wiring circuit.
c) Tightness of all bolts, terminations etc.
d) Insulation resistance.
12.6.11.5 LIGHTING SYSTEM
a) Check main circuit connections from Power Distribution Board to local lighting
panels. Also for distribution on emergency or non-emergency bus as per
approved design drawings.
b) Check operation of Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker, located at local lighting
panel (LP).
c) Check all single phase outgoing circuits from lighting panel to lighting circuits,
receptacle circuits etc., for proper wiring and earthing connections.
d) Check all receptacles are properly connected to their control switch and are
properly earthed.
e) Insulation resistance test on wiring of each individual circuit.
12.6.11.6 INSPECTION AND TESTING F OR VALVE ACTUATORS
a) Visual Inspection at site for Dimensional check; operational check minimum 3
operations to be performed.
b) Field Tests at site for satisfactory operation.
12.6.12 TESTING OF CABLES
Before energizing, the insulation resistance shall be measured from phase to phase and phase to
ground.
12.6.13 LOOP CHECKING
After completion of installation and termination, loop checking shall be done by the Contractor in
the presence of the Engineer in Charge or his representative. Standard equipment and instruments,
such as continuity tester, multi-meter etc. shall be arranged by the Contractor and one such set of
checking equipment shall be kept spare at the site office. Contractor to arrange for standard set of
tools and tool-kit bag at the time of loop checking. Loop checking reports shall be made for each
individual loop checking and submitted to the Engineer in Charge and any changes shall be
recorded on reference drawings.
12.6.14 LIGHTING INSTALLATION TESTING
Lighting installation shall be tested as per the instructions of the Engineer in Charge and shall
include but not be limited to the following:
• Measure the insulation resistance of each circuit without the lamps being in place.
It should be not less than 1 M ohms to earth.
• Current and voltage of all the phases shall be measured at the lighting panel
busbars with all the circuits switched on with lamps. If required, load shall be re-
balanced on the three phases.
• Check the earth continuity for all socket outlets. A fixed relative position of the
phase and neutral connections inside the socket shall be established for all
sockets.
• After inserting all the lamps and switching on all circuits, minimum and
maximum illumination level shall be measured in the area with an approved
industrial lightmeter. Contractor shall supply an approved luxmeter for testing at
no extra cost.
12.7 INSTRUMENTATION
12.7.1 SITE CALIBRATION
Standard calibration procedures shall be used for calibrating all field instruments. All reference
equipment, used for calibration, shall be certified from an authorised certifying agency, to be
arranged by the Contractor at his own cost. At the time of calibration, standard calibration norms
shall be adopted and the same will be documented for record purposes.
Calibration shall be performed in the presence of the Engineer in Charge or his representative. The
instrumentation shall be calibrated while being commissioned. The Contractor will monitor and
check the instrument calibration throughout the Operation and Maintenance period.
12.7.2 INSTRUMENTATION INSTALLATION & PRE -COMMISSIONING CHECKS

a) Check the exact location of the instrument with reference to the Pipe &
Instrumentation diagram and/or the General Arrangement drawing.
b) Check the model No. and instrument type with reference to the technical
specification requirements.
c) Check all mounting and fixing arrangements and required accessories such as
isolation valve, nuts & bolts, siphon etc.
d) Check that the instrument installation is as per the installation drawing.
e) Check the cable type, connections for power supply as well as signal cables.
f) Check the loop continuity for every circuit. While this is being done, the power
supply to the instrument shall be cut-off.
g) Site calibration of the instruments shall be compared with the manufacturer’s
factory test reports.
h) After switching on the instrument/system, it shall be monitored hourly and the data
obtained shall be recorded and compared with the reference norms to ascertain
whether any recalibration is required. If recalibration is required it shall be carried
out using standard reference equipment/instruments at no extra cost.
12.7.3 INSTRUMENTATION COMMISSIONING
a) Each control loop and interlock shall be tested independently, in manual mode. The
operation shall be checked for conformity with the approved block logic in both
modes.
b) Annunciation system shall be checked as performance testing by simulating the
condition and by passing in actual mode and then individual loop will be checked for
annunciation system. All motorised valves shall be checked in manual mode first,
from controls on the control panel and feed-back from the field for valve on/off shall
be checked on the mimic and panel. All pump control ON/OFF shall be checked in
manual mode first.
12.7.4 Control Panel
a) Check name plate details of every piece of associated equipment for conformity
with the specifications.
b) Check the tightness of all bolts, clamps, connecting terminals.
c) Check for physical damage.
d) Check cleanliness
e) Check earthing
f) Check switch development
g) Each wire shall be traced by continuity tests and it should be confirmed that wiring
is as per the relevant drawings. All interconnections between panels/equipment
shall be checked
h) Megger test on all wires.
i) Check on meters
j) Check that the primary devices are set as per the system requirements.
k) Checks on the control circuit for the functional requirements
12.8 TESTS FOR WATER TIGHTNESS OF WATER -RETAINING STRUCTURES
The water tightness test should be done as per specification given in relevant chapters of the T.D.
Following satisfactory completion of the tests the Contractor shall empty the structures and dispose
of satisfactorily the contents. He shall clean and disinfect the structures and any equipment therein
of all deposits left by the testing.
12.9 PLC & SCADA SYSTEM
Various tests, which are essential to fulfill the contract requirements, shall have to be carried out
upon discussion with EIC or as suggested by expert agency/ TPI.
12.9.1 DOCUMENTATION
Set of documents shall be prepared and maintained by the Contractor and one set of the latest
revised documents shall always be kept at site. The following documents shall be prepared &
submitted by the Contractor:
• Data sheets for instrument specification and selection
• Instrument Schedule
• Instrumentation schedule
• Instrumentation cable schedule
• Loop drawings for instruments in the field and control panel
• Instrument test and calibration report
• Instrument installation drawings
• As built drawings and G.A. Drawings for equipment and instrument installation
The Contractor shall keep on site, two sets of the latest revised Operation, Maintenance and
Calibration manuals for all field instruments and sub systems, annunciation system, data loggers,
indicating controllers and PLC system etc.
12.10 PERFORMANCE TESTS AT SITE
12.10.1EXECUTION OF THE TESTS
As soon as possible after the equipment has been installed and after physical completion of the
work, performance tests shall be carried out as per relevant test requirements and mutually
agreed/specified Codes and Standards. These tests may repeat the tests carried out at the
manufacturer's works and/or his sub-vendor/sub-contractor's works and any other tests the Engineer
in Charge may require in order to determinate that the equipment and works are in accordance with
the specifications and guarantees.
Performance tests for individual items of Equipment, shall be conducted on all equipment supplied
by the Contractor.
Performance test to determine the percentage losses in the filter plant shall be conducted after
performance tests for individual item has been done. The procedure to carry out the tests shall be
got approved from Engineer-in-Charge.
A program for conducting the performance tests shall be submitted to the Engineer in Charge, for
approval, at least fourteen days before the commencement of the tests.

If the Contractor so desires, the equipment may be run for a reasonable time, immediately before
the performance test is conducted. A request for this run, stating duration and operating point must
be made, in writing to the Engineer in Charge at least three days before the performance test.
During the period of any test, the conditions shall be held as steady as possible, compatible with
safe and effective operation.
The power consumption of all continuously running auxiliary equipment shall also be measured and
recorded during the performance tests.
After the results of the performance tests have been submitted to and approved by the Engineer in
Charge, a summary of the test readings and the performance calculations shall be incorporated in
the final version of the Operating and Maintenance Instruction Manuals.
12.10.2REJECTION OF THE SYSTEM OR SYSTEM COMPONENTS
If the performance tests indicate the computed values of performance parameters have deviated
from the guaranteed values and the Contractor is unable, within 21 days or such extension of time
as may be allowed by the Engineer-in-Charge, to remedy/rectify such deficiency, then the
Engineer-in-Charge shall have the right to reject the component or the system.
12.11 COMMISSIONING
12.11.1GENERAL
After successful checks and after erection and pre-commissioning tests, the entire system shall be
commissioned by the Contractor.
During commissioning, the Contractor shall supply all material and labour to supervise, operate,
keep in operation, adjust, test, service, repair and do all the things necessary to keep the System
running to the satisfaction of the Engineer in Charge. This shall include labour on a 24 hour-a-day
basis during the test period and for such other period of continuous operation, as the Engineer in
Charge may consider necessary to establish the efficient operation of the System.
Vibration, noise levels and alignments shall be checked and noted for record purposes.
If any test results/operations show noticeable variation from the Specification requirements for the
System or any particular item of the System, the Contractor shall immediately take steps to rectify
the deficiency without any extra cost to Department.
12.11.2SYSTEM COMMISSIONING
The Contractor shall be responsible for trial runs, testing and commissioning of the entire system
under design and operating conditions or under conditions which the Engineer in Charge may
define and which in no case shall exceed the design and operational conditions. The System
commissioning shall commence after the work has been physically completed to the satisfaction of
the Engineer in Charge. The design and operation conditions are as follows:
a) Supply from the HT/LT feeder
b) Design capacity of the pumps
c) Starting of pumps against closed/ open valves
d) Stopping of pumps after closure/ opening of delivery header valves
e) Power cut and sudden stop of all pumps under design flow conditions
f) Closing of the line valves against full static pressure
g) Operation of all valves (manual and motorised/ manual)
h) Operation of all air valves
i) Operation of surge protection devices
j) Operation of level switches
k) Operation of Manual Monorail Hoists

l) Operation of drain sump pump
m) Operation through switchgear
n) Operation of all measuring instruments
o) Operation of the entire system through PLC/SCADA/IACCC
The timing of the commissioning tests will depend on the availability of raw water and power.
The Contractor shall prepare the entire system for the execution of the tests complete with all
required taps, branches with blank flanges, etc. All these provisions have to be of a durable nature
so that the tests can be repeated even after several years. He has to provide all the equipment for the
execution of the tests and for the measuring and recording of:
a) Pressure at various points within the pump station and the pipeline, precision 1
m (0.1 bar)
b) Head losses across different valves and fittings
c) Overall energy efficiency of the pumping system at the prescribed flow rates
d) Performance of the non-return valves
e) Voltages, currents obtained in various circuits/ prime movers/variable frequency
drives
f) Other tests required for the verification of the performance data of the pump
station system in conjunction with the pipeline system
g) Loss of water in mains
h) Functioning of PLC system/SCADA System
The Contractor may engage an institution for the execution of the required tests and their
monitoring at his own cost. The institution has to be approved by the Engineer in Charge.
The system shall be treated as commissioned only when the entire system has been successfully
operated over a period of time as follows:
• 36 hours uninterrupted, continuous running at design flow/ flow notified by
Engineer-in-Charge or
• Short duration operation of 8 hours with a 8 hour stop and a further 4 hours
pumping totaling 12 hours working per day for a three day period, at design
flow/ flow notified by Engineer-in-Charge.
Any repairs or replacement required during this period shall be done by the Contractor at his own
cost.
The Contractor shall allow for commissioning to be conducted at any time during the O &M Period
without extra charges under the Contract.
The operation of the system solely for the purpose of maintaining partial supply by or on behalf of
the Department shall not be taken as evidence that any work has fulfilled the commissioning tests,
or has been taken over unless the Engineer-in-Charge specifically states so in writing.
12.12 TRIAL RUNS

The Contractor shall run and maintain the System for 30 days at a stretch, or any other stipulated
periods and conditions prescribed by the Engineer-in-Charge, from the date of commissioning.
During the trial run all components of the system must function in a synchronized manner so as to
give all desired outputs at efficiencies guaranteed or as stipulated in the specifications, failing

which the Engineer-in-Charge may extend the period of trial run, till a date the entire system
functions to the complete satisfaction of Engineer-in-Charge.
Standard test reports shall be compiled at all stages of installation, pre-commissioning and
commissioning. Any modifications or changes shall be incorporated and marked on the respective
reference drawings and the Engineer-in-Charge shall be advised.
The necessary protocol must be maintained for record purposes, jointly with Engineer-in-Charge
and/or the authorised Representative of the Department.
12.13 PERFORMANCE DURING OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE PERIOD
The Department reserves the right to carry out further tests to check the performance and efficiency
of the units at the end of the O&M period. Such adjustments to the units, as may be considered part
of normal operating routine, shall be carried out prior to these tests.
Should the results of such repeat tests, carried out by the Department, indicate that performance
values deviate from guaranteed values or the auxiliary power consumption exceeds 1.0% of
guaranteed value, then the Contractor shall be given the opportunity to take corrective measures and
carry out further tests, all at his own expense. Should the test indicate performance and auxiliary
power consumption values below the guaranteed value then the Contractor’s security deposit may
be forfeited.

13.0 SPECIFICATIONS FOR OPERATION & MAINTENANCE
13.1 GENERAL
This section of specifications applies to the specifications of materials used for operation and
maintenance, the workmanship, period for routine maintenance, maintenance of records, and
responsibilities during operation and maintenance period.
The scope of O&M for 10 years and during dfect liability period shall include operation and
maintenance of all works executed at all 06 no. headworks under this contract, O&M of all transfer
mains, cluster rising mains and distribution mains, internal village distribution system (with all pipe
appurtenances) of 213 villages of Jahazpur and Kotri Tehsil and Jahazpur Town, O&M of all
reservoirs (CWRs/ESRs), PSPs, CWTs constructed under this contract. Maintenance of existing
distribution lines of Jahazpur town shall also be done by the contractor without operating
them. The contractor shall maintain skilled staff and sufficient inventory of spares and material
from the day one of O&M as specified in this Document and as per good engineering practice to
ensure elimination partial/complete break down periods and minimisation of repair/replacement
periods.
13.2 SPECIFICATIONS
The specification of materials used for repairs shall be the same as used in the original work during
execution. If not used during execution, specifications for such materials, which were not used
during construction shall be got approved by the department, prior to commencement of operation
and maintenance period and must be incorporated in the O&M manual. Without being limited by
this clause, during O&M period, the contractor shall use appropriate material for repairs even if the
material required for such repair is not approved earlier, and no delay in repairs shall be subjected
to such limitation. But subsequent to such use of material, the contractor shall submit proposals for
the approval of the specifications of such material. The submissions and approval of material shall
be done in accordance to clause 10 of special conditions of contract. The approved material, will
subsequently form a part of the O&M manual.
13.3 EXPERIENCE AND QUALIFICATION OF STAFF

For all operation and maintenance works, the contractor shall provide skilled staff, who has
adequate qualifications and sufficient experience of similar works. The minimum qualifications and
experience required for minimum staff to be deployed by the contractor should be as given in
Scope of Work.
13.4 LUBRICATION
A complete schedule of recommended oils and other lubricants shall be furnished by the
Contractor, in the operation and maintenance manuals. The number of types of lubricants shall be
kept to a minimum. In case of grease lubricated bearings for electric motors, lithium base grease is
preferred.
The Contractor shall indicate the brand name of indigenously available equivalent lubricants with
complete duty specification, in the O&M manual. The Contractor shall also furnish the schedule of
quantities for each fill, frequency of filling and annual requirement in O&M manual.

Where lubrication is effected by means of grease, preference shall be given to a pressure system,
which does not require frequent adjustment or recharging. Frequent, for this purpose means more
than once in a month.
Where more than one type of special grease is required, a grease gun for each special type shall be
used.
All lubricant systems shall be designed so as not to cause a fire or pollution hazard.
The Contractor shall supply flushing oil for such lubrication system when an item of plant is ready
for preliminary running.
13.5 SPARE P ARTS
All spare parts used for the equipment in the maintenance of the system must be from the
manufacturer of the equipment or if the equipment itself has been made with parts of other
manufacturer the parts must be of the same type & make as used in the equipment shall only be
supplied and installed.
All spare parts shall be packed for long storage under the climatic conditions prevailing at the site.
Each spare part shall be labeled on the outside of its packing with its description, number and
purpose and, if more than one spare is packed in a single case, a general description of the case
contents shall be shown on the outside and a packing list enclosed.The used spare part shall be
replenished within minimum possible time and this time shall be decided with EIC.
13.6 PARTICULAR REQUIREMENTS DURING O&M

The workmanship observed for all repairs and maintenance work must be in accordance to “Good
Engineering Practices”.
13.7 PIPELINE
The specials, pipe sections used must have thickness as per design requirement at the point of
installation and shall be coated internally and externally if specified. The rubber gaskets/rings, nut
& bolts etc. to be used shall be as per revelent specifications.
After each repair the damaged coating of pipes must be repaired and if in trench conditions, the
trench must be filled with approved soil so as to provide requisite cover.
Stretches along pipe alignments as already specified in pipe specification, fixity /thrust blocks
where cover is washed out or removed due to other reasons must be rehabilitated so that the
required cover is always maintained.
All cracks in pipe supporting structures, valve chambers and their edges must be racked, filled and
made good with cement sand mortar 1:2. Damaged outer coating / inner lining shall be repaired as
per specifications. The contractor to ensure daily patrolling of pipe line with maintenance of log
sheet for record of leakage(s) detected and removed ,and recording of hourly flow data from
individual pump at all headworks. These data shall be made available to all control rooms daily by
the incharge patrolling, stationed at every head work.
13.8 PUMPING STATION AND ALL OTHER BUILDINGS

The O&M activities to be carried out at each pumping station shall include but not limited to items:
-
♦ Maintaining everyday observations including meter readings of all electromagnetic meters
installed at pumping stations.

♦ Chlorination of water in CWR as per requirement for which liquefied chlorine shall be provided
by the contractor as per yearly designed demand given in scope of work.
♦ Routine maintenance of the pumps and motors as per recommendation of the manufacturers.
♦ Routine maintenance of the entire control system and instruments as per recommendation of the
manufacturer.
♦ The contractor shall be responsible for keeping SCADA system fully functioning for all times.
Suitable arrangement shall be made for preventing loss of data during any break-down.
♦ Replacement of damaged control, communication and power supply cables.
♦ Repair/replacement of all instruments such as flow meters, pressure gauges, level-sensors, float
levels, temperature scanners, vibration and noise meters along with all other equipments. The
down time of any individual instrument as referred above shall not exceed 12 hours.
♦ Periodic calibration of all measuring/metering equipments and resetting of all relays at every
sixth month.
♦ To maintain all consumables for printing without any additional cost to the department.
♦ To produce and submit daily and monthly customized reports from each pumping station using
SCADA system.
♦ Repair/replacement of damaged electrical equipments/parts for proper functioning of electrical
system.
♦ Maintenance of cooling and lubrication system.
♦ Replacement of bearings, neck rings, and impeller rings; shafts, sleeves/bushes, damaged
impellers etc. and other damaged parts so that the operation of pumps ensures the guaranteed
efficiencies with desired noise and vibration levels.
♦ Routine & periodic maintenance of the cranes as per recommendation of the manufacturer.
♦ Breakdown maintenance of all electrical, mechanical & instrumentation equipment etc.
♦ Re-painting of the exposed mild steel pipeline specials pumps, motors, valves, ladders, railings
and steel structures like entry gate, grating etc in the P.S. campus in the 3rd , 5th , 8th and 10th
years of O&M to keep them in good shape.
♦ Repainting of lighting poles and structures and other electric equipment in the 3rd, 5th, 8th &
10th year of O&M.
♦ Repainting annually suction pipeline projected in sump including bell-mouth, sluice gates,
trash-racks, level gauges and other steel structures in contact with water.
♦ To keep the surrounding areas of the pumping stations free from shrubs, grass and other
vegetations.
♦ To maintain/ shorten the gap uniformly between neck and neck ring of all pumps as per
recommendation of the manufacturer.
♦ Be responsible for maintaining the required Power Factor at all the pumping stations.
Additional capacitor banks shall be added wherever required due to de-rating or otherwise. The
contractor shall add capacitance by additional capacitors with all loads, so that average monthly
power factor remains not less than 0.96. Contractor shall be liable for recovery of power factor
surcharge billed by AVVNL for his failure to maintain power factor. No claim against incentive
given by AVVNL for maintaining PF above 0.95 shall be admissible to contractor.
♦ Easing of doors and windows, monsoon repairs to roofs, attention to drains, rainwater spouts
attention to plinth protection.
♦ External white or color wash, external or internal painting, internal distempering, within the
campus.
The frequency of repairs must not be less than as specified below:
S. No. Nature of Repair Frequency of Repair

6. External finishing of residential quarters, In the 5th & 10th years of O&M
office buildings and pump houses (cement
based paint) after attending minor repairs such
as damage to plaster, pointing etc.
7. Internal finishing of residential quarters, In the 5th & 10th years of O&M
office buildings and pump houses (distemper)
after attending minor repairs such as damage
to plaster, floor etc.
8. Painting of woodwork & steel works In the 5th & 10th years of O&M
including shutters of residential quarters,
office buildings and pump houses.
9. External finishing (cement based paint) after In the 5th & 10th years of O&M
attending minor repairs of all CWRs
10. External finishing (distemper) after attending In the 5th & 10th years of O&M
minor repairs of all ESRs
Following repairs prior to onset of monsoon are essential:

Any faults in the electric installation, leakages, earthing, exposed wire ends and any
hazards on this account to the users/inmates of the buildings, should be taken care
of suitably, wiring, which is damaged or outlived, should be replaced.
Damaged/ Sanitary lines should be replaced and choked lines cleared.
Proper drainage of the area around the building should be ensured to avoid stagnation of
rainwater / effluent, in order to prevent malarial conditions, where courtyards exist
in the buildings, their drainage into the outer drains should be ensured. Any choked
drains should be cleared properly.
Leaking roofs should be attended to immediately with suitable repairs/ treatment, as the
case may be. The rain waterspouts should also be cleared of blockages, etc. The
roof should be swept clean of leaves, debris, and etc. if any.
The plaster on outer walls of the building, which is exposed to weather, should be repaired
before rains in order to prevent dampness inside. Where plinth protection has been
provided, it should be checked and the damaged portions, if any, should be repaired
before rains.
Damaged flooring should be repaired/ replaced as per requirement, in order to prevent
dampness inside the rooms, etc. during rains.

Periodic repairs of damaged floors, door/window fittings, water taps, water coolers,
furniture, desert coolers, electric circuits, must be taken up on complaints using the
material of same quality as used during construction.
13.9 OPERATIONS AND M AINTENANCE MANUAL
The comprehensive manual to be submitted before the operation and maintenance period, i.e.
during execution stage as defined in special conditions, of contract containing the contents as
specified in Chapter – 2 of “scope of work” given in Volume II of bid document, must be
updated, not limited to, on principals listed below:
Up-dating any changes in the procedures existing in the O&M Manual deemed necessary to
be changed due to limitation observed during the maintenance period and
incorporating the procedures for maintenance of other repairs/break downs not
incorporated in the maintenance but faced during O&M period.
Procedures for repair of leaks/burst in pipes must be provided, with supporting drawings as
provided in the O&M manual must be updated if any differences are observed
during O&M contract.
Frequency of spares used in maintenance of valves (air-valve, sluice valves, surge control
devices and butterfly valves), expansion joints, equipment and installed for surge
protection must be recorded for updating the contents of manual.
Record of trouble shooting points and details of events causing troubles (break down’s)
during maintenance of pumps / motors / measuring equipment(s), / electric panels
and accessories therein must be maintained and used for updating the contents of
manual.
Record of locations and type of damages observed during maintenance of road which are of
recurring nature must be used in updating the manual.
The record of Inventory used must be maintained and the relevant portion of O&M manual
must be updated to list out the requirement of Inventory for maintaining the system
for 10 years.
The record of availability of water quantity at all CWRs monitored during every day of the
O&M period must be maintained and handed over after the expiry of contract
period.
The provisions in the manual must incorporate every aspect of good industrial practices
even if not elaborated here or in other parts of the bid documents. The provisions in
the approved operation and maintenance document shall only be valid and binding
for both the parties during operation and maintenance along with the additions and
deletions made.
The manual so prepared must be updated after the end of every year of operation and
maintenance, giving effect to the experience gained and the observations made by
the Department during the maintenance period.
13.10 ROADS
13.10.1 GENERAL
The works shall be carried out in conformity with the relevant Specifications to the required level,
grade and lines using approved materials. The works shall be carried out using light duty machinery
or manual means provided the quality of the end product does not suffer. In execution of
maintenance works, a reference is made to the IRC publications: “Manual for Maintenance of
Roads” and “Code of Practice for Maintenance for Bituminous Surfaces of Highway, IRC 82-1982”
for guidance and compliance wherever applicable. Wherever the Specification is not clear, good
Engineering practice shall be adopted in the construction to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-
Charge.
13.10.2 RESTORATION OF RAIN CUTS

This part of specifications are for earthwork for restoration of rain cuts in the embankment and
shoulders, using suitable material, and compacting the same.
MATERIALS
The material used for restoration of rain cuts shall be got approved from Engineer-in-Charge and
shall in general be as specified for earth work in embankment.
CONSTRUCTION OPERATION
The area affected by rain cuts shall be cleared of all loose soil and benched. The width of the
benches shall be at least 300mm and they shall extend continuously for a sufficient length. The
height of the benches shall be in the range of 150-300 mm.
Fresh material shall be deposited in layers not exceeding 250mm loose thickness and compacted so
as to match with the benching at moisture content close to the optimum. Compaction shall be
carried out using suitable equipment such as plate compactors and rammers or by suitable
implements handled manually. The finished work shall conform to alignment, levels and slopes as
indicated in the approved drawing.
13.10.3 MAINTENANCE OF EARTHEN SHOULDER

SCOPE
The work of maintenance of earthen shoulder shall include making up the irregularities/loss of
material on shoulder to the design level by adding fresh approved soil and compacting it with
appropriate equipments or to strip excess soil from the shoulder surface as per the requirement of
this Specification.
MATERIAL
The material to be added to the shoulder, if required, shall be a select soil specified for shoulder
works.
CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURE
Making up of the earthen shoulder by adding extra soil and compacting the same; and/or
Stripping a layer of soil to achieve the required grade and level
Wherever extra earth is required to be added, the earthen shoulder shall be stripped and loosened to
receive fresh soil. The deficiency of thickness shall be made up in layers of loose thickness not
exceeding 250 mm. Water shall be added, if required, to attain the optimum amount and the layer
compacted by 80 to 200 kN smooth wheel roller, vibratory roller, hand roller, plate vibrator or hand
rammer to obtain atleast 94 per cent of the maximum dry density in accordance with IS:2720(Part
8). The finished surface shall have the specified cross slope and line in accordance with the
drawing. The side shall be trimmed to the required slope with the help of grader or manual methods
using hand tools.
Wherever the earth is required to be excavated from the shoulder, this shall be done either using
equipment like grader or by manual means using hand tools. The resulting surface shall be uniform
and have a field density of atleast 94 per cent of maximum density obtained in accordance with
IS:2720 (Part 8). If the surface is not uniformly compacted, it shall be excavated to a depth of
150mm and the soil mixed with water if required and compacted at a moisture content close to the
optimum to achieve 94 per cent of maximum density as stated above.
13.10.4 BITUMINOUS WORK IN CONNECTION WITH MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS

Repairs to pot holes-
Pot holes to be cut to regular geometrical figure and cleared of all loose material.
All dust and loose matter to be cleared by means of wire, coir & hair brushing. Fine dust to be
blown with fanning by gunny bags.
Tack coat @ 0.75 kg to 1 kg per m2 to be laid. R. C. or M. C. cut back bitumen or quick setting
emulsified bitumen to be used.
Stone grit of 12mm size to be filled in & rammed in case of patching by surface painting.
The materials to be used for premixed patch work must be confirming to the specifications used
during construction of road works of respective item given above.
Seal coating with coarse sand to be done @ 0.7 m3/100 m2 of the road surface and rammed/ rolled.
Repairs to broken edges-
Edge line to be marked.
Rope to be shifted to the final edge line and patch repairs to be done as mentioned in para (a) above.
Care should be taken so that proper camber is maintained.
Filling Pot-Holes and Patch Repairs
Scope: This work shall include repair of pot-holes and patching of all types of bituminous surfaces
with a bituminous mix either produced at plant site or at the site itself with manual method of
mixing and placed at site in the pot holes or in patches after trimming the pot-hole or depression to
proper shape and depth, side painting with tack coat and compacting the layer to the required levels.
Materials: The materials used for the pot-hole and the patch repair of bituminous surface shall be
same type as used for the bituminous surface. A mix superior to the one on existing surface can also
be considered appropriate for repair work. An emulsified bitumen mix compatible with the existing
layer shall also be considered appropriate.
The grading of aggregates and bitumen content of the mix used for such patch repair shall be in
accordance with MORTH Clause 501.
Preparation of the area for pot-hole and patch repair: Each pot-hole and patch repair area shall be
inspected and all loose material removed. The area shall be cut/trimmed either with jack hammer or
hand tools like chisels, pick-axes etc., such that the area is in the shape of a rectangle or square. The
edges shall be cut vertically upto the level where the lower layer is stable without any loose
material. The area shall be thoroughly cleaned with compressed air or any appropriate method
approved by the Engineer-in-Charge to remove all dust and loose particles. The area shall be tacked
or primed with cutback or emulsion depending upon whether the lower layer is bituminous or
granular in nature. The sides, however, are to be painted with hot tack coat material using a brush.
The prime coat and tack coat shall conform to MORTH Clauses 502 to 503.
13.10.5 SEALING OF CRACKS WITH FOG SEALS

Scope : Fog seal shall consist of an application of emulsified bitumen, without any aggregate cover
for sealing fine hair-cracks like shrinkage cracks and alligator cracks or rejuvenating oxidised
bituminous surfaces. Areas having cracks with less than 3 mm width shall be considered for this
treatment.
Material: Bituminous emulsion for Fog Seal shall be of a slow setting type.
Application : The area to be applied with fog seal shall be thoroughly cleaned with compressed air,
scrubbers, etc. The cracks shall be cleaned with pressure air jet to remove all dirt, dust, etc. The fog
seal shall be applied at the rate of 0.5-1.0 litre/sq.m. using equipment like a pressure tank, flexible
hose and spraying bar or lance. Traffic shall be allowed on the surface after the seal has set to a
non-tacky and firm condition so that it is not picked up by the traffic.
Rate : The Contract unit rate for application of fog seal shall be in full compensation for :
supplying of fog seal material and all the operations for applying it; and
all the labour, tools, equipments and incidentals to complete the work in accordance with the
specification.
13.11 MISCELLANEOUS W ORKS

The contractor under this scope of work is also required to maintain the road in clean conditions,
which includes the cleaning of stones, fallen trees, dead animals etc.. as and when noticed by the
patrolling teams or as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.The pipe culverts and the other cross
drainage structures built or rehabilitated under the contract will be regularly inspected and suitable
cleaning, grading works will be done to maintain impounding near the structures. The structural
damages will be repaired or dismantled and re-constructed considering the extent of damage as per
directions of Engineer-in-Charge.
13.12 SUBSTATIONS:
• Routine and periodical checking of all equipments and structures installed at
switchyard to ensure their normal functioning.
• Regular cleaning of switchyard to ensure no growth of any kind of vegetation.
• Regular checking of oil levels in all types of transformers and to supplement as and
when required and the contractor to arrange oil filtration at his level whenever
required.
• To keep all joints leads, nut bolts in tightened position.
• To maintain all relays in healthy condition and to recalibrate in 3rd and 5th year.
• To maintain the required earthing level.

Pipe Line

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Pipe Line

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Pipe Line

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Chambal – Bhilwara Water Supply Project Phase II Balance work of RWSS of 213 Villages of Jahazpur & Kotri Tehsils

Tehsils & Jahazpur Town

Project Brief Tender Document Volume- II

Additional Chief Engineer (Project)

Page No. 1 (Signature of Tenderer with Seal)

Project Brief Tender Document Volume- II

Balance Work of Cluster Scheme of 213 Villages of Jahazpur and Kotri

2. 2 Scope of Work 22-91

3. 3 Specificationsfor Pipeline Work 92-175

4. 4 Specifications for Valves 176- 188

5. 5 Specifications for Civil Works 189-280

6. 6 Specifications for ESRs and CWRs 281-295

7. 7 Specifications for Pumping Stations (Mechanical & Civil 296-314

8. 8 Specificationsfor Electrical Works 315-343

9. 9 Specifications for Instrumentation 344-380

10. 10 Specifications for Ancillary Civil Works & Campus 381-388

11. 11 Pre-dispatch inspections 389-394

12. 12 Testing, commissioning & Trial run 395-409

13. 13 Specificationsfor O&M 410-417

Page No. 2 (Signature of Tenderer with Seal)

Project Brief Tender Document Volume- II

1.0 PROJECT BRIEF

Page No. 3 (Signature of Tenderer with Seal)

Project Brief Tender Document Volume- II

– Bhilwara Water Supply Project is framed to create infrastructure of the project

1.3 BRIEF PARTICULARS OF THIS PACKAGE

Project Brief Tender Document Volume- II

1.3.1 Population And Water Demand

Page No. 5 (Signature of Tenderer with Seal)

Project Brief Tender Document Volume- II

Name of Village Population Population Population Population Population Water Water

Page No. 6 (Signature of Tenderer with Seal)

Project Brief Tender Document Volume- II

Name of Village Population Population Population Population Population Water Water

Page No. 7 (Signature of Tenderer with Seal)

Project Brief Tender Document Volume- II

Name of Village Population Population Population Population Population Water Water

Page No. 8 (Signature of Tenderer with Seal)

Project Brief Tender Document Volume- II

Name of Village Population Population Population Population Population Water Water

1.3.1.2. Kotri Tehsil

Page No. 9 (Signature of Tenderer with Seal)

Project Brief Tender Document Volume- II

1 02896200 Jor 672 864 1132 1482 47.52 62.26

1.3.2 Design Criteria

Page No. 10 (Signature of Tenderer with Seal)

Project Brief Tender Document Volume- II

1.4 PROJECT COMPONENTS FOR RURAL SECTOR

Page No. 11 (Signature of Tenderer with Seal)

Project Brief Tender Document Volume- II

1.4.2 Transfer pumping/ Gravity Mains

Page No. 12 (Signature of Tenderer with Seal)

Project Brief Tender Document Volume- II

Work of CWRs already completed by M/s Pratibha Industried, Ltd

S.N. Description of work Unit No. or Qty of Executed

1 Construction of RCC Clear Water Reservoir

1.4.4 Cluster Pumping Mains

Work executed by M/s Pratibha Industries Ltd.

Pipe Approx. length in Total